KH2020 Sys Manual Nuc 3

SYSTEM HANDBOOK
for the
NUCLEUS 3 RADAR SYSTEMS
PUBLICATION KH 2020
Original
May 2001
Nucleus 3 Software Version 1.0x

ARPA 3 Software Version 4.x
KELVIN HUGHES
Kelvin Hughes Limited
New North Road, Hainault, Ilford, Essex IG6 2UR, UK
Telephone: +44 20 8500 1020
Facsimile: +44 20 8559 8526
Telex: 896401
www.kelvinhughes.com
www.smiths-aerospace.com
Registered Office:765 Finchley Road, London NW11 8DS

Incorporated in England No. 1030135
A part of Smiths Aerospace - Marine Systems VAT No: GB 226 6019 770 1
KH 2020
CONFORMITY STATEMENT
This system has been designed to comply with IMO regulations and IEC standards.
EQUIPMENT IMO REGULATION(S) IEC STANDARD(S)
Radar IMO A.477(XII) IEC 936.1988

MSC 64(67) Annex 4 IEC 60936-1
HSC Radar IMO A.820(19) IEC 60936-2
ARPA IMO A.422(XI) IEC 872-1987
IMO A. 823(19) IEC 60872-1
ATA MSC 64(67) Annex 4 IEC 60872-2
EPA MSC 64(67) Annex 4 IEC 60872-3
COPYRIGHT
ã Copyright Kelvin Hughes Ltd. 2001
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be

reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, translated or stored
in any form or by any means, without the written
permission of Kelvin Hughes Limited.
Technical details contained in this publication are subject to

change without notice.
Original ii May 01
KH 2020
AMENDMENT RECORD
When an amendment is incorporated into this handbook, the details should be recorded below. If the equipment
has been modified, the modification number is shown on the Amendment instruction page.
No. Date Inserted Initials Mod No. Date Inserted Initials Mod
No. No.
1 31
2 32
3 33
4 34
5 35
6 36
7 37
8 38
9 39
10 40
11 41
12 42
13 43
14 44
15 45
16 46
17 47
18 48
19 49
20 50
21 51
22 52
23 53
24 54
25 55
26 56
27 57
28 58
29 59
30 60
May 01 iii Original1

KH 2020
ELECTRIC SHOCK
RESUSCITATION
2
REMOVE OBVIOUS
1 SHOUT FOR HELP. SWITCH
OFF ELECTRICITY IF POSSIBLE. REMOVE FROM DANGER. 3 OBSTRUCTION TO
BREATHING.
Do this immediately. If not possible, don't waste time Safeguard yourself when removing casualty from hazard. If casualty is not breathing start
searching for a switch. If casualty is still in contact with electricity, and the supply resuscitation at once.
cannot be isolated, stand on a dry non-conducting
material (rubber mat, wood, linoleum).
Use rubber gloves, dry clothing, length of dry rope or wood
to pull or push casualty away from the hazard.
PINCH THE NOSE

LOOSEN NECKWARE COMMENCE VENTILATION IF CHEST DOES NOT RISE
TILT HEAD BACKWARDS FOUR GOOD INFLATIONS RE-CHECK AIRWAY. REMOVE
AND PUSH CHIN UPWARDS MOUTH TO MOUTH OBSTRUCTION AND RE-INFLATE
CHECK PULSE
POSITION OF PULSE
PULSE PRESENT PULSE ABSENT
HEART HAS STOPPED BEATING

LAY ON BACK ON FIRM SURFACE
eg FLOOR
COMMENCE EXTERNAL CHEST
COMPRESSION AND CONTINUE
MOUTH-TO-MOUTH VENTILATION
ONE FIRST AIDER
15 Compressions of 80 per
minute followed by two
inflations
CONTINUE INFLATIONS
UNTIL RECOVERY OF
NORMAL BREATHING TWO FIRST AIDERS
One conducts chest

compressions, without pause
at 60 per minute. The other
administers mouth-to-mouth
ventilation - after each 5th
compression
Check heart beat after first five

minutes and then after every three
mintutes. Continue external chest
compression and mouth-to-mouth
ventilation until a normal pulse is
WHEN NORMAL BREATHING COMMENCES
PLACE CASUALTY IN RECOVERY POSITION felt and colour improves
CONTINUE INFLATIONS
UNTIL RECOVERY OF
NORMAL BREATHING
Keep casualty at rest. Remove on a stretcher.

Watch closely, particularly for difficulty in
breathing. Lightly cover with blankets or other
materials.
MEDICAL ASSISTANCE MAY BE OBTAINED ON / AT...............................
Original iv May 01
KH 2020
SAFETY WARNINGS
CD-0845
WARNING
THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT FITTED WITH SAFETY INTERLOCKS. LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT
WHEN THE UNITS ARE OPEN AND EXPOSED. BEFORE REMOVING ANY SUB-UNIT OR PCB, ALL
SUPPLIES MUST BE SWITCHED OFF.
WARNING
ENSURE THAT THE DISPLAY IS SWITCHED OFF PRIOR TO CLEANING THE SCREEN. OTHERWISE
STATIC BUILD-UP MAY PRODUCE ELECTRICAL DISCHARGES WHICH, IN EXTREME CASES, COULD
BE HAZARDOUS.
CD-0844
WARNING
THIS EQUIPMENT CONTAINS MATERIALS WHICH PRODUCE TOXIC FUMES WHEN BURNT.
May 01 v Original1
KH 2020
SAFETY WARNINGS
ANTENNA RADIATION HAZARD

INJURY CAN RESULT FROM EXPOSURE TO THE MAIN BEAM OF A RADAR ANTENNA AT A DISTANCE FROM
THE CENTRAL FRONT FACE, OF LESS THAN:
1.3m (X-Band) Antenna: 3.0 metres

2.9m (S-Band) Antenna: 1.1 metres
3.9m (S-Band) Antenna: 0.8 metres
WARNING
DO NOT OPEN ANY OF THE EQUIPMENT UNITS WHEN THE RADAR IS OPERATIONAL.
ANTENNA ROTATION
ANTENNA ROTATION CAN BE HALTED BY SWITCHING THE DISPLAY TO STANDBY OR OFF.
SERVICING
THE EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE SERVICED BY AUTHORISED AGENTS ONLY.
May 01 vi Original
KH 2020
SAFETY WARNINGS
Mains Voltage
All Kelvin Hughes equipment is supplied with Mains Voltage set for 220V, unless stated otherwise on
labels attached to the equipment.
S-Band Tuning
It may be necessary to re-tune the transmitter when changing the pulse length.
Picture Freeze
The rare event of Processor failure is indicated by non-operation of the trackerball, no update of screen data and
a frozen tune bar indicator. The radar picture may be updated, but plotting is not possible.
The display is to be switched OFF and ON again to reset the Processor.
ARPA Failure
The ARPA computer is protected by a watchdog circuit, which monitors the ARPA for correct operation.
In the unlikely event of computer failure, the Operator observes vector footprints becoming detached from
targets. If this occurs, reset the computer, by pressing the “Delete All Targets” pushbutton twice.
If the ARPA fails while running, an ARPA FAILURE message is indicated. If the ARPA fails to start, a TESTING
ARPA message remains on the screen after the initial self-test period of 10 seconds.
Original vii May 01

KH 2020
ATTENTION!
OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS
FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVE
DEVICES
CAUTION
HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC-SENSITIVE SEMICONDUCTOR

DEVICES
Certain semiconductor devices used in the equipment are liable to damage due to
static voltage. Observe the following precautions when handling these devices in their
unterminated state, or sub-units containing these devices:
Persons removing sub-units from an equipment containing these devices must be

earthed by a wrist strap and a resistor at the point provided on the equipment.
Soldering irons used during the repair operations must be low voltage types with
earthed tips and isolated from the mains voltage by a double insulated transformer.
Outer clothing worn must be unable to generate static charges.
Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) fitted with these devices must be stored and transported
in anti-static bags.
Fit new devices in a special handling area.
For detailed information, refer to IEC Standard IEC 61340-5-1:1998 or other

equivalent standard.
Original viii May 01

KH 2010
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
ACQ Acquire RADAR Radio Detection And Ranging

ADS Adjust RAM Random Access Memory
AFC Automatic Frequency Control RATS Rate Aided Tracking System
ARPA Automatic Radar Plotting Aid RCGA Radar Control Gate Array
AUD Audible RIU Radar Interswitch Unit
RM(R) Relative Motion, Relative Trails
BCR Bow Crossing Range RM(T) Relative Motion, True Trails
BCT Bow Crossing Time Rx Receiver
BRG Bearing
SATNAV SATellite NAVigation
CPA Closest Point of Approach SC/SC Scan to Scan (Correlation)
CSE Course SLAB Serial Link Adapter Board
SP Short Pulse
DAC Digital to Analogue Converter STC Swept Time Constant
DIU Dual Interswitch Unit
TCPA Time to Closest Point of Approach
EBL Electronic Bearing Line TIU Transceiver Interface Unit
ENH Enhanced TM(T) True Motion, True Trails
EPA Electronic Plotting Aid TTL Transistor Transistor Logic
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Tx Transmitter
Memory
ERBL Electronic Range & Bearing Line VDU Video Display Unit
ESU Electronic Switch Unit VRM Variable Range Marker
EXT External
FTC Fast Time Constant
GCGA Graphics Control Gate Array

GPS Global Positioning System
HL Heading Line
IR Interference Rejection
LP Long Pulse
MINIM Minimum
MP Medium Pulse
NMEA National Maritime Equipment

Association
NT Night
PCB Printed Circuit Board

PI Parallel Index
PM Performance Monitor
PPI Plan Position Indicator
Oct 98 ix Issue 1
KH 2020
CONTENTS
Preliminary Pages
Title Page
Conformity & Copyright Page
Amendment Record Page
Electric Shock Resuscitation
Warning Pages
Caution Page
List of Abbreviations
Contents (this page)
INTRODUCTION
OPERATING INFORMATION
CHAPTER 1 - OPERATING INFORMATION
CHAPTER 2A - RADAR PLOTTING AIDS - EPA (As Required)

CHAPTER 2B - RADAR PLOTTING AIDS - ATA/ARPA (As Required)
CHAPTER 3 - INTERPRETING THE DISPLAY & SART OPERATION
INSTALLATION & COMMISSIONING

CHAPTER 4A - DISPLAY INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS
CHAPTER 4B - INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS - TRANSCEIVERS MKIV (As Required)
CHAPTER 4C - INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS - TRANSCEIVERS MKV (As Required)
CHAPTER 4D - INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS - TRANSCEIVERS MKVI (As Required)
CHAPTER 4E - INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS - TRANSCEIVERS MKVII S-Band (As Required)
CHAPTER 4F - INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS - TRANSCEIVERS MKVII X-Band (As Required)
CHAPTER 5 - DISPLAY COMMISSIONING & DEFAULT SETTINGS
MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE & DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM INFORMATION
CHAPTER 7A - MKIV TRANSMITTER/RECEIVERS & ANTENNA (As Required)
CHAPTER 7B - MKV TRANSMITTER/RECEIVERS & ANTENNA (As Required)
CHAPTER 7C - MKVI TRANSMITTER/RECEIVERS & ANTENNA (As Required)
CHAPTER 7D - MKVII TRANSMITTER/RECEIVERS & ANTENNA S-Band (As Required)
CHAPTER 7E - MKVII TRANSMITTER/RECEIVERS & ANTENNA X-Band (As Required)
CHAPTER 8A - SYSTEM OPTIONS (Where Fitted)

CHAPTER 8B - DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT (As Required)
CHAPTER 8C - FLAT PANEL DISPLAY (As Required)
CHAPTER 8D - TRANSMITTER INTERSWITCH UNIT (As Required)
CHAPTER 8E - RADAR INTERSWITCH UNIT (As Required)
CHAPTER 8F - ERGOPOD (As Required)
Record Pages
INSTALLATION RECORD
DEFAULT SETTINGS
Original x May 01
KH 2020
Introduction
INTRODUCTION
1 This section provides an introduction to the Nucleus 3 PLOTTING AIDS

Display systems.
11 Three types of radar plotting are available throughout
2 The Nucleus 3 Radar systems can be configured to the Nucleus 3 range;
suit customer requirements, according to the quantity
and types of display, transmitter/receiver and Interswitch (1) Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (ARPA) - offering
unit used. Typical configurations are shown on the Figures manual and automatic acquisition and automatic
at the end of this Introduction. tracking.
3 The comprehensive use of colour, provides an (2) Automatic Tracking Aid (ATA) - providing manual
optimum display of radar picture, selectable functions, acquisition and automatic tracking.
warnings, target information and Ownship navigation data.
(3) Electronic Plotting Aid (EPA) System - for manual
4 The Nucleus 3 5000 series equipment is designed for plotting.
use as a desk mounted display. It can also be mounted
on a pedestal base, for deck-mounting, if required. All 12 Radar Plotting Aids are described in Chapter 2.
electronics including the display driver, system processor,
interface and ARPA (if fitted) are accessed via a removable MAPPING
top panel.
5 The Nucleus 3 6000 series equipment is designed for 13 The mapping facility has a capacity of 350kbytes used
use as either a deck mounted Console or a desk in a flexible partition arrangement. Maps can be
mounted Display with a separate Processor cabinet. ground stabilised in any mode using a reference target, or by
Display driver electronics are accessed through a top panel, external position fixing systems (e.g. GPS).
whilst all other electronics including the system processor, 14 The maps are stored on internal non-volatile Flash
interface and ARPA (if fitted) are accessible via the front memory.
panel.
6 The Nucleus 3 7000 series equipment features a DISPLAY TYPES
range of remote Flat Panel display options designed
for either console or desktop mounting 15 The 5000, 6000 and 7000 series of displays provide
the following operational facilities:
OPERATION (1) 5/6/7000ARPA - Relative Motion RM(R) and True
Motion TM(T) and Relative Motion RM(T) modes
7 Nucleus 3 colour Radar Displays utilise a unique incorporate True Motion and ARPA (Automatic
method of operation. The entire operation of the radar Radar Plotting Aid) facilities.
(apart from power ON/OFF switching and degauss) is
controlled by using the trackerball and the three pushbutton (2) 5/6/7000ATA - Relative Motion RM(R), True
keys located on the specially designed ergonomic control Motion TM(T) and Relative Motion RM(T) modes
unit, featuring a contoured hand rest. incorporate True Motion facilities and an ATA
computer input (an Automatic Tracking Aid).
8 The operation of the Nucleus 3 range of radars is
designed to be simple and intuitive. A cursor is moved (3) 5/6/7000EPA - Relative Motion RM(R), True
by the trackerball inside and outside the radar circle. When Motion TM(T) and Relative Motion RM(T) (True
the cursor is moved to be within the confines of a ‘Status Box’ Trails) Presentation, incorporate True Motion
(located outside the radar circle) the box is automatically facilities and Electronic Plotting facilities.
highlighted; pop-down boxes provide abbreviated 16 Day/night operation is optimised by colour and
pushbutton functionality. Simultaneously, function options intensity.
are displayed as a labelled diagrammatic view of the three
pushbuttons in the ‘Pushbutton Selection Box’. The
functions are accessed by pressing the appropriate
pushbutton. The ‘Status Box’ changes to display the new
status and the cursor can then be moved back to the radar
circle or to another function box.
9 When the cursor is inside the radar circle, the three
buttons are used for plotting targets, positioning
markers and mapping graphics. A diagrammatic labelled
view of the pushbutton functionality is displayed in the
pushbutton selection box.
10 Detailed Operating Information is provided in
Chapter 1.
Original 1 May 01
KH 2020
Introduction
DISPLAY FACILITIES Variable Range Marker
17 For information on how to select any facility on the 24 The Variable Range Markers (VRM1 & VRM2) are
display, refer to Chapter 1 - Operating Information. shown on the radar display as dashed rings (colour
coded; Green for VRM1 and Red for VRM2) and are
Range Scales available over the entire radar range. The VRMs ranges are
displayed by an alphanumeric readout in a box (colour
18 The PPI range scales are: 0.125nm, 0.25nm, 0.5nm, coded; Green for VRM1 and Red for VRM2), located in the
0.75nm, 1.5nm, 3nm, 6nm, 12nm, 24nm, 48nm and lower left-hand side of the screen.
96nm.
Electronic Bearing Line
Screen Modes of Operation
25 The Electronic Bearing Lines (EBL1 & EBL2) are
19 The following modes of operation and presentation are shown on the radar display as lines colour coded;
available for selection, depending on the type of (Green for EBL1 and Red for EBL2), emanating from
display installed: Ownship. The EBLs are True in North Up display mode and
Relative in Head Up mode. The bearings of the EBLs are
(1) Relative Motion, displayed as an alphanumeric readout in a box (colour
Relative Trails RM(R) coded; Green for EBL1 and Red for EBL2), located beneath
the VRM box.
(2) True Motion, Motion
True Trails TM(T) Modes 26 The EBL can be off-centred and the origin set to the
cursor position. This enables measurement of the
(3) Relative Motion, bearing of a target from a point other than the Ownship.
True Trails RM(T)
(4) Head Up. Signal Controls - Gain, Sea, Rain
(5) North Up. Presentation
27 The Gain facility sets the basic threshold level of the
Modes radar video displayed on the screen. The Sea facility
(6) Course Up.
reduces sea clutter returns and features an "AUTO"
(automatic) option. The Rain facility reduces clutter from
Options (True Motion and Relative Motion with True rain, snow and hail precipitation.
Trails)
20 True Motion (True Trails), TM(T) is available - where Ownship and Plotting Parameters
Ownship moves across the screen at a velocity
equivalent to the Ownship’s speed and heading. 28 Ownship and Plotting parameters are displayed in a
box (located on the right-hand side of the screen)
21 Relative Motion (True Trails) mode offers relative which contains Gyro, Heading, Speed, Set & Drift Input,
motion, fixed centred or off-centred Ownship’s Vector, Trails, CPA and TCPA.
position, with true trails.
Target Data
Offcentre
29 Target data is displayed on demand, for any selected
22 The display can be offcentred by up to 70%, on all tracked target, in a box located beneath the Ownship
range scales, except 96nm. and Plotting parameter data box.
Heading Line Parallel Index Lines

23 The ship’s heading line and all other computer 30 Four colour-coded Parallel Index Lines are provided
generated graphics can be temporarily removed from to enable the operator to navigate in difficult areas
the radar display, to present the operator with a clear radar (e.g. an estuary). Each line is independent.
only picture.
May 01 2 Original
KH 2020
Introduction
OPTIONS SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
31 Refer to Chapter 8A for details of available Options.
41 The Nucleus 3 Display System can be configured in a
number of different ways.
RADAR PLOTTING AIDS
42 Typical configurations include:
Electronic Plotting Aid (EPA) (1) S i n g l e D i s p l a y unit with single
Transmitter/Receiver and Antenna.
32 The Electronic Plotting Aid (EPA) is a manual plotting
system equivalent to, but superior than, a reflection (2) T w o D i s p l a y u n i t s w i t h a single
plotter. Up to 20 targets can be plotted in all display modes. Transmitter/Receiver and Antenna.
EPA is fitted to all Relative and True Motion display systems.
(3) Two Display units interswitched with two
33 The operator manually selects and enters target plots, Transmitter/Receivers and Antennas.
and at regular intervals updates the plots by entering
the new position of the targets. 43 Some typical system configurations are shown in
Figures 1 to 10 on the following pages.
34 Refer to Chapter 2a for a full description of EPA
facilities. 44 As an Option, multiple Display units can be
interswitched with multiple Transmitter/Receivers and
Antennas. Information on Options is provided in Chapter 8.
Automatic Tracking Aid (ATA)
35 The Automatic Tracking Aid (ATA) is based on the
ARPA system and offers 20 target capacity. Trial
manoeuvre, target history and automatic acquisition are
excluded from the ATA facility. ATA performance is fully
compliant with IMO requirements.
36 The ATA utilises a computer which employs advanced
processing techniques to track targets automatically.
37 Refer to Chapter 2b for a full description of ATA
facilities.
Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (ARPA)

38 The Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (ARPA) facility
complies with and exceeds the IMO requirements for
an Automatic Radar Plotting aid. Up to 50 targets can be
acquired (automatically or manually) and tracked.
39 The ARPA includes Simulations and Trial
Manoeuvres.
40 Refer to Chapter 2b for a full description of ARPA
facilities.
Original 3 May 01
KH 2020
Introduction
DISPLAY SYSTEM SPECIFICATION
The following table contains a Summary of Data for all Nucleus 3 Displays
5000 Series 6000 Series 7000 Series

Display 500mm rectangular colour CRT with B22 phosphor. *
660mm rectangular colour CRT with B22 phosphor. *
18-inch TFT LCD Colour Flat Panel *

20-inch TFT LCD Colour Flat Panel *
Low flicker raster presentation 1024 line, 80Hz interlaced. * *

*
250mm radar diameter radar field
*
340mm radar diameter radar field *
Zoned operational data/control fields. * * *

Active picture size: 1360x1024 pixels.
* *
(Radar 1024x1024 pixels).
Activ e picture size:1280x1024 pixels. *

(Radar 1024x1024 pixels)
Display controls minimised by use of a trackerball and three * * *

pushbuttons.
Day/Night operation optimised by colour selection. * * *
Degauss facility. * *
Video Processing Re-timed processed multi-level video. Multi-plane recycled

raster memory. Manual/Auto selectable STC, interference * * *
rejection, target enhancement and scan correlation.
Target Trails Relative and True Target Trails
variable 0.75, 1.5, 3 and then 3 minute steps to 99 minutes. * * *
Range Range Range Pulse
Scales/Rings and Scale Rings Length
Pulse Lengths (Nautical Miles) (Nautical Miles) (PL Option) * * *
0.0125 0.25 Short
0.25 0.05 Short
0.5 0.1 Short
0.75 0.25 Short (medium)
1.5 0.25 Short (medium)
3.0 0.5 Medium
(long/short)
6.0 1 Medium
(long/short)
12.0 2 Medium
(long/short)
24.0 4 Medium
(long/short)
48.0 8 Long (medium)
96.0 16 Long
Motion Modes Relative Motion RM(R), True Motion TM(T) and Relative * * *
Motion RM(T),
Presentation Head Up / North Up/ Course Up. * * *
Modes
Gyro Input All types stepper, synchro, “M” type with 90:1, 180:1 and * * *
360:1 ratios.
IEC 1162-2 High Speed Serial Gyro Interface.
May 01 4 Original
KH 2020
Introduction

Speed Input Single Axis 100, 200, 400, Pulses/nm, Manual, VHW, VBW, * * *
VTG
Fixed Track Target
VTG from GPS
VBW from Doppler Log.
Drift Input Manual: 0-99.9kts, derived from VTG, VBW * * *
Range Data Minimum Range: Better than 30m on 10m2 target with *
short pulse, 4.5m aerial height and
4.5m waveguide. * * *
Range
Discrimination: Better than 30m on 0.75 scale
* * *
Range Ring
Accuracy: 1% of range scale in use or 10m,
whichever is greater. * * *
Lat/Lon Readout of Ownship’s lat/lon and cursor range/ bearing

and lat/lon. * * *
Range Variable Range

Markers (1 & 2): VRMs 1 & 2 variable from 0.01 to 96nm * * *
displayed on screen.
Bearing Data Bearing Scale: Electronically generated 1°, 5°, and

10° from 0° - 359.9°. * * *
Electronic Bearing
Lines (EBL1& 2): (EBLs) Variable in 0.1° increments.
* * *
Accuracy ± 0.5°. Centred or Offcentred.
Parallel Index: Four Navigation Lines.

* * *
Mapping Facilities 350Kbytes internal memory * * *
* * *
4 user options of line and 16 symbol types.
5 Map colours * * *
True Map positioning facility, via position fixing input from * * *

GPS.
Power Supplies 110V nominal, 220V nominal (50-60Hz) - Single Phase.

115/380/440V 3 phase with optional transformer. * * *
Display power source for 10kW MkIV transceivers with up

* * *
to 60m display/transceiver separation.
Power corruption protected default parameters. * * *
Original 5 May 01
KH 2020
Introduction

Interfacing: Standard: - Diagnostic Output (RS232) * * *
4 x NMEA Input (RS422/RS232) * * *
1 x NMEA Output RS422 * * *

3 x NMEA Output RS232 * * *
Serial Trackerball Input * * *
PS/2 Trackerball input * * *
Inputs: NMEA 0183/ IEC 61162-1 E2: * * *

DPT (depth) * * *
GGA, GLL (position) * * *
HDT (heading) * * *
RNN, RTE (route)
* * *
VHW (water speed)
* * *
VBW (ground/water speed)
VTG (ground speed/heading) * * *
WPL (waypoints) * * *
ZDA, ZZU (UTC) * * *
* * *
Outputs: OSD (Ownship data) * * *

TTM, TGT (Target data) * * *
RSD (Radar System data) * * *
Standard Azimuth Interface, 90:1, 180:1,

* * *
10V - 150V amplitude or 4096 TTL.
Remote Monitor up to 20m separation (daisy chain). * * *
Transceiver - Full operation with Series 1, MkIV/V/VI

transceivers 5/10/25kW, “X” and “S” band. * * *
Display / Transceiver Separation - Up to 60 metres

standard. * * *
Power Supply - Capable of providing power for 5kW/10kW
upmast transceivers and aerials.
* * *
VDR Video Output * * *
May 01 6 Original
KH 2020
Introduction

Mechanical Construction: Aluminium fabricated sheet metal. * * *
Mounting: Deck-Mount (Pedestal) *
Desk-Mount *
Split Display *
Custom Console *
Viewing Angle: 34 degrees to vertical * *

80 degrees (typical) to vertical and *
horizontal
Orientation: Landscape * * *
Display Size: Height: 399.5mm (18-inch) *
450.6mm (20.1-inch) *
480mm *
1200mm *
Width: 482mm (18-inch) *

533.8mm (20.1-inch) *
520mm *
682mm *
Depth: 77.47mm (18-inch) *

76.8mm (20.1-inch) *
776mm *
820mm. *
Configuration: Display Unit with Separate Processor * *

Display Unit with Integral Processor. * *
Cooling: Fan re-circulated cooling. * * *
Electrostatic
Damage: Provision for wrist strap point. * * *
Environmental: To IEC 945-3
Ergonomic design to ISO * * *
recommendations
Paint: Colour: two tone grey, with durable * * *
finish.
Cables: Individually clamped at entry.
Cable entries to allow for rear or bottom * * *
entry.
Provision for earthing bolt.

* * *
Original 7 May 01
KH 2020
Introduction
X BAND ANTENNA
KELVIN HUGHES
Tx MONITOR UPMAST Tx
SIGNAL CABLE
GPS
LOG
GYRO 110/220V
CD-2111
Figure 1 - Single Display with single Upmast Transmitter/Receiver and Antenna.
X BAND ANTENNA
KELVIN HUGHES
Tx MONITOR TURNING MECH
SIGNAL & POWER WAVEGUIDE

CABLE
25kW
X BAND
TRANSMITTER
12-CORE COMPOSITE CABLE

(SIGNAL & POWER)
NUCLEUS
6000
DISPLAY
GPS (OPTION)
LOG
GYRO
110/220V
CD-4614
Figure 2 - Single Display with Single Downmast Transmitter/Receiver and Antenna
May 01 8 Original
KH 2020
Introduction
S BAND ANTENNA
X BAND ANTENNA
KELVIN HUGHES
KELVIN HUGHES
25kW UPMAST Tx/Rx Tx MONITOR

Tx MONITOR UPMAST Tx/Rx
SIGNAL CABLE ANTENNA POWER CABLE

110/220V MAINS
38-CORE CABLE 38-CORE CABLE ANTENNA POWER

SOFT
(SIGNAL & POWER) RADAR (SIGNAL & POWER) START 220/440V 3 PHASE
INTERSWITCH UNIT
UNIT
12-CORE COMPOSITE CABLE 12-CORE COMPOSITE CABLE

(SIGNAL & POWER) (SIGNAL & POWER)
GPS (OPTION) GPS (OPTION)
LOG 110/220V LOG 110/220V
GYRO GYRO
CD-4618
Figure 3- Two Displays interswitched (via RIU) with Two Upmast Transmitter/Receivers and Antenna
X BAND ANTENNA
KELVIN HUGHES
OPTIONAL 10kW X BAND

Tx MONITOR TRANSCEIVER
SIGNAL CABLE
DUAL SYSTEM
INTERSWITCH
UNIT
LOG
SIGNAL CABLE SIGNAL CABLE LOG
GYRO
POWER CABLE POWER CABLE GYRO
GPS
GPS
110/220V
110/220V
KELVIN HUGHES KELVIN HUGHES
nucleus2 nucleus2
5000A 5000A
CD-4615
Figure 4 - Two Displays Interswitched (via a DIU) with a Single Transmitter/Receiver and Antenna
Original 9 May 01
KH 2020
Introduction
S BAND ANTENNA
X BAND ANTENNA
KELVIN HUGHES
KELVIN HUGHES
25kW UPMAST Tx/Rx Tx MONITOR

Tx MONITOR UPMAST Tx/Rx
SIGNAL CABLE ANTENNA POWER CABLE
SIGNAL CABLE SIGNAL CABLE ANTENNA POWER

SOFT
DUAL SYSTEM START 220/440V 3 PHASE
INTERSWITCH UNIT
POWER CABLE POWER CABLE
UNIT
SIGNAL CABLE SIGNAL CABLE

GPS (OPTION) GPS (OPTION)
LOG 110/220V LOG 110/220V
GYRO GYRO
CD-4616
Figure 5 - Two Displays Interswitched (via a DIU) with two Upmast Transmitter/Receivers and Antenna
X BAND ANTENNA S BAND ANTENNA

Tx MONITOR TURNING MECH Tx MONITOR TURNING MECH
WAVEGUIDE AERIAL POWER SIGNAL CABLE

SIGNAL & POWER
CABLE
CABLE
‘FLEXWELL’
CO-AX
AERIAL POWER
220/440V 3 PHASE
X BAND SIGNAL CABLE SIGNAL CABLE SOFT N S BAND

TRANSMITTER START TRANSMITTER
DUAL SYSTEM UNIT
POWER CABLE INTERSWITCH POWER CABLE
UNIT

GPS GPS
LOG LOG
GYRO 380/440V GYRO 380/440V

3 PHASE TRANSFORMER (INSIDE) 3 PHASE TRANSFORMER (INSIDE)
CD-2105
Figure 6 - Two Displays Interswitched (via DIU) with Two Downmast Transmitter/Receivers and Antenna
May 01 10 Original
KH 2020
Introduction
S BAND ANTENNA
KELVIN HUGHES
Rx MONITOR TURNING
MECH
SIGNAL CABLE ‘FLEXWELL’

CO-AX
TRANSMITTER
S BAND
TRANSMITTER
AERIAL
POWER CABLE SOFT AERIAL POWER
START 440V 3 PHASE CO-AX
CONTROL CABLE UNIT
SIGNAL CABLE
POWER CABLE
BUFFER
24V SUPPLY AMP
CO-AX
CO-AX 3rd PARTY

H L & AZIMUTH (2 PHASE) RADAR
DISPLAY
LOG ADDITIONAL UNIT

MASTER/SLAVE UNIT
GYRO
220 / 110V
CD-2108
Figure 7 - Single Display with Single Transmitter/Receiver and Antenna, interfaced with Third Party Equipment
S BAND HIGH SPEED ANTENNA

X BAND HIGH SPEED ANTENNA
TX MONITOR HSC 10kW UPMAST Tx/Rx
HSC 30kW UPMAST Tx/Rx
TX MONITOR
38-CORE
CABLE
AERIAL POWER CABLE
TRANSMITTER
INTERFACE
UNIT
SIGNAL CABLE
AERIAL POWER 220/440V AC

RADAR 3 PHASE CABLE
NUC SOFT NUC
LEUS INTERSWITCH POWER CABLE START LEUS
7000 UNIT UNIT 7000
DISP 12-CORE COMPOSITE CABLE & POWER SIGNAL CABLE
LAY DISP
LAY
POWER CABLE
SIGNAL CABLE
POWER CABLE
SIGNAL CABLE
REMOTE REMOTE
TRACKERBALL TRACKERBALL
KELVIN HUGHES SEHGUH NIVLEK
12-CORE COMPOSITE CABLE & POWER 12-CORE COMPOSITE CABLE & POWER
NUCLEUS NUCLEUS
SPLIT PROCESSOR SPLIT PROCESSOR
LOG LOG
GYRO GYRO
DGPS DGPS
POWER CABLE
POWER CABLE
RADAR RADAR
ON-OFF ON-OFF
NUCLEUS 7000 DISPLAY NUCLEUS DISPLAY

ON-OFF SOUNDER ON-OFF SOUNDER
220VAC 220VAC
CD-4842
Figure 8 - Two Flat Panel Displays interswitched (via an RIU) with Two Upmast Transmitter/Receivers and Antenna
Original 11 May 01
KH 2020
Introduction
S BAND HIGH SPEED ANTENNA
X BAND HIGH SPEED ANTENNA

HSC 10kW UPMAST Tx/Rx
TX MONITOR HSC 30kW UPMAST Tx/Rx
TX MONITOR
TRANSMITTER
AERIAL POWER CABLE

INTERFACE
UNIT
SIGNAL CABLE
SIGNAL CABLE AERIAL POWER 220/440V AC
3 PHASE CABLE SOFT
START
NUC DUAL SYSTEM UNIT
LEUS INTERSWITCH POWER CABLE NUC
7000 SIGNAL CABLE LEUS
DISP UNIT 7000
LAY DISP
SIGNAL CABLE LAY
POWER CABLE
40V MOTOR
POWER UNIT
(CZZ-A22)
POWER CABLE
SIGNAL CABLE
REMOTE REMOTE
POWER CABLE
SIGNAL CABLE
TRACKERBALL TRACKERBALL
KELVIN HUGHES SEHGUH NIVLEK
NUCLEUS NUCLEUS
SPLIT PROCESSOR SPLIT PROCESSOR
LOG LOG
GYRO GYRO
DGPS DGPS
POWER CABLE
POWER CABLE
RADAR RADAR
ON-OFF ON-OFF
NUCLEUS 7000 DISPLAY NUCLEUS DISPLAY

ON-OFF SOUNDER ON-OFF SOUNDER
220VAC 220VAC
CD-4841
Figure 9 - Two Flat Panel Displays Interswitched (via a DIU) with Two Upmast Transmitter/Receivers and Antenna
May 01 12 Original
KH 2020
Introduction Index Range Data 5

Range Scales 2
Relative Motion (True Trails) 2
A
Relative Motion RM(R) 1
ARPA 1,3 Relative Motion RM(T) 1
ATA 3
Automatic Radar Plotting Aid 3 S
Automatic Tracking Aid (ATA) 3 Screen Modes of Operation 2
Sea 2
B
Signal Controls - Gain, Sea, Rain 2
Bearing Data 5 Speed Input 5
System Configurations 3
D
DISPLAY FACILITIES 2 T
Display System Specification 4 Target Data 2
Display Types 1 Target Trails 4
Drift Input 5 True Motion (True Trails) 2
True Motion TM(T) 1
E
EBL 2 V
Electronic Bearing Line 2 Variable Range Marker 2
Electronic Plotting Aid (EPA) 3 Video Processing 4
G
Gain 2
Gyro Input 4
H
Heading Line 2
I
Interfacing: 6
M
Mapping 1
Mapping Facilities 5
O
Offcentre 2
Operation 1
OPTIONS 3
Options (True Motion and Relative Motion with True Trails)
2
Ownship and Plotting Parameters 2
P
Parallel Index Lines 2
PLOTTING AIDS 1
Plotting Parameters 2
Power Supplies 5
Presentation Modes 4
R
Radar Plotting Aids 3
Rain 2
Range 4
Range Scales/Rings and Pulse Lengths 4
Original 13 May 01
KH 2010
Record Pages
INSTALLATION RECORD
TO BE COMPLETED ON INSTALLATION
NAME OF VESSEL: ..................................................................................
DISPLAY TYPE (1) : Nucleus 3 ................................ SERIAL. NO. ....................
ANTENNA TYPE (1) : ............................................ SERIAL. NO. ....................
TX TYPE (1) : ............................................ SERIAL. NO. ....................
TX TYPE (2) : ............................................ SERIAL. NO. ....................
TX TYPE (3) : ............................................ SERIAL. NO. ....................
TX TYPE (4) : ............................................ SERIAL. NO. ....................
TX TYPE (5) : ............................................ SERIAL. NO. ....................
TX TYPE (6) : ............................................ SERIAL. NO. ....................
RAD 1 : ....................................................
RAD 2 : ....................................................
HL 1 SKEW : ....................................................
Issue 1 1 Oct 98
KH 2010
Record Pages
HL 2 SKEW : ....................................................
LOG TYPE : ....................................................
GYRO TYPE : ....................................................
MAINS SUPPLY : ...................... VOLTS : .............. PHASE : .............. FREQ.

MONITOR
PERFORMANCE MONITOR:
TX : ........................................ nm
RX : ........................................ nm
INSTALLATION ENGINEER : ...............................................................
DATE : ...............................................................
LOCATION : ...............................................................
Oct 98 2 Issue 1
KH 2010
Record Pages
DEFAULT SETTINGS
FACTORY RANGE CUSTOMER

SETTINGS SETTINGS
RANGE 6nm 0.25 - 96nm
RINGS (ON/OFF) ON ON/OFF
EBL1/EBL2 OFF ON/OFF
VRM1/VRM2 OFF ON/OFF
VECTOR TIME 15min 1 - 30min
VECTOR MODE NORM NORM/NORM

REVERSED
DAY/NIGHT DAY DAY/NIGHT
TRAILS ON/OFF ON ON/OFF
TRAILS TIME 3min 0.75 - 99min
AZIMUTH MODE N. UP N. UP/C. UP/

HEAD UP
MEDIUM PULSE 3nm Not Adjustable
LONG PULSE 48nm Not Adjustable
PULSE STATUS Normal Down/Normal/

Up
HISTORY OFF ON/OFF
STABILISATION EXT SEA/MANUAL/EXT
MOTION MODE RELATIVE R, T or CD
SEA CONTROL 0 0 - 9 or A
RAIN CONTROL 0 0-9
Issue 1 3 Oct 98
KH 2010
Record Pages

SETTINGS SETTINGS
GAIN CONTROL 6.5 0-9
CURSOR MODE Range/Bearing Range/Bearing

or TCPA
CURSOR PARKING LOW LOW/HIGH
ENHANCE NORM NORM/ENH
CORRELATION IR OFF, IR or SC/SC
CPA 1nm 0.1 - 6nm
TCPA 15min 1 - 60min
CONTRAST 2/3 of Setting 0 to Maximum
BRILLIANCE 1/3 of Setting 0 to Maximum
LEVELS Maximum 0 to Maximum
SPEED INPUT LOG LOG, Man or Dop
Oct 98 4 Issue 1
KH 2020
Contents
INTRODUCTION
Contents
•
CONFORMITY STATEMENT ii
• COPYRIGHT ii
• AMENDMENT RECORD iii
• SAFETY WARNINGS v
• SAFETY WARNINGS vi
•
SAFETY WARNINGS vii
• CAUTION viii
• Handling of Electrostatic-sensitive Semiconductor

Devices viii
•
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS ix
• INTRODUCTION x
• OPERATING INFORMATION x
• INSTALLATION & COMMISSIONING x
• MAINTENANCE x
• SYSTEM INFORMATION x
• Operation 1
• Plotting Aids 1
• Mapping 1
• Display Types 1
• Display Facilities 2
• OPTIONS 3
• Radar Plotting Aids 3
• System Configurations 3
• Display System Specification 4
Original 1 May 01
KH 2020
Contents
Illustrations
• Figure 1 - Single Display with single Upmast Transmitter/Receiver and Antenna. 8
• Figure 2 - Single Display with Single Downmast Transmitter/Receiver and Antenna 8
• Figure 3- Two Displays interswitched (via RIU) with Two Upmast

Transmitter/Receivers and Antenna 9
• Figure 4 - Two Displays Interswitched (via a DIU) with a Single

Transmitter/Receiver and Antenna 9
• Figure 5 - Two Displays Interswitched (via a DIU) with two Upmast

• Figure 6 - Two Displays Interswitched (via DIU) with Two Downmast

• Figure 7 - Single Display with Single Transmitter/Receiver and Antenna,

interfaced with Third Party Equipment 11
• Figure 8 - Two Flat Panel Displays interswitched (via an RIU) with Two Upmast
• Figure 9 - Two Flat Panel Displays Interswitched (via a DIU) with Two Upmast
May 01 2 Original
KH 2020
Chap 1
CHAPTER 1
NUCLEUS 3 DISPLAYS - OPERATING INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION NUCLEUS 5000/6000 DISPLAYS
1 How to start the Nucleus 3 Display is described in Controls

Getting Started below.
7 Nucleus 3 includes an ergonomically designed control
2 There are three types of Nucleus 3 displays available; unit, which features a contoured hand rest, trackerball
5000 series, 6000 series and 7000 series. Both the and three pushbuttons.
5000 and 6000 series displays are consoles including a
CRT. The 7000 series displays comprise a Flat Panel LCD NOTE:
display, which is used in conjunction with a split processor The Nucleus 3 displays can also be controlled using an
unit, a Remote trackerball and a display ON/Off sounder Ergopod (optional). For information on the Ergopod, refer
unit. (For further information on the Flat Panel Displays, refer to Chapter 8 - Options.
to Chapter 8c). 8 The facilities available on the radar display screen are
3 Nucleus 3 displays can be fitted in a single radar selected by using the trackerball and pushbuttons, as
configuration, or interswitched in a dual/multiple described in the following paragraphs.
system (X and S band) configuration and are available as 9 The location of controls on the 5000 and 6000 series
standard or high speed variants. The displays are designed display types are shown in Figures 1a and 1b below.
to be desk, console or deck mounted.
4 Comprehensive mapping and navigational facilities Trackerball
are provided. Extensive interfacing permits integration 10 The trackerball is used to position the cursor on the
with multiple ship sensors and use as part of an integrated screen, near to, or on the function to be activated and
bridge or navigation system. to change parameters once a function is activated.
5 Nucleus 3 radar systems are fully compliant with IMO
requirements. Cursor
6 The Nucleus 3 displays feature three radar plotting aid 11 The cursor is shown on screen inside the radar
options: display area as a marker (+) and is shown as an arrow
( ) outside the radar display area.
(1) ARPA - Automatic Radar Plotting Aid.
12 When a function is selected, the cursor is repositioned
(2) ATA - Automatic Tracking Aid. and is shown as a box ( ) on the selected function
(3) EPA - Manual Electronic Plotting Aid. inside the radar display area.
13 Positioning of the cursor is also displayed (in terms of
range and bearing) on the lower, right-hand side of the
screen. The operator can change the cursor mode to
indicate TCPA, LAT/LON or RANGE-BEARING within the
radar area.
CURSOR INSIDE CIRCLE

CURSOR OUTSIDE CIRCLE
RADAR CIRCLE
RADAR CIRCLE
NUCLEUS 3 5000
KELVIN HUGHES
PUSHBUTTONS
6000
NUCLEUS 3
PUSHBUTTONS DEGAUSS
O
O
I
I
ON/OFF
ON/OFF DEGAUSS TRACKERBALL TRACKERBALL

CD-4699
CD-4698
Figure 1a - 5000 Displays (Controls)
Figure 1b - 6000 Displays (Controls)
Original 1.1 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 1
Pushbuttons Power ON/OFF

14 Pushbuttons are used to activate/select a particular
function. On-screen guidance as to which button to CAUTION
press is given in the Information Boxes located in the lower Before switching on, make sure that the radar
centre portion of the display. The information boxes, when scanner is clear and that no maintenance work is
first displayed, after going to ‘Run’ from standby, show: being implemented.
Nucleus 5000/6000 Displays
ACQ Select ERBL
18 The 5000/6000 display is switched on using the
ON/OFF switch, which is located on the left-hand side
CD-2469
of the Screen Control Unit (SCU). Two short beeps sound, to
15 indicate that all systems are functioning correctly. After a
When a function is selected (e.g. Range/Rings) the few seconds, the standby screen is displayed.
Information box displays similar data to that in the
pop-down (information) boxes which appear below the Nucleus 7000 Displays
selected function box. If all pushbutton activities are the 19 The 7000 display is switched on using the RADAR
same, a red box appears on the display containing the ON/OFF switch, which is located on the front of the
legend: On/Off Sounder unit. (Refer to Chapter 8c for information on
the On/Off Sounder Unit). The Power Indicator illuminates to
indicate that power is present at the display and two short
USE ANY KEY beeps sound, at the On/Off Sounder unit, to indicate that all
systems are functioning correctly. After a few seconds, the
CD-1964 standby screen is displayed.
16
A facility which has been previously activated, such as Screen Illumination
EBL, is re-selected by positioning the cursor in close
proximity to the required facility and pressing the centre 20 The adjustment of Day/Night, brilliance and contrast
pushbutton. levels and Audible (AUD) alarm on/off are available
upon selection of the VDU box, displayed in the bottom
right-hand of the screen.
NUCLEUS 7000 DISPLAYS
21 At any time, pressing all 3 pushbuttons (on the SCU
17 Refer to Chapter 8c for Operating Information for 5000/6000 displays or on the Remote Trackerball
concerning the Flat Panel Displays. for 7000 displays) simultaneously increases the VDU
brilliance and contrast.
Degauss
22 Colour tones on raster type displays may be adversely
affected by changing magnetic fields. If the colour is
degrading, press the DEGAUSS pushbutton, located on the
right-hand side of the SCU (5000/6000 displays), to restore
the display to normal.
May 01 1.2 Original

KH 2020
Chap 1
COLOURS Inside the Radar Circle Only

23 The display colours are divided into three main groups 25 The colours used Inside the Radar circle only are:
as follows:
(1) Blue — Radar background (Day Mode).
(1) Inside and Outside the Radar circle.
(2) Red — WayPoints, Exclusive Sectors, Polyzones
(2) Inside the Radar circle only. & Routes
(3) The Radar colours. (3) Green — Heading Line, Guard Zones.
(4) Dark Grey — Range Rings.
Inside and Outside the Radar Circle
(5) Yellow — Radar Video.
24 The colours used Inside and Outside the RADAR
circle are: (6) Cyan — Ownship Vector & Inclusive Sectors.
(1) Grey/Blue — Screen Background. (7) Magenta — Plots, Plot Labels.
(2) Red — Warnings, Electronic Bearing Line 2, (8) White — Map Features.
Variable Range Marker 2, .
The Radar Colours
(3) Green — Cursor/Measure, Electronic Bearing
Line 1, Variable Range Marker 1. 26 The colours used for Radar returns are:
(4) Navy Blue — Box background (Functions). (1) Sepia — Dim (weak).
(5) Grey — Pop-down box background, box (2) Ochre — Medium.
background (Information).
(3) Yellow — Strong.
(6) Cyan — Bearing scale, bottom/right box outline &
pop-down box outline. (4) Dark Grey — Old trails.
(7) Royal Blue — Highlight box. (5) Medium Grey — Medium trails.
(8) White — Text. (6) Light Grey — New trails.
Day/Night Operation
27 The Background colour of the Display Screen and
Radar Circle change to Black when Night operation is
selected. All other colours are darkened.
CD-4725
Original 1.3 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 1
RADAR SYSTEM & STANDBY/RUN
Function
Run
28 The selected radar information is displayed on the
screen and all functions are available for selection.
(See Figure 2).
Standby
29 The display starts up in the standby condition. No
radar is displayed. The ARPA screens contain a set of
instruction boxes, as shown in Figure 3 below.
EPA screens contain [GO TO TEST] instead of [GO
TO SIM].
NOTE: CD-4727
The ‘TX IS (NOT) READY’ box, is only available if the Figure 3 - Standby Screen (with Interswitch & ARPA)
Radar is Master.
Cursor Positioning and Initial Pushbutton Facilities

after selecting RUN
33 The cursor defaults to a particular (PARK) position
and the initial Information Boxes are different
depending upon whether GO TO RUN is selected after
switching the system ON or selecting RUN, for the second
time, via the standby screen.
34 After switching the system ON a dialogue box
appears:
RADAR HAS BEEN OFF. CHECK YOUR GYRO
CD-1968
CD-4726 35 On entering RUN mode for the first time, if Land Mode
is selected, the cursor is positioned over the GYRO
Figure 2 - Standby Screen (No Interswitch, ARPA) box (top right of screen) ready for any amendment to the
heading shown. If Sea Mode is selected, an Align Heading
to Ownship Heading screen will be displayed.
Selection
36 If adjustment is required, press both left and right
30 To change the operational state of the system to Run: pushbuttons, and, whilst maintaining pressure on the
buttons move the trackerball - the GYRO reading
(1) Press any pushbutton (all pushbuttons turn the increases/decreases.
selected function on/off).
37 If the cursor is outside the radar circle, after 30
NOTE: seconds of trackerball/pushbutton inactivity, the
On switch-on, or when returning to Standby screen, the cursor defaults to the park position (set in the Default menu)
cursor is located in the RUN box. and the pushbutton information boxes show
31 To change the operational state of the system from Vector Reset Reset
Run to Standby, highlight the TX box and press the Mode Alarms Centre
centre pushbutton.
32 To select the Radar System if more than one is
CD-1 9 6 9
installed, highlight the TX box, press the left-hand

pushbutton. 38 After selecting GO TO RUN from the standby screen,
the cursor is positioned in the centre of the radar circle
and the pushbutton information boxes show:
Reset
ACQ Select
Centre
CD-2475
May 01 1.4 Original

KH 2020
Chap 1
FUNCTIONS - STANDBY MENUS WARNING SET UP SCREEN

40 Allows the operator to change the settings for the
39 The system setup menus can be displayed on screen warning alarm messages displayed. Warning
as follows: messages can be Switched ON or OFF, set to Timeout or to
be Confirmed by the operator.
(1) If in RUN mode, place the cursor over the TXA box
at the top-left of the screen. A pop-down
information box appears, as below:
SBY
CD-2 0 2 6
(2) Press the centre pushbutton to enter the standby

mode, then place the cursor over the GO TO
MENUS box and press any pushbutton, the
following menu appears:
CD-4729
NOTE:
Refer to Chapter 5 - Commissioning, for information on
CD-4728 Levels and Default Settings.
SYSTEM WARNING ALARM

41 If the system develops a fault the System Warning
alarm is displayed, as shown below, together with
details of the fault condition.
CD-4730
Original 1.5 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 1
GO TO TEST 47 There are three modes of time-keeping, UTC

(Universal Time Constant), UTC Adjusted and Local
42 This is a maintenance feature and is not available for Time. UTC Adjusted and standard UTC are modes which
operator use. Refer to Chapter 5 - Commissioning, for use the time transmitted by satellite. The UTC Adjusted time
information. is the received UTC adjusted by the value set in the UTC
Deviation box. For example, if the UTC Deviation is set to
+1.00 hours then when the received UTC is 1300 hours, the
TEST CARD 1 time displayed by the radar system is shown as 1200 hours.
The Local Time mode provides the local time which is
43 This is a maintenance feature and is not available for automatically adjusted when passing through a time zone.
operator use. Refer to Chapter 5 - Commissioning, for
information. 48 To change the selected time-keeping method:
(1) Place the cursor over the CLOCK TYPE box. A
CRT TEST pop-down information box appears, as below:
44 This is a maintenance feature and is not available for
operator use. Refer to Chapter 5 - Commissioning, for
information.
CD-4732
CLOCK SETUP
45 The clock is used for references to the time. This (2) Press and hold down any pushbutton, you can flip
facility is only available if the radar system is receiving through the options by moving the trackerball.
a ZDA message. To edit the clock setup: When the required option is selected release the
pushbutton.
(1) Place the cursor over the TXA box at the top-left of
the screen. A pop-down information box appears, (3) The same method of adjustment is applied with
as for the Printer Setup, press the centre the ‘UTC Deviation (n) hours’ box, with a range
pushbutton to put the system into standby mode. from - 13 to +13 hours onto the given time.
(2) In the standby mode, placing the cursor over the (4) To exit from the menu, place the cursor over the
GO TO MENUS box and select by pressing any EXIT box and press any pushbutton.
pushbutton.
(3) In the next menu placing the cursor over the
CLOCK SETUP box and select by pressing any
pushbutton, the following menu appears:
CD-4731
46 In the clock setup menu the method of time-keeping

that the radar uses is defined and the time can also be
offset to allow for different time zones.
May 01 1.6 Original

KH 2020
Chap 1
COMMS SETUP MENU SCREEN 54 The Baud Rate Setup Screen can be accessed from
the Comms Setup Menu Screen, by selecting
49 Allows the operator to adjust the settings for the Four BAUDRATES. This displays the BAUD RATE SETUP
NMEA Serial Input Message Communications Ports. Screen, as shown below.
50 Each of the following input message types can be
received on one or more of the 4 serial input comms Baud Rates Setup Screen
ports:
55 Allows the operator to set the transmit and receive
baud rates for each of the comms ports.
DPT, GGA, GLL, HDT, RNN, RTE, VBW, VHW, VTG, WPL,
ZDA, ZZU. 56 Each port can be set to transmit and receive messages
at a different Baud Rate, to allow for non-NMEA
inputs. The Baud rates can be set within the range 1200 -
38400 baud. For information on setting Baud Rates, refer to
Chapter 5 - Commissioning.
CD-4733
NOTE:
To adjust the settings for the Serial NMEA Input messages,
the Installation must first be "unlocked". CD-4734
51 Provided that authorised access is possible, the NOTES:

following can be set for each Port: (1) Care should be taken to ensure that the correct
baud rate settings are used, to avoid possible loss
(1) Priority of communication with the external devices
connected to the comms ports.
(2) Type Checking (i.e. Strict, or Relaxed)
(3) Timeout (for message failure detection) (2) Attempting to alter the settings, without first
unlocking the Installation, results in the
(4) IBS / OS Data (allows IBS/Ownship's data to be "Installation Locked" warning message being
exchanged with IBS devices or other equipment displayed, as shown below.
when enabled).
NOTE:
When the Port is disabled, no messages are transmitted on
the selected COM port.
52 Messages can also be disabled. Refer to Chapter 5 -

Commissioning, for information on Comms Port
settings.
53 Selecting DEFAULTS from the COMMS SETUP
MENU, resets the message comms port settings to the
system Default values. Refer to Chapter 5 - Commissioning,
for information on Default Settings.
CD-4735
Original 1.7 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 1
OWNSHIP SETUP (7) The Stern Marker can only be turned ON when the
Ownship Graphic is ENABLED and is only
57 This facility allows Ownship to be shown on the radar displayed when the Range Scale in use is 3nm or
display in the correct dimensions and the antenna less. Once the Ownship graphic is enabled, the
correctly positioned in relation to the ship. Stern Marker can be turned ON by positioning the
cursor over the Stern Marker box and pressing
58 To edit the Ownship Graphics: any pushbutton. Pressing the pushbutton over
the box once again turns the stern Marker OFF.
(1) Place the cursor over the TXA box at the top-left of
the screen. A pop-down information box appears (8) To exit from the menu, place the cursor over the
below. Press the centre pushbutton to put the EXIT box and press any pushbutton.
system into Standby Mode.
(2) In the Standby Mode, place the cursor over the CURVED SETUP SCREEN
box GO TO MENUS box and press any
pushbutton. 59 The Curved EBL is an Electronic Bearing Line that
graphically displays the rate of turn or radius of turn
(3) From the new menu that appears place the cursor that the vessel will take to effect a new course. The turn
over the select the OWNSHIP SETUP box, and shown will include the ship’s forwarding distance.
press any pushbutton.
60 For information on setting-up the Curved EBL, refer to
(4) A plan view representative of Ownship is Chapter 5 -Commissioning.
presented.
GO TO INSTALL SCREEN
61 Selecting GO TO INSTALL from the Standby Menus,
displays the Installation Screen. This facility allows the
selection of the Transmitter Type, Display Type, etc. To
define the system configuration.
NOTE:
This is not an operator function and is usually set during
system commissioning.
62 For information on Installation settings, refer to
Chapter 5 - Commissioning.
WATCH MONITOR
63 This is used to alert the Operator that the integrated
bridge has not been used for a specified time period.
However, for this utility a particular connection is required to
the radar system. Refer to Chapter 5 for levels and default
setting information.
CD-4736
64 When there is inactivity exceeding the time period
specified in the setup, a Red Warning appears:
(5) To edit the length and the width of the ship, along
with the positioning of the antenna:
WATCH ALARM TRIGGERED MOVE TRACKERBALL
(a) Set switch SW1 to ON, place the cursor over
the dimension to be edited and press and CD-2031
hold down any pushbutton. Increase or

decrease the measurement by the movement
o f t h e t r a cke r b a l l u n t i l t h e r e q u i r e d
measurement is obtained, then release the 65 If the trackerball is not moved within another thirty
pushbutton. The length may be between 10 seconds an additional Red Warning appears.
and 500 metres, with a width of 10 to 250
metres, switch SW1 OFF. WATCH ALARM UNACKNOWLEDGED AFTER SPECIFIED TIME
(6) The Ownship Graphics can be disabled by placing
the cursor over the Graphic ENABLED box, and
CD-2032
p r e s s i n g a n y p u sh b u t t o n . P r e ssi n g t h e
pushbutton over the box once again turns the NOTE:
graphics back on. This function requires the use of an optional watch alarm
controller, alarms are reset on all displays if any activity is
noticed.
May 01 1.8 Original

KH 2020
Chap 1
FUNCTIONS Zone 3 - Ownship and Plotting Parameters

69 (1) Ownship Parameters.
66 To assist in location of functions on the display screen,
a pullout illustration of the display is provided at the (2) Plotting Parameters.
end of this Chapter.
(3) Trail Parameters.
Zone 1 - Radar System
Zone 4 - VRM, EBL and Signal Controls
67 (1) Standby/Run.
70 (1) Variable Range Marker.
(2) Selection of the Radar System.
(2) Electronic Bearing Line.
(3) Short, Medium, Long Pulse.
(3) Gain Setting.
(4) Tuning of the selected Radar & Performance
Monitor. (4) Sea Setting.
(5) Correlation & Interference Rejection. (5) Rain Setting.
(6) Enhancement of Radar Signals & Sector Scan. Zone 5 - Data and Menus
Zone 2 - Screen Mode of Operation 71 (1) Target Data Information.
68 (1) Gain, Sea, Rain Settings. (2) System and Function Warnings.
(2) Range and Rings. (3) Menus for VDU Facilities, WPt, NAV, PLOT,
MAPS, TRAIL, VDU.
(3) North Up.
Zone 6 -Cursor Control and Mode
(4) Course Up.
72 (1) Pushbutton Information Boxes.
(5) Head Up.
(2) Cursor Readout Mode.
(6) Relative Motion, Relative Trails RM(R).
(3) MISC Icon (when an Ergopod is
(7) True Motion, True Trails TM(T) (Optional). connected ONLY).
(8) Relative Motion, True Trails RM(T) (Optional).
(9) Heading Line.
TXA X MP PM 350 000 010 RANGE 12 HDG 130 deg

340 020 RINGS 2
L.SPD 16.5 KT
330 030 North up
Correlator Centred COG ---
SC/SC 320 040
RM(R) SOG --.-
VIDEO 310 HL STAB SEA
NORM 050
OFF SET SEA
DRIFT SEA
300 060
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 T. PAST POSN OFF
T. VECTOR 15 min (R/T)
070 T. TRAILS 3 min (R/T)
290
CPA LIMIT 2.0 min
TCPA LIMIT 20.0 min
280 080 LAT 050 00.45 N
LON 001 23.45 E
270 090 ZONE 3
ZONE 5
100
260
TARGET 1
250 110
Updated 0.9 mins ago
ZONE 4 ZONE 6 BRG 039.3º (T)
RANGE 3.3 nm
240 120 COURSE 349º (T)
SPEED 2.7 kt
7.14 CPA 3.2 nm
VRM nm 230 130
TCPA 2.2 min
OFF CURSOR
105.6 220 140
EBL deg 8.70 nm WPt NAV
OFF 210 150 212.9º (T)
G R PLOT MAPS
A
S
A
200 160
7 E 3 0 190 170
I
A
I 180 TRIAL VDU
N N
TRACKERBALL PUSHBUTTONS
CD-2490
Figure 4 - Display Zones
Original 1.9 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 1
FUNCTION - ZONE 1 Using The Performance Monitor To Check Radar

TRANSMITTER INFORMATION Performance
79 The radar plume and sun responses (see diagrams
TX BOX - TRANSMITTER SELECTION below) can be used to measure radar performance as
follows:
73 Shows the transmitter under control. With the cursor
highlighting the TX box, the middle pushbutton puts Transmitter Performance:
the radar into STANDBY. Left and right pushbuttons change 80 Select the 12nm range scale and measure the
the displayed transmitter (optional). extreme range of the plume using the cursor readout.
PULSE LENGTH (MP/SP/LP) BOX- SELECTION 81 Compare the range measurement with the reference
figure taken on installation: A fall of more than 20%
74 Shows the pulse length in use. With the cursor indicates a need for transmitter maintenance.
highlighting the box, a pop-down selection box
appears as shown below. The middle pushbutton sets the Receiver Performance:
pulse length to automatic (normal) setting. Left and right 82 Select the 1.5nm range scale (X-Band receivers only,
pushbuttons select a shorter (SP) or longer (LP) pulse for S-Band select the12nm range scale) and measure
length respectively, where allowed. the range of the sun using the cursor readout.
83 Compare the range measurement with the reference
figure taken on installation: A fall of more than 20% on
an X-Band, or 80% on an S-Band (due to the S-Band monitor
being more sensitive to changes) indicates a need for
maintenance.
CD-4737 NOTE
Refer to the Installation Record, for details of the reference
figures.
PM BOX – PERFORMANCE MONITOR
(OPTIONAL) Typical sun and plume responses
75 Press and hold any pushbutton with the cursor

highlighting the PM box to invoke the performance
monitor.
76 To enable to monitor permanently:
(1) Highlight the PM Box.
Rx ‘SUN' (X-BAND) Rx ‘SUN' (S-BAND) Tx PLUME
(2) Press and hold down any pushbutton.
(3) Using the trackerball, move the cursor to highlight
the TUNE box, and press either of the other two X-Band
buttons. Typical Figures: Tx=6 to 8nm (25kW)
Tx=1.5 to 2.5nm (10kW)
(4) Release both pushbuttons. Rx=0.75 to 1nm
77 While the performance monitor is enabled the PM box
will outlined in red.
S-Band Typical sun and plume responses
78 To de-activate the performance monitor once
permanently enabled, with the cursor highlighting the
PM box, press any pushbutton.
Tx Rx
PM PM
Typical Figures: Tx=6 to 8nm

Rx=Sectors typically 8nm
May 01 1.10 Original

KH 2020
Chap 1
TUNE BOX – BARGRAPH CONTROL (MASTER CORRELATOR BOX

RADARS ONLY)
87 Displays the video correlator in use. With the cursor
84 Allows manual tuning of the radar receiver. This has highlighting the correlator box, a pop-up information
limited effect on systems with Automatic Frequency box appears above the correlator box as shown below. The
Control (AFC). left pushbutton (OFF) turns correlation and interference
rejection off. The middle pushbutton (IR) switches on
85 To manually tune the radar: interference rejection only. The right pushbutton (SC/SC)
switches on scan to scan correlation (includes interference
(1) Move the cursor using the trackerball so that the rejection).
TUNE box is highlighted.
(2) Hold down any pushbutton. A red control bar will
appear beneath the green tune indicator bar
showing the current position of the control.
(3) The control bar can be lengthened or shortened
by moving the trackerball through the east or west
axis respectively. The length of the green bar
indicates the level of tuning, which is longest when CD-4738
the radar is optimally tuned. When the desired

tune level has been reached, release the NOTE:
pushbutton. (1) If SC/SC is selected on short pulse and/or a low
range scale, the CORRELATOR box outline flashes. This is
NOTES: to warn the user that small targets with a fast relative speed
(1) On systems with AFC the red TUNE control bar may not correlate and therefore may be suppressed to a
should be set to approximately mid-position to allow the lower level paint.
system to operate correctly.
(2) High speed craft should only use SC/SC on 3nm
(2) In the event of the AFC failing to ‘Lock On’, range scale and above with target enhance switched on,
manually tune the radar as described above. (see Video box).
Displaying SART Responses (3) Fast ships generate high relative target speeds
that will reduce target correlation; therefore to improve the
86 To detune the receiver, for displaying clear SART target update rate a faster scanner should be fitted.
responses, tune the radar as described above to
achieve minimal radar targets. Ensure that the receiver is VIDEO BOX
re-tuned for normal operation.
88 Displays the video mode – normal or enhanced. With
the cursor highlighting the video box, press any
pushbutton to toggle between NORM and ENH.
CD-4739
NOTE:
In excessive sea clutter or precipitation, the use of
enhanced video mode may reduce target visibility. A
combination of longer pulse length or video enhance,
adjusting SEA/RAIN and CORRELATOR SC/SC produces
better target visibility.
MUTE BOX (OPTIONAL)

89 Indicates the status of the non-secure mute sector; a
red or white pie-slice indicates that the mute sector is
enabled or disabled respectively. With the cursor
highlighting the mute box, press any pushbutton to toggle
the status of the mute sector.
Original 1.11 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 1
FUNCTIONS - ZONE 2 AZIMUTH MODE (NORTH UP) BOX –

RADAR PRESENTATION INFORMATION PRESENTATION SELECTION
94 Displays the azimuth mode in use, and whether the
GAIN/SEA/RAIN BOX display is centred or off centred. With the azimuth
mode box highlighted, a pop-down information box appears.
90 Shortcut to the GAIN/SEA/RAIN control in zone 4. The left pushbutton sets the azimuth mode to North Up. The
middle pushbutton sets the azimuth mode to Course Up.
The right pushbutton sets the azimuth mode to Head Up.
CD-4740
91 With the Gain/sea/rain box highlighted, note that the

GAIN/SEA/RAIN control in zone 4 is also highlighted, CD-4743
as shown below. Pushbutton functions are as detailed in the MOTION MODE (RM (R)) BOX
zone 4 description.
95 Displays the motion mode in use. With the motion
mode box highlighted, the left pushbutton sets the
motion mode to True Motion with True Trails (TM(T)). The
middle pushbutton sets the motion mode to Relative Motion
with Relative Trail (RM(R)). The right pushbutton sets the
motion mode to Relative Motion with True Trails (RM(T)).
CD-4744
CD-4741
RANGE/RINGS BOX
92 Displays the range scale in use and the distance (in
nm) between the range rings displayed (or OFF). With
the range/rings box highlighted, the left pushbutton changes
range scale down. The right pushbutton changes range
scale up. The middle pushbutton toggles the range rings on
or off.
CD-4742
93
The Range can be set between 0.25 to 96nm. The
Rings are set between 0.025 to 16nm, depending on
the range scale in use.

KH 2020
Chap 1
HL OFF BOX
96 Removes the heading line and all other graphics
(EBLs, VRMs, footprints, sectors etc.) from the PPI.
With the HL off box highlighted, press and hold any
pushbutton. Release the pushbutton to restore the graphics
to the screen. Figure 5 shows the screen with normal
graphics, before HL OFF is activated and Figure 6 shows the
screen when HL OFF is active.
CD-4746
Figure 6 - Display Screen PPI with HL OFF Active
CD-4745
Figure 5 - Display Screen PPI with normal graphics

KH 2020
Chap 1
FUNCTIONS – ZONE 3 STAB BOX – STABILISATION

OWNSHIP INFORMATION 100 With the stab box highlighted, the left pushbutton
selects sea stabilisation, the middle pushbutton
HDG BOX – MASTER GYRO HEADING selects manual stabilisation, and the right pushbutton
selects external stabilisation (non-EU mode only). When a
97 Displays Ownship heading. To adjust; with the HDG Doppler log speed input is in use, stabilisation selection
box highlighted, press and hold down both the left and options are disabled.
right pushbuttons. Move the trackerball through the
north/south axis to change the displayed heading.
CD-4750
SET BOX – TIDE DIRECTION

CD-4747
101 With the set box highlighted and the stabilisation mode
set to manual, press and hold any pushbutton while
NOTE: moving the trackerball through the north/south axis to
On initial switch on the master gyro heading may be change the angle.
incorrect. See glossary.
NOTE:
L SPD BOX – SPEED If an external stabilisation source is selected, the set value
will be automatically updated (non-EU mode only).
98 Displays Ownship speed and its source. With the SPD
box highlighted, the left pushbutton selects LOG DRIFT BOX – TIDE RATE
speed (L SPD). The middle pushbutton selects manual
speed (M SPD). The right pushbutton selects Doppler (W or 102 With the set box highlighted and the stabilisation mode
G SPD) (optional) or VTG input (optional, non-EU mode set to manual, press and hold any pushbutton while
only). moving the trackerball through the north/south axis to
change the tide rate.
CD-4749
CD-4751
99 If manual speed is selected (see below), the middle
pushbutton is then used to change the speed. With the NOTE:
SPD box highlighted press and hold the middle pushbutton
If an external stabilisation source is selected, the drift value
(Adj). The speed may be increased/decreased by moving will be automatically updated (non-EU mode only).
the trackerball in the north/south axis respectively.
CD-4748

KH 2020
Chap 1
PAST POSN BOX – PAST POSITION CPA LIMIT BOX – CLOSEST POINT OF
APPROACH LIMIT
103 With the past posn box highlighted, press and hold any
pushbutton while moving the trackerball through the 107 Displays the current CPA limit. With the CPA limit box
north/south axis to increase/decrease the time setting highlighted, pressing and holding the left pushbutton
respectively. while moving the trackerball through the north/south axis will
adjust the CPA limit value between 0.1nm and 6.0nm. The
middle button selects the minimum CPA limit (0.1nm). The
right pushbutton selects the maximum CPA limit (6.0nm).
CD-4752
104 The Past position can be set to OFF or set to between

0.5 to 2.0 minutes, in 0.5 minute increments. CD-4755
VECTOR BOX TCPA LIMIT BOX – TIME TO CLOSEST POINT

OF APPROACH LIMIT
105 With the vector box highlighted, pressing and holding
the left pushbutton while moving the trackerball 108 Displays the current TCPA limit. With the TCPA limit
through the north/south axis increases/decreases the vector box highlighted, pressing and holding the left
time respectively. The middle pushbutton overrides pushbutton while moving the trackerball through the
(changes) the vector mode while the pushbutton is held north/south axis will adjust the TCPA limit value between 1
down. Holding down the pushbutton for more than two minute and 60 minutes. The middle pushbutton selects the
seconds will permanently change the vector mode. The right minimum TCPA limit (1 min). The right pushbutton selects
pushbutton changes the vector stabilisation mode. the maximum TCPA limit (60 min).
CD-4753
CD-4756
LAT/LON BOX - OWNSHIP LATITUDE &

TRAILS BOX LONGITUDE
106 Displays the lifetime (in minutes) of the trails along with 109 Displays the current geographical location of
their motion mode. With the trails box highlighted and Ownship, if location data is available.
the trails turned on, pressing and holding the left pushbutton
while moving the trackerball through the north/south axis will
increase/decrease the trails lifetime between 0.75 minutes DEPTH BOX
and 99 minutes. The middle pushbutton will turn off the
trails. The right pushbutton will clear the trails. If the trails 110 Displays the current depth. The box is only visible
are turned off, pressing any pushbutton will turn them on. when a valid depth reading is received.
CD-4754

KH 2020
Chap 1
FUNCTIONS – ZONE 4 114 As soon as an EBL has been activated the cursor
moves to the PPI and controls the active EBL. EBL
NAVIGATION & CLUTTER INFORMA- bearing is controlled by the trackerball. The left pushbutton
TION acquires a target at the cursor position, the middle
pushbutton deselects the EBL and the right pushbutton turns
off the EBL. A typical EBL is shown below.
VRM BOX – VARIABLE RANGE MARKER
111 Displays the current range of the VRMs. With the VRM
box highlighted, the left pushbutton toggles the green
VRM on or off. The right pushbutton toggles the red VRM on
or off.
CD-4757
112 As soon as a VRM has been activated the cursor

moves to the PPI and controls the active VRM. VRM
range is controlled by the trackerball. The left pushbutton
acquires a target at the cursor position, the middle
pushbutton deselects the VRM and the right pushbutton
turns off the VRM. A typical VRM is shown below.
CD-4829
ERBL ACTIVATION
115 Pressing the right pushbutton anywhere inside the
radar circle will activate both an EBL and a VRM and
allow control of both via the trackerball. A displayed EBL and
VRM can be selected simultaneously by positioning the
cursor over the dot where the VRM and EBL intersect and
pressing the middle pushbutton.
GAIN/SEA/RAIN BOX
116 Displays the current setting of the Gain, Sea and Rain
controls. With the Gain/sea/rain box highlighted,
holding down the left pushbutton and moving the trackerball
through the north/south axis will increase/decrease the Gain
setting respectively.
CD-4828
EBL BOX – ELECTRONIC BEARING LINE

113 Displays the current angle of the EBLs. With the EBL
box highlighted, the left pushbutton toggles the green
EBL on or off. The right pushbutton toggles the red EBL on or
off.
CD-4759
117
Similarly, holding down the middle pushbutton while
moving the trackerball through the north/south axis will
increase/decrease the sea clutter level respectively.
CD-4758
Rapidly moving the trackerball in the south axis will enable
Auto Sea mode. Auto Sea mode is disabled by rapidly
moving the trackerball in the north axis.
118 Holding down the right pushbutton while moving the
trackerball through the north/south axis will
increase/decrease the rain setting respectively.
119 Settings for Gain, Sea and Rain are:
Gain - set between 0 - 9.

Sea - set to Auto or between 0 - 9.
Rain - set between 0 - 9.

KH 2020
Chap 1
FUNCTIONS – ZONE 5 – DATA AND 122 To activate waypoint display, the radar must have a
valid lat/lon position; otherwise, attempts are ignored.
MENUS Press the left or the middle pushbutton; if any waypoints
have been received, they will be displayed in the PPI
WPT BOX whenever they are within the current radar range. If no
waypoints have been received, the following warning box
120 Allows the operator to display waypoints and routes if appears:
they have been received. When the WPt box is
highlighted, a pop-down menu details the operation of the
pushbuttons. NO WAYPOINTS
RECEIVED
CD-2018
Clearing Waypoints
123 Waypoints are cleared with the right hand pushbutton
option. To ensure that waypoints are not cleared
CD-4760
accidentally, the operator is required to confirm his action.
The following warning box is displayed:
Activating Waypoints
CLICK AGAIN
121 With waypoints inactive, the pushbutton selection
boxes are shown below: NOW TO CONFIRM
ACTION
CD-2020
CD-4761 124 The right pushbutton must be pressed again within five
seconds to clear the waypoints.
Toggling Waypoint Labels

125 With waypoints active, pressing the right pushbutton
toggles the state of the waypoint labels.

KH 2020
Chap 1
Toggling the Route To Adjust The Turning Radius:
126 With waypoints active, and a route having been 130 With the radius box highlighted, holding down either
received, pressing the middle pushbutton will join up the left or the middle pushbutton, while moving the
the received waypoints to show the proposed route. Any trackerball through the north/south axis will change the
waypoint that is not part of the route will be hidden. With a curve radius of the EBL.
route being displayed, pressing the middle pushbutton will 131 To deactivate the curved EBL, with either the
remove the route from view and any hidden waypoints will heading or the radius box highlighted, press the
again become visible. right pushbutton.
NAV MENU
127 To access the navigation menu, with the NAV box
highlighted, press any pushbutton. The following
option boxes are displayed:
CD-4764
WOP Box – Wheel Over Point

132 With the WOP box highlighted and the curved EBL
active, press any pushbutton. Press again to
deactivate.
CD-4762
PI Box – Parallel Index Line

Curved EBL Box
133 To activate a parallel index line (up to a maximum of
128 With the curved EBL box highlighted, pressing any
4), with the PI box highlighted (see below), press
pushbutton activates the curved EBL. The following
the left pushbutton.
menu appears:
CD-4765
To Adjust The Heading: 134 To delete an active parallel index line, with the PI
129 With the heading box highlighted, holding down box highlighted, press the right pushbutton.
either the left or the middle pushbutton, while moving
the trackerball through the north/south axis will change the
heading of the EBL.
CD-4766
135 To adjust the position of a parallel index line:

CD-4763
(1) Position the cursor over the PI line and press
the middle pushbutton to select it.

KH 2020
Chap 1
(2) Move the trackerball to the desired position and MAPS MENU
press the middle pushbutton to deselect the PI
line.
Creating a New Map
136 To adjust the angle of the parallel index line:
141 With the NEW box highlighted, pressing the left
(1) Position the cursor over the PI line and press the pushbutton will create a new true map and open the
middle pushbutton to select it. edit map sub-menu. Pressing the middle pushbutton will
create a new relative map and open the edit map sub-menu.
(2) Press and hold the left pushbutton while moving
The NEW box is only visible if no map is currently being
the trackerball through the north/south axis to
displayed.
adjust the PI line angle. The PI line is
automatically deselected as soon as the left
pushbutton is released. Loading a Map
END Box – Exit the NAV Menu

No. NAME REL/TRUE
137 To exit the NAV menu, with the END box highlighted,
PLOT Box – Shortcut to PLOT Menu UP
138 To open the PLOT menu, with the PLOT box

highlighted, press any pushbutton. The PLOT menus
are then displayed, as shown below.
DOWN
STORAGE LEVEL
INDICATION
CD-4772
142 A Map Storage Level indication is provided along the

bottom of the MAPS menu. If the Map storage
CD-4767 becomes full a MAP STORAGE FULL warning message is
displayed and some stored Maps may need to be removed
to create space for new maps.
VDU Box – Shortcut to VDU Menu
143 To load a map proceed as follows:
139 To open the VDU menu, with the VDU box highlighted,
press any pushbutton and the following menu (1) Scroll the map selection by positioning the cursor
appears. on the Up or Down arrow (located on the
right-hand side of the Map Directory box) and then
press and hold down any pushbutton and rotate in
the North/South axis until the required map
appears.
(2) Position the cursor inside the Map Directory box
on the map required, the map is now highlighted,
and then press the left-hand pushbutton.
NOTE:
To load the map, the correct motion is to be selected as
shown in the Map Directory box, i.e. R or T.
CD-4771
(3) The map is automatically loaded and displayed on
screen and can be edited. The highlighted map
PLOT MENU colour now changes to indicate the selected map.
140 The contents of the plot menu are dependent on the

radar plotting aid fitted and are described in chapter 2.

KH 2020
Chap 1
Saving a Map Editing the Current Map

144 Position the cursor, using the trackerball, on the MAP 149 With a map being displayed, and the EDIT box
No. Under which the map is to be saved. Press the highlighted, pressing any key will open the edit map
centre pushbutton to save the map, the following warning sub-menu.
box is displayed:
Drawing Lines:
150 To draw a line:
SAVING MAP (1) If the Current Feature selected is not the Type,
Style or Colour required, position the cursor in the
Lines box, pop-down boxes appear to allow
CD-2011 selection of Change Style (centre pushbutton)
and select colour (right pushbutton).
NOTE: (2) Selection of the Change Style pushbutton
If the Map is already in the Directory, the warning box produces the following menu, position the cursor
displays the message ‘CLICK AGAIN NOW TO CONFIRM on the required selection and press any
ACTION’. pushbutton.
Clearing the Current Map

Current Line
145 With the CLR box highlighted, pressing any
pushbutton will clear the current map. Type Selected
for Drawing
Deleting a Map
END
146 Position the cursor, using the trackerball, on the MAP
No. to be deleted. Press the right-hand pushbutton the CD-2001
following warning box is displayed:
CLICK AGAIN
(3) Select the Lines/Select colour, by pressing the
NOW TO CONFIRM right-hand pushbutton, the following menu
ACTION appears. Position the cursor on the required
colour and press any pushbutton:
CD-2014
Current Colour
147 Press the pushbutton again, the map is now deleted. Cyan Grey Red Green White Red Selected
for Drawing
Moving the Current Map (True Maps Only)
CLEAR MOVE END
148 With the MOVE box highlighted, pressing and holding
the left pushbutton while moving the trackerball will
reposition the map. Pressing the middle pushbutton, as CD-2532
shown below, will reset the map to its original position.
NOTE:
If a feature is to be placed at a designated Lat/Lon
co-ordinate, place the feature at the required Radar display
position using the Lat/Lon readout.
(4) Move the cursor into the Radar display drawing

area and press the left-hand pushbutton to start
CD-4773 the line, the cursor changes to 5 .
(5) Using the trackerball, draw the line in the direction
required until the required distance is reached,
press the right-hand pushbutton to complete the
line.
NOTE:
If a series of connected lines is to be drawn, press the
left-hand pushbutton to end the previous line and to start
the new line.
(6) To change the line types and colours repeat

Sub-paragraphs (1) to (5) above.

KH 2020
Chap 1
Drawing Circles: Placing Symbols:
151 To draw a circle: 152 To place a Symbol:
(1) If the Current Feature selected is not the Type, (1) If the Current Feature selected is not the Type,
Style or Colour required, position the cursor in the Style or Colour required, position the cursor in the
Circle box, pop-down boxes appear to allow Symbol box, pop-down boxes appear to allow
selection of Change Style (centre pushbutton) selection of Change Style (centre pushbutton)
and Select colour (right pushbutton). and Select colour (right pushbutton).
(2) Selection of Change style produces the following (2) Selection of the Symbol style produces the
menu. Position the cursor on the required following menu, position the cursor on the
selection and press any pushbutton. required selection and press any pushbutton.
Current Line TP ! Current Symbol

Selected
Type Selected for Drawing
for Drawing
END
CD-2006 END
CD-2533
(3) Colours of circle outlines are selected in the same

way as for Line colours. (3) Colours of symbols are selected in the same way
as for Line colours.
NOTE:
NOTE:
If a feature is to be placed at a designated Lat/Lon
co-ordinate, place the feature at the required Radar display If a feature is to be placed at a designated Lat/Lon
position using the Lat/Lon readout. co-ordinate, place the feature at the required Radar display
position using the Lat/Lon readout.
(4) Move the cursor into the Radar display drawing
area and press the left-hand pushbutton to start
(4) Using the trackerball, position the Symbol in the
the Circle, the cursor changes to ï. required position and press the left-hand
(5) Using the trackerball, draw the circle to the pushbutton.
required size, press the right-hand pushbutton to (5) If the symbol is incorrectly positioned, reselect the
complete the circle. symbol by positioning the cursor over the symbol
(6) To delete the circle, select by positioning the and pressing the centre pushbutton. To delete the
cursor on either the outside of the circle or the selected symbol press the right-hand pushbutton.
centre of the circle and press the centre
pushbutton and then the right-hand pushbutton. Exiting the Edit Map Sub-menu:
153 With the END box highlighted, pressing any
pushbutton will return to the MAPS menu.
Exiting the Maps Menu

154 With the END box highlighted, pressing any key will
exit from the maps menu.

KH 2020
Chap 1
TRIAL MENU – TRIAL MANOEUVRE 161 To return to the VDU menu, highlight the END box and
155 The TRIAL menu is described in chapter 2.
Day/Night Selection
VDU MENU
162 To switch between Day and Night video levels, with the
156 Allows the operator to adjust the brightness, contrast DAY/NT box highlighted, press any pushbutton.
and video levels for all screen information. With the
VDU box highlighted, pressing any key opens the VDU
menu.
CD-4778
Audible Alarms
CD-4775
163 To switch audible alarms on or off, with the AUD box
highlighted, press any pushbutton. Signified ON by a
Contrast & Brilliance Adjustment red border around the AUD box, as shown below.
157 To adjust either the contrast or brilliance: with the

appropriate box highlighted, press and hold any
pushbutton while moving the trackerball through the
east/west axis.
NOTE: CD-4779
To increase contrast and brilliance levels without entering Exiting the VDU Menu
the VDU menu, simultaneously press and hold all three
pushbuttons. 164 With the END box highlighted, pressing any key will
exit the VDU menu.
Video Levels Adjustment
NOTE:
158 With the SET VIDEO LEVELS box highlighted, press Moving the cursor inside the PPI will automatically close
any pushbutton. the VDU menu.
CD-4776
159 This causes the Video levels available for adjustment

to be displayed, as shown below.
CD-4777
160 With the appropriate box highlighted, pressing and

holding any pushbutton while moving the trackerball
through the north/south axis will adjust that particular video
level.

KH 2020
Chap 1
FUNCTIONS – ZONE 6 167 Select the specific location by pressing and holding the
middle pushbutton. The cursor box becomes outlined
BUTTONS & TRACKERBALL in red, indicating that the range & bearing information shown
INFORMATION is now relative to the chosen location.
168 Move the cursor to the desired location. The range
CURSOR BOX and bearing is shown in the cursor box.
165 Displays the current cursor position whenever it is

within the PPI. With the cursor box highlighted, the left
pushbutton sets the cursor readout to range/bearing. The
middle pushbutton sets the cursor readout to metric
range/bearing. The right pushbutton sets the cursor readout
to TCPA. Lat/lon position is always displayed if available.
CD-4780 CD-4781
PUSHBUTTON MENU
Electronic Tape Measure
169 Displays the current action assigned to each
166 Position the cursor over the location to be chosen as pushbutton.
the first reference point in the PPI.
CD-4783
ERGOPOD ICON
170 The Ergopod Icon is displayed at the bottom of the
screen (below the 160 degree marker at the edge of
the PPI, as shown in Figure 2). The icon shown below can be
either red or green, denoting port or starboard Ergopod
control (optional).
CD-4781

KH 2020
Chap 1
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
STANDBY Gyro Alarm OFF (Land Mode)

171 This is the default condition of the radar at switch-on. 178 This is the normal mode of operation for a land based
No radar information is displayed and the antenna is or fixed position radar where the heading is known and
not rotating. will not change. On entering RUN mode for the first time
after switch-on, the cursor is positioned over the HDG box. A
172 The STANDBY menu screen is displayed, showing the warning box RADAR HAS BEEN OFF CHECK THE GYRO
current status of the transceiver(s) (Master only). is displayed, but the operator is not required to align the gyro
There are three selectable options available to the operator: to Ownship heading. In the event of a gyro failure, or no gyro
GO TO MENUS, GO TO RUN and GO TO TEST (ATA and being connected, no warnings are displayed, and the radar
ARPA fitted equipment display GO TO SIM instead of GO will not switch automatically to HEAD UP.
TO TEST).
SHORT/MEDIUM/LONG PULSE (MASTER
RUN ONLY)
173 This is the active condition of the radar. The antenna is 179 A Master display controls the radar pulse length to be
rotating and the received radar information is transmitted depending on the range scale selected.
displayed on the screen. All functions are available for The operator may override the automatic settings shown
selection. below:
CURSOR POSITIONING Short Pulse (SP) - 0.25nm to 1.5nm ranges.

Medium Pulse (MP) - 3nm to 24nm ranges.
174 The cursor defaults to a particular (PARK) position
whenever the cursor is inactive outside the PPI for a Long Pulse (LP) - 48nm and 96nm ranges.
short time. The cursor parking position is an empty (black)
area of the screen close to the PPI and can be set either high 180 The operator can select a pulse length either longer or
(35° position below GSR link box) or low (120° position, shorter than the automatic setting. If a shorter pulse
above the cursor box). The cursor parking position (either length is selected while using a range scale of 0.25nm to
HIGH or LOW) can be set from the GO TO DEFAULT menu. 1.5nm this will have no effect. However, the pulse length still
remains overridden and should the operator increase the
MASTER GYRO HEADING & GYRO range scale to 3nm the automatic setting (MP) will be
overridden and SP will be used. Similarly, if a longer pulse
WARNINGS length is selected on 48nm or 96nm ranges, the pulse length
displayed will still be LP. Should the range scale be reduced
175 The master gyro heading is normally manually set to to 24nm then the automatic setting (MP) will be overridden
the reading taken from the Ownship gyro repeater. and LP will be used. While the pulse length is being
176 While the radar is switched on, Ownship heading is overridden the border of the pulse length box is red.
tracked with the aid of a gyro compass. If the gyro
heading changes while the radar is switched off the radar PERFORMANCE MONITOR
cannot keep track. Therefore when the radar is switched on
the gyro heading may be incorrect. 181 Checks the overall performance of the
transmitter/receiver system by displaying the radar
Gyro Alarm ON (Sea Mode) transmission PLUME and receiver response SUN at the
centre of the display. During installation, the radar
177 This is the normal mode of operation for a ship borne performance is measured to establish a performance
radar. On selecting GO TO RUN for the first time after reference level, and written into the installation record.
switch-on, the operator is requested to align the gyro
heading with Ownship heading before continuing to RUN
mode. Should a gyro fault be detected, a GYRO IS INVALID TUNING & RESPONSES
warning box will immediately be displayed and the radar will
switch automatically to HEAD UP. A system warning will 182 Tuning affects the signal received. A tuned receiver
also indicate that there is a gyro fault. will receive strong radar returns from its own
transmitter. Conversely a detuned receiver will receive very
weak or no radar returns at all from its own transmitter. This
feature is very useful for distinguishing between radar
returns and SART transmissions. A detuned receiver will
still receive SART transmissions even though its own
transmitter’s radar returns are not being received. This will
have the effect of removing all radar from the display except
SART responses.

KH 2020
Chap 1
VIDEO CORRELATION AND INTERFERENCE VIDEO ENHANCE

REJECTION
187 Enhances the radar signals by stretching the size of
183 Signal correlation is used to reduce radar interference strong radar returns. Clutter should be reduced to a
(interference rejection) and to reduce clutter (scan to minimum before switching to ENH.
scan correlation).
Interference Rejection (IR)

184 Consecutive transmissions are compared and only
signals present on both transmissions are painted.
Interference from other radars is suppressed and receiver
noise reduced.
Scan to Scan Correlation (SC/SC)

185 Signal correlation reduces random clutter returns and
preserves radar signals that correlate (are present) for
two successive scans of the antenna. Targets that do not
paint consistently are displayed at the medium echo if one
scan is missed, at the weak echo colour if two scans are
missed and not at all if more than two scans are missed. CD-1974
Interference rejection, and receiver noise reduction are also
used to further improve the radar image. Video Normal
186 A target that stays in the same position, or overlaps on
two consecutive scans correlates (Target A). A target
with high relative speed on a low range scale that does not
overlap on two consecutive scans paints at a lower intensity
level (Target B). A longer pulse length improves correlation,
but close targets moving at a high tangential speed may still
not correlate.
TARGET
A
TARGET
B
CD-1975
Video Enhance
CD-1976
Interference
CD-1977

KH 2020
Chap 1
MUTE SECTOR PPI MODES AND PRESENTATION

188 A predefined arc (sector) of the radar antenna sweep, 191 The following PPI modes are available for selection:
over which it does not transmit radar. The sector must
be defined in the installation menu. An active mute sector is Relative Motion RM(R)
True Motion TM(T) Motion
outlined in magenta on the PPI. This is commonly used to
prevent the antenna from transmitting into a ship’s Relative Motion RM(T) Modes
superstructure or funnel to prevent radar reflections.
Head Up
MUTE SECTOR
North Up Presentation
Course Up Modes
NOTE:
In all modes and presentations, the heading line (HL)
indicates the heading of Ownship.
Relative Motion, Relative Trails RM(R)

192 Ownship position is user-definable (up to 70% off
centre) but fixed to this point of the PPI. All target move
relative to Ownship’s course (CSE) and speed. Targets
have relative past trails (afterglow), but Ownship has no trail.
CD-2486
STABILISATION MODE
NOTE: Sea Stabilisation
A Mute Sector Skew facility is provided as part of the GO
TO TEST menu (Refer to Chapter 5 for details). This allows 193 Gives the correct course (HDG) and speed though the
the Mute Sector's position to be adjusted, if required, to water. Set and Drift information is not used. Sea
compensate for any slight error in positioning. stabilisation provides an excellent display for coastal
navigation, pilotage and anti collision. The true trails of
Targets Entering Mute Sector targets give an indication of their apparent true motion.
189 When a tracked target enters the MUTE sector, it is 194 A single axis log (or manual speed input) and gyro
automatically deleted and the warning TARGET provide sensor data for sea stabilisation.
DELETED IN MUTE SECTOR is displayed.
Ground Stabilisation
NOTE:
The WARNING message is set to be acknowledged by 195 Ownship log speed and heading, and an input of
default, but can be configured within WARNINGS SETUP tide/wind rate and direction can be used to calculate
to timeout if required. Ownship course and speed over the ground. Without this
ground-referenced speed and course, stationary targets
would appear to drift at a rate and direction opposite to the
RANGE SCALE & RANGE RINGS tide.
190 The displayed range scale is selectable from 0.25nm 196 Ownship course over ground (COG) and speed over
to 96nm as detailed in the table below. The number ground (SOG) will also be calculated from a dual axis
and separation of the range rings is dependent on the range log input. VTG input from a GPS will also provide COG and
scale in use: SOG (non-EU mode only).
Range Scale Range Ring No. of Rings 197 The ground stabilised true motion display can be very
(nm) Separation (nm) useful for pilotage, when it is important to know
0.25 0.05 5 Ownship and other ship’s course and speed over ground in
0.5 0.1 5
relation to land, buoys and beacons.
0.75 0.25 3 NOTES
1.5 0.25 6
(1) A known stationary target (Navigational Mark) should
3.0 0.5 6 not show any movement providing there is no error in the
6.0 1.0 6 ground stabilisation.
12.0 2.0 6
24.0 4.0 6 (2) Course Over Ground (COG) and Speed Over Ground
48.0 8.0 6 (SOG) boxes are for information only.
96.0 16.0 6
(3) If the GPS no longer sends information or sends an
error message, then the display will revert automatically to
sea stabilisation (non-EU mode only).

KH 2020
Chap 1
Manual Stabilisation CLOSEST POINT OF APPROACH

198 Uses manually entered information for tide/wind 204 The minimum distance from Ownship that a target will
direction (SET) and rate (DRIFT). achieve based on current speed and heading.
Other Stabilisation Sources CPA Limit

199 In addition to the three selectable stabilisation modes, 205 Defines the minimum approach distance from
other sources of stabilisation are available. Doppler Ownship of a target’s projected course.
log input will automatically set the stabilisation to either
bottom track or water track Doppler. Reference targets TCPA Limit
(optional) can also be used to provide stabilisation.
206 Defines the maximum time in which a target’s
PAST POSITION projected course can bring it within the CPA limit
before generating a collision warning.
200 Plots the past position of tracked targets by dropping a
marker to indicate the target’s position up to two LATITUDE/LONGITUDE
minutes ago. One marker is dropped for each tracked target
up to every two minutes. The markers shrink as they age, 207 The lat/lon box displays the current position of
and only four markers are shown for each tracked target. Ownship and the source of the position information.
201 The past position can be either relative to Ownship or a Valid sources of position information are shown below along
true position and is indicated by a preceding T or R with the mnemonic that will be displayed in the lat/lon box:
depending on the vector mode.
Global Positioning System GPS
VECTORS Differential Global Positioning System DGPS
DECCA DECC
202 Indicates the projected direction and speed of a
tracked target. The end of the target vector represents LORAN-C LORA
where that target will be in n minutes (where n represents the Integrated Bridge System IBS
vector time) if the target holds current speed and course.
Vectors are normally displayed in the current motion mode Electronic Chart CHAR
(true or relative), but it is possible to display relative vectors Electronic Chart Display & Information System ECDIS
while in true motion and visa versa by changing the vector
mode from the vector box. Changing from normal vectors In addition the following mnemonics may be shown in the lat/lon
will result in the borders of the vector and past posn boxes box:
turning red. Dead Reckoning Mode DR
Other External Position information source EXT
RADAR TRAILS
203 Displays previous radar using three levels of trail NOTE:
video. Each video level represents one third of the The LAT/LON box is for information only.
trails lifetime. If the trails are set to 15 minutes then trails will
be displayed in bright grey until they are 5 minutes old when
they will be displayed in a darker grey. When the trails reach VARIABLE RANGE MARKER (VRM)
10 minutes old they will be displayed in a still darker shade of
grey. At 15 minutes old the trails will disappear. 208 An Ownship stabilised ring centred on Ownship. The
radius (representing distance from Ownship) is
variable. The range of an active VRM is displayed in the
VRM box.
ELECTRONIC BEARING LINE (EBL)

209 A movable line extending from Ownship position to the
edge of the PPI. The bearing of an active EBL is
shown in the EBL box; this is a relative bearing in head up
presentation mode, and a true bearing in north up and
course up.

KH 2020
Chap 1
GAIN, SEA & RAIN SEA (STC)

214 The sea (STC) control is a manual adjustment that
reduces the sea clutter returns. Maximum attenuation
takes place at zero range, decreasing until no reduction of
signals or clutter occurs up to a range of 6 miles or greater.
215 Advancing the sea setting progressively reduces the
near range clutter. The sea level may be set from 0
(minimum) to 9 (maximum) with a typical operational level of
between 3 and 5 (medium pulse). Less sea is to be applied
on short pulse, more on long pulse. It is advisable to set the
sea (STC) level with the correlator set to OFF or IR, since
SC/SC causes a delay before the adjustment becomes
visible.
216 The correct setting for the sea control under any given
weather condition is only obtained by experience. If a
CD-1990 setting is too high, it may result in the loss of close range
targets. NEVER set the sea control to clear ALL clutter, but
Normal Picture leave a light speckle of sea returns to indicate optimum
sensitivity within the clutter field. Reduction of the remaining
clutter can be achieved by setting the correlator to SC/SC
GAIN mode.
210 The Gain control sets the signal threshold of the radar NOTE:
signals displayed on the screen. For a correct Gain When not in use the sea clutter control should always be set
setting, with the correlator switched OFF, the control should to 0.
be adjusted until a ‘speckled’ background is just visible on
the screen.
211 If the setting is too high, a poor quality picture masked
by excessive noise results; if set too low, it may result
in the loss of weak targets and a reduction in the detection
range.
212 In conditions of high precipitation (rain, hail or snow) a
reduction of the Gain level reduces clutter and
produces a clearer picture.
213 The Gain level can be set from 0 (low) to 9 (high), with a
typical operation level of between 6 and 8.
NOTE:
Do not set too high a level as excess noise on the screen
degrades the picture quality. CD-2015
Excess sea
AUTO SEA
217 The auto facility provides automatic suppression of
clutter. Further fine adjustment can be achieved using
the Gain control.
218 The auto mode operates efficiently in open sea and in
estuaries, though some land detail may be
suppressed (leading edges are preserved). RACON
responses may be reduced, but at least part of the response
is normally visible.
219 The auto facility is effective against sea and close rain
CD-1991
clutter.
Excess Gain 220 On selecting the auto facility, target trails are cleared;
this is to remove clutter build up in the trails.
NOTE: NOTE:
Fine adjustment of the Auto STC, Manual STC and Rain The TUNE and Enhance (ENH) functions also affect the
anti-clutter functions can be made using the Gain control. signals received (refer to TUNE and Enhance sections for
more detail.

KH 2020
Chap 1
RAIN (FTC) MAPS, ROUTES & WAYPOINT POSITIONING

221 The rain control reduces clutter from rain, snow and 224 Maps, routes and waypoints can be positioned in one
hail. The rain facility also provides attenuation of sea of two projections: Great Circle or Rhumb Line. The
clutter, though RACON responses are likely to be operator must ensure that the projection mode is set as
suppressed. The rain level can be set from 0 (minimum) to 9 required prior to using this facility. Map facilities are
(maximum) with a typical operational level of between 2 and described in paragraphs 141 to 154.
4.
225 Refer to Chapter 5 - Commissioning, for levels and
222 The rain setting is adjusted to preserve small targets. default setting information.
It is often beneficial to reduce the Gain level to optimise
target detection in high precipitation. Great Circle
223 The use of S-Band radar is advantageous in very high
precipitation conditions. 226 Typically used for maps, as points of fixed Latitude and
longitude remain coincident with the radar returns, but
NOTE: straight lines joining two points are only useful as a means of
(1) The rain facility also improves short range associating those points.
discrimination.
Rhumb Line
(2) When not in use the rain control should always be set
to 0. 227 Typically used for routes between waypoints, as the
straight line in this projection may represent the rhumb
line that the ship is sailing, hence an indication of cross track
error may be read directly from the radar return.
CURVED EBL
228 An electronic bearing line that graphically displays the
rate of turn/radius of turn that the vessel will take to
effect a new course. The turn shown will include the ship’s
forwarding distance. (Refer to paragraph 128).
WHEEL OVER POINT

229 Causes an active curved EBL to become sea
stabilised. By activating the wheel over point as soon
as the autopilot has been commanded to steer to a new
course, it becomes possible to monitor the vessels progress
around the turn by comparing it to the curved EBL. The WOP
box is highlighted with a red border when active, and
automatically deactivates when the gyro heading comes
within 3 degrees of the curved EBL bearing. It can be
deactivated at any time by pressing the WOP function again.
PARALLEL INDEX LINES

230 These are Ownship stabilised lines which extend
across the width of the PPI. The angle to, and distance
from Ownship is adjustable. By setting PI lines to channel
boundaries, it is possible to get a view of Ownship position
compared to the channel boundaries.

KH 2020
Chap 1
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK

KH 2020
Chap 1
FUNCTIONS Zone 3 - Ownship and Plotting Parameters
(1) Ownship Parameters.

Zone 1 - Radar System
(2) Plotting Parameters.
(1) Standby, Run.
(3) Trail Parameters.
(2) Selection of the Radar System.
(3) Short, Medium, Long Pulse. Zone 4 - VRM, EBL and Signal Controls
(4) Tuning of the selected Radar & Performance (1) Variable Range Marker.
Monitor.
(2) Electronic Bearing Line.
(5) Correlation & Interference Rejection.
(3) Gain Setting.
(6) Enhancement of Radar Signals & Sector Scan.
(4) Sea Setting.
Zone 2 - Screen Mode of Operation
(5) Rain Setting.
(1) Range and Rings.
Zone 5 - Data and Menus
(2) Relative Motion, Relative Trails RM(R).
Target Data Information.
(3) True Motion, True Trails TM(T) (Optional).
(2) Menus for VDU Facilities, MAPS, TRAIL,
(4) Relative Motion, True Trails RM(T) (Optional). PLOT,NAV and WPt.
(5) North Up. (3) System and Function Warnings.
(6) Course Up. Zone 6 - Cursor Control and Mode

(7) Head Up. (1) Pushbutton Information Boxes.
(8) Heading Line. (2) Cursor Readout Mode.
(9) Gain, Sea, Rain Settings. CD-3070
ZONE 1 ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 5
ZONE 4 ZONE 6
CD-4843
Figure 7 - Nucleus 3 Display and Screen Controls

KH 2020
Chap 2a
CHAPTER 2A
RADAR PLOTTING AIDS
ELECTRONIC PLOTTING AID (3) To update the plot, position the cursor over the [•]
symbol of the target, press the SELECT
pushbutton (centre), the [•] symbol flashes to
INTRODUCTION acknowledge selection. Now reposition the cursor
over the present position of the target and press
1 Nucleus 3 displays are provided with one of three the ACQ (Acquire) pushbutton, a vector is
radar plotting aids: generated representative of the target course
(CRSE) and speed.
(1) EPA - A Manual Electronic Plotting Aid.
(4) Release the ACQ (Acquire) pushbutton. The
(2) ATA - An Automatic Tracking Aid with manual vector origin will move at a course and speed
acquisition and a limited subset of ARPA predicted from the two previous plots. It is
functions. recommended that the LEADING EDGE of the
target is used for a plot entry or update, to ensure
(3) ARPA - A comprehensive Automatic Radar consistent plotting.
Plotting Aid with manual and automatic
acquisition and including all ARPA functions. NOTE:
2 This section covers the Electronic Plotting Aid (EPA). Vectors are normally relative if in the Relative Motion
RM(R) mode and true if in the True Motion TM(T) mode.
3 The specification for the Electronic Plotting Aid (EPA) (5) Further plots on the target are made by repeating
is provided at the end of this Chapter. sub-paragraph (3) . The previous plot symbols
4 The EPA is a manual plotting system equivalent to, but and vector flash to acknowledge selection.
superior than, a reflection plotter. Up to 20 targets may Reposition the cursor over the present target
be plotted. position and press ACQ (Acquire), the previous
vector disappears and a new vector is generated.
5 The operator enters an initial plot at a target position,
followed by a second plot some minutes later (typically (6) If the vector deviates from the target track,
3 to 6 minutes). The two plots are used to calculate the target reposition the cursor to select the target and press
true course (CRSE), speed, CPA and TCPA, and to the ACQ (Acquire) pushbutton, the vector is
generate a vector. The calculation and vector are ONLY recalculated using the new data.
based on the previous two plots. (7) To display target data, position the cursor on or
6 The vector origin is RATE AIDED and therefore moves near to the vector origin and press the SELECT
at the predicted course (CRSE) and speed of the pushbutton. The plot symbols and vector flash,
target. Should the vector deviate from the target, it may be target data is displayed in the Target Data box on
that the target has manoeuvred. If Ownship changes course the right-hand side of the screen. The range and
bearing of a target plot is displayed if selected and
or speed, relative vectors instantly indicate the changes in
only the initial plot has been entered.
CPA and TCPA status. Whenever any target manoeuvres
(vector leaves target) a plot update is required. NOTE:
Following the selection of SELECT, the target vector and
ELECTRONIC PLOTTING AID CONTROLS plot symbols will flash. Careful selection of the pushbutton
functions is advised as the options are: CANCEL ENTRY,
NOTE: - APPLIES TO EU MODE ONLY ACQ or DELETE PLOT.
An operator warning is displayed if the target is not
updated for 10.5 minutes. The target is automatically (8) The vector presentation mode can be reversed by
deleted and the warning cancelled if a new plot is not pressing and holding the VECTOR MODE
acquired within 11.5 minutes. pushbutton, to display true vectors when the
7 To plot a single target and obtain target data proceed equipment is in the Relative Motion RM(R) mode
as follows: and relative vectors when the equipment is in the
True Motion TM(T) or Relative Motion RM(T)
(1) Position the cursor over the target, press the ACQ mode.
(Acquire) pushbutton (left-hand) a plot symbol [•]
appears over the target position. Release the NOTE:
ACQ pushbutton. Releasing the VECTOR MODE pushbutton within 4
seconds allows the vectors to return to the normal mode.
(2) Target data, other than Range and Bearing
(BRG), is not available until the initial plot has
been updated. The equipment accepts an update 8 Changes in range scale, Off-centering, Relative or
immediately after the entry of the next plot and True Motion or stabilisation mode (NORTH UP,
target data is shown. COURSE UP, HEAD UP) does not result in any loss of plots.
Vectors correspond to the motion selected.
Original 2a.1 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 2a
Plotting Additional Targets TARGET DATA

9 Up to 20 targets can be plotted on the display at the
same time. When selected and plotted, targets are
Function
allocated a number, in sequential order from 1 to 99. When 13 Data concerning a selected target may be displayed in
99 is reached numbers are allocated on the first free from 1 the Target Data box. The data for plotted targets using
(refer to PLOT menu for labels on targets). To plot additional EPA is as follows:
targets first ensure that no other target, map line or symbol
are selected, then proceed as follows: (1) Target Number (automatically allocated).
(1) Position the cursor over the initial target and press (2) Bearing (True or Relative).
the ACQ (Acquire) pushbutton, a plot symbol [•]
appears over the target position. (3) Range.
(2) Position the cursor over the 2nd target, press the (4) Course & Speed (True).
ACQ (Acquire) pushbutton, a plot symbol [•] (5) Closest Point of Approach (CPA) & Time to
appears over the 2nd target position. Move the Closest Point of Approach (TCPA) or Bow
cursor to the next target. Crossing Range (BCR) & Bow Crossing Time
NOTE: (BCT).
(1) When two or more targets are close to one another, 14 EPA tracking is available on a radar visible target out
careful selection of the correct plot is required. to the maximum range of 96nm.
(2) If difficulty is experienced, and the wrong plot is
selected, position the cursor over the symbol for the correct Selection
plot and press the SELECT pushbutton, the symbol/vector
flashes. Now move the cursor over the new position of the 15 To display data in the Target Data box:
target, press the ACQ (Acquire) pushbutton, the new vector (1) Position the cursor over the selected target to be
is now generated.
tracked and press the centre pushbutton (Select).
Deleting Plots 16 The elapsed time is calculated between successive
target returns and a vector generated on the display to
10 To delete plots proceed as follows: represent the predicted course and speed of the target.
(1) Target Plots selected in error may be deselected 17 Target information appears in the Target Data box as
provided the ACQ (Acquire) pushbutton has not follows:
been pressed. Press the SELECT pushbutton to
correct the error. TARGET XX Target Number
(2) The vector of any one target can be deleted by updated XX.X mins ago Time since last update
positioning the cursor on the vector origin, T.BEARING 056.00 Bearing (T) or (R)
pressing the SELECT pushbutton and then
pressing the DELETE pushbutton. RANGE 3.3 nm Range in nautical miles
T. COURSE 349.0 Course in degrees
Vector Time T. SPEED 2.7KT Speed in knots (KT)
11 The default or initial value of vectors is 15 minutes. The CPA or BCR 3.2nm Closest Point of Approach
length of the vector is proportional to the speed of the (nautical miles) or Bow
target, e.g. target speed of 12 knots (KT) = vector length of Crossing Range
three nautical miles. TCPA or BCT 2.2min Time of Closest Point of
Approach (minutes) or Bow
12 The vector time may be changed between 1 and 30 Crossing Time
minutes by selecting the VECTOR function and then
operating the trackerball in the vertical plane to increase or
decrease the time shown next to VECTOR in the pop-down 18 To delete a target plot, position the cursor close to the
box. selected target and press the select pushbutton, then
press the delete pushbutton.
May 01 2a.2 Original

KH 2020
Chap 2a
PLOT MENU Guard Zones

21 Two Guard Zones are available, one Fixed and the
Function other Variable, each zone is preset to 0.5nm wide. The
19 Provides a selection of functions; Past Plot ON/OFF guard zones operate by directly ‘Searching’ the screen for
History (when ‘ON’ shows previous four plot positions) targets inside the zones. When in use, the following
Guard ring functions (switching ON/OFF and setting points are to be remembered:
Variable ring range and bearing) Deleting all plots and (1) Radar Controls GAIN/SEA/RAIN, Correlation,
Selecting Bow Crossing Range (BCR) or Closest Point of Pulse Lengths and Video Enhance affect the
Approach (CPA), and Labels allowing up to twenty targets to amount of video on the screen and may be used to
be labelled numerically. The menu also contains END to optimise the ‘Searching ‘ of the zones (i.e. False
EXIT the PLOT menu. alarm rate should be reduced).
Selection (2) If the range in use is less than the guard zones
range then the zones do not operate until the
20 To select the Plot menu: range scale is increased.
(1) H i g h l i g h t t h e P L O T b o x a n d p r e s s a n y (3) The Operator must note that ‘WHAT HE SEES ON

pushbutton. The Plot menu boxes appear in the THE SCREEN IS WHAT THE GUARD ZONES
lower right-hand corner of the screen as shown SEE’.
below.
Fixed Guard Zone
HIST OFF LABELS
22 The Fixed guard zone is preset between 5.5nm and
BCR/ 6nm (i.e. Outside the sea clutter field).
CPA 23 To activate the Fixed guard zone, select the [GUARD]
function in the PLOT menu. Press any pushbutton and
DEL ALL GUARD END the Fixed and Variable guard zones appear on the screen at
5.5nm and 6nm respectively. Press the right-hand
pushbutton (Vari OFF) to turn off the variable guard zone.
Plot Menu (EPA System) Press the left-hand pushbutton (Zones Active) to activate the
guard zones. The centre pushbutton (Guards OFF) deletes
fixed and variable rings.
(2) To change the ON/OFF state of the Plot History
facility, highlight the [HIST] box and press any NOTE:
pushbutton. (1) Subsequent operation of the pushbutton turns the Fixed
(3) To delete all plots, Highlight the DEL ALL box. guard zone off, and the guard zone ring is cancelled.
Press any pushbutton to delete all plots. A
(2) Targets are acquired and marked with a symbol when
warning box is displayed; CLICK AGAIN NOW TO the Guard Zone is activated, further plotting is to be carried
CONFIRM ACTION. out manually by means of SELECT and ACQ (Acquire) for
(4) T o se l e ct B o w Cr o ssi n g Ra n g e / T i m e each target.
(BCR/BCT), the displayed target information is
changed. BCR/BCT data replaces CPA/TCPA.
Variable Guard Zone
(5) To change Target Data Function:
(a) Highlight the BCR/CPA box. 24 Activation of the Variable Ring guard zone is automatic
when the Fixed guard ring is turned on. The Variable
(b) Press any pushbutton to change the functions Ring guard zone appears on the screen at the default
CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT. initialisation range of 7nm to 7.5nm.
CPA/TCPA is replaced with . . . 25 The Variable Ring guard zone can be positioned at any
BCR/BCT readings in the ranges of : range from 0.5nm out to 40nm.
-99.9 to +99.9nm 26 To change the Variable guard ring range, move the
—.- after +/-99.5min trackerball to anywhere on the ring (not at the ends)
and press the SELECT pushbutton. Movement of the
(6) To enable the Labels facility: position the cursor trackerball then changes the range. Pressing SELECT again
over the LABELS box and operate any fixes the new range.
pushbutton. The box outline highlights in red - the
LABELS facility is enabled. To disable this facility
position the cursor over the LABELS box and
operate any pushbutton.
(7) To leave the Plot menu, highlight the END box
and press any pushbutton.

KH 2020
Chap 2a
Bearing Limits TRIAL MANOEUVRE
27 The port and starboard bearing limits of both the Fixed (3) The cursor is automatically placed in the TRIAL
and Variable guard zones default to 45° relative to MANOEUVRE box and the pop-up boxes and the
Ownship’s heading line. Pushbutton Selection box [3] contain the
following:
28 To change the bearing limits:
(1) Select the PLOT menu and Guard function.
Adjust Adjust
(2) Move the trackerball to either end of the Variable Course Speed
guard zone (i.e. port or starboard) and press the
SELECT pushbutton. CD-2071
(3) Move the trackerball to increase or decrease the

angle. Minimum port limit 10° Maximum starboard
limit 180° from ship’s head. (4) If the course/speed requires adjustment, the
implications of the changes can be viewed quickly
(4) Press SELECT pushbutton to enter the new on the display as other target vectors are rotated
value. to show their simulated direction relative to
Ownship.
(5) To de-activate a guard zone move trackerball to
position the cursor on the zone ring, press (5) To adjust the course or speed, press the
SELECT, then press the right-hand pushbutton. appropriate pushbutton and move the trackerball
until the required figure is obtained.
NOTE:
The fixed ring may only be selected at its ends. (6) To exit the Trial Manoeuvre facility, highlight the
TRIAL box and press any pushbutton, or the Trial
Manoeuvre facility can be exited by moving the
TRIAL MENU cursor, using the trackerball, to the radar circle.
Function PLOTTING LIMITATIONS

29 Provides a graphic display of the consequences of an 32 Target plotting using the EPA is limited only by the
intended change of course or speed of Ownship to be Operator’s skill and accuracy when manually plotting
assessed in advance and allows avoiding action to be and updating target positions. The EPA is superior to a
planned, when a potential collision scenario exists. reflection plotter.
Selection NOTE:
Whenever any target manoeuvres (vector leaves target) a
30 Before selecting the trial manoeuvre function, target plot update is required.
vectors should be set to relative so that the results of
an intended course/speed change can be assessed more When two or more targets are close to one another, care
accurately. must be taken to select the correct plot.
31 To select the Trial Manoeuvre menu:
(1) Highlight the TRIAL box and press any
pushbutton.
(2) The CPA/TCPA boxes are replaced as shown
below.
COURSE KT
SPEED deg
CD-2070

KH 2020
Chap 2a
EPA PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION
The following Table provides a list of EPA features and a description of each.
FEATURES EPA DESCRIPTION
PLOTTING MODE Relative Motion (After second plot it is possible to select either True or Relative vector).
GROUND REFERENCE NOT APPLICABLE
VECTOR FACILITIES Vector Mode: Target vectors displayed in Relative when True Motion selected and vice
versa.
Vector Length: 1-30 mins.

LOST TARGETS NOT APPLICABLE
TRACKING NOT APPLICABLE
TARGET DATA Manual target data transmission for selected targets of interest.
ACQUISITION OPTIONS NOT APPLICABLE
PLOTTING RANGE On a radar visible target, up to 96 Nautical miles.
PLOTTING CAPACITY Manual Plotting of up to 20 targets.
Minimum lapsed time between any two plots: greater than 30 seconds.
PLOTTING ACCURACY Course Tolerance: ± 50
Speed Tolerance: ± 1 kt.
Closest Point of Approach Tolerance: ± 0.1nm
Time to Closest Point of Approach Tolerance: ± 2 min.
TARGET SPEED Targets plotted up to relative speed of 75 knots maximum.
OWNSHIP SPEED 99.9knots maximum.
OWNSHIP RATE OF TURN 12 degrees per second maximum.
TARGETS ON A BEARING Up to maximum No. of target plots allowed.
PAST POSITION Past plots may not be equally spaced, but vary according to the Operator controlled manual
plotting interval
TARGET FADING/ PLOT LIMIT After 10 minutes a warning is issued for any plots not updated.
Any plot with a “time between plot updates” exceeding 15 minutes is removed.
RADAR ANTENNA RATE Up to 60rpm (limited by system)
RADAR SIGNAL From digitized video (set by operator for GAIN, RAIN, SEA CLUTTER)
TARGET CORRELATION Correlation by target identification and predicted position.
TRIAL MANOEUVRE Ownship’s manoeuvre simulation in speed and course
SIMULATION(S) Single-scenario - Manually generated targets to assess the consequences of an intended
change of course or speed of Ownship, enables avoiding action to be taken.
TEST DIAGNOSTICS NOT APPLICABLE

KH 2020
Chap 2a

KH 2020
Chap 2b
CHAPTER 2B
RADAR PLOTTING AIDS
INTRODUCTION (4) Vector Mode - Provides the facility of true vectors

when the display is in the RELATIVE motion
mode, and relative vectors when the display is in
1 Nucleus 3 displays are provided with one of three the TRUE motion mode.
types of radar plotting aids:
(5) TCPA/CPA Limit - The limits define the time and
(1) EPA - A manual Electronic Plotting Aid. closest point of approach of a target that triggers
the COLLISION WARNING alarm. The target
(2) ATA - An Automatic Tracking Aid, with manual must violate both parameters to trigger the alarm.
acquisition and limited subset of ARPA functions TCPA limit may be varied between 1 and 60 min.,
in 1 minute increments. CPA limit may be varied
(3) ARPA - A comprehensive Automatic Radar
between 0.1 and 6.0 nautical miles, in increments
Plotting Aid, with manual and automatic
of 0.1 nautical miles. The default values are 15
acquisition and including all ARPA functions.
minutes and 1 nautical mile.
2 This section covers the Automatic Tracking Aid (ATA)
(6) BCR/BCT - Once data is available on a target, the
and the Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (ARPA).
bow crossing range and time can be requested.
(7) Simulation - Provides both a training and test
AUTOMATIC TRACKING AID facility, the standard simulation is an off-line
facility and is based on a known solution. The
known solution is the basis for testing the integrity
INTRODUCTION of the computer.
3 The specification for the Automatic Tracking Aid (ATA) (8) Lost Target - When a target is lost, the red
is provided at the end of this Chapter. warning box produces a ‘WEAK ECHO
SEARCH’ alarm message and a Lost
4 The Automatic Tracking Aid (ATA) is based on the Target symbol (see right) is placed on the
ARPA System and offers a 20 target capacity. Trial display at the last known position of the target. If
Manoeuvre, Target History and Auto Acquisition facilities the Target is of interest, and after 10 sweeps the
are excluded from the ATA. The ATA performance is fully Target has not been found, the Alarm message
compliant with the IMO requirements. ‘LOST TARGET’ is displayed. If the Target is not
of interest, i.e. the range is greater than 3 nautical
5 The ATA utilises a computer, which employs advance miles, has a negative TCPA and is outside the
processing techniques to track targets automatically. forward 45° either side of the Heading Line, it is
deleted.
6 The ATA provides the following facilities:
(9) Tracking Overload - An alarm indicates
(1) Target Acquisition - Target with relative speeds
attempted acquisition of the 21st target and
of up to 150 knots (KT) can be acquired out to a
requires that one or more targets should be
range of 80nm. Up to 20 targets can be acquired
released from tracking.
manually.
(10) Drift Input - Three modes of drift input; Manual -
(2) Guard Zones - Two guard zones are available,
True motion models only 0-99.9KT, GPS -
one preset and one variable. When a target (which
Ownship vector calculation (GPS Fitted) and Plot -
has not previously been acquired) enters a guard
Autodrift calculation using reference targets.
zone, an alarm is given and the ATA automatically
acquires the target. (11) Interfacing - Target data (ATA tracked targets)
outputs are available, in NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162)
(3) Tracking - Acquired radar visible targets are
format.
automatically tracked to a range of 80nm and
vectors are generated, which indicate the course
(CRSE) and speed of the target. all acquired Options
targets can be labelled and data on true target
course (CRSE), true speed, range, bearing 7 As detailed in the Introduction section of this manual.
(BRG), BCR/BCT, CPA and TCPA can be
displayed.
Original 2b.1 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 2b
ATA PLOTTING CONTROLS Target Data

14 To display target data, position the cursor on or near
Acquire Target the required target/vector and press the [Select]
8 To manually acquire a target, position the cursor over pushbutton. The target plot symbols and vector flash; data
the target and press the [ACQ] Acquire pushbutton, on the selected target is displayed/ updated in the TARGET
the target is labelled with a symbol. Within 12 scans a target DATA field every scan.
vector is generated and within 3 minutes the vector is stable. NOTE:
Between acquiring a target and the Computer generating a
Select vector, the TARGET DATA shows Range and Bearing
(BRG). Target course (CRSE) and speed are ‘True’.
9 To select a target, position the cursor over the target
and press and release the [Select] pushbutton. The
target plot symbol and vector flash to acknowledge 15 To vary either the [CPA LIMIT] or the [TCPA LIMIT]
selection. Once the target is selected, full target information select the function and press and hold down the left
is available in the target data field provided that the target is pushbutton, operate the trackerball in the vertical plane to
being tracked. increase or decrease the limit value. Press the centre
pushbutton to enter the minimum (MINIM) value and the
NOTE: right pushbutton to enter the maximum (MAX) value.
When the SELECT pushbutton is pressed the target vector 16 The default values are 15min (TCPA) and 1nm (CPA).
flashes.
Delete ATA ALARMS
10 Position the cursor on the target and press the [Select] 17 ATA Alarms, listed below, are displayed in a RED
pushbutton, press the [Delete] pushbutton and the highlighted box on the right-hand side of the screen. If
tracking/plotting on the target ceases. Targets causing a the ATA computer is not available the following message is
collision warning cannot be deleted until acknowledged. displayed:
NOTE: THE ATA

Ensure that the correct target, map or navigation line or
symbol is selected before pressing the DELETE COMPUTER HAS NOT
pushbutton.
BEEN FITTED
Vector Mode
11 Change the vector presentation mode by positioning
the cursor in the Vector menu; press and hold the [T.
or R. Mode] pushbutton for 4 seconds. The Vector box is 18 With the ATA functioning, warnings produce an
outlined in red to indicate that vectors are displayed in the audible alarm and the following alarm messages may
opposite presentation mode to that of the display, plus a Red be displayed in the highlighted box:
Warning box as below. To return the Vectors to the correct
presentation mode repeat the procedure. This function is not (1) Collision Warning
When a target is
available in Trial Manoeuvre mode. within both CPA and TCPA, a flashing symbol is
generated on the target plus TARGET DATA.
VECTOR MODE
(2) Weak echo Search
SET TO TRUE When a target is lost
this message appears and is always shown until
the target is deleted.
Vector Time (Vector Length) (3) Lost Target
If a target is not seen
12 The vector time can be changed between 1 and 30 for eight consecutive scans the target is counted
minutes, in increments of 1 minute, by pressing and as weak and the Lost Target symbol appears in
operating the trackerball in the vertical plane to increase or the last vector position. If the target is of interest,
decrease the time shown next to VECTORS in the after a further 10 sweeps the target is designated
OWNSHIP DATA field. as ‘Lost’ and an Acknowledge box appears above
the warning box.
13 The default or initial value of vectors is 15 minutes. The
length of the vector is proportional to the speed of the (4) Tracking Overload
target (e.g. target speed 12 knots (KT) then vector length is O c c u r s w h e n th e
3nm, which is the distance the target travels in 15 minutes). computer is tracking to maximum capacity and
any additional target is acquired.
(5) ATA Failure
If the computer fails
after initialisation.
May 01 2b.2 Original

KH 2020
Chap 2b
Alarm De-selection /Operator Action PLOT MENU

19 Unacknowledged alarms cause a flashing red outline
box to be displayed in the alarm box. To acknowledge
Function
the alarms, position the cursor in this box and press any 27 Provides a selection of functions: Deleting all plots and
pushbutton. The box disappears when all alarms are an Electronic ARPA computer reset facility; Selecting
acknowledged. Bow Crossing Range (BCR) or Closest Point of Approach
20 An exception to this is the ‘Collision Warning’ alarm, (CPA). The Labels function applies labels to the targets.
the Red box is not removed until the target is no longer 28 The menu also contains END which removes the
a danger. The following action is permitted: PLOT menu.
(1) Collision - The target vector and square symbol
continue flashing until the parameter violation Selection
ceases. Any other target can be selected whilst a
collision alarm exists. Target data for the selected 29 To select the Plot menu, carry out the following:
target is displayed for 10 seconds; the display
then reverts to the collision target data. (1) H i g h l i g h t t h e P L O T b o x a n d p r e s s a n y
pushbutton.
(2) Lost Target - The resetting of the alarm
automatically removes the Lost Target symbol (2) The Plot menu boxes appear in the lower
from the display. right-hand corner of the screen as shown below.
(3) Tracking Overload - Alarm cancelled by reset LABELS

action; one or more selected targets have to be
deleted to allow for selection of new target.
BCR/
(4) ATA Fault - Return to Standby and reselect [GO CPA
TO RUN].
DEL ALL END
SIMULATION MODE
21 A simulation facility is provided for both a training and a
test purpose. There is one Standard simulation (3) To reset the computer and to delete all plots,
available with ATA, which runs for about 60 minutes. The position the cursor in the DEL ALL box, the box is
simulation is off-line (i.e. Radar Standby) now highlighted. Press any pushbutton to reset
the computer and to delete all plots.
Standard Simulation Mode
A highlighted box appears with the words:
22 Based on a known situation this scenario shows the
targets moving within a 15 mile radius of the radar
origin, refer to Figure 1 - Standard Simulation Mode - Known CLICK AGAIN
Scenario (At Start of Simulation).
NOW TO CONFIRM
Selection ACTION
23 Select [SIM] from the standby menu.
24 The Standard simulation begins after the message: The words in the box change to:
Testing ATA Testing ATA

disappears from the screen. until the computer resets.
(1) Select the 24 mile range to see the simulated

targets. TARGET DATA
30 To change Target Data information:
Terminating the Simulation
CPA/TCPA is replaced with BCR/BCT readings in the
25 To terminate the simulation facility, from either mode, ranges of : -99.9 to +99.9nm, after +/-99.9min.
select the [STANDBY] function highlighting the TX
box, then press the centre pushbutton. (1) Highlight the BCR/CPA box, the box is now
highlighted.
ATA PARAMETERS (2) Press any pushbutton to change the state of
selection.
26 The ATA specification is defined at the rear of this
Chapter.

KH 2020
Chap 2b
LABELS (5) To return to the single target information display,

place the cursor over the bar at the top of the
31 To enable the LABELS facility: target tote display then press the right-hand
pushbutton.
(1) Highlight the LABELS box and operate any
pushbutton. The box outline highlights in red - the
LABELS facility is enabled. To disable this facility PLOTTING LIMITATIONS
position the cursor over the LABELS box and
operate any pushbutton. Target labels are 35 Target plotting limitations using the ATA include the
numbered 1 to the maximum target capacity. The following:
numbers of deleted or lost targets are not used
(1) Operator’s skill and accuracy when manually
until the maximum number is reached.
entering the Ownship’s speed.
(2) Selection of Labels ON identifies the target labels.
NOTE:
(3) To leave the Plot menu, position the cursor in the When using the manual speed input method, the Operator
END box and press any pushbutton. MUST adjust the speed input manually every time that the
Ownship changes speed.
TARGET TOTE For sea stabilised displays, the input speed MUST be
Ownship’s speed over the water NOT over the ground.
32 This shows varied information on multiple targets:
Range/bearing (BRG), speed, course (CRSE), TCPA
(Time to Closest Point of Approach) CPA (Closest Point of (2) A maximum of 20 targets can be tracked at any
Approach) and BCT (Bow Crossing Time) BCR (Bow one time. Attempts to track more than 20 targets
Crossing Range) and can be shown with six targets at once result in a TRACKING OVERLOAD alarm.
simultaneously. NOTE:
33 To execute the facility: To track another target,when 20 are already selected, one
of the currently tracked targets must first be removed from
(1) Select the target from the radar display, place the tracking.
cursor over the target. Press the centre (Select)
pushbutton, the target blinks to verify it has been
chosen. (3) The tracking accuracy of the ATA is ± 2 deg. (or
± 3 deg., within 1 minute of a target manoeuvre).
(2) An information display on the target selected then
appears on the right side of the display. This (4) A maximum of 4 past positions only are displayed
shows target information, as does target tote, but for each tracked target.
can only display it in this way one target at a time.
34 To execute the tote mode:
(1) Place the cursor in the TOTE box, located over to
the top-right of the target information display,
press any of the pushbuttons to activate.
(2) The initial target information display is replaced by
the Target Tote display. This shows information
on the speed/course (CRSE),range/bearing
(BRG), TCPA/CPA and BCT/BCR of six
independent targets.
(3) To switch between the different data types:
(a) Place the cursor over the bar at the top of the
target information display. An information box
appears below the radar display:
Next Next Full

Data Type Data
CD-1949
(b) Select until the data to be analysed appears.

(4) The ranking of the target information can be
arranged. The order can be TCPA within CPA ,
closest CPA or shortest TCPA. To switch through
the different ranking types:
Target Tote display.
(b) Press the centre pushbutton continuously
until the ranking type you want to analyse
appears.

KH 2020
Chap 2b
Range 15 miles
Bearing 350º
Speed 16 kt Range 12 miles
Course 160º Bearing 030º
Speed 12 kt
Course 270º
60 minutes
Range 7.5 miles

Range 10 miles Bearing 015º
Bearing 330º Speed Zero
Speed 16 kt 15 minutes
Course 135º
60 minutes
Own Ship
Speed 10 kt
Course 000º
Relative Motion
North Up
CD-0089
60 minutes
Figure 1 - Four Target Simulation Mode - Known Scenario (At Start of Simulation)

KH 2020
Chap 2b
AUTOMATIC RADAR PLOTTING AID (4) Footprint Acquisition Zones - Provided to allow
automatic acquisition over a defined area around
Ownship.
INTRODUCTION (5) Tracking - Acquired radar visible targets are
automatically tracked to a range of 80nm, and
36 The specification for the Automatic Radar Plotting Aid vectors are generated which indicate the course
(ARPA) is provided at the rear of this chapter. (CRSE) and speed of the target. All acquired
37 The Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (ARPA) facility targets may be labelled, and data on true target
complies with and greatly exceeds the IMO course (CRSE), true speed, range, bearing
requirements for an Automatic Radar Plotting aid. Up to 50 (BRG), BCR/BCT, CPA and TCPA may be
targets can be tracked and acquired, automatically or displayed.
manually. (6) Vector Mode - Provides the facility of true vectors
38 Automatic acquisition options include twin Guard when the display is in the RELATIVE motion
Zones, Sectors (Not EU) and Footprint Acquisition mode, and relative vectors when the display is in
Zones (FAZ). The ARPA performance is fully compliant the TRUE motion mode.
with the IMO resolutions A422 and A823 for ARPA. (7) Target History - Displays a target track history,
39 The ARPA computer employs advanced processing showing 4 past positions for each target,
techniques to acquire and track targets automatically. representing 2 minute intervals.
Data on all tracked targets can be transmitted via an RS232 (8) Reference Targets - Tracked targets may be
serial link to a navigation system, plotter or terminal. A designated as Reference Targets and used for
second RS232 serial link provides an external diagnostic ground stabilisation.
facility. Radar Operator controls are similar to those
described in Chapter 1, any variations are described in this (9) Autodrift - Drift is automatically calculated using
chapter. the average movement of designated Reference
Targets or using data from a navigation system
40 The design of the ARPA computer includes software (e.g. GPS).
and hardware components that minimise the effects of
error sources on tracking accuracy and also minimise target (10) Anchor Watch - All designated Fixed Targets are
swap. However, as with all tracking systems, error sources, monitored for movement relative to Ownship, and
such as excessive clutter or poor signal to noise ratio, have a if any one target moves in excess of the Anchor
detrimental effect on accuracy. The following describes the Watch limit, the ANCHOR WATCH alarm is
effects of error sources on ALL ARPA tracking systems: triggered.
(1) Low signal - to - noise - Targets may appear to (11) TCPA/CPA LIMIT - The limits define the time and
fade on the display. The ARPA may indicate a closest point of approach of a target that triggers
WEAK ECHO alarm and, in extreme cases, lose the COLLISION WARNING alarm. The target
the target. Other echoes appearing in the track must violate both parameters to trigger the alarm.
window during this period may be assumed to be TCPA LIMIT may be varied between 1 and 60 min.
the required echo. in 1 minute increments, CPA LIMIT may be varied
between 0.1 and 6.0 nautical miles in increments
(2) Low signal - to - clutter - Clutter returns and of 0.1 nautical miles. The default values are 15
echoes may merge on the display. This may minutes and 1 nautical mile.
cause the ARPA to malfunction during this period,
possibly by not detecting a manoeuvre, or by (12) BCR/BCT - Once data is available on a target the
losing vector stability. bow crossing range and time may be requested.
(3) Side lobes/reflections - Particular settings of the (13) Trial Manoeuvre - Simulates the intended
display, or poor siting of the antenna may cause change of course (CRSE) or speed to assess
the ARPA to lose accuracy, particularly in its planned action in advance either for navigational
ability to determine the true bearing of the echo, purposes or when a potential collision situation
and hence the CPA. exists.
41 The ARPA function provides the following facilities: (14) Simulation - Provides both a training and test
facility, the standard simulation is based on a
(1) Target Acquisition - Target with relative speeds known solution. The known solution is the basis
of up to 150 knots (KT) can be acquired out to a for testing the integrity of the ARPA computer.
range of 80 nm. Up to 50 targets may be acquired
either manually, using the cursor, or automatically (15) Lost Target - When a target is lost, the red
using guard zones. Auto acquisition is also warning box produces a ‘WEAK ECHO
possible by sectors or Footprint Acquisition Zones SEARCH’ alarm message and a Lost
(FAZ). Target symbol is placed on the display at
the last known position of the target. If the Target
(2) Guard Zones - Two guard zones are available, is of interest, and after 10 sweeps the Target has
one preset, the other variable. When a target, not been found, the Alarm message ‘LOST
which has not previously been acquired, enters a TARGET’ is displayed. If the Target is not of
guard zone, an alarm is given, and the ARPA interest, i.e. the range is greater than 3 nautical
automatically acquires the target. miles, has a negative TCPA and is outside the
forward 45° either side of the Heading Line, it is
(3) Zone Acquisition - Fourteen sectors are deleted.
available, either inclusion or exclusion, ship’s
head or north stabilised and can be stored.

KH 2020
Chap 2b
(16) Tracking Overload - An alarm indicates Vector Mode
attempted acquisition of the 51st target. To track
an another target, requires one or more currently 46 Change the vector presentation mode by positioning
tracked targets to be released from tracking. the cursor in the Vector menu; press and hold the
centre pushbutton [Mode] for 4 seconds. The Vector box is
(17) Mapping - External NAVCARD used for map outlined in red to indicate that vectors are displayed in the
storage and retrieval. Several cards can be used opposite presentation mode to that of the display, plus a Red
for multi-map storage. Each card can store Warning box as below. To return the Vectors to the correct
approximately 64Kbytes of features. Flexible presentation mode repeat the procedure, but only pushing
partitioning is arranged to store different maps. the button momentarily.
Maps can be land stabilised in any mode and can
be stabilised by SATNAV or GPS. Auto map
positioning facility, uses smoothed ship’s position. VECTOR MODE
(18) Drift Input - Three modes of drift input; Manual - SET TO TRUE
True motion models only 0-99.9KT, GPS -
Ownship vector calculation (GPS Fitted) and Plot -
Autodrift calculation using reference targets.
NOTE:
(19) Interfacing - Target data (ARPA tracked targets) If the cursor is outside the radar area, the left pushbutton
outputs are available in NMEA 0183 format. gives direct access to vector mode without moving the
cursor into the vector box.
(20) System Failure - Is indicated by an audible alarm
and the display reverts to Radar only until the fault
is cleared. Vector Time
47 The vector time can be changed between 1 and 30
Options minutes, in increments of 1 minute, by pressing and
operating the trackerball in the vertical plane to increase or
42 As detailed in the Introduction section of this manual, decrease the time shown next to VECTORS in the
except that the Additional NAVCARD external Maps OWNSHIP DATA field.
and Serial Comms Adapter Board are fitted to ARPA as
Standard. 48 The default or initial value of vectors is 15 minutes. The
length of the vector is proportional to the speed of the
target (e.g. target speed 12 knots (KT) then vector length is
ARPA PLOTTING CONTROLS 3nm, which is the distance the target travels in 15 minutes).
Acquire Target Target Data

43 To manually acquire a target, position the cursor over 49 To display target data, position the cursor on or near
the target and press the [ACQ] Acquire pushbutton, the required target/vector and press the [Select]
the target is labelled with a symbol. Within 12 scans a target pushbutton. The target plot symbols and vector flash; data
vector is generated and within 3 minutes the vector is stable. on the selected target is displayed/ updated in the TARGET
DATA field every scan.
Select
NOTE:
44 To select a target, position the cursor over the target Between acquiring a target and the ARPA generating a
and press and release the [Select] pushbutton. The vector, the TARGET DATA shows Range and Bearing
target plot symbol and vector flash to acknowledge (BRG) only. Target course (CRSE) and speed are ‘True’.
selection. Once the target is selected, full target information
is available in the target data field provided that the target is 50 To vary either the [CPA LIMIT] or the [TCPA LIMIT]
being tracked. select the function and press and hold down the left
NOTE: pushbutton, operate the trackerball in the vertical plane to
increase or decrease the limit value. Press the centre
When the SELECT pushbutton is pressed the target vector pushbutton to enter the minimum (MINIM) value and the
flashes. right pushbutton to enter the maximum (MAX) value.
Delete 51 The default values are 15min (TCPA) and 1nm (CPA).
45 Position the cursor on the target and press the [Select]

pushbutton, press the [Delete] pushbutton and the
tracking/plotting on the target ceases. Targets causing a
collision warning cannot be deleted until acknowledged.
NOTE:
Ensure that the correct target, map or navigation line or
symbol is selected before pressing the DELETE
pushbutton.

KH 2020
Chap 2b
Past History Bearing Limits

52 Target Past History can be displayed by selecting 60 The port and starboard bearing limits of both the Fixed
[PAST POSn] from the radar menus next to the radar and Variable guard zones default to 45° relative to
display and pressing any pushbutton to select ON. From the Ownship’s.
selection time onwards, the four past positions, separated by
a period of two minutes are displayed for every target which 61 To change the bearing limits select the [PLOT] menu
is being tracked. and [GUARD] function. Move the trackerball to the
either end of the guard ring that is to be adjusted (i.e. port or
NOTE: starboard) and press the [Select] pushbutton. Move the
A823 has variable history. trackerball to increase or decrease the angle, Minimum port
limit 15° Maximum starboard limit 180° from ship’s head.
Press [Select] pushbutton to enter the new value. To
53 Past History information is True in True Motion TM(T) de-activate a guard ring press [Select], position the
and Relative Motion RM(T) modes and Relative in trackerball anywhere on the ring and then press the
Relative Motion RM(R) mode. right-hand pushbutton.
NOTE:
GUARD ZONES
The fixed ring can only be selected at its ends.
54 Two Guard Zones are available, one Fixed and the
other Variable, each zone is preset to 0.5nm wide. ARPA ALARMS
Fixed Zone 62 ARPA Alarms, listed below, are displayed in a RED
highlighted box on the right-hand side of the screen. If
55 The Fixed guard zone is preset at 5.5nm to 6.0nm. the ARPA computer is not available the following message is
displayed:
56 To activate the Fixed and Variable guard zones,
select [GUARD] in the [PLOT] menu and press any
THE ARPA
pushbutton, the Fixed guard zone appears on the screen at
5.5nm to 6.0nm. The Variable guard zone appears on the COMPUTER HAS NOT
screen at 7 nm to 7.5 nm and can be adjusted from 1.25nm
to 40nm. The pop-down box allows selection of the zones BEEN FITTED
‘Active’ or ‘Switched Off’.
NOTE:
(1) Turning the Fixed Guard Zone off automatically
removes the Variable Guard Zone. 63 With the ARPA functioning, warnings produce an
audible alarm and the following alarm messages may
(2) Targets acquired and tracked when the Guard Zone was be displayed in the highlighted box:
activated, continue to be tracked when the Guard Zone is
switched off. (1) Collision Warning
When a target is
within both CPA and TCPA, a flashing symbol is
Variable Zone generated on the target.
57 Activation of the Variable guard zone is automatic (2) Weak echo Search
when the Fixed guard zone is turned on. The variable When a target is lost
zone cannot be displayed alone without also displaying the this message appears and is always shown until
fixed zone. the target is deleted.
58 The Variable guard zone can be positioned to any (3) Lost Target
range from 1.25nm out to 40nm. If a target is not seen
for eight consecutive scans the target is counted
59 To change the Variable guard zone range, move the as weak and the Lost Target symbol appears in
trackerball to anywhere on the zone (not at the ends) the last vector position. If the target is of interest,
and press the [Select] pushbutton. Movement of the after a further 10 sweeps the target is designated
trackerball then changes the range. Pressing [Select] again as ‘Lost’ and an Acknowledge box appears above
fixes the new range. the warning box.
(4)
TARGET DELETED
IN MUTE SECTOR
When a target
enters a Mute Sector it is automatically deleted
and this message is displayed.

KH 2020
Chap 2b
(5) Anchor Watch SIMULATION MODE
If anchor watch limits
are in operation (anchor symbol over target) and 66 A simulation facility is provided for both a training and
the selected target moves more than the Anchor a test purpose. Three simulation modes are available
Watch limit, an anchor symbol is generated over and run for about 60 minutes. The following facilities are
the target. disabled while in Simulation Mode:
(6) Tracking Overload Changing the Heading
O ccu r s when Changing the Speed Input
computer is tracking to maximum capacity and an Changing the Stabilisation
additional target is acquired.
Changing the Drift.
(7) New Target
Targets automatically (1) Select the 24 mile range.
acquired by the guard rings, show an inverted
triangle symbol. Scenario 1 - Four Target Simulation
(8) ARPA Failure
If the computer fails 67 Based on a known situation this scenario shows the
after initialisation. targets moving within a 15 mile radius of the radar
origin, refer to Figure 2 - Standard Simulation Mode - Known
Scenario.
Alarm De-selection /Operator Action
64 Unacknowledged alarms cause a flashing red outlined
Selection
box to be displayed in the alarm box. To acknowledge 68 Select [SIM] from the standby menu then press the
the alarms, position the cursor in this highlighted box and left-hand pushbutton.
press any pushbutton. The box disappears when all alarms
are acknowledged.
Scenario 2 - Two Rings of Twenty-Five Simulation
65 An exception to this is the ‘Collision Warning’ alarm,
the Red box is not removed until the target is no longer 69 This scenario is used for the testing of Sectors and
a danger. The following action is permitted: Guard Zones and consists of 2 rings of 25 targets. The
first ring at 6.0nm and the second ring at 10.0nm.
(1) Collision - The target vector and square symbol
continue flashing until the parameter violation 70 The targets circle Ownship’s position at the starting
ceases. Any other target can be selected whilst a point at an ever expanding radius. Ownship’s course
collision alarm exists. Target data for the selected (CRSE) 000 degrees, LogSpeed 10 knots (KT).
target is displayed for 10 seconds; the display
then reverts to the collision target data. Selection
(2) Lost Target - The resetting of the alarm 71 Select [SIM] from the standby menu then press the
automatically removes the Lost Target symbol centre pushbutton.
from the display.
(3) Anchor Watch - Alarm cancelled by reset action; Scenario 3 - Fifty Target Simulation
the anchor symbol may be removed by
reselecting the target. 72 This scenario can be used for the testing of Polyzones.
It consists of a grid of targets all of which are travelling
(4) Tracking Overload - Alarm cancelled by reset away from Ownship. Refer to Annex A for a detailed
action; one or more selected targets have to be description of targets course (CRSE), bearing (BRG), speed
deleted to allow for selection of new target. and initial range.
(5) New Target - Reset by acknowledgment of the Selection
alarm.
73 Select [SIM] from the standby menu then press the
(6) ARPA fault - Return to Standby and reselect [GO right-hand pushbutton.
TO RUN].
Terminating the Simulation
74 To terminate the simulation facility, select the
[STANDBY] function highlighting the TX box, then
press the centre pushbutton.

KH 2020
Chap 2b
Range 15 miles
Bearing 350º
Speed 16 kt Range 12 miles
Course 160º Bearing 030º
Speed 12 kt
Course 270º
60 minutes
Range 7.5 miles

Range 10 miles Bearing 015º
Bearing 330º Speed Zero
Speed 16 kt 15 minutes
Course 135º
60 minutes
Own Ship
Speed 10 kt
Course 000º
Relative Motion
North Up
CD-0089
60 minutes
Figure 2 - Four Target Simulation Mode - Known Scenario

KH 2020
Chap 2b
PLOT MENU (3) To reset the ARPA computer and to delete all
plots, position the cursor in the DEL ALL box, the
box is now highlighted. Press any pushbutton to
Function reset the computer and to delete all plots.
75 Provides a selection of functions: Guard zone
A highlighted box appears with the words:
activities, i.e. switching ON/OFF and setting Variable
zone range and bearing (BRG); Deleting all plots and an
Electronic ARPA computer reset facility; Selecting Bow
Crossing Range (BCR) or Closest Point of Approach (CPA)
CLICK AGAIN
also contains selection of Reference Targets and Sectors. NOW TO CONFIRM
The Labels function applies labels to the targets. The menu
also contains END which exits the menu. ACTION
Selection
76 To select the Plot menu: Sector Selection (Not EU)
(1) H i g h l i g h t t h e P L O T b o x a n d p r e s s a n y 78 To include/exclude sectors:

pushbutton.
(1) Ensure Footprint Acquisition Zones are turned off.
(2) The Plot menu boxes appear in the lower
(2) Highlight the ZONES box, pop-down boxes
right-hand corner of the screen as shown below.
appear with: Sect, Poly, FAZ. Press the left-hand
pushbutton and the following menu appears:
CD-4767
Ref. Target
CD-2075
77 To operate the Reference Target function:
(1) Select a target on the Radar screen, highlight the (3) A Sector Storage Level indication is provided
REF TGT box, the pop-down menu reads; Fix, along the bottom of the Sector Selection menu. If
Unfix, Anchor. the Sector storage becomes full a SECTOR
STORAGE FULL warning message is displayed
(2) Press the appropriate pushbutton to Fix (Unfix) and some stored Sectors may need to be
the selected target. An ‘R’ appears on the selected removed to create space for new sectors.
target and the Drift Input changes to ‘Fixed
Target’. If ‘Anchor Target’ is selected the ‘R’ is (4) To load previously saved sectors, scroll the
replaced with an anchor in a box, and the Drift selection box until required sector appears.
Input changes to Anchor Watch. When the limit is Highlight the sector and press the left-hand
violated, the Red Alarm box contains the words: pushbutton.
(5) To create a sector, highlight [Create] and press
ACKNOWLEDGE ALARM any pushbutton. A dotted inclusive/exclusive
sector appears on the display, the information
menu states: Plot, Select. Press the centre
ANCHOR WATCH pushbutton to select that Sector. The following
menu appears:
Active
Zones De- Rings

NOTES: Active Select FAZ
Off
(1) After the Anchor Alarm has been acknowledged, the
target reverts to a reference target. If Anchor Watch is still CD-1 9 5 8
required, it must be reactivated.

(2) When more than one target is annotated as ‘Fixed’ the (6) Press the left-hand pushbutton to activate the
ARPA may drop a reference target if that target’s sector.
parameters vary considerably from those of other (7) Place the cursor over the sector outline and press
Reference Targets. the centre pushbutton. Set the sector size by
selecting and then moving each edge to the
required position, when correct press the centre
pushbutton.

KH 2020
Chap 2b
(8) Any sector may be deleted by placing the cursor (5) To activate the FAZ, once in the correct position,
over the sector and pressing the right-hand select a part of the menu box and press the
pushbutton. right-hand pushbutton.
NOTE: (6) To turn ‘Off’ the FAZ, if active, select the FAZ
The sector to be created can be selected to Ship or North menu and press the right-hand pushbutton.
Stabilised headings by highlighting SHIP/NORTH and
pressing any pushbutton,the sector may also be set to Polyzones (Not EU)
inclusive/exclusive by highlighting INCLUSIVE/
EXCLUSIVE and pressing any pushbutton. The sectors are 80 Polyzones are used to surround targets which are not
colour coded, Cyan for Inclusive and Red for Exclusive.
required to be selected using the Auto target selection
methods. Any target inside a polyzone during AUTO
(9) When an unplotted target enters an active TARGET ACQUISITION is not selected.
inclusion sector it is automatically acquired unless
it is also in an active exclusion zone. Up to Creating Polyzones
fourteen inclusion/exclusion sectors may be
active at any one time. To save the created 81 To create polyzones:
sectors, select an empty space on the menu and
press the centre pushbutton. (1) Position the cursor over the ZONES box. Three
pop-down information boxes appear below:
(10) [CLR], when highlighted and selected, clears the
current sectors from the display.
Sect Poly FAZ
(11) [END], when highlighted and selected, returns to
the PLOT menu. CD-1 9 6 1
(2) Further detailed information is shown below the

Footprint Acquisition Zones Selection radar display. Press the centre pushbutton. The
following Polyzone menu is displayed:
79 The Footprint Acquisition Zone (FAZ) allows an area
around Ownship to be defined, in which all echoes are
acquired and tracked. To operate the FAZ function:
(1) Ensure all sectors are deleted.
(2) Highlight the [ZONES] box, pop-down boxes
appear with: Sect, Poly, FAZ. Press the
right-hand pushbutton, the following menu
appears:
Fwd Range 6.8nm

Stern Range 4.1nm
Port Clear 1.6nm CD-4847
Stbd Clear 3.0nm
Minim Range 1.0nm (3) A Polyzone Storage Level indication is provided
Blind Sec 20deg along the bottom of the Polyzone Menu. If the
polyzone storage becomes full, a POLYZONE
CD-1960
STORAGE FULL warning message is displayed
and some stored polyzones may need to be
(3) The FAZ appears as a dotted area, if Off and solid
removed to create space for new polyzones.
line if On (see below).
(4) Before drawing the polyzones, first check that the
polyzones are enabled. This information is shown
in the new menu (see above). If the centre box
reads POLYZONES ARE ON the polyzones
function is enabled. To change between the
polyzones on and off, position the cursor over the
centre box below the radar display and press the
pushbutton.
Drawing Polyzones
82 To draw the polyzones:
(1) Place the cursor over the desired starting point on
the radar display. Three new information boxes
appear below the radar display:
Start Sel Stop

(4) To adjust the FAZ, move the cursor over the line or
arc to be adjusted and press the centre ‘Select’ CD-1 9 5 5
pushbutton. Move the cursor to the required

position and press the ‘Deselect’ pushbutton. (2) To draw the first line of the polyzone press the
left-hand pushbutton.

KH 2020
Chap 2b
(3) Draw the line, the end of the first line “sticks” to the (2) Press the centre pushbutton, the polyzones are
cursor. Position the cursor where the first line is to then saved in the specific file space, with a given
end and the second line is to start. name for reference when retrieving.
(4) Press the left-hand pushbutton, this locks the first Loading Polyzones
line down, and allows the positioning of the end of
the second line in the same way as the first line. 87 To load a file:
Continue until enough “sides” of the polyzone
have been created. (1) Position the cursor over the required file name in
the file selection area and press the left-hand
(5) To close the polyzone, so that both ends join up, pushbutton.
press either the centre or the right-hand
pushbutton. (2) If file spaces run out a POLYZONE STORAGE
FULL warning message is displayed and a saved
(6) If another polyzone is to be created, repeat steps file will need to be deleted (by placing the cursor
(1) to (5) above. over the specified file and pressing the right-hand
pushbutton) to allow a new polyzone file to be
NOTE: loaded.
The limit to create the polyzones is fifty lines e.g. one
polyzone may be drawn with fifty sides (lines), or ten 88 To exit and return to the main menu area, first position
polyzones each with five sides (lines) maximum. the cursor over the EXIT box and press any
pushbutton. Once out of that menu, position the cursor over
Editing Polyzones the END box and press any pushbutton.
83 To edit the polyzones: 89 To clear all of the polyzones:
(1) Select the area for editing by positioning the (1) Place the cursor over the CLEAR box. An
cursor over the polyzone side that is to be information box appears:
changed, press the centre pushbutton.
(2) Then manipulate the shape of that polyzone side USE ANY KEY
by moving the cursor, the polyzone side “sticks” to
the cursor.
(3) While editing the side, the information display (2) Pressing any pushbutton clears all of the
changes to show: polyzones displayed at that time.
Guard Zones
Drop Delete
90 The operation of the Guard function is fully described
CD-1 9 5 4 in Paragraphs 75 to 82 - GUARD ZONES.
(4) When the shape of the side being edited is correct, Target Data
press the centre pushbutton.
91 To change Target Data information:
Deleting Polyzones
84 To delete a polyzone: CPA/TCPA is replaced with BCR/BCT readings in the
ranges of : -99.9 to +99.9nm
(1) Select the required polyzone and then press the —.- after +/-99.5min.
right-hand pushbutton .
(1) Highlight the BCR/CPA box, the box is now
85 Three options exist when the polyzones have been highlighted.
created:
(2) Press any pushbutton to change the state of
(1) To save the configuration of polyzones selection.
(2) To clear the configuration of polyzones
Labels
(3) To exit and return to the previous menu area.
92 To enable the LABELS facility:
NOTE:
(1) Highlight the LABELS box and operate any
Save the configuration if possible, as creating the polyzones
can be time consuming. pushbutton. The box outline highlights in red - the
LABELS facility is enabled. To disable this facility
Saving Polyzones position the cursor over the LABELS box and
operate any pushbutton. Target labels are
86 To save a polyzone: numbered 1 to the maximum target capacity. The
numbers of deleted or lost targets are not used
(1) Position the cursor over an empty file space in the until the maximum number is reached.
file selection area. Three information boxes
appear below the radar display: (2) Selection of Labels ON identifies the target labels.
(3) To leave the Plot menu, position the cursor in the
END box and press any pushbutton.
Load Save Delete
CD-1 9 5 1

KH 2020
Chap 2b
TRIAL MENU Delay

96 The delay may be set to any value, in 1 minute
Function increments from 1 to 30 minutes. The delay counts
93 Provides a graphical display of an intended change down to zero, from the selected delay period.
of course (CRSE) or speed of Ownship which can then 97 The delay is adjusted using the trackerball in the
be assessed in advance, enabling avoiding action to be vertical plane whilst pressing the DELAY pushbutton.
planned, when a potential collision exists. At delay time ‘zero’, the trial is cancelled, menu area cleared,
‘TRIAL’ legend cancelled, and the display reverts to normal
NOTE: operation.
Trial manoeuvre vectors are Relative only.
Trial Course/Speed/Time
Selection
98 The TRIAL COURSE operates in 5 deg steps, while
94 To select the Trial Manoeuvre menu, carry out the the TRIAL SPEED operates in 1 knot increments (0-99
following: knots). For example, if default Ownship course is 118 deg
true, starboard trial course adjustment selects 123, 128,
(1) Highlight the [TRIAL] box and press any
133, 138 etc.
pushbutton.
(2) The LAT/LON boxes are replaced as shown 99 The trial course and speed are varied by moving the
below. trackerball in the vertical plane whilst pressing the
COURSE or SPEED pushbutton, as appropriate.
TRIAL MANOEUVRE 100 The trial manoeuvre functions in True motion TM(T),
Relative motion RM(T) and Relative motion RM(R)
{For modes. In Relative motion, a TRIAL COURSE LINE radiates
COURSE deg from Ownship to indicate the proposed heading.
SPEED KT {Information
101 In True motion TM(T), Ownship’s vector is displayed
DELAY min {Only along the heading line, then turns onto the TRIAL
CD-1943 COURSE. The DELAY TIME is defined as the time from the
initialisation of the delay period to the time that Ownship has
completed the manoeuvre.
(3) The cursor is automatically placed in the TRIAL 102 Collision targets in Trial mode are designated with a
MANOEUVRE box and the pop-up boxes and the triangle symbol.
Pushbutton Selection boxes [3] contain the
following:
Adjust Adjust Adjust

Course Speed Delay
CD-1 9 4 7
(4) If the course (CRSE)/speed/delay (ARPA)

requires adjustment, the implications of the
changes can be viewed quickly on the display as
other target vectors show their new directions
relative to Ownship.
NOTE:
The delay provides a means of delaying the result of the
Trial Manoeuvre for the stipulated period.
(5) To adjust the speed, course or delay press the

appropriate pushbutton and move the trackerball
until the required figure is obtained.
(6) To exit the Trial Manoeuvre facility, position the
cursor in the [TRIAL] box and press any
pushbutton.
95 The course and speed defaults to Ownship’s present
course and speed (i.e. values at the instant ‘trial’ is
activated). The delay (time before the manoeuvre is
initiated) defaults to 10 minutes.
NOTE:
If a previous Trial has not finished, the defaults will not be
used.

KH 2020
Chap 2b
TXA X MP PM 350 000 010 RANGE 12 HDG 130 deg

340 020 RINGS 2
330 030 North up M.SPD 16.5 KT
Correlator Centred COG 130 deg
IR 320 040
RM(T) SOG 16.5 KT
VIDEO HL STAB SEA
NORM 310 050
OFF SET SEA
DRIFT SEA
300 060 T. PAST POSN OFF
T. VECTOR 15 min (R/T)
T. TRAILS 3 min (R/T)
290 070
CPA LIMIT 2.0 min
TCPA LIMIT 20.0 min
Pop Down
280 080 TRIAL MAN Box
COURSE 177 deg
SPEED 16.5 KT
270 090
DELAY 3.0 min
Alarm
Box
260 100
TARGET 1 E Plot 3
250 110 Updated 0.9 mins ago Only
BRG 039.3º (T)
RANGE 3.3 nm
240 120 COURSE 349º (T)
SPEED 2.7 KT
OFF CPA 3.2 nm
VRM nm 230 130 TCPA 2.2 min
OFF CURSOR
OFF 220 TRIAL 140
EBL deg 8.70 nm WAY Pt NAV
OFF 210
150
212.9º (T)
G R PLOT MAPS
S A 200 160
A
7 E 3 0 190 170
I
N A
I
N
180 TRIAL VDU
CD-2519
Figure 3 - Example of Trial Manoeuvre Screen

KH 2020
Chap 2b
TARGET TOTE PLOTTING LIMITATIONS

103 This shows varied information on multiple targets: 106 Target plotting limitations using the ARPA include the
Range/bearing (BRG), speed/course (CRSE), TCPA following:
(Time to Closest Point of Approach) CPA (Closest Point of
Approach) and BCT (Bow Crossing Time) BCR (Bow (1) Operator’s skill and accuracy when manually
Crossing Range) and can be shown with six targets entering the Ownship’s speed.
simultaneously. NOTE:
104 To execute the facility: When using the manual speed input method, the Operator
MUST adjust the speed input manually every time that the
(1) Select a target from the radar display, place the Ownship changes speed.
cursor over the target, press the centre
pushbutton (Select), the target blinks to verify it For sea stabilised displays, the input speed MUST be
has been chosen. Ownship’s speed over the water NOT over the ground.
(2) An information display on the target selected then
appears on the right side of the display. This (2) A maximum of 50 targets can be tracked at any
shows target information, as does target tote, but one time. Attempts to track more than 50 targets
can only display it in this way one target at a time. at once result in a TRACKING OVERLOAD alarm.
105 To execute the tote mode: NOTE:

To track another target,when 50 are already selected, one
(1) Place the cursor in the TOTE box, located over to of the currently tracked targets must first be removed from
the top-right of the target information display, tracking.
press any of the pushbuttons to activate.
(2) The initial target information display is replaced by (3) The tracking accuracy of the ARPA is ± 2 deg. (or
the Target Tote display. This shows information ± 3 deg. for 1 minute duration, following target
on the speed/course (CRSE), range/bearing manoeuvre).
(BRG), TCPA/CPA and BCT/BCR of six
independent targets. (4) A maximum of 4 past positions only are displayed
for each tracked target.
(3) To switch between the different data types:
target information display. An information box
appears below the radar display:
Next Next Full

Data Type Data
CD-1949
(b) Select until the data to be analysed appears.

(4) The ranking of the target information may be
arranged. The order may be TCPA within CPA ,
closest CPA or shortest TCPA. To switch through
the different ranking types:
Target Tote display.
(b) Press the centre pushbutton continuously
until the ranking type you want to analyse
appears.
(5) To return to the single target information display,
place the cursor over the bar at the top of the
target tote display then press the right-hand
pushbutton.
NOTE:
The tote may be removed and replaced by full TARGET
DATA should a warning situation develop (e.g. Collision
Warning) or any other target selected using the cursor.

KH 2020
Chap 2b
50 TARGET SIMULATION - NUMBERING SYSTEM
107 Targets are in 5 rows of 10 columns, with Ownship in 109 This numbering system is arbitrary and is merely to
the centre of the ‘grid’. Ownship has a heading of 0000 allow identification of the target echoes used in the
and a log speed of 10KT. simulation. The ARPA may not necessarily adopt this
numbering sequence.
108 Target 1 is specified as top left corner, i.e. row 1,
column 1. Target 50 is bottom right (5, 10). Target 110 All values in the following table are nominal, with no
numbering is sequential, returning to the beginning of the decimal precision given. Deviations may be up to + 1.0
next row when at the end of the current row, i.e. target 11 is indicated units, i.e. 10 may be in the range 9.0 to 11.0.
row 2, column 1.
Target Number True Bearing True Course True Speed Range at Start
1 294 340 15 10
2 300 344 14 8
3 309 350 14 6
4 323 355 14 5
5 345 355 13 4
6 12 360 13 4
7 34 4 12 5
8 49 10 12 6
9 59 12 13 8
10 65 16 13 10
11 284 337 13 9
12 287 341 12 7
13 293 345 12 5
14 304 350 11 4
15 330 355 11 2
16 22 360 11 2
17 55 5 11 4
18 69 10 11 5
19 75 16 11 7
20 79 21 11 9
21 270 333 11 9
22 270 338 10 7
23 268 342 10 5
24 265 348 10 3
25 254 354 9 1
26 116 0 9 1
27 100 6 9 3
28 97 13 9 5
29 95 20 9 7
30 95 26 9 9
31 257 326 8 9
32 254 334 9 7
33 248 339 8 5
34 236 345 8 4
35 206 352 7 2
36 155 0 7 2
37 125 8 7 4
38 113 17 7 5
39 107 25 7 7
40 103 33 7 9
41 245 320 7 10
42 239 325 7 8
43 231 332 6 6
44 216 339 6 5
45 194 350 5 4
46 166 0 5 4
47 144 12 5 5
48 130 23 5 6
49 121 34 5 8
50 115 43 5 10

KH 2020
Chap 2b
ATA/ARPA PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION
The following Table provides a list of ATA and ARPA features and a description of each.
FEATURES ATA DESCRIPTION ARPA DESCRIPTION
TRACKING MODE Relative Motion Relative Motion

GROUND NOT APPLICABLE Ownship SOG, COG data plus a number of fixed
REFERENCE (reference) targets - average of which gives the Set and
Drift.
VECTOR Vector Mode: Target vectors displayed in Relative As ATA
FACILITIES when True Motion selected and vice versa.
Vector Length: 1-30 mins.

LOST TARGETS Lost Target (searching) Warning given for targets not As ATA
seen for 8 consecutive scans. After searching (last
known course (CRSE) & speed) for 12 further scans
Lost Target alarm given.
Lost Target alarms only issued for targets:

- within 3nm radius of Ownship.
- with positive TCPA.
- within the forward 90 degree sector, relative to
Ownship.
Lost Target alarm: 5 seconds.
Visual alarm
Audible alarm (optional)
Indicate the last position in
which the target was searched
for.
TRACKING Placement resolution & data extraction resolution As ATA
WINDOWS equal and dependent on maximum tracking range
required.
Maximum Resolution: 5 yards.
Window Size : Variable & dependent on target

status.
TRACKING Within ± 2 degrees. As ATA
ACCURACY
Within ± 3 degrees for 1 minute after a manoeuvre is
completed.
Turn Trend indication, dependent on speed of target

& antenna rotation rate.
TARGET DATA Auto and Manual target data transmission for As ATA
selected/all targets of interest.
ACQUISITION Manual acquisition of targets. Manual acquisition of targets.
OPTIONS
Automatic acquisition in a radial defined area or FAZ.
ACQUISITION 0.1 to 40 Nautical miles. 0.1 to 80 Nautical miles.
RANGE
ACQUISITION Vector for normally acquired target displayed after 11 As ATA.
SPEED scans.
TRACKING Autotracking: up to 20 targets. Autotracking: up to 50 targets.
CAPACITY
TRACKING 12 bit azimuth resolution (4096) As ATA.
RESOLUTION
Maximum 5 yards resolution
TARGET SWAP Enhanced rejection of target swap. As ATA.
TARGET SPEED Normal target’s track, relative speed = 150knots As ATA.
maximum.
OWNSHIP SPEED 99.9knots maximum. As ATA.

KH 2020
Chap 2b
FEATURES ATA DESCRIPTION ARPA DESCRIPTION
OWNSHIP RATE 20 degrees per second maximum. As ATA

OF TURN
TARGETS ON A Up to maximum No. of targets tracks allowed. As ATA
BEARING
TARGET HISTORY Variable (can be scaled for range selected)
(ATA)
12 minutes. Four 3 minute history positions.
PAST POSITION Variable up to 2 minutes in 30 second intervals for each

(ARPA) target tracked.
A maximum of four past positions are available for each

target.
TARGET FADING Up to 20 consecutive scans. Time dependent on As ATA.
scanner rate.
RADAR AERIAL Up to 60rpm As ATA.
RATE
RADAR SIGNAL From digitized video (set by operator for GAIN, RAIN, As ATA.
SEA CLUTTER)
TARGET Correlation by target identification and predicted As ATA.
CORRELATION position.
TRIAL NOT APPLICABLE Ownship’s manoeuvre simulation in speed, course
MANOEUVRE (CRSE) and time delay.
SIMULATION(S) Single-scenario - ATA generated targets to test and Multi-scenario - ARPA generated targets to test and
demonstrate tracking ability. demonstrate acquisition and tracking ability.
TEST Computer self-test watchdog monitors system and As ATA.
DIAGNOSTICS indicates any failures.
Test programs available to operate (requires an

external PC to be connected).

KH 2020
Chap 2b

KH 2020
Chap 3
CHAPTER 3
INTERPRETING THE PPI DISPLAY & SART OPERATION
INTRODUCTION Blind Arcs

8 Where the path of the transmitted energy is interrupted
1 This Chapter contains information on interpreting the by the superstructure, funnels, masts, etc., beam or
PPI display and operation of the SART (Search and energy scatter takes place. When the obstruction is narrow
Rescue Transponder). in relation to the transmission path, a sector of reduced
sensitivity and increased beamwidth is formed behind the
obstruction. For a large obstruction, such as a
INTERPRETING PPI PRESENTATION superstructure, a blind arc is formed in which there is no
radar coverage, but in which false echoes may occur due to
reflections from the obstruction.
2 If the operator is to have confidence in using the radar
equipment, knowledge of interpretation of the PPI False Echoes
presentations is required to gain the best use of the display
information. 9 Any large obstruction may reflect energy, causing
3 Factors influencing the parameters on the display, in false echoes. The surface of the obstruction reflects a
conjunction with variable atmospheric and natural significant proportion of the transmitted energy at an angle
conditions that may have an adverse effect on the overall creating a false echo on the display. Reflected signals from
performance of the radar equipment, are described in this these objects reach the Antenna and paint on the display on
chapter. the bearing at which the Antenna is pointing. The range of
the false echo is the true distance (via the reflecting surface)
NOTE: of the object causing the false echo.
Reference publications on the use of Radar at Sea are 10 The operator must be acquainted with the bearings of
available from the Royal Institute of Navigation. obstructions from which false echoes may be
obtained.
PPI DISPLAY
Multiple Echoes
4 The PPI picture displays signals sourced from the
radar sensor (transmitter/receiver/aerial system). The 11 Multiple echoes may be obtained when another ship
PPI display uses a raster scan screen, therefore the picture or vessel is passing on a parallel course at close
has to be scan converted from polar form (i.e. rotating trace - range. This effect occurs when return signals are sufficiently
the form produced by the transmitter/receiver/aerial system) strong to be reflected backwards and forwards between the
into X and Y co-ordinates for display. two vessels. Multiple echoes always occur on the same
bearing as the true target and at exact multiples of the true
5 Range and bearing data of the echoes displayed are target range. The echoes become weaker as the amount of
then used as the basis for the various calculations and energy reflected diminishes with each return. A simplified
data readouts. example of how multiple returns may appear on the display
6 The modes of operation and use of operator controls are is shown below.
described in Chapter 1.
FACTORS THAT AFFECT PPI PRESENTATION
Antenna Height, Range and Bearing Discrimination

7 The height of the Antenna above the waterline affects Real
the maximum and minimum range performance of the Multiple Target
Echoes
equipment. The ability to discriminate between objects that
are very close together depends on the range and bearing
discrimination performance. Range discrimination is mainly
dependent on the Pulse Length in use. Bearing
discrimination is a factor of the size of target and Antenna Ownship
parameters.
CD-2528
Original 3.1 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 3
Spurious Echoes 15 Where obstructions occur in close proximity to the

antenna, the radar beam can be dispersed causing
12 In built up areas and in narrow congested waters, target smearing to occur. This is indicated by a number of
transmitted energy may be reflected along a number of weaker echoes appearing around a stronger target echo on
paths producing confusing spurious echo patterns on the the display. When the antenna points directly at the target
display. Spurious echoes may not always appear in the the returns are at their strongest and these form the thickest
same location and may not correlate. part of the arc shaped pattern on the display (see below).
NOTE:
Adjustment of the GAIN control helps to minimise these
spurious echoes.
Ghost Echoes Target

Smearing
13 In a similar manner to false echoes, the proportion of

transmitted energy reflected off obstructions may be
directed towards a real target causing a ghost echo of the
real target to appear on the bearing at which the antenna is
pointing. The ghost echo will appear to be a real target and
behave in the same way. However, because the antenna is Ownship
not directed at the real target the returns from the ghost
target will be weaker than those of the real target. The range
of the ghost echo is the true distance of the real target.
NOTE:
The suspected Ghost target echo will appear on the display
at the same radius as the real target (see below). The VRM
facility can be used to confirm this. However, there is no CD-2529
real way of determining whether the indicated target is a

ghost or a real target.
Radar Interference
16 Other radar equipment using the same frequency, on
Ghost the same vessel or other vessels, may interfere with
Target
the PPI presentation. Such interference produces a spiral
pattern emanating from the centre of the radar picture.
Careful positioning of the Antenna arrangement helps to
minimise interference from these radars. Cross pulse
blanking and the use of interference rejector circuits, when
Obstruction
selected, remove the spiral patterns from the display.
Common
Target Radius
Atmospheric Conditions
17 The propagation of radar signals in acute atmospheric
conditions may have an adverse effect on the PPI
Rotating display. A transmitted beam of energy normally travels in a
Antenna straight ‘line of sight’ path but certain conditions may
contribute to the beam bending upwards or downwards.
18 The effect of this condition (known as anomalous
propagation) is that when the beam is ‘bent’ upwards,
distant targets appear below the beam and consequently the
Real
maximum detection range of the equipment is impaired.
Target
19 When the transmitted beam is ‘bent’ downwards, the
beam tends to follow the earth’s surface and improves
maximum range performance, with the detection of targets
14 Other types of ghosting include echoes of groups of over the horizon.
targets (which appear to be real). When in the vicinity 20 Under specific atmospheric conditions the beam may
of land masses, these may be from large inland objects and be ‘bent’ to reflect from the earth’s surface to the upper
may be caused by a combination of atmospheric conditions, atmosphere where, due to the presence of a layer of dense
unusual propagation conditions and reflection. air, the beam is reflected back to earth. This condition,
known as ‘ducting’, may happen several times and echoes
may be obtained over great distances. However, these
echoes may return several transmissions later and are
displayed as false ranges on the display.
21 Severe atmospheric conditions, such as
thunderstorms or acute static build up during
pre-storm situations, also have the affect of distorting the
PPI presentation due to the contorting effect of the electrical
disturbances in the atmosphere.
May 01 3.2 Original

KH 2020
Chap 3
Sea Clutter Fog

22 In adverse weather conditions considerable echo 28 Although echoes may be obtained from rain bearing
return may be obtained from the sea. Under these clouds, due to the clouds’ density, fog does not greatly
circumstances the sea clutter return may be greater than the affect the radar return signals. A slight reduction in maximum
reflections from buoys and other small targets and thus detection range due to fog may be experienced. Mist makes
prejudice the detection of these echoes. The use of GAIN, little or no difference to the radar display.
SEA Anti-clutter and CORRELATOR functions to combat
these varying conditions is described in Chapter 1. Sea and Swell
23 High sea swell tends to produce random echoes and
clutter on the display. Clutter returns from seas 29 The rolling and pitching of a vessel in adverse sea
breaking on shoals and sand banks may help to show the conditions causes the beam to swing about in azimuth.
position of these hazards. In severe conditions this may cause intermittent echoes on
the display. Also, if the roll or pitch angle is much greater than
the vertical beamwidth of the aerial, the detection probability
Rain Clutter is lowered.
24 This condition differs from sea clutter, as falling rain
produces a continuous return, blanketing whole areas THE RADAR PICTURE
of the display. The use of RAIN Anti-clutter is described in
Chapter 1. Open Sea
NOTE: 30 At sea, out of sight of land, interpreting the PPI
S band (10cm) radar systems are generally less effected presents little difficulty. Echoes on the display depend
than X band (3cm) radar systems in heavy rain conditions. on the size, range, shape and aspect of the targets. Wake
25 The plotting of rain storms and torrential rain echoes may sometimes be seen, particularly where a vessel
conditions may be easily determined due to the is turning at high speed.
continual movement of the weather over an area.
Land Echoes
Hail, Snow and Ice
31 Echo paints of a coastline require careful examination
26 Hail and snow produce effects similar to that of rain and translation since the presence or absence of
clutter. Dense snow has a greater effect than that of return signals depend on parameters such as height, slope,
light flurries which, owing to the small reflecting surface, composition, aspect and distance of the feature. When a
have minimal effect. radar beam strikes a high reflecting surface, including cliffs
and large buildings at close range, a sharp echo with a blank
27 The echoes obtained from ice depend on the form and area behind is presented on the display. Coastlines with flat
shape that the ice presents. The generalisation of the areas return echoes depicting every small reflecting surface
effects produced by various ice floes are as follows: that the radar beam strikes for several miles inland. The
variation of tide may also affect the presentation owing to the
(1) Smooth Flat Ice: Most of the radar energy is height at which the Antenna is relative to that of the
reflected at the angle of incidence, providing little coastlines.
or no return signal. Sometimes an advantage is
gained by setting up the controls to obtain sea 32 At low tide the PPI presentation shows less of an area
clutter right up to the edge of the ice. Patches of of coastline due to the reflected echo from cliffs or sand
water in a smooth ice field are often revealed by dunes etc. High tide gives the radar the ability to slightly ‘look
clutter return if sufficient wind disturbs the surface over’ low lying objects.
of the water.
(2) Pack Ice: Strong multiple echoes are obtained RADAR REFLECTORS AND BEACONS
from pack ice, producing a pattern on the display
not unlike excessive sea clutter. The ice left in the 33 Reflectors are designed to give maximum return from
wake of a vessel passing through an ice field may radar transmissions and can be fitted to buoys to aid
be distinguished clearly on the display. navigation, to sundry features such as dangerous outcrops
of rocks, and to any hazard that would impair the navigation
(3) Ice Walls: These objects give strong return
of a vessel. Small boats may also have reflectors fitted to
echoes depending on the angle that the walls are
increase the boat’s detection range.
to the sea surface to scatter the reflected energy.
(4) Icebergs: As the angle of iceberg faces is rarely NOTE:
normal to the surface of the sea, much of the Some small buoys have a reduced cross-sectional area
reflected energy from the transmitted pulse does when healing over in high sea states.
not reach the receiver aerial, giving a poor signal
return. Also the surrounding dense air produces a 34 Radar beacons produce a specific, coded signal
higher than usual atmospheric attenuation. response when the radar transmission interrogates
(5) Growlers: The detection of growlers by radar is the beacon. The reflected signal then gives a precise echo
uncertain due to the small surface area above paint on the PPI presentation. This effect can be reduced
water and the mass that is submerged. when using a high Correlation level (RACONS are not
normally affected by Correlator IR or SC/SC).
Original 3.3 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 3
SEARCH AND RESCUE TRANSPONDER Radar Side Lobes

(SART) 41 As the SART is approached side lobes from the radar
antenna may show the SART responses as a series of
35 The Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) is a arcs or concentric rings. These can be removed by the use of
9GHz receiver/transmitter which provides a position the anti-clutter sea control. Operationally, observation of the
indication by producing range and bearing information on side lobes can be used to confirm that the SART is near to
any 9GHz radar screen (with no modification). The SART the ship.
code displayed on the radar screen is a series of dots
extending radially outwards from the location of the Detuning The Radar
transponder. The series of dots represents a range of
approximately 10 nautical miles. This indication is an 42 To increase the visibility of the SART in clutter
internationally accepted signal for search and rescue conditions, the radar can be detuned to reduce the
operations. In addition, the SART gives confidence to clutter without reducing the SART response. Radar with
survivors by giving a loud audible signal and/or visual automatic frequency control may not permit manual
indication of the approach of assistance. detuning of the equipment. Care is to be taken when
operating the radar while detuned, as other wanted
navigational and anti-collision information may be removed.
OPERATION OF MARINE RADAR FOR SART The radar tuning must be returned to normal operation as
DETECTION soon as possible. (Refer to Chapter 1, for information on
Tuning and Detuning of the radar).
Radar Range Scale
Gain
36 To look for a SART signal, select a range scale of 6 or
12 nautical miles. The spacing between the SART 43 For maximum range SART detection the normal
responses is about 0.6 nautical miles (1125 metres) and a maximum gain is to be used.
number of returns are required to distinguish the SART from
other responses.
Anti-clutter Sea Control
SART Range Errors 44 For optimum range SART detection, this control is to
be set to the minimum. Care must be exercised as
37 Inherent delays occur in the SART responses due to targets in sea clutter may be obscured.
the in-built trigger delay. Also SART may have to
sweep through the whole radar band before reaching the 45 Automatic/manual anti-clutter sea control facilities are
frequency of the search radar. At medium ranges of about 6 to be switched to manual.
nautical miles the range delay may be between about 150
metres and 0.6 nautical mile beyond the SART position. Anti-clutter Rain Control
38 As the SART is approached, the radar detects the 46 Rain control must not be used when trying to detect
initial fast sweep of the SART and double dots are SARTs, as the SART responses may be removed.
displayed. The range delay of the first dot is no more than
150 metres beyond the SART position.
Radar Bandwidth
39 This is matched to the radar pulse length and is
switched with the range scale and the associated
pulse length. Narrow bandwidths of 3 - 5 MHz are used with
long pulses on long range and wide bandwidths of 10 - 25
MHz with short pulses on short ranges.
40 Any radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz attenuates the
SART signal slightly, so a medium bandwidth is
normally selected to ensure optimum detection of the SART.
Operating Instructions are to be consulted about the
particular radar parameters and bandwidth selections.
May 01 3.4 Original

KH 2020
Chap 3
SART OPERATION USING NUCLEUS 3 48 To select the SART code only on the radar screen,
DISPLAY refer to Chapter 1 - “To Detune, To Display SART
Responses Only”. This off-centred tuning erases all normal
47 In operation, the SART responds automatically using a radar images caused by echoes with the same frequency as
9.2GHz to 9.5GHz high-speed frequency sweeping the radar transmission. However, the SART code is not
signal with a pulse emission period of 100m s which is erased because the SART response signal scans all
synchronous with any received scanning pulse. The SART frequencies in the 9GHz band.
response signal scans all frequencies in the 9GHz radar
band (refer to Figure 1).
350 000
010
340 020
330 Radar Antenna
030
Beam
320 040
310 050
300 060
SART
290 Location 070
280 080
270 Ownship 090
260 100
250 110
240 120
Range
9.2GHz Sweep Time
230 130
220 140
210 150
200 160 9.5GHz
190 180 170
CD-2090 Radar Band Pass
Figure 1 - SART Signal on Display
Original 3.5 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 3
May 01 3.6 Original

KH 2020
Index
OPERATING INFORMATION Index Baud Rates Setup Screen 1-7

BCR/BCT 2-1, 2-6
A Beacons 3-3
Bearing 2-2
acquire a target 2-2
Bearing discrimination 3-1
Acquire Target 2-7
Bearing Limits 2-4, 2-8
Acquire Target 2-2
Blind Arcs 3-1
ACQUISITION OPTIONS 2-18
Bow Crossing Range 2-4, 2-16
ACQUISITION RANGE 2-18
Bow Crossing Range (BCR) 2-2
ACQUISITION SPEED 2-18
Bow Crossing Range (BCR) 2-11
Activating Waypoints 1-17
Bow Crossing Time 2-4, 2-16
Bow Crossing Time (BCT) 2-2
acute atmospheric conditions 3-2
brilliance and contrast 1-2
adverse weather conditions 3-3
Buttons & Trackerball Information 1-23
Alarm De-selection /Operator Action 2-3, 2-9
Anchor Alarm 2-11 C
Anchor Target 2-11
CANCEL ENTRY 2-1
Anchor Watch 2-11
Clearing the Current Map 1-20
Anchor Watch 2-9
Clearing Waypoints 1-17
anomalous propagation 3-2
Clock Setup 1-6
Antenna Height, Range and Bearing Discrimination 3-1
CLOCK SETUP 1-6
Anti-clutter Rain Control 3-4
CLOCK TYPE box 1-6
Anti-clutter Sea Control 3-4
Closest Point of Approach 1-27, 2-4, 2-16
ARPA 2-6, 2-11
Fixed Targets 2-11 Closest Point of Approach (CPA) 2-2
ARPA - A comprehensive Automatic Radar Plotting Aid Closest Point of Approach (CPA) 2-11
2-1
Closest Point Of Approach Limit 1-15
ARPA ALARMS 2-8
Collision 2-3, 2-9
ARPA fault 2-9
Collision targets 2-14
ARPA PLOTTING CONTROLS 2-7
Collision Warning 2-3, 2-9
ATA - An Automatic Tracking Aid 2-1
COLOURS 1-3
ATA - An Automatic Tracking Aid 2-1
Comms Setup Menu Screen 1-7
ATA ALARMS 2-2
Contrast & Brilliance Adjustment 1-22
ATA Fault 2-3
CORRELATOR 3-3
ATA PARAMETERS 2-3
Correlator box 1-11
ATA PLOTTING CONTROLS 2-2
Course & Speed 2-2
ATA/ARPA PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION 2-18
Course over ground (COG) 1-26
Audible (AUD) alarm 1-2
CPA 2-1
Audible Alarms 1-22
CPA Limit 1-27
AUTO SEA 1-28
CPA limit box 1-15
AUTO TARGET ACQUISITION 2-12
CPA LIMIT Box 1-15
Autodrift 2-6
Creating a New Map 1-19
Automatic acquisition options 2-6
Creating Polyzones 2-12
Automatic Radar Plotting Aid 2-6
Cross pulse blanking 3-2
Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (ARPA) 2-1
Crt Test 1-6
Automatic Tracking Aid (ATA) 2-1
Cursor 1-1
B Cursor box 1-23
Cursor Control and Mode 1-9, 1-31
Bandwidth 3-4
Original i May 01
KH 2020
Index
Cursor Positioning 1-4 ERGOPOD ICON 1-23
CURSOR POSITIONING 1-24 error sources 2-6
Cursor Positioning and Initial Pushbutton Facilities 1-4 Exit The NAV Menu 1-19
Curved EBL 1-29 Exiting the Maps Menu 1-21
Curved EBL Box 1-18 Exiting the VDU Menu 1-22
external stabilisation 1-14
D
Data and Menus 1-9, 1-17, 1-31 F
Day/Night Operation 1-3 False Echoes 3-1
Day/Night Selection 1-22 FAZ 2-6
de-activate a guard zone 2-4 Fixed Guard Zone 2-3, 2-8
Default Settings 1-7 Fixed Zone 2-8
Degauss 1-2 Fog 3-3
Delay 2-14 Footprint Acquisition Zone (FAZ) 2-12
delete all plots 2-3 Footprint Acquisition Zones 2-6
DELETE PLOT 2-1 Footprint Acquisition Zones 2-11
Deleting a Map 1-20 Footprint Acquisition Zones (FAZ) 2-6
Deleting Plots 2-2 Four Target Simulation Mode 2-5
Deleting Polyzones 2-13
DEPTH Box 1-15
G
Detuning The Radar 3-4 Gain 3-4
Display Zones 1-9 GAIN 1-28
Displaying SART Responses 1-11 GAIN, Sea & rain 1-28
Doppler (W or G SPD) 1-14 GAIN/SEA/RAIN Box 1-12
Doppler log speed input 1-14 GAIN/SEA/RAIN Box 1-16
Drawing Circles 1-21 Ghost Echoes 3-2
Drawing Lines 1-20 Ghost target 3-2
Drawing Polyzones 2-12 ghosting 3-2
DRIFT Box 1-14 Glossary 1-24
Drift Input 2-1, 2-7 GO TO INSTALL 1-8
ducting 3-2 GO TO MENUS 1-5, 1-6
GO TO MENUS 1-6
E Go To Test 1-6
EBL Box – Electronic Bearing Line 1-16 Great Circle 1-29
Echoes 3-1 GROUND REFERENCE 2-5, 2-18
Ghost 3-2
Ground Stabilisation 1-26
Spurious 3-2
Editing Polyzones 2-13 Growlers 3-3
Editing the Current Map 1-20 Guard zone activities 2-11
Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) 1-27 Guard Zones 2-3, 2-1, 2-6, 2-13
ELECTRONIC PLOTTING AID 2-1 GUARD ZONES 2-8
Electronic Plotting Aid (EPA) 2-1 Gyro WARNINGS 1-24
ELECTRONIC PLOTTING AID CONTROLS 2-1

H
Electronic Tape Measure 1-23
Hail 3-3
END Box 1-19
Hail, Snow and Ice 3-3
EPA - A Manual Electronic Plotting Aid 2-1
HDG Box – Master Gyro Heading 1-14
EPA PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION 2-5
HL Off Box 1-13
ERBL Activation 1-16
May 01 ii Original
KH 2020
Index
I Multiple Echoes 3-1
Mute box 1-11
Ice 3-3
Mute Box 1-11
Ice Walls 3-3
mute sector 1-11
Icebergs 3-3
Mute Sector 1-26
IMO resolutions 2-6
Mute Sector Skew 1-26
Interference Rejection (IR) 1-25
interference rejector circuits 3-2 N
intermittent echoes 3-3
Nav menu 1-18
Interpreting PPI Presentation 3-1
Navigation & Clutter Information 1-16
INTERPRETING THE PPI DISPLAY 3-1
New Target 2-9
INTRODUCTION 1-1
NMEA Serial Input Message Communications Ports 1-7
L North Up (Azimuth Mode) Box 1-12
L SPD Box – Speed 1-14 O

L spd box – speed 1-14
On/Off Sounder unit 1-2
Labels 2-4, 2-13
Open Sea 3-3
Land Echoes 3-3
optional watch alarm 1-8
Land Mode 1-4
Options 2-1, 2-7
Land Mode 1-24
Ownship and Plotting Parameters 1-9, 1-31
LAT/LON Box 1-15
OWNSHIP DATA 2-7
Latitude/longitude 1-27
Ownship Graphics 1-8
Loading a Map 1-19
Ownship Information 1-14
Loading Polyzones 2-13
OWNSHIP RATE OF TURN 2-5, 2-19
Local Time 1-6
Ownship Setup 1-8
LOG speed (L SPD). 1-14
OWNSHIP SETUP 1-8
Lost Target 2-3, 2-6, 2-9
Ownship speed 1-14
Lost Target 2-1
OWNSHIP SPEED 2-5, 2-18
Lost Target alarm 2-18
LOST TARGETS 2-5, 2-18 P
Low signal - to - clutter 2-6
Pack Ice: 3-3
Low signal - to - noise 2-6
Parallel Index Line 1-18
M Parallel Index Lines 1-29

Past History 2-8
manual speed (M SPD) 1-14
Past Plot 2-3
manual speed input 2-16
PAST POSITION 2-5
manual stabilisation 1-14
Past position 1-27
Manual Stabilisation 1-27
PAST POSITION (ARPA) 2-19
manual tuning 1-11
PAST POSN Box 1-15
Map Directory box 1-19
PAST POSN Box – Past Position 1-15
Maps
Symbol Placement 1-20 Performance Monitor 1-24
Maps Menu 1-19 PI Box - Parallel Index Line 1-18
Maps, Routes & waypoint Positioning 1-29 Placing Symbols 1-21
Master GYRO heading 1-24 PLOT Box 1-19
modes of time-keeping 1-6 Plot History 2-3
Moving the Current Map 1-20 Plot menu 1-19
MP Box – Pulse Length Selection 1-10 Plot Menu
MP Box – Pulse Length Selection 1-10 Function 2-3
Original iii May 01

KH 2020
Index
Selection 2-3 Range discrimination 3-1
PLOT MENU 2-3, 2-11 Range Scale & Range rings 1-26
Plot Menu (EPA System) 2-3 Range/Rings Box 1-12
PLOTTING RANGE 2-5 range/rings box 1-12
PLOTTING ACCURACY 2-5 RATE AIDED 2-1
Plotting Additional Targets 2-2 Receiver performance 1-10
PLOTTING CAPACITY 2-5 Receiver Performance 1-10
PLOTTING CONTROLS 2-2 Ref. Target 2-11
PLOTTING LIMITATIONS 2-4, 2-16 Reference Target 2-11
PLOTTING MODE 2-5 Reference Targets 2-6, 2-11
PM box – Performance monitor 1-10 reflected echo 3-3
Polyzones 2-12 Relative Motion with Relative Trail (RM(R)) 1-12
port and starboard bearing limits 2-4 Relative Motion with True Trails (RM(T)) 1-12
Power ON/OFF 1-2 Relative Motion, Relative Trails RM(R) 1-26
PPI display 3-1 Rhumb Line 1-29
PPI Display Rm (R) (Motion Mode) Box 1-12
Open Sea 3-3
PPI DISPLAY 3-1 RM (R) (Motion mode) box 1-12
PPI Modes and Presentation 1-26 Run 1-4
PPI presentation. 3-2 RUN 1-24
Pulse Selection 1-9
S
Pushbutton Menu 1-23
Pushbuttons 1-2 SART 1-24, 3-4
Radar Side Lobes 3-4
Range Errors 3-4
R SART Operation Using Nucleus 3 Display 3-5
RADAR AERIAL RATE 2-19 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder) 3-1
RADAR ANTENNA RATE 2-5 SART DETECTION 3-4
Radar Bandwidth 3-4 SART OPERATION 3-1
Radar beacons 3-3 SART Range Errors 3-4
Radar Circle 1-3 SART Signal on Display 3-5
Radar Colours 1-3 Saving a Map 1-20
Radar Interference 3-2 Saving Polyzones 2-13
RADAR PICTURE 3-3 Scan to Scan Correlation (SC/SC) 1-25
RADAR PLOTTING AIDS 2-1 Screen Control Unit (SCU) 1-2
radar plume and sun responses 1-10 Screen Illumination 1-2
Radar Presentation Information 1-12 Screen Mode of Operation 1-9, 1-31
Radar Range Scale 3-4 Sea 3-3
Radar Reflectors 3-3 SEA (STC) 1-28
RADAR SIGNAL 2-5, 2-19 Sea and Swell 3-3
Radar System 1-4, 1-9, 1-31 SEA Anti-clutter 3-3
Radar Trails 1-27 Sea Mode 1-4
radar tuning 3-4 Sea Mode 1-24
Rain 3-3 sea stabilisation 1-14
RAIN (FTC) 1-29 Sea Stabilisation 1-26
RAIN Anti-clutter 3-3 Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) 3-4
Rain Clutter 3-3 Sector Selection 2-11
random echoes 3-3 Sector Storage Level indication 2-11
Range 2-2 Sectors 2-6
May 01 iv Original
KH 2020
Index
select a target 2-2 Target Number 2-2
SET Box 1-14 Target Past History 2-8
SET VIDEO LEVELS box 1-22 Target Plots 2-2
Settings for Gain, Sea and Rain 1-16 Target plotting limitations 2-4, 2-16
setup menus 1-5 Target plotting using the EPA 2-4
Short/Medium/Long Pulse 1-24 Target Simulation 2-9
Shortcut to PLOT Menu 1-19 target smearing 3-2
Shortcut to VDU Menu 1-19 TARGET SPEED 2-5, 2-18
Side lobes/reflections 2-6 TARGET SWAP 2-18
Simulation 2-1, 2-6 TARGET TOTE 2-4, 2-16
SIMULATION 2-5, 2-19 Targets Entering Mute Sector 1-26
Simulation Mode 2-5 TARGETS ON A BEARING 2-5, 2-19
SIMULATION MODE 2-3, 2-9 TCPA 2-1
Smooth Flat Ice 3-3 TCPA Limit 1-27
Snow 3-3 TCPA LIMIT Box 1-15
Speed Over Ground (SOG) 1-26 TCPA/CPA Limit 2-1
Spurious Echoes 3-2 TCPA/CPA LIMIT 2-6
stab box – stabilisation 1-14 Terminating the Simulation 2-9
STAB Box – Stabilisation 1-14 Test Card 1 1-6
Stabilisation Mode 1-26 TEST DIAGNOSTICS 2-19
Stabilisation Sources 1-27 Tide Direction 1-14
Stabilised headings 2-12 Tide Rate 1-14
Standard Simulation Mode 2-3, 2-9 Time to Closest Point of Approach 2-4, 2-16
Standby 1-4 Time to Closest Point of Approach (TCPA) 2-2
STANDBY 1-24 Time To Closest Point Of Approach Limit 1-15
Standby Menus 1-5 time-keeping 1-6
Standby Mode 1-8 Toggling the Route 1-18
Standby Screen 1-4 Toggling Waypoint Labels 1-17
Standby/Run 1-4 TOTE box 2-4, 2-16
Stern Marker 1-8 Trackerball 1-1
System Failure 2-7 Tracking 2-1, 2-6
System Warning Alarm 1-5 TRACKING 2-5
tracking accuracy 2-4, 2-6
T TRACKING ACCURACY 2-18
Target Acquisition 2-1, 2-6 tracking accuracy 2-16
TARGET CORRELATION 2-5, 2-19 TRACKING CAPACITY 2-18
Target data 2-1 TRACKING MODE 2-18
Target Data 2-2, 2-3, 2-7, 2-13 Tracking Overload 2-1, 2-3, 2-7, 2-9
TARGET DATA 2-2, 2-5, 2-18 TRACKING OVERLOAD 2-16
Target Data box 2-2 TRACKING RESOLUTION 2-18
Target Data box 2-1 TRACKING WINDOWS 2-18
TARGET FADING 2-19 TRAILS Box 1-15
TARGET FADING/ PLOT LIMIT 2-5 TRAILS Box 1-15
Target History 2-6 Transmitter Information 1-10
TARGET HISTORY (ATA) 2-19 Transmitter performance 1-10
Target information 2-2 Transmitter Performance 1-10
Target labels 2-4, 2-13 TRIAL COURSE 2-14
Original v May 01
KH 2020
Index
TRIAL COURSE LINE 2-14 W
Trial Course/Speed/Time 2-14
Warning Set Up Screen 1-5
trial manoeuvre 1-22
Watch Monitor 1-8
Trial Manoeuvre 2-4, 2-6, 2-14
ARPA 2-6 WEAK ECHO SEARCH 2-1, 2-6
TRIAL MANOEUVRE 2-5, 2-19 Wheel over point 1-29
Trial Manoeuvre Screen 2-15 WOP Box - Wheel Over Point 1-18
TRIAL MENU 2-4, 2-14 WPt Box 1-17
TRIAL MENU 1-22
TRIAL SPEED 2-14
Z
True Motion with True Trails (TM(T)) 1-12 Zone 1 - Radar System 1-9
Tune Box – bargraph Control 1-11 Zone 2 - Screen Mode of Operation 1-9
Tuning & Responses 1-24 Zone 3 - Ownship and Plotting Parameters 1-9
Tx box - Transmitter Selection 1-10 Zone 4 - VRM, EBL and Signal Controls 1-9
Type Checking 1-7 Zone 5 - Data and Menus 1-9
Typical sun and plume responses 1-10 Zone 6 -Cursor Control and Mode 1-9
Zone Acquisition 2-6
U
Unacknowledged alarms 2-3
Using The Performance Monitor 1-10
UTC (Universal Time Constant) 1-6
UTC Adjusted 1-6
V
Variable Guard Zone 2-3, 2-8
Variable Range Marker 1-16
Variable Range Marker (VRM) 1-27
Variable Zone 2-8
VDU Box 1-19
VDU menu 1-22
VECTOR Box 1-15
VECTOR FACILITIES 2-5, 2-18
Vector Mode 2-2, 2-6, 2-7
Vector Mode 2-1
vector origin 2-1
Vector Time 2-2, 2-7
Vector Time (Vector Length) 2-2
Vectors
ARPA 2-6
Vectors 1-27
Video Box 1-11
video correlation and interference rejection 1-25
video correlator 1-11
Video Enhance 1-25
Video Levels Adjustment 1-22
Video Normal 1-25
VRM Box - Variable Range Marker 1-16
VRM, EBL and Signal Controls 1-9, 1-31
May 01 vi Original
KH 2020
Contents
Table of Contents
• INTRODUCTION 1.1
• Nucleus 5000/6000 Displays 1.1
• Nucleus 7000 Displays 1.2
• Colours 1.3
• Radar System & Standby/Run 1.4
• Functions - Standby Menus 1.5
• Warning Set Up Screen 1.5
• System Warning Alarm 1.5
• Go To Test 1.6
• Test Card 1 1.6
• Crt Test 1.6
• Clock Setup 1.6
• Comms Setup Menu Screen 1.7
• Ownship Setup 1.8
• Curved Setup Screen 1.8
• Go To Install Screen 1.8
• Watch Monitor 1.8
• FUNCTIONS 1.9
• Function - ZONE 1
Transmitter Information 1.10
• Tx Box - Transmitter Selection 1.10
• Pulse Length (MP/SP/LP) Box- Selection 1.10
• PM Box – Performance Monitor
(optional) 1.10
• Tune Box – bargraph Control (Master Radars Only) 1.11
• Correlator Box 1.11
• Video Box 1.11
• Mute Box (Optional) 1.11
• Functions - Zone 2
Radar Presentation Information 1.12
• GAIN/SEA/RAIN Box 1.12
• Range/Rings Box 1.12
• Azimuth Mode (North Up) Box –
Presentation Selection 1.12
• Motion Mode (Rm (R)) Box 1.12
• HL Off Box 1.13
• Functions – zone 3
Ownship Information 1.14
• HDG Box – Master Gyro Heading 1.14
• L SPD Box – Speed 1.14
• STAB Box – Stabilisation 1.14
• SET Box – Tide Direction 1.14
• DRIFT Box – Tide Rate 1.14
• PAST POSN Box – Past Position 1.15
• VECTOR Box 1.15
• TRAILS Box 1.15
Original i May 01
KH 2020
Contents
• CPA LIMIT Box – Closest Point Of

Approach Limit 1.15
• TCPA LIMIT Box – Time To Closest Point Of Approach Limit 1.15
• LAT/LON Box - ownship Latitude &
Longitude 1.15
• DEPTH Box 1.15
• Functions – zone 4
Navigation & Clutter Information 1.16
• VRM Box – Variable Range Marker 1.16
• EBL Box – Electronic Bearing Line 1.16
• ERBL Activation 1.16
• GAIN/SEA/RAIN Box 1.16
• Functions – zone 5 – Data and Menus 1.17
• WPt Box 1.17
• Nav menu 1.18
• PLOT Menu 1.19
• Maps Menu 1.19
• TRIAL Menu – Trial Manoeuvre 1.22
• VDU Menu 1.22
• FUNCTIONS – ZONE 6
Buttons & Trackerball
Information 1.23
• Cursor Box 1.23
• Pushbutton Menu 1.23
• ERGOPOD ICON 1.23
• STANDBY 1.24
• RUN 1.24
• Cursor Positioning 1.24
• Master GYRO Heading & GYRO
Warnings 1.24
• Short/Medium/Long Pulse (Master Only) 1.24
• Performance Monitor 1.24
• Tuning & Responses 1.24
• Glossary of Terms 1.24
• Video Correlation and Interference Rejection 1.25
• Video Enhance 1.25
• Mute Sector 1.26
• Range Scale & Range rings 1.26
• PPI Modes and Presentation 1.26
• Stabilisation Mode 1.26
• Past Position 1.27
• Vectors 1.27
• Radar Trails 1.27
• Closest Point of Approach 1.27
• Latitude/longitude 1.27
• Variable Range Marker (VRM) 1.27
• Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) 1.27
May 01 ii Original
KH 2020
Contents
• Gain, Sea & Rain 1.28

• Maps, Routes & waypoint Positioning 1.29
• Curved EBL 1.29
• Wheel Over Point 1.29
• Parallel Index Lines 1.29
• Functions 1.31
• ELECTRONIC PLOTTING AID 2.1

• ELECTRONIC PLOTTING AID CONTROLS 2.1
• TARGET DATA 2.2
• PLOT MENU 2.3
• TRIAL MENU 2.4
• PLOTTING LIMITATIONS 2.4
• EPA PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION 2.5
• AUTOMATIC TRACKING AID 2.1

• ATA PLOTTING CONTROLS 2.2
• ATA ALARMS 2.2
• SIMULATION MODE 2.3
• ATA PARAMETERS 2.3
• PLOT MENU 2.3
• Target Data 2.3
• Labels 2.4
• TARGET TOTE 2.4
• AUTOMATIC RADAR PLOTTING AID 2.6
• ARPA PLOTTING CONTROLS 2.7
• GUARD ZONES 2.8
• ARPA ALARMS 2.8
• SIMULATION MODE 2.9
• PLOT MENU 2.11
• TRIAL MENU 2.14
• TRIAL MANOEUVRE 2.14
• TARGET TOTE 2.16
• 50 TARGET SIMULATION - NUMBERING SYSTEM 2.17
• ATA/ARPA PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION 2.18
• Interpreting PPI Presentation 3.1

• PPI Display 3.1
Original iii May 01

KH 2020
Contents
• FACTORS THAT AFFECT PPI PRESENTATION 3.1

• THE RADAR PICTURE 3.3
• Radar Reflectors and Beacons 3.3
• SEARCH AND RESCUE TRANSPONDER (SART) 3.4
• OPERATION OF MARINE RADAR FOR SART DETECTION 3.4
• SART Operation Using NUCLEUS 3
Display 3.5
May 01 iv Original
KH 2020
Contents
ILLUSTRATIONS
• Figure 1a - 5000 Displays (Controls) 1.1
• Figure 1b - 6000 Displays (Controls) 1.1
• Figure 2 - Standby Screen (No Interswitch, ARPA) 1.4
• Figure 3 - Standby Screen (with Interswitch & ARPA) 1.4
• Figure 4 - Display Zones 1.9
• Figure 5 - Display Screen PPI with normal graphics 1.13
• Figure 6 - Display Screen PPI with HL OFF Active 1.13
• Figure 5 - CRT Facilities Menu 1.18
• Figure 6 - Level Adjustment 1.18
• Figure 7 - Nucleus 3 Display and Screen Controls 1.31
• Figure 1 - Four Target Simulation Mode - Known Scenario (At Start of Simulation) 2.5
• Figure 2 - Four Target Simulation Mode - Known Scenario 2.10
• Figure 3 - Example of Trial Manoeuvre Screen 2.15
• Figure 1 - SART Signal on Display 3.5
Original v May 01
KH 2020
Chap 4a
CHAPTER 4A
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS - DISPLAYS
INTRODUCTION INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1 This Chapter provides information on installation of the NUCLEUS 5000 DISPLAY

system equipment. The overall chapter comprises a
number of sections, each section covering the installation of
the different equipment types that comprise the overall
Desk Top Display
system.
7 Install the desk top display according to the
instructions provided on the Installation Diagram
2 Three types of Nucleus 3 displays are available, these (Figure 1a).
are:
Cable Connections
(1) Nucleus 5000
(2) Nucleus 6000 8 Refer to the appropriate Connections Diagrams (see
Table 4.1a for details) and ensure that all connections
(3) Nucleus 7000 are correctly made.
3 This section covers Installation of the Nucleus 5000
and 6000 series Displays. Refer to Chapter 8c for NUCLEUS 6000 DISPLAY
information on the Installation of Nucleus 7000 Displays.
4 The Nucleus 3 5000 display is a desk mounted Pedestal Display
console. The Nucleus 3 6000 display can be provided
as either a Pedestal Display Console (with integral 9 Install the Pedestal Display according to the
processor located in the lower half of the console), for deck instructions given on the Installation Diagram (Figure
mounting, or as a Split Display Desk Console, with the 3a)
processor installed in a separate Processor Unit.
Split Display
5 The Display systems comprise the following
assemblies: 10 Install the Split Display according to the instructions
(1) Processor - containing Input/Output PCB, given on the Installation Diagram (Figure 4a).
System PCB and Power Supply Unit.
Cable Connections
(2) Monitor - containing Input PCB, Deflection PCB,
Power Supply, Tube Base Board and Monitor 11 Refer to the appropriate Connections Diagrams (see
CRT. Table 4.1a for details) and ensure that all connections
(3) K e yb o a r d - co n t a i n i n g Tr a c k e r b a l l a n d are correctly made.
Pushbutton PCB.
PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
6 Prior to installation of the Display System, implement

the following:
(1) Ensure that there is adequate clearance for the
Operator’s position in front of the desk or pedestal
display unit and at the rear of the unit to allow
fitting of the power and other system cables.
(2) Lay in the ships cables to the required installation
position.
NOTE:
Cables may enter the Nucleus 3 6000 Pedestal at either the
rear or bottom of the unit.

KH 2020
Chap 4a
12 The diagrams listed in Table 4.1a below, provide installation information for the Nucleus Displays:
Table 4.1a
Figure Description
1a Nucleus 3 5000 Display Installation Diagram (including: assembly, compass safe distances and unit weights).
2a Nucleus 3 5000 Display Internal Connections.
3a Nucleus 3 6000 Display (Pedestal) Installation Diagram (including: assembly, compass safe distances and unit weights).
4a Nucleus 3 6000 Split Display Installation Diagram (including: assembly, compass safe distances and unit weights).
5a Nucleus 3 6000 Display Internal Connections.
6a Nucleus 3 Display to RIU to Transmitter (MkIV - Upmast) Interconnections.
7a Nucleus 3 Display to RIU to Transmitter (MkV ) Interconnections.
8a Nucleus 3 Display to RIU to Transmitter (MkVII - S-Band) Interconnections.
9a Nucleus 3 Display to RIU to Transmitter (MkVII - X-Band, Low Speed ) Interconnections.
10a Nucleus 3 Display to RIU to Transmitter (MkVII - X-Band, High Speed ) Interconnections.
11a Nucleus 3 Display To RIU to Soft Start Unit to Transmitter (MkVI - Upmast) Interconnections
12a Nucleus 3 Display To Dual Interswitch Unit to Transmitter (MkVII -S-Band) Interconnections
13a Nucleus 3 Display To Dual Interswitch Unit to Transmitters (MkVI & MkIV - Upmast) Interconnections
14a Nucleus 3 Display To Dual Interswitch Unit to Soft Start Unit to Transmitter (MkVI - Upmast) Interconnections
15a Nucleus 3 Display To Dual Interswitch Unit to Transmitter (MkVII - X-Band , Low Speed) Interconnections.
16a Nucleus 3 Display To Dual Interswitch Unit to Transmitter (MkVII - X-Band, High Speed) Interconnections.
17a Nucleus 3 Displays: Mains and Power Distribution.

KH 2020
Chap 4a
TO INSTALL NUCLEUS 3 5000 DISPLAY

20 776 520
TOP ACCESS COVER
(REMOVABLE)
1. Mark out the position of the 5000 Display Console, leaving sufficient clearance for
the Operator, for ventilation & cable access.
DANGER
High
voltage
2. Drill the required holes.
3. Feed the ship's cables (power, signal, compass & log) through the rear of the console.
XXXX-XX
34°
DANGER
High
Voltage
4. Locate the console into position and secure with bolts as required.
479
353 KELVIN HUGHES nucleus3 5000 5. Ensure that the console is correctly earthed to the ship's earth.
70°
6. Connect the cables as shown on the appropriate Connections diagrams.
ON-OFF DEGAUSS
60 45
M10 THREADED
AV MOUNTS 470
414
53 (4 OFF) 36
490
ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED
Display Console Weight: 41kg
NUCLEUS 3 5000 - OVERALL DIMENSIONS COMPASS SAFE DISTANCES

Grade 1 Grade 2 & 3 Grade 4
1/4° 1° 2°
ARPA
TRUE
1.4 0.7 0.5
RELATIVE
ATA
VIDEO/DEFLECTION BOARD (NNR-A371)
SYSTEM PCB (NNR-A911)
& ARPA PCB (OPTIONAL) NNR-A128
FAN ASSY (NNR-A376)
INPUT PCB (NNR-A910)
380.00
INPUT WIRING COVER & CLAMPING 34
A
133.00
A
446.00
FAN ASSY (NNR-A376) A

313.00
POWER SUPPLY UNIT (45-677-114)

133.00
A
40
TOP VIEW WITH ACCESS COVER REMOVED
DIMENSIONS FOR MOUNTING

CD-4567
Figure 1a - Nucleus 5000 Display Installation Diagram
Original 4a.3/4 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 4a
SCAN COILS
ANCILLARY CONTROLS
DEGAUSS ON/OFF
FLYING FLYING
LEAD LEAD
2-WAY
IN LINE
CONNECTORS CN10 0V
FAN
CN11 PL3 PL6 SK3
NNR-A376
PL2 SK4
CN9
CN7
FAN POWER SUPPLY ASSY TUBE BASE PCB
NNR-A376 45-677-114 DC SUPPLIES VIDEO/DEFLECTION PCB NNR-A135-2
NNR-A371
CN4 CN5 SK8 SK5
SK6 SK6
CN1 CN6 CN3
SK7 SK7
DEGAUSS COILS
LINE OUTPUT PART OF
22 PL1
TRANSFORMER TUBE BASE PCB
MAINS IN 220V/110V PL2

GREY
VIDEO/SYNC
BLACK TB1
SKT1A
RED
EHT TO CRT
DAG LEAD
CRT
PLW PL3 PL9
PL4 PL6
INPUT PCB PLA SYSTEMS PCB PL2 ARPA 3 PCB (OPTIONAL)
NNR-A996 NNR-A911 NNR-A128
PL4
PL7
SPEAKER TRACKERBALL
2-WAY
IN LINE
CONNECTOR PUSH
CD-4452 BUTTON PLC
KEYBOARD
Figure 2a - Nucleus 3 5000 Display: Internal Connections

KH 2020
Chap 4a
682 (OVERALL CASEWORK) TO INSTALL THE NUCLEUS 3 6000 WORKSTATION

VENTILATION
CLEARANCE
10mm
REAR VIEW 1. Mark out the position of the pedestal, leaving sufficient
56°
clearance for the operator, for ventilation, and for cable
access.
2. Drill the required bolt holes (E or F - see diagram).
3. Feed the ship's cables (power, signal, compass and log etc)
56° through the rear or base of the pedestal.
94 4. Locate the pedestal into position and secure with either
Handles 1195 4 or 8 M12 bolts as required.
5. Ensure that the pedestal is correctly earthed to the
DANGER
High
Voltage ship's earth.
REAR ACCESS
CABLE CLAMP
(included in fitting kit) 6. Connect the cables as shown on the appropriate Connections
Access Door diagrams.
702 securing catches
140
53 Ventilation Holes
Display Weight: 100kg
83
EARTH STUD
53
COMPASS SAFE DISTANCES
GRADE 1 GRADE 2
300 1/4° 1°
475
80 820 MAX
41 600 2.0m 0.8m
98
700 MAX (OVER FLANGES OF AV MOUNTS)
NUCLEUS 3 6000 - OVERALL DIMENSIONS
475
ACCESS TO PCBs
& CONNECTIONS
70 300 105
Hole 'A' in 4 positions

DONGLE
ZM-1906 2 x Holes 9mm dia.
150
ARPA PCB (OPTION)
SYSTEMS PCB NNR-A128
NNR-A911
ATA PCB (OPTION)

NNR-A895 Cable entry 150
KEYBOARD CABLEFORM ASSY in
NNR-A5012
baseplate
600
Pedestal
113 base
ARPA SYSTEM POWER CABLEFORM
NNR-A5015
INPUT PCB
NNR-A910 MOUNTING HOLES
SYSTEM
ARPA
A: 4 x Holes internal fixings
682 (OVERALL CASEWORK)

14mm dia.
INPUT
A A
41
L L
3 3
FS2
X1
L N E
110/220v
0UTPUT
INPUT
FS1
1 1
N N
TERMINALS LABELS
HRC-1105 DANGER CODE No
HIGH VOLTAGE SERIAL No
55
FAN
HRC-A185 110
LABEL
HRC-1121
FILTER ASSY LABEL LABEL (SERIAL No.) PSU
HRC-A202 RTX-1173 45-677-110
RM-7710
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED
VIEW WITH OUTER DOOR REMOVED
(PCB & CONNECTOR LOCATIONS) CD-4464
Figure 3a - Nucleus 6000 Display (Pedestal): Installation Diagram

KH 2020
Chap 4a
TO INSTALL THE NUCLEUS 6000A

215 80
SPLIT DISPLAY
O
56
A) DISPLAY UNIT
AIR VENT LOUVRES
(10mm) 1. Refer to the dimensioned drawing opposite for hole
FRONT VIEW
locations. There is the option to either have Cable
SIDE VIEW
Connections to the rear of the unit or underneath
608
455.5
(if underneath, cut out the hole as shown, swap the
56O 163 Connecting Plate and Blanking Plate over).
AIR VENT 204.5
BOTH SIDES 112.5 2. Fasten the Display Unit to the required location,
475 using the fixings and anti-vibration mounts supplied.
LOWER SIDE PANELS CAN BE
64 REMOVED TO ALLOW ACCESS
390
TO FIXING HOLES 682
B) PROCESSOR UNIT
820 MAX.
REF 475
380 NOTE: A 2m Cable Kit is supplied as standard with optional
285
53 5, 10, 15 & 20m kits also available.
12mm DIA (IN 6 POSITIONS)
SHOWN THUS
FRONT PANEL
OVERHANG 1. Mark out the position of the Processor Unit, leaving
sufficient clearance for ventilation, cable access and
REAR VIEW
servicing; drill the bolt positions as shown in the
diagram.
612
626
400
2. Secure the Processor Unit in position.
682 REF
FOR UNDERSIDE CABLE M10 THREADED AV MOUNT
3. Feed the ship's cables through the base of the unit and
ENTRY SWAP POSITION 612 (IN 4 POSITIONS)
OF UNDERSIDE BLANKING make the connections as detailed on the appropriate
PLATE AND REAR
113
CONNECTOR PLATE
Connections Diagram(s).
115
28
150 4. Ensure that the Processor Unit is directly earthed to
300 M10 THREADED BUSHES (IN 6 POSITIONS) the ship's earth, using the bolt provided.
SHOWN THUS Display Weight : 65kg
UNDERSIDE VIEW 5. See Monitor to Processor Connections Diagram

12mm DIA OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE

AT RELATIVE HUMIDITY 0%: -15 C TO +55 C
AT RELATIVE HUMIDITY 95%: +40 C
NUCLEUS 3 6000 (SPLIT) VIBRATION LEVELS

NUCLEUS 3 6000 (SPLIT) DISPLAY
PROCESSOR
1 TO 12.5Hz WITH AN EXCURSION± 1.6mm
REAR PANEL 12.5 TO 25Hz WITH AN EXCURSION± 0.8mm
25 TO 50Hz WITH AN EXCURSION± 0.1mm
TO A CONSTANT MAXIMUM ACCELERATION OF 10m/s
530
570
SCART SCART CABLE * SCART
SOCKET SOCKET
SUPPLY IN/OUT
POWER CONSUMPTION: 380VA
L L
OUTPUT 3 CORE (CABLE L) * N POWER
N
TERMINALS E SOCKET
E WEIGHTS
PROCESSOR UNIT: 13kg
PROCESSOR CASE DESK CONSOLE: 65kg
AUDIO
# AUDIO LINE 2 CORE (CABLE A) AUDIO
CABLE ACCESS SOCKET SOCKET
280 62.5
230 418
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
2m OF ABOVE CABLES SUPPLIED WITH FITTING KIT, OPTIONAL 5,10 & 15m LENGTHS AVAILABLE GRADE 1 GRADE 2
Processor Weight : 13kg
NNR-A332-5 (5m), A332-10 (10m), A332-15 (15m) ,A332-20(20m)
At Relative Humidity 0% : -15°C to +55°C * (KH PART No: 1/4 1
At Relative Humidity 95% : +40°C ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED AUDIO LINE IS NOT PART OF THE CABLE KIT
# DISPLAY 2.0m 0.8m
PROCESSOR 2.0m 0.8m
CD-4556
Figure 4a - Nucleus 6000 Split Display: Installation Diagram

KH 2020
Chap 4a
MONITOR
MAGNETIC
AMPLIFIER PCB
NNR-A536
COMPENSATION
DEGAUSS COIL COIL
85-290-0027-001 PL1 PL2
DC SUPPLIES
3-PHASE PL9
SWITCHED PL3
TRANSFORMER
MAINS OUTPUT
(OPTIONAL)
POWER UNIT Tx-SK PL5 PL1 PL3 PL2 PL2
NNR-A322
45-677-110 FAN DC SUPPLIES
55-100-0087-001 MONITOR PSU DEFLECTION PCB VIDEO/TUBE
45-980-0009-001 45-980-0008-001 GRID/HTR BASE PCB
CON 1 PL7 PL3 45-980-0010-001
FUSES
MAINS INPUT FILTER
FS1 & FS2
CON 2 PL4 PL11 PL5 PL1
SWITCHED MAINS FAN VIDEO/SYNC
55-100-0088-001
CON 3
ON/OFF & DC SUPPLIES
PL2 PL4 PL1

DEGAUSS SWITCH
PLX SCAN COILS

PLD PLJ PL3 PL6
PLM PLY SYSTEMS PCB PL2 ARPA COMPUTER SPEAKER

FAN INPUT PCB 50-WAY CODE DOWNLOAD NNR-A5007
NNR-A911 NNR-A128
HRC-A185 NNR-A910
(OPTIONAL)
PL4 PL4 PL3
PLA PL9
50-WAY
IN LINE
PL7 4 WAY
PLH
PLB TBALL 1
CLK/DIR ERGOPOD
PLC PLT
Tx CAN DIU
SK15 PL5
25-WAY ‘D’ TYPE
PLU PUSHBUTTON KEYS
PLE VIDEO/SYNC
COMPASS 1 45-910-516
ALARMS LOG
TRACKERBALL
PLF PLV SPARE MONITOR CODE 45-881-1/2
SER 1 & 2 Tx CONTROL OUTPUT DOWNLOAD
PLG PLW ON/OFF SWITCH

SER 3 & 4 Tx POWER
SKO SYNC DEGAUSS SWITCH

SKP VIDEO
CD-4513 CONTROL PANEL
Figure 5a - Nucleus 3 6000 Display: Internal Connections

KH 2020
Chap 4a
COMPOSITE 38-CORE
12-CORE CABLE
CABLE
NUCLEUS 3 RIU Mk IV UPMAST TRANSMITTER
5000, 6000, 7000 NNR-A55 CAE-A12-20
INPUT PCB
SKP
WHITE COAX SK1 - 6 SK7 - 12 WHITE COAX
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO
VIDEO
SKO
GREY COAX SK13 - 18 SK19 - 24 GREY COAX
SYNC SYNC SYNC SYNC
NOTE 1
PLC PLA-F
BLACK
CAN HI 1 1
WHITE
CAN LO 2 2
BLUE
GND 3 3
4 ORANGE 4
HEADING LINE
5 RED 5
AZIMUTH
6 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7 YELLOW 7
+27V
8 GREEN 8
PLL-Q
GND
PLA
1
2
5
3
6
8
4
7
PLC 2PLB
B/O
1 1
G/Y
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE CAN ADAPTER PCB 2 2
CONNECTED TO PIN 3 AT ONE END ONLY
NNR-A981
PLB TB1-B TB1-C
S 2
RUN 1
R/G 3
MUTE 2
B/Y
MP 3 7
B/W
LP 4 6
R/Y
TUNE CONTROLS 5 4
R/W
TUNE INDICATORS 6 5
Tx READY T
7 1
AZIMUTH G/O 4
8
N/C 9
Rx MON B/Bk
10 6
HEADING LINE G/W 3
11
N/C 12
N/C 13
GROUND R/B 5
14
FILTER
L N E
2-CORE
CD-4517 MAINS POWER
Figure 6a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkIV - Upmast) via RIU: Interconnections

KH 2020
Chap 4a
COMPOSITE
COMPOSITE 12-CORE 38-CORE
12-CORE CABLE CABLE
CABLE TIU Mk V
NUCLEUS 3
NNR-A66 CAE-A30-7 & CAE-A30-8
5000, 6000, 7000
INPUT PCB RIU
NNR-A55 CAN ADAPTER PCB
NNR-A981 PLF
SKP SKE SKF 4
WHITE COAX SK1 - 6 SK7 - 12 WHITE COAX VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO 3
SKO SKG SKH
SYNC SYNC SYNC SYNC 2
1 SYNC
NOTE 1
PLC PLA-F PLL-0 PLA PLB PLG
BLACK 1 S
CAN HI 1 1 1 1 6 RUN
WHITE 2 R/G
CAN LO 2 2 2 2 3 MUTE
BLUE 3 B/Y
GND 3 3 3 3 10 MP
4 ORANGE 4 4 B/W 11 LP
HEADING LINE 4 4
5 RED 5 5 R/Y 8 TUNE
AZIMUTH 5 5
6 6 6 R/W 9 TUNE IND
6 6
YELLOW T or Lt/G 7 TX READY PLK
+27V 7 7 7 7 7
8 GREEN 8 8 G/O
GND 8 8 9 AZIMUTH
9
B/Bk
10 14 RX MON
11 G/W 12 HEADING LINE
12
13
14 R/B
5 0V
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE

TERMINALS PCB
NNR-A1004
PLB
R/Bk
+15V 1 7 +15V
Bn/Bk
-15V 2 4 -15V
W
HEATERS +ve 3 1 HEATERS +ve
Bk
HEATERS -ve 4 2 HEATERS -ve
R
5 1 +27V
O
MODULATOR +27V 6 3 +27V
R/Bn 4 +27V
7
B 2 0V
8
P 5 0V
MODULATOR 0V 9
V/Bk 6 0V
10
PLC TB2
G
1 1
W/V
2
Bn
3 2
SCANNER +ve S/Bn SCANNER +VE
4
Y/Bn
5 3
W/Bn
6
S/B
7 4
S/G
8
Y
9 5
B/O
10
SCANNER -ve V
11 6
G/Y SCANNER -VE
12
G/B
13 7
G/Bk
14
8
CD-4516
Figure 7a Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (Mk V) via RIU: Interconnections

KH 2020
Chap 4a
COMPOSITE COMPOSITE
12-CORE 12-CORE
CABLE
NUCLEUS 3 RIU Mk VII TRANSMITTER SOFT START UNIT
5000, 6000, 7000 NNR-A55 CTX-A9
INPUT PCB CZZ-A14
SKP
WHITE COAX SK1 - 6 SK7 - 12
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO 1 TB1
SKO 1
SK13 - 18 SK19 - 24 3 PHASE 2
GREY COAX MAINS
SYNC SYNC SYNC SYNC 1 3
3SKK TB2 TB3

R 1
NOTE 1 NOTE 1 CONTACTOR +VE 4 1
B 2
PLC PLA-F PLL-0 3PLX CONTACTOR RTN 2 2
G 3
BLACK 1 1 3 3
CAN HI 1 1 CAN HI
WHITE 2 2 3 CORE
CAN LO 2 2 CAN LO
BLUE 3 3
GND 3 3 GND
ORANGE 4 4
HEADING LINE 4
RED 5 5
AZIMUTH 5 TURNING MECHANISM
6 6
6
YELLOW 7 7 3PLB MkVI OR MkVII
+27V 7
GREEN 8 8
GND 8 9 HEADING LINE
8 AZIMUTH 1TB1 MOTOR
SW1 (+27V) 1 Bn 1
1
MOTOR START (+27V) 5 V 2
2
3 3
3 PHASE
2PLB MAINS
3SKM
Bk
1 9SKA
ON/OFF +27V 6
2 R 3
NEON SIGNAL 1
B 4
NEON RETURN 2
G 6
AZIMUTH 3
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE Y 7
FILTER HEADING LINE 4
CONNECTED TO PIN 3 AT ONE END ONLY W 8
0V 5
L R
2 CORE Tx MONITOR 1 Tx MON 0V
N B
MAINS INPUT ARM 2 Tx MON SIG
E
12 CORE
CABLE
CD-4515
Figure 8a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII -S-Band) via RIU: Interconnections

KH 2020
Chap 4a
COMPOSITE COMPOSITE
12-CORE 12-CORE
CABLE
NUCLEUS 3 RIU Mk VII TRANSMITTER
5000, 6000, 7000 NNR-A55 CTX-A8
INPUT PCB
SKP TURNING MECHANISM
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO 1 CAE-A30-6
SKO 1TB1 1TB1
GREY COAX SK13 - 18 SK19 - 24
SYNC SYNC SYNC SYNC 1 T OR Lt/G 2
5
S
6
MOTOR 0V
7
8
NOTE 1 O 1
NOTE 1 1
PLC PLA-F PLL-0 3PLX P
2
MOTOR +ve 26V
BLACK 1 1 3
CAN HI 1 1 CAN HI
WHITE 2 2 4
CAN LO 2 2 CAN LO
BLUE 3 3
GND 3 3 GND
ORANGE 4 4
HEADING LINE 4 3SKK
RED 5 5
AZIMUTH 5 Bn
6 6 MOTOR START (+27V) 1 3
6 V
YELLOW 7 7 3PLB MOTOR START RTN 2 4
+27V 7
GREEN 8 8 5
8 AZIMUTH 3SKM
Bk 9SKA
+27V 6
R
NEON SIGNAL 1 5
B
NEON RETURN 2 6
G
AZIMUTH 3 2
2PLB Y
HEADING LINE 4 3
W
1 0V 5 4
ON/OFF R
2 Tx MONITOR 7 Tx MON 0V
B
ARM 8 Tx MON SIG
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE FILTER 12 CORE

CONNECTED TO PIN 3 AT ONE END ONLY SMALL
2 CORE L CABLE
MAINS INPUT N
E
CD-4521
Figure 9a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII - X-Band, Low Speed) via RIU: Interconnections

KH 2020
Chap 4a
COMPOSITE COMPOSITE
12-CORE 12-CORE
CABLE
NUCLEUS 3 RIU Mk VII TRANSMITTER
5000, 6000, 7000 NNR-A55 CTX-A8 TURNING MECHANISM
INPUT PCB CAE-A30-5
SKP
SKO 1TB1 1TB2
GREY COAX SK13 - 18 SK19 - 24 T OR Lt/G
SYNC SYNC SYNC SYNC 1 5 5
B/Bk
S
6 6
B/O
MOTOR 0V
B/Y
NOTE 1 NOTE 1 7 7
G/Y
PLC PLA-F PLL-0 3PLX B/W
BLACK 1 1 8 8
CAN HI 1 1 CAN HI G/W
WHITE 2 2 O
CAN LO 2 2 CAN LO 1 1
BLUE 3 3 R/W
GND 3 3 GND
ORANGE 4 4 P
HEADING LINE 4 2 2
RED 5 5 R/Bk
AZIMUTH 5
6 6 MOTOR +ve 36V R/B
6 3 3
YELLOW 7 7 3PLB R/Bn
+27V 7
GREEN 8 8 R/Y
GND 8 9 HEADING LINE 4 4
8 AZIMUTH R/G
3SKK 1TB1
MOTOR START (+27V) 1 Bn
2PLB 5
MOTOR START RTN 2 V
6
1 3
ON/OFF
2
3SKM
Bk 9SKA
+27V 6
R
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE FILTER NEON SIGNAL 1 5
B
CONNECTED TO PIN 3 AT ONE END ONLY NEON RETURN 2 6
L G
2 CORE AZIMUTH 3 2
N Y
MAINS INPUT HEADING LINE 4 3
E W
0V 5 4
R
Tx MONITOR B 7 Tx MON 0V
25 CORE ARM 8 Tx MON SIG
CABLE
CD-4522
Figure 10a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII, X-Band, High Speed), via RIU: Interconnections

KH 2020
Chap 4a
COMPOSITE 38-CORE
12-CORE CABLE MKVI Tx UPMAST (CAE-A37/A45)
CABLE RIU SOFT START UNIT
NUCLEUS 3 NNR-A55 (CZZ-A14/2)
5000, 6000, 7000 AERIAL MOTOR
INPUT PCB TB1 TB3 CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) TB
R or 1 R or 1 3 PHASE TO AE MOTOR
1 1 U1 PHASE 1
CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) B or 2 B or 2
2 2 U2 PHASE 2
SKP 3 PHASE SHIPS SUPPLY Y or 3 Y or 3
3 3 U3 PHASE 3
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO
SKO TB1
GREY COAX SK13 - 18 SK19 - 24 GREY COAX R
TO TB6 1 +27V TO CONTACTOR
SYNC SYNC SYNC B
CABLE B 2 CONTACTOR COIL RETURN
G
(3-CORE 3 0V
SMALL)
NOTE 1 POWER UNIT
PLC PLA-F
24V LOCATION 2
BN or 1 L POWER
BLACK 1 PHASE
CAN HI 1 1 MAINS IN BL or 2 N SUPPLY
WHITE E TB4 TB4
CAN LO 2 2
BLUE SET FOR G/Y V/BK
GND 3 3
ORANGE +220V OR 0V 1 V/BK G/Y 1 0V
HEADING LINE 4 4 S/BN G/BK
RED -110V INPUT 0V 2 G/BK S/BN 2 0V
AZIMUTH 5 5 G/B BN/BK
0V 3 BN/BK G/B 3 0V
6 6 P V
V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
YELLOW 0V 4 P 4 0V
+27V 7 7 BK
GREEN 0V 5 Y BK 5 0V
PLL-Q
GND 8 8 B
0V 6 6 0V
W/V Y/V
+26V 7 Y/V W/V 7 0V
W/BN Y/BN
+26V 8 Y/BN W/BN 8 +27V
MAINS R/BK O
+26V 9 O R/BK 9 +27V
RELAY BN W
+26V 10 W BN 10 +27V
G
+26V 11 G
1
PLA
2
5
3
6
8
4
7
R 11 +27V
+26V 12 R 12 +27V
TB5
PLC 13 +27V
R/B 1 0V R/B
B/O 14 +27V
1 R/Y 2 TUNE R/Y
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE G/Y
CAN ADAPTER PCB 2 R/W 3 TUNE IND R/W
NNR-A981 B/Y 4 MP B/Y
B/W 5 LP B/W
PLB CONTROL BOARD
S 6 RUN S
S
RUN 1 R/G 7 MUTE R/G
R/G TB4 LOCATION PLM
MUTE 2 G/O 8 AZ G/O
B/Y 3
MP 3 G/W 9 HL G/W 6
B/W
LP 4 T or Lt/G 10 Tx READY T or Lt/G 5
R/Y
TUNE CONTROLS 5 B/BK 11 Rx MON B/BK 14 4
R/W
TUNE INDICATORS 6 12 13 3
T B
Tx READY 7 12 Tx MON 0V 2 2-CORE
G/O B/BK R TO Tx MON ARM
AZIMUTH 8 11 Rx MON Tx MON 1
N/C 9 T or Lt/G NEON SIG
TB6 10 Tx READY
B/Bk G/W
Rx MON 10 B 1 CONTACTOR S/G 9 HL
G/W G/O
HEADING LINE 11 TO TB2 G 2 0V B/O 8 AZ
N/C 12 R/G
R 3 CONT +ve 27V S/B 7 MUTE
N/C CABLE M S
13 4 6 RUN
R/B (38-CORE) B/W
GROUND 14 5 5 LP
TO B/Y
6 4 MP
TRANSCEIVER R/W
7 3 TUNE IND
R/Y
8 2 TUNE
R/B
9 1 0V
PLK
10
CABLE M 11 5
(38-CORE) S/B CONT +27V 4
12
FROM DISPLAY OR B/O 0V 3
INTERSWITCH UNIT S/G CONTACTOR 2
VIDEO CONT +ve 1
COAX (W) COAX (W)
COAX'S
SYNC 4 0V
COAX (S) W
COAX (S) 3 VIDEO
2 SYNC
S
1 0V
CD-4580
Figure 11a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVI - Upmast), via RIU and Soft Start Unit: Interconnections

KH 2020
Chap 4a
38-CORE CABLE 38-CORE CABLE

(CABLE M) (CABLE M)
NUCLEUS 3 DISPLAY DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT Mk VII TRANSMITTER SOFT START UNIT
(HRC-A9) CTX-A9 CZZ-A14
INPUT PCB
TB1
PLV PLDA/B-2 PLTA/B-2 3PLB 1

3 PHASE 2
S S MAINS
TX RUN 1 1 6 3
R/G Bn
TX MUTE 2 2 7
B/Y Y
M PULSE 3 3 4
B/W W 3SKK TB2 TB3
L PULSE 4 4 5
R/Y B 2 R
TUNE 5 5 CONTACTOR +VE 4 1 1
R/W G 3 B
TUNE IND 6 6 CONTACTOR RTN 2 2 2
T OR Lt/G P 10 G
TX READY 7 7 3 3 3
G/O T 8
90/180 AZIMUTH 8 8 3 CORE
9 9
B/Bk V 11
RX MONITOR 10 10
G/W O 9
HEADING LINE 11 11
12 12 TURNING MECHANISM
13 13 MkVI
R/B Bk 1
0V 14 14 CAE-A41/42
PLW PLDA/B-1 PLTA/B-1
G & W/V (2 WIRES) 1TB1 MOTOR
1 1 1
Bn & S/Bn (2 WIRES) Bn
2 2 2 SW1 (+27V) 1 1 1
Y & B/O (2 WIRES) V
3 3 3 MOTOR START (+27V) 5 2 2
V & G/Y (2 WIRES) 2PLB
4 4 4 3 3
R & R/Bn (2 WIRES) T or LtG 3 PHASE
MODULATOR +27V 5 5 5 1
O 3SKM MAINS
6 6 6 Bk
B R/B 9SKA
MODULATOR 0V 7 7 7 2 +27V 6
8 P & V/Bk (2 WIRES) 8 R
8 NEON SIGNAL 1 3
9 R/Bk 9 9 B
NEON RETURN 2 4
10 Bn/Bk 10 10 G 6
AZIMUTH 3
11 W 11 11 Y 7
HEADING LINE 4
12 Bk 12 12 W 8
0V 5
R 1 Tx MON 0V
Tx MONITOR B
ARM 2 Tx MON SIG
PLT PLDA/B-3
G/Bk
SELECT DATA 1 6
W/Bn
RADAR SOURCE 2 4
Y/Bn 12 CORE
TX CONTROL 3 5 SK8
S/B CABLE
STATUS 1 4 7
S/G VIDEO VIDEO 1
STATUS 2 5 8
G/B
0V 6 9 SK2
SYNC SYNC 1
SK7
WHITE COAX
VIDEO
SK1
GREY COAX
SYNC
TB1-A/B TB2-A/B
L N L N
CABLE K
POWER UNIT FILTER
SHIP'S MAINS
110/220V 110/220V O/P CABLE K L
FILTER INPUT 2 CORE
(TB2) N
(TB1) FOR A MK4 OR MK6 MAINS INPUT
E
SECOND TRANSCEIVER ONLY
CD-4554
Figure 12a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII - S-Band) via Dual Interswitch Unit: Interconnections

KH 2020
Chap 4a
38-CORE CABLE 38-CORE CABLE 38-CORE CABLE

(CABLE M) (CABLE M) (CABLE M)
NUCLEUS 3 DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT HRC-A9 Mk V TRANSMITTER Mk IV TRANSMITTER
INPUT/OUTPUT PCB NOTE 1 CAE-A30-7/8 CAE-A12-20
Tx CONTROL FROM DISPLAY TO TRANSCEIVER
PLV PLA-2/PLDB-2 PLTA-2/PLTB-2 PLG PLK TB1-B TB1-C
1 S 1 1 6
Tx RUN 2
2 R/G 2 2 3 OPTION (MUTE)
Tx MUTE 3
3 B/Y 3 3 10
MED PULSE 7
4 B/W 4 4 11
LONG PULSE 6
5 R/Y 5 5 8
TUNE 4
6 R/W 6 6 9
TUNE INDICATOR 5
7 T 7 7 7
READY 1
8 G/O 8 8 9
AZIMUTH 4
9 9 9
NOT REQUIRED
10 B/Bk 10 10 14
Rx MON 6
11 G/W 11 11 12
HEADING LINE 3
12 12 12
NOT REQUIRED 1
13 13 13
NOT REQUIRED 2
14 R/B 14 14 5
0V 5
12 R
Tx POWER 13 B }Tx MONITOR PSU
PLW PLDA-1/PLDB-1 PLTA-1/PLTB-1 ARM 2PLB
1 G 1 1 3
ANTENNA +24V 1
2 Bn 2 2 4 0V
ANTENNA +24V 2
3 Y 3 3 5
ANTENNA 0V
4 V 4 4
ANTENNA 0V 6
5 R 5 5
MODULATOR +27V 1
6 O 6 6
MODULATOR +27V
7 B 7 7
MODULATOR 0V 2
8 P 8 8
MODULATOR 0V
9 R/Bk 9 9
+12V 7
10 Bn/Bk 10 10
-12V 4
11 W 11 11
MAG. HEATER 8.5V 1
12 Bk 12 12
MAG. HEATER 0V 2
SKP PLF
4 SCREEN
VIDEO VID 1, 2 OR 3
WHITE COAX SK7 (9) SK8 (10) 3 VIDEO
SKO 2 SCREEN
SK2 (5) 1 SYNC SYNC 1, 2 OR 3
SYNC
GREY COAX SK1 (4)
PLT PLDA-3/PLDB-3 LN
G/Bk 6
SELECT DATA 1 MAINS
W/Bn 4 NOTES:
RADAR SOURCE 2 INPUT FILTER
Y/Bn 5 1) THE DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT ENABLES 2 DISPLAYS
Tx CONTROL 3
S/B 7 & 2 TRANSMITTERS TO BE INTERCONNECTED
STATUS 1 4
S/G 8
STATUS 2 5
G/B 9
0V 6
INTERSWITCH
TB1 TB2
NL NL
SHIPS MAINS SINGLE PHASE 230V FILTER * 110/220V * 2-CORE POWER CABLE K Tx POWER CABLE K
CABLE K INPUT TB1 OUTPUT TB2
CD-4514
Figure 13a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitters (MkVI & MkIV - Upmast), via Dual Interswitch Unit: Interconnections

KH 2020
Chap 4a
SOFT START UNIT MKVI Tx UPMAST (CAE-A37/A45)

(CZZ-A14/2)
AERIAL MOTOR
TB1 TB3 CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) TB
1 1 U1 PHASE 1
2 2 U2 PHASE 2
3 PHASE SHIPS SUPPLY Y or 3 Y or 3
3 3 U3 PHASE 3
TB1
R
NUCLEUS 3 B
DISPLAY G
(3-CORE 3 0V
SMALL)
POWER UNIT
SHIPS MAINS 24V
SINGLE PHASE 230V 2-CORE POWER CABLE K CABLE K BN or 1 L POWER LOCATION 2
FILTER 110/220V 1 PHASE
INPUT TB1 OUTPUT TB2 MAINS IN BL or 2 N SUPPLY
CABLE K
E TB4 TB4
SET FOR G/Y V/BK
+220V OR 0V 1 V/BK G/Y 1 0V
S/BN G/BK
-110V INPUT 0V 2 G/BK S/BN 2 0V
G/B BN/BK
0V 3 BN/BK G/B 3 0V
N L N L P V
0V 4 V P 4 0V
TB1 TB2 BK
0V 5 Y BK 5 0V
0V 6 B 6 0V
W/V Y/V
DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT +26V 7 Y/V W/V 7 0V
W/BN Y/BN
(HRC-A9) +26V 8 Y/BN W/BN 8 +27V
R/BK O
+26V 9 O R/BK 9 +27V
BN W
NOTE 1 +26V 10 W BN 10 +27V
G
+26V 11 G 11 +27V
Tx CONTROL FROM DISPLAY TO TRANSCEIVER R
+26V 12 R 12 +27V
PLV PLDA-2 or PLDB-2 PLTA-2 or PLTB-2 TB5
S 1 1 R/B 1 0V R/B 13 +27V
Tx RUN 1 14 +27V
R/G 2 2 R/Y 2 TUNE R/Y
Tx MUTE 2
B/Y 3 3 R/W 3 TUNE IND R/W
MED PULSE 3
B/W 4 4 B/Y 4 MP B/Y
LONG PULSE 4
R/Y 5 5 B/W 5 LP B/W
TUNE 5 CONTROL BOARD
R/W 6 6 S 6 RUN S
TUNE INDICATOR 6
T or Lt/G 7 7 R/G 7 MUTE R/G
READY 7 TB4 LOCATION PLM
G/O 8 8 G/O 8 AZ G/O
AZIMUTH 8 3
9 9 G/W 9 HL G/W 6
9
B/Bk 10 10 T or Lt/G 10 Tx READY T or Lt/G 5
Rx MON 10
G/W 11 11 B/BK 11 Rx MON B/BK 14 4
HEADING LINE 11
12 12 12 13 3
12 B
13 13 12 Tx MON 0V 2 2-CORE
13 B/BK R TO Tx MON ARM
R/B 14 14 11 Rx MON Tx MON 1
0V 14 T or Lt/G
TB6 10 Tx READY NEON SIG
G/W
B 1 CONTACTOR S/G 9 HL
TO TB2 G/O
G 2 0V B/O 8 AZ
R/G
R 3 CONT +ve 27V S/B 7 MUTE
SK7(9) SK8(10) CABLE M S
WHITE COAX 4 6 RUN
VIDEO SCREEN (38-CORE) B/W
VIDEO 5 5 LP
TO B/Y
SK1(4) 6 4 MP
SK2(5) TRANSCEIVER R/W
SYNC GREY COAX 7 3 TUNE IND
R/Y
SYNC SCREEN 8 2 TUNE
R/B
9 1 0V
PLK
10
INTERSWITCH CABLE M 11 5
PLT PLDA-3 or PLDB-3 (38-CORE) S/B CONT +27V 4
12
G/Bk FROM DISPLAY OR B/O 0V 3
SELECT DATA 1 6 INTERSWITCH UNIT S/G CONTACTOR
W/Bn 4 2
RADAR SOURCE 2 VIDEO CONT +ve
Y/Bn 5 1
Tx CONTROL 3 COAX (W) COAX (W)
S/B 7
STATUS 1 4
S/G 8
STATUS 2 5
G/B 9 COAX'S
0V 6 0V
SYNC W 4
COAX (S) COAX (S) 3 VIDEO
2 SYNC
S
1 0V
38-CORE CABLE
(CABLE M)
NOTES:
1) THE DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT ENABLES 2 DISPLAYS & 2 TRANSMITTERS TO BE INTERCONNECTED
CD-4581
Figure 14a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVI - Upmast), via Dual Interswitch Unit and Soft Start Unit: Interconnections

KH 2020
Chap 4a

(CABLE M) (CABLE M)
NUCLEUS 3 DISPLAY DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT Mk VII TRANSMITTER TURNING MECHANISM

(HRC-A9) CTX-A8 CAE-A30-6
INPUT PCB
PLV PLDA/B-2 PLTA/B-2 3PLB 1TB1 1TB1

S S T OR Lt/G
TX RUN 1 1 6 5 2
R/G Bn S
TX MUTE 2 2 7 6
B/Y Y MOTOR 0V
M PULSE 3 3 4 7
B/W W 5
L PULSE 4 4 8
R/Y B 2 O
TUNE 5 5 1 1
R/W G 3 P
TUNE IND 6 6 2
T OR Lt/G P 10 MOTOR +ve 26V
TX READY 7 7 3
G/O T 8
90/180 AZIMUTH 8 8 4
9 9
B/Bk V 11
RX MONITOR 10 10
G/W O 9 3SKK
HEADING LINE 11 11
MOTOR START (+27V) 1 Bn 3
12 12
MOTOR START RTN 2 V 4
13 13
R/B Bk 1 5
0V 14 14
3SKM
Bk 9SKA
PLW PLDA/B-1 PLTA/B-1 +27V 6
R
G & W/V (2 WIRES) NEON SIGNAL 1 5
1 1 1 B
Bn & S/Bn (2 WIRES) NEON RETURN 2 6
2 2 2 G
Y & B/O (2 WIRES) AZIMUTH 3 2
3 3 3 Y
V & G/Y (2 WIRES) 2PLB HEADING LINE 4 3
4 4 4 W
R & R/Bn (2 WIRES) T or LtG 0V 5 4
MODULATOR +27V 5 5 5 1 R
O Tx MONITOR 7 Tx MON 0V
6 6 6 B
B R/B ARM 8 Tx MON SIG
MODULATOR 0V 7 7 7 2
8 P & V/Bk (2 WIRES) 8 8
9 R/Bk 9 9 12 CORE
10 Bn/Bk 10 10 SMALL
11 W 11 11 CABLE
12 Bk 12 12
PLT PLDA/B-3
G/Bk
SELECT DATA 1 6
W/Bn
RADAR SOURCE 2 4
Y/Bn
TX CONTROL 3 5 SK8
S/B
STATUS 1 4 7
S/G VIDEO VIDEO 1
STATUS 2 5 8
G/B
0V 6 9 SK2
SYNC SYNC 1
SK7
WHITE COAX
VIDEO
SK1
GREY COAX
SYNC
TB1-A/B TB2-A/B
L N L N
CABLE K
POWER UNIT FILTER
SHIP'S MAINS
110/220V 110/220V O/P CABLE K L
FILTER INPUT 2 CORE
(TB2) N
E
CD-4553
Figure 15a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII - X-Band, Low Speed), via Dual Interswitch Unit: Interconnections

KH 2020
Chap 4a

(CABLE M) (CABLE M)
NUCLEUS 3 DISPLAY DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT Mk VII TRANSMITTER

(HRC-A9) CTX-A8 TURNING MECHANISM
INPUT PCB CAE-A30-5
PLV PLDA/B-2 PLTA/B-2 3PLB 1TB1 1TB2

S S T OR Lt/G
TX RUN 1 1 6 5 5
R/G Bn B/Bk
TX MUTE 2 2 7 S
B/Y Y 6 6
M PULSE 3 3 4 B/O
B/W W 5 MOTOR 0V
L PULSE 4 4 B/Y
R/Y B 2 7 7
TUNE 5 5 G/Y
R/W G 3
TUNE IND 6 6 B/W
T OR Lt/G P 10 8 8
TX READY 7 7 G/W
G/O T 8
90/180 AZIMUTH 8 8 O
9 9 1 1
B/Bk V R/W
RX MONITOR 10 10 11 P
G/W O 9 2 2
HEADING LINE 11 11 R/Bk
12 12 MOTOR +ve 36V R/B
13 13 3 3
R/B R/Bn
14 14 Bk 1
0V R/Y
4 4
R/G
PLW PLDA/B-1 PLTA/B-1
G & W/V (2 WIRES)
1 1 1 3SKK 1TB1
Bn & S/Bn (2 WIRES)
2 2 2 Bn 5
Y & B/O (2 WIRES) MOTOR START (+27V) 1
3 3 3 V 6
V & G/Y (2 WIRES) 2PLB MOTOR START RTN 2
4 4 4 3
R & R/Bn (2 WIRES) T or LtG
MODULATOR +27V 5 5 5 1
O
6 6 6 3SKM
B R/B
MODULATOR 0V 7 7 7 2 Bk 9SKA
P & V/Bk (2 WIRES) +27V 6
8 8 8 R
R/Bk NEON SIGNAL 1 5
9 9 9 B
Bn/Bk NEON RETURN 2 6
10 10 10 G
W AZIMUTH 3 2
11 11 11 Y
Bk HEADING LINE 4 3
12 12 12 W
0V 5 4
R
PLT PLDA/B-3 25 CORE ARM 8 Tx MON SIG
G/Bk CABLE
SELECT DATA 1 6
W/Bn
RADAR SOURCE 2 4
Y/Bn
TX CONTROL 3 5 SK8
S/B
STATUS 1 4 7
S/G VIDEO VIDEO 1
STATUS 2 5 8
G/B
0V 6 9 SK2
SYNC SYNC 1
SK7
WHITE COAX
VIDEO
SK1
GREY COAX
SYNC
TB1-A/B TB2-A/B
L N L N
CABLE K
POWER UNIT FILTER
SHIP'S MAINS
110/220V 110/220V O/P CABLE K L
FILTER INPUT 2 CORE
(TB2) N
E
CD-4551
Figure 16a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII - X-Band, High Speed), via Dual Interswitch Unit: Interconnections

KH 2020
Chap 4a
TB1 FS1 5A
L L L
SHIPS MAINS N N
FILTER
FS2 5A PSU
230V E E MAINS IN N
L N E
PRE-PRODUCTION ONLY
* L * L
N MON N
110/220 110/220 * E * E
MON PSU
FILTER
*
L N E
PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR ASSY
TO Tx
CON 1
NUCLEUS 5000 EPA, ATA & ARPA
L
1
L L L
L TB1 1
SHIPS MAINS N N N TB3 N MONITOR
N * FILTER** 2 PSU 3
230V E E E PSU
E 3 *
E
5
MONITOR ASSY
110/220
PROCESSOR UNIT
*
L N E
TO Tx
CON 2
NUCLEUS 6000 EPA, ATA & ARPA

*REFER TO LABEL FOR LNE CONNECTIONS
CD-2153
**LOCATION OF FS1 (5A) & FS2 (5A)
Figure 17a - Nucleus 3 Displays: Mains Power and Distribution

KH 2020
Chap 4b
CHAPTER 4B
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS - TRANSCEIVER MKIV
INTRODUCTION MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED WAVEGUIDE

LENGTHS
1 Kelvin Hughes, or appointed agents, contracts only to 5 The following maximum waveguide lengths are
supply the equipment, supervise the installation and recommended:
final connection of the equipment. It is recommended that
the installation is made by a fully qualified Kelvin Hughes
Radar Engineer.
Std Speed High Speed
2 Forward planning for positioning the various units of
the Radar must be made before any installation work is X-band 28m 20m
carried out. A full survey is required in order to establish the
ship’s fitment. This can be arranged with the Technical
Department of Kelvin Hughes or one of the approved
agencies. Details of Agencies worldwide can be found in SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS (SEE FIGURE 1)
Publication KH 401.
3 This chapter covers Installation of the Mk IV Upmast 6 Combinations of Antennas and Upmast Transceivers
Transmitter /Receivers. are:
4 The diagrams listed in Table 4.1b, provide installation (1) 1.8m X-band 25kW Antenna (CAE-A13/2)
information for the Transmitter/Receiver Units used in Turning Mechanism/Transceiver (CAE-A12-20)
this system. (2) 2.4m X-band 25kW Antenna (CAE-A25)
Turning Mechanism/Transceiver (CAE-A12-20)
Table 4.1b - Installation Diagrams
SAFETY NOTES
Observe the Health and Safety Notices at the front of

Figure Description this manual.
1b Upmast X-Band Transceiver CAE-A12-20 (25kW): 7 Safety personnel must ensure that persons do not
Installation Dimensions encroach on the area of work.
2b X-Band Upmast Transceiver: Cable Routing 8 Mains supplies in the vicinity of the Upmast
Transceiver are to be isolated when installing the
3b X-Band Upmast Transceiver Transmitter Monitor equipment.
Arm:
Connection Diagram 9 A suitable safety platform or harness should be used
when siting the Upmast Transceiver aloft.
4b Assembly of Cable Gland to Upmast
Transceiver/Turning Mechanism 10 The Upmast Transceiver must be hoisted to the fixing
position using a secured block and tackle or rope
5b X-Band Upmast Transceiver: Electrical Connections straps. The assembly MUST NOT be lifted by the antenna;
6b Optional Mains Isolator: Installation Dimensions
the complete unit must be secured and hoisted evenly.
7b Mk IV Transceiver Upmast (X-Band) to Nucleus

11 The transceiver must be earthed to the ship as shown
(5000) Interconnections Diagram
on the appropriate illustration.
12 The earthing straps must be fitted prior to switching on
the transceiver.

KH 2020
Chap 4b
INSTALLATION OF UPMAST X-BAND 17 The Upmast Transceiver must be mounted more than
914mm above any flat surface, when the flat surface is
TRANSCEIVER CAE-A12-20 (25KW) greater than the diameter swept by the antenna.
18 The Upmast Transceiver must not be positioned in the
GENERAL close proximity of any magnetic compass or D/F
antenna, etc.
13 The Upmast Transceiver comprises a casting with two
cover plates. Both cover plates are secured by four NOTE:
bolts and may be removed to access the motor and A heavy duty earthing strap or cable must be taken from the
transceiver PCBs mounted within. The PCBs are secured to upmast transceiver/turning mechanism to the ship’s earth.
mounting plates which form a safety cage whilst in the closed
position.
19 Position the Upmast Transceiver at the installation
site, supporting the unit where necessary, and mark
FITTING out the mounting holes for drilling. Refer to Figure 1b for
dimensions.
14 The Upmast Transceiver should be installed in such a
position to avoid any RF interference and where Blind 20 Allow sufficient cable length, (approximately 1m) on all
Arcs, caused by obstructions, e.g. masts, funnels, etc, are cables to enable them to be routed through the
eliminated or minimised. Funnels, crosstrees and other Transceiver unit. Refer to Figures 2b and 4b for details.
large obstructions can also reflect energy and give rise to Ensure that there is sufficient slack on all cables to allow for
spurious echo returns, especially in close proximity to land. full movement of the equipment on its mounts during any
sudden shock, or extreme movement of the vessel.
15 The Upmast Transceiver must not be mounted where
the temperature exceeds 70oC.
16 The Upmast Transceiver must be kept clear of ship’s WARNING
flexible communication antennas to avoid damage to
both. THE UNIT MUST NOT BE LIFTED BY MEANS OF THE
ANTENNA OR WING CASTING. THE LIFTING
SUPPORTS MUST GO UNDER THE CASTING.

TURNING RADIUS 2333 or 1909
PTFE WINDOW FITTED AT THIS CONNECTION
1241 or 1029
Original
KELVIN HUGHES
FWD 645
MONITOR
ARM
406
OFF
ON
SAFETY
SWITCH
140
EARTHING POINT
4b.3
CABLE
GLANDS
250 150
310 270
Installation Dimensions
570
310
40 In transit Monitor Arm is stowed inside

Turning Mechanism carton
Figure 1b - Upmast X-Band Transceiver CAE-A12-20 (25kW):

270 14 mm holes (4 0 ff )
M12 bolts
(TORQUE LOADED TO 75 kg/m)

All dimensions in millimetres: o o
At Relative Humidity 0%: -25 C to +70 C
o
Turning Mech Weight : 40kg At Relative Humidity 95% : +40 C
Antenna (1.3m) Weight: 10kg
Antenna (2.4m) Weight : 20kg COMPASS SAFE DISTANCES :-
Standard Compass 3m (Grade I)
Power Consumption : 400VA Steering Compass 1.8m (Grade II)
May 01
CD-4541
Chap 4b
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4b
FWD
TB1C TB1B TB1A TB2
PLB
POWER
SUPPLY
UNIT
HEADING MODULATOR
LINE PCB CONTROL
VIDEO & SYNC PCB
TERMINAL
PLATE
EARTHING POINT
ON UNDERSIDE
MAINS FILTER SHIP'S MAINS
SAFETY SWITCH
DISPLAY (38 CORE CABLE CODE M)
CD-4542 TX MONITOR ARM
Figure 2b - X-Band Upmast Transceiver: Cable Routing

KH 2020
Chap 4b
MONITOR ARM CHECKS AFTER FITTING
21 The Monitor Arm is positioned by means of a channel 26 Setting to work instructions are described in Chapter 5,
above the glands at the rear of the casting, and is Commissioning.
secured by a clamp with two retaining screws. The neon
points to starboard when viewed from the rear of the 27 The transceiver must be thoroughly checked for
transceiver. security, accessibility, and correct cabling runs.
22 The cable is routed through the gland nearest the

channel and connects to PLA-7 (red) and PLA-8 (blue)
on the Azimuth PCB (CTX-A106). Refer to Figure 3b.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
23 For detailed electrical connection of cables to the
transceiver unit, refer to the installation diagrams in
Figure 5b. Ensure that all cables are secured to their
associated entry point and that screened cables are earthed
to their respective units.
24 Connecting cables between the display and the
transceiver should be limited to a length of 65 metres.
Where the distance between transceiver and display is
between 65-180 metres, special low loss co-axial cable is
required.
25 Cable specifications are detailed in Paragraph 30
onwards.
CAE-A106
PLA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 BLUE
TO TX MONITOR ARM
RED
6
CD-1134
Figure 3b - X-Band Upmast Transceiver Transmitter Monitor Arm:

Connection Diagram

May 01
Chap 4b
KH 2020
OUTSIDE INSIDE
OF OF
CASTING CASTING
CASTING
CLAMPING NUT
BRASS BUNG
NYLON WASHER
RUBBER GLAND
FERRULE PUSHED INSIDE CABLE OUTER INSULATION
CABLE OUTER
INSULATION
BRAID
4b.6
BRAID IS CONTINUOUS
THROUGH GLAND
NOTE: SCREENING DISC IS TO BE

FITTED IN PLACE OF THE FERRULE
UNTIL CABLE INSTALLATION TAKES
PLACE.
Figure 4b - Assembly of Cable Gland to Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism

FOR 38-CORE CABLE REMOVE 700 mm
OF OUTER COVER AND 640 mm OF BRAID
DISCS ARE TO BE LEFT IN UNUSED
CABLE GLANDS.
640 mm
CD-0278 700 mm
Original
KH 2020
Chap 4b
MK IV X-BAND
UPMAST TRANSCEIVER
(CAE-A12-20)
TB1-B
1 TX MON SIG
2 TX MON 0V
G/W 3 HL
G/O 4 AZ
R/B 0V
MODULATOR
5
B/W 6 LONG ULSE
B/Y 7 MEDIUM PULSE
8
TB1-C
38-CORE T or LtG 1 TX READY
(CABLE CODE M) S 2 TX RUN
FROM DISPLAY R/G 3 MUTE
R/Y 4 TUNE
R/W 5 TUNE IND
B/Bk 6 RX MON
PLB
R 1 START +27V POWER
B 2 START RETN UNIT
SYNC 1
SYNC
0V
VIDEO 2
VIDEO 2
0V
ONLY CONNECTED WHEN VIDEO 3

INTERSWITCH UNIT IS
EMPLOYED 0V
POWER 1 MAINS
2-CORE INPUT
(CABLE CODE K) 2
FILTER
UNIT
VIDEO AND SYNC TERMINAL PLATE
E
SHIP'S MAINS
N - MAINS INPUT FILTER
(CABLE CODE K)
L +
ONLY FITTED WHEN POWER SUPPLY UNIT IS UTILISED
CD-4661
Figure 5b - X-Band Upmast Transceiver: Electrical Connections

KH 2020
Chap 4b
OPTIONAL MAINS ISOLATOR (80-261-600)
28 The mains isolator must be fitted adjacent to the
display or in the area of the operators control room and
connected in parallel with the main display.
29 With reference to Figure 66, secure the Mains Isolator
in the required position (no fittings are supplied).
160 120
205
160
80 30
WIRING FOR 3 PHASE WIRING FOR SINGLE PHASE
CABLE
211K
15 mm 1.D 15 mm 1.D
CABLE GLAND CABLE GLAND
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
CONNECT
SCREENS
TO EARTH
FIT 20 AMP FUSES 15 mm 1.D FIT 20 AMP FUSES 15 mm 1.D

SHIP'S SUPPLY
SINGL PHASE
110V/220V
CD-1157
Figure 6b - Optional Mains Isolator: Installation Dimensions

KH 2020
Chap 4b
CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
CABLE CODES
30 Each cable is identified by a letter code which defines
the type of cable required, e.g. Cable code N is a
38-core cable. Table 1 provides detailed specifications for
each cable type. For ease of identification, the cable cores
are colour coded (refer to Table 2).
31 The cables used to connect Kelvin Hughes Radar
equipment are to be to the following specification. If
the cables are not purchased from Kelvin Hughes, the
contractor must either confirm that the cables are to
specification or submit samples to Kelvin Hughes for
approval.
Table 4.2b - Cable Specification
CABLE DESCRIPTION CODE CORE DIAMETER
A 2-core small 1344-718 16/0.2 6.1mm 7.7mm

multi-core
B 3-core small 1344-719 16/0.2 6.4mm 7.2mm
multi-core
E 12-core small 1344-722 16/0.2 10mm 11mm
multi-core
G 25-core small 1344-724 16/0.2 13.6mm 14mm
multi-core
H. TO BE SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR
J Co-axial 75 5344-705 7/0.07 7mm
ohms d/s
K 2-core Power 1344-1123 7/0.67 12mm
N 38-core small 5344-701
multi-core
P Co-axial (Low 5344-719 Varies 8.3mm
Loss) Type ECL (for long
125 cable lengths
only)

KH 2020
Chap 4b
SMALL MULTI-CORE CABLES
32 These cables are to conform to DEF STAN 61-12 (part
5). Each cable is to consist of a number of insulated Table 4.3b - Cable Colour Abbreviations (38-Core)
cores, collectively screened and clad in an outer sheath of
PVC.
Core Details ABBREVIATION COLOUR
33 The core details are as follows: R RED

B BLUE
(1) Conductors consist of 16 strands of 0.2mm
diameter tinned copper wire. G GREEN
Y YELLOW
(2) Nominal cross-section area of conductor = 0.5
mm2. W WHITE
Bk BLACK
(3) Nominal diameter of conductor = 0.93mm
Bn BROWN
(4) Nominal thickness of insulation = 0.45mm V VIOLET
(5) Minimum thickness of insulation = 0.40mm O ORANGE
(6) Minimum diameter of core = 1.75mm P PINK
T TURQUOISE
(7) Maximum diameter of core = 1.90mm
S SLATE (grey)
Braided Screen R/B RED/BLUE
R/G RED/GREEN
34 The cores are laid-up, covered with binding tape over R/Y RED/YELLOW
which is woven a braiding of 0.2mm diameter tinned
R/W RED/WHITE
copper wire.
R/Bk RED/BLACK
Outer Sheath R/Bn RED/BROWN
B/Y BLUE/YELLOW
35 An outer sheath of PVC compound is applied by B/W BLUE/WHITE
extrusion over the wire braiding.
B/Bk BLUE/BLACK
Maximum Current Rating B/O BLUE/ORANGE
G/Y GREEN/YELLOW
36 The maximum current ratings are as follows: G/W GREEN/WHITE
(1) 2.5 A at 1000 V dc. G/Bk GREEN/BLACK
(2) 2.5 A at 440 V ac at 1600Hz. G/O GREEN/ORANGE
G/S GREEN/SLATE
Bn/Bk BROWN/BLACK
Bn/Y BROWN/YELLOW
Bn/W BROWN/WHITE
S/B SLATE/BLUE
S/Bn SLATE/BROWN
V/Bk VIOLET/BLACK
V/Y VIOLET/YELLOW
V/W VIOLET/WHITE
W/R WHITE/RED
WHITE CO-AX
SLATE CO-AX
N/C NO CONNECTION

KH 2020
Chap 4b
POWER CABLES
37 These cables are used for services requiring a
moderate current carrying capacity, i.e. main supplies.
2-Core E.P. Rubber:
Cable Code K: KH Reference No. 1344-1123

250/440V grade: 7 x 0.67 mm (7 x 0.026") cores
E.P. rubber insulated, cores laid-up, jute
filled, proof cotton taped, braided with
0.2mm (0.0078") diameter tinned copper
wire, PVC outer sheath.
Outer diameter: 12 mm (0.47 in.).

KH 2020
Chap 4b

KH 2020
Chap 4b
38 - CORE
NUCLEUS 3 DISPLAY CABLE
(NNR) (CABLE N)
Mk IV TRANSMITTER
INPUT PCB X BAND (CAE-A12-20)
PLV TB1-B TB1-C

1 S
TX RUN 2
2 R/G 3
TX MUTE 3 B/Y
M PULSE 7
4 B/W 6
L PULSE 5 R/Y
TUNE 4
6 R/W 5
TUNE IND 7 T 1
TX READY 8 G/O 4
90/180 AZIMUTH 9
10 B/Bk 6
RX MONITOR 11 G/W 3
HEADING LINE 12 1
13 2
14 R/B 5
0V
VIDEO SCREEN WHITE COAX VID 1

VIDEO
SYNC SCREEN
GREY CO-AX SYNC 1
SYNC
BLANK
PLU
1
PHASE 1
2 HL/AZ PCB
PHASE 2
GYRO 3 CABLE D or
PHASE 3 250V - MPYC - 5
4
REF 1 PLA
5
REF 2 R TX
7
6 B MONITOR
8
PULSE 7 ARM
CABLE A or
LOG SHORT 8 250V - DPYCS - 1.25
0V
PLF
GPS 2 CABLE A or
I/P
INTERFACE 3 250V - DPYCS - 1.25
0V
POWER UNIT
L N
110 / 220V CABLE K or 250V - DPYC-3.5 MAINS
INPUT
OUTPUT INPUT
FILTER (TB2) FILTER
CABLE K or 250V - DPYC-3.5 SHIP'S MAINS
110/220V
CD-2305
Figure 7b - Mk IV Transceiver Upmast (X-Band) to Nucleus 3 (5000) Interconnections Diagram
Original 4b.13/14 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 4c
CHAPTER 4C
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS - TRANSCEIVER MKV
INTRODUCTION 8 The diagram(s) listed in Table 4.1c, provide

installation information for the Transmitter/Receiver
Units used in this system.
1 Kelvin Hughes, or appointed agents, contracts only to
supply the equipment, supervise the installation and
final connection of the equipment. It is recommended that Table 4.1c
the installation is made by a fully qualified Kelvin Hughes
Radar Engineer.
2 Forward planning for positioning the various units of Figure Description
the Radar must be made before any installation work is
carried out. A full survey is required in order to establish the
1c Mk V Upmast (X-Band) Transceiver Inter-unit
ship’s fitment. This can be arranged with the Technical Interconnections.
Department of Kelvin Hughes or one of the approved
agencies. Details of Agencies worldwide can be found in 2c Mk V Transceiver Interconnections Diagram
Publication KH 401.
3 The Antenna/Transceiver is to be mounted on a rigid
platform which provides clearance from other
structures for the rotating antenna. The height and position
of the platform is to be such that the radiated beam is
unobstructed forward (i.e. beam-to-beam through the ship’s MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED WAVEGUIDE
head) and the vertical radiated beam clearing the ship’s bow. LENGTHS
4 This Chapter covers Installation of the Mk V
Transmitter/Receivers. 9 The following maximum waveguide lengths are
recommended:
5 There are two versions of the MkV Transceiver
covered in this publication:
(1) Low Speed Turning Mechanism CAE-A30-7. Std Speed High Speed
(2) High Speed Turning Mechanism CAE-A30-8.
X-band 28m 20m
6 The High Speed Turning Mechanism requires a +36V
to +40V supply to provide the supply to the motor drive
PCB. This supply can be obtained from either a Transmitter
Interface Unit (TIU) or from an external downmast Power
Supply CZZ-A22.
NOTE:
The power unit in the TIU can be set, when installed, to
provide either High or Low motor supplies.
7 The Low Speed Turning Mechanism uses +27V power

supplies from the display to drive the turning motor.
Original 4c.1 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 4c
SAFETY NOTES EQUIPMENT LOCATION

10 Electrical power supplies are to be isolated to any part Transceiver and Turning Mechanism
of the platform wh e n mounting an
antenna/transceiver. A suitable safety platform or harness 11 The Transceiver/Turning Mechanism should be
should be used to avoid personal injury when working aloft. installed in such a position where Blind Arcs, caused
(1) A working platform is to be provided for installing by obstructions, e.g. masts, funnels, are eliminated or
or servicing the assembly. This should be minimised. Funnels, crosstrees and other large obstructions
positioned approximately a metre below the base can also reflect energy and give rise to spurious echo returns
of the Transceiver housing with a guard rail especially in close proximity to land.
surrounding it. 12 The Transceiver/Turning Mechanism must not be
(2) A flat steel plate (12mm thick approx.), pre-drilled mounted where the temperature exceeds 70°C.
(in accordance with Figure 1) to accommodate the
Transceiver unit and the cable from the Display. 13 The Transceiver/Turning Mechanism must be kept
The steel plate must be mounted horizontally and clear of ship’s flexible communication aerials to avoid
braced with struts for rigidity. damage to both.
(3) The plate has to be sited in a clear area where the 14 The Transceiver/Turning Mechanism must be
turning Antenna cannot be obstructed by any mounted more than 914mm above any flat surface,
cables, mast halyards etc. when the flat surface is greater than the diameter swept by
the antenna.
(4) The Antenna and Transceiver Unit must be
hoisted to the fixing position using a secured block 15 The Transceiver/Turning Mechanism must not be
and tackle or rope straps. positioned in the close proximity of any magnetic
compass or D/F aerial, etc.
(5) Safety personnel must ensure that persons do not
encroach on the area of work. 40V Power Supply (CZZ-A22)
(6) The Antenna and Transceiver Unit must NOT be
lifted by the array, but the complete unit secured and 16 The following points must be considered when
hoisted evenly. selecting a suitable site for the Power Supply:
(1) The Power Supply is designed for bulkhead
mounting, away from the turning mechanism.
(2) Consideration must be given to accessibility for
servicing and protection from adverse conditions.
For ease of maintenance, the top of the power
supply should not be mounted more than 1.6m
above the deck.
(3) Ensure that there is sufficient space below the unit
for cable entries.
(4) The power supply should be mounted in a position
which allows for ventilation and cooling.
NOTE:
The power supply air circulation MUST NOT be
obstructed.
(5) Do not fit the power supply in an acoustic, noise

sensitive area, e.g. The bridge or operations
room.
May 01 4c.2 Original

KH 2020
Chap 4c
FITTING NOTE:
The outer casing of the Transceiver must be bonded to the
Transceiver and Turning Mechanism ship’s superstructure using a copper earthing strap
connected to the earthing point shown in Figure 1.
17 The Antenna and Transceiver are specified and
supplied separately. Refer to Figure 1c for outline (5) The connecting cable from the Transceiver to the
dimensions and fixing centres. The following criteria are to Display should be kept to a maximum of 60
be observed when installing: metres. Do not exceed 60m without consulting the
Kelvin Hughes Technical Department.
NOTE:
(6) Fit the Monitor Arm (if supplied) onto the side of
Assemble the two units together prior to hoisting into the
installation position. the casing and secure the clamp with the four
retaining screws. The monitor arm cable is passed
through the smaller cable gland and clamped. The
cable screen is to be earthed by the ferrules in the
cable gland assembly.
CAUTION
40V Power Supply CZZ-A22
Do not remove the transparent film covering the
waveguide outlet as this prevents the ingress of 18 The +40V Power Supply is fitted to the bulkhead using
water or moisture. the four installation bolts provided.
(1) Remove the protective caps, tapes etc. Ensure

the waveguide faces are clean and free from
grease. Fit the appropriate ‘O’ ring. Fit the
Antenna array to the transceiver with the eight
bolts, holding it loosely in position. DO NOT
TIGHTEN THE BOLTS. Refer to Figure 2c.
(2) Align the waveguide from the Antenna to the
Rotating Joint and fit the four waveguide bolts. Do
not force the waveguide to the coupling face.
Tighten the waveguide bolts evenly until the
mating faces are flush. Torque load the Antenna
retaining bolts to 19 to 24 Nm (14-16 lb./ft).
(3) Hoist the Transceiver and Antenna assembly,
(ensuring the slings do not foul with the Array), to
the mounting plate.
(4) Mount the Transceiver facing forward (removable
cover facing aft). Fit the retaining bolts and torque
load to 50lb/ft (75kg/m) then gain access to the
interior by removing the rear cover.

TURNING CIRCLE DIA. 2412, 1990 OR 1310
May 01
Chap 4c
KH 2020
2262, 1840, or 1160 75
MONITOR ARM
192
SEE INSTRUCTION 1
562
FWD
FIXING BOLTS
3 x M12
EARTHING
STRAP CABLE ENTRY
CABLE ENTRY 145
( DIAMETER OF CABLE GLAND - 22mm ) (at rear)
380 18mm off centre
290 34mm from base
ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES 290 320
Transceiver Weight : 22kg
4c.4
Antenna (1.8m) Weight: 14kg DANGER
Antenna (2.4m) Weight : 21kg
MOUNTING BOLT HIGH VOLTAGE
Power Consumption : 170W (10kW) 'FOOTPRINT'
160W (5kW)
290
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE 14 mm
o o
At Relative Humidity 0% : -25 C to +70 C
At Relative Humidity 95% : +40 oC
OFF
ON
POSITION OF
ANTENNA ARRAY SAFETY SWITCH
1 Assemble Antenna Array to Transceiver using 6 x M6 bolts, nuts and washers provided.
Figure 1c - Transceiver Fixing Centres and Outline Dimensions

2 Assemble Antenna feed to rotating joint with "O" ring seal. Use bolts, nuts and washers provided. BEFORE ANY MAINTENANCE IS CARRIED OUT TO
THE TRANSCEIVER INTERNALS - ISOLATE THE MAINS
SUPPLY VIA THE EXTERNAL SAFETY SWITCH
INTERIOR ACCESS
4 Access to the Transceiver interior obtained by unscrewing the four captive M8 bolts.
CABLE ENTRY
5 Pass the cable through the rear of the cable glands, use spanner provided to tighten gland nut
Do not overtighten.
CD-3730
Original
KH 2020
Chap 4c
NOTE: COPPER EARTH STRAP TO

SHIPS GROUND (TO BE SUPPLIED FWD
BY SHIPYARD)
NOMINALLY 20mm x 2mm
RIDGID OR FLEXABLE
WAVEGUIDE
450
290
450
TUBE WALL THICKNESS

12 MM MINIMUM
410
290
290 ø14 mm
MOUNTING PLATE AND

STIFFENING PIECES
CD-3817 15mm STEEL
Figure 2c - Transceiver Mast Mounting

KH 2020
Chap 4c

KH 2020
Chap 4c
ASSEMBLY OF ANTENNA WAVEGUIDE TO

ROTATING JOINT.
SEAL WITH ‘DENSOTAPE’ OR SIMILAR
COMPOUND.
DO NOT USE FORCE WHEN ASSEMBLING.
ASSEMBLY OF ANTENNA TO TURNING MECHANISM

(NOTE: ONLY ONE SIDE IS DETAILED, THE OTHER SIDE
IS ASSEMBLED IN THE SAME MANNER.)
ASSEMBLE LOOSELY FIRST, ALIGN AND FIT WAVEGUIDE
BOLTS BEFORE TIGHTENING ANTENNA RETAINING BOLTS.
MOUNTING FOOTPRINT FOR TURNING MECHANISM

TO DECKHEAD MOUNTING PLATFORM.
THREE M12 FIXING BOLTS
(NOT SUPPLIED AS PART OF FITTING KIT)
CD-4713
Figure 3c - Assembling Antenna to Turning Mechanism
Original 4c.7/8 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 4c
300
KEYSWITCH MAINS ON MOTOR ON
MOTOR POWERo UNIT

COMPASS SAFE DISTANCES SER.N
GRADE I CODE.No CZZ-A22 81
OFF
GRADE II EQUIPMENT CLASS B
ON DISSIPATION MASS Kg
MANUFACTURED BY HAINAULT ENGLAND
A DIVISION OF SMITHS INDUSTRIES AEROSPACE
MOD RECORD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
301
160 70.5
KEYSWITCH
45-613-4205
22
KS2 KS2
KS1 KS1
FAN
45-063-158
CN1
PLB
PLA
8 TB2 1
TB1
POWER SUPPLY PCB TB2

CZZ-A186
R1
HEATSINK
L N
476
401
LOAD DANGER
MAINS FILTER High
Voltage
POWER SUPPLY
LINE 45-690-0002
CN2
8
TB1
FERRITE CORE
1
22
TB1
160 70.5
CD-3732
VIEW WITH COVER REMOVED
Figure 4c - 40V Power Supply CZZ-A22: Dimensions

KH 2020
Chap 4c
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Cable Specifications 38-Core Custom Built Cable
19 Each cable is identified by a letter code which defines 21 The 38-core composite cable (KH code number
the type of cable required, e.g. Cable code N is a 5344-701) is made for Kelvin Hughes and comprises
38-core cable. Table 1 provides specifications for each the following:
cable type. Table 2 provides 38-core cable, colour code
(1) 4 cores of 32/0.2 mm copper wire.
abbreviations.
20 The cables used to connect Kelvin Hughes equipment
are to be to the following specification. Failure to use (3) 2 cores of co-axial cable.
the correct specification cables may result in impaired
equipment performance.
TABLE 1 - CABLE SPECIFICATION
B 3-core small multi-core 1344-719 16/0.2 6.4mm 7.2mm
E 12-core small multi-core 1344-722 16/0.2 10mm 11mm
F 18-core small multi-core 1344-723 16/0.2 11.5mm 12.3mm
G 25-core small multi-core 1344-724 16/0.2 13.6mm 14mm
J Co-axial 75 ohms double screened 5344-705 7/0.07 7mm
K 2-core Power 1344-1123 7/0.67 12mm
N 38-core small multi-core 5344-701
P Co-axial (Low Loss) Type ECL 125 5344-719 (for long Varies 8.3mm
cable lengths only)

KH 2020
Chap 4c
Small Multi-Core Cables

TABLE 4.1 - 38-CORE CABLE COLOUR 22 These cables conform to DEF STAN 61-12 (part 5).
ABBREVIATIONS Each cable consists of a number of insulated cores,
collectively screened and clad in a PVC outer sheath.
23 Core Details
ABBREVIATION COLOUR
The core details are as follows:
R RED Conductors consist of 16 strands of 0.2 mm diameter
tinned copper wire.
B BLUE Nominal cross-section area of conductor = 0.5 mm2.
G GREEN
Nominal diameter of conductor = 0.93 mm
Nominal thickness of insulation = 0.45 mm
Y YELLOW Minimum thickness of insulation = 0.40 mm
Minimum diameter of core = 1.75 mm
W WHITE Maximum diameter of core = 1.90 mm
Bk BLACK
24 Braided Screen
Bn BROWN
The cores are laid-up, covered with binding tape over
V VIOLET which is woven a braiding of 0.2 mm diameter tinned
O ORANGE
copper wire.
25 Outer Sheath
P PINK
T or Lt/G TURQUOISE or LIGHT A PVC outer sheath is applied by extrusion over the
GREEN wire braiding.
S SLATE (grey)
26 Maximum Current Rating
R/B RED/BLUE
The maximum current ratings are as follows:
R/G RED/GREEN
2.5 A at 1000 V dc
R/Y RED/YELLOW 2.5 A at 440 V ac at 1600Hz.
R/W RED/WHITE
R/Bk RED/BLACK
R/Bn RED/BROWN
B/Y BLUE/YELLOW
B/W BLUE/WHITE
B/Bk BLUE/BLACK
B/O BLUE/ORANGE
G/Y GREEN/YELLOW
G/W GREEN/WHITE
G/Bk GREEN/BLACK
G/O GREEN/ORANGE
G/S GREEN/SLATE
Bn/Bk BROWN/BLACK
Bn/Y BROWN/YELLOW
Bn/W BROWN/WHITE

KH 2020
Chap 4c
Power Cables Transceiver Wiring

27 These cables are used for services requiring a 29 Feed the 38-core composite cable into the Transceiver
moderate current carrying capacity, i.e. main supplies. and prepare as instructed in Figure 5c. The earthing
ferrules must be used.
2-Core (Power):
30 Feed the 2-core cable from the Transmitter Monitor, if
fitted, into the Transceiver.
Cable Code Kit: KH Reference No. 1344-1123
250/440V grade: 7 x 0.67mm cores 31 Connect wires as shown in Figure 6c.
Cross linked polythene insulation
braided with 0.2mm diameter tinned CHECKS AFTER FITTING
copper wire, 79% coverage, low
smoke, zero halogen outer sheath. 32 Setting to work instructions are described in Chapter 3.
Outer Diameter: 9.95mm The antenna must be checked for security, freedom to
rotate and that it does not foul any halyards or obstructions.
33 All cable entries must be checked for signs of fretting,
chafing, water leakage or damage.
Co-axial Cables
NOTE:
28 Where the distance between the Display and the
Transceiver exceeds 60 metres, special co-axial The fitting kit contains Densotape, which is used to seal the
cables and/or Sync and signal amplifiers may be required to cable entries.
obtain optimum results, consult Kelvin Hughes prior to
installation of the cables.
Co-axial 75 ohms double screened
Cable Code J: KH Reference No. 5344-705

2003A to CW1229C (BT1229B)
Specification:
Inner Conductor: 0.61 mm single conductor
Dielectric: Polyethylene
Screen: Close knit braid - double screen
Overall Dia: 6.9 mm
Electrical
Attenuation: 60MHz 9dB/100m MAX
Attenuation: 200MHz 18.5dB/100m MAX
Impedance: 75 Ohm
Co-axial Cable 75 ohms low loss (for extended cable runs)
Co-axial Cable: CODE No. 5344-719

Type ECL 125 (Manufacturer’s code)
Specification:
Inner Conductor: 1.25 mm Single Conductor
Dielectric: Air Spaced Polyethylene
Screen: Tape Screen
Overall Dia: 8.3 mm
Electrical
Impedance: 75 Ohm

KH 2020
Chap 4c

KH 2020
Chap 4c
1. Remove gland nut, plastic washer

and seal and discard washer.
2. Thread cable (1N) through back of

gland housing for approx 300mm.
3. Remove cable outer covering

(exposing braid) back as far as
15mm from the gland housing.
8
4. Fold braid double to 80mm from
TB2
gland housing (remove excess). 1
5. Place seal over cable and onto White (Video) Cable

Strip back outer 35mm.
outer covering at the gland housing. Cut centre core to 10mm
and fold 10mm of braid
6. Insert the two screening ferrules back over outer.
(Item )10 between outer covering
and screen braid at gland as shown.
7. Place gland nut over cable and screw

assembly into gland housing and secure
screening and cable with `P' clip, unwrap
paper insulation back to screening and discard. 1
TB2
Grey (Sync) Cable

Casting Strip back outer 25mm.
Gland
Cut centre core to 10mm
Rubber and fold 10mm of braid
Seal
back over outer.
Ferrule
Tx Monitor Arm
Safety Switch
Before any maintenance is carried out on
the transceiver, isolate mains supply
CD-3731 via external safety switch.
Figure 5c - 38-Core Composite Cable: Installation

KH 2020
Chap 4c
TB2
G 1 ANTENNA +27V *
W/V
Bn 2 ANTENNA +27V
S/Bn
3
2 CORE 4
FROM Tx MON.
Y 5 ANTENNA 0V
B/O
WHITE (VIDEO) CABLE -
V 6 ANTENNA 0V Strip back outer 25mm. Cut centre core to 10mm
G/Y and fold 10mm of braid back over outer.
38 CORE CABLE 7 GREY (SYNC) CABLE -
Strip back outer 35mm. Cut centre core to 10mm
and fold 10mm of braid back over outer.
38 CORE COMPOSITE 8
FROM DISPLAY
VIDEO (SCREEN)
4
VIDEO (SIGNAL)
W 3
ENSURE SCREENS RB AZIMUTH SYNC (SIGNAL)
ARE CLAMPED S 2
AZIMUTH SYNC (SCREEN)
1
SEE INSERT
*
PLF
B/Bk 14 RECEIVER MONITOR
13 NEON
12 NEON (0V) G/W 12 HEADING LINE
N/C 11 B/W 11 LONG PULSE
N/C 10 B/Y 10 MEDIUM PULSE
G/O 9 AZIMUTH R/W 9 TUNE INDICATOR
N/C 8 R/Y 8 TUNE
R/Bk T 7 Tx READY
7 +12V (UNREGULATED)
V/Bk 6 MODULATOR GROUND S 6 RUN
P 5 MODULATOR GROUND R/B 5 0V (SIGNAL)

LINK 2-5
R/Bn 4 MODULATOR +27V Bn/Bk 4 -12V
O 3 MODULATOR +27V R/G 3 MUTE
B 2 MODULATOR GROUND Bk 2 0V MAG. HEATER
W 1 +8V MAG. HEATER

R 1 MODULATOR +27V
LINK 1-3 PLK PLG

TERMINALS PCB TERMINALS PCB
CD-3819
Figure 6c - Connection Diagram (CAE-A30-7)

KH 2020
Chap 4c
TB2
G 1 BRUSHLESS
W/V
MOTOR PCB
Bn
S/Bn
2 CAE-236 *
Y/Bn 3
W/Bn
S/B 4
S/G
Y 5
2 CORE B/O
FROM Tx MON. V 6
G/Y
WHITE (VIDEO) CABLE -
G/B 7 Strip back outer 25mm. Cut centre core to 10mm
G/Bk
8 GREY (SYNC) CABLE -
38 CORE CABLE Strip back outer 35mm. Cut centre core to 10mm
38 CORE COMPOSITE
FROM DISPLAY
4 VIDEO (SCREEN)
W 3 VIDEO (SIGNAL)
ENSURE SCREENS RB
ARE CLAMPED S 2 AZIMUTH SYNC (SIGNAL)
1 AZIMUTH SYNC (SCREEN)

*SEE INSERT
PLF
B/Bk 14 RECEIVER MONITOR
13 NEON
12 NEON (0V) G/W 12 HEADING LINE
N/C 11 B/W 11 LONG PULSE
N/C 10 B/Y 10 MEDIUM PULSE
G/O 9 AZIMUTH R/W 9 TUNE INDICATOR
N/C 8 R/Y 8 TUNE
R/Bk T 7 Tx READY
7 +12V (UNREGULATED)
V/Bk 6 MODULATOR GROUND S 6 RUN
P 5 MODULATOR GROUND R/B 5 0V (SIGNAL)

LINK 2-5
R/Bn 4 MODULATOR +27V Bn/Bk 4 -12V
O 3 MODULATOR +27V R/G 3 MUTE
B 2 MODULATOR GROUND Bk 2 0V MAG. HEATER
W 1 +8V MAG. HEATER

R 1 MODULATOR +27V
LINK 1-3 PLK PLG

CD-3677 TERMINALS PCB TERMINALS PCB
Figure 7c - Connection Diagram (CAE-A30-8)

KH 2020
Chap 4c
NUCLEUS 3
5000 DISPLAY Mk V TRANSMITTER
CAE-A30-7
INPUT PCB 38 - CORE
CABLE
(CABLE N)
PLV PLG PLK
1 S
TX RUN 6
2 R/G 3
TX MUTE 3 B/Y
M PULSE 10
4 B/W 11
L PULSE 5 R/Y 8
TUNE 6 R/W 9
TUNE IND T OR Lt/G
7 7
TX READY G/O
8 9
90/180 AZIMUTH
9
10 B/Bk 14
RX MONITOR
11 G/W
HEADING LINE 12
12 12 R TX
13 13 B MONITOR
14 R/B 5
0V ARM
R/Bn 4
PLW V/Bk 6
MODULATOR +27V 5 R 1
MODULATOR +27V 6 O 3
MODULATOR 0V 7 B 2
MODULATOR 0V 8 P 5
+12V 9 R/Bk 7
-12V 10 Bn/Bk 8
4
MAG. HEATER 8.5V 11 W 10
1
Bk 11
MAG. HEATER 0V 12 2
TB2 TERMINALS PCB

G
ANTENNA +24V 1 1
W/V
Bn 2
ANTENNA +24V 2 S/Bn 3
Y 4
ANTENNA 0V 3 B/O 5
V
ANTENNA 0V 4 G/Y
6
7
8
PLF
VIDEO SCREEN 4
WHITE COAX 3
VIDEO
SYNC SCREEN 2
SYNC GREY COAX 1
BLANK
TERMINALS PCB
PLF
2
NAVSYS I/P 3 CABLE A
INTERFACE RTN
PLU
GYRO
} PHASE 1
PHASE 2
PHASE 3
1
2
3
4
CABLE D
REF 1 5
REF 2
6
LOG
} PULSE
SHORT
7
CABLE A
8
0V
POWER UNIT
CABLE K
FILTER INPUT SHIP'S MAINS
(TB1) 110/220V
CD-3713
Figure 8c - Typical Low Speed Antenna System Interconnection (CAE-A30-7)

NUCLEUS
5000 DISPLAY DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT
(HRC-A9) Mk V TRANSMITTER
38 - CORE 38 - CORE
May 01
CABLE CABLE
Chap 4c
INPUT PCB (CABLE N) (CABLE N)

CAE-A30-7
KH 2020
PLV PLDA-2 PLTA - 2 PLG PLK

1 S S
TX RUN 2 1 1 6
R/G R/G
TX MUTE 2 2 3
3 B/Y B/Y
M PULSE 3 3 10
4 B/W B/W
L PULSE 4 4 11
5 R/Y 5 5 R/Y
TUNE 8
6 R/W 6 6 R/W
TUNE IND 9
7 T OR Lt/G 7 7 T OR Lt/G
TX READY G/O
7
8 G/O 8 8 9
90/180 AZIMUTH 9 9 9
10 B/Bk 10 10 B/Bk 14
RX MONITOR 11 G/W G/W
11 11
HEADING LINE 12 R TX
12 12 12 MONITOR
13 13 13 B
ARM
14 R/B 14 14 R/B 12
0V 5 13
R/Bn
4
PLW PLDA - 1 PLTA - 1 V/Bk
6
1 G & W/V (2 WIRES) R
ANTENNA +24V 1 5 1
2 Bn & S/Bn (2 WIRES) O
ANTENNA +24V 2 6 3
3 Y & B/O (2 WIRES) B
ANTENNA 0V 3 7 2
4 V & G/Y (2 WIRES) P
ANTENNA 0V 4 8 5
5 R & R/Bn (2 WIRES) R/Bk
MODULATOR +27V 5 9 7
6 O Bn/Bk
MODULATOR +27V 6 10 4
7 B 7 11 W
MODULATOR 0V Bk 1
MODULATOR 0V 8 P & V/Bk (2 WIRES) 8 12 2
+12V 9 R/Bk 9
10 Bn/Bk 10
-12V G TB2 TERMINALS
11 W 11
MAG. HEATER 8.5V W/V PCB
12 Bk 12 1 1
MAG. HEATER 0V
Bn
4c.20
2
2
PLT PLDA-3 S/Bn
3
1 G/Bk Y
SELECT DATA 6 3 4
2 W/Bn B/O
RADAR SOURCE 4
3 Y/Bn V 5
TX CONTROL 5 4
4 S/B G/Y 6
STATUS 1 7
5 S/G
STATUS 2 8 7
6 G/B
0V 9 8
VIDEO SCREEN
WHITE COAX SK7
VIDEO
SYNC
GREY COAX SK1
SYNC SCREEN
BLANK SK3 PLF
4
PLU SK8 3
1
PHASE 1 2
2 SK2
PHASE 2 1
3 CABLE D
GYRO PHASE 3 4
REF 1 5 TERMINALS PCB
REF 2 TB1-A/B
}
6 L N
PULSE
7
LOG SHORT CABLE A
8
0V
}
Figure 9c - Low Speed Antenna Interswitched System Interconnections (CAE-A30-7)

PLF
1
NAVSYS I/P
RTN 2 CABLE A
INTERFACE
POWER UNIT
CABLE K
SHIP'S MAINS FILTER INPUT 110/220V O/P CABLE K
(TB1) (TB2)
110/220V FOR A MK4 OR MK6
SECOND TRANSCEIVER
CD-3714 ONLY
Original
Original
NUCLEUS DISPLAY INLINE POWER SUPPLY Mk V TRANSMITTER
INPUT PCB NOTE: HRC-A28-1 38 - CORE CAE-A30-7
12 - CORE FOR RUNS OF GREATER CABLE
CABLE THAN 150m USE 25 CORE (CABLE N)
( CABLE E ) CABLE AND DOUBLE UP
PLV CONNECTIONS PLG PLK
TB1
1 R S 6
TX RUN 1
2 B R/G
TX MUTE 2 3
3 G B/Y 10
M. PULSE 3
4 Y B/W 11
L. PULSE 4
5 W 5 R/Y 8
TUNE
6 Bk 6 R/W 9
TUNE INDICATOR
7 Bn 7 T OR Lt/G 7
TX READY
8 V 8 G/O 9
90 / 180 AZIMUTH
9 O 9 Y/V
4096 AZIMUTH
10 P 10 B/Bk 14
RX MONITOR
11 T OR Lt/G 11 G/W
HEADING LINE 12
12 12 12 R TX
TX MON L R/B 5
13 13 B MONITOR
TX MON 0V S ARM
14
0V Y/BN
4
V/BK
TB2 6
PLW R
MODULATOR +27V 5 1
9 R O
+12V MODULATOR +27V 6 3
10 G B
-12V MODULATOR 0V 7 2
12 B P
0V MODULATOR 0V 8 5
9 R/Bk 7
+12V
10 Bn/Bk 4
-12V
11 W 1
PLU MAG HEATER 8.5V
12 Bk
4c.21
1 MAG HEATER 0V 2 TERMINALS PCB
PHASE 1
2
PHASE 2 3 CABLE D TB2
GYRO PHASE 3 4 ANTENNA +24V G
REF 1 5 1 W/V 1
REF 2 CABLE B Bn 2
}
ANTENNA +24V
6 2 S/Bn 3
PULSE Y
7 ANTENNA 0V 4
LOG SHORT 3 B/O
8 5
0V V
}
ANTENNA 0V 4 6
G/Y
LOW LOSS CO-AX 7
VIDEO B G R
CO -AX CABLE J CABLE P 8
VIDEO SCREEN 2 3 1
SYNC SCREEN CABLE J 0V -12V +12V LOW LOSS CO-AX LINE HEAD
CO -AX
SYNC AMP
CABLE P PLF
LINE RECEIVER 0V +24V
AMP WHITE COAX
POWER UNIT 1 2
GREY COAX
110/220V 2 CORE POWER

TERMINALS PCB
OUTPUT CABLE K
1 2
TB3
INPUT 2 CORE POWER

FILTER INPUT
SHIP'S MAINS
CABLE K FILTER
Figure 10c - Low Speed Antenna A typical System Interconnection with Long Cables (CAE-A30-7)
CD-3715
May 01
Chap 4c
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4c
NUCLEUS
5000 DISPLAY Mk V TRANSMITTER
CAE-A30-8
INPUT PCB 38 - CORE
CABLE
(CABLE N)
PLV PLG PLK
1 S
TX RUN 6
2 R/G 3
TX MUTE 3 B/Y
M PULSE 10
4 B/W 11
L PULSE 5 R/Y 8
TUNE 6 R/W 9
TUNE IND 7 T OR Lt/G 7
TX READY 8 G/O
90/180 AZIMUTH 9
9
10 B/Bk 14
RX MONITOR G/W
11 12
HEADING LINE
12 12 R TX
13 13 B MONITOR
14 R/B 5
0V ARM
R/Bn 4
PLW V/Bk 6
MODULATOR +27V 5 R 1
MODULATOR +27V 6 O 3
MODULATOR 0V 7 B 2
MODULATOR 0V 8 P 5
+12V 9 R/Bk 7
-12V 10 Bn/Bk 8
4
MAG. HEATER 8.5V 11 W 10
1
Bk 11
MAG. HEATER 0V 12 2
1
2
3
4
PLF
VIDEO SCREEN 4
WHITE COAX 3
VIDEO
SYNC SCREEN 2
SYNC GREY COAX 1
BLANK
TERMINALS PCB
PLF
2
NAVSYS I/P 3 CABLE A
INTERFACE RTN
PLU
GYRO
} PHASE 1
PHASE 2
PHASE 3
1
2
3
4
CABLE D
REF 1 5
REF 2
6
LOG
} PULSE
SHORT
7
CABLE A
8
0V
POWER UNIT
CABLE K
FILTER INPUT
SHIP'S MAINS (TB1)
110/220V
40V POWER SUPPLY 12 CORE FIT

CABLE TERMINAL BLOCK
CZZ-A22 (CABLE E) IN DISPLAY
TB1 TB2
R 1 G 1
FILTER 1 P W/V
R W Bn
L 2 2
2 CORE POWER B 2 S S/Bn
N Bn Y/Bn
MAINS INPUT 3 3
E 3 W/Bn
FROM SHIPS
O 4 S/B 4
MAINS OR B S/G
INTERSWITCH 4
G 5 Y 5
UNIT Y B/O
CABLE K Bk 6 V 6
5 V G/Y
7 G/B 7
6 T(Lt/G) G/Bk
8 8
CD-3724
Figure 11c - Typical High Speed Antenna System Interconnections (CAE-A30-8)

KH 2020
Chap 4c
NUCLEUS
5000 DISPLAY DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT
(HRC-A9) Mk V TRANSMITTER
38 - CORE 38 - CORE
INPUT PCB CABLE
(CABLE N)
CABLE
(CABLE N)
CAE-A30-8
PLV PLDA-2 PLTA - 2 PLG PLK

1 S S
TX RUN 2 1 1 6
R/G R/G
TX MUTE 3
2 2 3
B/Y B/Y
M PULSE 4
3 3 10
B/W B/W
L PULSE 5
4 4 11
R/Y 5 5 R/Y
TUNE 6 R/W
8
6 6 R/W
TUNE IND 7 T OR Lt/G
9
7 7 T OR Lt/G
TX READY 8 G/O
7
8 8 G/O 9
90/180 AZIMUTH 9 9 9
10 B/Bk 10 10 B/Bk 14
RX MONITOR 11 G/W 11 11 G/W
HEADING LINE 12 12 12
12 12 R TX
MONITOR
13 13 13 13 B ARM
14 R/B 14 14 R/B
0V 5
PLW PLDA - 1 PLTA - 1

1 1 1
2 2 2
3 R/Bn 4
3 3 V/Bk
4 4 4 6
5 R & R/Bn (2 WIRES) R 1
MODULATOR +27V 5 5
6 O O 3
MODULATOR +27V 6 6
7 B 7 7 B 2
MODULATOR 0V P
MODULATOR 0V 8 P & V/Bk (2 WIRES) 8 8 5
9 R/Bk 9 9 R/Bk 7
+12V Bn/Bk
-12V 10 Bn/Bk 10 10
4
11 W 11 11 W
MAG. HEATER 8.5V Bk 1
12 Bk 12 12
MAG. HEATER 0V 2
PLT PLDA-3
1 G/Bk
TERMINALS PCB
SELECT DATA 6
RADAR SOURCE 2 W/Bn 4
3 Y/Bn
TX CONTROL 5
4 S/B
STATUS 1 5
7
STATUS 2 S/G 8
6 G/B
0V 9
VIDEO SCREEN
WHITE COAX SK7
VIDEO
SYNC
GREY COAX SK1
SYNC SCREEN
BLANK SK3 PLF
4
PLU SK8 3
GYRO
} PHASE 1
PHASE 2
PHASE 3
1
2
3
4
CABLE D
SK2
2
1
REF 1 5
REF 2 TB1-A
6 L N
LOG
} PULSE
SHORT
7
CABLE A
8
0V
PLF
1
NAVSYS I/P
RTN 2 CABLE A
INTERFACE
POWER UNIT
SHIP'S MAINS FILTER INPUT 110/220V O/P CABLE K CABLE

FOR K OR MKVI
MKIV
(TB1) (TB2)
110/220V SECOND TRANSCEIVER
ONLY
TB2-A
L N
40V POWER SUPPLY 12 CORE

CABLE
CZZ-A22 (CABLE E) NEW
TB1 TB TB2
R 1 G 1
FILTER 1 P W/V
R W Bn
L 2 2
SHIP'S B 2 S S/Bn
N Bn Y/Bn
110/220V 3 3
E W/Bn
MAINS 3
O 4 S/B 4
OR FROM
B S/G
INTERSWITCH 4
G 5 Y 5
BOX Y B/O
Bk 6 V 6
5 V G/Y
7 G/B 7
6 T(L+G) G/Bk
8 8
FIT ADDITIONAL TERMINAL TERMINALS PCB

BLOCK TO INTERSWITCH UNIT
CD-3725
Figure 12c - High Speed Antenna Interswitched System Interconnections (CAE-A30-8)

Mk V TRANSMITTER
May 01
NUCLEUS DISPLAY INLINE POWER SUPPLY
Chap 4c
INPUT PCB NOTE: HRC-A28-1 38 - CORE

KH 2020
12 - CORE
CAE-A30-7
FOR RUNS OF GREATER CABLE
CABLE THAN 150m USE 25 CORE (CABLE N)
( CABLE E ) CABLE AND DOUBLE UP
PLV CONNECTIONS PLG PLK
TB1
1 R S 6
TX RUN 1
2 B R/G
TX MUTE 2 3
3 G B/Y 10
M. PULSE 3
4 Y B/W 11
L. PULSE 4
5 W 5 R/Y 8
TUNE
6 Bk 6 R/W 9
TUNE INDICATOR
7 Bn 7 T OR Lt/G 7
TX READY
8 V 8 G/O 9
90 / 180 AZIMUTH
9 O 9 Y/V
4096 AZIMUTH
10 P 10 B/Bk 14
RX MONITOR
11 T OR Lt/G 11 G/W
HEADING LINE 12
12 12 12 R TX
TX MON L R/B 5
13 13 B MONITOR
TX MON 0V S ARM
14
0V Y/BN
4
V/BK
TB2 6
PLW R
MODULATOR +27V 5 1
9 R CABLE B O
+12V MODULATOR +27V 6 3
10 G B
-12V MODULATOR 0V 7 2
12 B P
0V MODULATOR 0V 8 5
9 R/Bk 7
+12V
10 Bn/Bk 4
-12V
11 W 1
PLU MAG HEATER 8.5V
12 Bk
1 MAG HEATER 0V 2
PHASE 1 1
2
4c.24
PHASE 2 3 2
CABLE D LINE HEAD
GYRO PHASE 3 3
4 AMP
REF 1 5 4 PLF
REF 2 CABLE P
}
0V +24V WHITE COAX
6 CABLE P
PULSE
7 1 2
LOG SHORT GREY COAX
8
0V
}
LOW LOSS CO-AX 1 2
TB3
TERMINALS PCB
VIDEO B G R
CO -AX CABLE J
VIDEO SCREEN 2 3 1 INPUT
SYNC SCREEN 0V -12V +12V LOW LOSS CO-AX FILTER
CO -AX CABLE J FIT ADDITIONAL
SYNC
TERMINAL BLOCK
LINE RECEIVER TO INTERSWITCH
40V POWER SUPPLY
AMP UNIT TB2
CZZ-A22 TB1
POWER UNIT R G
1 1
1 P W/V
W 2 Bn 2
110/220V 2 CORE POWER 2 S S/Bn
OUTPUT Bn 3 Y/Bn 3
CABLE K W/Bn
3
FILTER O 4 S/B 4
R B S/G
INPUT 2 CORE POWER L 4 Y
2 CORE POWER B G 5 5
FILTER N Y B/O
SHIP'S MAINS MAINS INPUT
E Bk 6 V 6
CABLE K FROM SHIPS 5 V G/Y
MAINS OR 7 G/B 7
Figure 13c - High Speed Antenna: A Typical System Interconnection with Long Cables (CAE-A30-8)
INTERSWITCH 6 T(L+G) G/Bk
UNIT 8 8
CD-3726
12 CORE
CABLE
(CABLE E)
Original
Original
COMPOSITE
COMPOSITE 12-CORE 38-CORE
12-CORE CABLE CABLE
CABLE TIU Mk V
NUCLEUS 3
NNR-A66 CAE-A30-7 & CAE-A30-8
5000, 6000, 7000
INPUT PCB RIU
NNR-A55 CAN ADAPTER PCB
NNR-A981 PLF
SKP SKE SKF 4
WHITE COAX SK1 - 6 SK7 - 12 WHITE COAX VIDEO
SKO SKG SKH
1 SYNC
NOTE 1
PLC PLA-F PLL-0 PLA PLB PLG
BLACK 1 S
CAN HI 1 1 1 1 6 RUN
WHITE 2 R/G
CAN LO 2 2 2 2 3 MUTE
BLUE 3 B/Y
GND 3 3 3 3 10 MP
4 ORANGE 4 4 B/W 11 LP
HEADING LINE 4 4
5 RED 5 5 R/Y 8 TUNE
AZIMUTH 5 5
6 6 6 R/W 9 TUNE IND
6 6
YELLOW T or Lt/G 7 TX READY PLK
+27V 7 7 7 7 7
8 GREEN 8 8 G/O
GND 8 8 9 AZIMUTH
9
B/Bk
10 14 RX MON
11 G/W 12 HEADING LINE
12
13
14 R/B
5 0V
4c.25
TERMINALS PCB
NNR-A1004
PLB
R/Bk
+15V 1 7 +15V
Bn/Bk
-15V 2 4 -15V
W
HEATERS +ve 3 1 HEATERS +ve
Bk
HEATERS -ve 4 2 HEATERS -ve
R
5 1 +27V
O
MODULATOR +27V 6 3 +27V
R/Bn 4 +27V
7
B 2 0V
8
P 5 0V
MODULATOR 0V 9
V/Bk 6 0V
10
PLC TB2
G
1 1
W/V
2
Bn
3 2
SCANNER +ve S/Bn SCANNER +VE
4
Y/Bn
5 3
W/Bn
6
S/B
7 4
S/G
8
Y
9 5
B/O
10
SCANNER -ve V
11 6
G/Y SCANNER -VE
12
G/B
13 7
G/Bk
14
8
CD-4516
Figure 14c - Nucleus 3 Display - Radar Interswitch Unit - Transceiver Interconnections
May 01
Chap 4c
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4c
160 120
205
160
80 30
CABLE
211K
15 mm 1.D 15 mm 1.D
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
CONNECT
SCREENS
TO EARTH

SHIP'S SUPPLY
SINGL PHASE
110V/220V
CD-1157
Figure 15c - Optional Mains Isolator: Installation Dimensions

KH 2020
Chap 4c
OPTIONAL IN-LINE POWER SUPPLY UNIT
34 The In-Line PSU should be sited as close to the transceiver as possible.

35 Refer to Figure 16c for Installation details.
412
335
25 285 25
20
DANGER
High
Voltage
IN LINE POWER SUPPLY UNIT

COMPASS SAFE DISTANCES SER.No
GRADE I CODE.No HRC-A28/2
GRADE II EQUIPMENT CLASS 'B'
DISSIPATION MASS 10 Kg
MANUFACTURED BY KELVIN HUGHES LTD HAINAULT ENGLAND
A SMITHS INDUSTRIES PLC COMPANY
MOD RECORD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
XXXX-XX
R1
530
570
12mm DIA
50
TYPICAL
131
UNIT SUPPLIED WITH FITTING KIT HRC-A494

CD-3834
Figure 16c - Optional In-Line PSU: Installation Instructions

KH 2020
Chap 4c

KH 2020
Chap 4c

ROTATING JOINT.
COMPOUND.


CD-4713
Figure 3c - Assembling Antenna to Turning Mechanism

KH 2020
Chap 4c
300
KEYSWITCH MAINS ON MOTOR ON
MOTOR POWERo UNIT

COMPASS SAFE DISTANCES SER.N
GRADE I CODE.No CZZ-A22 81
OFF ON DISSIPATION MASS Kg
MANUFACTURED BY HAINAULT ENGLAND
MOD RECORD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
301
160 70.5
KEYSWITCH
45-613-4205
22
KS2 KS2
KS1 KS1
FAN
45-063-158
CN1
PLB
PLA
8 TB2 1
POWER SUPPLY PCB TB2
TB1
CZZ-A186
R1
L N
476
401
LOAD DANGER
MAINS FILTER
HEATSINK
High
Voltage
POWER SUPPLY
LINE 45-690-0002
CN2
8
TB1
1
FERRITE CORE
22
TB1
160 70.5
CD-3732
VIEW WITH COVER REMOVED
Figure 4c - 40V Power Supply CZZ-A22: Dimensions

KH 2020
Chap 4c
1. Remove gland nut, plastic washer

and seal and discard washer.
2. Thread cable (1N) through back of

gland housing for approx 300mm.
3. Remove cable outer covering

(exposing braid) back as far as
15mm from the gland housing.
8
4. Fold braid double to 80mm from
TB2
gland housing (remove excess). 1
5. Place seal over cable and onto White (Video) Cable

Strip back outer 35mm.
outer covering at the gland housing. Cut centre core to 10mm
and fold 10mm of braid
6. Insert the two screening ferrules back over outer.
(Item )10 between outer covering
and screen braid at gland as shown.
7. Place gland nut over cable and screw

assembly into gland housing and secure
screening and cable with `P' clip, unwrap
paper insulation back to screening and discard. TB2
1
Grey (Sync) Cable

Casting Strip back outer 25mm.
Gland
Cut centre core to 10mm
Rubber and fold 10mm of braid
Seal
back over outer.
Ferrule
Tx Monitor Arm
Safety Switch
Before any maintenance is carried out on
the transceiver, isolate mains supply
CD-3731 via external safety switch.
Figure 5c - 38-Core Composite Cable: Installation

KH 2020
Chap 4d
CHAPTER 4D
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS - TRANSCEIVER MKVI
INTRODUCTION SAFETY NOTES
1 This Chapter provides information on installation of the Observe the Health and Safety Notices at the
system equipment. The overall chapter comprises a front of this manual.
number of sections, each section covering the installation of
the different equipment types that comprise the overall
system. 6 Electrical supplies are to be isolated to any part of the
platform when mounting an antenna/turning
2 This section covers Installation of the Mark VI Upmast mechanism. A suitable safety platform or harness should be
Transmitter/Receivers. Two versions are available: used to avoid personal injury when working aloft.
(1) Low Speed - 25rpm (CAE-A37). 7 Electrical supplies in the vicinity of the transceiver are
to be isolated during installation.
(2) High Speed - 40rpm (CAE-A45).
8 A working platform is to be provided for installing or
servicing the assembly. This should be positioned
approximately 1 metre below the base of the Turning
MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED WAVEGUIDE Mechanism housing with a guard rail surrounding it.
LENGTHS
9 The Antenna and Turning Mechanism must be hoisted
3 The following maximum waveguide lengths are to the fixing position using a secured block and tackle
recommended: or rope strops.
10 Safety personnel must ensure that persons do not
encroach on the area of work.
Std Speed High Speed 11 The Antenna and Turning Mechanism MUST NOT be
lifted by the array, but the complete unit secured and
S-band 3.5m 20m hoisted evenly.
SOFT START UNIT

4 For cable runs of less that 60m both versions of the
transceiver utilise a bulkhead mounted Soft Start Unit
(CZZ-A14
5 Installations with interswitched units, or with long cable
runs (i.e. greater than 60m) utilise a Soft Start Unit
(CZZ-A14-2). This version of the Soft Start unit is fitted with
an in-line power supply.
Original 4d.1 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 4d
EQUIPMENT LOCATION OPTIONAL MAINS ISOLATOR (80-261-600)

19 The Mains Isolator must be sited adjacent to the
UPMAST TX/RX (CAEA37/A45) AND TURNING display or in the area of the operators control room and
MECHANISM (CAE-A41/42) connected in parallel with the main display.
12 The Upmast Turning Mechanism should be installed in

such a position where Blind Arcs, caused by INSTALLATION
obstructions, i.e. masts, funnels etc, are eliminated or
minimised. Funnels, crosstrees and other large obstructions
can also reflect energy and give rise to spurious echo returns SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14 and CZZ-A14-2)
especially in close proximity to land.
13 The Upmast Turning Mechanism must not be
Fitting Thermal Overload Trip Unit To Soft Start Unit
mounted where the temperature exceeds 70oC. (CZZ-A14)
14 The Upmast Turning Mechanism must be kept clear of 20 The thermal overload trip unit is supplied with the
ship’s flexible communication aerials to avoid damage gearbox fitting kit.
to both.
21 Remove the soft start unit cover by releasing the four
15 The Upmast Turning Mechanism must be mounted captive screws.
more than 914 mm above any flat surface, when the
flat surface is greater than the diameter swept by the 22 The trip unit, shown in Figure 1d, clips on the side of
antenna. the contactor and is secured in position with relay
termination screws 2T1, 4T2, 6T3, 14NO and A2.
positioned in the close proximity of any magnetic 23 Connect the cableform wires as shown in Table 1.
compass or D/F aerial, etc.
SOFT START UNIT

17 The Soft Start Unit must be sited as follows:
(1) Upmast installation, using Soft Start Unit
(CZZ-A14) - near the display.
(2) Upmast installation with long cable run, using Soft
S t a r Un i t ( CZZ- A 1 4 - 2 ) - n e a r t h e
transceiver/turning mechanism.
18 The Soft Start Unit must be sited to allow removal of
the front cover.
H
2
3'
A
I O
7
2'
2'
2
2T1 4T7 6T3

A2/96NC
14/22 95NC
CD-0224
Figure 1d - Thermal Overload Trip Unit
May 01 4d.2 Original

KH 2020
Chap 4d
TABLE 1: Trip Unit Cableform Connections
TERMINAL No. WIRE COLOUR WIRE No. MARKERS FROM
14/22 P 16 BN/BU A2
95NC P 28 R/S KEYSWITCH
2T1 BK - - NEON
P 10 BN/BK TB1-1
4T2 P 11 BN/BN TB1-2
6T3 P 12 BN/R TB1-3
A2/96NC P 23 R/O PCB SKA
P 16 BN/BU 14/22
24 Set the blue trip button to the H (handset) position. 25 Set the dial position on the trip unit to the position
shown in Table 2.
FITTING THE SOFT START UNIT
H 26 Fit the soft start unit to the securing bulkhead using the
installation bolts supplied with the fitting kit. Refer to
Figure 2d for dimensions.
A
CD-0225

KH 2020
Chap 4d
TABLE 2: Trip Unit Dial Positions
ANTENNA MOTOR THERMAL OVERLOAD TRIP DIAL POSITION

SPEED VOLTAGE UNIT - PART NO.
25 rpm 440 V 45-617-1156-04 1.5A

GM-0152
1.6A
25 rpm 415 V 45-617-1156-04
GM-0153
1.7A
25 rpm 380 V 45-617-1156-04
GM-0153
2.5A
25 rpm 220 V 45-617-1156-06
GM-0157
1.5A
40 rpm 440 V 45-617-1156-04
GM-0152
1.6A
40 rpm 415 V 45-617-1156-04 GM-0153
1.7A
40 rpm 380 V 45-617-1156-04 GM-0153
2.5A
40 rpm 220 V 45-617-1156-06 GM-0157

342
Original
119
180
237
3 x M10 FIXINGS
4d.5
Soft Start Unit Weight : 9.5kg
Compass Safe Distances
159
Grade I Standard Compass : 1.0 m
Grade II & III Steering Compass : 0.7 m
Figure 2d - Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14): Installation Diagram

Grade IV : 0.5 m

o o
o
368 At Relative Humidity 95% : +40 C
CD-1343
May 01
Chap 4d
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4d
THREE PHASE
SWITCHING PCB
CZZ-A159
THERMAL TRIP CONTACTOR

OVERLOAD UNIT
SOFT START UNIT CZZ-A14
PSU
TB4 TB2
THREE PHASE
SWITCHING PCB
CZZ-A159
TB6 TB5
TB3
TB1

OVERLOAD UNIT
SOFT START UNIT WITH INLINE PSU CZZ-A14/2
CD-0214
Figure 3d - Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-*): Component Layout

KH 2020
Chap 4d
UPMAST TRANSCEIVER (CAEA37) AND 30 With reference to Figures 4d and 5d, install the upmast
TURNING MECHANISM (CAE-A42/41) turning mechanism as follows:
(1) Fit the coupling element and sealing ring to the
antenna connector.
CAUTION (2) Fit the antenna to the upmast turning mechanism,
ensuring that the connectors are aligned, and
When Unpacking The Antenna, Ensure That The loosely secure using the eight M10 retaining bolts,
Semi-rigid Co-axial Cables Are Not Kinked, Crushed washers and nuts.
Or Bent. Support The Antenna Near Its Centre When
Lifting It Out Of Its Packing And When Fitting It Into
Position On The Turning Mechanism. Do Not Handle
The Antenna By The Semi-rigid Co-axial Cable Input. CAUTION
When Rotating The Antenna Do Not Apply Excessive

27 The Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism is Force.
supplied in two parts:
Ensure that the Semi-rigid Coax Assembly, on The
(1) Transceiver with gearbox. Underside Of The Antenna, Is Not Crushed Or
(2) Antenna. Damaged.
28 The ship’s mounting structure must be capable of

withstanding the high starting and stopping torque (3) Secure the co-axial connector using the three M6
generated by the motor fitted in the upmast bolts and washers provided.
transceiver/turning mechanism.
(4) Tighten and torque load the eight antenna
29 When mounting the upmast turning mechanism retaining bolts to 25 Nm.
observe the following:
(1) Use the fitting pack supplied with the equipment
(refer to Figure 4d). The fitting pack contains
fixings that have been tested to withstand the CAUTION
stresses detailed in paragraph 33.
Failure To Fit Antenna Spoilers Will Reduce
(2) Recommended tensile strengths and torque System Life And Render The Radar Inoperative
loadings for the fixings are stated on the In High Winds.
installation diagram.
(3) For upmast transceivers/turning mechanisms (5) Fit the spoilers to the antenna using the fittings
mounted in excess of 1.8m above the deck, it is supplied.
recommended that a service platform and guard
rail are fitted. (6) Mark out and drill four 17mm gearbox mounting
holes at the mounting position.
(4) Use a suitable jointing compound or sealant to
prevent corrosion between the platform and (7) For semi-rigid cable access mark out and drill a
upmast transceivers/turning mechanism. 100 mm hole in the mounting platform, as shown
on Figure 4d.
NOTE:
CAUTION The upmast transceiver/turning mechanism is supplied
with four M12 bolts, washers and fibre washers. These may
The Antenna Window Must NOT Be Painted. be removed, but not discarded, and replaced with eye bolts.
Once the upmast transceiver/turning mechanism is in
position, the eye bolts are to be removed and replaced with
the original bolts.
(5) Any chipped or damaged surfaces must be
painted with polyurethane paint.

KH 2020
Chap 4d
Optional Tx Monitor Arm (CAE-A38)
WARNINGS
NOTE:
THE UPMAST TRANSCEIVER/TURNING The Tx Monitor Arm is connected to the Control PCB.
MECHANISM MUST NOT BE LIFTED BY THE
ANTENNA AND MUST BE HOISTED TO THE FIXING
31 The Monitor Arm is an optional item and is fitted to the
POSITION USING A SECURED BLOCK AND
outer casing. The Monitor Arm cable feeds through the
TACKLE, OR, IF NO EYE BOLTS ARE FITTED, BY small gland beside the aerial motor
ROPE STROPS.
32 Using a 12 mm spanner, release the six bolts securing
DO NOT FIT EYE BOLTS IF THERE ARE NO the rear cover to the Turning Mechanism and remove
EXISTING FITTINGS. the cover.
33 Route the Tx Monitor Arm cableform as shown in
Figure 8d.
(8) Install the upmast turning mechanism at the
mounting position, ensuring correct orientation. 34 Connect the Tx Monitor Arm cableform to the Heading
Use the shim washers supplied, to take up any Line PCB (CAE-A180) as follows: red to 9PLA 7 and
distortion in the mounting platform. Failure to do blue to 9PLA 8.
so may cause the casting to crack when bolts are
tightened to the correct torque. 35 Refit the rear cover and secure using the six bolts.
(9) Secure the upmast turning mechanism with the
four M16 bolts supplied and torque load them to
120Nm.

Original
672 2770 or 3930 (Including Spoilers & Braces)
2740 or 3900 (Excluding Spoilers & Braces)
15
48
TYP
Spoiler
&
brace
314
410
62
890
TX Monitor Arm
(Part of CAE-A38)
FWD
418
685
Motor power cable fed
in underneath through
7
large hole in bottom plate
4d.9
38 CORE ON / OFF Earthing
CABLE Switch stud
540
480
Not drawn to scale.

All dimensions approx.
Dimensions in mm. C/L
Rotation
Antenna Weight (3.9m) 65 kg
474
430
200
Tx & Turning Mech 110 kg

4 x Fixing holes
180
190 Ø17
o
At Relative Humidity 0% : -25 oC to +70 C
At Relative Humidity 95% : +40 o C
GEARBOX MOUNTING FIXINGS SUPPLIED
4 OFF. BOLTS M16 x 50mm

MATERIAL MUST BE HIGH TENSILE
12 OFF WASHER M16 PLAIN STEEL. (MIN.80kg f / mm 2 )
6 OFF WASHER M16 SPLIT
8 OFF NUT M16 FULL BOLTS TIGHTENED TO A TORQUE OF 120 Nm.
6 OFF SHIM WASHER PROTECT AGAINST CORROSION BY PAINTING
CD-4846
Figure 4d - Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45), Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41, A42) and Antennas: Installation Dimensions
May 01
Chap 4d
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4d
FWD
MOTOR CABLE
38 CORE
CABLE 50mm HOLE
S BAND CO-AX IN MOUNTING
PLATE REQUIRED
FOR MOTOR CABLE
ENTRY
450 830
540
480
200
4 FIXING HOLES 430
O17
674 474
30
TUBE THICKNESS 100mm HOLE
50 IN MOUNTING
MAX 2M 12 MM MINIMUM PLATE REQUIRED
FOR S BAND
CO-AX CABLE ENTRY
490
750
500
MOUNTING PLATE AND

STIFFENING PIECES
CD-1348 15mm STEEL
Figure 5d - Upmast Turning Mechanism: Mast Mounting

KH 2020
Chap 4d
36 Refer to Figure 6d and secure the Mains Isolator in the required position (no fittings are supplied).
160 120
205
160
80 30
CABLE
211K
15 mm 1.D 15 mm 1.D
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
CONNECT
SCREENS
TO EARTH

SHIP'S SUPPLY
SINGL PHASE
110V/220V
CD-1157
Figure 6d - Mains Isolator: Installation Dimensions

KH 2020
Chap 4d
TABLE 4: 38-Core Cable Colour Abbreviations TABLE 4 (Cont.): 38-Core Cable Colour Abbreviations
ABBREVIATION COLOUR ABBREVIATION COLOUR
Bn BROWN R RED
V VIOLET B BLUE
O ORANGE G GREEN
P PINK Y YELLOW
T TURQUOISE W WHITE
S SLATE (grey) Bk BLACK
R/B RED/BLUE
R/G RED/GREEN 12-core Composite Cable
R/Y RED/YELLOW 37 The 12-core composite cable (KH code number

45-762-0041-001) is made for Kelvin Hughes and
R/W RED/WHITE comprises the following:
R/Bk RED/BLACK (1) 4 cores of 32/0.2 mm copper wire.

R/Bn RED/BROWN
(3) 2 cores of 16/0.2 mm twisted and screened.
B/Y BLUE/YELLOW
(4) 2 cores of co-axial cable.
B/W BLUE/WHITE
Small Multi-Core Cables
B/Bk BLUE/BLACK
B/O BLUE/ORANGE
38 These cables conform to DEF STAN 61-12 (part 5).
Each cable consists of a number of insulated cores,
G/Y GREEN/YELLOW collectively screened and clad in a PVC outer sheath.
39 Core Details
G/W GREEN/WHITE
(1) The core details are as follows:
G/Bk GREEN/BLACK
Conductors consist of 16 strands of 0.2 mm
G/O GREEN/ORANGE diameter tinned copper wire.
Nominal cross-section area of conductor
G/S GREEN/SLATE
= 0.5 mm2.
Bn/Bk BROWN/BLACK Nominal diameter of conductor = 0.93 mm
Bn/Y BROWN/YELLOW Minimum thickness of insulation = 0.40 mm
Minimum diameter of core = 1.75 mm
Bn/W BROWN/WHITE Maximum diameter of core = 1.90 mm
S/B SLATE/BLUE
(2) Braided Screen
S/Bn SLATE/BROWN
The cores are laid-up, covered with binding tape
V/Bk VIOLET/BLACK over which is woven a braiding of 0.2 mm diameter
tinned copper wire.
V/Y VIOLET/YELLOW
(3) Outer Sheath
V/W VIOLET/WHITE
A PVC outer sheath is applied by extrusion over the
W/R WHITE/RED wire braiding.
(4) Maximum Current Rating

2.5 A at 1000 V DC
2.5 A at 440 V AC at 1600Hz.

KH 2020
Chap 4d
Power Cables COVER REMOVAL
40 These cables are used for services requiring a 48 Before any electrical connections can be made,
moderate current carrying capacity, i.e. main supplies. covers have to be removed from the following
equipment:
2-Core (Power):
(1) Upmast Turning Mechanism.
(2) Downmast Transceiver.
250/440V grade: (3) Soft Start Unit.
7 x 0.67 mm (7 x 0.026") cores
cross linked polythene insulation, (4) Optional Mains Isolator.
braided with 0.2 mm (0.0078") diameter
tinned copper wire, 79% coverage Upmast Turning Mechanism
low smoke, zero halogen outer sheath.
the rear cover to the Upmast Turning Mechanism and
Outer diameter: remove the cover.
10 mm (0.39 in.).
3-Core (Power): Downmast Transceiver
Cable Code L: KH Reference No. 5344-788 50 Release the six captive screws securing the cover to
the Downmast Transceiver and remove the cover.
(250/440 V grade):
Specification as for 2-core cable. Soft Start Unit
Outer Diameter: 51 Remove the soft start unit cover by releasing the six
captive screws.
10 mm (0.44")
Optional Mains Isolator
GENERAL
52 Open the mains isolator cover by releasing the captive
41 Before starting electrical connection observe the screw.
following:
PCB LOCATIONS AND CABLEFORM
WARNING
ROUTING
53 Location of PCBs and cableform routing in the
ENSURE THAT ALL POWER SUPPLIES ARE transceiver are shown on Figure 8d.
ISOLATED BEFORE ANY ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION TAKES PLACE
42 Isolate power supplies as follows:

(1) Ensure that the associated display is turned off.
(2) Remove fuses from mains isolators.
(3) On Turning Mechanism set ON/OFF switch to
OFF.
43 The casing of the upmast turning mechanism must be
securely earthed to the platform with braided copper
wire.
44 The casing of the downmast transceiver must be
securely earthed to the deck or bulkhead with braided
copper wire.
45 Allow sufficient length on all cables to allow for routing
through the transceiver. Make sure that there is
sufficient slack to allow for extreme movements during
sudden shock to the vessel.
46 Ensure that all cables are secured to their associated
entry point and that screened cables are earthed to
their respected units.
47 Fit cable through gland in accordance with the diagram
shown on Figure 6d.

May 01
Chap 4d
KH 2020
OUTSIDE INSIDE
OF OF
CASTING CASTING
CASTING
CLAMPING NUT
BRASS BUNG
NYLON WASHER
RUBBER GLAND
CABLE OUTER
INSULATION
BRAID
BRAID IS CONTINUOUS
4d.14
THROUGH GLAND
Figure 7d - Cable Gland Assembly

PLACE.
CABLE GLANDS.
640 mm
CD-0278 700 mm
Original
Original
TBI COAX FROM
38-CORE TBI
COAX FROM CABLE
38-CORE
CABLE 3PLM
3PLM
3PLB
3PLB
RX MON PCB
3PLK
CABLE FROM CONTROL
CABLE FROM CONTROL Tx MON ARM BOARD
Tx MON ARM BOARD
PSU
PLA
PSU
PLA
PSU
38-CORE
4d.15
CABLE FROM
Tx MON ARM
MODULATOR PCB
Figure 8d - Upmast Transceiver: PCB Location and Cableform Routing

CONTROL
BOARD
3PLM
CONTROL BOARD
CD-0211
May 01
Chap 4d
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4d
WIRING DIAGRAMS CHECKS AFTER FITTING
54 Electrical connections for upmast and downmast
transceiver systems are detailed on the following 55 The upmast turning mechanism must be checked for
wiring diagrams: security and freedom to rotate.
(1) Figure9 d - Motor Connection. 56 Ensure that all cables are secured to their associated
(2) Figure 10d - Soft Start Unit with In-line Power their respected units.
Supply connections.
57 All cable entries must be checked for signs of fretting,
(3) Figures 12d and 13d - Connections for Nucleus 3 chafing or damage, and subsequently sealed with a
systems using 38-core composite cable as mastic compound.
follows:
(1) Connections for an interswitched system, via
a Radar Interswitch Unit (RIU).
(2) Connections for an interswitched system, via
the Dual Interswitch Unit (DIU).

KH 2020
Chap 4d
TX MONITOR ARM
(PART OF CAE-A38)
FWD
U1
MOTOR
FROM SOFT V1
START UNIT
JUNCTION
BOX
W1
LINK FITTING FOR DEFINED INPUT VOLTAGES
STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
U1 W2 U1 W2
TO MONITOR
ARM
V1 U2 V1 U2
CONTROL BOARD
PLM W1 V2 W1 V2
1 TX MON SIG
2 TX MON 0V
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
3
SEIPEE HIGH SPEED SEIPEE HIGH SPEED
4 MOTOR JUNCTION BOX MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
5 U1 U5 U2 U5
U1 U2
6
V1 V5 V2 V5
V1 V2
W1 W5 W2 W5
W1 W2
PLM BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR

HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED TO HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX
CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V CONNECTIONS FOR 380/440V
U1 U1 W5
W2
W2
CABLE U5
GLAND V1 V1 U5
U2
U2
V5
W1 W1 V5
MONITOR ARM FITTING V2
V2
& CABLE RUN W5
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
CD-4845
Figure 9d - Motor Connections

KH 2020
Chap 4d
CZZ - A14/2
CABLE L TB1 TB3 CABLE L
{ }
(3-CORE (3-CORE
R or 1 1 1 R or 1
POWER) POWER)
B or 2 2 2 B or 2 3 PHASE TO
3 PHASE
CABLE B Y or 3 3 3 Y or 3 AE MOTOR
SHIP’S SUPPLY
(3-CORE TB2
SMALL)
R 1 +27V TO CONTACTOR
B 2 CONTACTOR COIL RETURN
G 3 0V
CABLE K
(2-CORE
POWER)
1 PHASE
{ BN or 1
BL or 2
L 24V
N POWER
E SUPPLY
MAINS IN
SET FOR
+ 220V OR
- 110V INPUT
TB4
G/Y
0V 1 V/BK
S/BN
0V 2 G/BK
G/B
0V 3 BN/BK
P
0V 4 V
BK
0V 5 Y
0V 6 B
W/V
+26V 7 Y/V
W/BN
+26V 8 Y/BN
CABLE G (25 CORE) R/BK
+26V 9 O
OR BN
CABLE N (38 CORE) +26V 10 W
FROM +26V 11 G
DISPLAY OR
+26V 12 R
INTERSWITCH UNIT
TB5
0V
R/B 1 R/B
TUNE
R/Y 2 R/Y
TUNE IND
R/W 3 R/W
MP
B/Y 4 B/Y
LP
B/W 5 B/W
RUN
S 6 S
MUTE
R/G 7 R/G
AZ
G/O 8 G/O
HL
G/W 9 G/W
Tx READY
T or Lt/G 10 T or Lt/G
Rx MON
B/BK 11 B/BK
12
TB6
CONTACTOR
B 1 S/G
0V
G 2 B/O CABLE N (38 CORE)
+27V TO
R 3 S/B
TRANSCEIVER
4
5
6
USE CABLE N (38 CORE) CABLE 7
BETWEEN THE SOFT START UNIT AND 8
THE DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH UNIT 9
FOR CABLE RUNS OF UP TO 60 m 10
11
USE CABLE G (25 CORE) CABLE AND TWO
12
CABLE N (LOW LOSS COAXES) BETWEEN
VIDEO
THE SOFT START UNIT AND CO-AX (W) CO-AX (W)
THE DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH UNIT
FOR CABLE RUNS GREATER THAN 60 m
SYNC
CO-AX (S) CO-AX (S)
CD-0235
Figure 10d - Soft Start Unit with In-line Power Supply

KH 2020
Chap 4d
COMPOSITE 38-CORE
12-CORE CABLE MKVI Tx UPMAST (CAE-A37/A45)
CABLE RIU SOFT START UNIT
NUCLEUS 3 A
NNR-A55 (CZZ-A14/2)
5000, 6000, 7000 AERIAL MOTOR
TB1 TB3 CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) TB STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
INPUT PCB 3 PHASE TO AE MOTOR
R or 1 R or 1
1 1 U1 PHASE 1 U1 W2
2 2 U2 PHASE 2 SEE INSERT A
SKP 3 PHASE SHIPS SUPPLY Y or 3 Y or 3
3 3 U3 PHASE 3 V1 U2
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO
W1 V2
SKO TB1
GREY COAX SK13 - 18 SK19 - 24 GREY COAX R
SYNC SYNC SYNC B LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250V
G
(3-CORE 3 0V
SMALL) STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
NOTE 1 POWER UNIT

24V U1 W2
PLC PLA-F BN or 1 L POWER LOCATION 2
BLACK 1 PHASE
CAN HI 1 1 MAINS IN BL or 2 N SUPPLY V1 U2
WHITE E TB4 PLA
CAN LO 2 2
BLUE SET FOR G/Y V/BK W1 V2
GND 3 3
ORANGE +220V OR 0V 1 V/BK G/Y 1 0V
HEADING LINE 4 4 S/BN G/BK
RED -110V INPUT 0V 2 G/BK S/BN 2 0V
AZIMUTH 5 5 G/B BN/BK LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440V
0V 3 BN/BK G/B 3 0V
6 6 P V
V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
YELLOW 0V 4 P 4 0V
+27V 7 7 BK SEIPEE HIGH SPEED
GREEN 0V 5 Y BK 5 0V MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
PLL-Q
GND 8 8 B
0V 6 Y 6 0V U5
W/V U1 U2
+26V 7 Y/V B 7 0V
W/BN Y/V
+26V 8 Y/BN W/V 8 +27V
MAINS R/BK Y/BN
+26V 9 O W/BN 9 +27V V5
RELAY BN O V1 V2
+26V 10 W R/BK 10 +27V
+26V 11 G BN
1
PLA
2
5
3
6
8
4
7
11 +27V
+26V 12 R W 12 +27V
TB5 W5
PLC G W1 W2
R/B 1 0V R/B 13 +27V
B/O R 14 +27V LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440V
1 R/Y 2 TUNE R/Y
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE G/Y
CAN ADAPTER PCB 2 R/W 3 TUNE IND R/W
CONNECTED TO PIN 3 AT ONE END ONLY SEIPEE HIGH SPEED
NNR-A981 B/Y 4 MP B/Y MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
B/W 5 LP B/W
PLB CONTROL BOARD U1 U5 U2
S 6 RUN S
S
RUN 1 R/G 7 MUTE R/G
R/G LOCATION PLM
MUTE 2 G/O 8 AZ G/O V5
B/Y V1 V2
MP 3 G/W 9 HL G/W 3 6
B/W PLB
LP 4 T or Lt/G 10 Tx READY T or Lt/G 5
R/Y
TUNE CONTROLS 5 B/BK 11 Rx MON B/BK 14 4 W1 W5 W2
R/W
TUNE INDICATORS 6 12 13 3
T B LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250V
Tx READY 7 12 Tx MON 0V 2 2-CORE
G/O B/BK R TO Tx MON ARM
AZIMUTH 8 11 Rx MON Tx MON 1
N/C 9 T or Lt/G 10 NEON SIG
TB6 Tx READY
B/Bk G/W BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
Rx MON 10 B 1 CONTACTOR S/G 9 HL HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX WIRES
G/W G/O W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED
HEADING LINE 11 TO TB2 G 2 0V B/O 8 AZ
R/G TO CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
N/C 12 R 3 CONT +ve 27V S/B 7 MUTE
N/C CABLE N S 6 U1
13 4 RUN W2
R/B (38-CORE) B/W
GROUND 14 5 5 LP U5
TO B/Y 4 V1
6 MP U2
TRANSCEIVER R/W 3 V5
7 TUNE IND
R/Y 2 W1
8 TUNE V2
R/B 1 W5
9 0V
PLK
10
LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
CABLE N 11 5
(38-CORE) S/B CONT +27V 4
12
FROM DISPLAY OR B/O 0V 3
INTERSWITCH UNIT S/G CONTACTOR BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
2 HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX
VIDEO CONT +ve CONNECTIONS FOR 380/440V
1
COAX (W) COAX (W) U1 W5
W2
V1 U5
COAX'S U2
SYNC 4 0V
W
COAX (S) COAX (S) 3 VIDEO W1 V2 V5
2 SYNC
S
1 0V
CD-4555
Figure 11d - Mk VI Transceiver Upmast (S-Band) Interswitched with Nucleus 3 via an RIU: Interconnections Diagram
Original 4d.19/20 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 4d
SOFT START UNIT MKVI Tx UPMAST (CAE-A37/A45)

A
(CZZ-A14/2)
AERIAL MOTOR
TB1 TB3 CABLE L (3-CORE POWER) TB STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
1 1 U1 PHASE 1 U1 W2
2 2 U2 PHASE 2 SEE INSERT A
3 PHASE SHIPS SUPPLY Y or 3 Y or 3
3 3 U3 PHASE 3 V1 U2
W1 V2
TB1
R
NUCLEUS 3 B LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250V
DISPLAY G
(3-CORE 3 0V
SMALL) STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
POWER UNIT
SHIPS MAINS 24V U1 W2
SINGLE PHASE 230V 2-CORE POWER CABLE K CABLE K BN or 1 L POWER LOCATION 2
FILTER 110/220V 1 PHASE
INPUT TB1 OUTPUT TB2 MAINS IN BL or 2 N SUPPLY V1 U2
CABLE K
E TB4 PLA
SET FOR G/Y V/BK W1 V2
+220V OR 0V 1 V/BK G/Y 1 0V
S/BN G/BK
-110V INPUT 0V 2 G/BK S/BN 2 0V
G/B BN/BK LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440V
0V 3 BN/BK G/B 3 0V
N L N L P V
0V 4 V P 4 0V
TB1 TB2 BK SEIPEE HIGH SPEED
0V 5 Y BK 5 0V MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
0V 6 B Y 6 0V U5
W/V U1 U2
DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT +26V 7 Y/V B 7 0V
W/BN Y/V
(HRC-A9) +26V 8 Y/BN W/V 8 +27V
R/BK Y/BN
+26V 9 O W/BN 9 +27V V5
BN O V1 V2
NOTE 1 +26V 10 W R/BK 10 +27V
+26V 11 G BN 11 +27V
Tx CONTROL FROM DISPLAY TO TRANSCEIVER
+26V 12 R W 12 +27V
PLV PLDA-2 or PLDB-2 PLTA-2 or PLTB-2 TB5 W5
G W1 W2
S 1 1 R/B 1 0V R/B 13 +27V
Tx RUN 1 R 14 +27V LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440V
R/G 2 2 R/Y 2 TUNE R/Y
Tx MUTE 2
B/Y 3 3 R/W 3 TUNE IND R/W
MED PULSE 3 SEIPEE HIGH SPEED
B/W 4 4 B/Y 4 MP B/Y MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
LONG PULSE 4
R/Y 5 5 B/W 5 LP B/W
TUNE 5 CONTROL BOARD U1 U5 U2
R/W 6 6 S 6 RUN S
TUNE INDICATOR 6
T or Lt/G 7 7 R/G 7 MUTE R/G
READY 7 LOCATION PLM
G/O 8 8 G/O 8 AZ G/O
AZIMUTH 8 V1 V5 V2
9 9 G/W 9 HL G/W 3 6
9 PLB
B/Bk 10 10 T or Lt/G 10 Tx READY T or Lt/G 5
Rx MON 10
G/W 11 11 B/BK 11 Rx MON B/BK 14 4 W1 W5
HEADING LINE 11 W2
12 12 12 13 3
12 B LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250V
13 13 12 Tx MON 0V 2 2-CORE
13 B/BK R TO Tx MON ARM
R/B 14 14 11 Rx MON Tx MON 1
0V 14 T or Lt/G
TB6 10 Tx READY NEON SIG
G/W BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
B 1 CONTACTOR S/G 9 HL HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX WIRES
TO TB2 G/O 8 W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED
G 2 0V B/O AZ TO CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
R/G 7
R 3 CONT +ve 27V S/B MUTE
SK7(9) SK8(10) CABLE N S U1
WHITE COAX 4 6 RUN W2
VIDEO SCREEN (38-CORE) B/W
5 5 LP U5
VIDEO TO B/Y 4 V1
SK1(4) SK2(5) 6 MP U2
TRANSCEIVER R/W V5
SYNC GREY COAX 7 3 TUNE IND
R/Y 2 W1
SYNC SCREEN 8 TUNE V2
R/B 1 W5
9 0V
PLK
10
INTERSWITCH LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
CABLE N 11 5
PLT PLDA-3 or PLDB-3 (38-CORE) S/B CONT +27V 4
12
G/Bk FROM DISPLAY OR B/O 0V 3
SELECT DATA 1 6 INTERSWITCH UNIT S/G CONTACTOR BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
W/Bn 2 HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX
RADAR SOURCE 2 4 CONT +ve CONNECTIONS FOR 380/440V
Y/Bn VIDEO 1
Tx CONTROL 3 5 COAX (W)
S/B COAX (W) U1 W5
STATUS 1 4 7
S/G W2
STATUS 2 5 8
G/B V1 U5
0V 6 9 COAX'S U2
SYNC 4 0V
W
COAX (S) COAX (S) 3 VIDEO W1 V2 V5
2 SYNC
S
1 0V
38-CORE CABLE
(CABLE M)
NOTES:
1) THE DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT ENABLES 2 DISPLAYS & 2 TRANSMITTERS TO BE INTERCONNECTED
CD-3844
Figure 12d - Mk VI Transceiver Upmast (S-Band) Interswitched with Nucleus 3 via a DIU: Interconnections Diagram
Original 4d.21/22 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 4e
CHAPTER 4E
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS - TRANSCEIVER MKVII (S-BAND)
GENERAL SAFETY NOTES
1 This section provides installation information for MkVII Observe the Health and Safety Notices at the
Downmast S-Band Transceiver. front of this manual.
2 Kelvin Hughes, or appointed agents, contracts only to
supply the equipment, supervise the installation and
final connection of the equipment. The installation must be 9 Electrical supplies are to be isolated to any part of the
made by a fully qualified Kelvin Hughes Radar Engineer. platform when mounting an antenna/turning
mechanism. A suitable safety platform or harness should be
3 Forward planning for positioning the various units of used to avoid personal injury when working aloft.
carried out. A full survey is required in order to establish the 10 Electrical supplies in the vicinity of the transceiver are
ship’s fitment. This may be arranged with the Technical to be isolated during installation.
Department of Kelvin Hughes or one of the approved 11 A working platform is to be provided for installing or
agencies. Details of Agencies worldwide can be found in servicing the assembly. This should be positioned
Publication KH 400. approximately 1 metre below the base of the Turning
Mechanism housing with a guard rail surrounding it.
MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED WAVEGUIDE
12 The Antenna and Turning Mechanism must be hoisted
LENGTHS to the fixing position using a secured block and tackle
or rope strops.
4 The following maximum waveguide lengths are
recommended: 13 Safety personnel must ensure that persons do not
encroach on the area of work.
14 The Antenna and Turning Mechanism MUST NOT be
Std Speed High Speed lifted by the array, but the complete unit secured and
hoisted evenly.
S-band 3.5m 20m
EQUIPMENT LOCATION
UPMAST TURNING MECHANISM (CAE-A41/42)
5 Compass safe distances are stated on labels on all
units and are as follows: 15 The Upmast Turning Mechanism should be installed in
such a position where Blind Arcs, caused by
Grade I Grade II obstructions, i.e. masts, funnels etc, are eliminated or
(0.25 degree) (1 degree) minimised. Funnels, crosstrees and other large obstructions
MkVII Transceiver 1.4 m 0.8 m can also reflect energy and give rise to spurious echo returns
especially in close proximity to land.
TRANSCEIVER AND TURNING MECHANISMS 16 The Upmast Turning Mechanism must not be
mounted where the temperature exceeds 70oC.
6 The MkVII S-Band downmast Transceiver can be
used with the MkVI Turning Mechanism (low speed - 17 The Upmast Turning Mechanism must be kept clear of
25 rpm (CAE-A42) or high speed - 40 rpm (CAE-A41) ship’s flexible communication aerials to avoid damage
versions). For completeness the installation procedure in to both.
this document uses the MkVI Turning Mechanism. Two 18 The Upmast Turning Mechanism must be mounted
versions of the turning mechanism are provided: more than 914 mm above any flat surface, when the
(1) 25 rpm CAE-A42 for normal applications. flat surface is greater than the diameter swept by the
antenna.
(2) 50 rpm CAE-A41 for high speed craft.
7 The electronics for the downmast transceiver are positioned in the close proximity of any magnetic
housed in a separate bulkhead mounted enclosure. compass or D/F aerial, etc.
The downmast transceiver is connected to the turning
mechanism, via semi-rigid coaxial cable.
SOFT START UNIT

8 Both versions of the MkVI Turning Mechanism utilise a
bulkhead mounted Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14)
Original 4e.1 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 4e
DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVER (CTX-A9) 22 Cable runs between the transceiver and the antenna
turning mechanism should be kept to a minimum
20 The following points must be considered when length, i.e. Less than 35m, with as few bends and twists as
selecting a suitable site for the Downmast possible. Supporting brackets and couplings are to be used
Transceiver: to eliminate the effects of vibration.
(1) The transceiver is designed for bulkhead
mounting. SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14)
(2) Consideration must be given to accessibility for 23 The Soft Start Unit must be sited near the transceiver.
servicing and protection from adverse conditions.
For ease of maintenance, the top of the 24 The Soft Start Unit must be sited to allow removal of
transceiver should not be mounted more than the front cover.
1.6m above the deck.
(3) Ensure that there is sufficient space below the unit OPTIONAL MAINS ISOLATOR (80-261-600)
for cable entries, and above the unit to allow for
connection of the semi-rigid co-axial cable 25 The Mains Isolator must be sited adjacent to the
coupling. display or in the area of the operators control room and
NOTE:
The semi-rigid co-axial cable has a minimum bend radius
of 100 mm (4") INSTALLATION
(4) The transceiver should be mounted in a position
which allows for ventilation and cooling. SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14)
(5) Do not fit the transceiver in an acoustic, noise
sensitive area, i.e. Bridge or Operations Room.
WARNING
(6) Do not fit the transceiver in close proximity to any
magnetic compass or D/F aerial.
ENSURE THAT ALL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE
(7) Connecting cables between the display and the VICINITY OF THE SOFT START UNIT ARE
transceiver should be limited to a length of 65 ISOLATED BEFORE ANY INSTALLATION TAKES
metres. Where the distance between transceiver
and display exceeds 65 metres, advice must be
obtained from Kelvin Hughes Ltd. Details of Line
Amplifiers and Receivers for use with long cable Fitting Thermal Overload Trip Unit To Soft Start Unit
runs are provided in Annex A to this manual. (CZZ-A14)
21 Cable runs between the transceiver and the antenna 26 The thermal overload trip unit is supplied with the
turning mechanism should be kept to a minimum gearbox fitting kit.
length, i.e. less than 35m, with as few bends and twists as
possible. Supporting brackets and couplings are to be used 27 Remove the soft start unit cover by releasing the four
to eliminate the effects of vibration. captive screws.
28 The trip unit, shown in Figure 1e, clips on the side of
the contactor and is secured in position with relay
termination screws 2T1, 4T2, 6T3, 14NO and A2.
H
2
3'
A
I O
7
2'
2'
2
2T1 4T7 6T3

A2/96NC
14/22 95NC
CD-0224
Figure 1e - Thermal Overload Trip Unit
May 01 4e.2 Original

KH 2020
Chap 4e
29 Connect the cableform wires as shown in Table 1. 31 Set the dial position on the trip unit to the position
TABLE 1: Trip Unit Cableform Connections
TERMINAL No. WIRE COLOUR WIRE No. MARKERS FROM
14/22 P 16 BN/BU A2
95NC P 28 R/S KEYSWITCH
2T1 BK - - NEON
P 10 BN/BK TB1-1
4T2 P 11 BN/BN TB1-2
6T3 P 12 BN/R TB1-3
A2/96NC P 23 R/O PCB SKA
P 16 BN/BU 14/22
30 shown in Table 2.
Set the blue trip button to the H (handset) position.
FITTING THE SOFT START UNIT
32 Fit the soft start unit to the securing bulkhead using the
H Figure 2e for dimensions.
A
CD-0225

KH 2020
Chap 4e
TABLE 2: Trip Unit Dial Positions
ANTENNA MOTOR THERMAL OVERLOAD TRIP DIAL POSITION

SPEED VOLTAGE UNIT - PART NO.
25 rpm 440 V 45-617-1156-04 1.5A

GM-0152
25 rpm 415 V 45-617-1156-04 1.6A

GM-0153
25 rpm 380 V 45-617-1156-04 1.7A

GM-0153
25 rpm 220 V 45-617-1156-06 2.5A

GM-0157
40 rpm 440 V 45-617-1156-04 1.5A

GM-0152
40 rpm 415 V 45-617-1156-04 1.6A

GM-0153
40 rpm 380 V 45-617-1156-04 1.7A

GM-0153
40 rpm 220 V 45-617-1156-06 2.5A

GM-0157

342
Original
119
180
237
3 x M10 FIXINGS
4e.5
Soft Start Unit Weight : 9.5kg
Compass Safe Distances
159
Grade I Standard Compass : 1.0 m
Grade II & III Steering Compass : 0.7 m
Figure 2e - Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14: Installation Diagram

Grade IV : 0.5 m

o o
o
368 At Relative Humidity 95% : +40 C
CD-1343
May 01
Chap 4e
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4e
THREE PHASE
SWITCHING PCB
CZZ-A159

OVERLOAD UNIT

CD-4566
Figure 3e - Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14: Component Layout

KH 2020
Chap 4e
UPMAST TURNING MECHANISM (CAE-A42/41) 36 With reference to Figures 4e and 5e, install the upmast
turning mechanism as follows:
(1) Fit the coupling element and sealing ring to the
WARNING antenna connector.
ENSURE THAT ALL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE (2) Fit the antenna to the upmast turning mechanism,
VICINITY OF THE TRANSCEIVER/TURNING ensuring that the connectors are aligned, and
MECHANISM ARE ISOLATED BEFORE ANY loosely secure using the eight M10 retaining bolts,
INSTALLATION TAKES PLACE. washers and nuts.
CAUTION
CAUTION
When Rotating The Antenna Do Not Apply Excessive
When Unpacking The Antenna, Ensure That The Force.
Semi-rigid Co-axial Cables Are Not Kinked, Crushed
Or Bent. Support The Antenna Near Its Centre When Ensure that the Semi-rigid Coax Assembly, on The
Lifting It Out Of Its Packing And When Fitting It Into Underside Of The Antenna, Is Not Crushed Or
Position On The Turning Mechanism. Do Not Handle Damaged.
The Antenna By The Semi-rigid Co-axial Cable Input.
(3) Secure the co-axial connector using the three M6

bolts and washers provided.
33 The Upmast Turning Mechanism is supplied in two
parts: (4) Tighten and torque load the eight antenna
retaining bolts to 25 Nm.
(1) Gearbox.
(2) Antenna.
34 The ship’s mounting structure must be capable of CAUTION
withstanding the high starting and stopping torque
generated by the motor fitted in the upmast
transceiver/turning mechanism. Failure To Fit Antenna Spoilers Will Reduce
System Life And Render The Radar Inoperative
35 When mounting the upmast turning mechanism In High Winds.
observe the following:
(1) Use the fitting pack supplied with the equipment (5) Fit the spoilers to the antenna using the fittings
(refer to Figure 4e). The fitting pack contains supplied.
fixings that have been tested to withstand the
stresses detailed in paragraph 33. (6) Mark out and drill four 17mm gearbox mounting
holes at the mounting position.
(2) Recommended tensile strengths and torque
loadings for the fixings are stated on the (7) For semi-rigid cable access mark out and drill a
installation diagram. 100 mm hole in the mounting platform, as shown
on Figure 4e.
(3) For upmast transceivers/turning mechanisms
mounted in excess of 1.8m above the deck, it is NOTE:
recommended that a service platform and guard The upmast transceiver/turning mechanism is supplied
rail are fitted. with four M12 bolts, washers and fibre washers. These may
be removed, but not discarded, and replaced with eye bolts.
(4) Use a suitable jointing compound or sealant to Once the upmast transceiver/turning mechanism is in
prevent corrosion between the platform and position, the eye bolts are to be removed and replaced with
upmast transceivers/turning mechanism. the original bolts.
CAUTION
The Antenna Window Must NOT Be Painted.


KH 2020
Chap 4e
WARNINGS Optional Tx Monitor Arm (CAE-A38)

THE UPMAST TRANSCEIVER/TURNING the rear cover to the Turning Mechanism and remove
MECHANISM MUST NOT BE LIFTED BY THE the cover.
ANTENNA AND MUST BE HOISTED TO THE FIXING
POSITION USING A SECURED BLOCK AND 38 Route the Tx Monitor Arm cableform as shown in
TACKLE, OR, IF NO EYE BOLTS ARE FITTED, BY Figure 12e.
ROPE STROPS. 39 Connect the Tx Monitor Arm cableform to the Heading
Line PCB (CAE-A180) as follows: red to 9PLA 7 and
DO NOT FIT EYE BOLTS IF THERE ARE NO blue to 9PLA 8.
40 Refit the rear cover and secure using the six bolts.
(8) Install the upmast turning mechanism at the
mounting position, ensuring correct orientation.
Use the shim washers supplied, to take up any
distortion in the mounting platform. Failure to do
so may cause the casting to crack when bolts are
tightened to the correct torque.
(9) Secure the upmast turning mechanism with the
four M16 bolts supplied and torque load them to
120Nm.

672 2750 or 3910
Original
890
TX MONITOR ARM
(PART OF CAE-A38)
418 FWD
MOTOR POWER CABLE
FED IN UNDERNEATH
THROUGH LARGE HOLE
7 IN BOTTOM PLATE
12 CORE
CABLE S BAND CO-AX 150
ON/OFF
SWITCH
4e.9
* IF S BAND CO-AX NOT FED THROUGH
HOLE IN MOUNTING PLATE RAISE
EARTHING UNIT TO ALLOW 150mm CLEARANCE
STUD
540
4 FIXING HOLES
O17 480
Antenna Weight (2.8m) 45kg
(3.9m) 50 kg
Tx & Turning Mech 100 kg
C/L 430
474 ROTATION
Compass Safe Distances:
Standard Compass Grade I : 4.0 m 200
Steering Compass Grade II & III : 2.5 m
Grade IV : 2.0 m
180 190
o o
Figure 4e - Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41, A42): Installation Dimensions

o
At Relative Humidity 95% : +40 C * 100mm HOLE IN MOUNTING
PLATE REQUIRED FOR
S BAND CO-AX CABLE ENTRY
GEARBOX MOUNTING FIXINGS SUPPLIED
4 OFF. BOLTS M16 x 50mm
12 OFF WASHER M16 PLAIN MATERIAL MUST BE HIGH TENSILE
STEEL. (MIN.80kg f / mm 2 )
6 OFF WASHER M16 SPLIT
8 OFF NUT M16 FULL BOLTS TIGHTENED TO A TORQUE OF 120 Nm.
6 OFF SHIM WASHER PROTECT AGAINST CORROSION BY PAINTING
CD-1345
}
May 01
Chap 4e
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4e
FWD
MOTOR CABLE
38 CORE
CABLE 50mm HOLE
S BAND CO-AX IN MOUNTING
PLATE REQUIRED
FOR MOTOR CABLE
ENTRY
450 830
540
480
200
4 FIXING HOLES 430
O17
674 474
30
TUBE THICKNESS 100mm HOLE
50 IN MOUNTING
MAX 2M 12 MM MINIMUM PLATE REQUIRED
FOR S BAND
CO-AX CABLE ENTRY
490
750
500
MOUNTING PLATE AND

STIFFENING PIECES
CD-1348 15mm STEEL
Figure 5e - Upmast Turning Mechanism: Mast Mounting

KH 2020
Chap 4e
DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVER (CTX-A9) DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVERS HF CO-AXIAL

CABLE
45 A semi-rigid co-axial cable is used to connect the
WARNING S-Band Downmast Transceiver to the Antenna (refer
to Figure 7e). The cable is supplied cut to length with a
ENSURE THAT ALL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE connector fitted to each end. Its general specification is as
VICINITY OF THE TRANSCEIVER ARE ISOLATED follows:
BEFORE ANY INSTALLATION TAKES PLACE. (1) Impedance: 50 Ohms
(2) Attenuation @ 3GHz: 0.1dB per metre
Construction
46 The cable is supplied cut to length and with a special
41 The general construction of the downmast S-Band coupling fitted to each end. The cable must not be cut,
transceiver comprises a sheet-metal rear plate which or shortened - any cable surplus should be accommodated
is formed, to include the top of the unit. This is braced by two in a 900 mm (3 ft) coil along its length.
‘U’ sections which protrude above and below the plate,
47 The minimum bend radius is 100 mm (4"); the cable
providing the bulkhead fixing points.
must be worked gradually to achieve the minimum
42 The PCBs are mounted both sides of the modulator bend and must not be bent across a radius sharper than the
chassis and are removed as a complete assembly. minimum bend radius.
43 A wrap-around cover made from sheet-metal, 48 The cable must be suitably supported and secured
encloses the unit and is fixed by six captive screws. along its length by special plastic cable cleats (Code
Removing the cover gives access to the front and sides of No. 80-283-605-07) positioned at 1m (39") intervals. On
the Transceiver electronics. Cable entry is at the bottom of vertical cable runs, where due to its own weight the cable
the unit. might creep, the intervals between cable cleats at the top of
the run should be reduced to 300 mm (12").
Mounting 49 The cable may be run with other cables on a common
channel plate or cable tray but it must be secured
44 Fit the transceiver to the securing bulkhead using the separately using the special plastic cable cleats.
Figure 6e for dimensions. 50 Protect the cable from accidental damage by ensuring
that any sections exposed to risk are protected by
suitable covers. Pay particular attention to protecting the
cable entries into transitions.
51 Do not run the cable on any surface or in any area
where a temperature of 70oC is exceeded.
52 Use deck gland TCR-1345 (refer to Figures 8e and 9e)
to pass the cable through watertight decks, etc.

KH 2020
Chap 4e
TOP VIEW
85 250
BETWEEN FIXING CENTRES
420 250
88.4 122.6
19
670
720 645 BETWEEN
FIXING
CENTRES
15.8mm SLOT
25
SYNC. & VIDEO SOCKETS
CABLE ENTRIES
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE Transmitter Weight : 30kg

o o
o
At Relative Humidity 95% : +40 C Power Consumption : 140W
COMPASS SAFE DISTANCES :-

Standard Compass 1.9m (Grade I)
Steering Compass 1.1m (Grade II)
CD-4100
Figure 6e - Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9): Installation Dimensions

KH 2020
Chap 4e
MKVI OR MKVII TURNING MECHANISM
BOTTOM OF
ROTATING JOINT
ROTATE UNTIL
2mm - 5mm
OF THREAD IS
PROTRUDING
MINIMUM BENDING
RADIUS 80mm
ALL PART Nos

AS SHOWN FOR CONNECTOR ZV 9759
TX END
*3 BOLTS (FLANGE BOLTS)
*3 SPRING
WASHERS
*"O" RING
*COUPLING ELEMENT RF
(INNER MALE COUPLING)
*THESE ITEMS
SUPPLIED AS
FITTING PACK
CODE ZV 9758
SEAL PLATES
CAE-1437 TOP OF
TRANSCEIVER
CTX-A9
BOTTOM OF
TURNING MECH
3mm THICK SPONGE

CD-4043 CAE-1438
Figure 7e - Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9) to Turning Mechanism Connection

KH 2020
Chap 4e
12 BOLTS HEX. HEAD M6 25mm STEEL

(20-251-1200-11)
6 WASHERS M6 STEEL
(20-281-1063-11)
CLAMP PLATE (2 HALVES)

(TCR 1345)
SPACER (2 HALVES)
(TCR 1343)
SEAL (2 HALVES)
(TCR 1344)
SPACER (2 HALVES)
(TCR 1343)
DECKGLAND BODY
(TCR 1340)
GASKET
(TCR 1342)
DECK PLATE
(TCR 1341)
6 WASHERS M6 STEEL
(20-281-1063-11)
(A)
(see next Figure)
CD-1218
Figure 8e - Deck Gland Fitting

KH 2020
Chap 4e
150
FITTING THE COAXIAL DECK GLAND (TCR A37)
STEEL DECK (B)

To fit the deck gland to a steel deck, refer to diagrams (A)
(see previous figure) and (E) and proceed as follows:
67
1) Weld the deck plate (TCR 1341) to the deck.
2) Pierce the deck with a 64 mm (2.5") diameter hole,

concentric with the deck plate.
64
3) Place the gasket (TCR A1342) between the deck plate
(TCR 1341) and the deck gland body (TCR 1340). Bolt
the deck gland body to the deck plate using six M6 x 22 BODY
mm hexagonal head screws with spring washers. COACH BOLTS
4) Assemble the gland components in the deck gland body GASKET (TCR 1342)
and temporarily secure clamp plates (TCR 1345) using
(C)
the remaining six M6 x 22 mm hexagonal head screws WOOD BLOCK
with washers.
COMPOSITION
WOODEN OR COMPOSITION & STEEL DECKS DECK
To fit the deck gland to a wooden, or composition & steel

deck, refer to previous figure and Diagrams (C) and proceed
as follows:
1) Where the composition has been removed, a wooden

block is secured to the deck (diagram C).
2) A 64 mm (2.5") diameter hole is bored through the

wooden block and the deck. The deck gland body (TCR
1340) and the gasket (TCR 1342) are secured to the
wooden block using suitable coach bolts.
3) Assemble the gland components in the deck gland body

and temporarily secure the clamp plates (TCR 1345)
using six M6 x 22 mm hexagonal head screws with DECK PLATE
washers. (TCR 1341)
WELD
COMPOSITION DECKS
FLANGED TUBE
To fit the deck gland to a composition deck, refer to previous SHIPYARD SUPPLY
figure and Diagram (D) and proceed as follows:
1) A threaded deck tube (shipyard supplied) with a flange

at one end is attached to the deck (Diagram D).
(D) COMPOSITION
DECK
2) The deck plate (TCR 1341) is then welded to the flange

and the the deck gland is assembled as for a steel deck
fitting.
ASSEMBLING THE DECK GLAND TO THE COAXIAL

CABLE
Refer to previous figure and proceed as follows:
1) Part the transition from the cable end connector and

wrap the transition in a protective cover. DO NOT
REMOVE THE END CONNECTOR FROM THE
CABLE.
2) Remove the six screws securing the two halves of the

clamp plate (TCR 1345) and remove the gland
components.
3) Pass the coaxial cable through the gland.
(E)
DECK PLATE
4) Reassemble the gland components as shown (Figure
(TCR 1341)
28) to ensure tat the join between the two halves of
each gland component is at 90o to its neighbour. WELD
5) Fit and tighten the six M6 x 25 mm screws in the clamp STEEL DECK
plate (TCR 1345) to expand the seal. DO NOT OVER
TIGHTEN as this may cause distortion of the cable.
6) Coat the assembled gland with a protective finish.
7) The transmission is now bolted back on to the cable 64

connector at the most convenient stage of running the
coaxial cable.
CD-1219
Figure 9e - Deck Gland Fitting

KH 2020
Chap 4e
53 Refer to Figure 10e and secure the Mains Isolator in the required position (no fittings are supplied).
160 120
205
160
80 30
CABLE
211K
15 mm 1.D 15 mm 1.D
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
CONNECT
SCREENS
TO EARTH

SHIP'S SUPPLY
SINGL PHASE
110V/220V
CD-1157
Figure 10e - Mains Isolator: Installation Dimensions

KH 2020
Chap 4e
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 38-Core Custom Built Cable

56 The 38-core composite cable (KH code number
CABLE SPECIFICATIONS 5344-701) is made for Kelvin Hughes and comprises
the following:
the type of cable required, e.g. Cable code N is a (1) 4 cores of 32/0.2 mm copper wire.
38-core cable. Table 3 provides specifications for each (2) 32 cores of 16/0.2 mm copper wire.
abbreviations. (3) 2 cores of co-axial cable.
TABLE 3: Cable Specification
A 2-core small multi-core 1344-718 16/0.2 6.1 mm 7.7 mm
B 3-core small multi-core 1344-719 16/0.2 6.4 mm 7.2 mm
C Not used
D Not used
E 12-core small multi-core 1344-722 16/0.2 10 mm 11 mm
F Not used
G Not used
J Not used
K 2-core Power 5344-787 7/0.67 10 mm
L 3-core Power 5344-787 7/0/67 13 mm
N 38-core small multi-core 5344-701 17 mm
R 12-core composite 45-762-0041-001 Mixed 15.4 mm
55
The cables used to connect Kelvin Hughes equipment
are to be to the specification above. Failure to use the
correct specification cables may result in impaired

KH 2020
Chap 4e
TABLE 4: 38-Core Cable Colour Abbreviations TABLE 4 (Cont.): 38-Core Cable Colour Abbreviations
ABBREVIATION COLOUR ABBREVIATION COLOUR
R RED V/Bk VIOLET/BLACK

B BLUE V/Y VIOLET/YELLOW
G GREEN V/W VIOLET/WHITE
Y YELLOW W/R WHITE/RED
W WHITE WHITE CO-AX
Bk BLACK SLATE CO-AX
Bn BROWN N/C NO CONNECTION
V VIOLET
O ORANGE
P PINK
T TURQUOISE 12-core Composite Cable
S SLATE (grey) 57 The 12-core composite cable (KH code number
45-762-0041-001) is made for Kelvin Hughes and
R/B RED/BLUE
comprises the following:
R/G RED/GREEN
R/Y RED/YELLOW
R/W RED/WHITE
(3) 2 cores of 16/0.2 mm twisted and screened.
R/Bk RED/BLACK
R/Bn RED/BROWN
B/Y BLUE/YELLOW Small Multi-Core Cables
B/W BLUE/WHITE 58 These cables conform to DEF STAN 61-12 (part 5).
B/Bk BLUE/BLACK collectively screened and clad in a PVC outer sheath.
B/O BLUE/ORANGE 59 Core Details
G/Y GREEN/YELLOW (1) The core details are as follows:
G/W GREEN/WHITE Conductors consist of 16 strands of 0.2 mm
G/Bk GREEN/BLACK diameter tinned copper wire.
Nominal cross-section area of conductor
G/O GREEN/ORANGE = 0.5 mm2.
G/S GREEN/SLATE Nominal diameter of conductor = 0.93 mm
Bn/Bk BROWN/BLACK Minimum thickness of insulation = 0.40 mm
Bn/Y BROWN/YELLOW Minimum diameter of core = 1.75 mm
Maximum diameter of core = 1.90 mm
Bn/W BROWN/WHITE (2) Braided Screen
S/B SLATE/BLUE The cores are laid-up, covered with binding tape
S/Bn SLATE/BROWN over which is woven a braiding of 0.2 mm diameter
tinned copper wire.
(3) Outer Sheath
wire braiding.
2.5 A at 1000 V DC
2.5 A at 440 V AC at 1600Hz.

KH 2020
Chap 4e
Power Cables COVER REMOVAL

60 These cables are used for services requiring a 68 Before any electrical connections can be made,
moderate current carrying capacity, i.e. main supplies. covers have to be removed from the following
equipment:
2-Core (Power):
(1) Upmast Turning Mechanism.
(2) Downmast Transceiver.
250/440V grade: (3) Soft Start Unit.
7 x 0.67 mm (7 x 0.026") cores
cross linked polythene insulation, (4) Optional Mains Isolator.
tinned copper wire, 79% coverage Upmast Turning Mechanism
the rear cover to the Upmast Turning Mechanism and
Outer diameter: remove the cover.
10 mm (0.39 in.).
3-Core (Power): Downmast Transceiver
Cable Code L: KH Reference No. 5344-788 70 Release the six captive screws securing the cover to
(250/440 V grade):
Specification as for 2-core cable. Soft Start Unit
Outer Diameter: 71 Remove the soft start unit cover by releasing the six
captive screws.
10 mm (0.44")
GENERAL
61 Before starting electrical connection observe the screw.
following:
PCB LOCATIONS AND CABLEFORM
ROUTING
WARNING
downmast transceiver are shown on Figure 12e.
ENSURE THAT ALL POWER SUPPLIES ARE
ISOLATED BEFORE ANY ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION TAKES PLACE
62 Isolate power supplies as follows:

(1) Ensure that the associated display is turned off.
(2) Remove fuses from mains isolators.
(3) On Turning Mechanism set ON/OFF switch to
OFF.
securely earthed to the platform with braided copper
wire.
64 The casing of the downmast transceiver must be
copper wire.
65 Allow sufficient length on all cables to allow for routing
through the transceiver. Make sure that there is
shown on Figure 11e.

May 01
Chap 4e
KH 2020
OUTSIDE INSIDE
OF OF
CASTING CASTING
CASTING
CLAMPING NUT
BRASS BUNG
NYLON WASHER
RUBBER GLAND
CABLE OUTER
INSULATION
BRAID
4e.20
BRAID IS CONTINUOUS
THROUGH GLAND
Figure 11e - Cable Gland Assembly

PLACE.
CABLE GLANDS.
640 mm
CD-0278 700 mm
Original
TBI
Original
TBI
HEADING LINE HEADING LINE

PLA PCB PCB
CABLE FROM
Tx MON ARM
PLA
CABLE FROM
Tx MON ARM
12-CORE
CABLE
4e.21
CABLE FROM
Tx MON ARM
Figure 12e - Turning Mechanism: PCB Location and Cableform Routing

PLA
TBI
12-CORE
CABLE
May 01
CD-0212
Chap 4e
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4e
TX MICROCONTROLLER PCB MODULATOR ON BACK

OF ELECTRONICS ASSEMBLY
PLE
PLC
PLB
PLD
SKW
PLV
PLP
PLA
1TB1
PLE PLG
PLX
PLK
PLB
PLH N L
LOAD
PLN
EMC
PLT PLS PLM FILTER
PLD PLC LINE
2/3 CORE TO
PLB SOFT START OR
PLA PLE PLC PLD INVERTER UNIT
CO-AXES FROM 38 CORE
(NUCLEUS 2) OR
12 CORE (NUCLEUS 3)
(OR DIRECT IF RS232 USED)
RS232 2 CORE
(OPTION) POWER CABLE
PRE-PULSE 12 CORE TO
(OPTION) TURNING MECHANISM
12 CORE CABLE (CAN BUS) 38 CORE CABLE
FROM NUCLEUS 3 DISPLAY FROM NUCLEUS 2 OR 3 DISPLAY
NOTE: IF 38 CORE CONTROL CABLE FROM NUCLEUS 2 OR 3 OR 12 CORE CABLE FROM NUCLEUS 3
USED VIDEO AND SYNC FORM PART OF THE CABLE.
IF RS232 CONTROL CABLE USED, VIDEO AND SYNC ARE SEPARATE CABLES
ONLY ONE OF 38 CORE, 12 CORE (CAN BUS) OR RS232 CABLES USED
A
A
PRE-PULSE VID 2 VID 1
A
B
EXT-SYNC SYNC 2 SYNC 1
VIEW SHOWING
CD-4036 COAXIAL CONNECTORS
Figure 13e - Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9): PCB Location and Cableform Routing

KH 2020
Chap 4e

74 Electrical connections for upmast and downmast
transceiver systems are detailed on the following 75 The upmast turning mechanism must be checked for
wiring diagrams: security and freedom to rotate. The downmast
transceiver must be checked for security, accessibility, and
(1) Figure 14e - Motor Connection. cabling ‘runs’.
(2) Figure 15e - Connections between the downmast 76 Ensure that all cables are secured to their associated
Transceiver CTX-A9 and the upmast Turning entry point and that screened cables are earthed to
Mechanism and Soft Start Unit (if fitted). their respected units.
(a) For details of connections between the Soft 77 All cable entries must be checked for signs of fretting,
Start Unit and the Turning Mechanism for chafing or damage, and subsequently sealed with a
M kV I Tu r n i n g M e ch a n i sm s r e f e r t o mastic compound.
publication KH 1250. Figure 18 shows a
typical arrangement with a Nucleus 3 Display
and Dual Interswitch Unit. Figure 21 shows a
typical arrangement with a Nucleus 3 Display
and Radar Interswitch Unit (RIU).
(b) For details of connections between the Soft
Start Unit or Inverter and the Turning
Mechanism for Mk VII Turning Mechanisms
refer to publication KH 1253.
(3) Figures 16e and 17e - Connections for Nucleus 3
systems using 38-core composite cable as
follows:
(a) Co n n e ct i o n s b e t we e n t h e C T X - A 9
Transceiver and the Nucleus 3 Display.
(b) Connections for an interswitched system, via
the Dual Interswitch Unit.
(4) Figures 19e and 20e - Connections for Nucleus 3
systems using 12-core composite cable and the
CANbus interface as follows:
(a) Co n n e ct i o n s b e t we e n t h e C T X - A 9
Transceiver and the Nucleus 3 Display.
the Radar Interswitch Unit (RIU).
NOTE:
RS232 serial control can be used for changing the
programme of the Tx Microcontroller PCB. It does not
control the transceiver.

KH 2020
Chap 4e
TX MONITOR ARM
(PART OF CAE-A38)
FWD
U1
FROM SOFT V1 MOTOR

START UNIT JUNCTION
W1
BOX
U1 W2 U1 W2
V1 U2 V1 U2
W1 V2 W1 V2

MOTOR JUNCTION BOX MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
U5 U5
U1 U2
U1 U2
V5 V5
V1 V2
V1 V2
W1 W5 W5
W2 W1 W2
BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR

U1 U1 W5
W2 W2
U5
V1 V1 U5
U2 U2
V5
W1 V2 W1 V2 V5
W5
CD-1349 LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
Figure 14e - Motor Connections

KH 2020
Chap 4e
SOFT START UNIT

CZZ-A14
TB1
3 PHASE R 1
SHIP’S B 2
Y 3
SUPPLY
3 CORE
CABLE L TURNING MECHANISM
Mk VII TRANSMITTER
CAE-A41 OR CAE-A42
CTX-A9
3SKK TB2 TB3 TB

R 1 R
CONTACTOR +VE 4 1 U1 PHASE 1
B 2 B
CONTACTOR RTN 2 2 V2 PHASE 2
G 3 Y
0V 3 3 W3 PHASE 3
3 CORE 3 CORE
(CABLE B) (CABLE L)
1TB1
Bn
SW1 (+27V) 1 1
V
MOTOR START (+27V) 5 2
3
3SKM
Bk
+27V 6 9SKA
R 3
NEON SIGNAL 1
B 4
NEON RETURN 2
G 6
AZIMUTH 3
Y 7
HEADING LINE 4
W 8
0V 5
R 1 Tx MON 0V
Tx MONITOR B
ARM 2 Tx MON SIG
12 CORE
(CABLE E)
12 CORE CABLE INTERCONNECTIONS

BETWEEN TRANSCEIVER AND TURNING MECHANISM
CD-4588
Figure 15e - Transceiver (CTX-A9) to Turning Mechanism Connections

KH 2020
Chap 4e
TX MONITOR ARM
(PART OF CAE-A38)
FWD
U1
FROM SOFT V1 MOTOR

START UNIT JUNCTION
W1
BOX
U1 W2 U1 W2
V1 U2 V1 U2
W1 V2 W1 V2

U5 U5
U1 U2
U1 U2
V5 V5
V1 V2
V1 V2
W1 W5 W5
W2 W1 W2
BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR

U1 U1 W5
W2 W2
U5
V1 V1 U5
U2 U2
V5
W1 V2 W1 V2 V5
W5
CD-1349 LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
Figure 14e - Motor Connections

KH 2020
Chap 4e
SOFT START UNIT

CZZ-A14
TB1
3 PHASE R 1
SHIP’S B 2
Y 3
SUPPLY
3 CORE
CABLE L TURNING MECHANISM
Mk VII TRANSMITTER
CAE-A41 OR CAE-A42
CTX-A9
3SKK TB2 TB3 TB

R 1 R
CONTACTOR +VE 4 1 U1 PHASE 1
B 2 B
CONTACTOR RTN 2 2 V2 PHASE 2
G 3 Y
0V 3 3 W3 PHASE 3
3 CORE 3 CORE
(CABLE B) (CABLE L)
1TB1
Bn
SW1 (+27V) 1 1
V
MOTOR START (+27V) 5 2
3
3SKM
Bk
+27V 6 9SKA
R 3
NEON SIGNAL 1
B 4
NEON RETURN 2
G 6
AZIMUTH 3
Y 7
HEADING LINE 4
W 8
0V 5
R 1 Tx MON 0V
Tx MONITOR B
ARM 2 Tx MON SIG
12 CORE
(CABLE E)

CD-4588
Figure 15e - Transceiver (CTX-A9) to Turning Mechanism Connections

KH 2020
Chap 4e
NUCLEUS 3
DISPLAY Mk VII TRANSMITTER
CTX-A9
INPUT PCB 38 - CORE
CABLE
(CABLE N)
PLV 3PLB
1 S
TX RUN 6
2 Bn 7
TX MUTE 3 Y
M PULSE 4
4 W 5
L PULSE 5 B
TUNE 2
6 G 3
TUNE IND P
7 10
TX READY R
8 8
90/180 AZIMUTH
9
10 V 11
RX MONITOR
11 O 9
HEADING LINE
12
13
14 Bk 1
CONTROL PCB
PLW
1
2
3
2PLB
4
T or LtG
MODULATOR +27V 5 1
6
R/B 2
MODULATOR 0V 7
8
9 THESE CABLES
10 ARE SEPARATE POWER UNIT
11 COAXES IF
12 38 CORE CABLE
CONNECTION
NOT USED
VIDEO WHITE COAX 1 VIDEO 1
SYNC GREY COAX 1 SYNC 1

FILTER
2 CORE MAINS } L
POWER CABLE N
E
3PLV
DIAGNOSTIC
} 1
2
RXD
TXD
PLF PORT 3 GROUND
2
NAVSYS I/P 4
3 CABLE A
INTERFACE RTN
CONTROL PCB
PLU 3PLX
GYRO
} PHASE 1
PHASE 2
PHASE 3
REF 1
1
2
3
4
5
CABLE D
CAN BUS OPTION
} 1
2
3
4
CAN H
CAN L
GROUND
CAN H
REF 2 5 CAN L
6 GROUND
6
LOG
} PULSE
SHORT
7
CABLE A CONTROL PCB
8
0V
POWER UNIT
CABLE K
(TB1) 110/220V
CD-4432
Figure 16e - Typical Nucleus 3 System Interconnections

NUCLEUS 3
DISPLAY DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT
(HRC-A9) Mk VII TRANSMITTER
38 - CORE 38 - CORE
CABLE CABLE CTX-A9
INPUT PCB (CABLE N) (CABLE N)
Original
PLV PLDA/B-2 PLTA/B - 2 3PLB
1 S S
TX RUN 2 1 1 6
R/G Bn
TX MUTE 2 2 7
3 B/Y Y
M PULSE 3 3 4
4 B/W W
L PULSE 4 4 5
5 R/Y 5 5 B
TUNE G
2
6 R/W 6 6
TUNE IND P
3
7 T OR Lt/G 7 7
TX READY T 10
8 G/O 8 8
90/180 AZIMUTH 8
9 9 9
10 B/Bk 10 10 V
RX MONITOR G/W O 11
11 11 11
HEADING LINE 9
12 12 12
13 13 13
14 R/B 14 14 Bk
0V 1
PLW PLDA/B - 1 PLTA/B - 1 CONTROL PCB

1 G & W/V (2 WIRES) 1 1
2 Bn & S/Bn (2 WIRES) 2 2
3 Y & B/O (2 WIRES) 3 3
4 V & G/Y (2 WIRES) 2PLB
4 4
5 R & R/Bn (2 WIRES) 5 5 T or LtG 1
MODULATOR +27V 6 O 6 6 R/B
7 B 7 7 2
MODULATOR 0V P & V/Bk (2 WIRES)
8 8 8
9 R/Bk 9 9
10 Bn/Bk 10 10
11 W 11 11 POWER UNIT
12 Bk 12 12
4e.27
PLT PLDA/B-3
1 G/Bk
SELECT DATA 6
2 W/Bn
RADAR SOURCE 4
3 Y/Bn
TX CONTROL 5
4 S/B
STATUS 1 7
5 S/G
STATUS 2 8
6 G/B
0V 9
VIDEO SK8(10)
WHITE COAX
SYNC SK2(5)
GREY COAX
PLU SK7(9)
WHITE COAX 1 VIDEO 1
1
Figure 17e - Nucleus 3 Interswitched System Connection

PHASE 1
2
PHASE 2 3
SK1(4) GREY COAX 1 SYNC 1
GYRO CABLE D
PHASE 3 4
REF 1 5
REF 2 TB1-A/B TB2-A/B
}
6 L N L N
PULSE
7
LOG SHORT CABLE A
8
0V
}
PLF
1 FILTER
NAVSYS I/P
RTN 2 CABLE A
INTERFACE 2 CORE MAINS L
POWER CABLE N
}
E
POWER UNIT
CABLE K
(TB1) (TB2)
SECOND TRANSCEIVER
ONLY
May 01
Chap 4e
KH 2020
CD-4433
SOFT START UNIT GEARBOX
CABLE L
(CZZ-A14) (3-CORE (CAE-A42)/(CAE-A41)
POWER)
May 01
Chap 4e
3 PHASE TO AERIAL MOTOR

KH 2020
TB1 TB3 AE MOTOR TB

CABLE L R or 1 U1 PHASE 1
NOTES: R or 1 1 1
(3 CORE POWER) SEE
THE DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT ENABLES 2 DISPLAYS & 2 TRANSMITTERS TO BE INTERCONNECTED B or 2 2 2 B or 2 V1 PHASE 2 INSERT A
3 PHASE SHIPS
Y or 3 3 3 Y or 3 W1 PHASE 3
SUPPLY
3 CORE
}
TB2 CABLE B
R A
+27V TO CONTACTOR 1
CONTACTOR COIL RETURN B
2
G STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
0V 3
NUCLEUS 3
(HRC-A9) U1 W2 U1 W2
38 - CORE 38 - CORE
CABLE CABLE
INPUT PCB (CABLE N) (CABLE N) Mk VII TRANSMITTER V1 U2 V1 U2
PLV PLDA/B-2 PLTA/B - 2 CTX-A9

3PLB W1 V2 W1 V2
1 S S
TX RUN 2 1 1 6
R/G Bn
TX MUTE 2 2 7
3 B/Y Y
M PULSE 3 3 4
4 B/W W
L PULSE 4 4 5
5 R/Y 5 5 B
TUNE 2 LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
6 R/W 6 6 G
TUNE IND P
3
7 T OR Lt/G 7 7
TX READY T 10 SEIPEE HIGH SPEED
8 G/O 8 8 SEIPEE HIGH SPEED
90/180 AZIMUTH 8 MOTOR JUNCTION BOX MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
9 9 9
10 B/Bk 10 10 V U5
RX MONITOR 11 U1 U5 U2
11 G/W 11 11 O U1 U2
HEADING LINE 9
12 12 12
13 13 13
14 R/B 14 14 Bk
0V 1 V1 V5 V2 V5
V1 V2
1 G & W/V (2 WIRES) 1 1
2 Bn & S/Bn (2 WIRES) 2 2 W1 W5 W2 W5
3 Y & B/O (2 WIRES) 3 3 W1 W2
4 4
5 R & R/Bn (2 WIRES) 5 5 T or LtG 1 LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
MODULATOR +27V
4e.28
6 O 6 6
7 B R/B
7 7 2 BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
8 8 8 HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
9 R/Bk 9 9 WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX
10 Bn/Bk 10 10 TO CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V CONNECTIONS FOR 380/440V
W 11 11
POWER UNIT
11
12 Bk 12 12 U1 U1 W5
U5 W2 W2
PLT PLDA/B-3
1 G/Bk V1 V1 U5
SELECT DATA 6 U2 U2
2 W/Bn V5
RADAR SOURCE 4
3 Y/Bn
TX CONTROL 5 W1 V2 W1 V2 V5
4 S/B
STATUS 1 7
5 S/G 3SKK W5
STATUS 2 8
6 G/B
0V 9 3
2 LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
CONTROL
VIDEO SCREEN 4
WHITE COAX SK8(10) PCB
VIDEO 1 BN 1 SAFETY CONT +ve
SYNC SWITCH
GREY COAX SK2(5) 5 V 2 POLE 1 CONTACTOR
SYNC SCREEN
SK7(9) 1 VIDEO 1 BK 3 SAFETY
BLANK SK3 SWITCH
4 +27V
POLE 2
SK1(4)
CTX-A9 and MkVI Turning Mechanism with Soft Start Unit

1 SYNC 1
PLU HL PCB
1 3SKM B 1 Tx MON 0V
PHASE 1
2
PHASE 2 3
6 R 2 Tx MON (SIG)
GYRO CABLE D
PHASE 3 4 1 R 3 Tx MON (SIG)
REF 1 5 2 B 4 Tx MON (0V)
REF 2 TB1-A/B TB2-A/B CONTROL
}
6 5 +27V
PULSE L N L N PCB
3
Figure 18e - Nucleus 3 Display to Dual Interswitch Unit to Downmast Transceiver

7 G 6 AZ
LOG SHORT CABLE A
8 4 Y 7 HL
0V
}
5 W 8 0V
PLF
1 FILTER
NAVSYS I/P 12 CORE
RTN 2 CABLE A
INTERFACE 2 CORE MAINS L CABLE E
}
POWER CABLE N
CABLE A
}
E
POWER UNIT (2-CORE)
CABLE K TO Tx MON ARM
(TB1) (TB2) CD-4041
SECOND TRANSCEIVER
ONLY
Original
KH 2020
Chap 4e
COMPOSITE
12-CORE
NUCLEUS 3 (CABLE R)
5000, 6000, 7000 Mk VII TRANSMITTER
INPUT PCB CTX-A9

SKP
WHITE COAX
VIDEO VIDEO 1
SKO
GREY COAX
SYNC SYNC 1
NOTE 1 CONTROL PCB

PLC 3PLX
BLACK
CAN HI 1 1 CAN HI
WHITE
CAN LO 2 2 CAN LO
BLUE
GND 3 3 GND
ORANGE
HEADING LINE 4
RED
AZIMUTH 5 CONTROL PCB
6
YELLOW 3PLB
+27V 7
8 GREEN HEADING LINE
GND 9
8 AZIMUTH
POWER UNIT
2PLB
1
ON/OFF
2

FILTER
2 CORE L
MAINS INPUT N
E
CD-4559
Figure 19e - Typical Nucleus 3 CANbus System Interconnection

May 01
Chap 4e
KH 2020
COMPOSITE
COMPOSITE
12-CORE
12-CORE
NUCLEUS 3 (CABLE R)
(CABLE R)
5000, 6000, 7000 RIU Mk VII TRANSMITTER
NNR-A55
INPUT PCB CTX-A9
SKP
SKO
CONTROL PCB
NOTE 1 NOTE 1
PLC PLA-F PLL-0 3PLX
BLACK 1 1
CAN HI 1 1 CAN HI
WHITE 2 2
CAN LO 2 2 CAN LO
BLUE 3 3
GND 3 3 GND
ORANGE 4 4
HEADING LINE 4
RED 5 5
6 6
4e.30
6
YELLOW 7 7 3PLB
+27V 7
GREEN 8 8
8 AZIMUTH
POWER UNIT
2PLB
1
ON/OFF
2
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE FILTER

2 CORE L
MAINS INPUT N
Figure 20e - Nucleus 3 Interswitched CANbus System Configuration

E
CD-4560
Original
SOFT START UNIT GEARBOX
Original
CABLE L
(CZZ-A14) (3-CORE (CAE-A42)/(CAE-A41)
POWER)
3 PHASE TO AERIAL MOTOR
TB1 TB3 AE MOTOR TB
CABLE L
R or 1 1 1 R or 1 U1 PHASE 1
(3 CORE POWER) SEE
B or 2 2 2 B or 2 V1 PHASE 2 INSERT A
3 PHASE SHIPS
Y or 3 3 3 Y or 3 W1 PHASE 3
SUPPLY
3 CORE
TB2 CABLE B
R A
+27V TO CONTACTOR 1
CONTACTOR COIL RETURN B
2
G STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX STANDARD MOTOR JUNCTION BOX
0V 3
U1 W2 U1 W2
Mk VII TRANSMITTER V1 U2 V1 U2
CTX-A9 W1 V2 W1 V2
COMPOSITE
COMPOSITE 12-CORE
12-CORE (CABLE R)
(CABLE R) LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
NUCLEUS 3 RIU
5000, 6000, 7000 NNR-A55 SEIPEE HIGH SPEED SEIPEE HIGH SPEED
INPUT PCB
U1 U5 U2 U5
SKP U2
SK1 - 6 SK7 - 12 U1
WHITE COAX
SKO V5
SK13 - 18 SK19 - 24 V1 V5 V2
GREY COAX V1 V2
W1 W5 W2 W5
W1 W2
CONTROL PCB
NOTE 1 NOTE 1
4e.31
PLC PLL-0 3PLX LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 380/440 V
PLA-F
BLACK 1 1
CAN HI 1 1 CAN HI BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
WHITE 2 2 HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX
CAN LO 2 2 CAN LO BROWN MOTOR STANDARD OR
BLUE 3 3 WIRES W5, U5 AND V5 MUST BE MOVED HIGH SPEED JUNCTION BOX
GND 3 3 GND TO CHANGE SETTING TO 220/250V
ORANGE 4 4 CONNECTIONS FOR 380/440V
HEADING LINE 4
RED 5 5
AZIMUTH 5 CONTROL PCB U1 U1 W5
6 6
6 W2 W2
YELLOW 7 7 3PLB U5
+27V 7
GREEN 8 8 V1 V1 U5
GND 8 9 HEADING LINE U2 U2
8 AZIMUTH V5
W1 V2 W1 V2 V5
3SKK W5
POWER UNIT 3
Turning Mechanism with Soft Start Unit

2 LINKS FITTED THUS FOR 220/250 V
2PLB
4
1 1 BN 1 SAFETY CONT +ve
ON/OFF SWITCH
2 5 V 2 POLE 1 CONTACTOR
CONTROL BK 3 SAFETY
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE SWITCH +27V
PCB 4 POLE 2
FILTER HL PCB
3SKM B 1 Tx MON 0V
2 CORE L 6 R 2 Tx MON (SIG)
MAINS INPUT N
1 R 3 Tx MON (SIG)
E
2 B 4 Tx MON (0V)
Figure 21e - Nucleus 3 Display to RIU to Downmast Transceiver CTX-A9 and

5 +27V
3 G 6 AZ
4 Y 7 HL
5 W 8 0V
CD-4561
CONTROL 12 CORE
PCB CABLE E
}
CABLE A
(2-CORE)
TO Tx MON ARM
May 01
Chap 4e
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4e
LONG CABLE RUNS
INTRODUCTION
78 Where the distance between the transceiver and the
display is greater than 65 metres up to a maximum of
180 metres, low loss co-axial cables must be used as
specified below.
Co-axial Cable 75 ohms low loss (for extended cable

runs)
Coaxial Cable: CODE number 5344-719
Specification: TBD
Inner conductor: 1.25 mm Single Conductor
Dielectric: Air spaced Polyethylene
Screen: Tape Screen
Overall Dia: 8.3 mm
Electrical
Attenuation: 60 MHz 3.4 dB/100m MAX

100 MHz 4.9 dB/100m MAX
Impedance: 75 Ohm

KH 2020
Chap 4f
CHAPTER 4F
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS - TRANSCEIVER MKVII (X-BAND)
GENERAL 7 The electronics for the downmast system, are housed

in a separate bulkhead mounted enclosure. The
downmast transceiver is connected to the turning
1 This section provides installation information for MkVII mechanism, via elliptical waveguide or waveguide 16.
Downmast X-Band Transceivers.
8 The 24 rpm turning mechanism is used for normal
2 Kelvin Hughes, or appointed agents, contracts only to applications. The 40 rpm turning mechanism is used
supply the equipment, supervise the installation and for high speed craft.
final connection of the equipment. The installation must be
made by a fully qualified Kelvin Hughes Radar Engineer.
SAFETY NOTES
3 Forward planning for positioning the various units of
carried out. A full survey is required in order to establish the CAUTION
ship’s fitment. This may be arranged with the Technical
Department of Kelvin Hughes or one of the approved Observe the Health and Safety Notices at the
agencies. Details of Agencies worldwide can be found in front of this manual.
Publication KH 400.
MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED WAVEGUIDE 9 Electrical supplies are to be isolated to any part of the
LENGTHS platform when mounting an antenna/turning
mechanism. A suitable safety platform or harness should be
4 The following maximum waveguide lengths are used to avoid personal injury when working aloft.
recommended: 10 Electrical supplies in the vicinity of the transceiver are
to be isolated during installation.
11 A working platform is to be provided for installing or
Std Speed High Speed servicing the assembly. This should be positioned
approximately a metre below the base of the Turning
X-band 28m 20m Mechanism housing with a guard rail surrounding it.
12 A flat steel plate (12 mm thick approx.), pre-drilled (in
accordance with Figure 1f) to accommodate the
COMPASS SAFE DISTANCES Turning Mechanism and the cable and waveguide from the
Transceiver. The steel plate must be mounted horizontally
5 Compass safe distances are stated on labels on all and braced with struts for rigidity.
units and are as follows:
13 The plate has to be sited in a clear area where the
Grade I Grade II turning Antenna cannot be obstructed by any cables,
(0.25 degree) (1 degree) mast halyards etc.
MkVII Transceiver 1.4 m 0.8 m 14 The Antenna and Turning Mechanism must be hoisted
to the fixing position using a secured block and tackle
TRANSCEIVER AND TURNING MECHANISMS or rope strops.
15 Safety personnel must ensure that persons do not
6 There are two versions of the MkVII X-Band encroach on the area of work.
Transceiver and Turning Mechanism:
16 The Antenna and Turning Mechanism MUST NOT be
(1) 25 kW X-Band, Downmast 24 rpm (CTX-A8 lifted by the array, but the complete unit secured and
T r a n sce i ve r a n d CA E - A 3 0 - 6 T u r n i n g hoisted evenly.
Mechanism).
(2) 25 kW X-Band, Downmast 40 rpm (CTX-A8
T r a n sce i ve r a n d CA E - A 3 0 - 5 T u r n i n g
Mechanism).
Original 4f.1 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 4f
EQUIPMENT LOCATION DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVER (CTX-A8)

22 The following points must be considered when
TURNING MECHANISM (CAE-A30-5 & selecting a suitable site for the Downmast
CAE-A30-6)) Transceiver:
(1) The transceiver is designed for bulkhead
17 The Turning Mechanism should be installed in such a mounting.
position where Blind Arcs, caused by obstructions, i.e.
masts, funnels etc, are eliminated or minimised. Funnels, (2) Consideration must be given to accessibility for
crosstrees and other large obstructions can also reflect servicing and protection from adverse conditions.
energy and give rise to spurious echo returns especially in For ease of maintenance, the top of the
close proximity to land. Positioning the antenna close to transceiver should not be mounted more than
funnels and exhaust gases can adversely affect antenna 1.6m above the deck.
performance.
(3) Ensure that there is sufficient space below the unit
18 The Turning Mechanism is to be mounted on a rigid for cable entries, and above the unit to allow for
platform, which is positioned so that the rotating connection of the elliptical waveguide or
antenna is clear of other structures. waveguide 16 coupling. The semi-rigid elliptical
waveguide has a minimum bend radius of 200 mm
19 The primary consideration must be the strength of the (8”) E plane, and 480 mm (19”) H plane.
support for the Turning Mechanism/Antenna
assembly. Details of the requirement are described in the (4) The transceiver should be mounted in a position
following sub-paragraphs: which allows for ventilation and cooling.
(1) The antenna must be mounted more than 914 mm (5) Do not fit the transceiver in an acoustic, noise
(3 ft) above any flat surface greater than the sensitive area, i.e. Bridge or Operations Room.
diameter swept by the antenna. It must not be
positioned in close proximity of any magnetic (6) Do not fit the transceiver in close proximity to any
compass or D/F aerial etc. magnetic compass or D/F aerial.
23 Connecting cables between the display and the
(2) Masts, sampsons, posts and rigging of more than
0.6m (2ft) diameter can cause blind sectors. transceiver should be limited to a length of 65 metres.
Increasing the distance between the antenna unit Where the distance between transceiver and display
and these objects will reduce the blind sectors that exceeds 65 metres, advice must be obtained from Kelvin
inhibit a good radar picture. Hughes Ltd. Details of Line Amplifiers and Receivers for use
with long cable runs are provided in Annex A to this manual.
20 The Turning Mechanism must not be mounted where
the temperature exceeds 70oC. 24 Cable runs between the transceiver and the antenna
turning mechanism should be kept to a minimum
21 The Turning Mechanism must be kept clear of ship’s length, i.e. less than 35m, with as few waveguide bends and
flexible communication aerials to avoid damage to twists as possible. Supporting brackets and couplings are to
both. be used to eliminate the effects of vibration.

25 The Mains Isolator must be sited adjacent to the
display or in the area of the operators control room and
May 01 4f.2 Original

KH 2020
Chap 4f
INSTALLATION (6) Hoist the Turning Mechanism and Antenna

assembly, (ensuring the slings do not foul with the
Array), to the mounting plate. DO NOT LIFT BY
TURNING MECHANISM (CAE-A30-5 & THE ANTENNA.
(7) Mount the Turning Unit facing forward (removable
cover facing aft). Fit the retaining bolts and torque
WARNING load to 75 kg/m (50 lb/ft) then gain access to the
interior by removing the rear cover.
ENSURE THAT ALL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE NOTE:
VICINITY OF THE TURNING MECHANISM ARE The outer casing of the Turning Unit must be bonded to the
ISOLATED BEFORE ANY INSTALLATION TAKES ship’s superstructure using a copper earthing strap
PLACE. connected to the earthing point shown in Figure 1f.
CAE-A30-6) (8) The connecting cable from the Turning Unit to the
Transceiver should be kept to a maximum of 65
26 The Antenna and Turning Mechanism are specified metres. Do not exceed 65m without consulting the
and supplied separately. Refer to Figure 1f of this Kelvin Hughes Technical Department.
chapter for outline dimensions and fixing centres. The
following criteria are to be observed when installing: (9) Fit the Monitor Arm (if supplied) onto the side of
the casing and secure the clamp with the four
(1) For turning mechanisms mounted in excess of retaining screws. The monitor arm cable is passed
1.8m above the deck, it is recommended that a through the smaller cable gland and clamped. The
service platform and guard rail are fitted. cable screen is to be earthed by the ferrules in the
cable gland assembly.
(2) Use a suitable jointing compound or sealant to
prevent corrosion between the platform and the
turning mechanism. Waveguide Installation
27 Waveguide installation information is detailed in
paragraph 32.
CAUTION
The Antenna Window must not be painted

NOTE:
Assemble the two units together prior to hoisting into the
installation position.
(4) Remove the protective caps, tapes etc. Ensure

the waveguide faces are clean and free from
grease. Fit the appropriate ‘O’ ring. Fit the
Antenna array to the Turning Mechanism with the
eight bolts, holding it loosely in position. DO NOT
TIGHTEN THE BOLTS. Refer to Figure 2f.
(5) Align the waveguide from the Antenna to the
Rotating Joint and fit the four waveguide bolts. Do
not force the waveguide to the coupling face.
Tighten the waveguide bolts evenly until the
mating faces are flush. Torque load the Antenna
retaining bolts to 19 to 24 Nm (14-16 lb/ft).

TURNING CIRCLE DIA. 2412, 1990 OR 1310
2262, 1840, or 1160 75
May 01
Chap 4f
KH 2020
MONITOR ARM
192
SEE INSTRUCTION 1
562
FWD
FIXING BOLTS WAVEGUIDE
3 x M12 TB1 CONNECTION
EARTHING
STRAP CABLE ENTRY
CABLE ENTRY 145
( DIAMETER OF CABLE GLAND - 22mm ) (at rear)
380 18mm off centre
290 34mm from base
ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES 290 320
Turning Mechanism Weight : 22kg
4f.4
Antenna (1.8m) Weight: 14kg DANGER
Antenna (2.4m) Weight : 21kg
MOUNTING BOLT HIGH VOLTAGE
Power Consumption : 140W (24 RPM) 'FOOTPRINT'
200W (40 RPM)
290
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE 14 mm
o o
-25 C to +70 C
Relative Humidity 95% : +40oC
OFF
ON
POSITION OF
ANTENNA ARRAY SAFETY SWITCH
1 Assemble Antenna Array to Turning Mechanism using 6 x M6 bolts, nuts and washers provided.
Figure 1f - Turning Unit Fixing Centres and Outline Dimensions

2 Assemble Antenna feed to rotating joint with "O" ring seal. Use bolts, nuts and washers provided. BEFORE ANY MAINTENANCE IS CARRIED OUT TO
THE TURNING MECHANISM INTERNALS - ISOLATE THE
3 Ensure that the mating faces of the waveguide match up. DO NOT FORCE. MAINS SUPPLY VIA THE EXTERNAL SAFETY SWITCH
Seal with Densotape or similar compound.
INTERIOR ACCESS
4 Access to the Turning Mechanism interior obtained by unscrewing the four captive M8 bolts.
CABLE ENTRY
5 Pass the cable through the rear of the cable glands, use spanner provided to tighten gland nut
Do not overtighten.
CD-3906
Original
KH 2020
Chap 4f
NOTE: COPPER EARTH STRAP TO

SHIPS GROUND (TO BE SUPPLIED FWD
BY SHIPYARD)
NOMINALLY 20mm x 2mm
RIDGID OR FLEXABLE
WAVEGUIDE
450
290
450
TUBE WALL THICKNESS

12 MM MINIMUM
410
290
290 ø14 mm
MOUNTING PLATE AND

STIFFENING PIECES
CD-3817 15mm STEEL
Figure 2f - Turning Unit Mast Mounting

KH 2020
Chap 4f

KH 2020
Chap 4f
DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVER (CTX-A8) WAVEGUIDE INSTALLATION

32 This section deals with the installation of the
WARNING waveguide between the Turning Mechanism and the
Transmitter/Receiver. It is not concerned with waveguide
ENSURE THAT ALL POWER SUPPLIES IN THE items inside the equipment.
VICINITY OF THE TRANSCEIVER ARE ISOLATED 33 Carefully and correctly installed waveguides are, up to
BEFORE ANY INSTALLATION TAKES PLACE. the present, the most efficient means of transmitting
electrical energy at high frequencies. Losses inherent in
waveguides are, however, still considerable. To keep them
to a minimum, the following factors are of great importance:
Construction minimum length, air tightness and electrical continuity.
28 The general construction of the downmast X-Band 34 The Transmitter, a magnetron type valve, is also the
transceiver comprises a sheet-metal rear plate which primary oscillator. Mismatches of impedances in the
is formed, to include the top of the unit. This is braced by two waveguide cause reflection of power back to the magnetron
‘U’ sections which protrude above and below the plate, which can result in ‘frequency pulling’ and instability.
providing the bulkhead fixing points. Mismatches in a waveguide run can occur at joints, bends
and twists all of which must be kept to a minimum.
29 The PCBs are mounted both sides of the modulator
chassis and are removed as a complete assembly.
ELLIPTICAL WAVEGUIDE
30 A wrap-around cover made from sheet-metal,
encloses the unit and is fixed by six captive screws. 35 Detailed instructions for the installation of elliptical
Removing the cover gives access to the front and sides of waveguide are given in the following pages.
the Transceiver electronics. Cable entry is at the bottom of
the unit.
Mounting
31 Fit the transceiver to the securing bulkhead using the
Figure 4f for dimensions.

KH 2020
Chap 4f

ROTATING JOINT.
COMPOUND.


CD-4713
Figure 3f - Assembling Antenna to Turning Mechanism
Original 4f.7/8 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 4f
TOP VIEW
85 250
BETWEEN FIXING CENTRES
88.4 122.6
420 250
19
670
720 645 BETWEEN
FIXING
CENTRES
15.8mm SLOT
25
SYNC. & VIDEO SOCKETS
CABLE ENTRIES
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE Transmitter Weight : 30kg

o o
At Relative Humidity 0% -15 C to +55 C
o
At Relative Humidity 95% : +40 C Power Consumption :
CAE-A30-5 340W 500VA
CAE-A30-6 275W 400VA
COMPASS SAFE DISTANCES :-
Standard Compass 1.9m (Grade I)
Steering Compass 1.1m (Grade II)
CD-4101
Figure 4f - Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A8): Installation Dimensions

CONNECTOR
ELLIPTICAL WAVEGUIDE (PART No 45-748-117)
Original
(PART No 45-748-818)
FLARE RING
MINIMUM BENDING RADII, mm (in)
CLAMPING NUT
ALIGNMENT PIN E PLANE 200(8)
HOLES SMALLER "O" RING H PLANE 480 (19)
(FITS IN GROOVE) MAXIMUM TWIST, DEGREES/mn(DEGREES/ft) 3(1)
GAS PORT DIMENSIONS OUTER JACKET, mm (in) 33.5 x 22.9 (1.32 x 0.90)
WEIGHT, kg/m (lb/ft) 0.50 (0.33)
LARGER "O" RING

(FITS IN GROOVE) GASKET
COMPRESSION ALIGNMENT
RING PINS CONNECTOR
BODY
CLAMP OUTER
(FITS OUTSIDE PLASTIC
FLANGE WHEN
4f.11
JACKET
ASSEMBLED)
SEALING
WASHER
Figure 5f - Elliptical Waveguide Assembly

ENTRANCE
CD-3782
HOLE
FLANGE
HALVES
INNER
COPPER
RUBBER
BOOT
DECK FEED-THRU
(PART No 45-748-817)
May 01
Chap 4f
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 4f
Elliptical Waveguide Assembly Techniques
Tools and Materials Required for Assembly grease to the outside surface of the gasket (refer to Figure
3). Clean any silicone grease from the exposed copper
Knife, Metal snips, Teflon tape, Bottle brush, Small flat file, using solvent.
Hacksaw (fine blade), Rule (150 mm), Mallet (plastic or
nylon head), Wrenches (two needed: adjustable 3/4" to 2" & FLARE RING
1 15/16"), Solvent, Comothene, Vythene or other non-
flammable cleaning fluid.
Step 1) Prepare waveguide (as shown in Figure 1). The

end of the waveguide must be square. Use a straight edged SILICONE
GREASE
piece of paper wrapped around the waveguide whilst
cutting to stop copper chips from entering. Remove all
burrs from the cut end of the waveguide using a knife and
file. Clean exposed copper with solvent. Clean inside of the GASKET FIGURE 3
waveguide with a bottle brush.
SILICONE
APPROX. 150
GREASE Step 5) Slip recessed side of flare ring over the gasket.
LARGE "O" RING
Alignment pin holes in the flare ring and compression ring
must be in line. The flare ring must be pushed against the
compression ring as tight as possible (refer to Figures 3 & 4.
Approximate opening between the flare ring and the
compression ring should be as shown).
Step 6) Use metal snips to make cuts into the end of the
waveguide at 3 mm intervals to form tabs (see Figure 4).
CLAMPING NUT
24
Make the cuts as close as possible to the flare ring.
FIGURE 1
FLARE RING 2 mm
Step 2) Add a thin coating of silicone grease to the large "O"

ring gasket and place it into the groove inside the clamping
nut, then to the smooth inside surface of the clamping nut
which slides over the smaller "O" ring (Step 8). Place the nut
over the end of the waveguide approximately 150 mm from
the end as shown. Secure the nut to the waveguide with 3 mm
several turns of tape, covering the end of the nut to stop
foreign matter from entering during the assembly operation. FIGURE 4
Step 3) Slip the compression ring over the waveguide until

the recessed edge butts up against the jacket. Apply a Step 7) Flatten tabs against the flare ring using a mallet (as
small amount of silicone grease to the edge of the jacket to shown in Figure 5). Use only enough force to flatten the tabs
aid in installing the compression ring. Alignment pin hole and do not strike so hard as to reduce the thickness of
openings must face away from the waveguide (as shown in the metal. Trim any tab that protrudes past the outside of
Figures 2 & 3). the groove in the flare ring. After the tabs are flattened and
trimmed, tabs should be cleaned with solvent to remove any
COMPRESSION SILICONE silicone grease. The face of the connector body which
GREASE
RING makes contact with the tabs should also be cleaned
thoroughly so that no grease is present in the mating of the
RF contact surfaces. Clean inside of the waveguide with a
bottle brush.
ALIGNMENT
PIN HOLE
FIGURE 2
Step 4) Turn the gasket inside out and place over end of the
waveguide. Apply very thin coating of silicone grease to the
gasket threads, then flip the gasket over and butt up against
the compression ring. Apply a thin coating of silicone FIGURE 5
CD-3783

KH 2020
Chap 4f
Elliptical Waveguide Assembly Techniques (continued)
Step 8) Place smaller "O" ring gasket into groove in Step 10) The waveguide should be checked for leaks
connector body. Do not apply silicone grease to this whenever connectors are attached, when connector
gasket. Apply a thin coating of silicone grease to the attached waveguide is received on site or after
rear outer surface of the compression ring. This will installation. A dependable method is to apply a soap
allow the large "O" ring gasket inside the clamping nut to solution to cable connectors and pneumatic fixings and
slide over the compression ring. checking for bubbles. When mating two UG type
flanges with gasket grooves, two flange gaskets must be
Step 9) (Refer to Figure 6). Place connector body used. If a flange with a gasket groove is mated to a
against flare ring. The alignment pins must be properly flange without a groove, use only one gasket. Mating
seated in the alignment holes of the flare ring and the two EIA type flanges, use only one flange gasket. Do
compression ring. Untape the clamping nut and slide it not apply silicone grease to flange gaskets.
over the assembled parts and screw it onto the
connector body. Tighten the connection with wrenches. Caution!
Use the adjustable wrench on the flattened portion of the When pressure fitting is connected to gas port on
connector body to hold it in position whilst the clamping waveguide connector, avoid excessive tightening.
nut is tightened. Only turn the clamping nut; do not Apply 1 1/2 turns of Teflon tape to threads and tighten
turn the connector body. fitting to only 2 1/2 foot-pounds (0.35 kg-m), which is
CONNECTOR GAS PORT SILICONE LARGE "O"

BODY GREASE RING
SMALLER "O" ALIGNMENT CLAMPING

RING PIN NUT
CD-3784 FIGURE 6

KH 2020
Chap 4f
DECK FEED -THRU (PART No. 45-748-817)
CLAMP
(FITS OUTSIDE
FLANGE WHEN
BOLT HOLE CIRCLE 100 mm

ENTRANCE HOLE 80 mm
ASSEMBLED)
SEALING
WASHER
O
45
8 HOLES Ø 8mm (5/16")
FLANGE
HALVES
RUBBER
BOOT
Description Step 4) Remove the rubber boot. Drill an 8 mm (5/16")

The deck feed through kit is designed to permit a clearance hole through the deck at the locations which
weatherproof path through a deck for an elliptical you have marked.
waveguide. The kit can be mounted to metal or wood
roofs and walls. It consists of a rubber boot, two metal Step 5) Replace the rubber boot around the waveguide
flange halves, washers and an adjustable clamp. or cable and insert it into the entrance hole.
Step 1) Cut an 80 mm entrance hole in the deck for the Step 6) Position the flange halves in the groove and
rubber boot. align the holes with those in the rubber boot. Add the
mounting fixings. Use 1/4" bolts, flat washers, lock
Step 2) Insert the waveguide through the entrance hole washers, and nuts obtained locally. Place a flat washer
and connect it to the components inside. against the inside of the deck and a sealing washer
under the bolt head as shown in the illustration. Tighten
Step 3) Apply silicone grease to the hole and slit of the the fixings.
boot. Place the rubber boot around the waveguide.
Slide the boot into the entrance hole and mark the Step 7) Add the adjustable clamp as shown and tighten
locations of the 8 equally spaced mounting holes. it to ensure a leakproof seal.
CD-3785

KH 2020
Chap 4f

TORQUE
THIN LOCK 15-20 N-m
NUT (11-15 lb-ft)
1 HANGER KIT
2 (85-283-303) RECOMMENDED
1 HANGER SPACING
3
1
1
3
ANGLE
ADAPTOR KIT
3 (85-283-304)
THREADED ROD
SUPPORT KIT 1
(5 PER KIT) TORQUE
1 (45-748-819) 7-14 N-m
(5-10 lb-ft) 2
2
3
1000
1 3
NOTE: THE HANGER CAN ACCOMODATE TWISTING OVER LONG LENGTHS

1
BELOW: FORM HANGER AROUND WAVEGUIDE, SQUEEZE TABS TOGETHER
1 SLIP NUT UNDER OPPOSITE TAB AND TIGHTEN BOLT UNTIL GAP G IS 8mm (5/16")
G G
G

KH 2020
Chap 4f
OPTIONAL MAINS ISOLATOR

(80-261-600)
36 With reference to Figure 6f, secure the Mains Isolator

in the required position (no fittings are supplied).
160 120
205
160
80 30
CABLE
211K
15 mm 1.D 15 mm 1.D
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
CONNECT
SCREENS
TO EARTH

SHIP'S SUPPLY
SINGL PHASE
110V/220V
CD-1157
Figure 6f - Mains Isolator: Installation Dimensions

KH 2020
Chap 4f
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
the type of cable required, e.g. Cable code N is a
38-core cable. Table 4 provides specifications for each
abbreviations.
38 The cables used to connect Kelvin Hughes equipment
are to be to the following specification. Failure to use
the correct specification cables may result in impaired
TABLE 4: Cable Specification
A 2-core small multi-core 1344-718 16/0.2 6.1 mm 7.7 mm
B 3-core small multi-core 1344-719 16/0.2 6.4 mm 7.2 mm
C Not used
D Not used
E 12-core small multi-core 1344-722 16/0.2 10 mm 11 mm
F Not used
G 25-core small multi-core 1344-724 16/0.2 13.6 mm 14 mm
J Not used
K 2-core Power 5344-787 7/0.67 10 mm
L Not used
N 38-core small multi-core 5344-701 17 mm
R 12-core composite 45-762-0041-001 Mixed 15.4 mm
38-Core Custom Built Cable 12 Core Composite

39 The 38-core composite cable (KH code number 40 The 12-core composite cable (KH code number
5344-701) is made for Kelvin Hughes and comprises 45-762-0041-001) is made for Kelvin Hughes and
the following: comprises the following:
(1) 4 cores of 32/0.2 mm copper wire. (1) 4 cores of 32/0/2 mm copper wire
(2) 32 cores of 16/0.2 mm copper wire. (2) 4 cores of 16/0.2 mm copper wire
(3) 2 cores of co-axial cable. (3) 2 cores of 16/0.2 mm twisted and screened.

KH 2020
Chap 4f
TABLE 5: 38-Core Cable Colour Abbreviations
ABBREVIATION COLOUR
ABBREVIATION COLOUR
W/R WHITE/RED
R RED
WHITE CO-AX
B BLUE
SLATE CO-AX
G GREEN
N/C NO CONNECTION
Y YELLOW
W WHITE Small Multi-Core Cables

Bk BLACK 41 These cables conform to DEF STAN 61-12 (part 5).
Bn BROWN collectively screened and clad in a PVC outer sheath.
V VIOLET 42 Core Details
O ORANGE (1) The core details are as follows:
P PINK
Conductors consist of 16 strands of 0.2 mm
diameter tinned copper wire.
T TURQUOISE Nominal cross-section area of conductor
= 0.5 mm2.
S SLATE (grey) Nominal diameter of conductor = 0.93 mm
R/B RED/BLUE
Minimum thickness of insulation = 0.40 mm
R/G RED/GREEN Minimum diameter of core = 1.75 mm
Maximum diameter of core = 1.90 mm
R/Y RED/YELLOW (2) Braided Screen
R/W RED/WHITE The cores are laid-up, covered with binding tape
over which is woven a braiding of 0.2 mm diameter
R/Bk RED/BLACK tinned copper wire.
(3) Outer Sheath
R/Bn RED/BROWN
B/Y BLUE/YELLOW wire braiding.
B/W BLUE/WHITE
B/Bk BLUE/BLACK 2.5 A at 1000 V dc
2.5 A at 440 V ac at 1600Hz.
B/O BLUE/ORANGE
G/Y GREEN/YELLOW Power Cables

G/W GREEN/WHITE 43 These cables are used for services requiring a
moderate current carrying capacity, i.e. main supplies.
G/Bk GREEN/BLACK
2-Core (Power):
G/O GREEN/ORANGE
G/S GREEN/SLATE
250/440V grade:
Bn/Bk BROWN/BLACK 7 x 0.67 mm (7 x 0.026") cores
Bn/Y BROWN/YELLOW cross linked polythene insulation,
Bn/W BROWN/WHITE tinned copper wire, 79% coverage
S/B SLATE/BLUE
Outer diameter:10 mm (0.39 in.).
S/Bn SLATE/BROWN
V/Bk VIOLET/BLACK 3-Core (Power):

Cable Code L: KH Reference No. 5344-787
V/Y VIOLET/YELLOW
(250/440 V grade):
V/W VIOLET/WHITE Specification as for 2-core cable.
Outer Diameter: 10 mm (0.44")

KH 2020
Chap 4f
GENERAL PCB LOCATIONS AND CABLEFORM

ROUTING
44 Before starting electrical connection observe the
following: 55 Location of PCBs and cableform routing in the turning
mechanism are shown on Figure 7f. To fit the cable
proceed as follows:
WARNING
(1) Remove gland nut, plastic washer and seal and
discard washer.
ENSURE THAT ALL POWER SUPPLIES ARE
ISOLATED BEFORE ANY ELECTRICAL (2) Thread cable through back of gland housing for
CONNECTION TAKES PLACE. approx. 300 mm.
(3) Remove cable outer covering (exposing braid)
back as far as 15 mm from the gland housing.
45 Isolate power supplies as follows: (4) Fold braid double to 80mm from gland housing
(1) Ensure that the associated display is turned off. (remove excess).
(2) Remove fuses from mains isolators. (5) Place seal over cable and onto outer covering at
the gland housing.
(3) On the Turning Mechanism, set the ON/OFF
switch to OFF. (6) Insert the two screening ferrules between seal
and screen at gland as shown.
securely earthed to the platform with braided copper (7) Place plastic washer and gland nut over cable and
wire. screw assembly into gland housing and secure
screening and cable with ‘P’ clip, unwrap paper
47 The casing of the downmast transceiver must be insulation back to screening and discard.
copper wire. (8) Route cable strands to TB1, TB2 (CAE-A30-5
only) and SKA. Note that the Tx Monitor Arm cable
48 Allow sufficient length on all cables to allow for routing is also connected to SKA. Refer to Figures 12f
through the transceiver. Make sure that there is and 13f for wiring details.
downmast transceiver are shown on Figure 8f.
shown on Figure 7f.
COVER REMOVAL
51 Before any electrical connections can be made,
covers have to be removed from the following
equipment:
(1) Downmast Transceiver and Turning Mechanism.
(2) Optional Mains Isolator.
Turning Mechanism
52 Remove the four captive screws securing the rear
cover to the Upmast Transceiver and remove the
cover.
Downmast Transceiver
53 Release the six captive screws securing the cover to

screw.

KH 2020
Chap 4f
Seal
38 Core
Cable Plastic
Washer
Tx Mon
Arm
Cable
TB1
Secure cable
to 'P' clip 8
1 1
TB2 Casting
Gland
Outer Rubber
Cover Seal
Ferrule
Braid
VIEW SHOWING CABLE ENTRY AND FIXING
Azimuth/Heading
Line PCB
Tx Monitor Arm
SKA
TB1 TB2
Cables routed to TB1,
Safety Switch TB2 (CAE-A30-5 only)
Before any maintenance is carried out on and SKA. Secure with
the transceiver, isolate mains supply 'P' clips
via external safety switch.
VIEW SHOWING CABLE RUNS AND TERMINATIONS
Azimuth/Heading
Line PCB
CAE-A106-2
Connect 12 or 25
core cable and PLA
2 core cable
to SKA
Cable run to
PLA from gland
TB1
TB2
(CAE-A30-5
only)
Cable Glands
CD-3931 REAR VIEW WITH COVER REMOVED, SHOWING LOCATIONS OF TB1, TB2 AND SKA
Figure 7f - Turning Mechanism: PCB Location and Cableform Routing

KH 2020
Chap 4f
TX MICROCONTROLLER PCB MODULATOR ON BACK

OF ELECTRONICS ASSEMBLY
PLE PLC PLD
8
SKW
PLV
PLP
PLA
1TB1
PLE PLG
1
PLX
PLK
PLB
PLH N L
LOAD
PLN
EMC
PLT PLS PLM FILTER
PLD PLC LINE
PLB
PLA PLE PLC PLD
CO-AXES FROM 38 CORE
(NUCLEUS 2) OR
12 CORE (NUCLEUS 3)
(OR DIRECT IF RS232 USED)
RS232 2 CORE
(OPTION) POWER CABLE
PRE-PULSE 12/25 CORE TO
(OPTION) TURNING MECHANISM
38 CORE CABLE
12 CORE CABLE (CAN BUS)
FROM NUCLEUS 2 OR 3 DISPLAY
FROM NUCLEUS 3 DISPLAY
NOTE: IF 38 CORE CONTROL CABLE FROM NUCLEUS 2 OR 3 OR 12 CORE CABLE FROM NUCLEUS 3
USED VIDEO AND SYNC FORM PART OF THE CABLE.
IF RS232 CONTROL CABLE USED, VIDEO AND SYNC ARE SEPARATE CABLES
ONLY ONE OF 38 CORE, 12-CORE (CAN BUS) OR RS232 CABLES USED
A
A
PRE-PULSE VID 2 VID 1
A
B
EXT-SYNC SYNC 2 SYNC 1
VIEW SHOWING
CD-3932 COAXIAL CONNECTORS
Figure 8f - Downmast Transceiver: PCB Location and Cableform Routing

KH 2020
Chap 4f

57 Electrical connections for downmast transceiver
systems are detailed on the following wiring diagrams: 58 The upmast turning mechanism must be checked for
security and freedom to rotate. The downmast
(1) Figure 9f - Connections between the downmast transceiver must be checked for security, accessibility, and
Transceiver CTX-A8 and the upmast Turning cabling ‘runs’.
Mechanism CAE-A30-6 (Low Speed Antenna),
including the cable arrangement at the Turning 59 Ensure that all cables are secured to their associated
Mechanism. entry point and that screened cables are earthed to
(2) Figure 10f - Connections between the downmast
Transceiver CTX-A8 and the upmast Turning 60 All cable entries must be checked for signs of fretting,
Mechanism CAE-A30-5 (High Speed Antenna), chafing or damage, and subsequently sealed with a
including the cable arrangement at the Turning mastic compound.
Mechanism.
(3) Figures 11f and 12f - Connections for Nucleus 3
systems using 38-core composite cable as
follows:
(a) C o n n e ct i o n s b e t we e n t h e CT X - A 8
Transceiver and the standard Nucleus 2 or 3
Display.
the Dual Interswitch Unit.
(4) Figures 13f and 14f - Connections for Nucleus 3
systems using 12-core composite cable and the
CANbus interface as follows:
(a) C o n n e ct i o n s b e t we e n t h e CT X - A 8
Transceiver and the standard Nucleus 3
Display.
the Radar Interswitch Unit (RIU).
NOTE:
RS232 serial control can be used for changing the program
of the Tx Microcontroller PCB. It does not control the
transceiver.

KH 2020
Chap 4f
Mk VII TRANSMITTER TURNING MECHANISM

CTX-A8 CAE-A30-6
1TB1 1TB1
T OR Lt/G 2
5
S
6
MOTOR 0V
7
8
O 1
1
P
2
MOTOR +ve 26V
3
4
3SKK
5
3SKM
Bk
+27V 6 9SKA
R
NEON SIGNAL 1 5
B
NEON RETURN 2 6
G
AZIMUTH 3 2
Y
HEADING LINE 4 3
W
0V 5 4
R
Tx MONITOR 7 Tx MON 0V
B
ARM 8 Tx MON SIG
12 CORE
SMALL
CABLE
(CABLE E)

2 CORE
FROM Tx MON.
12 CORE CABLE
12 CORE
FROM TX/RX
ENSURE SCREENS RB
ARE CLAMPED
Bk 5 +27V
8 NEON
V 4 MOTOR START (RTN)
7 NEON (0V)
Bn 3 MOTOR START (+27V)
B 6 NEON RETURN
S 2 MOTOR 0V
R 5 NEON SIGNAL T or LtG
O 1 MOTOR +VE (+26V)
W 4 0V P
Y 1TB1
3 HEADING LINE
G 2 AZIMUTH
1
9SKA
CABLE CONNECTIONS AT TURNING MECHANISM

CD-3942
Figure 9f - Transceiver (CTX-A8) to Low Speed Antenna (CAE-A30-6) Connections

KH 2020
Chap 4f
Mk VII TRANSMITTER TURNING MECHANISM

CTX-A8 CAE-A30-5
1TB1 1TB2
T OR Lt/G
5 5
B/Bk
S
6 6
B/O
MOTOR 0V
B/Y
7 7
G/Y
B/W
8 8
G/W
O
1 1
R/W
P
2 2
R/Bk
MOTOR +ve 36V R/B
3 3
R/Bn
R/Y
4 4
R/G
3SKK 1TB1
3
3SKM
Bk
+27V 6 9SKA
R
NEON SIGNAL 1 5
B
NEON RETURN 2 6
G
AZIMUTH 3 2
Y
HEADING LINE 4 3
W
0V 5 4
R
25 CORE ARM 8 Tx MON SIG
COMPOSITE
CABLE
(CABLE E)

2 CORE
FROM Tx MON.
25 CORE CABLE
25 CORE
FROM TX/RX
ENSURE SCREENS RB
ARE CLAMPED
TB2
O 1
R/W
P 2 8 NEON
R/Bk
V 6 MOTOR START (RTN)
R/B 3 7 NEON (0V)
R/Bn
Bn 5 MOTOR START (+27V)
R/Y 4 B 6 NEON RETURN
R/G
4
T or LtG 5 R 5 NEON SIGNAL
B/Bk Bk 3 +27V
S 6 W 4 0V
B/O
B/Y 7 Y 1TB1
3 HEADING LINE
G/Y
B/W 8 G 2 AZIMUTH
G/W
1
9SKA
CABLE CONNECTIONS AT TURNING MECHANISM

CD-3938
Figure 10f - Transceiver (CTX-A8) to High Speed Antenna (CAE-A30-5) Connections

KH 2020
Chap 4f
NUCLEUS 3
DISPLAY Mk VII TRANSMITTER
CTX-A8
INPUT PCB 38 - CORE
CABLE
(CABLE N)
PLV 3PLB
1 S
TX RUN 6
2 Bn 7
TX MUTE 3 Y
M PULSE 4
4 W 5
L PULSE 5 B
TUNE 2
6 G 3
TUNE IND P
7 10
TX READY R
8 8
90/180 AZIMUTH
9
10 V 11
RX MONITOR
11 O 9
HEADING LINE
12
13
14 Bk 1
0V
CONTROL PCB
PLW
1
2
3
2PLB
4
T or LtG
MODULATOR +27V 5 1
6
R/B 2
MODULATOR 0V 7
8
9 THESE CABLES
10 ARE SEPARATE POWER UNIT
11 COAXES IF
12 38 CORE CABLE
CONNECTION
NOT USED
VIDEO WHITE COAX 1 VIDEO 1
SYNC 1 SYNC 1
GREY COAX
FILTER
SHIPS
} 2 CORE MAINS } L
MAINS POWER CABLE N
E
3PLV
DIAGNOSTIC
} 1
2
RXD
TXD
PLF PORT 3 GROUND
2
NAVSYS I/P 4
3 CABLE A
INTERFACE RTN
CONTROL PCB
PLU 3PLX
GYRO
} PHASE 1
PHASE 2
PHASE 3
REF 1
1
2
3
4
5
CABLE D
CAN BUS OPTION
} 1
2
3
4
CAN H
CAN L
GROUND
CAN H
REF 2 5 CAN L
6 GROUND
6
LOG
} PULSE
SHORT
7
CABLE A CONTROL PCB
8
0V NOTE: THE INFORMATION ON THIS DIAGRAM
MUST BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH FIGURE 12 FOR THE
COMPLETE INSTALLATION DATA FOR LOW SPEED ANTENNAS
OR IN CONJUNCTION WITH FIGURE 13 FOR THE
POWER UNIT COMPLETE INSTALLATION DATA FOR HIGH SPEED ANTENNAS.
CABLE K
(TB1) 110/220V
CD-3914
Figure 11f - Typical Nucleus 3 System Interconnection

KH 2020
Chap 4f
NUCLEUS 3
(HRC-A9) Mk VII TRANSMITTER
38 - CORE 38 - CORE
INPUT PCB CABLE
(CABLE N)
CABLE
(CABLE N)
CTX-A8
PLV PLDA/B-2 PLTA/B - 2 3PLB

1 S S
TX RUN 2 1 1 6
R/G Bn
TX MUTE 3
2 2 7
B/Y Y
M PULSE 4
3 3 4
B/W W
L PULSE 5
4 4 5
R/Y 5 5 B
TUNE 6 R/W G
2
TUNE IND 6 6 3
7 T OR Lt/G 7 7 P
TX READY 8 G/O T 10
90/180 AZIMUTH 8 8 8
9 9 9
10 B/Bk 10 10 V
RX MONITOR 11 G/W O 11
11 11
HEADING LINE 12 12 12
9
13 13 13
14 R/B 14 14 Bk
0V 1

1 G & W/V (2 WIRES) 1 1
2 Bn & S/Bn (2 WIRES) 2 2
3 Y & B/O (2 WIRES) 3 3
4 4
5 R & R/Bn (2 WIRES) 5 5 T or LtG 1
MODULATOR +27V 6 O 6 6 R/B
7 B 7 7 2
8 8 8
9 R/Bk 9 9
10 Bn/Bk 10 10
11 11
POWER UNIT
11 W
12 Bk 12 12
PLT PLDA/B-3
SELECT DATA
1 G/Bk 6
2 W/Bn
RADAR SOURCE 4
3 Y/Bn
TX CONTROL 5
4 S/B
STATUS 1 7
5 S/G
STATUS 2 8
6 G/B
0V 9
VIDEO SK8(10)
WHITE COAX
SYNC SK2(5)
GREY COAX
SK7(9) 1 VIDEO 1
WHITE COAX
PLU
GYRO
} PHASE 1
PHASE 2
PHASE 3
1
2
3
4
CABLE D
SK1(4)
GREY COAX
1 SYNC 1
REF 1 5
REF 2 TB1-A/B TB2-A/B
6 L N L N
LOG
} PULSE
SHORT
7
CABLE A FILTER
8
0V
2 CORE MAINS
} L
PLF POWER CABLE N
1 E
NAVSYS I/P
RTN 2 CABLE A
INTERFACE
POWER UNIT
CABLE K NOTE: THE INFORMATION ON THIS DIAGRAM
SHIP'S MAINS FILTER INPUT 110/220V O/P CABLE K MUST BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH FIGURE 12 FOR THE
110/220V (TB1) (TB2) COMPLETE INSTALLATION DATA FOR LOW SPEED ANTENNAS
FOR A MK4 OR MK6
SECOND TRANSCEIVER
COMPLETE INSTALLATION DATA FOR HIGH SPEED ANTENNAS.
CD-3915 ONLY
Figure 12f - Nucleus 3 Interswitched (via DIU) System Connection

KH 2020
Chap 4f
COMPOSITE
12-CORE
NUCLEUS 3 (CABLE R)
5000, 6000, 7000 Mk VII TRANSMITTER
INPUT PCB CTX-A8

SKP
WHITE COAX
VIDEO VIDEO 1
SKO
GREY COAX
SYNC SYNC 1
NOTE 1 CONTROL PCB

PLC 3PLX
BLACK
CAN HI 1 1 CAN HI
WHITE
CAN LO 2 2 CAN LO
BLUE
GND 3 3 GND
ORANGE
HEADING LINE 4
RED
6
YELLOW 3PLB
+27V 7
8 GREEN HEADING LINE
GND 9
8 AZIMUTH
POWER UNIT
2PLB
1
ON/OFF
2

FILTER
2 CORE L
MAINS INPUT N
E
NOTE: THE INFORMATION ON THIS DIAGRAM

COMPLETE INSTALLATION DATA FOR HIGH SPEED ANTENNAS. CD-4557
Figure 13f - Typical Nucleus 3 CANbus System Interconnection

May 01
Chap 4f
KH 2020
COMPOSITE COMPOSITE
12-CORE 12-CORE
CABLE (CABLE R)
NUCLEUS 3 (CABLE R)
5000, 6000, 7000 RIU Mk VII TRANSMITTER
NNR-A55
INPUT PCB CTX-A8
SKP
SKO
CONTROL PCB
NOTE 1 NOTE 1
PLC PLA-F PLL-0 3PLX
BLACK 1 1
CAN HI 1 1 CAN HI
WHITE 2 2
CAN LO 2 2 CAN LO
BLUE 3 3
GND 3 3 GND
ORANGE 4 4
HEADING LINE 4
RED 5 5 CONTROL PCB
AZIMUTH 5
6 6
4f.28
6
YELLOW 7 7 3PLB
+27V 7
GREEN 8 8
8 AZIMUTH
POWER UNIT
2PLB
1
ON/OFF
2
NOTE: THE INFORMATION ON THIS DIAGRAM
NOTE 1: SCREEN OF TWISTED PAIR TO BE FILTER
CONNECTED TO PIN 3 AT ONE END ONLY OR IN CONJUNCTION WITH FIGURE 13 FOR THE
COMPLETE INSTALLATION DATA FOR HIGH SPEED ANTENNAS. 2 CORE L
MAINS INPUT N
E
Figure 14f - Nucleus 3 Interswitched (via RIU) CANbus System Connection

CD-4558
Original
KH 2020
Chap 4f
LONG CABLE RUNS
INTRODUCTION
61 Where the distance between the transceiver and the
display is greater than 65 metres up to a maximum of
180 metres, low loss co-axial cables must be used as
specified below.
Co-axial Cable 75 ohms low loss (for extended cable

runs)
Coaxial Cable: CODE number 5344-719
Specification: TBD
Inner conductor: 1.25 mm Single Conductor
Dielectric: Air spaced Polyethylene
Screen: Tape Screen
Overall Dia: 8.3 mm
Electrical
Attenuation: 60 MHz 3.4 dB/100m MAX

100 MHz 4.9 dB/100m MAX
Impedance: 75 Ohm

KH 2020
Chap 4f

KH 2020
Chap 4f

ROTATING JOINT.
COMPOUND.


CD-4713
Figure 3f - Assembling Antenna to Turning Mechanism
Original 4f.7/8 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 5
CHAPTER 5
DISPLAY COMMISSIONING
INTRODUCTION (3) From the Standby screen select the GO TO

MENUS function, the Standby screen is
replaced with the following menus:
Prior to switching-on the display, read the Caution
and Warning Notices contained in TO CHANGE THE
INSTALLATION PARAMETERS Paragraphs. INSTALLATION PARAMETERS
3 To change the Installation parameters:
(1) Select the GO TO INSTALL function, the
1 The Installation Set-up parameters are subject to Installation Menu appears as shown below :
equipment type and configuration. Commissioning is
carried out by the Installation Engineer. This Section
contains the information required to change the Installation
& Default Parameters plus any adjustments that may be
necessary.
TO CHANGE THE INSTALLATION

PARAMETERS
CAUTION
DISPLAY PERFORMANCE may be impaired if
alterations to the INSTALLATION MENU are
carried out by UNTRAINED PERSONNEL.
WARNING
IF THE DISPLAY IS SWITCHED OFF, ENSURE
THAT NO PERSONNEL ARE IN THE VICINITY OF CD-4786
TH E A ERIAL WHEN SWITCH I N G T H E
EQUIPMENT ON.
4 This shows the system set up with a single transmitter
2 Implement the following: and single display.
(1) If the Display is switched OFF, check that the NOTE
mains supply at the Power Source is switched To change the installation settings, Switch SW1 on the
on. System PCB is to be made. Failure to do this before
(2) Set the display Power ON/OFF switch to ON. attempting to alter the installation settings results in the
following Warning Message being displayed:
The screen shows the following menu options INSTALLATION LOCKED ACCESS DENIED
within a few seconds:
WARNING
T H E D I SPL A Y A N D PR O C ESSOR UNI T
CONTAIN HIGH VOLTAGES, CARE MUST BE
TAKEN WHEN MAKING SW1.
CD-4784
5
Switch SW1 is a toggle switch, located on the left-hand
NOTE: side of the System PCB. This switch locks/unlocks the
For ARPA displays ‘GO TO TEST’ is replaced with ‘GO Installation settings for the system.
TO SIM’.
Original 5.1 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 5
6 To change the Transmitter Type: 9 To change the display from Master to Slave or Other:
(1) Position the cursor, using the trackerball, in the (1) Position the cursor, using the trackerball, in the
appropriate TRANSMITTER box, the box is now DISPLAY box.
highlighted. (2) Select the display required, as shown in the
(2) The pop-down boxes display the transmitter pop-down boxes; Slave, Master or Other.
labels available, i.e. X, S or Uninstalled. 10 If an installation has a Transmission Performance
Monitor it will be indicated by the legend PM in the top
left hand corner of the radar display. To select/deselect the
Performance Monitor legend:
(1) Position the cursor over the PM box and press
CD-4788 any of the control buttons.
NOTE:
Other Selection
If the display is connected to a mechanical interswitch press
the right-hand pushbutton, this removes all Tx labels from 11 If Other is selected the following menu appears:
the display.
(3) Press the appropriate pushbutton to select the

label required.
NOTE:
The label selection thus displays TX A (B) X or S in the TX CD-4789
box in the top left-hand corner of the display.
7 The Skew facility is available to adjust any 12 If SINGLE Tx is selected, the menu changes to that
misalignment of the picture, due to the difference shown in Paragraph 3 (1).
between the Heading Line and the Ship’s centre, implement 13 If DUAL I/SWITCH UNIT is selected the above menu
the following: is replaced with the following menu:
(1) Position the cursor, using the trackerball, in the
SKEW box.
(2) Press and hold down any pushbutton and rotate
the trackerball in the North/South axis until the
correct picture alignment is obtained.
NOTE:
The skew can be set at +180/-179 degrees, to allow the
gearbox to be mounted at any angle. The heading-line is
corrected within the software.
CD-4790
8 To Mute the transmitter, between selected angles:
MUTE box. The pop-down boxes read; ON, ON, (1)
No Sec (Sec). Select A or B display by placing the cursor,
using the trackerball, on letter A(B) and then
NOTE: pressing any pushbutton.
Sec (S) does not allow selection of the MUTE facility when
in RUN mode. No Sec allows MUTE to be switched NOTE:
ON/OFF while in RUN mode. Other display is to be installed with the other letter B(A) on
(2) Press the left-hand or centre pushbutton to its installation.
enable the MUTE facility. The pop-down boxes
read; Start/Stop/OFF.
(3) Press the left-hand pushbutton and rotate the
trackerball until desired start angle of mute is
reached, press the centre pushbutton to set the
end of mute angle and then position the cursor
in EXIT box and press any pushbutton.
(4) To switch off the Mute facility, press the
right-hand pushbutton.
May 01 5.2 Original

KH 2020
Chap 5
14 When A or B display is selected the previous menu is 18 Select VIEW to display the RIU Transmitter Installation
replaced with the following menu: Information screen, as shown below.
CD-4791
CD-4793
19 This screen shows the configuration of Transmitters

15 Set up for both Tx A and B as for a single Transmitter used with the RIU.
installation, refer to Paragraph 4.
NOTE:
NOTE: Up to 6 transmitters and 6 displays can be connected via an
If the Dual Interswitch box is selected and any pushbutton RIU. Transmitters not installed are labelled as NOT INST
pressed, then the menu reverts to that shown in Paragraph and are identified by a red border.
11.
20 If MASTER/SLAVE INTERFACE is selected then
16 If RADAR I/SWITCH UNIT is selected, the above menus are the similar to those for the Dual Interswitch,
menu is replaced with the following RIU Installation as shown below:
screen:
CD-4794
CD-4792
(1) A pop-down box appears when the cursor is
placed in MASTER SLAVE box of (A) or (B)
17 Highlight the RIU TRANSMITTER INFORMATION display, allowing selection of
box and a pop-down box appears as follows: SLAVE/MASTER/OTHER.
View View Other
CD-4658
Original 5.3 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 5
21 Highlighting the required Transmitter causes a pop-up 27 To Select the Interface Type:
box to appear indicating the selection options
available. The transmitter can be configured for X band, S 28 Position the cursor, using the trackerball, in the
band or as Uninstalled. INTERFACE box, he box is now highlighted and the
pop-down boxes contain the options: CAN I/FACE and
PARALLEL I/FACE.
29 The Parallel Interface option is selected for Standard
Speed.
CD-4795
30 Transceiver Interfaces (Not CAN bus).
CAN bus interface is selected for transceivers using
10-core plus 2-core coaxial cable either directly or via a
22 Select each transmitter in turn and configure as Transmitter Interface Unit (TIU). CAN bus should be
required to reflect the system configuration. selected for multiple display/transceiver installations using a
Radar Interswitch Unit (RIU)
23 For each installed transmitter the SKEW and MUTE
facilities can be set and the associated display can be 31 To amend the Log Type:
selected as Fitted or None, as shown below. (1) Position the cursor, using the trackerball, in the
LOG TYPE box, the box is now highlighted.
(2) Choose the primary log source, either Pulse or
VHW (or choose VTG for systems with No
Approval).
CD-4796
CD-4798
(3) Pop-down boxes contain the following; 100, 200,

Slave/Master Selection 400ppm appear when PULSE is selected.
24 If SLAVE is selected then the screen labels all read (4) Press the appropriate pushbutton as required.
SLAVE and the following facilities are not available: 32 To select the Gyro Type:
(1) No ‘Tx Status’ in Standby. (1) Position the cursor, using the trackerball, in the
(2) No PULSE LENGTH Selection. GYRO TYPE box, the box is now highlighted.
(3) No MONITOR. (2) Pop-down boxes contain the following;
NORMAL, SERIAL HDT and EXTERNAL.
(4) No TUNE
25 If MASTER is selected then the screen labels read
MASTER and all facilities are available.
26 To select the Type Approval Authority:
APPROVAL box, the box is now highlighted and CD-4799
the pop-down boxes contain the options; (3) Press the appropriate pushbutton as required.
EU (European Union) or NO (No Type
Approval). NOTE:
When EXTERNAL is selected, the Gyro is connected to a
Low Ratio input from the Synchro Compass PCB.
When SERIAL HDT is selected, the Gyro is able to receive
serial HDT messages directly.
33 To amend the Gyro Ratio (when the NORMAL GYRO
type is selected), carry out the following:
CD-4797
Ratio box, the box is now highlighted.
(2) Pop-down boxes contain the following; 90, 180,
(2) Press the appropriate pushbutton for the
360.
Authority required.
NOTE
EU Approval does not allow the use of a VDG log source.
CD-4800
(3) Press the appropriate pushbutton as required.
May 01 5.4 Original

KH 2020
Chap 5
34 The system contains a Gyro Failure Warning which GO TO TEST
can be enabled (when at sea)/disabled (when land
based) as follows: 41 Select GO TO TEST and a menu appears down the
right-hand side of the display screen and is used to set
(1) When the Gyro Failure Warning facility is 'OFF', various levels as shown below:
gyro failure does not cause an alarm , To switch
the facility OFF; position the cursor in the SEA NOTE:
MODE box and press any pushbutton, the mode SW1 must be set to ON, before making any changes
changes to LAND MODE.
(2) When the Gyro Failure Warning facility is 'ON', NOT USED
gyro failure causes an alarm and after 60 (When used - set to follow
seconds later the display is forced into Head Up, fastest rate of turn of GYRO)
Relative Motion mode. To switch ON the facility;

position the cursor in the LAND MODE box and
press any pushbutton, the mode changes to Sets the volume and Low
SEA MODE. and High Tones
NOTE:
At run, when the Gyro failure warning is enabled and the
system does not detect a gyro input, after 60 seconds the
display defaults to Head Up, Relative Motion and displays
a ‘GYRO FAILURE’ warning in the Red Warning box.
Once the correct Gyro operation is restored a Red Warning
box displays ‘RESET GYRO’, across the Gyro box. This is
removed once the Gyro is reset.
Warning Level Trips
35 The system contains a Log Filter, which provides

hardware filtering of spurious log pulses. The Log
Filter can either be set to OFF or to Stage 1 or Stage 2
filtering.
Set for maximum noise without
36 The system contains an Azimuth Filter, which flooding the picture
(LP and GAIN to 8, COR 0).
provides hardware filtering of Azimuth pulses.
Switching the filter 'ON' provides filtering for 90 and 180 Set for straightness of line,
azimuth pulses. Switching the facility to 'OFF' for a 4096 i.e. Nearby quay or bank.
azimuth pulse input (i.e. Simulator).
Set to optimise sea clutter control.
37 On completion of the Installation Set-up select EXIT,
this returns the screen to the MENU functions.
Set for tune bar length to be
60-70% of maximum when on tune.
NOTE:
Sets the exact position of the
The Installation Menu can not be exited until SW1 is set to Mute Sector, allows adjustment
OFF. by 10 deg. in each direction.
TEST CARDS 1 & 2

Set to correct alignment of Radar
38 Used to check screen linearity and colour alignment. and Graphics
Primarily used for a ‘Service Aid’. CD-4801
CHECKING THE DISPLAY OPERATION (1) To adjust a level, highlight the required box.
39 To check the operation of the display, select GO TO Press and hold down the left-hand pushbutton
TEST and ensure that a Radar picture is displayed and move trackerball until level is reached.
within the Radar Bearing Scale area. (2) To return to the previously set level press the
40 Implement a full operational check using the controls right-hand pushbutton.
as described in Chapter 1. If any faults are detected, (3) To save the new settings, set switch SW1 to the
refer to Chapter 6 for Fault Diagnosis. OFF position and return to the Standby Screen.
NOTE:
The Mute Sector Skew facility applies only to the
Transmitter displayed in the GO TO TEST menu (i.e. the
transmitter currently selected in Standby mode). Where the
system comprises multi-transmitters and Mute Sector is
active, the Mute Sector Skew is to be applied to each
selected Transmitter individually.
Original 5.5 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 5
ADJUSTMENT OF MAIN BANG SUPPRESSION Cursor Parking

(MBS)
48 This facility is provided for operator convenience. If
42 RV1 located on the System PCB (NNR-A911) is used Cursor Parking High is selected, the cursor will park
to adjust MBS. RVI should be set to minimum (when outside the radar circle) in zone 2; if Cursor Parking
suppression and only increased when necessary to remove Low is selected the cursor will park in zone 6.
short range noise rings. 49 Parking the cursor High gives quick access to the
NOTE: range change facility; parking the cursor Low gives
quick access to the menus.
Setting MSB too high can result in loss of short range
targets and should be avoided. 50 To change the high/low setting, position the cursor in
the CURSOR PARKING box and press any of the
DEFAULT SETTINGS three control buttons.
43 To view/change the Default settings: Watch Monitor Timeout

(1) Position the cursor in the GO TO MENUS box 51 The Watch Monitor configuration setup is shown at the
and press any pushbutton. Position the cursor in lower end of the menu display (IF FITTED). The time
the GO TO DEFAULT box and press any period for the system alarm to inform the Operator that the
pushbutton IBS has not been used, can be altered as follows:
(2) The display shows: (1) Press and hold down any pushbutton while the
cursor is over the Watch Monitor configuration
box. When moving the trackerball the time
period either increases or decreases depending
on the direction the trackerball is moved in. To
select a time, release the pushbutton.
(2) The time period can be specified between 1 and
99 minutes, or the Watch Monitor can be turned
OFF.
NOTE:
If a KH System is not fitted, the Watch Monitor can only be
set to either ON or OFF.
(3) To exit from the menu, place the cursor over the
EXIT box and press any pushbutton.
Saving the Settings

CD-4802 52 To save the new settings, position the cursor in the
SAVE CURRENT SETTINGS box and press any
pushbutton. The box outline momentarily highlights in red to
Map Positioning/Waypoint Positioning show the operator that the settings are saved, as shown
below.
44 The option exists to select either Great Circle
(normally selected) or Rhumb Line. Switch SW12
does not have to be made for selection between Great Circle
and Rhumb Line.
NOTE
(1) To change the Default settings, Switch SW1 on the
System PCB is to be switched ON. Failure to do this results
in a Warning Message being displayed.
(2) The Default menu cannot be exited until switch SW1 is

switched off.
Target Data Output

45 The Target Data Output type is NOT selectable and
will be an NMEA 2.0 Standard Target message (type
RATTM).
CD-4804
53 To revert to the Factory settings (Initial settings)

position the cursor in the USE FACTORY SETTINGS
box and press any pushbutton.
May 01 5.6 Original

KH 2020
Chap 5
Default Comms Settings 58 Serial Port 2 - Output for ECDIS (KH Ltd.)
54 The default comms message settings for Nucleus 3

systems are detailed below. Serial Port 2 - Output for ECDIS
55 Serial Port 1 - Input for Standard GPS Baud Rate: 9600
Messages: OSD
Serial Port 1 - Input for Standard GPS RSD
TTM
Baud Rate: 4800
Messages: GGA Priority 1 Strict
Proprietary: CSR Cursor position message
GLL OFF
HDT OFF
Rnn OFF
RTE Priority 1 Strict
VHW OFF
VBW OFF
VTG Priority 1 Strict
WPL Priority 1 Strict
ZDA Priority 1 Strict
ZZU OFF
56 Serial Port 1 - Output for Standard NMEA
Serial Port 1 - Output for Standard NMEA
Baud Rate: 4800

Messages: OSD
RSD
TTM
57 Serial Port 2 - Input for ECDIS (KH Ltd.)
Serial Port 2 - Input for ECDIS
Baud Rate: 9600

Messages: GGA Priority 2 Strict
GLL OFF
HDT OFF
Rnn OFF
RTE Priority 2 Strict
VHW OFF
VBW OFF
VTG OFF
WPL Priority 2 Strict
ZDA Priority 2 Strict
ZZU OFF
Proprietary: Maps ON
Original 5.7 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 5
CURVED EBL SETUP 66 From the choice in the RADIUS TURN CURVED EBL /
RATE OF TURN CURVED EBL box ensure that the
59 The Curved EBL (EBL 2) is an Electronic Bearing Line legend reads RADIUS TURN CURVED EBL.
that graphically displays the rate of turn or radius of
turn that the vessel will take to effect a new course. The turn
shown will include the ship’s forwarding distance.
60 Before the Curved EBL can function correctly some
turn performance figures must be available to the
autopilot. The setting-up procedure makes provision for two
types of autopilot (1) Radius Turn (2) Rate of Turn.
61 The setting-up screen shows a graph of Forwarding
Distance versus Fractions of the Maximum Speed of
the vessel.
Radius Turn - Setting-up Procedure

62 From the Standby screen position the cursor over the
GO TO MENUS box and press any of the three control
buttons. The following display is seen:
63 Position the cursor in the CURVED SETUP box and
press any of the control buttons.
CD-4808
Maximum Speed Input

67 To input the maximum speed of the vessel:
(1) Position the cursor over the Maximum Speed
box in the lower right of the display.
CD-4805 (2) Press any of the control button and whilst
maintaining pressure on the button rotate the
trackerball until the required speed is set in the
64 The CURVED EBL SETUP SCREEN is displayed, as box.
shown below.
68 Input 4 sample radii, e.g. 0.25, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5nm, as
described below.
Setting the Test Samples

69 To Set the Test Samples:
(1) Position the cursor in the first Test Sample box.
(2) Press any control button; the box outline
highlights in red.
(3) Press any button and whilst maintaining
pressure on the button rotate the trackerball until
the required radius is set in the box.
(4) Repeat for Test Sample boxes 2, 3 & 4.
70 Input the vessel’s forwarding distances, e.g. 20, 40,
70, 110m, at the 4 speeds shown, as described below.
CD-4806
65 Information required for the Curved EBL setup:

(1) Maximum speed of the vessel
(2) Forwarding distances at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, & Full Speed
for 4 sample Rates of Turn.
May 01 5.8 Original

KH 2020
Chap 5
Setting the Forwarding Distance WARNING SET UP SCREEN

71 To set the Forwarding Distance:
(1) Position the cursor in the first of the boxes
(2) Press any of the control buttons and whilst
maintaining pressure on the button rotate the
trackerball until the required distance is set in
the box.
72 The graph that results from the input of the above
information is self scaling. Data is Saved on Exit from
the EBL setup screen.
Rate of Turn Curved EBL

73 To input the parameters for the Rate of Turn Curved
EBL, follow the setting-up procedure as above but
input Rate of Turn data (degrees/minute) instead of Radius
of Turn data (nautical miles radius).
CD-4810
74 Allows the operator to change the alarm type of

messages displayed. The options are as follows:
(1) OFF - do not display this warning (not available
for all warnings).
(2) TIMEOUT - 4 to 6 seconds display of the
warning.
(3) CONFIRM - Operator acknowledgeable warning
remains displayed until acknowledged.
(4) USE DEFAULTS - Sets all to Confirm.
NOTES:
(1) Ensure that switch SW1 on the System PCB is switched
ON before any changes.
(2) Switch SW1 to OFF, on the System PCB, or switch SW1

CD-4809 off, before leaving Menu.
Original 5.9 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 5
SERIAL MESSAGE SET UP SCREEN (2) Type Checking (i.e. Strict, or Relaxed)
This enables the listed NMEA serial messages
75 Allows the operator to adjust the settings for the Four to validated to be fully compliant with the Strict
NMEA Serial Input Message Communications Ports. NMEA standard or alternatively to allow a
Relaxed message checking to compensate for
76 Each of the following input message types can be an external sensor that may not supply a
received on one or more of the 4 serial input comms correctly formatted message; this allows
ports: non-conforming equipment to be interfaced with
the Nucleus display. (Refer to Chapter 8,
ALM, DPT, GGA, GLL, HDT, RNN, RTE, VBW, VHW, VTG, Annex A for details of the NMEA
WPL, ZDA, ZZU. Communications Specification).
NOTES: NOTE:
(1) To adjust the settings for the Serial NMEA Input Relaxed message checking cannot compensate for all
messages, the Installation must first be "unlocked". This is deviations from the NMEA Standard.
achieved by setting switch SW1, on the System PCB, to the
ON position.
(3) Timeout
(2) Switch OFF switch SW1, on the System PCB, ,before This is the time period allowed before the failure
leaving the Menu. (non-appearance) of a message is detected.
Infrequent messages may require a longer
timeout period.
(4) IBS / OS Data

This allows IBS/Ownship's data to be
exchanged with IBS devices or other equipment.
The following messages are provided when the

selected Port is enabled:
External Map input/output.
Cursor Position output.
Radar/Ownship Data output.
Target Data (TTM only) output
Watch Alarm output.
When the Port is disabled, no messages are

transmitted on the selected COM port.
78 The Diagnostic Mode screen can be accessed from

the Comms Setup Menu, by selecting DIAGNOSTIC
MODE. This displays the Diagnostic Mode screen, as
described in paragraph 81.
CD-4812
79 The Baud Rate Setup Screen can be accessed from
the Comms Setup Menu Screen, by selecting
77 The following can be set for each Port: BAUDRATES. This displays the BAUD RATE SETUP
Screen, as described in paragraph 83.
(1) Priority
Each port is assigned a Priority (with 1 being the 80 The settings can be reset to the system Default values,
by selecting DEFAULTS. Refer to paragraph 43, for
highest priority) the priority 1 indicates the information on Default Settings.
preferred message source, with 2, 3 and 4 (if
applicable) indicating the 2nd, 3rd and 4th
choice of message source.

KH 2020
Chap 5
Diagnostic Mode Screen Baud Rates Setup Screen

81 Allows the operator to view all the messages at a 83 Allows the operator to set the transmit and receive
selected COM port, as shown below. baud rates for each of the comms ports.
84 Each port can be set to transmit and receive messages
at a different Baud Rate, to allow for non-NMEA
inputs. The Baud rates can be set within the range 1200 -
38400 baud.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to ensure that the correct baud rate
settings are used, to avoid possible loss of communication
with the external devices connected to the comms ports.
CD-4848
82 Each port can be selected individually. To select the

required port, move the cursor over the MESSAGES
RECEIVED ON COM 1 box and select the required port from
the drop-down COM port selection box.

KH 2020
Chap 5
TABLE 1 - SYSTEM PCB (NNR-A911) - LINKS
Link No. Position Description
1 OPEN Main Processor Link - Shows font table

2 OPEN Main Processor Link - Unused
3 MAKE Main CAN terminator on (M)
4 OPEN Heading Line, Shorting contacts (M), Pulse (O)i
5 OPEN Main Processor Link - Invert HVSync
6 OPEN Main Processor Link - Invert VSync
7 MAKE Processor Clock
8 OPEN Main Processor Link - (M) = Enable diagnostics from I/O processor
9 MAKE ATA CAN terminator on (M)
10 OPEN Main Processor Link - Invert Hsync
11 OPEN Scan Converter free run (M)
12 OPEN I/O Processor Link - enable diagnostics to I/O processor
13 OPEN Display Video Level = 0.7V (O) 1.0V (M)
14 OPEN Spare Input to FPGA
15 OPEN I/O Processor Link - includes CAN messages in diagnostics
16 OPEN I/O Processor Link - Clears removable Flash memory
17 B Diagnostics on Com3 (B), ATA download (A)
18 B LOG Pulse (A), Shorting Contacts (B)
19 B Compass Phase 2+
20 B Compass Phase 2-
23 B Compass Stepper (B) Synchro (A)
24 B Compass Stepper (B) Synchro (A)
27 A Download (A), PS2 input (B)
38 A Hsync O/P (A) Compsync O/P (B)
29 MAKE ATA Diagnostics Link / Made to enable serial 3 input
30 MAKE I/O Processor Link
31 MAKE Download (M), PS2 input (O)
NOTE
Refer to Table 2 for GYRO settings.

KH 2020
Chap 5
PL12 PL2 B8P-SHF-1AA

1 PL10 1
B2P-SHF-1AA 622-5024ES
DS9094F
SK16
TP44
LK10
LK15
LK6
LK5
LK8
LK2
LK1
TP45
LK16 LK30
LK12
350211-1
TP62
PL3
TP25 TP24 TP10
TP38
TP8 TP9 TP7

TP40
M20-9731006
M20-9821006
TP39
PL1
SK6
TP37 TP68
PL5
B 87123-0601
1
A LK27
1
LK7
TP21 A LK17 B T101MH9ABE

22-27-2121
LK31 SW1
PL11
TP22
A LK18 B
TP63 TP64
A LK19 B
LK4 A LK20 B
A LK21 B
22-27-2161
A LK22 B
PL8
A LK26 B
1 A LK25 B
TP26 TP66 TP60 TP61 A LK23 B
TP30 TP36 TP14 TP50 A LK24 B
LK9 LK3 TP41 TP59 TP48
TP13 TP12 TP43
TP27 TP54 TP65 LK14 LK11 LK29
1
SK14 M20-9822006
TP67
TP51
1
TP55
M20-9820606
SK1
TP52
TP32 TP29
622-5024ES
TP31 TP11
TP28
PL4
TP42 TP17 TP16
TP49
TP23
TP34 TP20 TP3
TP35 TP33 TP53 TP56 TP57
TP15
TP58
LK13
PL9
TP69
1
TP4
TP5
M20-9821006
22-27-2161
SK13
TP1
B LK28 A
TP19
1
RV1
SK15 1
HDE15SOLT TP46 PL7 22-27-2141
TP2 TP6 TP47
CD-4605
Figure 1 - System PCB (NNR-A911) : Links, Switch and Potentiometer Locations
TABLE 2 - GYRO LINK SETTINGS

NOTE:
For GYRO Type information, refer to Table 3
COMPASS TYPE/VOLTAGE LINK STATUS LINK STATUS

System PCB (NNR-A911) Input PCB (NNR-A910) - 6000 Series
Input PCB (NNR-A996) - 5000 Series
STEPPER COMPASSES:
+Ve Stepper Set to A; Links 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 Make Links LK1, LK2 & LK3
Set to B; Links 18, 19
-Ve Stepper Set to B; Links 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 Make Links LK1, LK2 & LK3
Synchro Set to A; Links 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19

KH 2020
Chap 5
PLC
PLY
350211-1
PLV
PLX
350211-1
PLW
PLD
SL8-CL-V
1-380999-0
LK3 LK2 LK1
SL14-CL-V
SL12-CL-V
PLT
TP1 PLE SL10-CL-V
TP2
39-26-3080
SL6-CL-V
PLJ
PLG SL14-CL-V
PLH
1
SL4-CL-V
TP3
PLF SL14-CL-V
VIEW ON COMPONENT SIDE

CD-4825
Figure 2 - Input PCB (NNR-A910) : Link Locations
SL14-CL-V PLG
PLH
SL4-CL-V
SL14-CL-V PLF SL12-CL-V PLW
SKO SKP
SL4-CL-V PLB SL10-CL-V PLE SL8-CL-V PLC
L1366 L1366
SL8-CL-V PLU SL6-CL-V PLT SL14-CL-V PLV
TP3
LK2
LK3 PLA
622-5024ES
TP1
LK1 TP2
SL12-CL-V PLX
VIEW ON SOLDER SIDE

CD-4823
Figure 3 - Input/Output PCB (NNR-A996): Link Locations

KH 2020
Chap 5
Table 3 - GYRO TYPES
GYRO NAME TYPE V REF. V PHASE RATIO

SPERRY GYROSYN 24 180:1
BROWN -VE STEPPER 24 24 360:1
SPERRY/TKS Mk.37 -VE STEPPER 35 35 360:1
SPERRY Mk.20 or
+VE STEPPER 70 70 360:1
SPERRY Mk.30 -VE STEPPER 35 35 360:1
SPERRY TKS SR120 or
TKS ES16 +VE STEPPER 70 70 360:1
BROWN INDUCTION -VE STEPPER 50 50 360:1
ARMA BROWN
(STEP BY STEP)
ARMA BROWN Mk.10
SPERRY SR130 -VE STEPPER 35 35 360:1
SPERRY 140
SPERRY/TKS SR140
SPERRY 227
SPERRY/TKS TG100
TKS GLT 202
TKS ES15
PLATH: -VE STEPPER 24 24 360:1
NAVIGAT IX
NAVIGAT X
NAVIGAT 2100
ANSHUTZ SYNCHRO 50 20 360:1
ANSHUTZ STD.6
ANSHUTZ STD.20
HOKUSNIN C1 SYNCHRO 50 68 360:1
HOKUSNIN C2
HOKUSNIN C3
HOKUSNIN GYROpet SYNCHRO 110 110 360:1
CMZ 102
HOKUSIN IPS2 SYNCHRO 115 90 360:1
SPERRY 29 (360:1) SYNCHRO 115 90 360:1
SPERRY 35
SPERRY 29 (180:1) SYNCHRO 115 90 180:1
RUSSIAN ANSHUTZ SYNCHRO 110 55 360:1
KURS 4
MICROTECHNICA: SYNCHRO 115 90 360:1
C19; BC25; SIRIUS
SAGEM SYNCHRO 115 90 360:1
FUNKWERKE SYNCHRO 110 110 360:1
KOPENICK
SG BROWN SYNCHRO 26 11.8 1:1
SGB 1000
MERIDIAN
YOKOGAWA STEPPER 35 35 360:1
CMZ500
YOKOGAWA STEPPER 24 24 360:1
CMZ700 35 (Option) 35 (Option) 360:1 (Option)

KH 2020
Chap 5

KH 2020
Index
Installation & Commissioning

Index
A E
Adjustment of Main Bang Suppression 5-6 Electrical Connection 4 - 17
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 4-5
C
Electrical Connections 4 - 11
CABLE CODES 4-9
Elliptical Waveguide 4-9
Cable Colour Abbreviations 4 - 10
Elliptical Waveguide Assembly 4 - 11
Cable Connections 4-1
Equipment Location 4-2
Cable Gland Assembly 4 - 14,4 - 20
Cable Specifications 4 - 11,4 - 32,4 - 17 F
CABLE SPECIFICATIONS 4 - 9,4 - 17 Factory settings 5-6
CABLE SPECIFICATIONS 4 - 29 Fitting 4-3
Checking the Display Operation 5-5 Fitting the Soft Start Unit 4-3
Checks After Fitting 4 - 13,4 - 16,4 - 23
G
CHECKS AFTER FITTING 4-5
GO TO DEFAULT box 5-6
Co-axial Cables 4 - 13
GO TO MENUS box 5-6
Compass Safe Distances 4-1
GO TO TEST 5-5
Connections Diagrams 4-1
GYRO FAILURE 5-5
Cover Removal 4 - 19
Gyro failure warning 5-5
Cursor Parking 5-6
Gyro Ratio 5-4
Cursor Parking High 5-6
Gyro Type 5-4
Cursor Parking Low 5-6
D I
Initial settings 5-6
Deck Gland Fitting 4 - 14,4 - 15
Installation 4 - 2,4 - 3
Default Settings 5-6
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS 4-1
Desk Top Display 4-1
installation information 4-2
DISPLAY COMMISSIONING 5-1
Installation parameters: 5-1
Downmast Transceiver 4 - 13,4 - 19
installation settings, 5-1
Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A8) 4 - 2,4 - 9
Installation Set-up 5-5
Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A8):
Installation Dimensions 4 - 10
L
Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9) 4-2
DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVER (CTX-A9) 4 - 11 Log Type 5-4
Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9) to Long Cable Runs 4 - 29

Turning Mechanism Connection 4 - 13 LONG CABLE RUNS 4 - 32
Installation Dimensions 4 - 12
PCB Location and Cableform Routing 4 - 22
Downmast Transceiver CTX-A9
and Turning Mechanism with Soft Start Unit 4 - 31
Downmast Transceiver: PCB Location
and Cableform Routing 4 - 21
Downmast TransceiverCTX-A9 and
MkVI Turning Mechanism with Soft Start Unit 4 - 28
downmast transceivers hf co-axial cable 4 - 11
Original i May 01
KH 2020
Index
M S
Main Bang Suppression (MBS) 5-6 Safety Notes 4-1
MAINS ISOLATOR (80-261-600) 4-8 Safety Notes 4 - 1,4 - 2
Mains Isolator: Installation Dimensions 4 - 11,4 - 16 Save Current Settings 5-6
mains supply 5-1 Saving the Settings 5-6
Map Positioning 5-6 ships cables 4-1
Mark VI Transmitter/Receiver 4-1 Skew 5-2
Maximum Recommended Waveguide Lengths 4-1 Slave/Master Selection 5-2
Maximum Recommended Waveguide Lengths 4-1 Small Multi-Core Cables 4 - 12,4 - 18
Mk IV Transceiver Upmast (X-Band) 4 - 13 Small Multi-Core Cables 4 - 10
Mk IV Transmitter /Receivers 4-1 Soft Start Unit 4 - 13,4 - 1,4 - 2,4 - 19
Mk V Transmitter/Receivers 4-1 Split Display 4-1
Mk VI Transceiver Downmast (S-Band) Standby screen 5-1
Interswitched 4 - 23
MkVII Downmast S-Band Transceiver 4-1 T
MkVII Downmast X-Band Transceivers 4-1 Target Data Output Type 5-6
MONITOR ARM 4-5 Test Cards 5-5
Motor Connections 4 - 24 Thermal Overload Trip Unit 4-2
MUTE box 5-2 Transceiver MKV 4-1
MUTE facility 5-2 Transceiver (CTX-A8) to High Speed Antenna
(CAE-A30-5) Connections 4 - 24
N Transceiver (CTX-A8) to Low Speed Antenna
(CAE-A30-6) Connections 4 - 23
NMEA serial messages 5 - 10
Transceiver (CTX-A9) to Turning
Nucleus 3 Interswitched (via DIU) Mechanism Connections 4 - 25
System Connection 4 - 26
Transceiver and Turning Mechanisms 4-1
Nucleus 3 Interswitched System Connection 4 - 27
Transceiver Wiring 4 - 13
Nucleus 3 CANbus System Interconnection 4 - 29,4 - 27
Transmission Performance Monitor 5-2
Nucleus 3 Interswitched (via RIU) CANbus
System Connection 4 - 28 Transmitter Type 5-2
Nucleus 3 Interswitched CANbus Turning Mechanism (CAE-A30-5 & CAE-A30-6) 4-3
System Configuration 4 - 30
Turning Mechanism (CAE-A30-5 & CAE-A30-6)) 4-2
O Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41, A42):
Installation Dimensions 4-9
Optional Head/Receiver Line Amplifiers 4 - 27
Turning Mechanism: PCB Location
Optional Mains Isolator 4 - 2,4 - 13,4 - 19 and Cableform Routing 4 - 21,4 - 20
Optional Tx Monitor Arm 4-8 Turning Unit Fixing Centres and
Outline Dimensions 4-4
P Turning Unit Mast Mounting 4-5
PCB Locations And Cableform Routing 4 - 13,4 - 19 Tx Monitor Arm cableform 4-8
Pedestal Display 4-1 Type Approval Authority 5-4
Power Cables 4 - 11,4 - 13,4 - 19,4 - 18 Typical Nucleus 3 System Interconnection 4 - 25
Power ON/OF 5-1 Typical Nucleus 3 System Interconnections 4 - 26
Pre-Installation Requirements 4-1
R
Reset Gyro 5-5
May 01 ii Original
KH 2020
Index
U W
Upmast Turning Mechanism 4 - 13,4 - 19 Watch Monitor 5-6
Upmast Turning Mechanism 4-7 Watch Monitor Timeout 5-6
Upmast Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41/42) 4-1 Waveguide Installation 4 - 3,4 - 9
Upmast Turning Mechanism: Mast Mounting 4 - 10 Waypoint Positioning 5-6
Upmast X-Band Transceiver Cae-A12-20 4-2 WIRING DIAGRAMS 4 - 23
Use Factory Settings 5-6
Original iii May 01

KH 2020
Index
May 01 iv Original
Table of Contents
• PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 4.1
• INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 4.1

• NUCLEUS 5000 DISPLAY 4.1
• NUCLEUS 6000 DISPLAY 4.1
• Maximum Recommended Waveguide Lengths 4.1
• System Configurations (See Figure 1) 4.1
• Safety Notes 4.1
• INSTALLATION OF UPMAST X-BAND TRANSCEIVER CAE-A12-20 (25kW) 4.2
• General 4.2
• Fitting 4.2
• MONITOR ARM 4.5
• ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 4.5
• CHECKS AFTER FITTING 4.5
• OPTIONAL MAINS ISOLATOR (80-261-600) 4.8
• CABLE SPECIFICATIONS 4.9
• CABLE CODES 4.9
• SMALL MULTI-CORE CABLES 4.10
• Power Cables 4.11
• Equipment Location 4.2
• Fitting 4.3
• Electrical Connections 4.11
• Checks After Fitting 4.13
• Optional In-Line Power Supply Unit 4.27
• Soft Start Unit 4.1
• Upmast Tx/Rx (CAEA37/A45) and Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41/42) 4.2
• Optional Mains Isolator (80-261-600) 4.2
• Installation 4.2
• SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14 and CZZ-A14-2) 4.2
• Fitting the Soft Start Unit 4.3
• Upmast Transceiver (CAEA37) and Turning Mechanism (CAE-A42/41) 4.7
• GENERAL 4.13
• COVER REMOVAL 4.13
• PCB Locations And Cableform Routing 4.13
• Wiring Diagrams 4.16
• General 4.1
• Compass Safe Distances 4.1
• Transceiver And Turning Mechanisms 4.1
• Upmast Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41/42) 4.1
• Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9) 4.2
• Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14) 4.2
• SOFT START UNIT (CZZ-A14) 4.2
• Fitting the Soft Start Unit 4.3
• Upmast Turning Mechanism (CAE-A42/41) 4.7
• Downmast Transceivers Hf Co-Axial Cable 4.11
• Electrical Connection 4.17

• CABLE SPECIFICATIONS 4.17
• GENERAL 4.19
• COVER REMOVAL 4.19
• Wiring Diagrams 4.23
• Long Cable Runs 4.32

• Cable Specifications 4.32
• GENERAL 4.1
• Compass Safe Distances 4.1
• Transceiver and Turning Mechanisms 4.1
• Turning Mechanism (CAE-A30-5 & CAE-A30-6)) 4.2
• Turning Mechanism (CAE-A30-5 & CAE-A30-6) 4.3
• Waveguide Installation 4.9
• Elliptical Waveguide 4.9
• Electrical Connection 4.17

• GENERAL 4.19
• Cover Removal 4.19
• WIRING DIAGRAMS 4.22
• CHECKS AFTER FITTING 4.22
• Long Cable Runs 4.29

• Introduction 4.29
• TO CHANGE THE INSTALLATION

PARAMETERS 5.1
• Installation Parameters 5.1
• Test Cards 1 & 2 5.5
• Checking the Display Operation 5.5
• Go To Test 5.5
• Adjustment of Main Bang Suppression (MBS) 5.6
• Default Settings 5.6
• Curved EBL Setup 5.8
• WARNING SET UP SCREEN 5.9
• SERIAL MESSAGE SET UP SCREEN 5.10
ILLUSTRATIONS
CHAPTER 4a
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS DISPLAYS
Page
• Figure 1a - Nucleus 5000 Display Installation Diagram 4a.3
• Figure 2a - Nucleus 3 5000 Display: Internal Connections 4a.5
• Figure 3a - Nucleus 6000 Display (Pedestal): Installation Diagram 4a.7
• Figure 4a - Nucleus 6000 Split Display: Installation Diagram 4a.9
• Figure 5a - Nucleus 3 6000 Display: Internal Connections 4a.11
• Figure 6a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkIV - Upmast) via RIU: Interconnections 4a.13
• Figure 7a Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (Mk V) via RIU: Interconnections 4a.15
• Figure 8a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII -S-Band) via RIU: Interconnections 4a.17
• Figure 9a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII - X-Band, Low Speed)

via RIU: Interconnections 4a.19
• Figure 10a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII, X-Band, High Speed), via
RIU: Interconnections 4a.21
• Figure 11a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVI - Upmast), via RIU and
Soft Start Unit: Interconnections 4a.23
• Figure 12a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII - S-Band) via

Dual Interswitch Unit: Interconnections 4a.25
• Figure 13a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitters (MkVI & MkIV - Upmast), via
• Figure 14a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVI - Upmast), via

Dual Interswitch Unit and Soft Start Unit: Interconnections 4a.29
ILLUSTRATIONS Cont.
CHAPTER 4a
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS DISPLAYS
Page
• Figure 15a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII - X-Band, Low Speed), via
• Figure 16a - Nucleus 3 Display to Transmitter (MkVII - X-Band, High Speed), via
• Figure 17a - Nucleus 3 Displays: Mains Power and Distribution 4a.35
CHAPTER 4b
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS TRANSCEIVER MkIV
Page
• Figure 1b - Upmast X-Band Transceiver CAE-A12-20 (25kW): Installation Dimensions 4b.3
• Figure 2b - X-Band Upmast Transceiver: Cable Routing 4b.4
• Figure 3b - X-Band Upmast Transceiver Transmitter Monitor Arm: Connection Diagram 4b.5
• Figure 4b - Assembly of Cable Gland to Upmast Transceiver/Turning Mechanism 4b.6
• Figure 5b - X-Band Upmast Transceiver: Electrical Connections 4b.7
• Figure 6b - Optional Mains Isolator: Installation Dimensions 4b.8
• Figure 7b - Mk IV Transceiver Upmast (X-Band) to Nucleus 3 (5000):

Interconnections Diagram 4b.13
CHAPTER 4c
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS TRANSCEIVER MkV
Page
• Figure 1c - Transceiver Fixing Centres and Outline Dimensions 4c.4
• Figure 2c - Transceiver Mast Mounting 4c.5
• Figure 3c - Assembling Antenna to Turning Mechanism 4c.7
• Figure 4c - 40V Power Supply CZZ-A22: Dimensions 4c.9
• Figure 5c - 38-Core Composite Cable: Installation 4c.15
• Figure 6c - Connection Diagram (CAE-A30-7) 4c.17
• Figure 7c - Connection Diagram (CAE-A30-8) 4c.18
• Figure 8c - Typical Low Speed Antenna System Interconnection (CAE-A30-7) 4c.19
• Figure 9c - Low Speed Antenna Interswitched System Interconnections (CAE-A30-7) 4c.20

ILLUSTRATIONS Cont.
CHAPTER 4c
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS TRANSCEIVER MkV
Page
• Figure 10c - Low Speed Antenna A typical System Interconnection with

Long Cables (CAE-A30-7) 4c.21
• Figure 11c - Typical High Speed Antenna System Interconnections (CAE-A30-8) 4c.22
• Figure 12c - High Speed Antenna Interswitched System Interconnections (CAE-A30-8) 4c.23
• Figure 13c - High Speed Antenna: A Typical System Interconnection with

Long Cables (CAE-A30-8) 4c.24
• Figure 14c - Nucleus 3 Display - Radar Interswitch Unit - Transceiver Interconnections 4c.25
• Figure 15c - Optional Mains Isolator: Installation Dimensions 4c.26
• Figure 16c - Optional In-Line PSU: Installation Instructions 4c.27
CHAPTER 4d
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS TRANSCEIVER MkVI
Page
• Figure 1d - Thermal Overload Trip Unit 4d.2
• Figure 2d - Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14): Installation Diagram 4d.5
• Figure 3d - Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14-*): Component Layout 4d.6
• Figure 4d - Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45), Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41, A42)

and Antennas: Installation Dimensions 4d.9
• Figure 5d - Upmast Turning Mechanism: Mast Mounting 4d.10
• Figure 6d - Mains Isolator: Installation Dimensions 4d.11
• Figure 7d - Cable Gland Assembly 4d.14
• Figure 8d - Upmast Transceiver: PCB Location and Cableform Routing 4d.15
• Figure 9d - Motor Connections 4d.17
• Figure 10d - Soft Start Unit with In-line Power Supply 4d.18
• Figure 11d - Mk VI Transceiver Upmast (S-Band) Interswitched with Nucleus 3

via an RIU: Interconnections Diagram 4d.19
• Figure 12d - Mk VI Transceiver Upmast (S-Band) Interswitched with Nucleus 3

via a DIU: Interconnections Diagram 4d.21
ILLUSTRATIONS Cont.
CHAPTER 4e
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS TRANSCEIVER MkVII (S-BAND)
Page
• Figure 1e - Thermal Overload Trip Unit 4e.2
• Figure 2e - Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14: Installation Diagram 4e.5
• Figure 3e - Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14: Component Layout 4e.6
• Figure 4e - Turning Mechanism (CAE-A41, A42): Installation Dimensions 4e.9
• Figure 5e - Upmast Turning Mechanism: Mast Mounting 4e.10
• Figure 6e - Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9): Installation Dimensions 4e.12
• Figure 7e - Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9) to Turning Mechanism Connection 4e.13
• Figure 8e - Deck Gland Fitting 4e.14
• Figure 9e - Deck Gland Fitting 4e.15
• Figure 10e - Mains Isolator: Installation Dimensions 4e.16
• Figure 11e - Cable Gland Assembly 4e.20
• Figure 12e - Turning Mechanism: PCB Location and Cableform Routing 4e.21
• Figure 13e - Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9): PCB Location and Cableform Routing 4e.22
• Figure 14e - Motor Connections 4e.24
• Figure 15e - Transceiver (CTX-A9) to Turning Mechanism Connections 4e.25
• Figure 16e - Typical Nucleus 3 System Interconnections 4e.26
• Figure 17e - Nucleus 3 Interswitched System Connection 4e.27
• Figure 18e - Nucleus 3 Display to Dual Interswitch Unit to Downmast Transceiver CTX-A9
and MkVI Turning Mechanism with Soft Start Unit 4e.28
• Figure 19e - Typical Nucleus 3 CANbus System Interconnection 4e.29
• Figure 20e - Nucleus 3 Interswitched CANbus System Configuration 4e.30
• Figure 21e - Nucleus 3 Display to RIU to Downmast Transceiver CTX-A9 and

Turning Mechanism with Soft Start Unit 4e.31
ILLUSTRATIONS Cont.
CHAPTER 4f
INSTALLATION & INTERCONNECTIONS TRANSCEIVER MkVII (X-BAND)
Page
• Figure 1f - Turning Unit Fixing Centres and Outline Dimensions 4f.4
• Figure 2f - Turning Unit Mast Mounting 4f.5
• Figure 3f - Assembling Antenna to Turning Mechanism 4f.7
• Figure 4f - Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A8): Installation Dimensions 4f.10
• Figure 5f - Elliptical Waveguide Assembly 4f.11
• Figure 6f - Mains Isolator: Installation Dimensions 4f.16
• Figure 7f - Turning Mechanism: PCB Location and Cableform Routing 4f.20
• Figure 8f - Downmast Transceiver: PCB Location and Cableform Routing 4f.21
• Figure 9f - Transceiver (CTX-A8) to Low Speed Antenna (CAE-A30-6) Connections 4f.23
• Figure 10f - Transceiver (CTX-A8) to High Speed Antenna (CAE-A30-5) Connections 4f.24
• Figure 11f - Typical Nucleus 3 System Interconnection 4f.25
• Figure 12f - Nucleus 3 Interswitched (via DIU) System Connection 4f.26
• Figure 13f - Typical Nucleus 3 CANbus System Interconnection 4f.27
• Figure 14f - Nucleus 3 Interswitched (via RIU) CANbus System Connection 4f.28
CHAPTER 5
DISPLAY COMMISSIONING
Page
• Figure 1 - System PCB (NNR-A911) : Links, Switch and Potentiometer Locations 5.13
• Figure 2 - Input PCB (NNR-A910) : Link Locations 5.14
• Figure 3 - Input/Output PCB (NNR-A996): Link Locations 5.14

KH 2020
Chap 6
CHAPTER 6
MAINTENANCE & DIAGNOSTICS
WARNING
IF RADAR EQUIPMENT IS TO BE WORKED ON, WHILE POWERED UP, IN PORT, ENSURE THAT:
• No one is working close to the scanner, i.e. No one is within a few metres of the Antenna.
• The Antenna is rotating, or if the work requires the Antenna to be stationary that it is directed
towards unoccupied areas, e.g. out to sea.
• No one looks directly into the emission side of a slotted waveguide (open box type) Antenna.
• The risk of being hit by a rotating Antenna is not overlooked if work close to the Antenna is
necessary.
• Any work required on such equipment must be implemented by competent persons, operating a
safe system of work, so that no one is put at risk.
DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE
INTRODUCTION
5 Fault conditions detected by the system are
highlighted by System Alarms which appear on the
1 This Chapter is divided into three parts: display. These are:
(1) Preventive Maintenance. (1) No Video.
(2) Diagnostic Maintenance. (2) No Sync.
(3) Corrective Maintenance. (3) No Azimuth.
2 The following paragraphs outline the basic (4) No Heading Line.
maintenance and fault finding procedures which can
(5) No Gyro.
be implemented by the operator. The fault finding/repair
philosophy is limited to checking cable connections and
changing fuses. 6 A series of simple algorithms (Figures 5 to 11) form a
brief, step-by-step outline to guide the operator
NOTE: through the fault finding procedure.
For details of the Maintenance procedures applicable to
the associated Transmitter/Receivers, refer to the
appropriate part of Chapter 7.
MAINTENANCE
WARNING
LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT INSIDE THE
EQUIPMENT. ALL MAINTENANCE IS TO BE
IMPLEMENTED WITH POWER SWITCHED OFF.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3 Preventive maintenance consists of keeping the
system clean, particularly the console, cabinets, and
filters. External surfaces should be cleaned with a soft,
non-abrasive cloth, moistened in a soap solution.
4 Screens are to be checked and cleaned regularly with
a soap solution.
Original 6.1 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 6
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE Trackerball
7 Corrective maintenance by the operator is limited to 10 In the unlikely event that the operation of the Nucleus
changing fuses or cleaning the Trackerball & rollers . Trackerball becomes erratic and/or does not
accurately position the cursor on the display, the Trackerball
rollers may require cleaning. To overcome the problem,
CAUTION implement the instructions below.
It is recommended that ONLY an experienced Tools Required
engineer changes Nucleus 6000 Series Monitor
Fuses. 11 The following items are required:
(1) Screwdriver - Posidrive.
Fuses (2) Cleaning Fluid, i.e. Alcohol or Solvent.
8 There are 3 fuses in the Nucleus Display System: (3) Cotton Buds.
(1) Processor Assembly:

a. Mains Input Line (Filter) - 5A (220V) or 15A
(110V)
b. Battery Unit - FS1 10A
(2) Monitor Assembly:
a. Power Supply Unit - FS1 2A FB
b. Deflection PCB - FS1 1.25A A/S
9 PCB locations are shown in Figures 12 to 16.
May 01 6.2 Original

KH 2020
Chap 6
5000 Series Screen Control Unit 6000 Series Screen Control Unit
12 To remove and Clean the Trackerball : 13 To remove and Clean the Trackerball :
(1) Locate the Access Plate (A) on the underside of (1) Locate the Access Plate (A) on the underside of
the Screen Control Unit (SCU). Refer to Figures 1 the Screen Control Unit (SCU). Refer to Figures 1
and 2 (for 5000 series) and Figures 3 and 4 (for and 2 (for 5000 series) and Figures 3 and 4 (for
6000 series). 6000 series).
(2) Remove the screws that hold the access plate to (2) Release the screws that hold the access plate to
the underside of the SCU. the SCU Baseplate.
(3) A flying lead runs from the base of the Trackerball (3) A flying lead runs from the base of the Trackerball
unit to the Trackerball PCB. Disconnect the flying unit to the Trackerball PCB. Disconnect the flying
lead from the Trackerball PCB. lead from the Trackerball PCB.
(4) Remove the four Trackerball Unit retaining (4) Remove the four Trackerball Unit retaining
screws. screws.
(5) The Trackerball Unit can now be withdrawn from (5) The Trackerball Unit can now be withdrawn from
the upper part of the Screen Control Unit. the upper part of the Screen Control Unit.
(6) Saturate the cotton buds with the cleaning fluid (6) Saturate the cotton buds with the cleaning fluid
and clean the rollers and Trackerball. and clean the rollers and Trackerball.
(7) Re-assembly of the SCU is the reverse of the (7) Re-assembly of the SCU is the reverse of the
procedures in sub-paragraphs (2) to (5) above. procedures in sub-paragraphs (2) to (5) above.

CURSOR OUTSIDE CIRCLE CURSOR INSIDE CIRCLE
RADAR CIRCLE
RADAR CIRCLE
NUCLEUS 3 5000
KELVIN HUGHES PUSHBUTTONS
6000
NUCLEUS 3
DEGAUSS
PUSHBUTTONS
O
O
I
I
ON/OFF
TRACKERBALL
CD-4698
CD-4699 ON/OFF DEGAUSS TRACKERBALL
Figure 1 - Screen Control Unit (5000 Series) Figure 3 - Screen Control Unit (6000 Series)
A = ACCESS PLATE
CD-0087 CD-2366
Figure 2 - Access Plate Removal (5000 Series) Figure 4 - Access Plate Removal (6000 Series)
Original 6.3 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 6
NO RADAR INFORMATION
& NO WARNINGS
SET SEA & RAIN TO MINIMUM,

SET GAIN TO MAXIMUM.
CHECK INDIVIDUAL LEVELS
SET ON TEST MENU
CARRY OUT PERFORMANCE

MONITOR CHECK
NO
IS VIDEO SEEN? SUSPECT DISPLAY FAULT
YES
SUSPECT Rx
OR RF HEAD FAULT
CD-2367
Figure 5 - No Radar Information (No Warning)
May 01 6.4 Original

KH 2020
Chap 6
INCORRECT GYRO FOLLOW

OR OPERATOR WARNING
NO GYRO
CHECK FOR CORRECT

GYRO RATIO SETTINGS
ON INSTALLATION MENU.
AMEND IF NECESSARY
ARE PLUGS
IS THE FAULT NO PLU & PLA ON THE NO
RECTIFY
CLEARED? INPUT/OUTPUT PCB
SECURE?
YES YES
RETURN TO NORMAL AT THE

OPERATION HYBRID BOARD NO
(IC70) ARE ALL 3 LEDs SUSPECT SYSTEM PCB
EITHER LIT OR FAULT
UNLIT?
*YES *ONLY VALID ON NNR-A131 BOARDS
SUSPECT SYSTEM PCB

OR GYRO FAULT
CD-2368
Figure 6 - Incorrect Gyro Follow or Operator Warning -No Gyro
Original 6.5 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 6
OPERATOR WARNING
NO VIDEO/NO SYNC
ARE THE
NO ADJUST LEVELS
TEST MENU LEVELS
SET CORRECTLY? ACCORDINGLY
YES
AT
DISPLAY CAN CARRY OUT A
IS THE SYSTEM NO TUNE INDICATION BE NO
PERFORMANCE
INTERSWITCHED? ADJUSTED FOR PEAK MONITOR CHECK
INDICATION?
YES YES
TURN MANUAL SELECT IS THE NO

SUSPECT THE DELAY SUSPECT THE Tx/Rx
SWITCH ON THE DIU Tx PLUME DISPLAYED?
TO ‘TEST'
YES YES
IS THE NO ESTABLISH WHICH RETURN TO

FAULT CLEARED? UNIT IS FAULTY BY NORMAL OPERATION
INTERSWITCHING
YES
THE FAULT IS AT THE

INTERSWITCH UNIT Tx/Rx
DISPLAY OR Tx/Rx?
DISPLAY
CHECK THAT THE VIDEO NO

& SYNC LEADS ARE IS THE FAULT CLEARED? SUSPECT THE DISPLAY
CORRECTLY CONNECTED
YES
RETURN TO
NORMAL OPERATION
CD-2369
Figure 7 - Operator Warning (No Video/No Sync)
May 01 6.6 Original

KH 2020
Chap 6
OPERATOR WARNING
NO AZIMUTH/
NO HEADING LINE
IS THE SYSTEM YES TURN THE MANUAL IS THE NO

SELECT SWITCH ON FAULT CLEARED? THE FAULT IS AT THE
INTERSWITCHED?
THE DIU TO ‘TEST' INTERSWITCH UNIT
NO YES
ESTABLISH WHICH
UNIT IS FAULTY BY
INTERSWITCHING
Tx/Rx
DISPLAY OR Tx/Rx?
DISPLAY
CAN THE
YES TUNE INDICATION YES CHECK THAT THE
IS THE ANTENNA BE ADJUSTED FOR PEAK INSTALLATION MENU
ROTATING? INDICATION? IS SET CORRECTLY
NO NO
SUSPECT THE Tx/Rx IS THE NO

FAULT CLEARED? SUSPECT THE DISPLAY
YES
IS THE
S-BAND FAULT CLEARED YES
S-BAND Or X-BAND? BY RESETTING Tx
CURRENT TRIP?
X-BAND? NO
SET SEA & RAIN TO MINIMUM, RETURN TO

SET GAIN TO MAXIMUM. NORMAL OPERATION
CHECK INDIVIDUAL LEVELS
SET ON TEST MENU
IS THE FAULT NO
REFER TO
CLEARED? KELVIN HUGHES ENGINEER
YES
RETURN TO NORMAL
OPERATION
CD-2370
Figure 8 - Operator Warning (No Azimuth/No Heading Line)
Original 6.7 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 6
NO INFORMATION
ON SCREEN
REMOVE COVER
FROM MONITOR
* SK1 - WIRE 15
SK2 - WIRE 16
CHECK THAT THE VIDEO SK3 - WIRE 12
CABLE IS CONNECTED AT SK4 - WIRE 17
PL9 (SYSTEM PCB) & SK1 TO SK5 - WIRE 18
* **
SK5 (VIDEO PCB ) & PL3
** FOR LATER VERSIONS THE VIDEO PCB
IS INTEGREATED WITH THE DEFLECTION PCB
PRESS & HOLD ALL 3

BUTTONS AT THE SAME TIME
DOES
THE BACKGROUND NO NO
BRILLIANCE OF THE IS THE PSU FAN
RUNNING? SUSPECT THE PSU
SCREEN INCREASE
?
YES YES
SUSPECT THE SYSTEM PCB ARE

ALL 5 LEDs LIT ON NO
DEFLECTION PCB?
YES
CHECK CABLE CONNECTIONS

AT PL3 (DEFLECTION)
& PL1 (VIDEO)
NO SUSPECT
IS THE FAULT CLEARED?
THE MONITOR KIT
YES
RETURN TO NORMAL
OPERATION
CD-2373
Figure 9 - No Information on Screen (5000 Series)
May 01 6.8 Original

KH 2020
Chap 6
NO INFORMATION
ON SCREEN
CHECK THAT THE VIDEO

CABLE IS CONNECTED AT
PLA (SYSTEM PCB) & PLB
(MONITOR INPUT PCB)
PRESS & HOLD ALL 3

BUTTONS AT THE SAME TIME
DOES
THE BACKGROUND YES
BRILLIANCE OF THE SUSPECT THE SYSTEM PCB
SCREEN INCREASE
?
NO
REMOVE THE TOP COVER

FROM THE MONITOR
IS THE YES
PSU FAN RUNNING? MONITOR FAULT
NO
REMOVE THE COVER ARE NO IS LED D26 YES

FROM THE PROCESSOR UNIT ALL 4 LEDs LIT ON LIT WITH THE DISPLAY SUSPECT THE PSU
THE PSU? TURNED OFF?
YES NO
CHECK/SECURE THE CHECK BOTH FUSES

CONNECTIONS OF MAINS ON THE FILTER UNIT
INPUT TO THE MONITOR PSU
SUSPECT NO SUSPECT A MAINS

IS THE FAULT CLEARED? IS THE FAULT CLEARED?
THE MONITOR KIT SUPPLY PROBLEM
YES YES
RETURN TO NORMAL RETURN TO NORMAL

CD-2375 OPERATION OPERATION
Figure 10 - No Information on Screen (6000 Series)
Original 6.9 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 6
INCORRECT SWITCHING
SWITCH THE DIU TO TEST
DOES REMOVE THE COVER

DISPLAY ‘A' TO THE DIU.
NO CHECK SERVICIBILITY OF THE
NOW CONTROL Tx ‘A' &
DISPLAY ‘B' CONTROL 2 FUSES ON THE MAIN PCB.
Tx ‘B'? CHECK THE SERVICIBILITY
OF THE 2 MAINS FUSES
YES
ARE
LEDs D9, D10,
LEAVE IN THIS CONDITION & IS THE NO D11 & D12 LIT WHEN NO SUSPECT DIU
CONTACT A KELVIN HUGHES FAULT CLEARED? EITHER DISPLAY IS POWER SUPPLY FAULT
ENGINEER SWITCHED ON?
YES YES
RETURN TO SUSPECT DIU

NORMAL OPERATION SWITCHING FAULT
CD-2376
Figure 11 - Incorrect Interswitching

KH 2020
Chap 6
VIDEO/DEFLECTION BOARD
SYSTEM & ARPA BOARD
INPUT BOARD
INPUT WIRING COVER

AND CLAMPING
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
TOP VIEW WITH ACCESS

COVER REMOVED.
CD-4837
Figure 12 - PCB Locations (5000 Series)

KH 2020
Chap 6
ON/OFF SWITCH
DEGAUSS TRACKERBALL PUSH BUTTON

CD-4666
Figure 13 - Screen Control Unit (5000 Series) PCB Locations

KH 2020
Chap 6
SYSTEM PCB
ARPA PCB
INPUT PCB
INPUT FILTER
3 PHASE
TRANSFORMER
(OPTIONAL)
(NNR-A322)
PROCESSOR POWER
SUPPLY UNIT
CD-4664
Figure 14 - Processor Assembly (6000 Series) PCB Locations

KH 2020
Chap 6
MONITOR CRT
DISPLAY POWER SUPPLY UNIT TUBE BASE PCB DEFLECTION PCB
CD-2378 NUCLEUS 60000A MONITOR ASSEMBLY
Figure 15 - Monitor Assembly PCB Locations
TRACKERBALL PCB
PUSHBUTTON PCB
CD-4665
Figure 16 - SCU Assembly (6000 Series) PCB Locations

KH 2020
Maintenance Index PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 6-1

Processor Assembly (6000 Series) PCB Locations 6 - 13
B
basic maintenance 6-1
S
Screen Control Unit (5000 Series) 6-3
C Screen Control Unit (5000 Series) PCB Locations 6 - 12
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 6-2 Screen Control Unit (6000 Series) 6-3

Screen Control Unit (SCU) 6-3
D SCU Assembly (6000 Series) PCB Locations 6 - 14
System Alarms 6-1
DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE 6-1
T
F
Trackerball 6-2
Fault conditions 6-1
fault finding 6-1
Fuses 6-2
I
Incorrect Interswitching 6 - 10
L
LETHAL VOLTAGES 6-1
M
MAINTENANCE 6-1
MAINTENANCE & DIAGNOSTICS 6-1
Monitor Assembly PCB Locations 6 - 14
N
No Azimuth 6-1
No Gyro 6-1
No Heading Line 6-1
No Information on Screen (5000 Series) 6-8
No Information on Screen (6000 Series) 6-9
No Radar Information 6-4
No Sync 6-1
No Video 6-1
No Video/No Sync 6-6
O
Operator Warning (No Video/No Sync) 6-6
Operator Warning (No Azimuth/No Heading Line) 6-7
Operator Warning -No Gyro 6-5
P
PCB locations 6-2
PCB Locations (5000 Series) 6 - 11
Original i May 01
KH 2020
Contents
Table of Contents
• PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 6.1
• DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE 6.1
• CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 6.2

• Fuses 6.2
• Trackerball 6.2
ILLUSTRATIONS
• Figure 1 - Screen Control Unit (5000 Series) 6.3
• Figure 2 - Access Plate Removal (5000 Series) 6.3
• Figure 3 - Screen Control Unit (6000 Series) 6.3
• Figure 4 - Access Plate Removal (6000 Series) 6.3
• Figure 5 - No Radar Information (No Warning) 6.4
• Figure 6 - Incorrect Gyro Follow or Operator Warning -No Gyro 6.5
• Figure 7 - Operator Warning (No Video/No Sync) 6.6
• Figure 8 - Operator Warning (No Azimuth/No Heading Line) 6.7
• Figure 9 - No Information on Screen (5000 Series) 6.8
• Figure 10 - No Information on Screen (6000 Series) 6.9
• Figure 11 - Incorrect Interswitching 6.10
• Figure 12 - PCB Locations (5000 Series) 6.11
• Figure 13 - Screen Control Unit (5000 Series) PCB Locations 6.12
• Figure 14 - Processor Assembly (6000 Series) PCB Locations 6.13
• Figure 15 - Monitor Assembly PCB Locations 6.14
• Figure 16 - SCU Assembly (6000 Series) PCB Locations 6.14
Original i May 01
KH 2020
Chap 7a
CHAPTER 7A
MKIV TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA
INTRODUCTION FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
1 The MkIV Transceiver is available in the Upmast MODULATOR

X-Band configuration. (Refer to Figure 1a below):
3 The modulator is a line type with resonant charging
2 The Transceiver is comprised of the following main from a stabilised line voltage, driving a 25kW rated
units:
magnetron via a pulse transformer.
(1) A modulator unit.
4 Pre-pulse and jitter facilities and three separate sync.
(2) 60MHz logarithmic receiver CTX-A297. pulse outputs are provided.
(3) RF head and magnetron.
5 The Modulator Unit contains the following two main
(4) Power Unit. circuits:
(5) Receiver Monitor.
(1) Modulator Control.
(6) Transmission Monitor.
(2) Modulator.
Mk IV X-BAND
UPMAST TRANSCEIVERS
ANTENNA (see Table)
KELVIN HUGHES
25kW UPMAST
TRANSCEIVER
(CAE - A12-20)
CABLE CODE N
CABLE CODE K
ANTENNA OPTIONS
1.8m ANTENNA (CAE-A13/2)
2.4m ANTENNA (CAE-A14)
CABLE CODES
CABLE E - 12 CORE
CABLE K - 2 CORE POWER
CABLE L - 3 CORE POWER
CABLE N - 38 CORE COMPOSITE
CD-4671
Figure 1a - MkIV Transceiver/Antenna Configurations

KH 2020
Chap 7a
Modulator Control Circuit Modulator Circuit

6 A block diagram of the Modulator Control circuit is 10 A block diagram of the Modulator is shown in Figure
shown in Figure 2a, below. 3a.
7 The modulator control circuit monitors the PULSE 11 The modulator uses a line type circuit whose
LENGTH, STANDBY and MUTE control signals from capacitors in the PFN are charged to double the HT
the display, and senses the AZIMUTH pulses which indicate supply. The line impedance is matched to the magnetron
Antenna rotation. The circuit generates modulator triggers. impedance by the pulse transformer.
8 Three LEDs, labelled +27V, TX READY and TUNE,
and an antenna motor relay (which can be activated Sync Pulse Output
when Switch S4 is closed) are mounted on the PCB.
12 One low impedance sync pulse output is produced by
9 Power supplies of +15V, +27V, +24V and +8.5V are the modulator. This is split to provide three output
supplied from the Power Unit. Supplies for other areas connections from the downmast transceiver case.
of the transmitter are generated on the PCB.
SLOW CLOCK LATCH LK16

42Hz IC14B ENABLE PRE-PULSE
JITTER FAST CLOCK
EXTERNAL
CONTROL OFF 3000Hz IC14A 1
SYNC PCB
MUTE
CSR2 TRIGGER
Tx DISABLE MOD TRIG. CHARGE TRIGGER
AZIMUTH IC10B OUTPUT SHUT-DOWN CIRCUIT
AZIMUTH
DETECT TR21 2
& IC16A
HT & TRIG.
CHARGING SHUT-DOWN
DELAY IC16 IC10A, IC11
& IC1C
S4
RUN/STANDBY AERIAL RELAY
AERIAL RELAY RLB
DRIVER TR2
& RLN
INPUT CHANGE
DETECT 2
INSTALLATION
IC2, IC28 SYNC ADJUST SYNC 1
PRF SWITCHES SYNC AMP X3 SYNC 2
IC4 & IC5 RV1 TR10, TR11 SYNC 3
IC7B, TR7, 9 & TR12
LK3
PRF PRE-PULSE
LATCH PRF GENERATOR EXT. SYNC PCB
PULSE LENGTH
MEDIUM PULSE
LONG PULSE DETECT 1, 5, OR 3
X
TIMER FAST/SLOW
IC1, IC3 & IC13 LATCH PFN PFN RELAY (X OR S) Tx Tx READY
HOLD-ON DETECTOR
RELAYS IC4 DRIVERS MINUTE TIMER READY
CIRCUIT IC17 & IC11
CD-2182
IC9
Figure 2a - Modulator Control Block Diagram

KH 2020
Chap 7a
OPTION
VOLTAGE
-330V REGULATOR -150V Tx MON
D73, R145 CTX-A199
R144
+27V
RFI FILTER
MP VOLTS
SP VOLTS
POWER BRIDGE RECTIFIER HOLD-OFF PFN RELAYS
CHARGE SCR CSR1 REACTOR SL1 & TAILBITER
POWER TRANSFORMER T1 SMOOTHING CHOKE L4
CHOKE L4
SWITCHES 20V IN CAPACITORS C63, C64,
BLOCKING DIODE D53
400V OUT VOLTAGE SENSE
CURRENT LIMIT
VOLTAGE SENSE
CHARGE MAGNETRON
STANDBY SHUTDOWN DELAY
CHARGING DELAY AND
TRIGGER
IC8B, TR27 DISCHARGE MAIN SCR PULSE
1
T5 CSR2 TRANSFORMER T3
OVERSWING
MODULATOR TRIGGER DIODES & PEN OVERSWING
COMPENSATING RESISTOR
DIODES R125
HEATER
RFI FILTER VOLTS
CD-2183
Figure 3a - Modulator Block Diagram
14 The Receiver comprises a logarithmic IF amplifier,

Automatic Frequency Control (AFC) circuitry and
LOG RECEIVER CTX-A297 tuning indicator circuitry.
13 A block diagram of the Log Receiver CTX-A297 is

shown in Figure 4a, below.
+14V -14V
+14V
-14V
0V
3 x VIDEO
I/P AMP & SELECTABLE OUTPUT
5 STAGE 3 STAGE DETECTOR LOWPASS IC2
I/F BANDPASS BANDPASS VIDEO
LOG AMP LOG AMP TR33/TR37 FILTER VIDEO AMP
FILTER TR34 FILTER
I/F SCR. VID.SCR.
BAND SELECT
IC6
IC5
SAMPLE IC3 AMP IC3 SUM LNFE TUNE
DISCRIMINATOR
& HOLD
MOD SYNC.
TUNE
IC4
TUNE INDICATOR
TUNE AMP
CD-2184
Figure 4a - Log Receiver (CTX-A297) Block Diagram

KH 2020
Chap 7a
15 Received radar returns are mixed in the RF head with POWER SUPPLIES
the local oscillator output to provide a 60 MHz
Intermediate Frequency (IF) which is applied to the receiver 18 A block diagram of the ac Power Unit is shown in
input SKC. Figure 6a.
19 An ac Power Unit is fitted as standard to all versions of
RF HEAD (NJRC TYPE) the Transceiver. The Power Unit is designed to run
from 100, 110, 200 and 220V at frequencies from 45-65Hz.
16 The RF Head is shown in Figure 5a, below.
17 The NJRC RF Head is of modular design and is WARNING
situated in the upper part of the transceiver cabinet. LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THE
The RF Head consists of a cavity magnetron, ferrite TRANSCEIVER. CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN
circulator, solid state limiter and a low noise front end. There WHEN USING TEST EQUIPMENT FOR
are no replaceable components in the RF Head, other than DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE WITH THE
the modules themselves. EQUIPMENT IN AN OPERATIONAL CONDITION.
RF OUTPUT PORT
20 Fuse ratings for the input supply are as follows:

MAGNETRON (1) 200/220V 3.15A Time lag
(2) 100/110V 5A Time lag
1
2 21 Output supplies produced by the unit are:
3
(1) +27V dc Modulator supply fused at 5A

CIRCULATOR
(2) +15V dc Control circuits and Receiver
(3) +24V dc X-Band motor fused at 5A
(4) 7.5V ac X-Band magnetron heater supply
LIMITER
LOW NOISE FRONT END

CD-1121 (LNFE)
Figure 5a - X-Band RF Head (CTX-A230)
MKIV TO MKV MKV AE

GEAR BOX ADAPTOR PCB
PATCH PCB CDY-A299
CTX-A292 SKA PLA
MOTOR +VE 3
FLYING 3
MOTOR +VE 4
LEAD 4
PLB SKB
1 1 MOTOR CURRENT LIM. +VE
MOTOR CURRENT LIM. +VE
2 2
FLYING
3 3 MOTOR 0V LEAD
4 4 MOTOR 0V
POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY

CTX-A131 CTX-A131
(TRANSFORMER) (POWER UNIT)
SKA PLA SKA
HEATER +VE 1 1 HEATER +VE 1 PLA
1
MOTOR 0V 2 2 MOTOR 0V 2
2
MOTOR +VE 3 3 MOTOR +VE 3
3
HEATER 0V 4 4 HEATER 0V 4
FLYING FLYING 4
MODULATOR 0V 5 5 LEAD MODULATOR 0V 5
LEAD 5
MODULATOR +VE 6 6 MODULATOR +VE 6
6
0V 7 7 0V 7
7
+27V 8 8 +27V 8
8
CD-1004
Figure 6a - AC Power Unit (CTX-A131)

KH 2020
Chap 7a
RECEIVER MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS

22 The X-Band receiver monitor comprises a resonant
cavity fitted to the waveguide transition joint at the 25 The Algorithms detailed in Figures 7a to 10a provide
entry to the transmitter. The resonant cavity contains an an aid to fault diagnosis in the transceiver. Entry to the
adjustable plunger that is factory set, according to algorithms is via Failure Messages generated at the display.
magnetron frequency. When the monitor is activated, by
pressing PM (Performance Monitor) on the display, a ‘sun’
shows in the centre of the radar screen area.
PREREQUISITES
26 Before any fault diagnosis and rectification is
TRANSMISSION MONITOR implemented, the radar system must be in a standard
configuration, as detailed at the top of the appropriate fault
23 The Transmission Monitor comprises a monitor arm diagnosis algorithm.
fitted to the outer case of the turning mechanism.
Selecting PM (Performance Monitor) on the display
activates the transmission monitor. The monitor arm neon is
FAILURE MESSAGES
ionised as the antenna passes over the arm and the radiated 27 The failure messages detailed in Table 2 below,
signal impinges on the integral neon lamp. This causes a appear in the data field of the display monitor if certain
‘plume’ to be displayed on the radar screen. signals are missing.
SPECIFICATION Table 2 - Failure Messages
24 Technical specifications for the MkIV Transceiver are

SIGNAL FAILURE
provided in Table 1, below. MESSAGE
Table 1 - MkIV Transceiver Specification Sync. No Sync.

Video No Video
Frequency: X-Band 9410±30MHz
Peak Power output: X-Band 25kW nominal 28 Refer to Figures 7 to 10 for fault diagnosis algorithms
associated with these failures.
Magnetron Life: 10,000 Hours typical
Pulse Length and P.R.F:
TEST EQUIPMENT
Short: (S): X-Band 0.07ms (0.045-0.085)
1500 ±40, or 3000 pps ±80 29 Routine field maintenance requires fault location down
to fuse replacement level, or to change suspect
Medium (M) 0.25 ms (0.20-0.30) PCBs/Units for known working ones. The only test
750pps ±20 or 1500 ±40 equipment required for fault finding is a high impedance
Long (L) 1.0ms (0.85-1.0) Multimeter and a 100MHz oscilloscope.
750pps ±20
Long-Low PRF (VL) 1.0ms (0.85-1.0)
375pps ±10
Sync. Output: 3 x 75 Ohm outputs
(Downmast)
1 x 75 Ohm output (Upmast
not less than +12V amplitude
Receiver (used for all transceivers):
Type: Logarithmic Receiver
Transfer Characteristics: Nominal
I.F. 60MHz
Video Outputs 3 x 75 Ohm outputs
(Downmast)
2 x 75 Ohm outputs (Upmast)
5.5 peak amplitude.
NOTES:
(1) The PRF oscillator can be preset with a basic frequency
range of 2400 - 3400 Hz (nominal 3000 Hz).
(2) Short pulse can be set to 3000 or 1500 Hz base.

(3) Medium pulse can be set to 1500 or 750 Hz base.
(4) Pulse to pulse jitter can be selected and set to ±15ms

from nominal.

KH 2020
Chap 7a
FUSES INDICATORS
30 References and ratings for the fuses fitted in the PSU 31 Indicators are provided on some PCBs to signify the
are shown in Table 3. conditions outlined in Table 4.
Table 3- Fuse Ratings Table 4 - Indicators
PCB Component Rating Service PCB Component Indication

Ref. Ref.
FS1 5A Modulator Supply +27V PSU LP1 Input Supply Present

PSU Modulator D25 On tune indication
FS2 5A Motor Supply +24V
FS3/FS4 5A 100/110V Input Supply Modulator D32 Transmitter ready
3.15A 200/220V Input Supply Modulator D67 Low voltage power supplies
present

KH 2020
Chap 7a
FAILURE MESSAGE
"NO SYNC" ON DISPLAY
IS THE
ARE
TRANSCEIVER NO
NO CHECK SETTINGS OF LINK & SWITCH SET TO CORRECT
OPERATIVE
LINKS & SWITCHES SETTINGS CORRECT? POSITION
(AUDIBLE ON LP)?
YES YES
SUSPECT PSU
SYNC OUTPUT IS THERE CHECK TRANSCEIVER
NO NO
IS PICTURE ON CONNECTION PROBLEM POWER TO MODULATOR POWER SUPPLY,
DISPLAY? CHECK WIRING IN PCB (LED D67 ON)? MAINS IN NEON ON,
TRANSCEIVER & TO DISPLAY FUSES, OUTPUTS,
YES YES
DISPLAY WARNING FAULT

IS TIMER NO
MODULATOR BOARD
LED (D32) ON)?
FAULT
YES
CHECK SAFETY SWITCH IS

NO ON, CHECK DISPLAY IS SET TO
IS ANTENNA
RUN, CHECK MOTOR SUPPLY,
ROTATING?
CHECK MODULATOR
SS4 IS ON
YES
IS MODULATOR NO SWITCH MODULATOR

S5 SWITCHED ON? S5 ON
YES
IS +12V ON RUN NO
PRE-REQUISITES FAULTY WIRING
INPUT TO MODULATOR?
FROM DISPLAY
1. MAINS ISOLATOR ON
2. DISPLAY POWER ON
3. Tx TIMER ELAPSED
4. INSTALLATION DEFAULTS YES
CORRECTLY SET
5. SET TO RUN
IS MUTE ACTIVE NO
(+12V ON MUTE INPUT)? REMOVE ‘MUTE' CONDITION
YES
FAULT ON MODULATOR
CD-2195
Figure 7a - Transceiver Fault Diagnosis (No Sync)

KH 2020
Chap 7a
FAILURE MESSAGE
"NO VIDEO" ON DISPLAY
IS
DISPLAY TUNE NO
BAR WORKING AS TUNE CHECK CABLING
IS ADJUSTED?
YES
NO IS NO
IS PICTURE ON AT DISPLAY SWITCH ON
CABLING FAULTY?
DISPLAY? "MON"
YES YES
FAULTY CABLING GOOD

DISPLAY WARNING FAULT
SEEK REPAIRS "Tx MON" PLUME? RF HEAD FAULT
(SEE RADAR LOG (TRANSMIT SECTION)
BOOK)
GOOD
"Rx MON" SUN? RECEIVER
(SEE RADAR LOG OR RF HEAD FAULT
BOOK) (RECEIVE SECTION)
PRE-REQUISITES
2. DISPLAY POWER ON
3. Tx TIMER ELAPSED
Tx WORKING CORRECTLY,
4. INSTALLATION DEFAULTS
DISPLAY WARNING CIRCUIT
CORRECTLY SET
FAULT
5. SET TO RUN CD-2196
Figure 8a - Transceiver Fault Diagnosis (No Video)

KH 2020
Chap 7a
FAILURE MESSAGE
"NO AZIMUTH" ON DISPLAY
IS THE
NO SET THE
IS THE ANTENNA NO ANTENNA SAFETY
ANTENNA SAFETY
ROTATING? SWITCH SET TO ON?
SWITCH TO ON
YES YES
IS THERE
NO POWER TO THE
ANTENNA TURNING
MOTOR?
YES
IS NO CHECK/REPLACE
MOTOR TURNING? MOTOR BRUSHES
OR REPLACE MOTOR
YES
CHECK BELT (CAE-A12)

SUSPECT AZ/HL PCB IN THE YES IS POWER PRESENT REPLACE IF BROKEN
TUNING MECHANISM AT THE AZIMUTH PCB? & CHECK GEAR TRAIN
OR WIRING CONNECTION (CAE-A24-4)
NO
ARE THE
TRANSCEIVER CHECK MAINS INPUT
NO NO
POWER SUPPLY OUTPUTS IS PSU NEON ON? FROM DISPLAY OR
PRESENT & INTERSWITCH UNIT
CORRECT?
YES YES
PRE-REQUISITES
2. DISPLAY POWER ON
3. Tx TIMER ELAPSED
4. INSTALLATION DEFAULTS SUSPECT DISPLAY PCB/HL PCB CHECK FUSES/SUSPECT
CORRECTLY SET IN THE TURNING MECHANISM POWER SUPPLY UNIT
5. SET TO RUN
CD-2198
Figure 9a - Antenna Fault Diagnosis (No Azimuth)

KH 2020
Chap 7a
FAILURE MESSAGE
"NO HEADING LINE" ON DISPLAY
IS THE SET THE

NO ANTENNA SAFETY NO
IS THE ANTENNA ANTENNA SAFETY
ROTATING? SWITCH SET TO ON? SWITCH TO ON
YES YES
IS THERE
NO POWER TO THE
ANTENNA TURNING
MOTOR?
YES
SUSPECT AZ/HL PCB IN THE YES IS POWER PRESENT

REPLACE THE MOTOR
TUNING MECHANISM AT THE AZIMUTH PCB?
OR WIRING CONNECTION
NO
ARE THE
TRANSCEIVER CHECK MAINS INPUT
NO IS PSU NEON ON? NO FROM DISPLAY OR
POWER SUPPLY OUTPUTS
PRESENT & INTERSWITCH UNIT
CORRECT?
YES YES
PRE-REQUISITES
2. DISPLAY POWER ON
3. Tx TIMER ELAPSED
4. INSTALLATION DEFAULTS SUSPECT DISPLAY PCB/HL PCB CHECK FUSES/SUSPECT
CORRECTLY SET IN THE TURNING MECHANISM POWER SUPPLY UNIT
5. SET TO RUN
CD-2199
Figure 10a - Antenna Fault Diagnosis (No Heading Line)

KH 2020
Chap 7a
MAINTENANCE Antenna Radiator
32 The following paragraphs describe preventive and CAUTION

corrective maintenance. The Diagnostics (refer to
paragraphs 25 -31) complement this information. When working on the Antenna switch all displays
to OFF.
34 Periodically wipe the antenna front radiating window
using soap and water and a soft non-abrasive cloth.
Transceiver
NOTE:
33 Every six months check the following:
Even a thin layer of soot or dirt may cause serious loss of
(1) The fan is clean and rotates freely radar performance.
(2) All screws, nuts, bolts and plugs are securely
seated and free from corrosion. CAUTION
(3) The turning mechanism rotates smoothly and is
free from vibration. NEVER PAINT the front of the radiating window.
(4) All connectors are securely seated.

KH 2020
Chap 7a
X-Band Motor Brushes Tx Monitor Arm

35 The Antenna Motor brushes are to be checked for 36 Regularly check the following:
wear every 6 Months or 2000 Hours. Gain access to
the motor by removing the side panel of the Turning (1) The Monitor Arm is securely fitted.
Mechanism casing, then examine the brushes for wear and (2) The neon cover is clear.
replace if necessary, refer to Figure 11a.
CD-1256
Figure 11a - Gearbox; Brush Replacement

KH 2020
Chap 7a
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
37 Access to the majority of PCBs is gained by removing
WARNINGS the front panel (six screws) on a downmast unit, or by
removing both side panels (four self retaining bolts) on an
LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THE upmast unit. A length of cord attached between the upmast
EQUIPMENT. THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT FITTED unit side panels prevents them from falling.
WITH SAFETY INTERLOCKS. THEREFORE
ONLY QUALIFIED TECHNICIANS ARE TO GAIN 38 Access to the H/L Azimuth PCB is via the rear panel of
ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF THE the unit.
TRANSCEIVER. 39 The antenna can be prevented from rotating by sliding
SW4 (on the Modulator PCB) to OFF. The Upmast
BEFORE COMMENCING ANY REMOVAL gearbox/transceiver has a safety switch which can be set to
AND/OR REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE OFF from outside the unit. (SW4 on the modulator can be
ENSURE THAT THE WARNINGS AND operated once the side covers are off.
CAUTIONS DETAILED AT THE FRONT OF THIS
MANUAL AND THOSE DETAILED IN TEXT ARE 40 Refer to Figure 12a for graphical aid.
STRICTLY ADHERED TO.
ISOLATE THE TRANSCEIVER BEFORE
REMOVING/REPLACING MODULES.
SET THE TURNING MECHANISM SAFETY
SWITCH TO OFF

KH 2020
Chap 7a
SAFETY
SWITCH
CD-2194
Figure 12a - Upmast X-Band Transceiver
Table 6 - Upmast X-Band Transceiver / Gearbox (10kW

and 25kW)
ITEM DESCRIPTION KELVIN HUGHES

NO Part Number
1 Rotating Joint RAE-A138

2 Rx Monitor Cavity CTX-A130
3 Not Used
4 Not Used
5 Power Unit CTX-A4
6 Receiver CTX-A297
7 Local Oscillator CTX-A129
8 Mixer Diode IN23 WE X-Band 45-666-2419
9 Magnetron CTX-A317
10 Modulator CTX-A201-M (25kW)
CTX-A202 (10kW)
11 RF Head CTX-A251 (25kW)

KH 2020
Chap 7b
CHAPTER 7B
MKV TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Modulator

5 The Modulator provides a high voltage pulsed supply
INTRODUCTION via a pulse width circuit and FET circuit into a pulse
transformer to drive the Magnetron.
1 The MkV Transceiver is available for use with either
t h e l o w sp e e d ( CA E - A 3 0 - 7 ) o r h i g h s p e e d RF Head
(CAE-A30-8) turning mechanisms
6 The RF Head contains the Magnetron, Ferrite
2 The Transceiver can be interfaced with any of the Circulator, Pulse Limiter and Low Noise Front End
Nucleus 3 series displays, via a parallel interface or via (LNFE). The LNFE comprises and RF Amplifier, Local
a Controller Access Network (CAN) Bus Link. The CANbus Oscillator and IF Head Amplifier.
link is interfaced to the transceiver via a Transmitter
Interface Unit (TIU). When a parallel interface is used, the 7 The magnetron energy is fed to the circulator and via
Low Speed Turning Mechanism (CAE-A30-7) uses the the rotating joint to the antenna. The small leakage of
+27V power supply from the display unit to drive the turning power across the circulator, is fed into the pulse limiter and
motor and the High Speed Turning Mechanism (CAE-A30-8) used by the LNFE as a tune signal.
uses an external 40V power supply unit, which is bulkhead
mounted below deck. When the CANbus interface is used, 8 Return signals from the antenna are fed through the
the power supplies for both the low and high speed turning circulator to the limiter and the LNFE, where they are
mechanisms are provided by the Transmitter Interface Unit amplified, mixed and converted to IF levels to interface with
(TIU). The voltage can be set to meet the requirement of the the receiver main IF.
specific turning mechanism.
Azimuth PCB
3 A block diagram of the MkV Transceiver is shown in
Figure 1b. The MkV Transceiver comprises the 9 The Heading Line and Azimuth data are produced by
following main units: the interaction between an opto-interrupter disc and
(1) Terminals PCB sensors located on the PCB.
(2) Modulator
Receiver PCB
(3) Magnetron/RF Head
(4) Azimuth PCB 10 The Receiver amplifies and filters the IF from the RF
Head and then feeds the signal to a cascade
(5) Receiver logarithmic amplifier which produces the video for the
(6) Tx Monitor (Optional) display monitor.
Terminals PCB Brushless Motor PCB (CAE-A30-8 Only)

4 The Terminals PCB feeds the incoming power and 11 The Brushless Motor PCB provides switching of the
data from the display to the other assemblies, 40V supply to drive the motor within the
providing modulator trigger pulses, pulse selection gating, transceiver/tuning mechanism at a constant speed.
antenna switching, voltage regulation and tune voltage. The
PCB also receives the video from the Receiver and feeds
the signals to the display processor.

KH 2020
Chap 7b
UNITS LOCATED WITHIN

TURNING MECHANISM Tx Monitor THESE ITEMS
AERIAL FOR CAE-A30/8
(OPT) ONLY
CTX-A198 40V PSU
CZZ-A22
(LOCATED
DOWNMAST)
AZIMUTH GEARBOX
PCB BRUSHLESS
CAE-A402/3 MOTOR MOTOR PCB
CAE-A236
TO/FROM
DISPLAY TERMINALS RF
VIDEO RECEIVER VIDEO
OR PCB CTX-C356 HEAD MAGNETRON
INTERSWITCH
UNIT OR CTX-A368
IN LINE PSU
POWER
MODULATOR RF POWER
CTX-A332
CD-3711
Figure 1b - Transceiver System Block Diagram
10kW TRANSCEIVER/TURNING MECHANISM

(CAE-A30-7) 28rpm
(CAE-A30-8) 45rpm
ANTENNA - SEE TABLE 1
40V POWER SUPPLY

CZZ-A22 FOR
HIGH SPEED
(CAE-A30/8)
CABLE CODE N
INTERSWITCH BOX
INTERSWITCH BOX
SHIPS MAINS
FROM DISPLAY/
1 PHASE
CABLE K
TO DISPLAY/
CABLE E
DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH BOX
(IN LINE POWER SUPPLY)
CABLE CODE N: 38-CORE

TABLE 1
ANTENNA OPTIONS
1.3m ANTENNA (CAE-A50)*

1.8m ANTENNA (CAE-A13/2)
* NOT TYPE APPROVED
CD-4673
Figure 2b - Transceiver Configuration

KH 2020
Chap 7b
SPECIFICATION DIAGNOSTICS
12 Technical specifications for the MkV Transceivers are 13 The Algorithms detailed in Figures 5b to 7b provide an
provided in Table 1 below. aid to fault diagnosis in the transceiver. Entry to the
algorithms is via Failure Messages generated at the display.
Table 1 - MkV Transceiver Specification
PRE-REQUISITES
Frequency: X (I) -Band 9410±30MHz 14 Before any fault diagnosis and rectification is
implemented, the radar system must be in a standard
Peak Power output: X-Band 10kW nominal configuration, as detailed at the top of the appropriate fault
diagnosis algorithm.
Pulse Length and P.R.F: 10kW FAILURE MESSAGES

Short: (S): 55ns
15 The following failure messages, appear in the data
3000pps* field of the display monitor if certain signals are
missing:
Medium (M) 230ns
"Sync/Video Missing"
1500pps*
Long (L) 600ns "No Azimuth"
750pps* "No Heading Line"

Very Long (VL) 600ns
16 Refer to Figures 5b to 7b, for fault diagnosis algorithms
375pps* associated with these failures.
Sync. Output: 1 x 75 Ohm, not less than
+12V amplitude TEST EQUIPMENT
Receiver (used for all transceivers): 17 Routine field maintenance requires fault location down
to fuse replacement level, or to change suspect
PCBs/Units for known working ones. The only test
I.F. 60MHz equipment required for fault finding is a high impedance
Multimeter and a 100MHz Oscilloscope.
Video Outputs 3 x 75 Ohm, not less than
5.5V peak amplitude.
NOTES:
The PRF Oscillator can be preset with a basic frequency
range of 700Hz to 800Hz (nominally set to 750Hz). Dual
PRF version for high speed craft.

KH 2020
Chap 7b
TEST POINTS (2) Modulator PCB
18 Test Points are located on the following PCBs: TP1 - TR1 Gate Trigger Pulses
(1) Transceiver Terminals PCB TP2 - High Voltage Supply
TP3 - TR5 Gate Drive Pulse
TP4 - MODSYNC Out
TP1 - Dummy Sync pulse astable output
TP5 - HV Current Monitor
TP2 - Gated Sync pulses
TP6 - HV Current Trip Reference Level
TP3 - Video Output
TP7 - Common for TP5
TP4 - Sync Output
TP9 - HV Current Trip Pulse
TP5 - Rx Sync from Modulator
TP10 - LV Current Trip Reference Level
TP6 - 0V signal
TP11 - Magnetron Heater Current Monitor
TP12 - LV Current Trip Fixed Reference Level
TP13 - LV Current Trip Shutdown Pulse
TP14 - HTLO Monitor Output
TP15 - Pulse Transformer Power Drive Pulses
TP1 TP16 - Tail Biter Pulse
TP17 - Main FET Drive Pulses
TP2
TP18 - Power Ground
TP19 - Low if 350V line is over 450V
TP20 - Low Voltage Supply, nominally +14V
PLA TP5
TP21 - Pulse Shaper Circuit Drive Pulses
TP22 - MOD_TRIG from microcontroller
B
LK2
LK1
TP23 - LPRE_PULSE Output

PLC PLD PLE
TP24 - Enable High Voltage
A
TP25 - Drive Pulse to CTX-A339

TP3 TP4
PLF PLG
PLK TP15
TP17
TP6
PLD
TP16
PLL PLN PLM

1
TP11 TP14
TP4
CD-3839
TP25
TP2
TP20 TP5
TP8
Figure 3b - Transceiver Terminals PCB: Test Point
TP6 TP18
TP13 TP7
Locations PLC TP9

TP12
TP19
TP10
TP22 TP3
TP1
TP21
PLE TP24
PLA PLB
CD-3721
Figure 4b - Modulator PCB: Test Point Locations

KH 2020
Chap 7b
PRE-REQUISITES
2. DISPLAY POWER ON
3. Tx TIMER ELAPSED
CORRECTLY SET
5. SET TO RUN
FAILURE MESSAGE
"SYNC/VIDEO
MISSING"
ON DISPLAY
IS THERE
IS THE POWER TO THE
NO NO SUSPECT
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER & 40V
POWER SUPPLY FROM DISPLAY/40V
OPERATIVE?
THE DISPLAY? PSU FAULT
YES YES
IS THE
RECONNECT NO COAXIAL PLUG IS THE NO CHECK THAT
CABLE CONNECTED ON THE ANTENNA SAFETY SWITCH
TERMINALS ROTATING? IS ON
PCB?
YES YES
ARE THE IS THERE

RECEIVER/ POWER TO
NO NOTHE NO
RECONNECT MODULATOR ANTENNA TERMINALS CABLING
CONNECTIONS PCB & MOTOR FAULT
PLUGGED TERMINAL
IN? PCB?
YES YES
TRANSCEIVER
VIDEO/ FAULT
TERMINALS NO NOISE
PCB AT TP3 ON
TERMINALS
PCB?
YES
SUSPECT
DISPLAY
PCBs
CD-3744
Figure 5b - Transceiver Fault Diagnosis (No Sync/No Video)

KH 2020
Chap 7b
PRE-REQUISITES
2. DISPLAY POWER ON
3. Tx TIMER ELAPSED
FAILURE MESSAGE
CORRECTLY SET
5. SET TO RUN "NO AZIMUTH"
ON DISPLAY
NO IS THE
ANTENNA
ROTATING?
YES
SET THE NO IS THE

ANTENNA ANTENNA
SAFETY SWITCH SAFETY SWITCH
TO ON SET TO ON?
YES
REPLACE THE IS THERE

POWER TO THE IS POWER
MOTOR/ YES NO
ANTENNA TURNING PRESENT AT YES
BRUSHLESS
MOTOR/MOTOR THE TERMINALS PCB
MOTOR PCB OR
PCB OR STARTER & TERMINAL
STARTER ASSY
ASSY? BLOCK?
CHECK WIRING
CONNECTIONS
NO
SUSPECT THE
AZIMUTH/HEADING
LINE PCB IN THE
TURNING
MECHANISM
ARE THE
DISPLAY & 40V NO SUSPECT THE
PSU POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
OUTPUTS PRESENT
UNIT
AND CORRECT?
YES
SUSPECT DISPLAY
PCB's OR HEADING
LINE PCB IN THE
TURNING
CD-3745 MECHANISM
Figure 6b - Antenna Fault Diagnosis (No Azimuth)

KH 2020
Chap 7b
PRE-REQUISITES
2. DISPLAY POWER ON
3. Tx TIMER ELAPSED
FAILURE MESSAGE
CORRECTLY SET
5. SET TO RUN "NO HEADING LINE"
ON DISPLAY
NO IS THE
ANTENNA
ROTATING
YES
SET THE IS THE

NO
ANTENNA ANTENNA
SAFETY SWITCH SAFETY SWITCH
TO ON SET TO ON?
YES
IS THERE
REPLACE THE POWER TO THE IS POWER
MOTOR/BRUSHLESS YES ANTENNA TURNING
NO
YES
PRESENT AT
MOTOR PCB MOTOR/MOTOR PCB THE TERMINALS
OR STARTER ASSY OR STARTER PCB?
ASSY?
CHECK WIRING
CONNECTIONS
NOTE; FOR THE HIGH SPEED MOTOR NO
THIS IS THE SWITCHING WAVEFORM,
REFER TO CHAPTER 4 FOR DETAILS
SUSPECT THE
AZIMUTH/HEADING
LINE PCB IN THE
TURNING
MECHANISM
ARE THE
DISPLAY POWER NO SUSPECT THE
SUPPLY OUTPUTS POWER SUPPLY
PRESENT AND UNIT
CORRECT?
YES
SUSPECT DISPLAY
PCB's OR HEADING
LINE PCB IN THE
TURNING
CD-3746 MECHANISM
Figure 7b - Antenna Fault Diagnosis (No Heading Line)

KH 2020
Chap 7b
MAINTENANCE Antenna Motor/Gearbox

21 The antenna motor brushes should be checked every
19 The following paragraphs describe preventive 6 months or 3000 hours, whichever is sooner. (Refer to
m a i n t e n a n c e . Th e d i a g n o st i cs i n f o r m a t i o n Figure 8b). At the same time, check the commutator for
complements this (see paragraphs 13b to 18b). wear. To check, proceed as follows:
(1) Remove the Transceiver Electronics Module,
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE refer to paragraph 30.
(2) Remove the Motor from the Transceiver case.
Antenna Radiator
(3) Remove brushes from the housing and check for
wear, replace with new brushes if necessary.
CAUTION (4) Refit brushes, ensuring brush retaining springs
are in place, and refit the motor into the
Always switch the Radar OFF, and as an transceiver case.
additional precaution, Switch OFF the antenna
safety switch when working on the antenna. 22 The gearbox is lubricated at the factory, and should not
normally require attention.
23 Check that the antenna gearbox mounting bolts are
secure and kept free from corrosion.
20 Periodically wipe the antenna front Radiating window
using soap and water and a soft non-abrasive cloth. Antenna Motor/Gearbox and Brushless Motor
Even a thin layer of soot or dirt can cause serious loss of
radar performance. 24 The High Speed Turning Mechanism/Gearbox and the
Brushless Motor PCB require no preventive
maintenance.
CAUTION
NEVER PAINT the front radiating window
BRUSHLESS MOTOR PCB
PL3
PL2
PL4
DRAZAH EVAW OIDAR

m2 NAHT SSEL TA REGNAD
PL1
CD-3606
Figure 8b - Turning Mechanism: Showing Location of Brushless Motor PCB (CAE-A30-8 only)

KH 2020
Chap 7b
Transceiver Access
25 The Transceiver requires no periodic maintenance. 28 To gain access to PCBs and Modules (refer to
However, whenever the end cover casing is removed Figure 9b):
(for access to the Motor or Transceiver Electronics Module) (1) Remove the four captive screws securing the
ensure that the casting seal is clean and clear of obstacles.
cover to the rear of the Transceiver and remove
Check that all unit screws are secure whilst the casting end
cover is removed. the cover.
(2) Disconnect Plugs PLF, G, K, M and L from the
26 Whenever the Transceiver Electronics Module is Antenna Terminals PCB.
removed, inspect the input cable connections, look for
worn seals/grommets, traces of water, loose connections (3) Remove the four screws securing the RF Head to
and strands of wire. the Rotating Joint.
27 The Transceiver Unit can be isolated in one of the (4) Remove the two bolts securing the Transceiver
following ways: Electronics Module to the sliding rails
(5) The Transceiver Electronics Module can now be
(1) Switching the display OFF. removed from the Transceiver.
(2) Isolating the display.
NOTE:
When refitting any Module/PCB ensure that all
WARNINGS Links/Switch positions are identical to those of the
removed/defective unit.
(1) THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT FITTED WITH SAFETY
INTERLOCKS AND LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE
PRESENT WITHIN THE UNIT. BEFORE REMOVING
ANY SUB-UNIT OR PCB, ALL SUPPLIES MUST BE
SWITCHED OFF.
(2) THE EXTERNAL ISOLATION SWITCH, LOCATED

ON THE TRANSCEIVER CASING, REMOVES THE
+27V MODULATOR SUPPLY INHIBITING THE HIGH
VOLTAGE SUPPLY AND THE +24V AERIAL MOTOR
SUPPLY.
MOTOR START PCB

OR MOTOR DRIVE PCB
AT BACK OF CASTING
ANTENNA MOTOR
TERMINAL BLOCK
TB2
CD-3737
Figure 9b - Transceiver Electronics Module: Access

KH 2020
Chap 7b
PCBs and Modules in the Transceiver 30 The following options are available:
29 The Transceiver contains the following PCBs and Table 3 - Optional PCBs and Modules
Modules:
Table 2 - PCBs and Modules
PCB/Module Identity
Transmitter Monitor PCB CTX-A198

PCB/Module Identity
Sector Mute PCB (Note that Nucleus CTX-A162
Modulator PCB Assembly CTX-A332 displays can drive Sector Mute without
the CTX-A162 option)
Receiver PCB CTX-A356
Receiver Monitor Cavity CTX-A173
Antenna Terminals PCB CTX-A204/3
Monitor Arm CAE-A147
Azimuth PCB CAE-A402/3
Magnetron Assembly CTX-A197 (10kW)
Circulator Assembly 45-646-604
Diode Limiter 45-646-603
Low Noise Front End Assembly CTX-A323
DIODE LIMITER CIRCULATOR RETAINING SCREWS

AZIMUTH PCB CIRCULATOR ASSEMBLY Rx MONITOR CAVITY
SECTOR MUTE PCB

(OPTIONAL)
TRANSCEIVER TERMINALS PCB
TB2
RECEIVER PCB COVER MODULATOR PCB ASSEMBLY COVER

CHASSIS RETAINING SCREWS
CD-3835
Figure 10b - Transceiver Electronics Module

KH 2020
Chap 7b
FILTER
MOTOR
MOTOR STARTER
PCB
CD-3843
Figure 11b - Location of Motor Starter PCB (CAE-A30-7 only)

KH 2020
Chap 7b
AZIMUTH PCB
DIODE LIMITER CIRCULATOR
HEADING LINE ADJUSTMENT TERMINALS PCB

CD-3747
LOCKING SCREW
Figure 12b - Transceiver Electronics Module (Top View)
TRANSCEIVER TERMINALS PCB
TRANSMITTER MONITOR PCB

CD-3840
(OPTION)
Figure 13b - Transceiver Electronics Module (From Base)

KH 2020
Chap 7b
MAGNETRON FIXING SCREWS
MAGNETRON MODULATOR PCB ASSEMBLY

ASSEMBLY
RF HEAD HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT SCREWS
NOTE : MODULATOR PCB ASSEMBLY IS SECURED BY THE FIVE SCREWS AND PILLAR SHOWN
CD-1538
Figure 14b - Modulator PCB Assembly and Magnetron Assembly
LOW NOISE FRONT END AND

DIODE LIMITER FIXING SCREWS
LOW NOISE FRONT END

FIXING SCREWS
RECEIVER ASSY
LOW NOISE
FRONT END
SMB CONNECTORS
RF HEAD HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT SCREWS
CD-3748
Figure 15b - Receiver PCB and Low Noise Front Assembly

KH 2020
Chap 7b
350 000 010

RAD 1 MP PM 340 020
GAIN
SEA
RANGE 12 GYRO 130 deg
RINGS 2
RAIN
330 030 SPD 16.5 kts L(M)
North up
Centred COG 000 deg
CORR 1 320 040
RM(R) SOG 19.0 deg
VIDEO 310
NORM 050 HL STAB SEA
OFF SET SEA
300 060 DRIFT SEA
VECTOR 15 min (R/T)
290 TRAILS 3 min (R/T)
070
CPA LIMIT 2.0 min
TCPA LIMIT 20.0 min
280 080 LAT 050 00.45 N
LON 001 23.45 E
270 090
100
260
110 TARGET 1
250 BRG 039.3º (T)
RANGE 3.3 nm
COURSE 349º (T)
240 120 SPEED 2.7 kts
0.8 CPA 3.2 nm
VRM nm 130 TCPA 2.2 min
OFF 230
105.6
EBL deg 220 140 WAY Pt NAV
OFF
G R
210
150 PLOT MAPS
4 S
A A
E 9 9 200
I
N
5 A
I
N 190 180 170
160 TRIAL VDU
CD-2543
Transmitter Monitor
Figure 16b - Performance Monitor Display

KH 2020
Chap 7c
CHAPTER 7C
MKVI TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA
INTRODUCTION 2 A Soft Start Unit, which is required for both versions of

the transceiver, switches three phase mains to the
antenna motor. A thermal overload trip unit, mounted in the
1 The MkVI Transceiver is available in an Upmast soft start unit, protects the supply to the motor. Access to the
configuration, where the transceiver electronics are trip unit reset button is achieved by removing the soft start
incorporated in the turning mechanism (see Figure1c, unit front cover. The soft start unit can also be fitted with an
below). Two versions are available: in-line single phase mains supply, for installations with long
cable runs, or installations which are interswitched.
(1) Low Speed - 25 rpm.
(2) High Speed - 40 rpm.
S-BAND ANTENNA Mk2

CAE-A36 OR CAE-A39
MONITOR ARM PART OF

CAE-A38 (OPTIONAL) LOC. 11
TX. MON NEON 2 CORE CABLE A
SOFT START UNIT CZZ-A14/2

CONTACTOR TB3
TB1 LOC 1 TRANSCEIVER CAE-A37 CAE-A45
MOTOR AERIAL
SOFT 3 CORE POWER CABLE L 220/440V
3 PHASE MAINS IN PROTECTION & START
START MOTOR GEARBOX
FROM ISOLATOR ISOLATION SWITCH LOC 10
LOC 10 ROTATING JOINT
PLA
AZ/HL PCB
LOC 9
1 PHASE MAINS FROM L DELAY

INLINE
DISPLAY/INTERSWITCH N
E PSU
38 CORE FROM DISPLAY CABLE M
OR INTERSWITCH UNIT
TB5,6 TB4 TB2 PART OF CAE-A38 OPTIONAL
PLA
RX
RF HEAD NOISE
PLC
MONITOR
PLA
RF HEAD DIODE
LOC. 5 LOC. 8
CIRCULATOR
PLB
LIMITER MIXER
PSU CAE-A202
L.N.F.E.
LOC. 2
LOC. 5
PLC
PLA
PLB
HEATSINK
1 TB
TP's
PLC
RECEIVER LOC. 1
PLB HEATSINK LOC. 7
PLB
PLB VIDEO O/P

EXTERNAL TP's PLA
SAFETY SWITCH CTX-A248
LOC.1 4mm MAGNETRON
MODULATOR & PLA
3mm LOC.5
PLA
POWER SUPPLY TUNE SUPPLY

PLK PLA HV MON SUPPLY BRAID PCB
LOC. 4 CTX-A250 PART OF
PLC
PLD
HEATSINK
LOC. 6 38 CORE CABLE
PLB
TERMS
HEATSINK PLJ
CTX-A246
CONTROL CIRCUITS
PLC
Tx MON DETECTOR &
POWER SUPPLY/SIGNAL
(NOT USED EXT. TRIG. IN)
PLH
DISTRIBUTION PANEL
LOC.3 SYNC. O/P
(NOT USED PRE. PULSE O/P)

PLM
PLG
PLJ PLE PLF PLD

NOT USED
FAN
CD-3803
Figure 1c - Upmast Transceiver: Block Diagram

KH 2020
Chap 7c
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION (2) The upmast configuration for interswitched and

long cable installations, is provided with a +27V dc
supply for the transceiver electronics and a three
3 There are two types of upmast configuration: phase supply for the antenna motor, via the soft
(1) The upmast configuration, shown in Figure 2c, is start unit.
provided with a +27V dc supply from a display for
the transceiver electronics, and a three phase
supply via the soft start unit, for the antenna motor.
KELVIN HUGHES
30kW TRANSCEIVER/
TURNING MECHANISM
CABLE: CODE L CABLE: CODE N
SOFT
START
UNIT
CZZ-A14
CABLE: CODE B
CABLE: CODE L
DISPLAY
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
MAINS MAINS
ISOLATOR ISOLATOR
80-261-600 80-261-600
3 PHASE IN 1 PHASE IN
CABLE CODE L
CABLE CODES
TRANSCEIVER ANTENNA CABLE B - 3-CORE SMALL
25rpm CAE-A37 3.9m CAE-A36 CABLE L - 3-CORE POWER
40rpm CAE-A45 2.8m CAE-A39 CABLE N - 38-CORE
CD-1335
Figure 2c - Upmast Transceiver Configuration

KH 2020
Chap 7c
TRANSCEIVER (5) Tune Supply PCB CTX-A250.
(6) HL/AZ PCB CAE-A180 (part of the Antenna
4 The transceiver is fitted with a logarithmic amplifier Turning Mechanism for a Downmast System).
and employs fan cooling for the magnetron, AFC
tuning, a common modulator control design and common (7) Assembly of True Log Receiver CTX-A297.
terminal connections. (8) Magnetron and RF Head with Low Noise Front
5 The transceiver is muted whenever the antenna End.
ceases to rotate. Pulse jitter, muting and sector
transmission are standard facilities, with options for 9 A brief description is also provided for the following:
pre-pulse generation and external synchronisation.
(1) Antenna Turning Mechanism.
6 The transceiver can be interfaced with any of the (2) Safety Switch.
NUCLEUS Series displays.
(3) Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14/* (which also forms part of
7 One VIDEO and one SYNC coaxial output are the system).
accessible.
8 This section provides functional and technical POWER UNIT CAE-A202
descriptions for the electronic units comprising the
MkVI S-Band Transceiver. The Transceiver comprises the 10 A block diagram of the Power Unit CAE-A202 is shown
following electronic units: in Figure 3c.
(1) Power Unit CAE-A202. 11 The Power Unit CAE-A202 comprises PCB CTX-A283
(2) Control/Terminals PCB CTX-A246. mounted on a chassis. A +27 V dc input to the power
unit is normally provided from a display. The power unit
(3) Modulator Unit CTX-A248. generates all the supplies required by the transceiver, from
(4) Rx Monitor PCB CTX-A252 (optional) and Noise the +27 V dc input, using switching regulators.
Diode with Mount.
+27V TO CONTROL BOARD

+15V TO CONTROL BOARD
FILTER GREEN LED

GREEN LED
C19, L4, C2 D18-A
D18-B
FS4
5A
+27V dc
POWER IN FS1 FS2

SWITCHING +15V 3A SWITCHING 2.5A
RF1 FILTER 27V FLT 1 +9.5V MAG. HEATERS
REGULATOR REGULATOR
L5, C21 TO MODULATOR
IC2, L1 IC3, L2
X
LK1
GREEN LED S GREEN LED

D17-A D17-B
FS3
SWITCHING 0.3A
FILTER
HV ON/OFF REGULATOR -15V TO CONTROL BOARD
L5, C46
SW1 IC4, L3
-350V SENSING FEEDBACK

FROM
SPV TRIM SP VOLTS
CONTROL BOARD SWITCH MODE
RV1
CONTROLLER POWER BRIDGE
IC5 TRANSFORMER RECTIFIER
SMOOTHING
POWER T1 WITH RFI
CHOKE &
SENSE V SWITCHES CAPACITORS -350V TO MODULATOR
CAPACITOR
TR1, TR2 & SURGE
27V IN
SET VOLTS SET V SUPPRESSOR
VOLTAGE REF -350 V OUT L1, C31
RV2 D6-9, C24, C25,
FROM IC1 (1400 V PEAK)
C27, C28, R20
SHUTDOWN
CURRENT
SENSE
R26
FROM HV SWITCH SHUTDOWN

HV OFF CURRENT TRIP
CONTROL BOARD CIRCUIT OR GATE
IC6, IC7
TR3 D13, D15
SOFT START SET CURRENT

SENSE TRIP LEVEL
CIRCUIT RV3
CD-1377
SOFT START (INHIBIT TO CONTROL BOARD)
Figure 3c - Power Unit (CAE-A202): Block Diagram

KH 2020
Chap 7c
CONTROL PCB CTX-A246 (Figures 8 and 9) 13 External cables (except power supply) from the
Display/Interswitch Box and the Tx Monitor Arm are
12 A block diagram of the Control PCB is shown in terminated on the Control/Terminals PCB. The PCB
Figures 4c and 5c. receives standby, run, pulse length, tune, Rx monitor and Tx
monitor commands from the display and converts them to
the correct format to produce the triggers for the rest of the
transceiver units.
180
90
SEC
WARM-UP TIMER
LK10
180, 90, 3 SECONDS
IC24, 25, 26, 27
RV4 TIMER SET TX READY
TO DISPLAY
POWER ON
RESET (SHEET 2)
3 SECOND
SELECT PSU INTERRUPT
SENSE
C44, IC28A, B
HV OFF TO
HEATER 1 HV OFF POWER UNIT
HTR I MON SENSE GATING
FROM MODULATOR IC3 IC7A, B, C
TO DUMMY
DUMMY
TRIG PULSE
SYNC GATE
HEADING LINE HEADING LINE GENERATOR
IC7C
FROM GEARBOX SENSE (SHEET 2)
IC21A & LK8 OVERRIDE MUTE OR GATE TO CHARGE
D25, D29, D39 SHUTDOWN
42Hz GATE
MUTE 1 FROM DISPLAY (SHEET 2)
Rx MON MUTE
+24 V TO SOFT
START UNIT
VIA Tx/Rx
FS1 SAFETY
AE MOTOR 0.3A SWITCH
CONTACTOR
SWITCH FROM SOFT
TR2 WITH LK1 START UNIT
SELECTED
RUN From Display FAN ON TO FAN

TR7
L.O. +ve SELECT

FROM RF HEAD
L.O. 9/12V
TO RECEIVER
+15V
LOCAL OSCILLATOR
REGULATOR
IC2 (ADJUSTABLE) R11 R10
SET VOLTAGE
CD-1378 RESISTORS
Figure 4c - Control PCB (CTX-A246): Block Diagram (1)

KH 2020
Chap 7c
TX MONITOR BLOCK
RX MON ON (FROM DISPLAY) ON SWITCH

TR25, TR24
NEON (SIG) TO MONITOR ARM
SENSE
-150V FROM MODULATOR AC COUPLING COMPARATOR TX MON PULSE TO RECEIVER
RESISTOR
C72 IC13A
R121
STORAGE
CAPACITOR
C71
PULSE LENGTH/PRF SWITCHING BLOCK

SOFT START BANDWIDTH
SOFT START FROM MODULATOR GATE & LK2 SWITCHING RECEIVER
IC9A IC9D, TR12
CHARGE
STATE LATCH ENABLE CHARGE CSR1 TR1G
SHUTDOWN
COMPARATOR GATING DELAY TIMER DRIVER CSR1 TRIG TO MODULATOR
GATE
IC8, 12 IC7, 10, 14 MUTE GATE IC5 TR8
IC9B, 11A
(SHEET 1)
42Hz 3KHz
PULSE LENGTH
PRF DIVIDER PRE-PULSE CSR2 TR1G
MP DECODE STATE LATCH PRF TRIG MONO CSR2 TRIG TO MODULATOR
IC17 LK4 DRIVER
LP CIRCUIT IC16 IC15
LK3, 5 PLG TR10
IC9, 11, 18, TP9
PRE-PULSE OPTION DUMMY DUMMY TRIG

POWER ON TRIG. PULSE
DUMMY SYNC DRIVER DUMMY TRIG TO MODULATOR
RESET GENERATOR
GATE (SHEET1) TR4
IC5
WARM-UP TIMER SHEET 1

Rx TRIG FROM MODULATOR
Rx MON Rx TRIG TO Rx
TRIG GATE MON TRIG TO Rx MONITOR
D40, 41
MAG HEATER
RELAY DRIVE HEATER RELAY
TO MODULATOR
RUN IC18, TR11
LK6
EXT TRIG. SYNC
TRIG SELECT 3 kHz OSC 42 Hz OSC

EXT TRIG. LK7, 11, 12 IC22, IC22
IC23
JITTER
ENABLE
LK9, RV1
CD-1379
Figure 5c - Control PCB (CTX-A246): Block Diagram (2)

KH 2020
Chap 7c
MODULATOR UNIT 16 The modulator circuit comprises a Charging Silicon
Controlled Rectifier (SCR) CSR1, Charging Choke L5,
14 A block diagram of the Modulator Unit is shown in Saturable Reactor SL1, Pulse Forming Network, Pulse
Figure 6c, below. Transformer T4, Discharge SCR CSR2, and “Tail Biter” SL2
which is used for short pulses.
15 The modulator unit comprises chassis CTX-A248 and
PCB CTX-A247. This equipment utilises a line type
modulator circuit where the Pulse Forming Network (PFN)
capacitors are charged to double the HT supply by the
resonance of the charging choke with the PFN capacitance.
The line impedance is matched to the magnetron impedance
by the pulse transformer.
RELAY
RELAY RELAY
HEATER
COIL COIL
TURN DOWN
MP RELAY
(FROM CONTROL
BOARD)
LP RELAY
(FROM CONTROL
BOARD)
HEATER TURNDOWN.
(FROM CONTROL
BOARD)
DUMMY TRIGGER SYNC PULSE
SYNC PULSE TO DISPLAY
(FROM CONTROL OR GATE
BOARD) D4, D5
Rx TRIGGER
(TO CONTROL
BOARD)
PULSE FORMING
FROM CHARGE CHARGING BLOCKING HOLD OFF SYNC PULSE NETWORK AND
POWER UNIT CSR1 CHOKE DIODE REACTOR TRANSFORMER RELAYS
-350 V L5 D7 SL1 T1 L1, L2, L3, HEATER
C1 TO C6 TURNDOWN
DC HEATERS
RELAY &
FROM POWER UNIT
RESISTOR
RLC, R4
-150 V
(TO CONTROL TX MON
SUPPLY HEATER
BOARD) SHORT PULSE RFI
TAILBITER FILTER L4
SL2
MON -ve VOLTAGE HEATER
HV MONITOR
(TO CONTROL
MONITOR R5
BOARD)
HEATER I MONITOR
CHARGE
TRIGGER
TRANSFORMER OVERSWING
T3 NETWORK &
PULSE
TRANSFORMER COMPENSATING
CAPACITORS
CSR1 TRIGGER S1
(FROM CONTROL
BOARD)
DISCHARGE
CSR2 TRIGGER DISCHARGE
CSR2 &
(FROM CONTROL TR2
PRIMING MAGNETRON
BOARD) TRANSFORMER MAGNETRON LEADS
CIRCUIT
CD-3823
Figure 6c - Modulator Unit (A247/248): Block Diagram

KH 2020
Chap 7c
RECEIVER MONITOR CTX-A252 TUNE SUPPLY PCB CTX-A250
17 A block diagram of the Receiver Monitor PCB is shown 19 This board is used to dc offset the Receiver AFC tuned
in Figure 7c, below. output voltage (approximately 5.5V) to the voltage
required to tune the Low Noise Front End (approximately
18 The Rx Monitor circuit utilises a noise diode fitted in the 12V).
receiver waveguide branch of the RF Head Circulator.
When enabled, the noise diode is switched on for a sector of
the Display Azimuth. The ratio of the Receiver noise to the HL PCB CAE-A180
noise diode output is compared using a ramp, which
provides a time related noise sector. As the noise ratio 20 Heading Line and Azimuth data is produced by
reduces the noise sector becomes a shorter radius on the interrupting two opto-coupler devices with a slotted
display. The noise sector is split into ‘fingers’ to enable it to disk mounted on the antenna final drive shaft.
stand out from the Tx Monitor plume and any land masses.
HEADING LINE FROM

CONTROL PCB 180 START
PULSE COUNTER COMPARATOR
AZIMUTH FROM IC4, 6 IC1, 5
CONTROL PCB
START/STOP
DATA LINES
SW1
Tx MUTE TO
CONTROL PCB
START/STOP
STOP START PULSE WEDGE
INHIBIT ENVELOPE
COMPARATOR STOP PULSE FLIP FLOP
TR3 FLIP FLOP
IC7, 8 IC2B
IC2A
+15V
AND GATE CURRENT
D5, 7, 10 SOURCE
Rx MON ON FROM TR1
CONTROL PCB
100 ms RAMP
OPTO COUPLER COMPARATOR DIFFERENTIATOR
Rx TRIG FROM MONOSTABLE
IC11 C12 IC9 C8, R18, IC10C
CONTROL PCB IC12A
VIDEO IN RF FILTER ANALOGUE NOISE FLOOR NOISE FLOOR NOISE DIODE

FROM RECEIVER L1, L2 SWITCH INTEGRATOR LEVEL BUFFER DRIVER TO RF HEAD
C16, 17, 18 IC13 R27, C15 IC14 TR2, 4 LK1 NOISE DIODE
CD-3848
Figure 7c - Receiver Monitor PCB (CTX-A252): Block Diagram

KH 2020
Chap 7c
LOG RECEIVER (CTX-A297) 28 The HL PCB (CAE-A180) is mounted so that the
slotted disc rotates within the opto-coupler slots on the
21 A block diagram of the Log Receiver Assembly is PCB.
shown in Figure 8c, below.
29 The PCB is fitted to an adjustable mounting bracket
22 The Receiver comprises a logarithmic IF amplifier, assembly. Loosening the mounting pillars allows the
Automatic Frequency Control (AFC) circuitry and assembly to be moved positive or negative six degrees for
tuning indicator circuitry. fine heading line adjustment. The slotted disc can be rotated
if the fine adjustment is not enough.
23 Received radar returns are mixed in the RF head with
the local oscillator output to provide a 60 MHz 30 For Upmast Transceivers, the casing also contains the
Intermediate Frequency (IF) which is applied to the receiver RF head and electronic units. The coaxial cable
input SKC. access hole is fitted with a bung.
ANTENNA TURNING MECHANISM SAFETY SWITCH
24 Two versions are provided 31 An ON/OFF switch located by the cable entries on the
outside of the case provides safety isolation of the
(1) 25rpm antenna motor when the switch is set to the OFF position.
(2) 40rpm Power is provided from the motor, thus also disabling the
transmitter when the switch is set to OFF
25 The 25 rpm and 40 rpm versions are fitted with
different motors.
26 The basic unit contains the Antenna Motor, Gearbox,
RF Rotating Joint and Mount for the Antenna.
27 A slotted disc on the final drive provides 180 azimuth
pulses and a heading line pulse per revolution of the
antenna.
+14V -14V
+14V
-14V
0V
3 x VIDEO
I/P AMP & SELECTABLE OUTPUT
5 STAGE 3 STAGE DETECTOR LOWPASS IC2
I/F BANDPASS BANDPASS VIDEO
LOG AMP LOG AMP TR33/TR37 FILTER VIDEO AMP
FILTER TR34 FILTER
I/F SCR. VID.SCR.
BAND SELECT
IC6
IC5
SAMPLE IC3 AMP IC3 SUM LNFE TUNE
DISCRIMINATOR
& HOLD
MOD SYNC.
TUNE
IC4
TUNE INDICATOR
TUNE AMP
CD-2184
Figure 8c - Log Receiver Assembly CTX-A297: Block Diagram

KH 2020
Chap 7c
SOFT START UNIT CZZ-A14 (/2) 34 As the contactor switches on, its auxiliary contact
connects the coil supply voltage to IC1 on the Control
32 A block diagram of the Soft Start Unit is shown in PCB, providing a 1.5 s delay at switch on.
Figure 9c, below.
35 At the end of the1.5 s delay, the output from IC1 goes
33 The soft start unit comprises a three phase contactor, low, causing transistor TR1 to switch off, transistor
thermal overload, three sets of power resistors and a TR2 to turn on and Relays RLB, RLC and RLD to energise.
controlling PCB. At switch on, the contactor coil is energised The relays short out the resistor chain to apply full current to
via the transceiver Control PCB CTX-A246 and the gearbox the motor.
safety switch. The coil current is fed through the thermal
overload switch to the contactor coil, which turns ON. The 36 The CZZ-A14/2 version of the Soft Start Unit, used for
three phase supply to the motor passes through the current interswitched installations, or installations with 60m+
limiting resistor chain to reduce the motor start torque. cable runs, is provided with a mains power supply and
terminal blocks for use as an in-line power unit.
37 The neon indicators for the three phase supply are
provided with series resistors which can be shorted out
to allow for different motor voltages.
CURRENT AND CONTACTOR STARTING

PHASE SENSING CURRENT LIMITING
CON 1
OVERLOAD RESISTORS
3 PHASE
3 PHASE RL1 TO
MAINS IN R3, 20 AERIAL MOTOR
MAINS IN R4, 21
NEON & R5, 22
440/220V LINK
MOTOR ON
CONT +ve KEY-SWITCH STARTER ON NEON &
LED 440/220V LINK
CONTACTOR
RLB
RLC
SOFT START RLD
OVER LED
VOLTAGE RELAY DRIVER

0.5 sec TIMER RELAYS RLB,
REGULATOR TR1, 2
IC1 RLC & RLD
R12, D5
0V
0V
3 PHASE SWITCHING PCB CZZ-A159
NOTE: CZZ-A14/2 HAS AN ADDITIONAL MAINS POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND TERMINAL BLOCK
FITTED TO VERSION CZZ-A14/2
PSU 27V
SINGLE PHASE MAINS TB4
(+27V)
TB5 38 CORE
25 CORE FROM DISPLAY
OR INTERSWITCH UNIT TO TRANSCEIVER
TB6
UHF CONNECTOR
SYNC COAX
UHF CONNECTOR
VIDEO COAX
CD-1382
Figure 9c - Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14/*: Block Diagram

KH 2020
Chap 7c
SPECIFICATION DIAGNOSTICS
38 Technical specifications for MkVI Transceivers are 39 The Algorithms in this chapter provide an aid to fault
provided in Table 1, below. diagnosis in the transceiver. The algorithms enable
fault diagnosis down to module level and also identify wiring
faults. Entry to the algorithms is via Failure Messages
Table 1 - Specification generated by the display.
PRE-REQUISITES
Frequency: 3050 ± 10MHz
40 Before any rectification is implemented, the radar
Peak Power 30kW nominal
output:
system must be in a standard configuration, as shown
at the top of the algorithm.
Pulse Length and FAILURE MESSAGES

P.R.F:
41 These failure messages appear in the data field of the
Short: (S): Nominal 0.055ms display monitor if certain signals are missing. See
Table 2 for details.
1500pps ± 40 or 3000pps ± 100
Medium (M) Table 2 Failure Messages

Nominal 0.25ms
750pps ± 20 or 1500pps ± 40
Long (L) Nominal 0.95ms
750pps ± 20 SIGNAL FAILURE SIGNAL FAILURE

MESSAGE MESSAGE
Long-Low PRF Nominal 0.95ms
(VL) Sync. No Sync. Azimuth No Azimuth
375pps ± 10 Video No Video Heading Line No Heading
Sync. Output: 1 x 75 Ohm output, not less than +12V Line
amplitude
Receiver (used for all transceivers):
Type: Logarithmic Receiver 42

Fault diagnosis algorithms covering these failures are
I.F. 60MHz provided in Figures 10c to 17c.
Video Outputs 1 x 75 Ohm, +5.5V to 6V peak
amplitude.
System Overall Nominal 4.5dB

Noise Figure
Operating Temperature Ranges:
Turning
Mechanism,
Upmast
Transceiver:
Ambient Range: -250C to +700C
95% Humidity +400C
NOTE
(1) The PRF oscillator can be preset with a basic frequency
range of 2400 - 3400 Hz (nominal 3000 Hz).
(2) Short pulse can be set to 3000 or 1500 Hz base.
(3) Medium pulse can be set to 1500 or 750 Hz base.
(4) Pulse to pulse jitter can be selected and set to ±15ms

from nominal.

KH 2020
Chap 7c
TEST EQUIPMENT INDICATORS
43 Routine field maintenance requires fault location down 44 Indicators provided on PCBs are detailed in Table 4,
to fuse replacement level. The only test equipment below.
required for fault finding is a high impedance Multimeter. The
location and rating of fuses is detailed in Table 3, below. Table 3 - Indicators
Table 4 Fuses
PCB Component Indication
Ref.
FUSE No LOCATION RATING

PSU D18-A +15 V Low Supply
FS1 Power Unit Resettable
PSU D18-B +9.5 V Low Supply
PSU D17-A +6 V Low Supply
PSU D17-B -15 V Low Supply
FS1 Control Board Resettable
Control D4 Heater current OFF
FS1 Soft Start Unit Time Lag 5A for 220V
CZZ-A14/2 Time Lag 6.3A for 110V Control D6 +27V OK
Control D17 Tune Indicator
Control D24 prf ON
Control D26 Mute ON
Control D27 HL I/P OK
Control D36 Tx Ready

KH 2020
Chap 7c
START
DISPLAY ON
YES
AFTER 3 MINUTES SWITCH TO RUN
Tx READY?
NO
FAILURE MESSAGE FAILURE MESSAGE

IS +27V SUPPLY NO NO SYNC NO AZIMUTH
CHECK +27V FROM DISPLAY
AVAILABLE AT Tx? NO VIDEO NO HEADING LINE
OR IN-LINE PSU & CABLES
YES
TO FIGURE 3 TO FIGURE 2
ARE ALL
NO 4 PSU PCB LEDs ON & NO DISCONNECT PSU
ARE PSU LEDs ON? +27V LED (ON CONTROL PLB & PLC. SWITCH OFF
BOARD) OFF? TO COOL FUSE LINKS
YES YES
CHECK CONNECTIONS ARE ALL

TO CONTROL PANEL 4 PSU PCB LEDs ON & NO
CHECK THAT PSU FAULT
PSU SW1 IS ON +27V LED (ON CONTROL
REPAIR CONNECTIONS BOARD) OFF?
WHERE NECESSARY
YES
CONNECT PLB & PLC.

DISCONNECT ALL BOARDS
FROM CONTROL PCB
RETRY
ARE ALL
4 PSU PCB LEDs ON & NO
+27V LED (ON CONTROL CONTROL PCB FAULT
BOARD) OFF?
YES
CONNECT OTHER UNITS

ONE AT A TIME
TO FIND FAULTY UNIT
CD-0293
REPLACE FAULTY UNIT
25.04.01
Figure 10c - Flowchart 1

KH 2020
Chap 7c
FROM FIGURE 1
FAILURE MESSAGE
NO AZIMUTH
NO HEADING LINE
YES
IS THE ANTENNA FAULT IN HL PCB
TURNING? OR INTERCONNECTIONS
NO
IS
NO
TURNING MECHANISM
SWITCH ON
SAFETY SWITCH ON?
YES
NO
IS SOFT START UNIT
SWITCH ON
SWITCHED ON?
YES
ARE ALL
NO IS MAINS IN NO
FOUR SOFT START
INDICATOR ON? CHECK 3-PHASE SUPPLY
INDICATORS ON?
YES YES
CHECK WIRING, SWITCH S1

IS STARTER ON NO HAS THERMAL NO (ON CONTROL BOARD) ON,
INDICATOR ON? OVERLOAD TRIPPED? RUN SIGNAL TO
TRANSCEIVER
YES YES
RESET WITH BLUE BUTTON
NO 3-PHASE
IS SOFT START OVER
SWITCHING PCB FAULT
INDICATOR ON?
OR CONNECTION FAULT
YES
IS MOTOR ON NO HAS THERMAL YES

INDICATOR ON? OVERLOAD TRIPPED? RESET WITH BLUE BUTTON
YES NO
CD-0294 FAULTY WIRING TO AE

25.04.01 MOTOR OR MOTOR FAULT

KH 2020
Chap 7c
FROM FIGURE 1
FAILURE MESSAGE
NO SYNC SET TO LONG PULSE
NO VIDEO
POOR SIGNALS
NO SYNC NO VIDEO
BUT NO VIDEO WARNING
TO FIGURE 4
ARE
RECEIVER
ARE CO-AX CABLE NO REPAIR FAULTY ARE CO-AX CABLE YES CONNECTIONS OK NO
CONNECTIONS OK? CO-AX CABLE CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS OK? FROM LOW NOISE FRONT RECEIVER FAULT
END & CABLE-
FORMS?
YES NO YES
CHECK CONTROL REPAIR FAULTY CO-AX

CABLE CONNECTION(S) REPAIR CONNECTIONS
BOARD LEDs
SET TO STANDBY BY
SWITCHING OFF GEARBOX
IS LED D4 OFF NO NO NO
SAFETY SWITCH
(HEATER CURRENT OK)? IS PSU +9.5V LED ON? IS PSU +9.5V LED ON? PSU FAULT
REMOVE PSU PLC
YES YES YES
INTERCONNECTION INTERCONNECTION
CHECK CONTROL
OR MAGNETRON HEATER OR MAGNETRON HEATER
BOARD LEDs
OPEN CIRCUIT SHORT CIRCUIT
NO
IS LED D26 OFF SET SWITCH S1 TO ON
(MUTE OFF)? HL OVERRIDE FAULT MUTE INPUT FROM
Rx MON PCB
YES
NO
NO SET LK8 (CCT REF E6)

IS PSU +27V LED ON? IS PSU SWITCHED ON?
TO TEST REMOVE CONTROL
BOARD SKF
YES YES
SWITCH TO STANDBY BY
SWITCHING OFF IS LED D26 OFF NO NO IS LED D26 OFF
PSU FAULT CONTROL BOARD FAULT
GEARBOX SAFETY SWITCH, (MUTE OFF)? (MUTE OFF)?
THE AE WILL STOP
YES YES
TURN AE AWAY FROM YOU.

SWITCH CONTROL BOARD S1 Rx MON PCB FAULT OR
OFF (AE TURNING INHIBIT). CABLE FAULT
CABLEFORM FAULT
SET CONTROL BOARD LK8
(CCT REF E6) TO TEST.
SET TO RUN.
SAFETY SWITCH ON
IS AT RUN,
MODULATOR FIRING? NO NO NO IS PSU NO
INTERMITTENT NOTE? IS -350V AT PSU PLC-2,
(CONTINUOUS AUDIBLE PLB-10 AT LEAST +10V CONTROL BOARD FAULT
WRT TO CHASSIS OK?
NOTE, 800MHz) WRT CHASSIS?
YES YES YES YES
IS THERE
A MODULATOR IS PSU
NO CABLEFORM MODULATOR NO
PLC CONNECTOR OR MODULATOR FAULT PLB-9 AT LEAST 1V PSU FAULT
CONNECTON FAULT TO OR CONTROL BOARD FAULT
CONNECTOR? WRT CHASSIS?
YES YES
PSU FAULT
OR CONTROL BOARD FAULT CD-0295
REPAIR FAULT OR MODULATOR FAULT
25.04.01

KH 2020
Chap 7c
POOR SIGNALS
BUT NO VIDEO WARNING
SWITCH MON ON
AT DISPLAY 12m RANGE
IS Tx MON NO
PLUME GOOD? POOR MAGNETRON
(5 MILES) OR WAVEGUIDE FAULT
YES
ARE
Rx MON
FINGERS GOOD? IF 3 MILES OR LESS
NO
(3 MILES OR MORE RADIUS.
ADJUST TUNE FOR FAULTY LIMITER,
STRONGEST LNFE, OR RECEIVER
SIGNAL)
YES
SIGNAL STRENGTH
NOT AFFECTED BY TUNE
CONTROL. TUNE INDICATOR
NOT WORKING
SET TO STANDBY USING

SAFETY SWITCH
CHECK VOLTAGE AT TUNE

SUPPLY PCB
IS VOLTAGE AT NO IS VOLTAGE AT YES

TP2 +12V w.r.t. CHASSIS? DISCONNECT SKB TP2 +12V w.r.t. CHASSIS? FAULTY LNFE ASSEMBLY
FROM TUNE PCB
YES NO
AFTER
IS 12V FROM
CHECK VOLTAGE AT NO DISCONNECTING NO
CONTROL BOARD
CONTROL BOARD SKD CONTROL BOARD FAULT
TUNE SUPPLY PCB PRESENT AT PLD-8?
IS PLD-8 9V?
YES YES
IS VOLTAGE AT YES USE METER PROBE TO

TP1 APPROX 9.5V +11V FAULTY LNFE ASSEMBLY TUNE SUPPLY PCB FAULT SHORT PLD PINS 8 & 7
w.r.t. CHASSIS? TOGETHER.
NO
ADJUST DISPLAY TUNE YES NO

(ONLY POSSIBLE DURING FAULTY TUNE SUPPLY PCB,
IS 12V PRESENT? CONTROL BOARD FAULT
WARM UP TIME WITH OR FAULTY CONNECTIONS
TRANSMISSION INHIBITED)
CAN
TUNE INPUT
NO . DOES NO TO CONTROL PCB NO
IS TP1 BETWEEN +3V DISCONNECT SKB PLB-2 BE VARIED BETWEEN DISPLAY OR
VOLTAGE AT TP1
& +13V MIN? FROM TUNE SUPPLY PCB CHANGE? 0 & -10 VIA THE DISPLAY INTERCONNECTION FAULT
DURING WARM
UP?
YES YES YES
RECEIVER OR CD-0296
RECEIVER FAULT FAULTY LNFE ASSEMBLY
CABLEFORM FAULT 25.04.01

KH 2020
Chap 7c
WARNING
THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT FITTED WITH
SAFETY INTERLOCKS AND LETHAL VOLTAGES
ARE PRESENT WITHIN THE UNIT.
ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF THE
TRANSCEIVER IS ONLY TO BE IMPLEMENTED
BY A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN
45 The Transceiver requires no preventive maintenance,
however periodically (around every 6 months) check
that all screws, nuts and bolts are secure and free from
corrosion, and wipe the scanner clean using a soft cloth with
mild detergent.
46 Every 12 months open the transceiver and check that
the inside connections are secure and free from
corrosion.

KH 2020
Chap 7c
HEADING LINE PCB
MODULATOR ASSEMBLY
ELECTRONIC
ASSEMBLY
(HINGED DOWN)
RECEIVER BOARD
RF HEAD ASSEMBLY
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
ROTATING JOINT
CONTROL BOARD
CD-0282
Figure 14c - Upmast Transceiver: Module Locations

KH 2020
Chap 7c
CD-2412
Figure 15c - Control PCB: Links, Switches, Potentiometers and Test Points

KH 2020
Chap 7c
CD-2413
Figure 16c - Modulator PCB - Switches & Test Points

KH 2020
Chap 7c
CD-2414
Figure 17c - Rx Monitor PCB - Links, Switches, Potentiometers & Test Points

KH 2020
Chap 7c
TP6
TP5 TP1
PLA
TP8
TP12
TP9
TP11
ON
S1
RV2
RV3
OFF
RV1 TP10
LK1
TP2
PLB
PLC
TP4
CD-2415
Figure 18c - Power Supply PCB - Links, Switches, Potentiometers & Test points

KH 2020
Chap 7c

KH 2020
Chap 7d
CHAPTER 7D
MKVII TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA (S-BAND)
INTRODUCTION 4 The magnetron energy is fed via a circulator and a

semi-rigid coaxial cable run to the rotating joint located
1 The MkVII S-Band Transceivers are available in a in the turning mechanism and onto the antenna. Received
downmast configuration only, where the transceiver signals from the antenna are routed via the rotating joint and
electronics are remote from the turning mechanism, being coaxial cable to the circulator. Within the transceiver the
located in a separate enclosure located below deck. received signals are routed from the circulator to the RF
limiter, bandpass filter and low noise front end to the
2 The configuration, shown in Figures 1d and 2d, is Logarithmic receiver.
provided with a single phase mains input to the
transceiver, which provides dc supplies for the turning 5 The transceiver is normally muted whenever the
motor. antenna ceases to rotate. Pulse jitter, muting and
sector transmission are standard facilities, with options for
pre-pulse generation and external synchronisation.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
6 The transceiver can be interfaced with any of the
3 The Transceiver (CTX-A9) is fitted with a logarithmic Nucleus Series displays. In addition, facilities are
amplifier with AFC and employs fan cooling for the provided for interfacing with the display via a Controller Area
magnetron and modulator. Network (CAN) bus link.
Tx Monitor ANTENNA
(OPT)
TURNING MECHANISM
(CAE-A41 OR CAE-A42)
AZIMUTH GEARBOX
PCB
SAFETY
SOFT MOTOR
3 PHASE
SWITCH POWER
START
MAINS INPUT UNIT
TRANSCEIVER (CTX-A9)
NOISE
DIODE
(OPT)
SYNC
TX MICRO-
CONTROLLER RF
CONTROL
PCB LOGARITHMIC
TO/FROM RECEIVER HEAD MAGNETRON
DISPLAY IF
VIDEO
EMC 25 kW FET POWER

MAINS POWER UNIT
INPUT FILTER MODULATOR
CD-4029
Figure 1d - S-Band (CTX-A9): Block Diagram

KH 2020
Chap 7d
KELVIN HUGHES
TURNING
MECHANISM
CABLE: CODE L
COAXIAL CABLE
CABLE: CODE E
SEMI-RIGID
SOFT
START
UNIT
S BAND
TRANSMITTER CABLE:
(CTX-A9) CODE K 1 PHASE IN
38-CORE CABLE (NUCLEUS 2 OR 3)
12-CORE CABLE (NUCLEUS 3)
INTERSWITCH
DISPLAY
UNIT (OPTIONAL)
CABLE: CODE B
CABLE CODE L
OR DIRECT
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
MAINS MAINS
ISOLATOR ISOLATOR
80-261-600 80-261-600
3 PHASE IN
CABLE CODE L 1 PHASE IN
CABLE CODES
TURNING MECHANISM ANTENNA CABLE A - 2 CORE SMALL
CABLE B - 3 CORE SMALL
25rpm CAE-A42 3.9m CAE-A36 CABLE E - 12 CORE
CABLE K - 2 CORE POWER
40rpm (minimum) CAE-A41 2.8m CAE-A39 CABLE L - 3 CORE POWER
CABLE N - 38 CORE
CD-4035 CABLE S - 10 CORE + 2 COAXIAL
Figure 2d - Typical System Configuration S-Band (CTX-A9)

KH 2020
Chap 7d
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Receiver Circuits
7 The S-Band downmast transceiver and antenna 16 The received RF radar returns are passed from the
comprise a transceiver which is bulkhead mounted, antenna to the circulator, which routes them to the
and a mast mounted turning mechanism in a weatherproof Diode (RF) Limiter and Low Noise Front End (LNFE). The
compartment, with antenna attached. A Functional diagram LNFE produces a 60 MHz IF signal which is passed to the
for the S-Band transceiver, turning mechanism and antenna Logarithmic Receiver PCB (CTX-A356), mounted in
are provided in Figure 8d, and the interconnections are Receiver Assembly (CTX-A364), providing shielding of the
shown in Figure 9d. PCB from high power RF signals. The Logarithmic Receiver
provides two video outputs for use by the displays and one
for the Rx Monitor in the Transceiver.
DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVER
17 A Tx Mon pulse is injected into the video signal to
Transmitter Circuits indicate, on the displays, that sufficient power is being
transmitted.
8 The Transceiver uses a 30 kW magnetron to generate
the RF output. The magnetron is driven by the 30 kW 18 The Logarithmic Receiver provides tuning control of
FET Modulator (CTX-A369), which consists of a 30 kW the LNFE and a tune indication signal to the Tx
Modulator PCB (CTX-A345) mounted on a chassis together Microcontroller PCB. The Logarithmic Receiver provides the
with the high power components, heatsink and RF shield. regulated DC supply for the Low Noise Front End.
9 The 30 kW Modulator provides the following functions: Control Circuits
(1) A 300V power supply. 19 The Tx Microcontroller PCB (CTX-A346) provides
(2) Driver circuits for the modulator FETs. overall control of the transceiver using a
microprocessor, and interfaces with the Display. Commands
(3) The FET modulator which drives the magnetron
to and from the Display may be provided by one of the
(these FETs are chassis mounted on the following:
heatsink).
(4) Associated control and protection circuits. (1) Parallel inputs and outputs to a standard
NUCLEUS display.
10 A switch on the 30 kW Modulator PCB enables the
+27V supply to the 300V power supply to be switched (2) Serial link to the display via an RS232 connection.
off for maintenance purposes (it is normally set to ON). The (3) Serial link to the display via a CAN bus
status of the power supply is indicated by LEDs mounted on connection.
the PCB as follows:
(1) When the +27V is disconnected the GREEN 300V 20 The status of the control circuits is indicated by a
SAFE LED is lit (ie the switch is set to OFF). number of LEDs as follows:
(2) When +27V is applied to the 300V power supply (1) The PROCESSOR RUNNING LED flashes when
the YELLOW 300V UNSAFE LED is illuminated the microprocessor is running normally.
(ie the switch is set to ON).
(2) The HEATER OK LED is lit when the magnetron
(3) When the presence of the 300V output is detected heater circuits are operational.
the RED 300V ACTIVE LED is illuminated.
(3) The TUNE LED is lit when the tune signal is
11 The status of the power supply is monitored by the produced by the logarithmic receiver.
protection circuits and the supply is switched off if an
overvoltage is sensed. (4) The EXT TRIG LED is lit when an external trigger
pulse is detected.
12 The modulator magnetron drive automatically adjusts
to compensate for variations in magnetron Power Supplies and Cooling
characteristics and to allow for the effects of the magnetron
ageing. Control and protection circuits provide protection of 21 The dc supplies for the Transceiver, with the exception
the magnetron from overvoltages, etc. of the 300V for the modulator are provided by a Power
Supply Unit (45-677-124). The mains input is fed to the
13 The type of magnetron is detected and for this power supply via an EMC filter to prevent interference pulses
application as an S-band magnetron is used the RED from the transceiver circuits being conducted out onto the
S-BAND LED is lit indicating S-band. supply lines. The input is also protected against incoming
high voltage spikes. The power supply provides the following
14 The RED HEATER TURNDOWN LED is lit when the DC supplies for the Transceiver and Turning Mechanism:
heater is switched off due to a fault being detected.
(1) +27V to drive the 300V power supply.
15 The output from the magnetron is passed via a
circulator to the rotating joint and the antenna. (2) +27V for general use.
(3) +15V.
(4) +5V.
(5) -15V.
22 Cooling of the transceiver is provided by two fans. One
is located within the electronics unit and provides
forced air cooling of the whole transceiver. The second fan is
mounted on the front of the electronics unit and provides
cooling for the high power components in the 25kW
Modulator.

KH 2020
Chap 7d
RF Head
23 The RF Head contains a Noise Source, Circulator,
Diode Limiter, Bandpass Filter and Low Noise Front
End (LNFE). The LNFE (CAE-A217) comprises an RF
Amplifier, Balanced Mixer, Local Oscillator and IF Head
Amplifier.
24 The Magnetron (CTX-A309) does not form part of the
RF Head, but functionally completes the RF path.
Antenna Turning Mechanism

25 A separate Antenna Turning Mechanism is required
for the Downmast Transceiver. The downmast
transceiver can be used with the MkVI Turning Mechanism
(refer to Chapter 7c for further information), or the Mk VII
Turning Mechanism (refer to publication KH1253 for further
information).

KH 2020
Chap 7d
SPECIFICATION Receiver:
26 The technical specifications for the MkVII S-band
Transceiver are as follows:
S-Band
Transmitter:
I.F. 60 MHz
S-Band Video Output: 2 x 75W

+5.5V to 6V peak signal
Frequency: 3050 ±10 MHz System Overall
Noise Figure Nominal 4.5 dB
Magnetron 30 kW nominal
Rating:
Pulse length and Short(S) nominal 0.055ms
P.R.F: 3000pps ±100 Operating Temperature S-Band
Ranges:
Medium(M) nominal l 0.2 ms Turning Mechanism:
1500 pps ±40
Ambient Temperature Range: -25oC to +70oC
Long(L) nominal Humidity: 95% at +40oC
0.9 ms Downmast Transceiver:
750 pps ±20
Ambient Temperature Range: -15°C to +55°C
Long-Low Humidity: 95% at +40°C
PRF(VL) nominal 1.0ms
375 pps ±10
CAE-A30-5 and CAE-A30-6
Turning Mechanism
Azimuth Data: 90 pulses per revolution
Pulse to Pulse This will normally be activated and is ±15 ms
Jitter: from nominal period. This function can be Heading Data: 1 pulse per revolution
inhibited.
27 The PRF and Pulse Length can be set to other values

via the RS232 link. Input Power: S-Band
28 The above values are the nominal settings.
Input Power Single Phase: 110V/220V ac input
29 Receiver specifications are detailed overleaf.
Input Power 3-Phase:
Low Speed: 0.55kW 0.75kVA
High Speed: 2.2kW 3kVA

KH 2020
Chap 7d
DIAGNOSTICS FAILURE MESSAGES
30 The Algorithms in this chapter provide an aid to fault 32 These failure messages appear in the data field of the
diagnosis in the transceiver. The algorithms enable display monitor if certain signals are missing. See
fault diagnosis down to module level and also identify wiring Table 1 for details.
faults. Entry to the algorithms is via Failure Messages
generated by the display. Table 1 - Failure Messages
PRE-REQUISITES
31 The diagnostic routines in the flow charts assume that
the radar has been working, and that the system is set SIGNAL FAILURE SIGNAL FAILURE
up for normal operation at the time the fault occurred. MESSAGE MESSAGE
Sync. No Sync. Azimuth No Azimuth
Video No Video Heading Line No Heading

Line
33
Fault diagnosis algorithms covering these failures is
provided in Figure 10d sheets 1 and 2.
Test Equipment
34 Routine field maintenance requires fault location down
to fuse replacement level. The only test equipment
required for fault finding is a high impedance Multimeter.
Table 2 - Fuses
FUSE No LOCATION RATING
FS1 Tx Microcontroller PCB Resettable

KH 2020
Chap 7d
Preparation for Fault Diagnosis
WARNING
THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT FITTED WITH SAFETY INTERLOCKS AND LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE
PRESENT WITHIN THE UNIT.
ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF THE TRANSCEIVER IS ONLY TO BE PERMITTED
FOR QUALIFIED TECHNICIANS.
CAUTIONS
(1) Handling Of Electrostatic Sensitive Semiconductor Devices.

Semiconductor devices used in the equipment are liable to damage due
to static voltage. Observe the following precautions when handling
these devices in their unterminated state, or modules containing these
devices.
Persons removing modules from an equipment using these devices
should be earthed by a wrist strap and a resistor.
Soldering irons used during repair operations must be low voltage
types with earth tips and isolated from the mains voltage by a double
insulated transformer.
Outer clothing worn must be unable to generate static voltages.
Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) fitted with these devices must be stored
and transported in anti-static bags.
For detailed information, refer to British Standard BS 5783 or other
equivalent standard.
(2) Use non-magnetic tools when working near the magnetron.
35 To access the units inside the transceiver it is 36 To access the indicators and the test points on the
necessary to remove the front cover of the transceiver. 25kW Modulator PCB, it is necessary to place the
This allows access to all the units except the 25 kW Electronics Unit (CTX-A370) in the test position, refer to
Modulator PCB. The cover is removed by releasing the six Figure 4d. To place the Electronic Unit in the test position
captive screws. Observe all safety precautions a up to 300V proceed as follows:
is present on the modulator with power applied. (1) Remove all power supplies to the Transceiver.
(2) Release the six captive screws securing the
electronic assembly in position and carefully
remove, ensuring no cables are damaged.
(3) Secure in Electronics Unit the test position on the
side of the frame with the left top and bottom
captive screws (2 only), refer to Figure 4d. It is now
possible to access the LED indicators and the test
points on both sides of the unit.
(4) Restore power to the transceiver, observing all
safety procedures as up to 300V may be present
on the modulator.
37 If it is required to carry out fault diagnosis without the
300V present, set SW1 on the 25 kW Modulator PCB
to OFF. Ensure the switch is returned to the ON position
when testing is complete.

KH 2020
Chap 7d
CIRCULATOR (45-750-0008-001)
LIMITER (45-646-608)
RF HEAD (CTX-A384)
BANDPASS FILTER (45-750-0009-001)
MAGNETRON (CTX-A309)
NOISE SOURCE (CAE-A213)
LOW NOISE FRONT END (CAE-A217)

C
RECEIVER (CTX-A364), CONTAINING

LP
LOGARITHMIC RECEIVER (CTX-A356)
PLP ELECTRONIC UNIT (CTX-A370)

PLA
PLE
1TB1
9kV
TX MICROCONTROLLER
FLOW
PCB (CTX-A346)
AIR
PLH
PLN MAINS FILTER (45-680-003)

PLT
PLS
PLC
PLD
FAN (CTX-A379)
25kW FET MODULATOR

(CTX-A369)
FLOW
AIR
FAN
PLA PLC PLD
(45-683-158)
PLE PLB
POWER SUPPLY
(45-677-124)
CD-4037 FRONT VIEW WITH COVER REMOVED
Figure 3d - Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9): Module Locations

KH 2020
Chap 7d
ELECTRONIC UNIT CTX-A370

IN TEST POSITION
SECURED TO FRAME BY
TOP AND BOTTOM SCREWS ONLY
25kW MODULATOR ASSEMBLY CTX-A369, INCLUDING

25kW MODULATOR PCB CTX-A345
TX MICROCONTROLLER PCB CTX A-346
CD-3968
Figure 4d - Electronics Unit (CTX-A370) Mounted in the Test Position

KH 2020
Chap 7d
Indicators, Test Points, Links and Switches (2) Tx Microcontroller PC Figure 6d - 25kW Modulator
(Figures 6d, 7d & 8d) Power PCB (CTX-A345): Indicators and Test
Point Locations (CTX-A346)
38 Indicators provided on PCBs are as follows:
(1) 25 kW FET Modulator PCB (CTX-A345)
Grid
D18 8F TUNE Lit when Tune ind signal

Grid
present
D22 9G 300V SAFE Lit when +27V disconnected D41 4E PROCESSOR Flashes when processor
from 300V power supply RUNNING running
circuits (SW1 set to OFF)
D42 4E EXT TRIG Lit when external trigger pulses
present
D23 9F 300V UNSAFE Lit when +27V applied to 300V
power supply circuits D43 4E HEATER OK Lit when heater OK, flashes
(SW1 set to ON) slowly when timer running,
flashes fast when heater has
D24 4G 300V ACTIVE Lit when 300V supply present timed out
Note: only lit when Tx Run
command present. D44 4E Not used
D33 6E HEATER Lit when Heater Turndown

circuit active
TURNDOWN
D34 7D S BAND Lit for S-band magnetron 39 Test points are located on the following PCBs;
(1) 25 kW FET Modulator PCB (CTX-A345)

KH 2020
Chap 7d
Grid Grid
TP1 7H TR14 Gate Drive (27/300V FET) TP34 2J Input end of R10 (RUN STOP Command)
TP2 8H TR15 Gate Drive (27/300V FET) TP35 4J IC1 pin 10 (Stop Run)
TP3 3J +5V TP36 1J Ground
TP4 6D +5V1 TP37 1F Ground
TP5 2H REF V TP38 9A Ground
TP6 9E +10V TP39 9H Ground
TP7 4J +15V TP40 3H RV1 Wiper (Test EHT)
TP8 9C +27V Power TP41 4E/H FET Leading Edge Drive Level
TP9 4J +27V_B
TP10 3J -15V
Grid
TP11 1E Output of IC14 (Trig in Op Amp)
TP12 1D Output of IC15, buffer for TRNN and TRNN

(FET Gates Drive)
TP13 1C Output of IC16 delay buffer for TR7 & TR9

(Tail Biter for FET Gates)
TP14 2B Output of TRNN and TRNN (Main FETs

Drive)
TP15 4G Shorting point to test the 300 volts
TP16 1G Output of IC2a (HV >250volts)
TP17 2J Output of IC8b (Slow Start Ramp)
TP18 2J Output of IC8a (AMC drive to IC1)
TP19 2H IC8a pin 3 (SET Mag Current)
TP20 2G Output of IC7 (Sample and Hold)
TP21 2G IC7 pin 11 (Sample Pulse)
TP22 1J Output of IC3a (Main FET I is Tripped)
TP23 1H Output of IC3b (27V Power >6 amps) (I/P

Overload Trip)
TP24 6E Output of IC4b (27V Power >3 amps, Heater

Turndown)
TP25 3F Output of IC10 (Main FETs I Mon Pulse)
TP26 6D Output of IC12a (Magnetron Type Detected)
TP27 7E Output of IC12b (Magnetron Fitted)
TP28 2D Positive for IC17 (approx +24V)
TP29 2D Drain of TR9. FET Gate Amp
TP30 1E FET Drive Voltage
TP31 4H Positive end of D16 (+100V for Tx Mon)
TP32 8F Positive end of D9 (to check L2 OK)
TP33 6F Negative end of D11 (to check L2 OK)

KH 2020
Chap 7d
(2) Tx Microcontroller PCB (CTX-A346) (3) Logarithmic Receiver PCB (CTX-A356)
Test Grid Function Test Point Function

Point
TP1 LED drive
TP1 8A Neon Signal
TP2 Tune sample delay (intermediate)
TP2 1B Bootstrap Load enable. Serial link
TP3 LED drive
TP3 1B Reset. Serial link
TP4 Sync
TP4 7A Azimuth Pulses
TP5 Tune Sample Delay
TP5 7A Heading Line
TP6 AFC drive
TP6 7C Tx Mon Pulse
TP7 AFC
TP7 5E Rx Monitor Finger Reset
TP8 Vco indicator
TP8 6E Finger Reset Ramp
TP9 6A Video Input
TP10 6A Filtered Video Reference Level
TP11 5E Finger Time Period
TP12 5B Sample & Hold Output
TP13 5C CAN Tx
TP14 5C CAN Rx
TP15 1C Dummy Trigger Pulse
TP16 2B Mod Trigger Pulse
TP17 5C Future use
TP18 5C Future use
TP19 5D Clock Pulse
TP20 5B Rx Wedge Enable
EP1 1E 0V
EP2 8D 0V

KH 2020
Chap 7d
40 Links and switches are located on the following PCBs:
(1) 25kW FET Modulator PCB (CTX-A345)
Switch Grid State Function

Link/ Grid State Function
Switch SW2-3 ON Enables edge drive of noise
diode
OFF Square wave drive
LK1 4G MADE Connects 300V power output to
FET drivers SW2-2 ON Video I/P terminated
OPEN Disconnects 300V power output OFF Video I/P unterminated
from FET drivers
SW2-1 OFF Antenna motor starts on RUN
SW1 9F MADE Enables +27V to SMPS Output ON Antenna motor ON all the time
Transformer (T1)
OPEN HT (300V). Disabled for testing
SW2-A 3H MADE AMC connected

AMC replaced with RV1 for
OPEN servicing (Factory use only)
SW3-A 2E MADE Slope Control circuit working

OPEN Slope control replaced by RV4
for servicing (Factory use only).
(3) Logarithmic Receiver PCB (CTX-A356)
SW4-A 7H MADE +27V current overload
protection circuit working
OPEN For low power test of current trip
level (Factory use only) Link State Function
LK1 Tune Sample delay

(intermediate, approx 50ns)
LK2 Tune Sample delay

(2) Tx Microcontroller PCB (CTX-A346) (maximum, approx 100ns)
LK3 Tune Sample delay (minimum)

Switch Grid State Function NOTE: Only one of LK1, LK2 or LK3 is to be MADE.
Selected for best AFC
SW1-1 4A ON HL Interlock enabled
LK4 Not Fitted
OFF HL Interlock overridden
LK5 B Minimum AFC lock
SW1-2 OFF Timer enabled
A Intermediate AFC lock
ON Timer disabled
A&B Maximum AFC lock
SW1-3 ON Jitter enabled OPEN
OFF No Jitter
LK6 A 3 bandwidths selected, SP, MP and
SW1-4 OFF HTLO inhibit enabled LP/VLP
ON HTLO inhibit override B 2 bandwidths selected, SP and LP
SW1-5 SPARE LK7 OPEN Minimum Vco gain

MADE Maximum Vco gain
SW1-6 X A2 CAN bus } Set 0 to 7
LK8 OPEN X-band Selected
SW1-7 X A1 CAN bus } to give 1 of 8 MADE S-Band Selected
SW1-8 X LK9 OPEN S-Band Selected
A0 CAN bus } address codes
MADE Sets regular output to +5V
SW2-6 3A OFF Memory bank select (X-band only)
ON No software in this memory
SW2-5 ON Ext trig terminated

OFF Ext trig not terminated
SW2-4 ON CAN bus terminated

OFF CAN bus not terminated

KH 2020
Chap 7d
TP8 TP39
HSMG-C670
25446NAH
TP6
SW1
D23 D22
9 SL4-CL-V PLB +
TP38 HSMY-C670 +
TP2
TP32
TR15
STW50N10
8
T1
ETD49 TR14
STW50N10
7
TP1
MCDIS02T03
SW4
R19
0R22
TP27
+ D34
HSMS-C670 TP33
6
TP26
HSMS-C670
TP24
D33
TP4
2x0.6mH C2
L2 6800µ 40V
C28
6µ8 400V C29
6µ8 400V
5
CTX-A350
T2
TP15 TP31
4 LK1 TP9
TP7
TP35
D24
+
TP3
622-3424ES
PLA
HSMS-C670
R125
0R1 10W
R126
5R0 50W TP41
TP40
3 TP25
MCDIS02T03
10K
SW2
TP10
RV1
TP5 TP18
TP42
RV4 TP21 TP17
TP28 RV5 RV2
10K 10K
2
5K
TP14 TP20 TP19 TP34
TP16
TP36
TP11
TP12 TP30
TP29 TP23 TP22
1
TP37
TP13
A B C D E F G H J
CD-3980
Figure 5d - 25kW Modulator Power PCB (CTX-A345): Indicators and Test Point Locations

KH 2020
Chap 7d
1 PLD
PLC B16P-SHF-1AA
622-3424ES EP2
TP1
PLM
D18
B2P-SHF-1AA B2P-SHF-1AA
PLS
1 1
PLT
TP6
TP4
TP5
SL14-CL-V
SL6-CL-V
PLB
1 1K
PLN RV1
B2P-SHF-1AA
1 TP10 TP8
PLH
TP9
B2P-SHF-1AA
TP12 TP11
TP7
SKF TP13 TP14
C65N07G999X99 TP20 TP17 TP18 TP19
SL5-CL-V
1
+
PLK
D44
+HSMY-C670
D43
B6P-SHF-1AA
219-8LPST
+HSMY-C670
PLX
IC1
SW1
C167CR-L25M D42
+HSMY-C670
D41
HSMY-C670
219-6LPST
SW2
1
SL10-CL-V
PLA
B8P-SHF-1AA
PLG
TP16
1
TP2
PLP
TP15
B2P-SHF-1AA
TP3
SKW
PLJ
EP1
1 1
PLV
22-27-2041
B2P-SHF-1AA
87123-0601
CD-3981
Figure 6d - Tx Microcontroller PCB (CTX-A346): Indicators and Test Point Locations

KH 2020
Chap 7d
L14
L3
220nH
820nH
CV1
TP6
TP4 TP7
TP5
TP2
TP1 TP3
TP8
LK2 LK9 LK8 A LK5 B LK7

BS4P-SHF-1AA PLC
BS6P-SHF-1AA
PLE LK3 LK1 BS14P-SHF-1AA PLD
1 A LK6 B 1
1
NOTE: RV1 IS LOCATED ON UNDERSIDE OF PCB

CD-4012
Figure 7d - Logarithmic Receiver PCB (CTX-A356): Link and Test Point Locations

KH 2020
Chap 7d
MAINTENANCE
WARNING
THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT FITTED WITH
SAFETY INTERLOCKS AND LETHAL
VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT WITHIN THE UNIT.
ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF THE
TRANSCEIVER IS ONLY TO BE PERMITTED
FOR QUALIFIED TECHNICIANS.
41 The following paragraphs describe preventive
maintenance, expanding on the Diagnostics
information.
42 The Transceiver requires no preventive maintenance,
however, periodically (around every six months) check
that all screws, nuts and bolts are secure and free from
corrosion, and wipe the antenna clean using a soft cloth and
mild detergent.
43 Every 12 months open the transceiver and check that
corrosion.

KH 2020
Chap 7d

S-BAND ANTENNA
TURNING MECHANISM
(CAE-A41 OR CAE-A42)
AZIMUTH/HEADING
LINE PCB (CAE-A180)
220V/440V 3 PHASE MAINS SUPPLY SOFT START UNIT 3 PHASE TO MOTOR TURNING
CZZ-A14 MOTOR
AZIMUTH/
HEADING LINE
GENERATION
+27V MOTOR START +27V
SAFETY
SWITCH
+27V MOD
TX MON
NEON
S-BAND TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER (CTX-A9) NOISE

25kW FET MODULATOR CTX-A369/CTX-A345 SOURCE
CAE-A213
300V POWER
SUPPLY UNIT
300V
SAFE (D22)
+27V FET MAGNETRON CIRCULATOR DIODE B
300V FET DRIVE MAGNETRON OUTPUT PULSE
300V DRIVER CTX-A309 45-780-0008-001 LIMITER
DRIVE 45-646-608 45-7
UNSAFE +100V
(D23)
POWER 300V
SUPPLIES ACTIVE
(D24) S-BAND
CONTROL AND
PROTECTION (D34)
MAG HEATER CIRCUITS +5V &
HEATER
SELF START TURNDOWN
ACTIVE (D33)
MAG HEAT ON
LOGARITHMIC
RUN MOD
MONITOR
RECEIVER
MOD TRIG
CTX-A364/
CTX-A356
NOISE DIODE
RX TRIG
PU
TUNE WI
CONTROL
CONTROL
CIRCUITS PULSE LENGTH CIRCUITS
DC SUPPLIES
TUNE IND
POWER SUPPLY TUNE
45-677-124
MP/LP
TX RUN
MUTE
AZ/HL TX MON PULSE
PROCESSOR
TX READY RUNNING VIDEO OUTPUT
(D41)
RX MON
HEATER OK
(D43)
PLAY
AY
EXT TRIG
(D42)
TUNE
(D18) OPT
FAN
CTX-A379
TX MICROCONTROLLER PCB CTX-A346
Figure 8d - MkVII S-Band Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9) and Turning Mechanism: Functional Diagram
7
S-BAND ANTENNA
CAE-A36 OR CAE-A39
MONITOR ARM P
(OPTIONAL
T

CONTACTOR TB3
TB1 LOC 1 AZ/HL PCB
MOTOR AERIAL SOFT 220V/440V GEARBOX
S IN PROTECTION & START ROTATING JOINT
START MOTOR
OR ISOLATION SWITCH LOC 10
DELAY
RF COAX
TB2
TURNING MECHANI
RF HEA
NOT TERMINAL
LOC. 5
TB1
TB1
USED BLOCK
SELF
SKF
TART
L L
PLC
PLA
N FILTER N
E E PSU LOW NOIS
NOISE SOURCE CIRCULATOR DIODE BANDPASS
45-677-124 FRONT EN
PLA
PLD
LOC. 2 CAE-A213 45-780-0008-001 LIMITER FILTER

(LNFE)
45-646-608 45-750-0009-001
CAE-A21
FAN
PLE
HEATSINK
45-683-158
PLB
PLB
30kW TB1
PLB
PLA
TERMS MODULATOR 4mm MAGNETRON

CTX-A369/CTX-A345 3mm CTX-A309
PLJ
P LOC. 4
PLS
BRAID
Tx MICROCONTROLLER PCB
PLH SKF PLC
PLA
P HEATSINK HEATSINK
CTX-A346
PLT
LOC.3
/P
PLP
E O/P
PLN
PLD
E O/P PRE-PULSE
PLG
PCB
(OPTIONAL)
PLM
K RS232
PLX SKW PLV
PLK
RS232 DIAGNOSTIC PORT
FAN
PLE
CTX-A379
P
P
Figure 9d - MkVII S-Band Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9) and Turning Mechanism: Interconnection Diagram
7
SWITCH TO RUN
FAILUR
FAILURE MESSAGE - NO S
- NO AZIMUTH
- NO V
- NO HEADING LINE
OR NO
TO S
IS THE NO IS THE TURNING NO SWITCH TURNING

ANTENNA TURNING? MECHANISM SAFETY MECHANISM SAFETY
SWITCH ON? SWITCH ON
YES YES
FAULT IN HEADING LINE PCB

OR CONNECTIONS THROUGH INVERTER SOFT START UNIT
Tx MICRO-CONTROLLER PCB
NO
POWER SUPPLY FAULT
IS MAINS ON
IS MAINS ON NO SWITCH SINGLE PHASE INDICATOR ON
INDICATOR ON
MAINS ON SOFT START
INVERTER ON?
UNIT ON?
YES YES
DISCONNECT CABLEFORM
TO RECEIVER & MODULATOR
TO SEE IF FAULT CLEARS 1S +24V 1S +24V
PRESENT BETWEEN NO NO PRESENT BETWEEN
IS TRANSCEIVER TX MICROCONTROLLER PCB TB2 PINS 1 &2
PLA PINS 1 &2
RUNNING? ON SOFT START
ON INVERTER?
UNIT?
CHECK POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT YES YES YES

& WIRING TO MODULATOR
NO
IF ABOVE IS OK, SUSPECT
MODULATOR FAULT WIRING FAULT BETWEEN
OR Tx MICRO CONTROLLER ANTENNA TURNING MECHANISM FAULT TRANSCEIVER AND INVERTER ANTENNA TURNING MECHANISM F
RIBBON CABLE FAULT REFER TO OR REFER TO
KH 1250 MKVI TURNING MECHANISM TX MICROCONTROLLER PCB KH 1250 MKVI TURNING MECHAN
KH1253 MKVII TURNING MECHANISM FAULT KH1253 MKVII TURNING MECHAN
NOTE: TO BE USED WITH DETAILE
Figure 10d - Flowchart (sheet 1 of 2)
7
FROM SHEET 1
FAILURE MESSAGE
- NO SYNC
- NO VIDEO
OR NO MESSAGE
SET TO LONG PULSE
POOR SIG
NO VIDEO
NO SYNC BUT NO WAR
(MODULATOR FIRING)
‘NO VIDEO’ S
NO NO SWITCH M
RE CO-AXs OK? REPAIR CO-AXs ARE CO-AXs OK? REPAIR CO-AXs
AT 12 MILE
YES YES
ARE RECEIVER IS Tx M
IS CONTROL NO INTERCONNECTION OR NO
CONNECTIONS OK FROM PLUME G
ARD LED D43, LIT? MAGNETRON HEATER SHORT REPAIR CONNECTIONS
LOW NOISE FRONT END (FOR RAD
(HEATER OK) OR PSU FAULT & CABLEFORMS? RADAR
YES YES Y
ARE Rx
LOGARITHMIC RECEIVER PCB NOTE: FINGERS
D23 LIT, ON THE NO IS D22 LIT, ON THE NO 27V TO MODULATOR (FOR RADIUS
FAULT OR TUNE INPUT FROM CORRELATOR LOG . ADJU
ODULATOR PCB? MODULATOR PCB? MISSING
DISPLAY NOT WORKING MUST BE OFF FOR STRO
SIGN
YES YES Y
IS
DULATOR FIRING SIGNAL STRE
NTINUOUS AUDIBLE AFFECTED BY TU
CHANGE SWITCH S1
TE AT SELECTED TUNE IND
PRF? NOT WO
NO
IS
AT RUN, IS T
DULATOR FIRING NO NO IS D23 (300V UNSAFE) NO POWER SUPPLY OR
IS D24 (300V ACTIVE) LED MICRO CONTR
TERMITTENT NOTE? LED ON MODULATOR LIT? MODULATOR PCB FAULT
MODULATOR PCB LIT? D18 (TUNE
YES YES YES Y
CABLEFORM MODULATOR
MODULATOR MV SMPS FAULT
OR MICROCONTROLLER PCB Tx MICROCONT
DULATOR FAULT OR NO RUN COMMAND
FAULT OR NO TRIGGER OR CONNECT
FROM CONTROL BOARD FROM CONTROL BOARD
Figure 10d - Flowchart (sheet 2 of 2)
7
KH 2020
Chap 7e
CHAPTER 7E
MKVII TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER & ANTENNA (X-BAND)
INTRODUCTION 4 The magnetron energy is fed via a circulator and a

waveguide 16 run to the rotating joint located in the
turning mechanism and on to the antenna. Received signals
1 The MkVII X-Band Transceivers are available in a from the antenna are routed via the rotating joint and
downmast configuration only, where the transceiver waveguide to the circulator. Within the transceiver, the
electronics are remote from the turning mechanism. The received signals are routed from the circulator to the RF
turning mechanism is located in a separate enclosure, limiter, bandpass filter and low noise front end to the
located below deck. Logarithmic Receiver.
2 The configuration shown in Figures 1e and 2e, is 5 The transceiver is normally muted whenever the
provided with a single phase mains input to the antenna ceases to rotate. Pulse jitter, muting and
transceiver, which provides dc supplies for the turning sector transmission are standard facilities, with options for
motor. pre-pulse generation and external synchronisation.
6 The transceiver can be interfaced with any of the
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Nucleus series displays. In addition, facilities are
provided for interfacing with the display via a Controller Area
3 The transceiver (CTX-A8) is fitted with a logarithmic Network (CAN bus link).
amplifier with AFC and employs fan cooling for the
magnetron and modulator. 7 The transceiver provides two SYNC and two VIDEO
coaxial outputs.
Tx Monitor ANTENNA
(OPT)
CTX-A198
TURNING MECHANISM (CAE-A30-5 OR -6)

AZIMUTH GEARBOX
PCB
SAFETY
MOTOR
SWITCH POWER
MOTOR START
OR DRIVE BOARD
TRANSCEIVER (CTX-A8)
RX MON
(OPT)
TX MICRO-
CONTROLLER RF
CONTROL
PCB LOGARITHMIC
TO/FROM RECEIVER HEAD MAGNETRON
DISPLAY VIDEO IF
EMC 25 kW FET POWER

MAINS POWER UNIT
INPUT FILTER MODULATOR
CD-3880
Figure 1e - X-Band (CTX-A8): Block Diagram

KH 2020
Chap 7e
ANTENNA - SEE TABLE 1
TURNING
MECHANISM
CABLE: CODE E OR G
25 CORE (CAE-A30-5)
12 CORE (CAE-A30-6)
WAVEGUIDE 16
X BAND
CABLE: TRANSMITTER
1 PHASE IN CODE K (CTX-A8)
38-CORE CABLE (NUCLEUS 2 OR 3)
12-CORE CABLE (NUCLEUS 3)
INTERSWITCH DISPLAY
UNIT (OPTIONAL)
OR DIRECT
OPTIONAL
MAINS
ISOLATOR
80-261-600
1 PHASE IN
CABLE CODES
TABLE 1
CABLE E - 12 CORE
ANTENNA OPTIONS
CABLE G - 25 CORE
1.3m ANTENNA (CAE-A50)* CABLE K - 2 CORE POWER
1.8m ANTENNA (CAE-A13/2) CABLE N - 38 CORE
CABLE R - 10 CORE + 2 COAXIAL
CD-3879 * NOT TYPE APPROVED
Figure 2e - Typical System Configuration X-Band (CTX-A8)

KH 2020
Chap 7e
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Receiver Circuits
17 The received RF radar returns are passed from the
8 The X-Band downmast transceiver and antenna antenna to the circulator, which routes them to the
comprise a transceiver which is bulkhead mounted, Diode (RF) Limiter and Low Noise Front End (LNFE). The
and a mast mounted turning mechanism in a weatherproof LNFE produces a 60MHz IF signal, which is passed to the
compartment, with antenna attached. A Functional diagram Logarithmic Receiver PCB (CTX-A356), mounted in
for the X-band transceiver, turning mechanism and antenna Receiver Assembly (CTX-A364), providing shielding of the
is provided in Figure 10e, and the interconnections are PCB from high power RF signals. The Logarithmic Receiver
shown in Figure 11e. provides two video outputs for use by the displays and one
for the Rx Monitor in the transceiver.
DOWNMAST TRANSCEIVER 18 A Tx Mon pulse is injected into the video signal to
indicate, on the displays, that sufficient power is being
Transmitter Circuits transmitted.
19 The Logarithmic Receiver provides tuning control of
9 The transceiver uses a 30kW magnetron to generate the LFNE and a tune indication signal to the Tx
the RF output. The magnetron is driven by the 30kW Microcontroller PCB. The Logarithmic Receiver provides the
FET modulator (CTX-A369), which consists of a 30kW regulated dc supply for the Low Noise Front End.
Modulator PCB (CTX-A345)) mounted on a chassis together
with the high power components, heatsink and RF shield.
Control Circuits
10 The 30kW Modulator provides the following functions:
20 The Tx Microcontroller PCB (CTX-A346) provides
(1) A 300V power supply. overall control of the transceiver using a
(2) Driver circuits for the modulator FETs. microprocessor, and interfaces with the Display. Commands
to and from the Display may be provided by one of the
(3) The FET modulator, which drives the magnetron
following:
(the FET are chassis mounted on the heatsink).
(4) Associated control and protection circuits (1) Parallel inputs and outputs to a standard Nucleus
Display.
11 A switch on the 30kW Modulator PCB enables the
+27V supply to the 300V power supply to be switched (2) Serial Link to the display, via an RS232
off for maintenance purposes (it is normally set to ON). The connection.
status of the power supply is indicated by LEDs mounted on (3) Serial Link to the display, via a CAN bus
the PCB, as follows: connection.
(1) When the +27V is disconnected, the GREEN 21 The status of the control circuits is indicated by a
300V SAFE LED is illuminated (i.e. The switch is number of LEDs, as follows:
set to OFF).
(1) The PROCESSOR RUNNING LED flashes when
(2) When +27V is applied to the 300V power supply, the microprocessor is running normally.
the YELLOW 300V UNSAFE LED is illuminated
(2) The HEATER OK LED is illuminated when the
(i.e. The switch is set to ON).
magnetron heater circuits are operational.
(3) When the presence of the 300V output is
(3) The TUNE LED is illuminated when the tune
detected, the RED 300V ACTIVE LED is
signal is produced by the logarithmic receiver.
illuminated.
(4) The EXT TRIG LED is illuminated when an
12 The status of the power supply is monitored by the
protection circuits and the supply is switched OFF if an external trigger pulse is detected.
overvoltage is sensed.
Power Supplies and Cooling
13 The modulator magnetron drive automatically adjusts
to compensate for variations in magnetron 22 The dc supplies for the Transceiver, with the exception
characteristics and to allow for the effects of the magnetron of the 300V for the modulator, are provided by a Power
ageing. Control and protection circuits provide protection of Supply Unit (45-677-124). The mains input is fed to the
the magnetron from overvoltages, etc. power supply via an EMC filter to prevent interference pulses
14 The type of magnetron is detected and for this from the transceiver circuits being conducted out onto the
application, as an S-band magnetron is used, the RED supply lines. The input is also protected against incoming
S-BAND LED is illuminated indicating S-band. high voltage spikes. The power supply provides the following
dc supplies for the Transceiver and Turning Mechanism:
15 The RED HEATER TURNDOWN LED is illuminated
when the heater is switched OFF due to a fault being (1) +27V to drive the 300V power supply.
detected. (2) +27V for general use.
16 The output from the magnetron is passed via a (3) +15V.
circulator to the rotating joint and the antenna. (4) +5V.
(5) -15V.

KH 2020
Chap 7e
23 Cooling of the transceiver is provided by two fans. One Antenna Turning Mechanism
is located within the electronics unit and provides
forced air cooling of the whole transceiver. The second fan is 26 A separate Antenna Turning Mechanism is required
mounted on the front of the electronics unit and provides for the Downmast Transceiver.
cooling for the high power components in the 25kW
Modulator. 27 Two versions of the turning mechanism can be used
with the transceiver (CTX-A8)
RF Head (1) Low Speed (CAE-A30-6), which employs a 24V
dc motor and rotates the antenna at 24rpm. The
24 The RF Head contains a 25kW magnetron, Circulator Transceiver power supply switch SW2 is set to ON
and a Waveguide outlet. to provide a +26V output to the motor.
25 The Low Noise Front End (LFNE), (CTX-A323), Diode (2) High Speed (CAE-A30-5), which employs a 36V
(pulse) Limiter and Filter Shim do not form part of the brushless dc motor and rotates the antenna at
RF Head, but functionally complete the RF path. The LFNE 40rpm. The Transceiver power supply switch
(CTX-A323) comprises an RF Amplifier, Balance Mixer, SW2 is set to OFF to provide the 36V dc output to
Local Oscillator and IF Head Amplifier.
the motor.
28 Either version of the turning mechanism can be fitted
with 1.3m, 1.8m or 2.4m antennas.

KH 2020
Chap 7e
SPECIFICATION RECEIVER
29 The technical specifications for the MkVII X-band

Transceiver are as follows: X-Band
Type:: Logarithmic Receiver

TRANSMITTER
I.F: 60MHz
Video Output: 2 x 75W

X-Band +5.5V to 6V peak signal
System Overall Nominal 4.5dB

Frequency: 9410 ± 10MHz
Noise Figure:
Magnetron 25 kW nominal
Rating:
Magnetron Life: 10,000 Hours Typical Operating Temperature X-Band

Pulse Length Short (S)
Ranges:
nominal 0.055 ms
and P.R.F: 3000pps ±100 Turning Mechanism:
Medium (M) nominal 0.2 ms Ambient Temperature Range:: -25oC to +70oC
1500pps ± 40
Humidity: 95% at +40oC
Long (L)
nominal 0.9 ms Downmast Transceiver:
750pps ± 20
Long-Low Ambient Temperature Range: -15oC to +55oC
PRF(VL) nominal 1.0 ms
375pps ± 10 Humidity: 95% at +40oC

CAE-A30-5 and CAE-A30-6 X-Band
Pulse to Pulse This will normally be activated and is ± 15ms Turning Mechanism
Jitter: from nominal period. This function can be
inhibited. Azimuth Data: 90 pulses per revolution
Heading Data: 1 pulse per revolution
30 The PRF and Pulse Length can be set to other values

via the RS232 link. Input Power X-Band
31 The above values are the nominal settings. Input Power Single Phase: 110V/220V ac input
32 Receiver specifications are detailed opposite. Input Power 3-Phase
Low Speed (24rpm): 275W, 400VA
High Speed (40rpm): 340W, 500VA

KH 2020
Chap 7e
DIAGNOSTICS FAILURE MESSAGES

35 These failure messages appear in the data field of the
33 The Algorithms in this section provide an aid to fault display monitor if certain signals are missing. See
diagnosis in the transceiver. The algorithms enable Table 1 for details.
fault diagnosis down to module level and also identify wiring
faults. Entry to the algorithms is via Failure Messages Table 1 - Failure Messages
generated by the display.
PRE-REQUISITES
34 The diagnostic routines in the flow charts assume that SIGNAL FAILURE SIGNAL FAILURE
the radar has been working, and that the system is set MESSAGE MESSAGE
up for normal operation at the time the fault occurred.
Sync No Sync. Azimuth No Azimuth
Video No Video Heading Line No Heading

Line
36 Fault diagnosis algorithms covering these failures are

provided in Figure 12e, sheets 1 and 2.
TEST EQUIPMENT
37 Routine field maintenance requires fault location down
to fuse replacement level. The only test equipment
required for fault finding is a high impedance multimeter.
Table 2 - Fuses
FUSE No. LOCATION RATING
FS1 Tx Microcontroller PCB Resettable

KH 2020
Chap 7e
PREPARATION FOR FAULT DIAGNOSIS
WARNING
THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT FITTED WITH SAFETY INTERLOCKS AND LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE
PRESENT WITHIN THE UNIT.
ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF THE TRANSCEIVER IS ONLY TO BE PERMITTED FOR QUALIFIED
TECHNICIANS.
CAUTIONS
(1) Handling of Electrostatic Sensitive Semiconductor Devices
Semiconductor devices used in the equipment are liable to damage due to static voltage.
Observe the following precautions when handling static sensitive devices in their un-terminated state,
or when handling modules containing such devices.
Persons removing modules from an equipment using these devices should be earthed
by a wrist strap and a resistor.
Soldering irons used during repair operations must be low voltage types with earth tips
and isolated from the mains voltage by a double insulated transformer.
Outer clothing worn must be unable to generate static voltages.
Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) fitted with these devices must be stored
and transported in anti-static bags.
For detailed information, refer to British Standard BS 5783 or other equivalent standard.
(2) Use non-magnetic tools when working near the magnetron.
38
To access the units inside the transceiver it is 39 To access the indicators and the test points on the
necessary to remove the front cover of the transceiver. 25kW Modulator PCB, it is necessary to place the
This allows access to all the units except the 25kW Electronics Unit (CTX-A370) in the test position, refer to
Modulator PCB. The cover is removed by releasing the six Figure 6e. To place the Electronics Unit in the test position,
captive screws. Observe all safety precautions as up to proceed as follows:
300V is present on the modulator with power applied.
(1) Remove all power supplies to the transceiver.
(2) Release the six captive screws securing the
electronic assembly in position and carefully
remove, ensuring that no cables are damaged.
(3) Secure the Electronics Unit in the test position on
the side of the frame, with the left top and bottom
captive screws (2 only), refer to Figure 6e. It is now
possible to access the LED indicators and the test
points on both sides of the unit.
(4) Restore power to the transceiver, observing all
safety procedures, as up to 300VV may be
present on the modulator.
40 If it is required to implement fault diagnosis without
300V present, set switch SW1 on the 25kW Modulator
PCB to OFF. Ensure that the switch is returned to the ON
position when testing is complete.

KH 2020
Chap 7e
RX MONITOR
CAVITY CTX-A173
RF HEAD (CTX-A380)
WAVEGUIDE OUTLET (CAE-A277)
FILTER SHIM (NTX-1194)
RECEIVER (CTX A364), CONTAINING

LOGARITHMIC RECEIVER (CTX-A356)
CIRCULATOR (45-646-604)
1
3 LOW NOISE FRONT END (CTX-A323)
DIODE LIMITER (45-646-603)
MAGNETRON (CTX-A317)
C
LP
PLP ELECTRONIC UNIT (CTX-A370)

PLA
PLE
1TB1
9kV
TX MICROCONTROLLER
FLOW
PCB (CTX-A346)
AIR
PLH
PLN MAINS FILTER (45-680-003)

PLT
PLS
PLC
PLD
FAN (CTX-A379)
25kW FET MODULATOR

(CTX-A369)
FLOW
AIR
FAN
PLA PLC PLD
(45-683-158)
PLE PLB
POWER SUPPLY
(45-677-124)
CD-3984 FRONT VIEW WITH COVER REMOVED
Figure 3e - Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A8): Module Locations

KH 2020
Chap 7e
ROTATING
JOINT
BRUSHLESS
AZIMUTH/ MOTOR
HEADING LINE PCB
BRUSHLESS MOTOR PCB
DRAZAH EVAW OIDAR

m2 NAHT SSEL TA REGNAD
TB2
TB1
AZIMUTH/
HEADING LINE PCB
CAE-A106-2
BRUSHLESS MOTOR PCB

PLA
PL3
PL2
PL4
PL1
TB1
CD-3918
Figure 4e - Turning Mechanism (CAE-A30-5): Module Locations

KH 2020
Chap 7e
ROTATING
JOINT
AZIMUTH/
HEADING LINE PCB
MOTOR
MOTOR
STARTER
PCB
+VE
DRAZAH EVAW OIDAR
m2 NAHT SSEL TA REGNAD TERMINAL
-VE
TERMINAL
TB1
AZIMUTH/
HEADING LINE PCB
CAE-A106-2
PLA
FILTER
N N
MAINS
L L
MOTOR
+26V MOTOR
STARTER PCB
TB1
CD-3917
Figure 5e - Turning Mechanism (CAE-A30-6): Module Locations

KH 2020
Chap 7e
ELECTRONIC UNIT CTX-A370

IN TEST POSITION
SECURED TO FRAME BY
TOP AND BOTTOM SCREWS ONLY
25kW MODULATOR ASSEMBLY CTX-A369, INCLUDING

25kW MODULATOR PCB CTX-A345
TX MICROCONTROLLER PCB CTX A-346
CD-3968
Figure 6e - Electronics Unit (CTX-A370) Mounted in the Test Position

KH 2020
Chap 7e
INDICATORS, TEST POINTS, LINKS AND 42 Test Points are located on the following PCBs:
SWITCHES (FIGURES 7e, 8e & 9e) (1) 25kW FET Modulator PCB (CTX-A345)
41 Indicators provided on PCBs are as follows:
(1) 25kW FET Modulator PCB (CTX-A345) Test Grid
Point
Grid TP1 7H TR14 Gate Drive (27V/300V FET)
TP2 8H TR15 Gate Drive 927V/300V FET)

D22 9G 300V SAFE Illuminated when +27V
disconnected from 300V TP3 3J +5V
power supply circuits (SW1
set to OFF) TP4 6D +5V1
D23 9F 300V UNSAFE Illuminated when +27V TP5 2H REF V

applied to 300V power
TP6 9E +10V
supply circuits (SW1 set to
ON) TP7 4J +15V
D24 4G 300V ACTIVE Illuminated when 300V TP8 9C +27V Power
supply present Note: only
illuminated when Tx Run TP9 4J +27V-B
command present
TP10 3J -15V
D33 6E HEATER Illuminated when Heater
Turndown circuit is active TP11 1E Output of IC14 (Trig Op Amp)
TURNDOWN TP12 1D Output of IC15, buffer for TRNN and TRNN
D34 7D S BAND Illuminated for S-Band (FET Gates Drive)
Magnetron use TP13 1C Output of IC16 delay buffer for TR7 & TR9
(Tail Biter for FET Gates)
TP14 2B Output of TRNN and TRNN (Main FETs Drive)
TP15 4G Shorting Point to test the 300V
TP16 1G Output of IC2a (HV >250V)

(2) Tx Microcontroller PCB (CTX-A346)
TP17 2J Output of IC8b (Slow Start Ramp)
TP18 2J Output of IC8a (AMC drive to IC1)

Grid
TP19 2H IC8a Pin 3 (SET Mag Current)
D18 8F TUNE Illuminated when Tune Ind TP20 2G Output of IC7 (Sample and Hold)
signal is present
TP21 2G IC7 pin 11 (Sample Pulse)
D41 4E PROCESSOR Flashes when processor is
RUNNING running TP22 1J Output of IC3a (Main FET I is tripped)
D42 4E EXT TRIG Illuminated when External TP23 1H Output of IC3b (27V Power >6 amps) (I/P
Trigger pulses are present Overload Trip)
D43 4E HEATER OK Illuminated when Heater TP24 6E Output of IC4b (27V Power >3 amps, Heater
OK, flashes slowly when Turndown)
timer is running. Flashes
Fast when heater has timed TP25 3F Output of IC10 (Main FETs I Mon Pulse)
out
TP26 6D Output of IC12a (Magnetron Type Detected)
D44 4E Not Used
TP27 7E Output of IC12b (Magnetron Fitted)
TP28 2D Positive for IC17 (approx. +24V)
TP29 2D Drain of TR9, FET Gate Amp
TP30 1E FET Drive Voltage
TP31 4H Positive end of D16 (+100V for Tx Mon)
TP32 8F Positive end of D9 (to check L2 OK)
TP33 6F Negative end of D11 (to check L2 OK)
TP34 2J Input end of R10 (RUN STOP Command)

KH 2020
Chap 7e
(3) Logarithmic Receiver
Test Grid Test Point Function

Point
TP1 LED Drive
TP35 4J IC1 Pin 10 (Stop Run)
TP2 Tune Sample Delay (intermediate)
TP36 1J Ground
TP3 LED Drive
TP37 1F Ground
TP4 Sync
TP38 9A Ground
TP5 Tune Sample Delay
TP39 9H Ground
TP6 AFC Drive
TP40 3H RV1 Wiper (Test EHT)
TP7 AFC
TP41 4E/H FET Leading Edge Drive Level
TP8 Vco Indicator
(2) Tx Microcontroller PCB (CTX-A346)
43 Links and switches are located on the following PCBS:

Test Grid Function (1) 25kW FET Modulator PCB (CTX-A345)
Point
TP1 8A Neon Signal Link/ Grid State Function

TP2 1B Bootstrap Load enable. Serial Link Switch
TP3 1B Reset Serial Link LK1 4G MADE Connects 300V power output to
FET drivers
TP4 7A Azimuth Pulses
TP5 7A Heading Line OPEN Disconnects 300V power output

from FET drivers
TP6 7C Tx Mon Pulse
SW1 9F MADE Enables +27V to SMPS Output
TP7 5E Rx Monitor Finger Reset Transformer (T1)
TP8 6E Finger Reset Ramp OPEN HT (300V0 Disabled for testing
TP9 6A Video Input SW2-A 3H MADE AMC Connected
TP10 6A Filtered Video Reference Level
OPEN AMC replaced with RV1 for
TP11 5E Finger Time Period servicing (Factory Use Only)
TP12 5B Sample & Hold Output SW3-A 2E MADE Slope Control Circuit working
TP13 5C CAN Tx OPEN Slope Control replaced by RV4 for

servicing (Factory Use Only)
TP14 5C CAN Rx
SW4-A 7H MADE +27V current overload protection
TP15 1C Dummy Trigger Pulse
circuit working.
TP16 2B Mod Trigger Pulse OPEN For low power test of current trip
level (Factory Use Only)
TP17 5C Future Use
TP18 5C Future Use
TP19 5D Clock Pulse
TP20 5B Rx Wedge Enable
EP1 1E 0V
EP2 8D 0V

KH 2020
Chap 7e
(2) Tx Microcontroller PCB (CTX-A346) (3) Logarithmic Receiver PCB (CTX-A356)
Switch Grid State Function

Link State Function
SW1-1 4A ON HL Interlock enabled
OFF HL Interlock overridden LK1 MADE Connects 300V power output to FET
drivers
SW1-2 OFF Timer enabled timer
ON Timer disabled OPEN Disconnects 300V power output from
FET drivers
SW1-3 ON Jitter enabled
OFF No Jitter LK2 MADE Enables +27V to SMPS Output
Transformer (T1)
SW1-4 OFF HTLO inhibit enabled
ON HTLO inhibit override OPEN HT (300V0 Disabled for testing
SW1-5 SPARE LK3 MADE AMC Connected
SW1-6 X A2 CAN bus }Set 0 to 7 OPEN AMC replaced with RV1 for servicing
SW1-7 X (Factory Use Only)
A1 CAN bus }to give 1 of 8
SW1-8 X NOTE: Only one of LK1, LK2 or LK3 is to be MADE.
A0 CAN bus } address codes Selected for best AFC.
SW2-6 3A OFF Memory Bank Select LK4 Not Fitted
ON No software in this memory
LK5 B Minimum AFC Lock
SW2-5 ON Ext Trig terminated A Intermediate AFC lock
OFF Ext. Trig not terminated
A &B Maximum AFC Lock
SW2-4 ON CAB bus terminated
OPEN
OFF CAN bus not terminated
LK6 A 3 bandwidths selected, SP, MP and
SW2-3 ON Enables wedge drive of noise diode
LP/VLP
OFF Square Wave drive
B 2 bandwidths selected, SP add LP
SW2-2 ON Video I/P terminated
LK7 OPEN Minimum Vco gain
OFF Video I/P unterminated
MADE Maximum Vco gain
SW2-1 OFF Antenna Motor starts on Run
LK8 OPEN X-band Selected
ON Antenna Motor ON all the time
MADE s-band Selected
LK9 OPEN S-band Selected

MADE Sets regular output to +5V (X-band only)

KH 2020
Chap 7e
TP8 TP39
HSMG-C670
25446NAH
TP6
SW1
D23 D22
9 SL4-CL-V PLB +
TP38 HSMY-C670 +
TP2
TP32
TR15
STW50N10
8
T1
ETD49 TR14
STW50N10
7
TP1
MCDIS02T03
SW4
R19
0R22
TP27
+ D34
HSMS-C670 TP33
6
TP26
HSMS-C670
TP24
D33
TP4
2x0.6mH C2
L2 6800µ 40V
C28
6µ8 400V C29
6µ8 400V
5
CTX-A350
T2
TP15 TP31
4 LK1 TP9
TP7
TP35
D24
+
TP3
622-3424ES
PLA
HSMS-C670
R125
0R1 10W
R126
5R0 50W TP41
TP40
3 TP25
MCDIS02T03
10K
SW2
TP10
RV1
TP5 TP18
TP42
RV4 TP21 TP17
TP28 RV5 RV2
10K 10K
2
5K
TP14 TP20 TP19 TP34
TP16
TP36
TP11
TP12 TP30
TP29 TP23 TP22
1
TP37
TP13
A B C D E F G H J
CD-3980
Figure 7e - 25kW Modulator Power PCB (CTX-A345): Indicators and Test Point Locations

KH 2020
Chap 7e
1 PLD
PLC B16P-SHF-1AA
622-3424ES EP2
TP1
PLM
D18
B2P-SHF-1AA B2P-SHF-1AA
PLS
1 1
PLT
TP6
TP4
TP5
SL14-CL-V
SL6-CL-V
PLB
1 1K
PLN RV1
B2P-SHF-1AA
1 TP10 TP8
PLH
TP9
B2P-SHF-1AA
TP12 TP11
TP7
SKF TP13 TP14
C65N07G999X99 TP20 TP17 TP18 TP19
SL5-CL-V
1
+
PLK
D44
+HSMY-C670
D43
B6P-SHF-1AA
219-8LPST
+HSMY-C670
PLX
IC1
SW1
C167CR-L25M D42
+HSMY-C670
D41
HSMY-C670
219-6LPST
SW2
1
SL10-CL-V
PLA
B8P-SHF-1AA
PLG
TP16
1
TP2
PLP
TP15
B2P-SHF-1AA
TP3
SKW
PLJ
EP1
1 1
PLV
22-27-2041
B2P-SHF-1AA
87123-0601
CD-3981
Figure 8e - Tx Microcontroller PCB (CTX-A346): Indicators and Test Point Locations

KH 2020
Chap 7e
L14
L3
220nH
820nH
CV1
TP6
TP4 TP7
TP5
TP2
TP1 TP3
TP8
LK2 LK9 LK8 A LK5 B LK7

BS4P-SHF-1AA PLC
BS6P-SHF-1AA
PLE LK3 LK1 BS14P-SHF-1AA PLD
1 A LK6 B 1
1
NOTE: RV1 IS LOCATED ON UNDERSIDE OF PCB

CD-4012
Figure 9e - Logarithmic Receiver PCB (CTX-A356): Link and Test Point Locations

KH 2020
Chap 7e
MAINTENANCE
WARNING
THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT FITTED WITH SAFETY

INTERLOCKS AND LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE
PRESENT WITHIN THE UNIT. ACCESS TO THE
INTERIOR OF THE TRANSCEIVER IS ONLY TO BE
PERMITTED TO QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN
44 The Transceiver requires no preventive maintenance.
However, periodically (around every six months)
check that all screws, nuts and bolts are secure and free
from corrosion, and wipe the antenna clean using a soft cloth
and mild detergent.
46 Every 12 months, open the transceiver and check that
corrosion.

X-BAND ANTENNA
TURNING MECHANISM
(CAE-A30-5 OR -6)
AZIMUTH/HEADING
LINE PCB CAE-A106
MOTOR STARTER PCB
DC SUPPLY CTX-A359 (CAE-A30-6 ONLY)
OR TURNING
BRUSHLESS MOTOR PCB MOTOR
CAE-A236 (CAE-A30-5 ONLY) AZIMUTH/
HEADING LINE
GENERATION
+27V MOTOR START +27V
SAFETY
+27V MOD SWITCH
TX MON
NEON
X-BAND TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER (CTX-A8) RX MONITOR

CAVITY
25kW FET MODULATOR CTX-A369/CTX-A345 CTX-A173
300V POWER
SUPPLY UNIT
RF HEAD
300V
SAFE (D22)
+27V FET FET DRIVE OUTPUT PULSE MAGNETRON CIRCULATOR DIODE LIMITE
300V MAGNETRON
300V DRIVER CTX-A317 45-646-604 45-646-603
DRIVE
UNSAFE +100V
(D23)
POWER 300V
SUPPLIES ACTIVE
(D24) S-BAND
CONTROL AND
PROTECTION (D34)
MAG HEATER CIRCUITS +5V &
HEATER
SELF START TURNDOWN
ACTIVE (D33)
MAG HEAT ON
LOGARITHMIC
RUN MOD
MONITOR
RECEIVER
MOD TRIG
CTX-A364/
CTX-A356
RX TRIG
PU
TUNE WI
CONTROL
CONTROL
CIRCUITS PULSE LENGTH CIRCUITS
DC SUPPLIES
TUNE IND
POWER SUPPLY TUNE
45-677-124
MP/LP
TX RUN
MUTE
AZ/HL TX MON PULSE
PROCESSOR
TX READY RUNNING VIDEO OUTPUT
(D41)
RX MON
HEATER OK
(D43)
PLAY
AY
EXT TRIG
(D42)
TUNE
(D18) OP
FAN
CTX-A379
TX MICROCONTROLLER PCB CTX-A346
Figure 10e - MkVII X-Band Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A8) and Turning Mechanism: Functional Diagram
7
X-BAND ANTENNA
CAE-A27, CAE-A13-2, CAE-A14
HIGH SPEED MOTOR

MONITOR ARM P
+36V CAE-A30-5 CAE-A198 (OPTIONA
TB2
PL3
PL1
HIGH SPEED T
BRUSHLESS MOTOR
PL2
MOTOR DRIVER
CAE-A236
PL5
PL4
AZ/HL PCB
LOW SPEED MOTOR GEARBOX CAE-A106-
+26V
TB1
CAE-A30-6 ROTATING JOINT LOC 9

PLA
LOW SPEED
FILTER
MOTOR
+26V MOTOR STARTER

PLB
WAVEGUIDE 16
CTX-A359
TURNING MECHANI
RECEIVER
TERMINAL MONITOR
TB1
TB1
BLOCK CAVITY
SELF CTX-A173
SKF
TART
L L
PLC
PLA
N FILTER N
E E PSU
45-677-124
RF HEAD
PLD
LOC. 2
LOC. 5
FAN
PLE
HEATSINK
45-683-158
PLB LOW NOIS
PLB DIODE FRONT EN
CIRCULATOR
LIMITER (LNFE)
25kW TB1 45-646-604
PLB
PLA
TERMS 45-646-603 CTX-A323

MODULATOR 4mm MAGNETRON
CTX-A369/CTX-A345 3mm CTX-A317
PLJ
P LOC. 4
PLS
BRAID
Tx MICROCONTROLLER PCB
PLC
PLA
P HEATSINK HEATSINK
CTX-A346
PLT
LOC.3
I/P
PLP
PLH
E O/P
PLN
PLD
E O/P PRE-PULSE
PLG
PCB
(OPTIONAL)
PLM
K RS232
PLX SKW PLV
PLK
RS232 DIAGNOSTIC PORT
FAN
PLE
CTX-A379
P
P
Figure 11e - MkVII X-Band Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A8) and Turning Mechanism: Interconnection Diagram
7
SWITCH TO RUN
FAILUR
FAILURE MESSAGE - NO S
- NO AZIMUTH
- NO V
- NO HEADING LINE
OR NO
TO S
IS THE NO IS THE TURNING NO SWITCH TURNING

ANTENNA TURNING? MECHANISM SAFETY MECHANISM SAFETY
SWITCH ON? SWITCH ON
YES YES
FAULT IN HEADING LINE PCB

OR CONNECTIONS THROUGH INVERTER SOFT START UNIT
Tx MICRO-CONTROLLER PCB
NO
POWER SUPPLY FAULT
IS MAINS ON
IS MAINS ON NO SWITCH SINGLE PHASE INDICATOR ON
INDICATOR ON
MAINS ON SOFT START
INVERTER ON?
UNIT ON?
YES YES
DISCONNECT CABLEFORM
TO RECEIVER & MODULATOR
TO SEE IF FAULT CLEARS 1S +24V 1S +24V
PRESENT BETWEEN NO NO PRESENT BETWEEN
IS TRANSCEIVER TX MICROCONTROLLER PCB TB2 PINS 1 &2
PLA PINS 1 &2
RUNNING? ON SOFT START
ON INVERTER?
UNIT?
CHECK POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT YES YES YES

& WIRING TO MODULATOR
NO
IF ABOVE IS OK, SUSPECT
MODULATOR FAULT WIRING FAULT BETWEEN
OR Tx MICRO CONTROLLER ANTENNA TURNING MECHANISM FAULT TRANSCEIVER AND INVERTER ANTENNA TURNING MECHANISM F
RIBBON CABLE FAULT REFER TO OR REFER TO
KH 1250 MKVI TURNING MECHANISM TX MICROCONTROLLER PCB KH 1250 MKVI TURNING MECHAN
KH1253 MKVII TURNING MECHANISM FAULT KH1253 MKVII TURNING MECHAN
NOTE: TO BE USED WITH DETAILE
Figure 12e - Flowchart (sheet 1 of 2)
7
FROM SHEET 1
FAILURE MESSAGE
- NO SYNC
- NO VIDEO
OR NO MESSAGE
SET TO LONG PULSE
POOR SIG
NO VIDEO
NO SYNC BUT NO WAR
(MODULATOR FIRING)
‘NO VIDEO’ S
NO NO SWITCH M
RE CO-AXs OK? REPAIR CO-AXs ARE CO-AXs OK? REPAIR CO-AXs
AT 12 MILE
YES YES
ARE RECEIVER IS Tx M
IS CONTROL NO INTERCONNECTION OR NO
CONNECTIONS OK FROM PLUME G
ARD LED D43, LIT? MAGNETRON HEATER SHORT REPAIR CONNECTIONS
LOW NOISE FRONT END (FOR RAD
(HEATER OK) OR PSU FAULT & CABLEFORMS? RADAR
YES YES Y
ARE Rx
LOGARITHMIC RECEIVER PCB NOTE: FINGERS
D23 LIT, ON THE NO IS D22 LIT, ON THE NO 27V TO MODULATOR (FOR RADIUS
FAULT OR TUNE INPUT FROM CORRELATOR LOG . ADJU
ODULATOR PCB? MODULATOR PCB? MISSING
DISPLAY NOT WORKING MUST BE OFF FOR STRO
SIGN
YES YES Y
IS
DULATOR FIRING SIGNAL STRE
NTINUOUS AUDIBLE AFFECTED BY TU
CHANGE SWITCH S1
TE AT SELECTED TUNE IND
PRF? NOT WO
NO
IS
AT RUN, IS T
DULATOR FIRING NO NO IS D23 (300V UNSAFE) NO POWER SUPPLY OR
IS D24 (300V ACTIVE) LED MICRO CONTR
TERMITTENT NOTE? LED ON MODULATOR LIT? MODULATOR PCB FAULT
MODULATOR PCB LIT? D18 (TUNE
YES YES YES Y
CABLEFORM MODULATOR
MODULATOR MV SMPS FAULT
OR MICROCONTROLLER PCB Tx MICROCONT
DULATOR FAULT OR NO RUN COMMAND
FAULT OR NO TRIGGER OR CONNECT
FROM CONTROL BOARD FROM CONTROL BOARD
Figure 12e - Flowchart (sheet 2 of 2)
7
KH 2020
Chap 8a
CHAPTER 8A
OPTIONS FOR NUCLEUS 3 RADAR DISPLAYS
3-PHASE TRANSFORMER KIT PARTS

(6000 DISPLAYS) 4 Table 4 provides the 3-phase transformer part number
information.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Table 4 – 3-Phase Transformer Parts List
1 T h e 3 - P h a se Tr a n sf o r m e r K i t e n a b l e s t h e
transformation of the Ship’s 440V, 3-phase supply to
220V/110V for use with Nucleus Radar Displays Type 6000
Series. CCT GRID DESCRIPTION KELVIN HUGHES
REF. REF. PART No.
INSTALLATION 3-Phase Transformer NNR - A322
2 To install the 3-phase Transformer implement the Isolator Cable

following: Self Captivating
Panel Screws
(1) Fix the 3-phase Transformer assembly (HRC -
A190) to the back left corner of the base on the
display console using the 2 self captivating panel
screws (attached to the mounting plate) refer to
Figure 1a.
(2) Locate the washers and fasten the nuts on the M6
studs provided.
(3) Plug the socket into the filter unit.
(4) Remove the cover plate of the assembly to reveal
the terminals and then connect the 3-phase mains
input to TBI on the Transformer.
TESTING PROCEDURE
WARNING
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT ON
THE TRANSFORMER WHEN SHIP’S THREE
PHASE MAINS IS CONNECTED AND LIVE.
3 Switch ON the mains isolator and using a Multimeter

check the following:
(1) The three phase mains input is 380/440V.
(2) The output voltage is 220/110V as set. Refer to
Figure 2a for link settings.
NOTE:
If the output voltage is not present check FS1.

KH 2020
Chap 8a
10 120
2 OFF SELF CAPTIVATING
70 PANEL SCREW
10
85
40.0
A 195.0
B B
7.5
10.0
12 116.0
140
CD-2299
Figure 1a - 3-Phase Transformer Kit (Installation Diagram)

KH 2020
Chap 8a
TB2
TB1 0V
0V 1
CORE 1
4 110V
2 TERMINAL
SHIP'S 380 V
SUPPLY CORE 2 3 BLOCK ON
FROM
0V FLYING LEAD
3 TO
ISOLATOR 440V FILTER UNIT
CABLE 319 K 2 110V FS1
CORE 3 4
1 NC
5
OUTPUT VOLTAGES (TB2)

LINK 2 & 3 FOR 220 V
1 & 3
LINK FOR 110 V
2 & 4
CD-2300
Figure 2a - 3-Phase Transformer Kit (Link Settings)

KH 2020
Chap 8a
INTERFACING FOR THE LOW RATIO Master/Slave Synchro Kit

COMPASS & MASTER/SLAVE 9 Implement the instructions in Paragraph 17, as
INSTALLATIONS required. To fit the Kit follow Paragraph 21, then
Paragraph 25 for all Nucleus 5000/6000 displays. External
connections are described in Paragraph 35.
INTRODUCTION
10 Implement the Interfacing instructions in Paragraphs
5 The following information provides a guide for the 43 and 57 and Table 10.
installation of any of the Nucleus Interface Kits listed
below: Master/Slave Adapter Kit
(1) Low Ratio Compass Kit – HRC-A188 or
HRC-A189 11 To fit the Kit, implement the instructions in Paragraph
28 for Nucleus 6000 or Paragraph 33 for Nucleus
(2) Master/Slave Kit – NNR-A285 (N2 6000) or 5000. External connections are described in Paragraphs34
NNR-A440 (N2 5000) to 42.
(3) Master/Slave Synchro Kit – HRC-A289
NOTE:
(4) Divide By Four PCB – CDY-A55 Refer to Paragraph 67 for Link 1 setting.
(5) Interface Box – HRC-A26
Divide By Four PCB
Low Ratio Compass Kit
12 To fit the PCB implement the instructions in Paragraph
6 To fit the Kit follow Paragraph 17, then Paragraph 24 44, then Paragraph 48 for Nucleus 6000 or Paragraph
for Nucleus 6000 or Paragraphs 29 and 55 for Nucleus 53 for Nucleus 5000.
5000. External connections are described in Paragraphs 34
to 42, complete the installation using Paragraphs 62 and 65. Interface Box
Master/Slave Kit 13 For Nucleus 5000 and Split 6000A Systems the
interfaces are mounted in a separate box.
7 Implement the instructions in Paragraph 17, as
required. To fit the Kit follow Paragraph 23 then Overall dimensions: 410mm long, 250mm wide, 162mm
Paragraph 27 and 28 for Nucleus 6000 or Paragraphs 32 high.
and 33 for Nucleus 5000. External connections are
described in Paragraphs 34 to 42. All Installations
8 Implement the Interfacing & Setting up instructions in
14 Implement the instructions in Paragraphs 54 and 55
Paragraphs 43 to 56. The Master/Slave Interface PCB
after fitting the Installation Kit.
Link functions are described in Paragraphs 66 and 67.

KH 2020
Chap 8a
NUCLEUS INTERFACING CHART – Sheet 1
NOTE:
(1) Nucleus connected to 1 Radar Transmitter/Aerial only.
(2) A Kelvin Hughes Transmitter/Aerial controlled by the
Nucleus Display counts as the 1 Radar Transmitter/Aerial.
1 RADAR INPUT
TO NUCLEUS
KELVIN HUGHES OTHER MANUFACTURER
NUCLEUS AS MASTER NUCLEUS AS SLAVE NUCLEUS AS SLAVE
MAY OR MAY NOT REQUIRE FROM RADAR LISTS IS RADAR

INTERFACE DEPENDENT 1 SYNCHRO/RESOLVER
NO INTERFACE REQUIRED
UPON KH TRANSCEIVER AZIMUTH OR 1024
TYPE PULSE AZIMUTH
IF INTERFACE NEEDED
USE HRC-A192/193
(WITH APPROPRIATE NO YES
SETTING UP INSTRUCTIONS)
USE HRC-A192/193 PLUS

USE HRC-A192/193
HRC-A289 OR CDY-A55 (WITH
(WITH APPROPRIATE
APPROPRIATE SETTING
SETTING UP INSTRUCTIONS)
CD-1407
UP INSTRUCTIONS)

KH 2020
Chap 8a
NUCLEUS INTERFACING CHART – Sheet 2
NOTE:
(1) Nucleus connected to 2 Radar Transmitter/Aerial only.
(2) A Kelvin Hughes Transmitter/Aerial controlled by the

Nucleus Display counts as one of the possible 2 Radar
Transmitter/Aerials, and its Interface requirements must be
listed on the Indent.
2 RADAR INPUT
TO NUCLEUS
RADAR 1 RADAR 2
IS NUCLEUS MASTER
TO KH SYSTEM (SINGLE NUCLEUS AS SLAVE
OR INTERSWITCHED)
FROM RADAR LISTS IS

RADAR 2 SYNCHRO/
NO YES RESOLVER AZIMUTH OR
1024 PULSE AZIMUTH
USE HRC-A192/193 (WITH

SLAVE TO APPROPRIATE SETTING NO YES
UP INSTRUCTIONS)
NUCLEUS AS MASTER NUCLEUS AS MASTER NUCLEUS AS MASTER NUCLEUS AS MASTER
NUCLEUS AS MASTER NUCLEUS AS MASTER NO YES
NO YES NUCLEUS AS MASTER
USE HRC-A192/193 PLUS CDY-A55

FOR 1024 PULSES (SYNCHRO
NUCLEUS AS MASTER
RESOLVER AZ REQUIRES
CD-1415 SPECIAL PCB FROM RADAR 1)

KH 2020
Chap 8a
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Video

15 The Master/Slave Interface, Master/Slave Synchro Normally +ve 5.5V peak from Buffer Amplifier.
(for Radar 2 only) and Divide By 4 PCBs may receive May be +ve or -ve 12V from 0V, 75 ohm without Buffer
inputs from any two Radars. The Master/Slave Synchro can Amplifier.
accept an input from only one Radar (Radar 2 only). The
Radar selection for the Nucleus range of displays is carried Other video levels may be catered for using suitably
out on the Nucleus display. The Master/Slave Adapter PCB modified Buffer Amps:
is used as the interface to the Display ‘Input/Output PCB’.
RAN-A23/** (75 ohm Co-axial input sockets)
Many forms of input are acceptable, enabling interfacing
with other compatible Radar Systems. or
RAN-A29/** (93 ohm UHF input sockets)
16 The Low Ratio Compass PCB receives the input from
a 1:1 or 36:1 ratio Synchro Compass System. Sync Pulses
PRE-FITTING CHECKS Normally +ve 12V from Buffer Amplifier.

May be -ve or +ve 3 to 50V from 0V, 75 ohm without
17 Prior to installing the interface boards into the Nucleus Buffer Amplifier.
Display, check that the signals from the host radars
conform to the formats listed below. If the signals are Sync pulse levels of up to 50V, +ve or -ve from 0V,
different, refer to the Technical Description of the host radar may be catered for by Buffer Amps RAN-A23/** or
or Kelvin Hughes to ensure compatibility. RAN-A29/** without modification.
Azimuth Types PRFs

Master/Slave Synchro PCB (HRC-A290) Short Pulse 1500 to 3200 Hz.
(See Table 5) 3 phase Resolver Excitation 50 to 1200 Hz
Medium Pulse 750 to 1600 Hz.
sinewave. Long Pulse 375 to 800 Hz.
2 phase Resolver Excitation 50 to 1200 Hz
sinewave. INSTALLATION OF INTERFACES
2 phase Resolver Excitation 900 to 4000 Hz
18 The Interfaces required are to be installed in the
squarewave.
following order:
(1) Low Ratio Compass Kit (HRC-A188)
Divide by 4 PCB (CDY-A297)
(2) Master/Slave Synchro Kit (HRC-A289)
(See Table 7) +3 to 7V pulses. 1024 pulses per rev.
(3) Divide by 4 Kit (CDY-A55)
(4) Master/Slave Interface Kit (HRC-A192)
Master/Slave Interface PCB (HRC-A197)
19 Prior to installation, the pre-fit requisites are to be
(see Table 9) 2 phase 90 cycles per rev. established. Each PCB is to be fitted in the order
(No ac excitation) shown above and links set before the next PCB is fitted.
+ve Pulses, various 90 to 360 pulses per rev Figure 3a shows the stacking and arrangement of the PCBs
voltages (even no.’s only). on the side plate.
+ve Pulses, various 4096 pulses per rev.
voltages Low Ratio Compass PCB (CDY A188)
20 Install the Low Ratio Compass PCB as follows:
(1) Fit the required converter chip, refer to Table 13.
Heading Line Types (2) Set the Links, refer to Paragraph 57.
(3) Set compass ratio switches, refer to Table 14.
Master/Slave Synchro PCB (HRC-A290) (4) Set the links of the Display System PCB, refer to
No Heading line input required (generated on Low Ratio Compass PCB in Paragraph 64.
the PCB). (5) Fit the PCB in the position shown in Figure 3a,
using the pillars provided.
Divide by 4 PCB (CDY-A297)
NOTE:
See Table 11 +ve or -ve going input pulses 1 per rev. If other interfacing is required, refer to the following
of 4 to 15V from 0V. Paragraphs; if no other interfacing is required implement
Paragraph 17.
Master/Slave Interface PCB (HRC-A197)
See Table 11 +ve or -ve going input pulses 1 per rev.
of 4 to 15V from 0V.

KH 2020
Chap 8a
3 HOLES
135 ¥ 12.0
MASTER/SLAVE
ADAPTER PCB
325
410
370
MASTER/SLAVE
INTERFACE PCB
MASTER/SLAVE SYNCHRO
OR DIVIDE BY 4 PCB
250
LOW RATIO COMPASS PCB
165
CABLE ENTRY
CD-2427
Figure 3a - Interfaces Installation Details: 5000/Split 6000A

KH 2020
Chap 8a
INTERFACE PLATE
MASTER/SLAVE
ADAPTER PCB
MASTER/SLAVE
SELECTOR PCB
MASTER/SLAVE SYNCHRO
OR DIVIDE BY 4 PCB
LOW RATIO COMPASS PCB
CD-2431
Figure 4a - Interfaces Installation Details: 6000 Series

KH 2020
Chap 8a
Master/Slave Synchro PCB Master/Slave Interface PCB

NOTE: NOTE:
This PCB is connected as Radar 2 input, even in 1 Radar Buffer Amplifiers (RAN-A23/* or RAN-A29/*) are to be
System. fitted near host displays for video & sync inputs, 1 per
radar.
21 Install the Master/Slave Synchro PCB as follows:
23 Install the Master/Slave Interface PCB as follows:
(1) Fit the required converter chip, see Table 5.
(1) Set switches and links, refer to Table 6, 8, 9, 10,
(2) Make Links 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. Refer to Figure 5a,
11, 12 for Radar 2 inputs.
below, for link positions.
(2) Set switches and links, refer to Table 8, 9, 10, 11,
(3) Fit the PCB in the position shown in Figure 4a,
12 for Radar 1 inputs.
using the pillars provided.
(3) Fit the Master/Slave Interface PCB, as shown
Divide By Four PCB in Figure 4a.
(4) Fit the Master/Slave Adapter PCB, as shown in
NOTE: Figure 4a.
This PCB is fitted for Radar 1 and/or Radar 2 with 1024
pulse Azimuth.
22 For 1024 Azimuth inputs fit the Divide by Four PCB in
the position shown in Figure 3a, using the pillars
provided.
2 1 TB5A
1
S1
1
S2
1
S3
MSB 1
LK1 TP2
IC2
TP1
TB7A TP4
LK2
1
TP3
LK3 TP6
TP5
28
LK4 TP8
TP7
LK5 TP10
MASTER/SLAVE
TP9
SYNCHRO PCB (HRC-A290)
LK6 TP12
TP11
6 5 4 2 1
1
SKA
CD-2432
Figure 5a– Master/Slave Synchro PCB: Link Locations

KH 2020
Chap 8a
CONNECTIONS REQUIRED FOR NUCLEUS Master/Slave Adapter PCB

6000 SERIES
28 Connect the Master/Slave Adapter PCB as follows:
Low Ratio Compass PCB (1) Connect PLB and PLE to Display Input/Output
PCB, HRC-A102, PLA and PLG using Cableform
24 Connect the Low Ratio Compass PCB as follows: HRC - A341.
(1) P l u g S K F Fl yl e a d ( Wh i t e ) i n t o P L F o f
Master/Slave Adapter PCB. CONNECTIONS REQUIRED FOR NUCLEUS
(2) Plug SKL Flylead (Orange) into PLC of Display SPLIT 6000A SERIES
Input/Output PCB. If other interfaces are to be
NOTE:
fitted continue with Paragraph 47.
The Interface PCBs are mounted in an extra box HRC-A26.
(3) If no other interface required connect 38 way Connections for the NUCLEUS Split 6000A are the same
cableform, HRC-A388 to Master/Slave Adapter as for the NUCLEUS 6000 Series except for the following
PCB SKT C, SKT D and SKT P. paragraphs:
NOTE: Low Ratio Compass PCB

It is necessary to connect the co-axial cables using an
in-line connector to the Input/Output PCB, fold back any 29 Implement the following:
unused wires.
(1) Disconnect SKC Flylead from its orange
(4) Connect cable form HRC-A341, between connection and fit the wires to the two way
Master/Slave Adapter PCB PLB and PLE and Terminal Block located in the bottom of the
Display Input/Output PCB PLA and PLG. Interface box.
Disconnect wire from SKA-8 and fold back. Move Wire 10 connects to 38 core Green/Blue
wire from SKA-9 to SKA-8. Wire 10 connects to 38 core Slate/Blue
(2) If no other interfaces are required use a length of
Master/Slave Synchro PCB 38 core cable and the SKTs supplied, to connect
the Master/Slave Adapter PCB SKB and SKE to
25 Connect the Master/Slave Synchro PCB as follows: the Input/Output PCB SKA, SKG and SKC
(1) P l u g S K A Fl yl e a d ( Wh i t e ) i n t o P L A o f respectively (Pin 1 to Pin 1 etc. except for SKE-8
not connected, SKE-9 to SKC-8 and SKC-9 not
Master/Slave Interface PCB.
connected.).
(2) Plug TB 5A/7A Flylead (4 way Orange) into TB
5A/7A of Master/Slave Interface PCB. NOTE:
It is necessary to connect the co-axial cables using an
in-line connector to the Input/Output PCB, fold back any
OR unused wires.
Divide by Four PCB Master/Slave Synchro PCB

26 Connect the Divide by Four Circuit Board as follows: 30 Connect as for Nucleus 6000 Series.
(1) Plug SKA Flylead (White) into PLA of the
Master/Slave Interface PCB. Divide By Four PCB
(2) For RADAR 2 (1024 pulse Azimuth) plug TB 31 Connect as for Nucleus 6000 Series.
5A/7A Flylead (4 way Orange) into TB 5A/7A of
Master/Slave Interface PCB
(3) For RADAR 1 (1024 pulse Azimuth) plug TB2A
F l y l e a d ( 1 0 wa y O r a n g e ) i n t o T B 2 A o f 32 Implement the following:
(1) Connect the Master/Slave Interface PCB VIDEO
and SYNC OUT to the Input/Output PCB VIDEO
Master/Slave Interface PCB and SYNC input.
27 Connect the Master/Slave Interface PCB as follows: (2) Using an additional length of coaxial cable
connect the Master/Slave Interface PCB BLANK
(1) Plug SKK (White) into PLP of Master/Slave OUT to the Display Input/Output PCB BLANK
Interface PCB. input.
(2) Connect TB2 Flylead (10 way Orange) into PLC of
Master/Slave Adapter PCB. Master/Slave Adapter PCB
(3) If RADAR 1 is not 1024 pulse:
33 Implement the following:
Connect TB2A to PLD of Master/Slave Adapter (1) Use a length of 38 core cable and the connectors
PCB using Cableform HRC-A342. supplied, to connect the Master/Slave Adapter
PCB SKB and SKE to the Display Input/Output
PCB NNR-A110 PLW4 and PLV respectively (Pin
1 to Pin 1 etc.).

KH 2020
Chap 8a
EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS TO INTERFACES Master/Slave Adapter PCB

41 If RADAR 1 is a Master to Nucleus Transceiver
Low Ratio Compass PCB connect:
34 Connect as follows to PLA the external compass (1) SKA and SKG connected with 38 core cable.
input: (SKG used for Mk5 Tx only) coaxes connect to
Master/Slave Adapter PCB.
Pin 1 - S1
Pin 2 - S2 42 If Radar 1 is slave only, connect as follows:
Pin 3 - S3 (1) To SKA:
Pin 4 - R1 (RHi)
Pin 5 - R2 (RLo)
Pin 11 - Heading Line Pulses
Master/Slave Synchro PCB Pin 14 - Heading Line 0V
Pin 8 - Azimuth Pulses
35 Connect as follows to SKA the Synchro/Resolver Pin 9 - 4096 Azimuth Pulses
Azimuth from Radar 2: Pin 14 - Azimuth 0V
Pin 1 - S1
Pin 2 - S2
Pin 3 - S3
Pin 4 - S4 (Resolver only)
Pin 5 - R1 (RHi)
Pin 6 - R2 (RLo)
Divide By Four PCB

36 Connect as follows to TB5 the RADAR 2 Azimuth
Input:

Pin 2 - Azimuth 0V
Pin 4 - Heading Line 0V
37 If RADAR 1 Azimuth is 1024 pulses connect to TB2 as

follows:

Pin 2 - Azimuth 0V

38 If RADAR 2 Azimuth is Master/Slave Interface PCB
input, connect as follows:
(1) To TB7B:

Pin 2 - Azimuth 0V
(2) To TB5A:

39 For all RADAR 2 inputs:
Video2} via Buffer

Sync 2} Amp RAN-A23/A29
40 For all RADAR 1 inputs:
Video1} via Buffer

Sync1} Amp RAN-A23/A29

KH 2020
Chap 8a
NUCLEUS INTERFACING INSTRUCTIONS Radar 2 Inputs Only (cannot be Radar 1)

44 Synchro/resolver Azimuths - using HRC-A289 Kit
Azimuth Inputs (Master Slave Synchro). The output from this kit feeds
43 It is important that Radar 2 inputs are considered first into HRC-A192 Kit (Master/Slave Interface).
as these can influence the settings for Radar 1.
For link tables, x = MADE

o = OPEN
- = Does Not Matter.
(Not Used)
Table 5 – Syncro & Resolver Azimuths
Reference Phase Frequency Converter Output Remarks

Volts Volts Hz Type Pulses/Rev
SYNCHRO (3 phase)
26 11.8 50 to 1000 45-657-1037 4096

(168F308)
115 90 50 to 1000 45-657-1042 4096

(168F309)
RESOLVER (2 phase)
26 11.8 50 to 1000 45-657-1040 4096

(168F310)
40 20 50 to 1000 45-657-1040 4096 HRC-A290/2 PCB **

(168F310)
115 90 50 to 1000 45-657-1043 4096

(168F311)
14 +/- 7 4KHz 45-657-1038 4096

peak-peak peak (168F383)
squarewave
7 to 11 peak +/- 5 900/1200 45-657-1039 4096

(Changes with peak (Changes (168F345)
range in use) with range
in use)
** HRC-A290/2 PCB - Open Links 1 and 2. Four off 5K6 Ohm Resistors are to
be fitted from TP1 to TP2, TP3 to TP4, TP2 to TP6, TP4 to TP8.

KH 2020
Chap 8a
Link And Switch Settings For Radar 2 On Master/slave Radar 1 and/or Radar 2 Input using HRC-A192 Kit
Interface PCB HRC-A197 (part of HRC-A192 Kit) (Master/Slave)
45 Refer to Table 6, below. 49 PULSE INPUTS up to 360 per Rev for HRC-A197 PCB
Table 6 – Radar Link & Switch Settings on Master/Slave For Azimuth Input Noise Suppression
Interface PCB MAKE Link 24 (Radar 1)
MAKE Link 25 (Radar 2)
AZIMUTH HEADING + 50 If an Azimuth Input is a clean pulse its link may be

LINE OPEN.
8 19 20 21 SW2 3 4 27 Table 9 – Pulse Inputs Up To 360 per Rev.

o o o x - o x o
RADAR 2 RADAR 1
Radar 1 And/or Radar 2 Inputs 8 19 20 21 SW2 6 7 9 10 15 16
46 Radar 1 and Radar 2 may be different types. Set the o o o x - x x o x x o
links and Switches for the correct type on each
channel. 2 phase 90V rms x o o 45 o o x x x o 45
90 pulses/rev
(use 1 phase
1024 Pulse per Rev. Azimuth using CDY-A55 Kit only)
(Divide By 4)
2 phase 6V rms x o o 45 x o x x x o 45
47 The output from this kit feeds into HRC-A192 Kit 90 pulses/rev
(Master/Slave Interface). (use 1 phase
only)
Table 7 – 1024 Pulse per Rev. Azimuth 2 phase 115V x o o 33 o x o x x o 33
rms
132 pulses/rev o o o o x x o
(use 1 phase x 66 o 66
INPUT INPUT OUTPUT REMARKS only)
TYPE VOLTS PULSES/
REV OR
+ to -20V square x o o 45 o x o x x o 45
1024 Pulse +3 to 7V from 256 wave
0V 180 pulses/rev o o o o x x o
x 90 o 90
Azimuth Link And Switch Settings For Radar 2 On OR

Master/Slave +15V pulse x o o 45 x x o x x o 45
180 pulses/rev
o o x x o x o
Interface PCB HRC-A197 (part of HRC-A192 Kit) OR x 90 x 90
48 Refer to Table 8, below. + 15V square x o o 45 o o x x x o 45
wave
Table 8 – Azimuth Link and Switch Settings for Radar 2 on 90 pulses/rev
OR
20V pulse x o o 33 x x o x x o 33
RADAR 2 RADAR 1 + 132 pulses/rev
o o x o x x o
x 66 o 66
8 19 20 21 SW2 6 7 9 10 15 16 SW1
o o o x - x x o x x o 64
Link 24 OPEN (Radar 1) unless the Input is noisy.

Link 25 OPEN (Radar 1) unless the Input is noisy.

KH 2020
Chap 8a
SW1 and SW2 Settings for Azimuth Ratios from Table 8 Video Switch Settings on HRC-A197
51 Refer to Table 10, below. 53 Refer to Table 12, below.
Table 12 – Video Switch Settings on HRC-A197

Table 10 – SW1 and SW2 Settings for Azimuth Ratios from
Table 8
VIDEO SWITCHES
SW POLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RATIO 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 RADAR 2 RADAR 1
INPUT POLARITY SW4 SW3
33 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
45 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON +VE GOING VIDEO +ve +ve

(Direct or from Buffer
64 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Amplifier)
-VE GOING VIDEO -ve -ve

90 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF
(Direct from Radar
only)
132 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
NOTE:
Heading Line Inputs to HRC-A197 PCB (Part of HRC- RADAR 1 and RADAR 2 Buffer Amps (RAN-A23/* and/or
RAN-A29/*) must be set for +ve or -ve Video as required.
A192 Kit) or CDY-A297 PCB (Part of CDY-A55 Kit) The output is a +ve to feed HRC-A197 PCB.
52 Refer to Table 11, below.
NUCLEUS DISPLAY SETTINGS -
COMMISSIONING
Table 11 - Heading Line Inputs to HRC-A197 PCB or
CDY-A297 PCB 54 Implement the following:
(1) Set Radar Display to ON.
(2) Make Link 26 on Display System PCB (Grid A3).
HEADING LINE LINKS (3) From STANDBY screen, select INSTALLATION
menu box.
(4) Position cursor in the DISPLAY box. Slave,
RADAR 2 RADAR 1 Master, Other, may be chosen.
(5) Select OTHER option. Single Tx, Master Slave
Interface, Dual Interswitch, may be chosen.
INPUT TYPE 3 4 27 1 2 26 (6) Select Master Slave Interface. A and B Outlines
show. (Azimuth is auto set to 4096).
OPEN CONTACTS - - - x o x (7) Move cursor to A and select.
(HRC-A192 only)
(Radar 1 as Master (8) Move cursor to lower left hand area of A outline to
only) get Slave, Master, Other, choice.
(Powered from this (9) Select Master or Slave as required for Radar 1.
PCB)
Radar 2 is preset to Slave.
POSITIVE GOING o x o o x o (10) Remove Link 26.
PULSE
(11) Exit Menu.
e.g. -ve 15V to 0V
0V to +5V (12) When the Transmitter Ready Indicator is ON, SET
RADAR DISPLAY to RADAR A, and SHORTEST
NEGATIVE GOING x o o x o o RANGE.
PULSE
e.g. +ve 5V to 0V Settings On System PCB (HRC-A159 for 6000, HRC-A160
for 5000, HRC-A343 for 5000A)
NOTE: 55 Implement the following:
Links 26 and 27 do not exist on CDY-A297 PCB (1) Set RV5 (Sync Delay, Grid H5) to MINIMUM
(Anti-clockwise).

KH 2020
Chap 8a
Master/Slave Interface PCB (HRC-A197) 58 To correct any difference:
Radar 1 (1) Adjust SW4 (22.5 degree steps) anti-clockwise,

i.e. from F to D etc., until the target has been
56 Implement the following, referring to Figure 6a for over-adjusted. Turn SW1 back 1 step.
locations of links and potentiometers: (2) Adjust SW5 (1.4 degree steps) anti-clockwise,
(1) Set RV2 (NL1) Fully Anti-clockwise (Noise level). until the target has been over-adjusted. Turn SW1
back 1 step.
(2) Set RV1 (Vid 1) Fully Clockwise, then Adjust until
VID LED (D19) JUST FLICKERS (5.5V peak (3) Adjust SW6 (0.088 degree steps) anti-clockwise,
video). to give the final correction.
(3) Set RV2 (NL1) to reduce NOISE LEVEL if
Radar 2
necessary. Reset RV1.
NOTE:
RV2 is to be used only for Radars which have a very high (1) Set Radar Display to RADAR B. Set cursor into
background noise level. top left hand box, TXA, to get TXB, Standby
choice. May also be changed in Standby menu.
(4) Set RV5 (SYNC1) for correct SYNC DELAY.
MAKE LK 22 if longer delay range is necessary. (2) SET RV4 (NL2) fully anti-clockwise (noise level).
(3) SET RV3 (VID2) fully clockwise, then adjust until
Heading Line Correction for CDY-A297 PCB (Divide VID LED (D19) JUST FLICKERS (5.5V peak
by 4 PCB) video).
(4) SET RV4 (NL2) to reduce NOISE LEVEL if
57 Implement the following: necessary. Reset RV3.
(1) Set SW4, SW5 and SW6 on CDY-A298 PCB to
NOTE:
position F.
RV4 is to be used only for Radars which have a very high
(2) Using the Radar 1 Host Display, note the angle of background noise level.
a video target with respect to the Heading Line.
(5) SET RV6 (SYNC2) for correct SYNC DELAY.
Compare this with the angle seen on the Radar 2
Make Link 23 if a longer delay range is required.
Slave Display.
TB2
SKK
26 17
1 10
2 1 2 1
26 TB2A 17
TB7B TB5A
SKF
LK27 LK26
SYNC1
RV1
S4 S3 SKH
TP2
RV3 SYNC2
S2 S1
LK3 LK4 LK2 LK1
SKE
TP1 VID1
LK9
SKG
LK7
MASTER/SLAVE LK22 LK23 RV4 RV2
VID2
INTERFACE PCB LK15

LK16 SKG1
(HRC-A197) LK19 VID
LK20
LK10 OUT
LK21
RV5 RV6 SKH1
D19
TP4 SYNC
LK6 OUT
PLA LK8 SKF1

LK24 TP18
1 6 TP19 BLANK
OUT
LK25 TP5 TP3
CD-2417
Figure 6a - Master/Slave Interface PCB: Link Locations

KH 2020
Chap 8a
Heading Line Correction for HRC-A290 or CDY-A297 Link And Switch Settings For Low Ratio Compass PCB
PCB (Master/Slave Synchro or Divide by 4) (HRC-A107)
64 The LINK settings for Nucleus systems are:
(1) Link 1 MADE, Link 2 OPEN - For all ratios and
(1) Set SW1, SW2 and SW3 to position F. 2048 pulses per rev output.
(2) Using the Radar 2 Host Display, note the angle of (2) For special applications outside the Nucleus
a video target with respect to the Heading Line. system, the links may be set to Link 1 OPEN, Link
Compare this with the angle seen on the Radar 2 2 MADE, to give 1:1 ratio and 4096 pulses per rev.
Slave Display.
65 The SWITCH settings for Nucleus systems are:
61 To correct any difference:
(1) Set SW2 to 2 times the division ratio required. The
(1) Adjust SW1 (22.5 degree steps) anti-clockwise, ON position gives the SW2 count. e.g. Set SW2 to
i.e. from F to D etc., until the target has been 2 for 1:1 ratio and 72 for 36:1 ratio.
over-adjusted. Turn SW1 back 1 step.
(2) Set SW1 to SW2 setting minus 1. The OFF
(2) Adjust SW2 (1.4 degree steps) anti-clockwise, position gives the SW1 count. e.g. Set SW1 to 1 if
until the target has been over-adjusted. Turn SW2 is at 2 and 71 if SW2 is at 72.
SW1 back 1 step.
(3) Adjust SW3 (0.088 degree steps) anti-clockwise
Table 14 – Compass PCB Switch Settings for Nucleus
to give the final correction.
Low Ratio Compass PCB (HRC-A107)

SW1/2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
62 Refer to Table 13, below. POLE
Table 13 – Converters for Low Ratio Compass PCB

(HRC-A107) Binary 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
Count
Ref. Phase Frequency Converter Output Remarks SW1 OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

Volts Volts Hz Type Pulses/ Ratio “OFF”
Rev 1:1 Count=1
SW2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
26 11.8 50 to 1200 45-657-???? 4096 “ON”
(268C300) Count=2
115 90 50 to 1200 45-657-1052 4096 SW1 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON
(268C301) “OFF”
36:1 Count=71
SW2 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
“ON”
Settings For Display System PCB ( H R C - Count=72
A159/A160/A343)
63 OPEN Links 10, 12, 13, 16 (Grid M5/6) on the System
PCB before switching ON.

KH 2020
Chap 8a
FUNCTION OF LINKS Azimuth Selection

Radar 1
LK15 Made, LK16 Open : 2 phase or pulsed,
66 The link settings for the Master/Slave Interface PCB
are as follows: using PLL
LK15 Open, LK16 Made : 4096 pulse input
Heading Line
Radar 2
Radar 1 : Heading Line input
LK19 Made, LK20& LK21 Open : 2 phase or pulsed
LK1 Made, LK2 Open : -ve using PLL
LK1 Open, LK2 Made : +ve LK20 Made, LK19 & LK20 Open : 4096 pulse input
LK26 Made : +12V to HL switch LK21 Made, LK19 & LK20 Open : 4096 input from
LK26 Open : HL switch externally : synchro/resolver PCB
powered (HRC-A290)
Radar 2 : Heading Line input Azimuth Input Noise Suppression Capacitors
LK3 Made, LK4 Open : -ve Radar 1 : Inputs

LK3 Open, LK4 Made : +ve
LK27 Made : +12V to HL switch LK24 Made : for Azimuth using PLL
LK27 Open : HL switch externally LK24 Open : for 4096
powered
Radar 2 : Inputs
Azimuth Input Amplitude
LK25 Made : for Azimuth using PLL
Radar 1 : Inputs LK25 Open : for 4096
(2 phase, pulsed or 4096)
Lock Delay (Sync Delay)
LK6 Open : greater than 25V peak
LK6 Made : less than 25V peak Radar 1
Radar 2 : Inputs LK22 Open : Short Lock Delay, less

(2 phase, pulsed or 4096) than 500 ns
LK22 Made : Lock Delay from 500ns
LK8 Open : greater than 25V peak to 2 ms
LK8 Made : less than 25V peak
Radar 2
Phase Lock Loop (PLL)
LK23 Open : Short Lock Delay, less
LK7 Made, LK9 Open : 1024 multiplication than 500 ns
LK7 Open, LK9 Made : 2048 multiplication LK23 Made : Lock Delay from 500ns
LK10 Open : High PLL frequency to 2 ms
LK10 Made : Low PLL frequency
NOTE:
For some installations with longer delays, C58 may be
incremented to1nF. (HRC-A197/2)
67 The link LK1 on the Master/Slave Adapter PCB is

removed only to isolate the 4096 Azimuth pulses -
Normally made.

KH 2020
Chap 8a
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Master/Slave Synchro PCB Radar 2 only.

73 The PCB receives the input from a radar with 1:1
Low Ratio Compass PCB Synchro or Resolver azimuth transmission, and
68 The PCB accepts inputs from Synchro Compass converts it to 4096 pulses per aerial revolution for the
systems with ratios between 1:1 and 128:1. The Master/Slave Interface PCB. The PCB also produces the
normal ratios used are 1:1, 36:1 and 90:1. Nucleus systems Heading Line.
can cater for 90:1 without this Low Ratio Compass PCB.
Links And Switches
Master/ Slave Adapter PCB 74 Links 1 to 6 are normally MADE for Nucleus fittings,
unless Table 5 indicates otherwise. The links may be
69 The PCB mainly comprises a number of Plugs, which changed to vary the input voltage range of the PCB.
provide interconnections between the Master/Slave
PCBs, (if fitted, the Synchro Compass PCB), the Tx/Rx’s and 75 Switches 1 to 3 are used to adjust the Heading Line to
the Display System. the correct angle.
(1) SW1, adjusts in 22.5 degree steps.
Master/Slave Interface PCB (2) SW2, adjusts in 1.4 degree steps.
70 The Master/Slave Interface PCB takes inputs of (3) SW3, adjusts in 0.088 degree steps.
Azimuth, Heading Line, Video and Sync from two (4) Zero correction is with all switches in the F
Radars and converts the inputs to the standard Display position.
requirements. The selection of Radar 1 or Radar 2 is
controlled from the Display.
Divide By 4 PCB
NOTE:
(1) If Radar 2 has a Synchro or Resolver Azimuth, the 76 The PCB receives inputs of 1024 pulses per
Synchro/Compass PCB must be used in addition to the revolution, from either Radar 1 or Radar 2, and divides
Master/Slave Interface PCB. the input to produce 256 pulses per revolution for the
Master/Slave Interface PCB. The board also produces
(2) If Radar 1 and/or 2 is 1024 pulse Azimuth the Divide by Heading Line alignment correction.
4 PCB must be used in addition to the Master/Slave
Interface PCB.
Switches
71 The switch functions on the Master/Slave Interface
PCB are as follows:
(1) SW1 sets the division ratio for Radar 1 Azimuth,
using PLL.
(2) SW2 sets the division ratio for Radar 2 Azimuth,
using PLL.
(3) SW3 sets the Radar 1 Video for + ve or - ve signal.
(4) SW4 sets the Radar 2 Video for + ve or - ve signal.
Potentiometers
72 The potentiometer functions on the Master/Slave
Interface PCB are as follows:
(1) RV1, Radar 1 Video input to give +ve 5.5V
standard Video.
(2) RV2, Radar 1 Noise Level threshold for high noise
inputs.
(3) RV3, Radar 2 Video input to give +ve 5.5V
standard Video.
(4) RV4, Radar 2 Noise Level threshold for high noise
inputs.
(5) RV5, Radar 1 lock Delay.
(6) RV6, Radar 2 Lock Delay.

KH 2020
Chap 8a
Parts
77 Table 15 provides a list of parts.
Table 15 – Interface Units/Kits Parts List
H H N N H H
R R N N R R
KELVIN C C R R C C
DESCRIPTION HUGHES - - - - - -
CODE NO. A A A A A A
1 1 2 4 2 3
8 8 8 4 8 3
8 9 5 0 9 7
Assembly Low Ratio HRC-A188

Compass Kit
Assembly Low Ratio HRC-A189

Compass Kit
Assembly of Master/Slave NNR-A285

Kit
Assembly of Master/Slave NNR-A440

Kit
Assembly of Master/Slave HRC-A289

Synchro Kit
Assembly of Master/Slave HRC-A337 * *

Adaptor Kit
Assembly of PCB Compass HRC-A107 * *

(Low Ratio)
Assembly of Cableform, HRC-A388 * *

MSA Link
Assembly of Interface Unit HRC-A26 * *

(5000)
Assembly of PCB HRC-A288 * * *

Master/Slave Adapter
Assembly of PCB HRC-A197 * *

Master/Slave Interface
Assembly of Cableform HRC-A342 * *

TB2A-MSA
Assembly of PCB HRC-A290 *

Master/Slave Synchro
Assembly of Cableform *
M.S.A.-Input PCB
NOTE:
*Items required in Kit.

KH 2020
Chap 8a
BUFFER AMPLIFIERS (RAN-A23/* AND VARIANTS TO RAN-A23 AND RAN-A29

RAN-A29/*)
Buffer Amplifiers 75 Ohm
78 The Buffer Amplifier may be one of two versions, 81 All variants of RAN-A23 are produced from the
RDY-A23/* and RDY- A29/*. The circuits are identical Standard Units as required:
for both versions, differing only in casework and socket
terminations and variant indication/*. RAN-A235.5V VideoStandard PCB
RAN-A23/2 1.6V VideoAdd R23 (1K) across R11
(1) RAN-A23/* has coaxial input sockets, (70 ohm). RAN-A23/315V VideoAdd R24 (3K3) and R25 (1K5)
(2) RAN-A29/* has an input terminal block, (93 ohm). at I/P
RAN-A23/48V VideoAdd R24 (1K5) and R25 (2K2) at
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION I/P
79 The Buffer Amplifier is used to “Pick Off” Video and Buffer Amplifiers 93 Ohm
Sync pulses from outputs that must not be loaded by
the 75 ohm inputs of a Radar Display Unit. As the Amplifiers 82 All variants of RAN-A29 are produced from the
have high impedance inputs the coaxial connections to the Standard Units as required:
signal source are to be as short as practicable.
RAN-A295.5V VideoStandard PCB
RAN-A29/2 1.6V VideoAdd R23 (1K) across R11
INSTALLATION - FIGURE 7a RAN-A29/315V VideoAdd R24 (3K3) and R25 (1K5)
at I/P
80 Check that the Buffer Amplifier is correct for the Video RAN-A29/48V VideoAdd R24 (1K5) and R25 (2K2) at
Input, refer to Variants - Paragraph 81. Refer to
Figure 15a which shows the Buffer Amplifier Video and Sync I/P
connections to the Master/Slave Interface PCB and power
supplies from the Master /Slave Adapter PCB.
PLG-5 FROM
MASTER/
SLAVE
PLG-7
ADAPTER
+24V 0V PCB
RADAR 1
SKE
VIDEO 1 (CO-AX*) BUFFER AMP
VID 1
RAN-A23/*
or SKF
SYNC 1 (CO-AX*) RAN-A29/*
SYNC 1
VIDEO 1
TO USER
RADAR
SYNC 1
PLG-6 FROM
MASTER/
SLAVE
PLG-8
ADAPTER
+24V 0V
RADAR 2 PCB
SKG
VIDEO 2 (CO-AX*) BUFFER AMP VID 2
RAN-A23/*
or SKH
SYNC 2 (CO-AX*)
RAN-A29/* SYNC 2
MASTER/SLAVE
VIDEO 2 INTERFACE PCB
TO USER
RADAR
SYNC 2
* Co-axial leads from Radar source to

be as short as practible.
CD-2526
Figure 7a - Buffer Amplifier Installation Block Diagram

KH 2020
Chap 8a

In-line
Connector
CABLE FORM HRC-A341 INPU

MASTER/SLAVE ADAPTER PCB (HRC - A288) OR 38-CORE CABLE
FROM Mk 5
TX ONLY PLG PLE
1 1 ANTENNA +24V G&
2 2
3 3 0V Y&
4 4
5 5 MOD +27V R&
6 6
7 7 MOD 0V B&
8 8
9 9 +12V
R/B
10 10 -12V Bn/B
11 11 MAG HTRS 8.5V W
12 12 MAG HTRS 0V Bk
PLA PLB
TX RUN 1 1 TX RUN S
TX MUTE 2 2 TX MUTE R/
MED PULSE 3 3 MED PULSE B/
LONG PULSE 4 4 LONG PULSE B/
TUNE CONTROL 5 5 TUNE CONTROL R/
TUNE INDICATOR 6 6 TUNE INDICATOR R/
TX READY 7 7 TX READY T
8 8
90/180 AZIMUTH
9
9 4096 AZIMUTH G/
RX MON 10 10 RX MON B/
HEADING LINE 11 11 HEADING LINE G/
TX MON (L) 12 12 TX MON (L) B/
TX MON (N) 13 13 TX MON (N) G/
0 VOLTS 14 14 0 VOLTS R/
PLD
1
2 V
3
4 LOW RATIO GYRO S
5 FIT CABLEFORM
6 HRC-A388 ONLY IF COMPASS PCB (HRC - A107)
HEADING LINE (1) LOW RATIO PCB
0 VOLTS 7
IS FITTED.
AZIMUTH (1) 8
9 TERMINAL BLOCK FITTED
0 VOLTS
IN BOX FOR SPLIT SYSTEM
10 1 G/B
10 DIREC
LOW RATIO 2 11 S/B PULS
PLC OUTPUT
1
2
3
4 COMPASS INPUT FROM LOG
5 COMPASS REPEATER PLA INPUT
6 S1 1
7 S2 2
8 S3 3
9 REF1 4
10 LINK PERMANENTLY REF2 5
FITTED 6
PLP PLF
+12V 1 1
+24V 2 2
0V 3 3 FLYING
-12V 4 4 LEADS
5 5
+5V
6 6
RUN
7 7
RADAR 1 8
4096 AZIMUTH 8
9 9
10 10
Figure 8a - Low Ratio Compass Kit: Wiring Diagram

2 CO-AX AND 3 OR 4 CORE 38-CORE CABLE
CABLE FROM RADAR 1 (SLAVE) FROM RADAR 1 (MASTER)
MASTER/SLAVE INTERFACE PCB HRC-A197 MASTER/SLAVE ADAPTER PCB (HRC - A288) CABLEFORM HRC-A341
OR 38 CORE CABLE
FROM Mk 5 PLG PLE
TX ONLY
1 1 ANTENNA +24V
VIDEO 1
SKE 3 3 0V
SYNC 1
SKG 5 5 MOD +27V
7 7 MOD 0V
VIDEO 2
SKF
9 9 +12V
SYNC 2 10 10 -12V
SKH
11 11 MAG HTRS 8.5V
12 12 MAG HTRS 0V
RADAR 2 HL SIG 1 PLA PLB

1 1 TX RUN
0V 2 TB5A 2 2 TX MUTE
3 3 MED PULSE
4 4 LONG PULSE
5 5 TUNE CONTROL
RADAR 2 AZ SIG 1
6 6 TUNE INDICATOR
7
0V 2 TB7B 7 TX READY
90/180 AZIMUTH 8
9 9 4096 AZIMUTH
10 10 RX MON
11 11 HEADING LINE
12 12 TX MON (L)
13 13 TX MON (N)
14 14 0V
2 WIRES TO
PIN 14
PLD
HEADING LINE (1) 6
22
0V 7
23
TB2A 24 AZIMUTH (1) 8
0V 9
25
CABLEFORM
HRC-A342
PLC
6 STANDARD COMPASS IS EITHER SYNCHRO OR STEPP
FLYING LEADS 7 SYNCHRO CONNECTS TO 5 WIRES (1-5).
STEPPER CONNECTS TO 4 WIRES (1-4).
PINS 1, 2 & 3 ARE PHASES.
LINK PERMANENTLY PIN 4 IS COMMON IF STEPPER.
PLA FITTED PINS 4 & 5 ARE REF FOR SYNCHRO.
0V
1
+5V
2
3
-15V COMPASS INPUT
4
+15V
5
4096
6
PLP PLF
+12V 1 LOG INPUT
1
+24V 2
2
0V 3
3
-12V 4
FLYING LEADS 4
+5V 5
5
RUN 6
RADAR 1 7 6
4096 AZIMUTH 8 7
8 3 COAX CABLES HRC-A347
OR 2 IN THE 38-CORE CABLE + 1 EXTRA
OUTPUTS
B
SKF1
V
SKG1
S
SKH1
Figure 9a - Master/Slave Synchro Kit: Wiring Diagram
8
38-CORE CABLE CABLEFORM HRC-A341
FROM RADAR 1 MASTER/SLAVE ADAPTER PCB (HRC-A288) OR 38-CORE CABLE
ER/SLAVE INTERFACE PCB HRC-A197 (MASTER)
PLG PLE
1 1 ANTENNA +24V
SKE
2 2
3 3 0V
SKH 4 4
5 5 MOD +27V
6 6
SKF 7 7 MOD 0V
VIDEO 2 8 8
9 9 +12V
SYNC 2 SKG
10 10 -12V
11 11 MAG HTRS 8.5V
12 12 MAG HTRS 0V
FOR Mk 5
TX ONLY
HL PLA PLB
1 1 1 TX RUN
0V 2 TB5A 2 2 TX MUTE
3 3 MED PULSE
AZ 4 4 LONG PULSE
1
TB7B 5 5 TUNE CONTROL
0V 2 6 6 TUNE INDICATOR
7 7 TX READY
90/180 AZIMUTH 8
4096 AZIMUTH 9 9 4096 AZIMUTH
10 10 RX MON
PLA 11 11 HEADING LINE
0V 1 12 12 TX MON (L)
2 WIRES TO 13 13 TX MON (N)
+5V 2
ONLY WITH PIN 14 14 14 0V
3
R/SLAVE -15V 4
RO OR +15V 5 NOTE: TX MON
2 C0AX AND 3 OR
BY 4 PCB 4096 6 CONNECTIONS ONLY
4-CORE CABLE FROM
RADAR 1 (SLAVE) REQUIRED WITH
EARLY Mk4 & Mk3
TRANSMITTERS
TB2A PLD
22 HEADING LINE (1) 6
23 0V 7
24 AZIMUTH (1) 8
25 0V 9
CABLEFORM
HRC-A342
STANDARD COMPASS IS EITHER SYNCHRO OR STEP
SYNCHRO CONNECTS TO 5 WIRES (1-5).
PIN 4 IS COMMON IF STEPPER.
PLC PINS 4 & 5 ARE REF FOR SYNCHRO.
6
FLYING LEADS 7
COMPASS INPUT
LINK PERMANENTLY
FITTED
LOG INPUT
PLP PLF
+12V 1
1
+24V 2
2
3
FLYING LEADS
0V 3
-12V 4
4
+5V 5
5
RUN 6
6
RADAR 1 7
7
4096 AZIMUTH 8
8
3 CO-AX CABLES HRC-A347 OR 2 IN

THE 38-CORE CABLE + 1 EXTRA
OUTPUTS BLANK
SKF1
VIDEO
SKG1
SYNC
SKH1
Figure 10a - Master/Slave Kit: Wiring Diagram
8
2 CO-AX AND 3 OR 4 CORE 38-CORE CABLE
CABLE FROM RADAR 1 (SLAVE) FROM RADAR 1 (MASTER)
TO 1024 INPUT (TB2A) OR PLA
MASTER/SLAVE INTERFACE PCB HRC-A197 MASTER/SLAVE ADAPTER PCB (HRC-A288)

CABLEFORM HRC-A341
FOR Mk 5 TX ONLY PLG PLE OR 38 CORE CABLE
1 1 ANTENNA +24V
SKE
VIDEO 1
3 3 0V
SKG
SYNC 1
5 5 MOD +27V
7 7 MOD 0V
VIDEO 2 SKF
R2 9 9 +12V
SYNC 2 SKH
10 10 -12V
11 11 MAG HTRS 8.5V
12 12 MAG HTRS 0V
PLA PLB
1 1 TX RUN
HL 1 2 2 TX MUTE
3 3 MED PULSE
2 TB5A 4 4 LONG PULSE
5 5 TUNE CONTROL
AZ 1 6 6 TUNE INDICATOR
2
TB7B 7 7 TX READY
90/180 AZIMUTH 8
9 9 4096 AZIMUTH
10 10 RX MON
11 11 HEADING LINE
12 12 TX MON (L)
13 13 TX MON (N)
14 14 0V
TWO WIRES
TO PIN 14
CONNECT ONLY IF RADAR 1

IS 1024 PULSES. TB2A PLD
22 HEADING LINE (1) 6
23 0V 7
24 AZIMUTH (1) 8
25 0V 9
CABLEFORM HRC-A347
NOT CONNECTED IF
RADAR 1 IS 1024 PULSES
PLC
6
FLYING LEADS STANDARD COMPASS IS EITHER SYNCHRO OR
7
SYNCHRO CONNECTS TO 5 WIRES (1-5).
LINK PERMANENTLY PIN 4 IS COMMON IF STEPPER.
PLA FITTED PINS 4 & 5 ARE REF FOR SYNCHRO.
0V
1
+5V
2
3
-15V COMPASS INPU
4
+15V
5
4096
6
PLP PLF
+12V 1 LOG INPU
1
+24V 2
2
FLYING LEADS
0V 3
3
-12V 4
4
+5V 5
5
RUN 6
6
RADAR 1 7
7
4096 AZIMUTH 8
8 3 COAX CABLES HRC-A347
OR 2 IN THE 38-CORE CABLE + 1 EXTRA
OUTPUTS
SKF1
SKG1
SKH1
Figure 11a - Divide by Four PCB: Wiring Diagram
8
KH 2020
Chap 8a - Annex A
CHAPTER 8A
ANNEX A
SERIAL AND NMEA COMMUNICATIONS SPECIFICATION
OPTIONS FOR NUCLEUS 3 RADAR DISPLAYS
SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT Serial Received Data
This document describes the input/output PCBs The serial received data (Receive data #1, #2, #3 and #4)
(NNR-A910, for series 6000 and 7000 displays and can be either RS232 or RS422. Connections are via
NNR-A996 for series 5000 displays) of the Nucleus 3 sockets PLF and PLG with pinouts as specified below.
series of Radar Displays.
PLF (Serial 1 & 2)
NOTE:
The input/output PCB (NNR-A996) used in the 5000 series
displays is functionally equivalent to the input/output PCB Pin Description
(NNR-A910) used in the 6000/7000 series displays, but is
mechanically different. I/O PCB (NNR-A996) fits 1 Transmit Data #1 output - RS232
internally and requires external connector access. Socket
connectors are provided at the top and bottom of the PCB 2 Receive Data #1 input ‘A’ - RS232 ‘data’ or
for this purpose. RS422 ‘+’
3 Local GND
GENERAL PURPOSE SERIAL INPUTS 4 +12V
5 +5V
The I/O PCBs have four general purpose RS232/RS422 6 Receive Data #1 input ‘B’ - RS232 ‘gnd‘ or
inputs; serial 1, 2, 3 and 4, three RS232 outputs and one RS422 ‘-’
RS422 output. The inputs are opto-isolated, in accordance 7 Transmit Data #2 output - RS232
with IEC 1162 series specifications.
8 Receive Data #2 input ‘A’ - RS232 ‘data’ or
RS422 ‘+’
The inputs/outputs are primarily for NMEA ship's sensor
9 Local GND
inputs and inputs from external equipment (e.g. ECDIS,
GPS, Depth indicators, etc.). A general purpose CTS 10 +12V
(Clear to Send) input is also provided for use by "slow" 11 +5V
external devices (e.g. a line printer). The implementation 12 Receive Data #2 input ‘B’ - RS232 ‘gnd’ or
and use of this is target device and software dependent. RS422 ‘-’
13 CTS input - signal
14 CTS input - gnd
PLG (Serial 3 & 4)
Pin Description
1 Transmit Data #3 output - RS232
2 Receive Data #3 input ‘A’ - RS232 ‘data’ or
RS422 ‘+’
3 Local GND
4 +12V
5 +5V
6 Receive Data #3 input ‘B’ - RS232 ‘gnd‘ or
RS422 ‘-’
7 Transmit Data #4 output ‘A’ - RS422
8 RS232 Receive Data #4 input ‘A’ - RS232
‘data’ or RS422 ‘+’
9 Local GND
10 +12V
11 +5V
12 Receive Data #4 input ‘B’ - RS232 ‘gnd’ or
RS422 ‘-’
13 Transmit Data #4 output ‘B’ - RS422 ‘-’
14 Local GND
Original 8aA.1 May 01

KH 2020
Chap 8a - Annex A
DEDICATED SERIAL INPUTS SERIAL INPUT SETUP

The I/O PCBs have a dedicated Serial Trackerball input The serial messages received can be individually
PLH, for either standard KH type desk top mouse systems configured for:
trackball or Ergopod or MISC connections for
multi-Ergopod installations. 1 Input port(s) received on. Data can come from several
sources, i.e. Ownship position from GPS or ECDIS on
Connections are via connector PLH, with pinouts as two or more input ports.
specified below. 2 Baud Rate of a specific input port. Not all peripheral
devices are at standard 9600 baud. The input and
output baud rate of a specific port should be kept the
Pin Description same, i.e. 9600 input and 9600 output.
3 Strict/Relaxed NMEA message checking. Not all
1 +5V
peripheral devices provide correct messages.
2 +12V
3 Receive Data input - RS232 4 Priority assignment. Radar uses message from Port 1
(i.e. ECDIS) in preference to message from Port 2 (i.e.
4 Local GND GPS).
5 Timeout for received message. A period can be
specified for the Radar to switch to another sauce (if
available).
6 Send Time. The update frequency for passing data on
to the Radar (i.e. Input at 5Hz, but only passed on at
1Hz).
Listener Input
Impedence > 3K 5K
MAX232
CD-0227
Figure 1. Other Ports Listener Circuit
470R
6N136
Listener Input
Impedence > 500R
CD-0228
Figure 2. NMEA Port Listener Circuit
+5V
400kW MAX
238
TTL In RS232
Data Out
CD-2387
Figure 3. NMEA Port Talker Circuit
May 01 8aA.2 Original

KH 2020
Chap 8a - Annex A
SOFTWARE SPECIFICATION DATA FORMAT

The message structure used will be compliant, where General Format
applicable, with the following Standards:
The maximum number of characters in a sentence shall
International Electrotechnical Commission be 82, consisting of a maximum of 79 characters between
NMEA 0183 Version 2.01 (TC80/WG6): Standard for the starting ‘$’ and the terminating ‘<CR><LF>’.
Interfacing Marine Electronic Devices (September 1994)
The minimum number of fields is one. The first field shall
IEC 61162-1 : Digital Interfaces Standard ) be an address field containing the identity of the TALKER
Part 1 - Single Talker and Multiple Listener and the sentence formatter which specifies the number of
(2000 -07) data fields in the sentence, the type of data they contain
and the order in which the fields are transmitted. The
IEC 61162-2 : Part 2 - Single Talker and Multiple Listener. remaining portion of the sentence may contain zero or
multiple data fields.
IEC 945 : Marine Navigational Equipment - General
requirements. Listeners and high speed transmission Address fields consist of five characters. The first two
(1998-09) characters are the talker identifier. The remaining three
characters define the format and the type of data that
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) follows.
ANSI x3.15 1976 ANSI Character Structure and character The maximum number of fields allowed in a single
Parity Sense for serial communication. message is limited only by the maximum message length
of 82 characters. NULL fields may be present and shall
ANSI x3.16 1976 ANSI for Bit sequencing of the ANS always be used if the data for that field is unavailable.
Code for Information Interchange in serial-by-bit data
transmission. All sentences begin with the sentence start delimiter
character ‘$’ and end with the sentence termination
ANSI x3.4 1977 ANSI Code for Information Interchange delimiter‘ ‘<CR><LF>’.
Electronic Industries Association Standards (EIA) A checksum field may optionally be transmitted in any
EIA-422-A December 1978 (CCITT X.27/V.11) sentence. The checksum is the last field in a sentence and
follows the checksum delimiter character ‘*’.
American Practical Navigator:
The checksum is an 8-bit exclusive OR (no start or stop
Defence Mapping Agency Hydrographic/Topographic bits) of all characters in the sentence, including ‘,’
Centre, Publication No.9, DMA Stock No NVPUB9V1, delimiters between but not including the ‘$’ and the ‘*’
Volumes I and II. delimiters.
Interface Control Document Data fields may be alpha, numeric, alphanumeric, variable
Navstar GPS Space Segment/Navigation User Interface, length, fixed length, fixed/variable (a portion fixed in length
Rockwell International Corporation Document No. while the remainder varies). Some fields are constant, with
ICD-GPS-200 Revision B (November 30, 1987). their values dictated by a specific sentence definition.
All transmitted data shall be interpreted as ASCII

characters. The most significant bit of the 8-bit character
shall always be transmitted as zero (d7=0).

KH 2020
Chap 8a - Annex A
The valid character set consists of all printable ASCII Proprietary Format
Characters except those defined as reserve characters
(see Table 3). Kelvin Hughes Ltd has an assigned NMEA 0183
Manufacturers Mnemonic Code: KHU
ASCII values not specified as either reserved characters
or valid characters may not be transmitted. Kelvin Hughes proprietary messages will have the
following format:
Table 3. Reserved characters
$PKHUxabc
<CR> 0x0d 13 Carriage Return
<LF> 0x0a 10 Line feed$
$ 0x24 36 Start of sentence delimiter
* 0x2a 42 Checksum field delimiter
, 0x2c 44 Field delimiter
! 0x21 33 Reserved for future use.
\ 0x5c 92 Reserved for future use.
^ 0x5e 94 Reserved for future use.
- 0x7e 126 Reserved for future use.
Messages can be received on one, some or all of the 4

serial input ports. Each input port has a Priority assigned
to indicate the preferred source. The second, third and
fourth choice if input (if applicable) are also assigned for
use in the event of failure of the previous choice.
For example:
Two or more GPS' may be connected to Ports 1 & 2 and
an ECDIS may also be supplying position data, via GGA
message (Port 4). If ECDIS sourced position data is the
preferred choice, then set Port 4 priority to a high number,
the next choice to a lower number and the back up (third
choice) to the lowest value.
Each message can be validated to the Strict NMEA

standard or, alternatively if the third party equipment does
not conform, a Relaxed checking can be applied to allow
interfacing of non-conforming equipment.
The Timeout period is the time allowed before the failure

(non-appearance) of a message is detected. Infrequent
messages may require a longer timeout.
Send Time is the period of the message being passed

onto the Main Radar Processor. NMEA inputs that are
very frequent may cause an overload and provide
superfluous information. This allows lethargic data to be
passed less frequently to the Main Processor (i.e. the
Heading realignment message HDT may be required only
every 10 seconds or so.
Each Port can have a different Baud rate to allow for non
NMEA inputs. The range is from 1200 to 38400 baud.

KH 2020
Chap 8a - Annex A
STANDARD NMEA MESSAGES $—DPT Depth
$—AAM
Message Port Maximum Minimum
This message type is not used. Type Message message
frequency frequency
$—APB Listener 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A 1 Hz 0.2 Hz
This message type is not used.

I.M.O. Ref. A224 (VII). Water depth relative to the
$—ASD transducer and offset of the measuring transducer.
This message type is not used. Positive offset numbers provide the distance from the
transducer to the waterline. Negative offset numbers
$—BEC provide the distance from the transducer to the part of the
keel of interest.
$xxDPT,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
$—BOD
This message type is not used. Checksum
$—BWC Offset from transducer (1), in metres:

“positive” = distance from
This message type is not used. transducer to water-line
“Negative”= distance from transducer to
$—BWR keel
This message type is not used. Water depth relative to the transducer, in metres
$—BWW (1) For I.E.C. applications the offset shall always be

applied so as to provide depth relative to the keel.
$—DSC
$—DBT
$—DTM
$—DCN
$—FSI
$—GBS

KH 2020
Chap 8a - Annex A
5.17. $—GGA Global Positioning System Fix Data

Type Message message
frequency frequency
Listener 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A 1 Hz 0.2 Hz
Time, position and fix related data for a GPS receiver.

$--GGA,hhmmss.ss,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M,x.x,M,x.x,xxxx*hh
Checksum
Differential reference station ID 0000-1023
Age of differential GPS data2
Units of geoidal separation M=metres
Geoidal separation
Units of antenna altitude M=metres
Antenna altitude above/below mean-sea-level (geoid)
Horizon dilution of precision
Number of satellites in use: 00-12, may be different from number of satellites
in view
GPS quality indicator
Longitude cardinal, E=East, W=West
Longitude
Latitude Cardinal, N=North, S=South
Longitude
UTC of position
1) GPS quality indicator: 0 = fix not available or

invalid
1 = GPS fix
2 = Differential GPS fix
3 = GPS PPS Mode GPS
fix valid
2) Time in seconds since last SC104 Type 1 or 9 update,

null field when DGPS is not used
3) Geoidal Separation: the difference between the

WGS-84 earth ellipsoid and mean-sea-level (geoid), “-” =
mean-sea-level below ellipsoid.
NOTES:
1. If a GGA message is received from the same
sensor as a GLL message, the GGA message is taken in
preference to the GLL message.
2. If a position sensor is lost for any reason, the

position will "time-out" after 20 seconds and the position
sensor in use is set to zero (no sensor) allowing any sensor
to provide position information.

KH 2020
Chap 8a - Annex A
$—GLC $—GSV
This message type is not used. This message type is not used.
$—GLL Geographical Location in Latitude / Longitude $—GXA

Type Message message $—HDG
frequency frequency
Listener 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A 1Hz 0.2 Hz This message type is not used.
$—HDT
Latitude and Longitude of present vessel position, time of
position fix and status. Message Port Maximum Minimum
$—GLL,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,hhmmss.ss,A*hh<CR><LF> frequency frequency
Listener 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A 1Hz 0.2 Hz
Checksum
Status: A = Data True heading of Ownship in degrees.
valid
UTC of position $—HDT,x.x,T*hh<CR><LF>
Longitude cardinal, E=East,
W=West
Longitude Checksum
Latitude cardinal, N=North, S=South Degrees = True
Latitude Heading (degrees)
This message can be used for high speed serial gyro

NOTES: (61162-2) at 38400 baud. HDT messages from a valid
1. If a GGA message is received from the same source are used, i.e AEHDT. Not HC headed messages.
sensor as a GLL message, the GGA message is taken in Use Port 4 for the RS422 input.
preference to the GLL message.
$—HSC
2. If a position sensor is lost for any reason, the
position will "time-out" after 20 seconds and the position This message type is not used.
sensor in use is set to zero (no sensor) allowing any sensor
to provide position information.
$—LCD
$—GRS
$—MSK
$—GSA
$—MSS
$—GST
$—MTW
$—MWV
$—OLN

KH 2020
Chap 8a - Annex A
5.34. $—OSD Ownship Data $—RMA

Type Message message $—RMB
frequency frequency
Talker 1 out, 1 Hz 1Hz This message type is not used.
2 out,
3 out $—RMC
4 out
$—RNN: Route message (NMEA version 1.5 compliant)

message description.

$RAOSD,x.x,A,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a*hh<CR><LF> frequency frequency
Checksum
speed units K,N,S Way point identifiers, listed in order with starting Way point
vessel drift (speed) first for route number nn .
(manually entered)
vessel set, degrees true $XxRnn,c—c,c—c——,c—c*hh<CR><LF>
(manually entered)
speed reference - see Note
vessel speed Checksum
course reference - see Note 14 field sequence of route Way
vessel course, degrees true point Ids
heading status, A= valid nn=Route number
heading, degrees true
NOTE:
It is important to decide on one message type (e.g. RTE or
Rnn) and disable the other type from the NMEA setup
NOTE: menu, to avoid possible conflict. If the radar is displaying
an RTE, receipt of an Rnn message from any source will
Course/speed reference refers to the stab source currently corrupt the route. If the radar is displaying an Rnn, receipt
selected of an RTE message from any source will corrupt the route.
B = bottom tracking log (e.g doppler log bottom track)

$—ROT
M = manually entered (e.g a manually entered set and
drift) when using manually entered set/drift the values This message type is not used.
are given in the ‘manually entered’ fields else
‘manually entered’ fields are NULL fields. $—RPM
W = water referenced (e.g doppler log water track, single
axis log VHW and EM log type) $—RSA
R = radar tracking (e.g for reference target or anchor This message type is not used.
watch with ARPA)
P = positioning system ground reference (not used in

EU type approval e.g. VTG message)

KH 2020
Chap 8a - Annex A
$—RSD Radar System Data
frequency frequency
Talker 1 out, 1Hz 1Hz
2 out,
3 out
4 out
message description
$RARSD,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Display rotation - see note 1
Range units K/N/S
Range scale in use
Cursor bearing degrees clockwise from zero degrees
Cursor range from Ownship
EBL 2 degrees
VRM 2 range
Origin 2 bearing - see note 2
Origin 2 range - see note 2
Bearing line 1 (EBL1) degrees from 0
Variable range marker 1 (VRM 1) range
Origin 1 bearing degrees from 0 - see note 2
Origin 1 range from ownship - see note 2
NOTE:
1) Display rotation: C = Course-up, course-over-ground
up, degrees True.
H = Head-up, ship’s heading
(centre-line) 0 degrees up.
N = North-up, True north is 0 deg
up.
2) Origin 1 and 2 are located at the stated range and

bearing from own ship and provide for two independent
sets of variable range markers (VRM) and electronic
bearing lines (EBL) originating away from own ship
position.

KH 2020
Chap 8a - Annex A
$—RTE
frequency frequency
Talker 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A 1Hz 0.2Hz
Way point identifiers, listed in order with starting way

point first, for the identified route. Two modes of
transportation are provided: “c” indicates that the
complete list of way points in the route are being
transmitted; “w” indicates a working route, where the
first listed Way Point is always the last Way Point that
had been reached (FROM), while the second listed
Way Point is always the Way Point that the vessel is
currently heading for (TO), the remaining list of Way
Points represents the remainder of the route.
$--RTE,x.x,x.x,a,c--c,c--c, .........c--c*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Way point ‘n’ identifier - see Note 1
Additional Way point identifiers - see Note 1
Way point identifier
Route identifier
Message Mode: C =Complete route, all Way points.
W = Working route, 1st listed Way point is ‘FROM’
2nd is ‘TO’
Remainder are the rest of the route.
Message number - see Note 2.
Total number of messages being transmitted - see Note 2.
NOTE:
1 A variable number of Way point identifiers, up to ‘n’, may be included within the limits of allowed sentence length. As
there are no specific number of Way points, null fields are not required for Way point identifier fields.
2 A single route may require the transmission of multiple messages. The first field specifies the total number of messages,
minimum value = 1. The second field identifies the order of the message (message number), minimum value = 1.
NOTE:
It is important to decide on one message type (e.g. RTE or
Rnn) and disable the other type from the NMEA setup
menu, to avoid possible conflict. If the radar is displaying
an RTE, receipt of an Rnn message from any source will
corrupt the route. If the radar is displaying an Rnn, receipt
of an RTE message from any source will corrupt the route.
$—SFI
$—STN
$—TLL
$—TRF

KH 2020
Chap 8a - Annex A
$—TTM Target data

frequency frequency
Talker 1 out, 5 Hz 0 Hz
2 out,
3 out
4 out
message description
Type of acquisition A= automatic M= manual

Time of data UTC
Reference target = R else NULL field
$RATTM, xx, x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a,c—c,a,a,hhmmss.ss,a*hh<CR><LF>
Target status see Note

User data see Note
Speed/distance units K/N/S
Time to CPA, min, “-” = increasing
Distance of closest point of approach
Target course, true/relative (T/R)
Target course, degrees, true/relative
Target speed
Bearing from Ownship true/relative (T/R)
Bearing from ownship, degrees, true/relative
Target distance from ownship
Target number 00-99
Note - User data
When in Simulation Mode, ‘Simulated’ is sent in this field.

For ‘real’ target data this field will be NULL field.
Note - Target status
L= lost, tracked target has been lost
Q = query, this status is not used by Nucleus 2, as target

data is not transmitted until target has been acquired
T = tracking

KH 2020
Chap 8a - Annex A
$—VBW Dual Ground / Water Speed (Doppler Log)

frequency frequency
Water referenced and ground referenced speed data.
$—VBW,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,x.x,A*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Status: Ground speed, A = Data valid
Transverse ground speed1, knots
Longitudinal ground speed1, knots
Status: Water speed, A = Data valid
Transverse water speed1, knots
Longitudinal water speed1, knots
1) Transverse speed: “-” = port, longitudinal speed:

“-” = astern
$—VDR

KH 2020
Chap 8a - Annex A
$—VHW Water Speed and Heading
This message is used if the log type is set to VHW log.

frequency frequency
The compass heading to which the vessel points and the

speed of the vessel relative to the water
$—VHW,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K*hh<CR><LF>
Km/h
Speed km/h
Knots
Speed, knots
Magnetic
Heading, degrees Magnetic
True
Heading, degrees True.
$—VLW
$—VPW

KH 2020
Chap 8a - Annex A
$—VTG Actual Track and ground speed $—ZDA Time and Date
This message type is used if the Log type is set as VTG
log. Message Port Maximum Minimum
frequency frequency
Message Port Maximum Minimum Listener 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A 1 Hz 0.1 Hz
frequency frequency
Listener 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A 1 Hz 0.2 Hz UTC, day, month, year and local time zone.
$-DA,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx*hh<CR><LF>
The actual Course Over Ground and speed relative to the
ground.
Checksum
$—VTG,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K*hh<CR><LF> Local zone minutes
description, same sign
as local hours
Checksum Local zone description1,
Speed Units: K=km/h 00 to +/-13 hours
Speed Year
Speed Units: N=knots Month: 01 to 12
Speed Day: 01 to 31
degrees Magnetic UTC
COG
degrees True
COG
1) Zone description is the number of whole hours added to
local time to obtain GMT, Zone description is negative for
East longitudes.
$—WNC
$—ZDL
$—WPL Way point Location
Message Port Maximum Minimum $—ZFO
frequency frequency This message type is not used.
Listener 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A ——— Once only per
way point $—ZTG
Latitude and longitude of specified Way point.
$—ZZU: UTC Time (NMEA version 2.00 compliant)
$—WPL,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,c—c*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum frequency frequency
Way point Identifier Listener 1A, 2A, 3,A 4A 1 Hz 0.1 Hz
E/W
Way point longitude
N/S Time. UTC
Way point latitude
$—ZZU,hhmmss.ss*hh<CR><LF>
$—XDR UTC
QUERY ADDRESS FIELDS
$—XTE
The Nucleus 3 does not support the use of the query
This message type is not used. address field (section 5.2.1.2 IEC 1162) and will not
respond to this message format.
$—XTR

KH 2020
Chap 8b
CHAPTER 8B
DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT
INSTALLATION INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

3 Mount the Interswitch Unit in the required position,
INTRODUCTION ensuring sufficient clearance for ventilation, cable
access and servicing as follows:
1 The Interswitch Unit is mounted as shown in Figure 1b,
which provides the installation dimensions. (1) Mark out the position of the Interswitch Unit and
then drill the required bolt hole positions.
(2) Secure the Interswitch Unit in place.
(3) Feed the Display and Transmitter cables through
2 Prior to installing the Interswitch Unit: the base of the unit and connect to the appropriate
input/output sockets.
(1) Ensure adequate clearance for maintenance.
(4) Ensure that the Interswitch Unit is directly earthed
(2) Check that the input/output cables can be easily
to the Ship’s earth, using the bolt provided.
installed and have adequate clearance.
4 All instructions for setting to work are contained in
Commissioning, later in this Chapter.
411.5
66.5 280
4 HOLES 12.0 DIA

20
23.75 TOP
DUAL INTERSWITCH UNIT
456.5 530 570
CABLE ENTRIES
BASE
CABLE ENTRIES 130
CD-2364
Figure 1b - Interswitch Unit (Dimensions & Mounting)

KH 2020
Chap 8b
COMMISSIONING Potentiometers
9 The following Table 2 gives a list and description of
INTRODUCTION Potentiometers.
5 The Interswitch Unit has two rotary switches S1, Table 2 – Interswitch Unit Potentiometers
‘CROSSED/UNCROSSED’ and S2, ‘STATUS’, refer
to Figure 2. The combinations offered by the interswitch
configuration are as follows:
POT DESCRIPTION
(1) ‘A’ Transceiver to ‘A’ Display.
‘B’ Transceiver to ‘B’ Display
RV1 NOT USED
(2) ‘A’ Transceiver to ‘B’ Display.
‘B’ Transceiver to ‘A’ Display RV2 NOT USED
(3) ‘A’ Transceiver to ‘A’ Display as MASTER with ‘B’ RV3 NOT USED
Display as SLAVE.
RV4 NOT USED
(4) ‘A’ Transceiver to ‘B’ Display as MASTER with ‘A’
Display as SLAVE. RV5* Display A - Video amplitude
(5) ‘B’ Transceiver to ‘A’ Display as MASTER with ‘B’ RV6* Display B - Video amplitude
Display as SLAVE.
(6) ‘B’ Transceiver to ‘B’ Display as MASTER with ‘A’
Display as SLAVE. *NOTE:
RV5 and RV6 are factory preset and should not need to be
adjusted.
CONTROL SWITCHES (FIGURE 2)
6 The two switches, located on the Front Panel of the LINK SETTINGS ON INSTALLATION
Unit, are used for configuration control. The
configurations are annotated pictorially in relation to each 10 The links are set as follows:
switch position.
Sync Delay Links LK3, LK4, LK5 and LK6 - Set to ‘0’
on installation and then adjusted in ‘Setting to Work’.
OPERATION
7 The unit operates as described later in this Chapter.
The configuration combinations are shown in Figure
2b.
Link Settings
8 The following Table 1 gives a list and description of
links in the unit.
Table 1 – Interswitch Unit Links
LINK DESCRIPTION
LK3 Sync A Fine Delay
LK4 Sync A Coarse Delay
LK5 Sync B Fine Delay
LK6 Sync B Coarse Delay

KH 2020
Chap 8b
SETTING TO WORK Video Amplitude Adjustments

11 The following can be set up only when the System is 12 No adjustments should be required, as RV5 and RV6
operational: are factory preset. Confirm that the radar video is a 5V
peak signal, measured from the mean noise level.
(1) Set the CROSSED/UNCROSSED Switch to Not
Crossed and the Display Connection Control
Switch to MASTER position 2. CHECKS AFTER SET UP
(2) Turn on both Displays and allow the Transceivers 13 View both Displays and check that for each of the 6
time to warm up. configurations that can be selected, refer to
(3) Set both displays to RUN and ensure that a Radar Paragraph 5, the current Transceiver is correctly selected
picture is displayed. and/or controlled.
(4) Set both display ranges to 0.5nm or 0.25nm.
(5) Set Sync ‘A’ Coarse to 125ns (LK4) and Fine to
0ns (LK3) and on the System PCB of Display ‘A’,
adjust the Sync Delay Pot (RV5) to remove any
range index error on the picture.
(6) Set the Transceiver Control Selector Switch to the
Crossed position.
(7) Use the Sync ‘B’ Delay links coarse (LK6) and
Fine (LK5) to remove any range index error on the
same Display (A).
(8) Switch the Transceiver Control Selector Switch to
the Not Crossed position and on the System PCB
of Display ‘B’, adjust the Sync Delay Pot (RV5) to
remove the range index error.
(9) Check that the range index error is acceptable for
all configurations.
A A
A A
1 B
B B
2
A A
B B
A A 5 3
4
B B
TEST A
B B
REMOTE
INTERSWITCH
TRANSCEIVER CONTROL SELECTOR DISPLAY CONNECTION SELECTOR

SWITCH POSITION CONFIGURATION SWITCH POSITION CONFIGURATION
‘A' DISPLAY MASTER OF ‘A' TRANSCEIVER 1 DISPLAY A & B CONNECTED TO Tx A
CLOCKWISE
‘B' DISPLAY MASTER OF ‘B' TRANSCEIVER 2 EACH DISPLAY INDEPENDENT
‘A' DISPLAY MASTER OF ‘B' TRANSCEIVER 3 DISPLAY A & B CONNECTED TO Tx B
COUNTER-CLOCKWISE
‘B' DISPLAY MASTER OF ‘A' TRANSCEIVER 4 REMOTE CONTROL
5 TEST
CD-2362
Figure 2b - Interswitching Configurations

KH 2020
Chap 8b
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION DUAL INTERSWITCH PCB

20 The Dual Interswitch PCB provides the switching
GENERAL elements and associated control circuitry required for
(a) interconnection of the system Displays and Transmitters,
14 The Dual Display Interswitch Unit type HRC-A9 is and (b) implementation of the selected role for each Display
designed for use as an interface between the Nucleus (i.e. ‘master’ or ‘slave’). The following circuits are provided
5000 /6000 range of displays and the Nucleus Mk IV/VVI/VII by the PCB:
Transmitters.
(1) DC Regulators.
15 The basic role of the unit is to provide a means of (2) Relay Banks.
interconnecting any two displays with any two
transmitters (of the type specified above), and providing (3) Switching Control Circuit.
control facilities to enable either display to control either (4) Status Circuit.
transmitter. Thus system capability and availability are both
(5) Sync Pulse Circuit.
maximised.
(6) Video Signal Circuit.
16 The following is an example of a typical installation:
(1) Display A - ARPA Display (6000). DC Regulators
(2) Display B - True Motion Display (5000). 21 The DC Regulator circuit comprises three voltage
(3) Transmitter A - Mk V 10kW X Band. regulators, one providing +15V dc, one providing -6V
dc and the other +5V dc The +15V dc regulator is powered
(4) Transmitter B - Mk IV S Band. from the +27V dc supply from either Display A or B. The -6V
17 In the example installation detailed above, the Dual dc regulator is powered from the -12V dc supply from either
Display Interswitch Unit will enable the ARPA Display Display A or B. The +5V regulator is powered from the +12V
to act as a ‘master’ to control either the Mk V or Mk IV dc supply from either Display A or B.
Transmitter, with the True Motion Display controlling the
other Transmitter (or acting as a ‘slave’). Alternatively, the 22 An additional supply of +26V dc is produced by this
True Motion Display can be designated ‘master’, with the circuit to power the relays. This supply is derived from
ARPA Display acting as ‘slave’. the +27V dc supply from either Display A or B. The +26V is
switched to the main relays by RL4 when not in the Test
position, this ensures that the relays are in the normal
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS position when in TEST.
18 Two switches are located on the top face of the Relay Banks
Interface Unit, refer to Figure 2b. The switches:
Transmitter Control Selector and Display Control Selector, 23 Three banks of relays are utilised as the switching
control the following functions: elements that set the various signal routes through the
(1) Transmitter Control Selector - determines which PCB. All relays are powered from the +26V dc supply and
are driven by appropriate signals produced by the Switching
Display controls which Transmitter when in Local
Control Circuit.
mode.
(2) Display Control Selector - A four-position switch 24 The three banks of relays are listed below:
that determines the interswitch mode and (1) Signal Switching Relays - this bank of relays
connections in one of the Local positions switches all control and data signals between the
19 The Transmitter Control Selector is operative only if system Displays and Transmitters. The
the Display Control Selector is in Positions 1 to 3. The de-energised state is when Display A is
switch may then be used to set which Display is master of connected to Transmitter A and Display B is
which Transmitter. The Display Control Selector has five connected to Transmitter B.
positions:
(2) Display A Relays - this bank of relays switches
(1) Slaved off Transmitter A. Azimuth data, Heading Line, Sync pulse and
(2) Both Displays are Masters. Video pulse inputs from Transmitter A or B
through to Display A. The de-energised state
(3) Slaved off Transmitter B.
connects Transmitter A to Display A.
(4) Remote.
(3) Display B Relays - this bank of relays switches
(5) Test. Azimuth data, Heading Line, Sync pulse and
Video pulse inputs from Transmitter A or B
through to Display B. The de-energised state
connects Transmitter B to Display B.

KH 2020
Chap 8b
Switching Control Circuit OPERATION

25 This controls the state of the three banks of relays and
the RUN lines to both Transmitters. The circuit has 36 The Interswitch Unit has two control switches, refer to
inputs from the Selector switches on the DIU and the control Figure 2b, located on the top face which provide the
lines from the two Displays. following facilities:
26 Indicators are provided to show the state of the three (1) TRANSMITTER CONTROL SELECTOR
banks of relays (LEDs are ON when the relay bank is CROSSED/UNCROSSED (two position switch) -
energised). determines which display controls which
Transmitter when in LOCAL operation.
Status Circuit (Nucleus 5000 & 6000 only) (2) DISPLAY CONTROL SELECTOR
27 Each Display receives two data and one select input SLAVE A/MASTER/SLAVE B/REMOTE/TEST
which control and request status information from the (five position switch - determines the Interswitch
DIU as shown below. This is provided via two status lines to mode and connections in one of the local
each Display. positions.
Control Signals LOCAL MODE

28 Outputs from each Display: 37 The Local Interswitch mode of operation is as follows:
(1) Change control of Transmitter (this is normally at
0V and goes high for approximately 100ms to DISPLAY CONNECTION SELECTOR
change over the control of the Transmitters).
Position 1 - SLAVE A; both Displays are connected
(2) Display Own (0V) or Other (+12V) Transmitter to Transmitter A. If the Transmitter Control Selector
radar data. switch is in the UNCROSSED position then Display A
(3) Input data selector (0V or +12V). controls Transmitter A, if in the CROSSED position
then Display B controls Transmitter A.
29 Inputs to each Display with Input data selector = 0V:
Line 1 Local = 0, Remote = 1 Position 2 - MASTER; if set to this position the mode
Line 2 Straight = 0, Crossed = 1 of operation is as set by the Transmitter Control
Selector.
30 Inputs to each Display with Input data selector = 12V &
Remote Position 3 - SLAVE B; both Displays are connected
to Transmitter B. If the Transmitter Control Selector
0,0 = Other Tx is OFF switch is in the UNCROSSED position then Display B
0,1 = Other Tx is STANDBY but NOT READY controls Transmitter B, if in the CROSSED position
1,0 = Other Tx is STANDBY and READY then Display A controls Transmitter B.
1,1 = Other Tx is RUNNING
31 Inputs to each Display with Input data selector = 12V & CAUTION
Local
Before selecting REMOTE ensure that the
Line 1 Master = 0, Slave = 1 Display(s) is/are switched to STANDBY.
Line 2 Connected to Own = 0, Other = 1
Position 4 - REMOTE; on power up the system is
Sync Pulse Circuit connected as previously configured before power was
turned off. Each display retains its configuration and
32 A Sync Pulse Circuit, comprising a presetable Delay the first display switched on determines the initial
Line and associated Buffer, is provided for each state.
Transmitter.
33 Transmitter SYNC pulses are delayed by up to 350ns Position 5 - TEST; used for Fault Finding purposes
through a Sync Delay Line, and then passed to a only, isolates most of the Interswitch circuits so that
Buffer. The buffered SYNC pulses are then passed via the Straight Through operation only is selected.
Display A or B Relays and subsequently split to provide a
SYNC pulse to the selected Display, and a BLANK pulse to
the other Display (if required).
Video Signal Circuit

34 A Video Signal Buffer is provided for each Transmitter.
35 Transmitter VIDEO signals are terminated and then
passed via the Display A or B relays to the selected
Video Buffer, one for each Display.

KH 2020
Chap 8b
TRANSMITTER CONTROL SELECTOR To Change Transmitter Control

40 Place the cursor, using the trackerball, in the new
38 The switch operates in conjunction with the Display Transmitter box and press the right-hand pushbutton.
Control Selector as described in the previous
Paragraph. The following mode of operation is available NOTE:
when the Display Control Selector is set to MASTER: If the change is not possible or unavailable the system
issues a warning in the Red Warning box i.e. other Display
(1) With the switch set to UNCROSSED each Display not in STANDBY, other Tx NOT READY.
controls its own Transmitter.
(2) With the switch set to CROSSED then Display A To Select Data from other Transmitter
controls Transmitter B and Display B controls
Transmitter A. 41 May be selected in STANDBY or RUN
(1) Standby - Position the cursor, using the
Remote Mode trackerball, in the required TX A(B) X(S) BAND IS
READY box and then press the left-hand
39 To operate the Interswitch facility from the Display(s) pushbutton.
(Nucleus 5000 & 6000 only):
(2) Run - Position the cursor, using the trackerball, in
(1) Ensure that the Interswitch Unit is selected to the TX (A or B/X or S) box. The Pushbutton
REMOTE, if not switch the Display(s) to Selection box shows the following:
STANDBY and then select REMOTE on the
Display Control Selector on the Interswitch Unit.
(2) The Display(s) show the mimic diagram on the SELECT GO TO SELECT
Standby screen, as shown in Figure 3b below. Tx A STANDBY Tx B
(3) To change the Transmitter selection position the CD-2 3 2 7
cursor, using the trackerball, in the TX A(B) X(S)

BAND IS READY box as required. (3) Press the required pushbutton.
(4) The pop-down boxes display the following:
DISPLAY Tx GO TO RUN CONTROL Tx
CD-2 3 2 5
NUCLEUS 3A X000X Ver x.xx 2001

ARPA Software Ver x.xx
CD-4667
Figure 3b - STANDBY Screen - Mimic Diagram (Nucleus 5000 & 6000)

KH 2020
Chap 8b
42 A diagnostic algorithm is given in Figure 4b, to provide

the operator/technician with a step-by-step guide
through the fault finding procedure. The algorithm is
intended for identification of faults to LRM level (e.g. a faulty
PCB or cable/connector assembly).
START
CHECK OPERATION
OF FRONT PANEL
CONTROL SWITCHES
NO REPLACE
SWITCHES OK?
SWITCH(ES
YES
CHECK ALL INTERNAL

CHASSIS WIRING
NO REPAIR/REPLACE
WIRING OK?
WIRING
YES
CHECK SECURITY
& OPERATION OF
PCB-MOUNTED RELAYS
NO RE-SEAT/REPLACE
RELAYS OK? RELAY(S)
AS NECESSARY
YES
REPLACE DUAL
INTERSWITCH PCB
CD-2357
Figure 4b – Interswitch Unit - Fault Finding Algorithm

KH 2020
Chap 8b
PARTS
43 Table 3 contains a list of replaceable items for the Dual

Display Interswitch Unit (HRC-A9).
Table 3 – Dual Display Interswitch Unit (HRC-A9)

Parts List
CCT. DESCRIPTION KELVIN HUGHES

REF. PART No.
- DUAL DISPLAY HRC-A9

INTERSWITCH UNIT
- Dual Interswitch PCB HRC-C103
- Front Panel
SW1 • Switch, Toggle, 2-Pole
Changeover
SW2 • Switch, Toggle, Single Pole
Changeover
• Socket, 6-Way
DAVIDEO DBSYNC DASYNC
12 PLDA-1 1 10 PLDA-3 1 14 PLDA-2 1

DBVIDEO DBBLANK DABLANK
PL18
12 PLDB-1 1 10 PLDB-3 1 14 PLDB-2 1
RL18
RV6
PLCON
RL10 RL11 RL6
1
RL2
RL17 6
RV5
RL3
FS1
RL19 RL15 RL16
LK5 LK6 LK3 LK4

RL1
RL7 RL4
RL5
FS2 RV1 RV2 RV3 RV4
12 PLTA-1 10 PLTA-3 1 14 PLTA-2 1

1
12 PLTB-1 1 10 PLTB-3 1 14 PLTB-2 1
TAVIDEO TASYNC
TBVIDEO TBSYNC
CD-2418
Figure 5b - Dual Interswitch Unit PCB - Links, Potentiometers & Switch Positions

KH 2020
Chap 8c
CHAPTER 8C
FLAT PANEL DISPLAY
INTRODUCTION SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
1 This Chapter provides information on Nucleus 3 7000 6 Typical Flat Screen Display system configurations are
Flat Panel Display equipment. shown in the Introduction to this Manual. Refer to the
Introduction, paragraph 48 of this Chapter, for further
2 Two types of Nucleus 3 7000 Flat Panel Displays are information.
available, these are:
(1) Nucleus 7000 20.1-inch Display (NNR-A69)
(2) Nucleus 7000 18-inch Display (NNR-A70)
3 T h e N u cl e u s 7 0 0 0 Fl a t P a n e l D i s p l a y s
(NNR-A69/NNR-A70) are designed to be connected to 7 Prior to installation of the Flat Panel Display,
a Nucleus 3 Split Processor unit, in conjunction with a implement the following:
Remote Trackerball and a Display ON-OFF Sounder, as an
(1) Ensure that there is adequate clearance for the
alternative to the Nucleus 6000 Display.
Operator’s position in front of the desk or pedestal
4 The Flat Panel Display systems comprise the following display unit and at the rear of the unit to allow
assemblies: fitting of the power and other system cables.
(1) Nucleus 7000 Flat Panel Display. (2) Lay in the ships cables to the required installation
position.
(2) Split Processor - containing Input/Output PCB,
System PCB and Power Supply Unit.
(3) Remote Trackerball (Desktop Control Pod).
(4) Display On-Off Sounder Unit.
DISPLAY CHARACTERISTICS
5 The Characteristics of the Flat Panel Displays are
detailed below.
.
Table 1 - Flat Panel Display Specifications
NNR-A69 (20.1") NNR-A70 (18")

Display Area 399.36mm (H) x 359mm (H) x 287mm
319.5mm (V) (V)
Resolution 1280 x 1024 XSVGA 1280 x 1024 XSVGA

(pixels)
Dot Pitch 0.312mm (H) x 0.2805mm (H) x

0.312mm (V) 0.2805mm (V)
Power 24V dc, 92W 24V dc, 90W (typical)

Requirements
Weight 10.2 kg -
Compass Safe Grade I = 0.3m Grade I = 0.7m

Distance Grade II & III = 0.3m Grade II & III = 0.4m

KH 2020
Chap 8c
INSTALLATION INSTALLATION
Flat Panel Displays

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
16 The Flat Panel displays are designed to be either
Space Requirements Panel-mounted or Console-mounted.
8 The dimensions of equipment are shown in Figure 1c 17 Refer to Figure 1c for installation of the 20.1-inch Flat
and Figure 2c. Adequate clearance at the front of the Panel Display and Figure 2c for installation of the
equipment must be maintained for access and servicing. 18-inch Flat Panel Display.
18 Mark out the the cut-out position for the Flat Panel
Position of the Display Display in the Panel or Console (as appropriate),
allowing sufficient space for cable access and ventilation,
9 The Nucleus 3 7000 Flat Panel Display is designed to and cut-out the aperture for the flat panel display.
be Panel or Console mounted, allowing easy access
for the Operator. 19 Cut out the aperture for the Flat Panel Display and drill
the required bolt positions for fixings.
Specifications 20 Fit the Flat Panel Display into the Panel/Console and
secure it in position, using the fixings supplied.
10 For details of the Weight, Power Supplies and
Compass Safe distances of the Flat Panel Displays, Processor Unit
refer to Table 1.
21 Mark out the position of the Processor Unit, leaving
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS sufficient clearance for ventilation, cable access and
servicing.
Cable Screens 22 Drill the required bolt positions and secure the
Processor unit in position, using the fixings supplied.
11 The cable screens are not to be stripped back further
than is necessary to enable the cores to be connected. 23 Feed the ship's cables through the base of the unit and
All exposed screens must be covered with PVC sleeving to make the connections, as detailed in the appropriate
prevent accidental contact with live terminals. Interconnections diagram. Figure 3c - 20.1-inch Display or
Figure 4c - 18-inch Display.
Cable Connections
On/Off Sounder Unit
12 The Flat Panel Display and associated Remote
Trackerball and On/Off Sounder are connected to the 24 Where the On/Off Sounder is to be panel mounted,
processor as shown on Figure 1c and Figure 2c. refer to Figure 5c and mark out the position of the
On/Off Sounder unit. Drill the required fixing positions and
secure the unit in position, using the fixings supplied.
INPUT SIGNALS
25 Connect the On/Off Sounder unit to the Processor
13 Inputs to the Flat Screen Displays comprise video Unit, as detailed in the appropriate interconnections
signals and power. diagram.
CONTROL SWITCHES Remote Trackerball
14 The control switches, located on the Front Panel of the 26 Where the Remote Trackerball is to be mounted within
Flat Panel Display Unit, are used for positioning the a console, refer to Figure 6c and mark out the position
picture on the screen and configuring the picture of the Trackerball unit. Drill the required fixing positions and
parameters. secure the unit in position, using the fixings supplied.
15 Refer to paragraphs 58 to 83, for details of the Controls 27 Connect the Remote Trackerball to the Processor
and indications provided at the Flat Panel Display Unit, as detailed in the appropriate interconnections
units. diagram.

KH 2020
Chap 8c
SETTING TO WORK 18-inch Display (NNR-A70)
40 The brightness and contrast can be adjusted, if
necessary.
GENERAL
41 For the best picture setting, a suitable test image of the
28 The Flat Screen Displays can be used in place of required resolution should be used
Nucleus 3 6000 series displays.
42 Refer to paragraphs 61 to 83 and set up the monitor as
29 The displays have been factory set-up and therefore follows:
will not normally require any adjustment. However,
adjustment of monitor settings may become necessary 43 Press the MENU key to open the Main Menu.
following monitor replacement.
44 Open the SETUP menu, using the [+] (up) and [-]
(down) keys.
SETTING-UP THE MONITOR
(1) Refer to paragraph 66 and make any adjustments
required to the picture size and position.
Pre-Switch On Checks
(2) Save the new settings by pressing the DOWN key
30 Check that all cables are correctly connected. and close the SETUP menu.
31 Check that the SYNC SETTINGS links at the Video 45 Open the PICTURE menu, using the [+] (up) and [-]
Input PCB in the Processor Unit are set as follows: (down) keys to highlight, then press the ENTER key.
(1) Refer to paragraph 74 and make any adjustments
LK 1 - OPEN required to the brightness, contrast and colour.
LK 2 - MADE(Closed)
and close the PICTURE menu.
Switching On
46 Open the OPTIONS menu, using the [+] (up) and [-]
32 Switch on the power supply to the Flat Screen Display (down) keys to highlight, then press the ENTER key.
and check that the Power Indicator is illuminated.
(1) Refer to paragraph 78 and if required, alter the on
screen language and select the Prompt mode.
Monitor Parameter Adjustments
20.1-inch Display (NNR-A69) and close the OPTIONS menu.
47 Open the MODE INFO menu, using the [+] (up) and [-]
33 The brightness and contrast can be adjusted, if (down) keys. Check that the settings are correct
necessary.
48 Open the SERVICE Info box, using the [+] (up) and [-]
34 For the best picture setting, a suitable test image of the (down) keys and pressing the ENTER key. Check that
required resolution should be used the correct version of software has been loaded
35 Refer to paragraph 58 and set up the monitor as
follows: SETTING-UP THE REMOTE TRACKERBALL
36 Press the SELECT button followed by the [+] and [-] of
the ADJUST key to highlight the required parameter. 49 Check that the DIP switches on the Remote
Trackerball Unit (NNR-A10-3) are set correctly, as
37 Press the SELECT button, then use the [+] and [-] of detailed below. Refer to Figure 6c for the location of the DIP
the ADJUST key to achieve the required correction. switches.
38 Pressing the EXIT button saves the setting and returns
the screen to the menu selection.
Table 2 - Remote Trackerball DIP Switch Settings
39 Once all required parameter adjustments have been
made, press EXIT to exit from the parameter menu.
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
1 ON
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 ON
5 OFF
6 ON
7 OFF
8 OFF

KH 2020
Chap 8c
50 There are two types of Nucleus 7000 Flat Panel

Display:
(1) 20.1-inch Display (NNR-A69)
(2) 18-inch Display (NNR-A70)
51 Both display types are designed to be ruggedised and
lightweight, with EMI packaging.
52 The Nucleus 7000 Flat Panel Displays are designed to
be used in place of the Nucleus 3 5000/6000 series
display units. The Flat Panel displays are used in
conjunction with a Remote Trackerball and an On/Off
Sounder to provide the same functionality as that provided
by the Nucleus 3 6000 displays.

KH 2020
Chap 8c
NUCLEUS 3 SPLIT PROCESSOR

(NNR-A59) ARPA NUCLEUS 3 7000 FLAT PANEL DISPLAY
(NNR-A60) ATA SYSTEM
(NNR-A61) EPA
VIDEO INPUT PCB (NNR-A215-1) REMOTE ON/OFF SOUNDER (NNR-A65)
CABLE
SKA (NNR-A987) TB1
RED
GND 1 3
BLUE
ON/OFF SW 2 4
SYNC PLC
SETTINGS GREEN 1
SIGNAL 1
LK1 BLUE
V/H GND 2 2
LK2 H
FLAT PANEL MONITOR (NNR-A69)

OPEN CLOSED
BNC MONITOR CABLE
SKD (NNR-A995)
RED 1
GREEN 2
BLUE 3
GND 4
DDC RETURN 5
GND-R 6
GND-G 7
TO BNC CONNECTORS
GND-B 8
RESERVED 9
GND-SYNC/SELF RASTER 10
GND 11
DDR DATA 12
H-SYNC 13
V-SYNC 14
DDC CLOCK 15

CABLE
PLR (NNR-A993)
RED
+24V dc 8 +V dc
BLUE
GND 11 -V dc
REMOTE TRACKERBALL (NNR-A10-3)

CABLE CABLE
PLN (NNR-A530) PL1 SK1 (NNR-A989) TB1 CON 1
2 2 5 1
Tx 2
3 3 4 2
Rx 3
4 4 1 3
DTR 4
5 5 2 6
GND 5
7 7 3 4
RTS 7
SUPPLY IN
SUPPLY IN/OUT
OUTPUT L POWER CABLE (3 CORE) L INPUT

TERMINALS N N TERMINALS
E E
NOTE:
NNR-A987, NNR-A989, NNR-A993, AND NNR-A995 ARE ALL PART OF NNR-A994 CABLE KIT, FOR USE WITH FLAT PANEL MONITOR NNR-A69.
NNR-A530 IS INCLUDED WITH NNR-A10-3.
CD-4331
Figure 3c - 20.1-inch Flat Panel Display (NNR-A69): Interconnections Diagram

KH 2020
Chap 8c
NUCLEUS 3 SPLIT PROCESSOR

(NNR-A59) ARPA NUCLEUS 3 7000 FLAT PANEL DISPLAY
(NNR-A61) EPA
VIDEO INPUT PCB (NNR-A215-1) REMOTE ON/OFF SOUNDER (NNR-A65)
CABLE
SKA (NNR-A987) TB1
RED
GND 1 3
BLUE
ON/OFF SW 2 4
SYNC PLC
SETTINGS GREEN 1
SIGNAL 1
LK1 BLUE
V/H GND 2 2
LK2 H

OPEN CLOSED
SVGACABLE
SKD (NNR-A988) SKJ2
RED 1 RED VIDEO
GREEN 2 GREEN VIDEO
BLUE 3 BLUE VIDEO
GND 4 GND
DDC RETURN 5 NO CONNECTION
GND-R 6 GND R
GND-G 7 GND G
GND-B 8 GND B
RESERVED 9 NO CONNECTION
GND-SYNC/SELF RASTER 10 GND
GND 11 GND
DDR DATA 12 SDA
H-SYNC 13 HORIZONTAL SYNC
V-SYNC 14 VERTICAL SYNC
DDC CLOCK 15 NO CONNECTION

CABLE
PLR (NNR-A992) PLJ1
RED
+24V dc 1 1 +24V dc
BLUE
GND 2 2 +24V dc
RTN

CABLE CABLE
2 2 5 1
Tx 2
3 3 4 2
Rx 3
4 4 1 3
DTR 4
5 5 2 6
GND 5
7 7 3 4
RTS 7
SUPPLY IN
SUPPLY IN/OUT

E E
NOTE:
NNR-A988, NNR-A989 AND NNR-A992 ARE ALL PART OF NNR-A991 CABLE KIT, FOR USE WITH FLAT PANEL MONITOR NNR-A70.
CD-4332
Figure 4c - 18-inch Flat Panel Display (NNR-A70): Interconnections Diagram

KH 2020
Chap 8c
60 130
180
1 2
RADAR
ON-OFF
VIEW OF FRONT COVER

120
5 4 MOUNTING HOLES
DIA 5 OR TAP M4
5
R3 TYP
{
170
160
TO
VIDEO INPUT
PCB
NNR-A215-1
110
VIEW ON REAR OF FRONT COVER
CUT-OUT DETAILS FOR PANEL MOUNTING
CD-4307
Figure 5c - Flat Panel Display ON/OFF Sounder (NNR-A65): Installation Diagram

KH 2020
Chap 8c

KH 2020
Chap 8c
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 18-inch Flat Panel Display
Front Panel Control and Indicators
53 The Flat Panel Display is used in conjunction with a
Remote Trackerball and an ON/OFF Sounder. The 61 The 18-inch Flat Panel Display is fitted with the
following paragraphs provide information on operating and following controls and indicators:
provide descriptions of the controls and indicators provided (1) Display POWER ON/OFF switch, located on the
on the Flat Panel Displays and on the associated Remote
Trackerball unit and ON/OFF Switch unit. front panel of the unit.
(2) BRIGHTNESS control, located on the front panel.
OPERATING (3) POWER (Green) LED - indicates Power ON. The
green POWER status indicator extinguishes and
54 The Operation of the Nucleus 3 System, fitted with Flat the amber NO SYNC indicator illuminates when in
Panel Displays is identical to that of a system using the Power Save Mode.
5000 and 6000 series displays. Refer to Chapter 1, for (4) NO SYNC (Amber) LED - indicates that the
operating information.
monitor cannot synchronise to the external video
input and has entered the power-save mode.
POWER ON/OFF
On-Screen Adjustment Controls
55 The Display is switched ON using the ON/OFF switch,
located on the front of the display unit. 62 The Display can be adjusted using an On-screen
Display (OSD) and the following pushbutton controls:
56 The Radar System is switched ON using the ON/OFF
switch on the ON/OFF Sounder Unit (NNR-A65). (1) MENU - enables the Main Menu to be opened and
closed.
57 It is recommended that the Display ON/OFF switch is
set to the ON position and remains in the ON position, (2) RESET - allows exit from menu selections.
and that the system is switched ON/OFF at the ON/OFF (3) UP/ DOWN Arrows - used to select a sub-menu
Sounder Unit. This avoids confusion over whether the Radar and to make adjustments once a function is
system is on or off when the Display is switched OFF. selected.
63 The On-Screen Display (OSD) facilities provided by
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS the 18-inch Flat Screen Display are shown in Figure7.
20-inch Flat Panel Display required resolution should be used. Set up the monitor
as follows:
58 The 20-inch Flat Panel Display is fitted with the
following controls and indicators: (1) Press the MENU key to open the Main Menu.
(1) Display POWER ON/OFF switch, located on the (2) Open the required sub-menu, using the [+] (up)
front panel of the unit. and [-] (down) keys
(2) BRIGHTNESS control, located on the front panel. 65 In the event that the unit comes up in the wrong
resolution format (SXGA vs. XGA), use the following
(3) CONTRAST control, located on the front panel. procedure to correct the situation:
(4) POWER (Green) LED - indicates Power ON.
(1) Press the Menu pushbutton and turn the power
On-Screen Adjustment Controls ON. Keep the Menu pushbutton depressed for
several seconds, until a sub-menu is displayed.
59 The Display can be adjusted using an On-screen The sub-menu shows SXGA and GA for selection.
Display (OSD) and the following pushbutton controls:
(2) Select the required resolution.
(1) SELECT - enables the Parameter menu to be (3) Press the [+] pushbutton. The correct format is
opened. selected and the sub-menu disappears.
(2) EXIT - allows exit from menu selections.
(3) Adjust (+ and - keys) - used to select a parameter
and to make adjustments once a parameter is
selected.
required resolution should be used. Set up the monitor
as follows:
(1) Press the SELECT key to open the required
parameter.
(2) Open the required sub-menu/parameter, by
pressing SELECT, then using the ADJUST [+] and
[-] keys make the required adjustment.
(3) Press EXIT to save the setting.
(4) Once all required adjustments above been made,
press EXIT again to exit from the parameter
menu.

KH 2020
Chap 8c
SETUP Menu PICTURE Menu
66 The SETUP menu allows adjustment of the position 74 Brightness
and size of the picture on the monitor's display. The
following Menu options are provided: Adjust the Brightness using the DOWN (less) and UP
(more) keys. The default value is set to 48. Settings
67 Horizontal Position below 48, dim the backlight. An increase in brightness
is generated by a dc offset in the RGB level. The black
To alter the picture's horizontal position, press the level of the pictures is increased at the same time.
(UP) (DOWN) keys. If the display and graphic map
resolution are the same (i.e. a 1:1 resolution), to 75 Contrast
achieve optimum picture setting, the whole of the
picture should fill the monitor display area. This can be Adjust the Contrast using the DOWN (less) and UP
seen from the 1 pixel wide red line in the corners of the (more) keys
test picture. These lines are clearly visible when the
picture is correctly aligned. 76 Colour Temperature
68 Horizontal Size Select Colour Temperature, by pressing the ENTER
key. A choice of three preset colour combinations(A, B
The picture can be expanded horizontally to the right. or C) is provided or a user defined combination can be
The position to the left-hand edge of the picture does used. The saturation level of the colours can be
not change. With a 1:1 resolution, when adjusting the adjusted by selecting the colours R (red), G (green)
horizontal size, ensure that the red 1 pixel lines in the and B (blue) with the ENTER key, then pressing UP
corners of the test picture remain visible and that the ( for more saturation) or DOWN (for less saturation).
test picture fills the whole of the display area on the
right-hand edge of the screen. 77 Save
69 Vertical Position To save the settings, press the DOWN key. After each
save the selected menu option is de-activated after a
To alter the picture's vertical position, press the (UP) 0.5 second delay. Pressing any other key aborts the
(DOWN) keys. With a 1:1 resolution, when adjusting action without saving the data.
the vertical position, ensure that the red 1 pixel lines in
the corners of the test picture remain visible and that OPTIONS Menu
the test picture fills the full display area.
78 Prompt
70 Vertical Size
When PROMPT is selected, the info mode
The picture can be distorted vertically by percentage automatically appears for a short while when the video
values. The displayed value indicates the percentage mode is changed
of distortion. The correct expansion is usually
automatic, but can be manually corrected here. 79 Language
71 Clock Phase The language on screen can be selected from a choice
of English, German and French.
The scanning time (focus) can be set using the (UP)
(DOWN) keys. 80 RS232 Address
72 Save 81 This option is used to identify the unit, when operating
on an RS232 serial interface.
To save the entered values, press the DOWN key.
This avoids losing the data at the next mode change,
as when a video mode is saved several times the
previous save is always overwritten to reduce memory
consumption. After each save the selected menu
option is automatically de-activated after 0.5 second
delay. Pressing any other key aborts the action,
without saving the data.
73 Presets
The default setting of the test picture can be restored

by pressing the (UP) key.

KH 2020
Chap 8c
MODE INFO Menu
82 The Mode Info menu displays the parameters of the
current video mode.
Mode: Picture resolution, based in the

number of lines.
H Freq: H-Sync-frequency to within 4Hz.
V Freq: V-Sync-frequency to within

0.003Hz.
H Pol: H-Sync-polarity, neg. = negative

sync pulse.
V Pol: V-Sync-polarity, neg. = negative

sync pulse
Sync: Type of synchronous signals (RGB,

H-V, composite, on Green)
Lines: Absolute number of lines (active

and inactive) forming the picture.
Hposition: Horizontal position of the displayed

pixel.
Vposition: Vertical position of the displayed

line.
Entry: Common memory allocation.
SERVICE Info Box

83 The following information is provided in the Service
info box:
Software Version.
Serial Number of Software.
Number of Hours unit has been in use.
Number of times that the unit has been switch on.

KH 2020
Chap 8c
SETUP PICTURE
46
382
82
1687
39 A B C
USER
100
R 100
54
G 100
B 100
SAVE
PRESETS SAVE
HORIZONTAL POSITION BRIGHTNESS
VIDEO
SAT 48
LPK 0
LSO 0
BLV 0
NORM:
NTSC NTSC 44
PAL SECAM
HPLL
SELECT MENUS BY HIGHLIGHTING WITH THE KEYS VCR TV
[+] (DOWN) AND [-] (UP) AND PRESSING [ENTER]
Chroma Saturation
OPEN MAIN MENU WITH THE [MENU] KEY
SOURCES
MAIN MENU
SETUP Video:
PICTURE RGB1 RGB2
VIDEO
CIN1 S-VIDEO
SOURCES
CIN 2
OPTIONS
MODE INFO
SERVICE
Select Video Source
OPTIONS
PROMPT:
on off
LANGUAGE
deutsch english
francais
OSD: 20 sec.
Hot Key:
Clock Phase
sets PROMPT Mode
SERVICE Mode Info
Mode 1280 x 1024

HFreq 79.91 KHz
Software: 4.25 VFreq 75.11 Hz
Ser. Num.: 271 HPol neg.
VPol neg.
Sync RGB H-V
Operating Hours: 224 Lines 1064
Power ON: 28 HPosition 382
VPosition 39
Entry 27
CD-4334
Figure 7c - On Screen Display (OSD) Facilities: Typical Screen Displays

KH 2020
Chap 8c
Remote Trackerball (Desktop Control Pod) Radar System ON/OFF Sounder Unit
84 The Remote Trackerball (Desktop Control Pod) is 89 The Radar System ON/OFF switch unit, is fitted with
fitted with a trackerball and three pushbuttons. an ON/OFF pushbutton switch and an audio speaker.
The audio speaker provides audible indications/warnings in
85 The trackerball is used to position the cursor on the the same way as the audible speaker in the 5000 and 6000
display screen. The pushbuttons are used to series displays.
activate/select a particular function. On-screen guidance on
which button to press, is provided in the Information Boxes
located in the lower centre portion of the screen. When first POWER ON/OFF
displayed, after selecting RUN from STANDBY, the
information boxes show: 90 The Display only is switched ON using the ON/OFF
switch, located on the front of the Flat Panel Display
unit.
91 The Radar System is switched on using the ON/OFF
ACQ Select ERBL switch, located on the ON/OFF Sounder unit
(NNR-A65).
CD-2469 92 When the system is switched on, two short beeps
sound at the ON/OFF Sounder unit, to indicate that all
systems are functioning correctly. After a few seconds the
86 Standby Screen appears on the Flat Panel Display screen.
When a function is selected (e.g. Range Rings) the
Information box displays similar data to that in the
pop-down (information) boxes which appear below the
selected function box. If all pushbutton activities are the
same, a red box appears on the display containing the
legend:
USE ANY KEY

CD-1 9 6 4
87
A facility which has been previously activated, such as
EBL, is re-selected by positioning the cursor in close
proximity to the required facility and pressing the centre
pushbutton.
88 For further operating information, refer to Chapter 1 -
Nucleus 3 Displays - Operating Information.

KH 2020
Chap 8c
93 A diagnostic algorithm is provided in Figure 8c to

provide the operator/technician with a step-by-step
guide through the fault finding procedure. The algorithm is
intended for identification of faults to LRM level (e.g. a faulty
PCB or cable/connector assembly).
NO PICTURE PRESENT
CHECK THAT +24V DC IS

PRESENT AT POWER
SUPPLY I/P TERMINALS
OF THE DISPLAY UNIT
IS CORRECT DC NO CHECK FOR IS 24V DC NO CHECK PROCESSOR

SUPPLY PRESENT? +24V DC AT PLW ON SUPPLY PRESENT? USING RELEVANT CHART
PROCESSOR I/P PCB
YES YES
CHECK CABLE
IS POLARITY NO NNR-A992 (18-INCH)
REVERSE CONNECTIONS OR
CORRECT?
NNR-A993 (20.1-INCH)
CONNECTIONS
YES
AT SKJ2
OR AT THE BNC NO NO
CONNECTIONS , CHECK SKD ON ARE SIGNALS CHECK PROCESSOR
ARE THE VGA SIGNALS PROCESSOR VIDEO I/P PCB PRESENT? USING RELEVANT CHART
PRESENT?
YES YES
CHECK 12V DC BACKLIGHT CHECK CABLE

SUPPLY ON PINS 1 & 8 OF J8 NNR-A988 (18-INCH)
AND ON THE 12V VGA OR
CONTROLLER, BETWEEN NNR-A995 (20.1-INCH)
PINS 1 & 8 OF J7 CONNECTIONS
REPLACE
POWER SUPPLY PCB.
IS +12V DC NO
PRESENT ON BOTH? IF FAULT NOT CLEARED,
REPLACE VGA CONVERTER
AND/OR DISPLAY MODULE
YES
REPLACE HRAT9610 PCB.
IF FAULT NOT CLEARED,

REPLACE VGA CONVERTER
AND/OR DISPLAY MODULE
CD-4301
Figure 8c - Flat Panel Screen Display: Fault Finding Algorithm

KH 2020
Chap 8c
PARTS LISTS
94 Parts Lists for a Typical Nucleus 3 Flat Panel Screen

Display system are provided in Tables 1 to 3.
95 Flat Panel Display System
Table 2 - Flat Panel Display System: Parts List
ITEM DESCRIPTION KELVIN HUGHES

No. PART No.
1 NUCLEUS 3 20.1-INCH FLAT NNR-A69

PANEL DISPLAY
2 NUCLEUS 3 18-INCH FLAT NNR-A70

PANEL DISPLAY
3 NUCLEUS 3 SPLIT EPA NNR-A61

PROCESSOR ATA NNR-A60
ARPA NNR-A59
4 REMOTE TRACKERBALL NNR-A10-3
5 NUCLEUS 3 ON-OFF NNR-A65

SOUNDER

KH 2020
Chap 8c

533.8
TO INSTALL THE NUCLEUS 7000
SPLIT PROCESSOR & FLAT PANEL DISP
A) DISPLAY UNIT
1. Refer to the dimensioned drawing opposite for hole locations.
Mark out the the cut-out position for the Flat Panel Display in the Pane
Console (as appropriate), allowing sufficient space for cable access an
Cut out the aperture for the Flat Panel Display and drill the required bol
2. Fit the Display Unit in the required location and fasten in position using
480.5
B) PROCESSOR UNIT
NOTE: A 2m Cable Kit is supplied as standard with optional 5, 10, 15 & 20m ki
1. Mark out the position of the Processor Unit, leaving sufficient clearance
cable access and servicing; drill the bolt positions as shown in the diag
CONT BRIGHT
FRONT VIEW 3. Feed the ship's cables through the base of the unit and make the conne
on the appropriate Connections Diagram(s).
4. Ensure that the Processor Unit is directly earthed to the ship's earth, us
19
5. See Monitor to Processor Connections Diagram
BOTTOM VIEW
NUCLEUS SPLIT PROCESSOR
NOTE: OPTIONAL HANDLES MAY BE FITTED AS SHOWN (NNR-A59) ARPA NUCLEUS 7000 FLAT PANEL DISPLAY
(NNR-A61) EPA
T PANEL DISPLAY NNR-A69 (20.1-INCH) VIDEO INPUT PCB (NNR-A215-1) REMOTE ON/OFF SOUNDER (NNR-A65)
CABLE
SKA (NNR-A987) TB1
RED
GND 1 3
BLUE
ON/OFF SW 2 4
SYNC PLC
SETTINGS GREEN 1
SIGNAL 1
LK1 BLUE
V/H GND 2 2
LK2 H

OPEN CLOSED
BNC MONITOR CABLE
SKD (NNR-A995)
RED 1
GREEN 2
BLUE 3
GND 4
DDC RETURN 5
GND-R 6
GND-G 7
TO BNC CONNECTORS
GND-B 8
RESERVED 9
GND-SYNC/SELF RASTER 10
GND 11
DDR DATA 12
H-SYNC 13
V-SYNC 14
530 ref
DDC CLOCK 15
570

CABLE
PLR (NNR-A993)
RED
+24V dc 1 +V dc
BLUE
GND 2 -V dc

CABLE CABLE
2 2 5 1
Tx 2
3 3 4 2
Rx 3
4 4 1 3
DTR 4
5 5 2 6
GND 5
7 7 3 4
RTS 7
SUPPLY IN
CABLE ACCESS SUPPLY IN/OUT
280 ref
420 TERMINALS N N TERMINALS
E E
PROCESSOR UNIT (NNR-A59) ARPA NOTE:

(NNR-A60) ATA NNR-A987, NNR-A989, NNR-A993, AND NNR-A995 ARE ALL PART OF NNR-A994 CABLE KIT, FOR USE WITH FLAT PANEL MONITOR NNR-A69.
(NNR-A61) EPA NNR-A530 IS INCLUDED WITH NNR-A10-3.
Figure 1c - Nucleus 7000 20.1-inch Flat Panel Display (NNR-A69): Installation Diagram
TO INSTALL THE NUCLEUS 7000
449.3
SPLIT PROCESSOR & FLAT PANEL DISP
At Relative Humidity 0% : -15°C to +55°C
At Relative Humidity 95% : +40°C
A) DISPLAY UNIT
1. Refer to the dimensioned drawing opposite for hole locations.
Mark out the the cut-out position for the Flat Panel Display in the Pane
Console (as appropriate), allowing sufficient space for cable access an
Cut out the aperture for the Flat Panel Display and drill the required bo
482
466 2. Fit the Display Unit in the required location and fasten in position using
45.72
ACTIVE AREA)
B) PROCESSOR UNIT
NOTE: A 2m Cable Kit is supplied as standard with optional 5, 10, 15 & 20m k
1. Mark out the position of the Processor Unit, leaving sufficient clearance
cable access and servicing; drill the bolt positions as shown in the diag
287.02
3. Feed the ship's cables through the base of the unit and make the conn
on the appropriate Connections Diagram(s).
4. Ensure that the Processor Unit is directly earthed to the ship's earth, us
5. See Monitor to Processor Connections Diagram

3.05 12.70
77.47
UP
DOWN
EHIND ROTATING PANEL

NUCLEUS SPLIT PROCESSOR
(NNR-A59) ARPA NUCLEUS 7000 FLAT PANEL DISPLAY
(NNR-A-61) EPA
EL DISPLAY NNR-A70 (18-INCH) VIDEO INPUT PCB (NNR-A215-1) REMOTE ON/OFF SOUNDER (NNR-A65)
CABLE
SKA (NNR-A987) TB1
RED
GND 1 3
BLUE
ON/OFF SW 2 4
SYNC PLC
SETTINGS GREEN 1
SIGNAL 1
LK1 BLUE
V/H GND 2 2
LK2 H
O
OPEN CLOSED
SVGACABLE
SKD (NNR-A988) SKJ2
RED 1 RED VIDEO
GREEN 2 GREEN VIDEO
BLUE 3 BLUE VIDEO
GND 4 GND
DDC RETURN 5 NO CONNECTION
GND-R 6 GND R
GND-G 7 GND G
GND-B 8 GND B
RESERVED 9 NO CONNECTION
GND-SYNC/SELF RASTER
GND
10
11
GND
GND
P
DDR DATA 12 SDA
H-SYNC 13 HORIZONTAL SYNC
V-SYNC 14 VERTICAL SYNC
DDC CLOCK 15 NO CONNECTION
530 ref
570

CABLE P
(NNR-A992)
+24V dc 1
PLR
RED
PLJ1
1 +24V dc
FL
BLUE
GND 2 2 +24V dc
RTN

CABLE CABLE
2 2 5 1
Tx 2
3 3 4 2
Rx 3
4 4 1 3
DTR 4
5 5 2 6
GND 5
7 7 3 4
RTS 7
SUPPLY IN P
CABLE ACCESS SUPPLY IN/OUT
280 ref L L
OUTPUT POWER CABLE (3 CORE) INPUT
420
E E
PROCESSOR UNIT (NNR-A59) ARPA

(NNR-A60) ATA NOTE:
(NNR-A61) EPA NNR-A988, NNR-A989 AND NNR-A992 ARE ALL PART OF NNR-A991 CABLE KIT, FOR USE WITH FLAT PANEL MONITOR NNR-A70.
Figure 2c - Nucleus 7000 18-inch Flat Panel Display (NNR-A70): Installation Diagram
SKN TB1
Radar Adaptor Push Button PCB
cable form 9-Way D-type Terminal connector
(NNR-A853) (PL1) (SKN)
NNR-A853
CON 2
SW1
SK1
80 CON 1
WIRE TERMINATION TERMINATION SIGNAL

No. FROM TO
10 PL1-2 SKN-2 Tx
11 PL1-4 SKN-4 +12V
12 PL1-4 PL1-7 Trackerball Assembly
13 PL1-5 SKN-3 Gnd
14 PL1-5 PL1-3
WIRE TERMINATION TERMINATION REMARKS
No. COLOUR FROM TO
1 RED SK1-4 TB1-5 DTR CON 1-3
2 YELLOW SK1-5 TB1-4 GND CON 1-6
3 BLUE SK1-7 TB1-3 RTS CON 1-4
4 GREEN SK1-3 TB1-2 RX CON 1-2
5 BLACK SK1-2 TB1-1 TX CON 1-1
6 WHITE N/C
SW1 SETTINGS
ON: 1, 4, 6* *(6 May not be required, dependant upon connected device)
105
145
30 48
11
147.5
145 187
34
KELVIN HUGHES
4 x O4
116
FOR PANEL MOUNTING MAKE CUT-OUT AND

FIXING HOLES AS SHOWN ABOVE AND FIX THE 72
TWO HALVES OF THE TRACKERBALL EITHER
SIDE OF THE PANEL AS SHOWN BELOW
DESK MOUNTED
CONSOLE MOUNTED
Figure 6c - Remote Trackerball Unit (NNR-A10-3): Installation Diagram
8
KH 2020
Chap 8e
CHAPTER 8E
RADAR INTERSWITCH UNIT
INTRODUCTION INSTALLATION
1 This Chapter provides information on the Radar INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Interswitch Unit (NNR-A55) for use with Nucleus 3
Display equipment. 5 The Radar Interswitch Unit (RIU) is designed to
interswitch up to six Nucleus Radar Displays and six
2 The Radar Interswitch Unit (RIU) is designed to Transceivers in any master/slave combination.
provide an interface between multiple Nucleus 3
Display(s) and the associated Transmitter/Receiver(s).
Space Requirements
NOTE:
Systems utilising the pre-MkVII Transmitter/Receiver will 6 Adequate clearance at the front of the equipment must
either require a Transmitter Interface Unit, to enable be maintained for access and servicing.
interfacing to the Nucleus 3 Display via the RIU or require
a CAN Bus adapter kit (NNR-A981) to be fitted in the RIU Position of the RIU
for each Transmitter/Receiver connected to the Nucleus 3
Display. For information on the Transmitter Interface Unit 7 The Radar Interswitch Unit (RIU) is designed to be
(TIU), refer to Chapter 8d. bulkhead/wall mounted. Brackets are provided at
either end of the unit, for this purpose. The dimensions of the
3 A Radar Interswitch Unit can be used in systems RIU are shown in Figure 1e.
comprising up to six Nucleus Displays connected to up
to six Transmitter/Receivers. Weight
8 The Radar Interswitch Unit weighs 7kg
PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS (approximately).
4 Prior to Installing the RIU (NNR-A55): Power Supplies

(1) Ensure that adequate clearance is available for 9 Power supplies to the RIU are provided from the
maintenance. Nucleus Radar display.
(2) Check that the Input/Output cables can be easily
installed and have adequate clearance. Compass Safe Distances
10 The minimum safe distances are as follows:
Grade I: 0.3m
Grade II: 0.1m

KH 2020
Chap 8e
305
77.5 150
16
12 DIA
FIXING HOLES
40
530
500
450
DANGER
High
voltage
MOUNTING BRACKET
CZZ-1121
VIEW SHOWING COVER DETAILS
CABLE CLAMPING BRACKET

NNR-1605
210
LOWER CABLE CLAMP

NNR-1603

NNR-1604 (IN 6 POSITIONS)
LOWER CABLE CLAMP

NNR-1602 (IN 6 POSITIONS) NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED
CD-4571
Figure 1e - Radar Interswitch Unit (NNR-A55): Dimensions and Mounting

KH 2020
Chap 8e
INSTALLING THE RIU Interconnections to Mk IV Upmast Transceiver
11 Refer to Figure 1e and mount the Radar Interswitch 18 Connection to a MkIV Upmast Transceiver
Unit (RIU) in its required location, ensuring sufficient (CAE-A12-20) requires a 38-core cable carrying the
clearance for ventilation, cable access and servicing, as following services: Video and Sync, and Control and Data
follows: signals, via the optional CAN Adapter PCB.
(1) Mark out the position of the RIU and drill holes in Interconnections to Mk V Transceiver
the required positions for mounting.
19 Connection to a MkV Transceiver (CAE-A30-7 and
(2) Secure the RIU in position, using suitable bolts. CAE-30-8) requires the use of a Transmitter Interface
Unit (NNR-A66), fitted with a CAN Adapter PCB
Earthing (NNR-A981) and a Terminals PCB (NNR-A1004).
Connections to the Transmitter Interface Unit (TIU) require a
12 Ensure that the RIU is earthed correctly, to the ship's composite 12-core cable carrying the following services:
earth, using the earthing bolt provided. Control and Data, and Video and Sync.
20 Connections between the TIU and the Transmitter
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS require a 38-core cable carrying the following
services: Control and Data, Tx/Rx data, Video and Sync.
Cable Screens Interconnections to a MkVI Transceiver
13 The cable screens are not to be stripped back further 21 Connection to a MkVI Transceiver (CAE-A37/A45)
than is necessary to enable the cores to be connected. requires the use of a Soft Start Unit (CZZ-A14/2).
All exposed screens must be covered with PVC sleeving to Connections to the Soft Start Unit require 38-core cable
prevent accidental contact with live terminals. carrying the following services: Video and Sync, and Control
and Data signals, via the optional CAN Adapter PCB.
Access for Cabling
22 Connections between the Soft Start Unit and the
14 Access to the RIU Processor PCB and the Video Sync Transmitter require a 38-core cable carrying the
Switching Board is obtained by removing the RIU following services: Power, Video and Sync, and Control and
Front Panel. Cables are fed through cable clamps fitted to Data signals.
the base of the casing. Refer to Figure 2e for unit Locations.
Interconnections to a MkVII S-Band Transceiver
NOTE:
23 Connection to a MkVII S-Band Transceiver (CTX-A9)
Access to the inside of the RIU is via the front panel, which requires a composite 12-core cable carrying the
is secured in position by six screws. following services: Control and Data, Video and Sync.
24 Connections to the associated Turning Mechanism
Cable Installation require a 12-core cable.
15 Refer to the appropriate interconnections diagram and Interconnections to a MkVII X-Band Low Speed
connect the cables between the RIU and the Nucleus 3 Transceiver
display and between the RIU and the Transmitter, or TIU (as 25 Connection to a MkVII X-Band Transceiver (CTX-A8)
appropriate). requires a composite 12-core cable carrying the
(1) Feed the Transmitter and Display cables through following services: Control and Data, Video and Sync.
the base of the unit and connect to the appropriate 26 Connections to the associated Low Speed Turning
input/output connectors. Mechanism require a 12-core cable.
16 Secure the cables in position, using the cable clamps
provided at the base of the unit. Interconnections to a MkVII X-Band High Speed
Transceiver
17 Instructions for setting to work are provided in the
section on Commissioning, later in this chapter. 27 Connection to a MkVII X-Band Transceiver (CTX-A8)
requires a composite 12-core cable carrying the
following services: Control and Data, Video and Sync.
28 Connections to the associated High Speed Turning
Mechanism require a 25-core cable.
Interconnections to Nucleus 3 (5000) Display

29 Connection to a Nucleus 3 (5000) Display requires a
composite 12-core cable carrying the following
Interconnections to Nucleus 3 (6000) Display

30 Connection to a Nucleus 3 (6000) Display requires a
composite 12-core cable carrying the following

KH 2020
Chap 8e
COMMISSIONING Switches
36 There are two switches on the Processor PCB. The
31 The Radar Interswitch Unit (NNR-A55) is fitted with a switch settings are as follows:
power On/Off switch on the top of the unit.
32 There is no specific commissioning procedure
applicable to the Radar Interswitch Unit. SW1 Description Normal
Position
INDICATORS 1 CAN terminator for Display 1/Tx1 OFF

2 CAN terminator for Display 2/Tx2 OFF
Processor PCB (NNR-A980)
3 CAN terminator for Display 3/Tx3 OFF
33 The following LED indicators are provided on the 4 CAN terminator for Display 4/Tx4 OFF
Processor PCB:
5 CAN terminator for Display 5/Tx 5 OFF
6 CAN terminator for Display 6/Tx 6 OFF
LED Indication
NOTE:
D37 +27V Present The terminator is only required when each leg is not
connected to both a display and a transceiver. E.g. In a
D38 +5V Present (i.e. RIU is operating normally and system comprising 3 transceivers and 2 displays; both a
backup has not been selected) display and a transceiver are connected to legs 1 and 2, but
D39 Flashes to indicate that processor is running. only a transceiver is connected to leg 3. For this
configuration, the CAN terminator for Display 3/Tx 3 is set
D40 Flashes with Heading Line output to Display 1 to ON.
D41 Flashes with Heading Line output to Display 2
SW2 Description Normal
D46 Flashes with Heading Line output to Display 4 Position
1 Tx Power always ON ON
2 Spare OFF
3 OP5 slaved to Display No. LSB OFF
Video Sync Switching PCB (NNR-A979)
4 OP5 slaved to Display No. OFF
34 There are no indicators provided on the Video/Sync 5 OP5 slaved to Display No. MSB OFF
Switching PCB.
6 OP6 slaved to Display No. LSB OFF
LINK & SWITCH SETTINGS 7 OP6 slaved to Display No. OFF

8 OP6 slaved to Display No. MSB OFF
Processor PCB (NNR-A980)
NOTES:
Links
(1) If switch SW2-1 is set to OFF, the transmitter
35 There are three links on the Processor PCB. The links power will only be switched ON if a display is set to
are normally configured as follows: MASTER it. Therefore, when switching control between
displays, the transmitter warm up period may be activated.
If SW2-1 is set to ON, the power to all transmitters is
switched ON when any display is switched ON.
Link DESCRIPTION SETTING
(2) Display outputs 5 and 6 can be set to output the
radar from the transmitter selected by any of the displays.
LK1 Disconnects 20mHz Normally MADE The switches are set to the display number to be followed. If
Oscillator the switches are all set to OFF, the output can be used for a
LK2 TX 5 Azimuth Filter Normally MADE normal display.
LK3 TX 6 Azimuth Filter Normally MADE
NOTE:
Links 2 and 3 are only removed if a 4096 pulse input is being
used.

KH 2020
Chap 8e
37 The link and switch positions for the Processor PCB 39 The link positions for the Video Sync Switching PCB
are as shown in Figure 6e below. are as shown in Figure 7e.
1
D16 PLW 622-1024ES
622-1024ES PLV SK7 PL2 SK1
1-380999-0 1-380999-0
G6H-2F-24V
TP162
PLT
PL1
PLU
L1366
RL1
TP4 L1366
SL8-CL-V
SL8-CL-V
PLL
PLA
D19
TP168 TP10 TP2
SK8 SK2
BYW29E-200
TP163
D17 L1366 L1366
TP3 TP1
TP164
RL2
1
1
TP11 TP169
B
LK5
B
SK9 SK3
G6H-2F-24V
LK1
BYW29E-200
A
L1366 L1366
SL8-CL-V
A
SL8-CL-V
D18
PLM
PLB
D20 TP170 TP165
B
TP6
TP12
LK6
B
SK10 SK4
RL3 TP171
LK2
A
L1366 L1366
A
G6H-2F-24V
BYW29E-200
TP166
TP13
A LK7 B
1
TP7
TP172
B
SK11 SK5
LK3
L1366 L1366
A
SL8-CL-V
SL8-CL-V
SL8-CL-V
PLG
PLN
PLC
TP167
D21
TP14 TP8
B
TP173
B
SK6
LK8
SK12 R24
R23
LK4
L1366 L1366
A
BYW29E-200
TP15 TP9
1
G6H-2F-12V G6H-2F-12V
SK19 TP174 SK13
RL3
L1366 L1366
TP22
SL8-CL-V
SL8-CL-V
SL8-CL-V
TP16
PLH
PLD
PLP
D22
TP180 TP175
SK20
RL4
SK14
LK3
L1366 TP17 L1366
TP23
TP176
BYW29E-200
1
LK13 TP18
219-8LPST 219-6LPST
B
B
LK2 SK21 TP185 B SK15
A
LK15
LK9
SW1
M20-9990606
L1366 TP24 L1366
A
A
PL3
SL8-CL-V
SL8-CL-V
SL8-CL-V
TP177
PLR
PLJ
PLE
D23
TP19
1
SW2
B
SK16
LK14
SK22 TP181
LK10
LK1
L1366 TP25 L1366
A
TP182 TP178
M20-9990606
1
BYW29E-200
TP20
TP183
PLZ
1
B
B
1
SK23 SK17
LK16
LK11
TP26
L1366 L1366
A
SL8-CL-V
SL8-CL-V
SL8-CL-V
TP179
PLK
TP21
PLS
PLF
SKX
D24
TP184
B
SK24 SK18
LK17
LK12
87123-0601 TP27
PLY L1366 L1366
A
1
B2P-SHF-1AA
CD-4718 CD-4716
Figure 6e - Processor PCB (NNR-A980): Link and Switch Figure 7e - Video Sync Switching PCB (NNR-A979): Link
Positions Positions
Video Sync Switching PCB (NNR-A979) Manual Switch Configuration

Links 40 The RIU incorporates a backup mode, to ensure that
radar is available even when the RIU is faulty. When
38 There are seventeen links on the Video/Sync the dc power is interrupted, turning OFF the switch on the
Switching PCB. The links are configured as follows: outside of the unit, channels 1 & 2 are automatically switched
so that display 1 is directly connected to transmitter 1 and
display 2 is directly connected to transmitter 2.
Link DESCRIPTION SETTINGS 41 It is also possible to set channels 3 and 6 to be directly
connected, but this requires moving connectors and
LK1 Video 3 input A = Normal B = Bypass changing link settings
LK2 Video 4 input A = Normal B = Bypass
Channel 3 (Display 3 direct to Transmitter 3)
LK3 Video 5 input A = Normal B = Bypass
42 To manually configure channel 3 to have direct
LK4 Video 4 input A = Normal B = Bypass connection from display 3 to transmitter 3, the
LK5 Video 3 output A = Normal B = Bypass following links and connectors must be moved:
LK6 Video 4 output A = Normal B = Bypass (1) Move the display plug in PLC to PLG on the RIU
LK7 Video 5 output A = Normal B = Bypass Processor PCB
LK8 Video 6 output A = Normal B = Bypass (2) Move the following links on the RIU Video/Sync
switching PCB from A to B
LK9 Sync 3 input A = Normal B = Bypass
LK10 Sync 4 input A = Normal B = Bypass Sync in LK9
LK11 Sync 5 input A = Normal B = Bypass Sync out LK15
Video in LK1
LK12 Sync 6 input A = Normal B = Bypass
Video out LK5
LK13 Used for Test Only. Must be Set to A
LK14 Sync 4 output A = Normal B = Bypass

KH 2020
Chap 8e
Channel 4 (Display 4 direct to Transmitter 4) ECDIS OUTPUT CONFIGURATION
43 To manually configure Channel 4 to have direct 46 Display outputs 5 and 6 can be configured to provide
connection from display 4 to transmitter 4, the radar signals to any slave display or to a kelvin Hughes
following links and connectors must be moved. ECDIS. The RIU switches the same radar signals to the
(1) Move the display plug in PLD to PLH on the RIU slave output as those being displayed on the designated
Processor PCB. display.
(2) Move the following links on the RIU Video/Sync 47 For example if SW2 is set
switching PCB from A to B: Pos 3 ON
Pos 4 OFF
Sync in LK10 Pos 5 OFF
Sync out LK14
Video in LK2 Pos 6 OFF
Video out LK6 Pos 7 ON
Pos 8 OFF
44 To manually configure Channel 5 to have direct Then output 5 will always output radar signals from the
connection from display 5 to transmitter 5, the transmitter selected by Display 1 and output 6 will
following links and connectors must be moved. always output radar signals from the Transmitter
selected by Display 2.
(1) Move the display plug in PLE to PLJ on the RIU
Processor PCB. NOTES:
(1) To ensure that the outputs are correct after
(2) Move the following links on the RIU Video/Sync changing any of the above switches, the configuration of the
switching PCB from A to B: designated display must be changed or the power switched
OFF and the On again.
Sync in LK11
Sync out LK16 (2) To select normal radar display operation, all
three switches for the required channel must be set to OFF.
Video in LK3
Video out LK7

45 To manually configure Channel 6 to have direct
connection from display 6 to transmitter 6, the
following links and connectors must be moved.
(1) Move the display plug in PLF to PLK on the RIU
Processor PCB.
(2) Move the following links on the RIU Video/Sync
switching PCB from A to B:
Sync in LK12
Sync out LK17
Video in LK4
Video out LK8

KH 2020
Chap 8e
48 The Radar Interswitch Unit (NNR-A55) is designed to

provide an interface between up to six Nucleus 3
Displays and up to six Transmitters. Typical configurations
are shown in Figures 3e to 5e.
49 The Radar Interswitch Unit contains a Processor PCB
(NNR-A980) and a Video Sync Switching PCB
(NNR-A979). It may also contain CAN Adapter PCB(s)
(NNR-A981), where required to interface with pre-MkVII
Transmitter/Receivers.
50 The RIU r e ce i ve s si g n a l s from the
Transmitter/Receiver and routes them through to the
Nucleus 3 Display Input PCB. Control of the switching is via
the CAN Bus.
51 The RIU is connected to the Mk VII Transmitters via
composite 12-core cable and carries the following
signals:
VIDEO
SYNC
CAN HI
CAN LO
GND
HEADING LINE
AZIMUTH
ON/OFF
52 These signals are then routed to the appropriate

display(s).
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

53 A power On/Off switch is provided on the top of the
unit.
54 No other controls or indicators are provided.

KH 2020
Chap 8e
OPERATION DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE
55 The Radar Interswitch Unit (NNR-A55) is fitted with an A diagnostic algorithm is shown in Figure 8e, to
ON/OFF switch on the top of the unit. When set to the 1 provide the operator/technician with a step by step
position the power supply to the unit is switched ON. guide through the fault finding procedure. The
56 There are no specific operating instructions applicable algorithm is intended for identification of faults to LRM
to the Radar Interswitch Unit. level (e.g. A faulty cable/connector assembly).
START
CHECK OPERATION
OF POWER ON/OFF
SWITCH
ARE LEDs SUSPECT FAULTY

D37 & d38 NO SWITCH/LED
ILLUMINATED?
(i.e. +27V & +5V REPLACE SWITCH/LED
PRESENT)
YES
IS LED D39
NO FLASHING?
SUSPECT FAULTY
PROCESSOR PCB (i.e. PROCESSOR
RUNNING)
YES
CHECK ALL INTERNAL

CHASSIS WIRING
NO REPAIR/REPLACE
WIRING OK?
WIRING
YES
REPLACE PROCESSOR
PCB
CD-4570
Figure 8e - Radar Interswitch Unit - Fault Finding Algorithm

KH 2020
Chap 8e
PARTS
57 Table 1 contains a list of replaceable items for the

Radar Interswitch Unit (NNR-A55).
Table 1 - RIU Parts List Table 1 (Cont.) - RIU Parts List
22 Washer Crinkle M3 22-282-5006-25

Item Description KH Part No.
Ref 23 Washer Crinkle M3 20-282-5008-25
24 Washer Crinkle M5 20-282-5009-25

1 Mounting Foot CZZ-1121
25 Screw Rec. Pan HD M4 x 8LG 25-243-1014-27
2 Label (TB1) CZZ-1128
26 Screw M4 x 6 Rec. Pan HD 25-243-1017-27
3 Label NNR-A1416
4 Unit Label (RIU) NNR-A1620
28 Screw M3 x 16LG Rec. Pan HD 25-243-1029-27
5 Video Sync Switching Board NNR-A979
6 RIU Processor PCB NNR-A980
30 Screw M5 x8 Rec. Pan HD 25-243-1038-27
7 Assembly of Cableform NNR-A5018
31 Nut Normal M3 ST. Steel 25-271-3063-27
8 Assembly of Ribbon NNR-A5019
32 Washer Plain M4 25-281-3075-27
15 Terminal Block 12-Way 45-718-5135
Type 500/HDS 33 Washer Plain M3 25-281-3080-27
18 Lower Cable Clamp Bracket NNR-1602-14 34 Rocker Switch 10A 250Vac 45-600-0033-001
Double Pole Type C1250 AP
19 Lower Cable Clamp Bracket NNR-1603-14
20 Cable Clamping Bracket NNR-1604-14
21 Cable Clamping Bracket NNR-1605-14

KH 2020
Chap 8e

LABEL
ON/OFF SWITCH NNR-1620
RADAR INTERSWITCH UNIT
45-600-0033-001 COMPASS SAFE DISTANCES
GRADE I
SER.N o
CODE.N o NNR-A55
DISSIPATION MASS Kg
MANUFACTURED BY KELVIN HUGHES LTD HAINAULT ENGLAND
MOD RECORD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
MOUNTING BRACKET
CZZ-1121 (IN 4 POSITIONS)
CABLEFORM
NNR-A5018
PLW
PLA
PLL
1
PLT PLU PLV
X X
NNR-A5019 TERMINATED BETWEEN
PLM
PLB
X X
3 NNR-A979 PL2 & NNR-A980 PLW
A B
PLG
PLN
PLC
5
X X RIU PROCESSOR PCB

PLH
PLD
PLP
3
VIDEO SYNC SWITCHING BOARD NNR-A980
NNR-A979
4
5
PLR
PLE
PLJ
X
7 TERMINAL BLOCK
PLS
PLK
PLF
45-718-5135 (6 WAY)
8 X X
1 TB1 6
LABEL
CZZ-1128
ROW A VIEW IN DIRECTION OF ARROW B
VIEWS SHOWN WITH COVER REMOVED FOR CLARITY VIEW

NNR-1604 (IN 6 POSITIONS) CABLE CLAMPING BRACKET
NNR-1605
LOWER CABLE CLAMP

NNR-1603
LOWER CABLE CLAMP
NNR-1602 (IN 6 POSITIONS)
UNDERSIDE VIEW
Figure 2e - Radar Interswitch Unit (NNR-A55): Cable Access

COMPOSITE
12-CORE
RIU Mk VII TRANSMITTER

NNR-A55 CTX-A9
X SK1 - 6 SK7 - 12
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO 1
SK13 - 18 SK19 - 24 3 PHASE

SYNC SYNC SYNC 1 MAINS
3SKK
R
NOTE 1 CONTACTOR +VE 4
B
PLA-F PLL-0 3PLX CONTACTOR RTN 2
G
K 1 1 3
1 CAN HI
E 2 2 3 CORE
2 CAN LO
3 3
3 GND
NGE 4 4
5 5
6 6
OW 7 7 3PLB
EN 8 8
9 HEADING LINE
8 AZIMUTH
SW1 (+27V) 1 Bn
MOTOR START (+27V) 5 V
2PLB
3SKM
Bk
1
ON/OFF +27V 6
2 R
NEON SIGNAL 1
B
NEON RETURN 2
G
AZIMUTH 3
Y
FILTER HEADING LINE 4
W
0V 5
2 CORE L
MAINS INPUT N
E
12 CORE
CABLE
Figure 3e - Display to RIU to MkVII S-Band Transmitter: Typical System Configuration

COMPOSITE
12-CORE

NNR-A55 CTX-A8
X SK1 - 6 SK7 - 12
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO 1
1TB1
X SK13 - 18 SK19 - 24
SYNC SYNC SYNC 1 5
6
MOTOR 0V
7
8
NOTE 1 1
PLA-F PLL-0 3PLX 2
MOTOR +ve 26V
CK 1 1 3
1 CAN HI
TE 2 2 4
2 CAN LO
E 3 3
3 GND
NGE 4 4
5 5 3SKK
6 6 MOTOR START (+27V) 1
LOW 7 7 3PLB MOTOR START RTN 2
EN 8 8
9 HEADING LINE
8 AZIMUTH 3SKM
+27V 6
NEON SIGNAL 1
NEON RETURN 2
AZIMUTH 3
2PLB HEADING LINE 4
1 0V 5
ON/OFF
2
FILTER 12 CORE
SMALL
2 CORE L CABLE
MAINS INPUT N
E
Figure 4e - Display to RIU to MkVII X-Band Transmitter (Low Speed): Typical System Configuration
8
COMPOSITE
12-CORE

NNR-A55 CTX-A8
OAX SK1 - 6 SK7 - 12

VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO 1
1TB1
AX SK13 - 18 SK19 - 24
SYNC SYNC SYNC 1 5
6
MOTOR 0V
NOTE 1 7
PLA-F PLL-0 3PLX
ACK 1 1 8
1 CAN HI
HITE 2 2
2 CAN LO 1
UE 3 3
3 GND
RANGE 4 4
ED 5 5 2
6 6 MOTOR +ve 36V
ELLOW 7 7 3PLB 3
REEN 8 8
9 HEADING LINE 4
8 AZIMUTH
3SKK
2PLB MOTOR START (+27V) 1

MOTOR START RTN 2
1
ON/OFF
2
3SKM
+27V 6
FILTER NEON SIGNAL 1
NEON RETURN 2
2 CORE L AZIMUTH 3
MAINS INPUT N HEADING LINE 4
E 0V 5
25 CORE
CABLE
Figure 5e - Display to RIU to MkVII X-Band Transmitter (High Speed): Typical System Configuration
8
KH 2020
Chap 8f
CHAPTER 8F
ERGOPOD
INTRODUCTION INSTALLATION
1 This Chapter provides information on the Ergopod for INSTALLATION OF ERGOPOD UNIT
use with Nucleus Display equipment.
5 The Ergopod is designed to be fitted to the end of a
2 Two types of Ergopod are available, these are: chair arm, using a mounting bracket. The dimensions
(1) ERGOPOD - Right-hand (NNR-A18). and fixing holes for both left-hand and right-hand mounting
brackets are shown in Figure 2f.
(2) ERGOPOD - Left-hand (NNR-A18-2).
3 Figure 1f below shows a right-hand Ergopod.
345
190 110
2 HOLES DIA 6
40
24
50
27.5
15.5
2 SLOTS AS FIG 1
19
SLOT AS FIG 2 29.5
13.5
20
15
CHAMFER 5x5 6
SLOT AS FIG 3
23 10
16
11.5 FULL RAD 5 FULL RAD
8 FULL RAD BOTH ENDS BOTH ENDS
BOTH ENDS
4
8
3
6
3
6
FIG 1 FIG 2 FIG 3

LEFT-HAND MOUNTING BRACKET
345
110.0 190
2 HOLES DIA 6
40
Figure 1f - Typical Ergopod

24
50
27.5
15.5
4 If more than one display is to be controlled by the 19

2 SLOTS AS FIG1
Ergopod, an Ergopod Controller is also required. Four 29.5 SLOT AS FIG 2
types of controller kits are available:

13.5
20
15
(1) Ergopod Controller Unit (NNR-A645-2) 6 SLOT AS FIG 3

CHAMFER 5x5
(2) Ergopod Controller Kit for 5000 Series Display

(NNR-A887-2)
23 10
16
11.5 FULL RAD 5 FULL RAD
8 FULL RAD BOTH ENDS BOTH ENDS
8
4
BOTH ENDS
3
6
6
3
(3) Ergopod Controller Kit for 6000 Series Display FIG 1 FIG 2 FIG 3
(NNR-A887-12)
RIGHT-HAND MOUNTING BRACKET
(4) Ergopod Controller Kit for Nucleus 3 Split CD-4662
Processor (NNR-A887-22)
Figure 2f - Ergopod Mounting Brackets: Dimensions
6
Ensure that all connections are made correctly. Refer
to paragraphs 12 to 18 For details.

KH 2010
Introduction
INSTALLATION OF CONTROLLER UNIT
SW2 No.3 SW2 No.4 No. of Shared
Ergopod Controller Unit Displays
7 The Controller Unit comprises the Ergopod Controller ON OFF 2

PCB, which is contained within a unit. The dimensions
OFF ON 3
of the Ergopod Controller unit are shown in Figure 3f. The
unit is designed to be bolted to a bulkhead or console. A ON ON 4
bracket is provided at either end of the unit, for this purpose.
257 mm 11 The switch locations are shown in Figure 4f.
Connections
12 Display connection cables are 3-core cables
Dia. 5 mm
98 mm 146 mm Ergopod Controller to Ergopod

13 Connections between the Ergopod and the Controller
are via PL7 POD/422.
14 It has three Klippon connectors fitted as standard,
these are:
240 mm
(1) Direct Nucleus 2 Radar Connection
60 mm 35 mm (2) ECDIS Connection
55 mm
15 mm (3) Ergopod Controller Connection (4-Way):
CD-4507
Connector Wire Colour

Figure 3f - Ergopod Controller Unit: Dimensions
PL7, Pin1 (+5V) Blue
Link and Switch Settings PL7, Pin 2 (+12V) Yellow
Link Settings PL7, Pin 3 (RXD) Brown

PL7, Pin 4 (0V) Orange & Green
8 The Ergopod Controller has two links LK1 and LK2,
which are set according to the output required from the
PCB, as follows: Master Ergopod Controller to Slave Ergopod Controller
15 The Ergopod Controllers communicate via NMEA
Interface -A6/B6/C6 (Serial Data Output Port) and
Link Setting Function Display 6 - MFD) (Serial Data Output Port). Connections are
as follows:
LK1 A +5V Pod Electronics
B RS422 Serial Out
Master Controller Slave Controller
LK2 A +12V Key Backlight
B RS422 Serial Out PL6, B6 Rx Data PL5, Pin8 Tx Data
PL6, A6 Rx Data PL5, Pin6 Tx Data
Switch Settings PL5, Pin 8 Tx Data PL6, B6 Rx Data
9 Ensure that SW1 on the Ergopod Controller is set to PL5, Pin 6 Tx Data PL6, A6 Rx Data
the total number displays (including any shared
displays) connected to the Ergopod MISC PCB.
NOTE:
10 Settings for switch SW2 are as follows: To enable the Ergopod Controllers to communicate, data
(1) SW2 No.1 - ON = Dual Ergopods must go OUT of one controller and IN to the other.
(2) SW2 No.2 - ON = Master MISC PCB Dual Ergopod Controller Settings
OFF = Slave MISC PCB
16 Ensure that the correct software is loaded, press F10
(3) SW2 No.3 & 4 - Number of shared displays (see to reset the Controller. Using Sys_mon2 to interrogate
Table below). the Controller, check that the following message is displayed
by the Master Controller:
-$ZM1833 MISC Ergopod Controller I/F V1.1$
SW2 No.3 SW2 No.4 No. of Shared - 2 Displays has been set
Displays
- Dual Ergopods setting selected , "pod comms
OFF OFF 1
via display 6 port
- This controller set as Master
- Dual Ergopod with *shared displays
Jul 98 2 Original
KH 2010
Introduction
17 Check that the following message is displayed by the FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Slave Ergopod Controller:
- $ZM1833 MISC Ergopod Controller I/F V1.1$ 19 The Ergopod is designed to provide remote control of
- 2 Displays has been set up to six displays. Typical configurations are shown in
- Dual Ergopods setting selected, "pod comms Figures 5f, and 6f.
via display 6 port
-This controller set as Slave 20 For information on the control facilities provided, refer
- Dual Ergopod with *Shared displays to paragraph 24 - Operating Information
21 The Ergopod Controller PCB is fitted with LED
NOTE: indicators which provide the following indications:
Ensure that both messages report the correct software
version.
Ergopod Controller to Display(s) LED Function

18 The connections between the Ergopod and the D1 Flashes at 1Hzto indicate correct
displays are as follows: operation of software.
D5, D12, D16, D18, Serial Inputs
D20
Display Controller Connections D23 Flash Programming
Display 1 PL2, Pin 1 (Display 1 VIN3) D31, D32, D33, D34, Power Supply from Displays 1 to 6
PL2, Pin 2 (Display 1 GND) D35, D36 respectively.
PL2, Pin 3 (Display 1 Data)
Display 2 PL2, Pin 4 (Display 2 VIN3) 22 When the Ergopod is used in the "Dual Ergopod"
PL2, Pin 5 (Display 2 GND) mode, up to 5 displays can be connected to a single
PL2, Pin 6 (Display 2 Data) Ergopod controller. The Display connected to PL2 on the
Display 3 PL4, Pin 1 (Display 3 VIN3)
PCB is the default display when power is switched on.
PL4, Pin 2 (Display 1 GND) NOTE:
The Slave Ergopod Controller also uses the display
Display 4 PL4, Pin 4 (Display 2 VIN3) connected to PL2 on the PCB as the default display when
PL4, Pin 5 (Display 2 GND) power is switched on, but will not take control until either
PL4, Pin 6 (Display 2 Data) the Master or Slave is moved on to another display.
PL5, Pin 2 (Display 1 GND) 23 The Ergopod Controller PCB requires a +12V power
PL5, Pin 4 (Display 1 Data) supply. The +12V supply is normally supplied via one
of the displays.
PL5, Pin 6 (Display 2 GND) NOTE:
If only one display is supplying +12V to an Ergopod
controller PCB, then switching off this display will disable
both the Ergopod and the associated controller.
Display Nucleus Display Connections
Nucleus 3 Radar Input PCB:

PLN, Pin 4 (+12V)
PLN, Pin 3 (0V)
PLN, Pin 1 (Data RS232)
Nucleus 5000 ECDIS ERGO-POD Pin 4 (+12V)
ERGO-POD Pin 3 (0V)
ERGO-POD Pin 1 (Data RS232)
Nucleus 6000 ECDIS To 9-Way D-Type Connector on
front of processor, via adapter
cable NNR-A887:
D Pin 5 (0V)
D Pin 2 (Data RS232)
Original 3 Jul 98
KH 2020
Chap 8f
B A B A D35 D36
A9
87 4 3 2 1 D1
SW1
SW2
65
LK1 LK2
CB
43
F0 12
ED
ON
PL7 PL5
D31 POD/422 5 ( SLAB ) 6 ( MFD )
D32
D33
D34
PL2 PL4
1 2 3 4
D5 DISPLAY DISPLAY
D8
PL3
D12
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 A3 B3 C3
D20 NMEA INTERFACE
D18
PL6
D16
A4 B4 C4 A5 B5 C5 A6 B6 C6
PL1
PL8
NMEA INTERFACE
D23
NNR-A589
Download/
diagnostics
CD-4508
Figure 4f - Ergopod Controller (NNR-A645-2): Link and Switch Locations

Nucleus 2 5000
ERGOPOD Chair Unit
Radar Display
Original
Righthand Pod = NNR-A18
(shown)
Lefthand Pod = NNR-A18-2
INPUT PCB
(NNR-A346)
POWER SUPPLY
(45-677-114)
Connector from ERGOPOD (6-way)

Connects to PLN (Printer) on
Nucleus Radar Input PCB
8f.5
Nucleus 5000
PLN Input PCB
Figure 5f - Single Ergopod Connected to a Nucleus 5000 Display

Detail of Ergopod End Connector
1
Signal 2 Brown
Ground 3 Orange & Green
12V DC 4 Yellow
5V DC 5 Blue
6
CD-4509
May 01
Chap 8f
KH 2020
May 01
Chap 8f
KH 2020
Display under control

at Power ON
(Connect to PL2 DISPLAY 1)
Display Display Display

(1) (2) (3)
y Dis
pla pla
Dis 5) (4) y
(
8f.6
SW1 SW2
87 4 3 2 1
A9
65
43
B C DE
21 ON
0F
1 2 3 4
Figure 6f - Single Ergopod Connected to Five Displays

CD-4563
Original
Original
Display under control by "Master" at Power ON
(Connect to PL2 DISPLAY 1)
"Slave" will also use this display as default at Power ON
but will not have control until one of the "Pods" moves position
d
opo trol
v e Erg r con
o
Sla see play
t
i l no dis
w l this
"Shared" "Shared" "Shared"
display display display
/
cal " "Sh
a
"Lo cated dis red"
di pla
De isplay y
d
Power (2 core)
8f.7
to Slave PCB
SW1 SW2 SW1 SW2

A9
87 4 3 2 1
A9
87 4 3 2 1
Slave Ergopod Controller
65
65
43
43
B C DE
B C DE
21 ON 21 ON
0F 0F
SW1 (Hex switch)
Set to total number of displays
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 connected to the PCB.
SW2 (DIL switch)
Set 1 to ON (Dual Ergopod)
Figure 7f - Dual Ergopod Connected to Five Displays

Set 2 to OFF (Slave Ergopod)
Set 3 & 4 to ON (Four shared displays)
2 x PCB Interconnection wires (See additional sheet for connections details)
Master Slave
Ergopod Ergopod
CD-4564
May 01
Chap 8f
KH 2020
KH 2020
Chap 8f
OPERATION (2) Pressing the plus (+) button increases the range
displayed on the screen.
24 The ERGOPOD provides the same basic operating

facilities as the trackerball and three pushbuttons on Clutter ( · ) Pushbutton
the Nucleus Displays. In addition, the Ergopod is equipped
30 The Clutter pushbutton provides a short-cut to activate
with a plus (+) and minus (-) range button, a Clutter button
the Gain/Sea/Rain box.
and a screen select button (located on the underside of the
main pushbutton area above the trackerball). 31 Pressing the clutter ( · ) pushbutton, highlights the
25 The ERGOPOD can be used ‘Stand-alone’ or in Dual Gain/Sea/Rain boxes, which displays the current
configuration with two Ergopods configured as Master setting of the Gain, Sea and Rain controls.
and Slave with shared displays. (1) Holding down the left pushbutton and moving the
trackerball through the north/south axis,
PUSHBUTTONS increases/decreases the Gain setting.
(2) Holding down the middle pushbutton and moving
the trackerball through the north/south axis,
increases/decreases the Sea clutter level.
TRACKERBALL Rapidly moving the trackerball in the south axis
enables the Auto Sea mode. The Auto Sea mode
is disabled by rapidly moving the trackerball in the
north axis.
(3) Holding down the right pushbutton and moving the
trackerball through the north/south axis,
increases/decreases the Rain setting.
Screen Select Pushbutton

32 The Screen Select pushbutton is located on the
underside of the main pushbutton area, above the
trackerball. This pushbutton can be used, where two
Figure 8f - Ergopod Controls Ergopods are used, to select between the available screen
displays. The Ergopod Symbol will be displayed at the
bottom of the selected screen display.
CONTROLS NOTE:
The Screen Select pushbutton has no function when a single
Function Pushbuttons Ergopod is used.
26 The 3 Main pushbuttons are used to activate/select a Trackerball

particular function. On-screen guidance as to which
button to press is given in the Information Boxes located in 33 The Trackerball is used to position the cursor on the
the lower portion of the screen display. screen, near to or on the function to be activated and
27 When a function is selected (e.g. Range/Rings) the to change parameters once a function is activated.
Information box displays similar data to that shown in
the pop-down (information boxes) which appear below the SHARED DISPLAY OPERATION
selected function box. If all pushbutton activities are the
same, a red box appears on the display containing the 34 Up to a maximum of 5 displays can be used in in the
legend: "Dual Ergopod" mode. These may be any combination
of Nucleus Radar and ECDIS displays.
35 If up to a maximum of 3 shared displays are used in the
USE ANY KEY system, the Screen Select pushbutton can be held
down in conjunction with the left, middle or right pushbuttons
CD-1 9 6 4 to select the required screen display.
28 36 When two Ergopods are used in Master/Slave

A facility which has been previously activated, such as configuration, to select between the available screen
EBL, is re-selected by positioning the cursor in close displays. Two coloured Ergopod symbols are used; Red for
proximity to the required facility and pressing the centre the Master Ergopod and Green for the Slave.
pushbutton. 37 With the Master/Slave configuration, the Master
Ergopod can take control of a shared display and the
Range (-) & (+) Pushbuttons Slave control is automatically moved to the next available
display.
29 The Range - and + pushbuttons provide a short-cut to
that Range Function on a Nucleus Display. NOTE:
(1) Pressing the minus (-) button decreases the range Once a display has been selected for control by the Master
Ergopod, it cannot be re-selected for control by the Slave
displayed on the screen. Ergopod until control of that display has been relinquished
by the Master Ergopod.

KH 2020
Index
System Info Index D

Data Format 8-3
A DC Regulators 8-4
Access for Cabling 8-3 Desktop Control Pod 8 - 19
adar 1 and/or Radar 2 Input 8 - 14 Diagnostic Maintenance 8 - 7,8 - 20
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 8-3 DIAGNOSTICS 7 - 10
American Practical Navigator 8-3 Display A Relays 8-4
ANTENNA TURNING MECHANISM 7-8 Display B Relays 8-4
Azimuth Input Amplitud 8 - 18 Display Characteristics 8-1
Azimuth Input Noise Suppression 8 - 18 DISPLAY CONNECTION SELECTOR 8-5
Azimuth Inputs 8 - 13 Display Control Selector 8-4
Azimuth Link And Switch Settings For Radar 2 8 - 14 Display ON-OFF Sounder 8-1
Azimuth Selection 8 - 18 Divide By 4 PCB 8 - 19
Azimuth Types 8-7 Divide by Four Wiring Diagram 8 - 29
Divide by Four PCB 8 - 11,8 - 29
B Divide By Four PCB 8 - 4,8 - 10,8 - 11
Brightness 8 - 16 DPT Depth 8-5
brightness and contrast 8-3 Dual Display Interswitch Unit 8-4
BRIGHTNESS control 8 - 15 Dual Display Interswitch Unit Parts List 8-8
Buffer Amplifiers 8 - 21 Dual Interswitch PCB 8-4
Buffer Amplifier Installation 8 - 21 Dual interswitch Unit 8-1
Buffer Amplifiers 75 Ohm 8 - 21
Buffer Amplifiers 93 Ohm 8 - 21
E
Earthing 8-3
C Electrical Connections 8 - 2,8 - 3
Cable Connections 8-2 Electronic Industries Association Standards (EIA) 8 - 3
Cable Installation 8-3 External cables 7-4
Cable Screen 8-3 External Connections To Interfaces 8 - 12
Cable Screens 8-2
Change Transmitter Control 8-6
F
Checks After Set Up 8-3 Failure Messages 7 - 10
Clock Phase 8 - 16 Fault diagnosis algorithms 7 - 10
Colour Temperature 8 - 16 fault finding 8 - 7,8 - 20,8 - 9
Commissioning 8 - 2,8 - 4 Fault Finding Algorithm 8 - 20
Compass PCB Switch Settings 8 - 17 Flat Panel Display 8-2
Compass Safe Distances 8-1 Flat Panel Display (NNR-A69): Interconnections Diagram
8-9
Connections Required For Nucleus 6000 Series 8 - 11
Flat Panel Display (NNR-A70): Interconnections Diagram
Connections Required for Nucleus split 6000a Series 8 - 11 8 - 10
Contrast 8 - 16 Flat Panel Display System: Parts List 8 - 21
CONTRAST control 8 - 15 Flat Panel Screen Display: Fault Finding Algorithm 8 - 20
Control PCB 7-4 Front Panel Control and Indicators 8 - 15
Control PCB CTX_A24 7-4 FUNCTION OF LINKS 8 - 18
Control Signals 8-5
G
Control Switches 8-2
Control Switches 8-2 General Format 8-3
Controls and Indicators 8 - 4,8 - 15 GGA Global Positioning System Fix Data 8-6
Converters for Low Ratio Compass PCB 8 - 17
Original i May 01
KH 2020
Index
H Lock Delay (Sync Delay) 8 - 18

LOG RECEIVER 7-8
HDT 8-7
Log Receiver Assembly CTX-A297 7-8
Heading Line 8 - 18
Low Ratio Compass Kit 8 - 4,8 - 23
Heading Line Correction 8 - 17
Low Ratio Compass PCB 8 - 11,8 - 17,8 - 19
Heading Line Correction for 8 - 16
Low Ratio Compass PCB 8-7
Heading Line Inputs 8 - 15
Heading Line Types 8-7 M
Horizontal Position 8 - 16
Master/ Slave Adapter PCB 8 - 19
Horizontal Size 8 - 16
Master/Slave Adapter Kit 8-4
I Master/Slave Adapter PCB 8 - 11
Master/Slave Interface PCB 8 - 10,8 - 11,8 - 16,8 - 18,8 - 19
Indicators 7 - 11,8 - 4
Master/Slave Interface PCB: Link Locations 8 - 16
Input Signals 8-2
Master/Slave Kit 8 - 4,8 - 27
Installation 8 - 1,8 - 2
Master/Slave Kit Wiring Diagram 8 - 27
Installation Of Interfaces 8-7
Master/Slave Synchro Kit 8 - 4,8 - 25
Installation Requirements 8-2
Master/Slave Synchro PCB 8 - 10,8 - 11,8 - 19
installing the Interswitch Unit 8-1
Master/Slave Synchro PCB: Link Locations 8 - 10
Installing the RIU 8-3
MkVI S-Band Transceiver 7-3
Interconnections to Display 8-3
MkVI Transceiver 7-1
Interconnections to Mk 5 Transceiver 8-3
MODE INFO Menu 8 - 17
Interface Box 8-4
Modulator PCB 7 - 19
Interface Control Document 8-3
Modulator Unit (A247/248) 7-6
Interface PCB HRC-A197 8 - 14
Monitor Parameter Adjustments 8-3
Interface Units/Kits Parts List 8 - 20
Interfaces Installation Details: 5000/Split 6000A 8-8 N
Interfaces Installation Details: 6000 Series 8-9
neon indicators 7-9
INTERFACING FOR THE LOW RATIO COMPASS &
MASTER/SLAVE INSTALLATIONS 8-4 NMEA COMMUNICATIONS SPECIFICATION 8-1
International Electrotechnical Commission 8-3 NMEA Port Listener Circuit 8-2
interswitch configuration 8-2 NMEA Port Talker Circuit 8-2
Interswitch Unit - Fault Finding Algorithm 8-7 Nucleus Display Settings - Commissioning 8 - 15
Interswitch Unit (Dimensions & Mounting) 8-1 NUCLEUS INTERFACING CHART 8-5
Interswitch Unit Links 8-2 Nucleus 7000 Flat Panel Display 8-1
Interswitch Unit Potentiometers 8-2 Nucleus 7000A 18-inch Display 8-1
interswitched installations 7-9 Nucleus 7000A 20.1-inch Display 8-1
Interswitching Configurations 8-3 NUCLEUS INTERFACING INSTRUCTIONS 8 - 13
L O
Language 8 - 16 On Screen Display (OSD) Facilities: Typical Screen
Displays 8 - 18
LETHAL VOLTAGES 7 - 16
ON/OFF Sounder (NNR-A65): Installation Diagra 8 - 11
Link & Switch Setting 8-4
On/Off Sounder Unit 8-2
Link And Switch Settings For Low Ratio Compass PCB8 - 17
ON/OFF Sounder Unit 8 - 19
Link And Switch Settings For Radar 2 8 - 14
On-Screen Adjustment Controls 8 - 15
Link Settings 8-2
On-Screen Adjustment Controls 8 - 15
Link Settings on Installation 8-2
On-screen Display (OSD) 8 - 15
Links And Switches 8 - 19
On-screen guidance 8 - 19
Links, Potentiometers & Switch Positions 8-8
Operating Instructions 8 - 15
Local Interswitch mode 8-5
May 01 ii Original
KH 2020
Index
Operation 8 - 2,8 - 5 Remote Trackerball (Desktop Control Pod) 8 - 19
OPTIONS FOR NUCLEUS 3 RADAR DISPLAYS 8 - 1 Remote Trackerball DIP Switch Settings 8-3
OPTIONS Menu 8 - 16 Remote Trackerball Unit (NNR-A10-3): Installation Diagram
8 - 13
OSD Ownship Data 8-8
Reserved characters 8-4
Other Ports Listener Circuit 8-2
RNN: Route message (NMEA version 1.5 compliant)8 - 8
P Routine field maintenance 7 - 11
RS232 Address 8 - 16
Parts 8 - 20
RSD Radar System Data 8-9
PARTS LIST 8 - 21
RTE 8 - 10
Phase Lock Loop (PLL) 8 - 18
Rx Monitor PCB 7 - 20
PICTURE Menu 8 - 16
Position of the ESU 8-1 S
Potentiometers 8 - 19,8 - 2
save the settings 8 - 16
Power On/Off 8 - 15,8 - 19
Select Data from other Transmitter 8-6
POWER ON/OFF switch 8 - 15
SERVICE Info Box 8 - 17
Power Supplies 8-1
Setting To Work 8-3
Power Supply PCB 7 - 21
SETTING TO WORK 8-3
Power Unit CAE-A202 7-3
Settings For Display System PCB 8 - 17
Pre-fitting Checks 8-7
Settings On System PCB 8 - 15
Pre-Installation Requirements 8-1
Setting-up the monitor 8-3
Pre-Requisites 7 - 10
Setting-up the Remote Trackerball 8-3
preset colour combinations 8 - 16
SETUP Menu 8 - 16
Pre-Switch On Checks 8-3
Signal Switching Relays 8-4
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 7 - 16
Soft Start Unit 7-1
PRFs 8-7
SOFT START UNIT 7-9
Processor Unit 8-2
Soft Start Unit 7-9
Prompt 8 - 16
Software Specification 8-3
Proprietary Format 8-4
Space Requirements 8 - 2,8 - 1
proprietary messages 8-4
Specifications 8-2
Pulse Inputs Up To 360 per Rev 8 - 14
Standard NMEA Messages 8-5
Q STANDBY Screen - Mimic Diagram 8-6
Status Circuit 8-5
Query Address Fields 8 - 14
SW1 and SW2 Settings 8 - 15
R Switches 8 - 19
Switches 8-4
Radar 1 8 - 16
Switching Control Circuit 8-5
Radar 1 And/or Radar 2 Inputs 8 - 14
Switching On 8-3
Radar 2 8 - 16
Sync Delay Pot (RV5) 8-3
Radar 2 input 8 - 10
Sync Pulse Circuit 8-5
Radar 2 Inputs 8 - 13
Sync Pulses 8-7
Radar Interswitch Unit (NNR-A55): Dimensions and
Mounting 8-2 Syncro & Resolver Azimuths 8 - 13
range index error 8-3 System Configurations 8-1
Receiver Monitor PCB (CTX-A252) 7-7
Relay Banks 8-4 T
Remote Mode 8-6 talker identifier 8-3
Remote Trackerball 8-2 Test Equipment 7 - 11
Remote Trackerball 8-1 Testing Procedure 8-1
Original iii May 01

KH 2020
Index
TRANSCEIVER 7-3
Transceiver Control Selector Switch 8-3
Transmitter Control Selector 8 - 4,8 - 6
trip unit reset button 7-1
TTM Target data 8 - 11
U
Upmast Transceiver Configuration 7-2
Upmast Transceiver: Module Locations 7 - 17
V
VBW Dual Ground / Water Speed (Doppler Log) 8 - 12
Vertical Position 8 - 16
Vertical Size 8 - 16
VHW Water Speed and Heading 8 - 13
Video 8-7
Video Amplitude Adjustment 8-3
Video and Sync connections 8 - 21
Video Signal Circuit 8-5
Video Switch Settings 8 - 15
VTG Actual Track and ground speed 8 - 14
W
Weight 8-1
WPL Way point Location 8 - 14
Z
ZDA Time and Date 8 - 14
ZZU: UTC Time (NMEA version 2.00 compliant) 8 - 14
May 01 iv Original
KH 2020
Contents
System Information Table of Contents

• FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 7.1
• MODULATOR 7.1
• LOG RECEIVER CTX-A297 7.3
• RF HEAD (NJRC Type) 7.4
• POWER SUPPLIES 7.4
• RECEIVER MONITOR 7.5
• TRANSMISSION MONITOR 7.5
• SPECIFICATION 7.5
• DIAGNOSTICS 7.5
• Prerequisites 7.5
• Failure Messages 7.5
• Test Equipment 7.5
• Fuses 7.6
• Indicators 7.6
• MAINTENANCE 7.11

• CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 7.13
• Functional Description 7.1
• Specification 7.3
• Diagnostics 7.3
• Pre-requisites 7.3
• Test Points 7.4
• Maintenance 7.8
• Preventive Maintenance 7.8
• Functional description 7.2
• Transceiver 7.3
• ANTENNA TURNING MECHANISM 7.8
• SOFT START UNIT CZZ-A14 (/2) 7.9
• DIAGNOSTICS 7.10
• Pre-Requisites 7.10
• Indicators 7.11
Original i May 01
KH 2020
Contents

• System DESCRIPTION 7.1
• Diagnostics 7.6
• PRE-REQUISITES 7.6
• FAILURE MESSAGES 7.6
• MAINTENANCE 7.25
• System Description 7.1
• Downmast Transceiver 7.3
• Specification 7.5
• Transmitter 7.5
• Receiver 7.5
• Diagnostics 7.6
• Pre-requisites 7.6
• Preparation for Fault Diagnosis 7.7
• Indicators, Test Points, Links and Switches (Figures 7e, 8e & 9e) 7.12
• Maintenance 7.18
• 3-Phase Transformer Kit

(6000 Displays) 8.1

• Testing Procedure 8.1
• Parts 8.1
• Interfacing For The Low Ratio Compass & Master/Slave

Installations 8.4
• Pre-fitting Checks 8.7
• Installation Of Interfaces 8.7
• Connections Required For Nucleus 6000 Series 8.11
• Connections Required for Nucleus split 6000a Series 8.11
• External Connections To Interfaces 8.12
• NUCLEUS INTERFACING INSTRUCTIONS 8.13
May 01 ii Original
KH 2020
Contents
• Nucleus Display Settings -

Commissioning 8.15
• FUNCTION OF LINKS 8.18
• Buffer Amplifiers (RAN-A23/* AND RAN-A29/*) 8.21

• INSTALLATION - Figure 7a 8.21
• VARIANTS TO RAN-A23 AND RAN-A29 8.21
• Scope of this Document 8.1
• General Purpose Serial inputs 8.1
• Dedicated Serial Inputs 8.2
• Serial Input Setup 8.2
• Software Specification 8.3
• Data Format 8.3
• Standard NMEA Messages 8.5
• Query Address Fields 8.14
• INSTALLATION 8.1
• Pre-Installation Requirements 8.1
• Installation Instructions 8.1
• Commissioning 8.2
• Control Switches (Figure 2) 8.2
• Operation 8.2
• Link Settings on Installation 8.2
• Setting To Work 8.3
• Checks After Set Up 8.3
• General 8.4
• Controls and Indicators 8.4
• Dual Interswitch PCB 8.4
• Operation 8.5
• Local Mode 8.5
• Transmitter Control Selector 8.6
• Diagnostic Maintenance 8.7
• PARTS 8.8
• Display Characteristics 8.1
• System Configurations 8.1
• Pre-Installation Requirements 8.1
Original iii May 01

KH 2020
Contents
• INSTALLATION 8.2
• Installation Requirements 8.2

• Input Signals 8.2
• Control Switches 8.2
• SETTING TO WORK 8.3
• General 8.3
• Setting-up the Monitor 8.3
• Setting-up the Remote Trackerball 8.3
• Operating Instructions 8.15
• Operating 8.15
• Power On/Off 8.15
• Power On/Off 8.19
• PARTS Lists 8.21
• PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 8.1
• Installation Requirements 8.1

• Installing the RIU 8.3
• Commissioning 8.4
• Indicators 8.4
• Link & Switch Settings 8.4
• ECDIS Output Configuration 8.14
• Operation 8.16
• PARTS 8.17
• Installation of Ergopod Unit 8.1

• Installation of Controller Unit 8.2
• Operation 8.8
May 01 iv Original
KH 2020
Contents
• controls 8.8
• Shared Display Operation 8.8
• Parts Lists 8.10
Original v May 01
KH 2020
Contents
Illustrations
• Figure 1a - MkIV Transceiver/Antenna Configurations 7.1
• Figure 2a - Modulator Control Block Diagram 7.2
• Figure 3a - Modulator Block Diagram 7.3
• Figure 4a - Log Receiver (CTX-A297) Block Diagram 7.3
• Figure 5a - X-Band RF Head (CTX-A230) 7.4
• Figure 6a - AC Power Unit (CTX-A131) 7.4
• Figure 7a - Transceiver Fault Diagnosis (No Sync) 7.7
• Figure 8a - Transceiver Fault Diagnosis (No Video) 7.8
• Figure 9a - Antenna Fault Diagnosis (No Azimuth) 7.9
• Figure 10a - Antenna Fault Diagnosis (No Heading Line) 7.10
• Figure 11a - Gearbox; Brush Replacement 7.12
• Figure 12a - Upmast X-Band Transceiver 7.14
• Figure 1b - Transceiver System Block Diagram 7.2
• Figure 2b - Transceiver Configuration 7.2
• Figure 3b - Transceiver Terminals PCB: Test Point Locations 7.4
• Figure 4b - Modulator PCB: Test Point Locations 7.4
• Figure 5b - Transceiver Fault Diagnosis (No Sync/No Video) 7.5
• Figure 6b - Antenna Fault Diagnosis (No Azimuth) 7.6
• Figure 7b - Antenna Fault Diagnosis (No Heading Line) 7.7
• Figure 8b - Turning Mechanism: Showing Location of Brushless Motor PCB (CAE-A30-8 only) 7.8
• Figure 9b - Transceiver Electronics Module: Access 7.9
• Figure 10b - Transceiver Electronics Module 7.10
• Figure 11b - Location of Motor Starter PCB (CAE-A30-7 only) 7.11
• Figure 12b - Transceiver Electronics Module (Top View) 7.12
• Figure 13b - Transceiver Electronics Module (From Base) 7.12
• Figure 14b - Modulator PCB Assembly and Magnetron Assembly 7.13
• Figure 15b - Receiver PCB and Low Noise Front Assembly 7.13
• Figure 16b - Performance Monitor Display 7.14
• Figure 1c - Upmast Transceiver: Block Diagram 7.1
• Figure 2c - Upmast Transceiver Configuration 7.2
• Figure 3c - Power Unit (CAE-A202): Block Diagram 7.3
• Figure 4c - Control PCB (CTX-A246): Block Diagram (1) 7.4
• Figure 5c - Control PCB (CTX-A246): Block Diagram (2) 7.5
May 01 vi Original
KH 2020
Contents
• Figure 6c - Modulator Unit (A247/248): Block Diagram 7.6
• Figure 7c - Receiver Monitor PCB (CTX-A252): Block Diagram 7.7
• Figure 8c - Log Receiver Assembly CTX-A297: Block Diagram 7.8
• Figure 9c - Soft Start Unit CZZ-A14/*: Block Diagram 7.9
• Figure 10c - Flowchart 1 7.12
• Figure 14c - Upmast Transceiver: Module Locations 7.17
• Figure 15c - Control PCB: Links, Switches, Potentiometers and Test Points 7.18
• Figure 16c - Modulator PCB - Switches & Test Points 7.19
• Figure 17c - Rx Monitor PCB - Links, Switches, Potentiometers & Test Points 7.20
• Figure 18c - Power Supply PCB - Links, Switches, Potentiometers & Test points 7.21
• Figure 1d - S-Band (CTX-A9): Block Diagram 7.1
• Figure 2d - Typical System Configuration S-Band (CTX-A9) 7.2
• Figure 3d - Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9): Module Locations 7.8
• Figure 4d - Electronics Unit (CTX-A370) Mounted in the Test Position 7.9
• Figure 5d - 25kW Modulator Power PCB (CTX-A345): Indicators and Test Point Locations 7.14
• Figure 6d - Tx Microcontroller PCB (CTX-A346): Indicators and Test Point Locations 7.15
• Figure 7d - Logarithmic Receiver PCB (CTX-A356): Link and Test Point Locations 7.16
• Figure 8d - MkVII S-Band Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9) and Turning Mechanism: Functional
Diagram Figure 8d
7.17
• Figure 9d - MkVII S-Band Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A9) and Turning Mechanism: Interconnection
Diagram Figure 9d
7.19
• Figure 10d - Flowchart (sheet 1 of 2) Figure 10d (Sheet 1)

7.21
• Figure 10d - Flowchart (sheet 2 of 2) Figure 10d (Sheet 2)

7.23
• Figure 1e - X-Band (CTX-A8): Block Diagram 7.1
• Figure 2e - Typical System Configuration X-Band (CTX-A8) 7.2
• Figure 3e - Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A8): Module Locations 7.8
• Figure 4e - Turning Mechanism (CAE-A30-5): Module Locations 7.9
• Figure 5e - Turning Mechanism (CAE-A30-6): Module Locations 7.10
• Figure 6e - Electronics Unit (CTX-A370) Mounted in the Test Position 7.11
• Figure 7e - 25kW Modulator Power PCB (CTX-A345): Indicators and Test Point Locations 7.15
Original vii May 01

KH 2020
Contents
• Figure 8e - Tx Microcontroller PCB (CTX-A346): Indicators and Test Point Locations 7.16
• Figure 9e - Logarithmic Receiver PCB (CTX-A356): Link and Test Point Locations 7.17
• Figure 10e - MkVII X-Band Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A8) and Turning Mechanism: Functional
Diagram Figure 10e
7.19
• Figure 11e - MkVII X-Band Downmast Transceiver (CTX-A8) and Turning Mechanism: Interconnection
Diagram Figure 11e
7.21
• Figure 12e - Flowchart (sheet 1 of 2) Figure 12e (Sheet 1)

7.23
• Figure 12e - Flowchart (sheet 2 of 2) Figure 12e (Sheet 2)

7.25
• Figure 1a - 3-Phase Transformer Kit (Installation Diagram) 8.2
• Figure 2a - 3-Phase Transformer Kit (Link Settings) 8.3
• Figure 3a - Interfaces Installation Details: 5000/Split 6000A 8.8
• Figure 4a - Interfaces Installation Details: 6000 Series 8.9
• Figure 5a– Master/Slave Synchro PCB: Link Locations 8.10
• Figure 6a - Master/Slave Interface PCB: Link Locations 8.16
• Figure 7a - Buffer Amplifier Installation Block Diagram 8.21
• Figure 8a - Low Ratio Compass Kit: Wiring Diagram Figure 8a

8.23
• Figure 9a - Master/Slave Synchro Kit: Wiring Diagram Figure 9a

8.25
• Figure 10a - Master/Slave Kit: Wiring Diagram Figure 10a

8.27
• Figure 11a - Divide by Four PCB: Wiring Diagram Figure 11a

8.29
• Figure 1. Other Ports Listener Circuit 8.2
• Figure 2. NMEA Port Listener Circuit 8.2
• Figure 3. NMEA Port Talker Circuit 8.2
• Figure 1b - Interswitch Unit (Dimensions & Mounting) 8.1
• Figure 2b - Interswitching Configurations 8.3
• Figure 3b - STANDBY Screen - Mimic Diagram (Nucleus 5000 & 6000) 8.6
• Figure 4b – Interswitch Unit - Fault Finding Algorithm 8.7
• Figure 5b - Dual Interswitch Unit PCB - Links, Potentiometers & Switch Positions 8.8
• Figure 3c - 20.1-inch Flat Panel Display (NNR-A69): Interconnections Diagram 8.9
• Figure 4c - 18-inch Flat Panel Display (NNR-A70): Interconnections Diagram 8.10
• Figure 5c - Flat Panel Display ON/OFF Sounder (NNR-A65): Installation Diagram 8.11
• Figure 7c - On Screen Display (OSD) Facilities: Typical Screen Displays 8.18
• Figure 8c - Flat Panel Screen Display: Fault Finding Algorithm 8.20
May 01 viii Original

KH 2020
Contents
• Figure 1c - Nucleus 7000 20.1-inch Flat Panel Display (NNR-A69): Installation Diagram Figure 1c
8.5
• Figure 2c - Nucleus 7000 18-inch Flat Panel Display (NNR-A70): Installation Diagram Figure 2c
8.7
• Figure 6c - Remote Trackerball Unit (NNR-A10-3): Installation Diagram Figure 6c

8.13
• Figure 1e - Radar Interswitch Unit (NNR-A55): Dimensions and Mounting 8.2
• Figure 7e - Video Sync Switching PCB (NNR-A979): Link Positions 8.13
• Figure 6e - Processor PCB (NNR-A980): Link and Switch Positions 8.13
• Figure 8e - Radar Interswitch Unit - Fault Finding Algorithm 8.16
• Figure 2e - Radar Interswitch Unit (NNR-A55): Cable Access 8.5
• Figure 3e - Display to RIU to MkVII S-Band Transmitter: Typical System Configuration 8.7
• Figure 4e - Display to RIU to MkVII X-Band Transmitter (Low Speed): Typical System Configuration 8.9
• Figure 5e - Display to RIU to MkVII X-Band Transmitter (High Speed): Typical System Configuration8.11
• Figure 1f - Typical Ergopod 8.1
• Figure 2f - Ergopod Mounting Brackets: Dimensions 8.1
• Figure 3f - Ergopod Controller Unit: Dimensions 8.2
• Figure 4f - Ergopod Controller (NNR-A645-2): Link and Switch Locations 8.4
• Figure 5f - Single Ergopod Connected to a Nucleus 5000 Display 8.5
• Figure 6f - Single Ergopod Connected to Five Displays 8.6
• Figure 7f - Dual Ergopod Connected to Five Displays 8.7
• Figure 8f - Ergopod Controls 8.8
• Figure 9f - Ergopod (NNR-A18/A18-2): Fault Finding Algorithm 8.9
Original ix May 01
KH 2010
Record Pages
HL 2 SKEW : ....................................................
LOG TYPE : ....................................................
GYRO TYPE : ....................................................
MAINS SUPPLY : ...................... VOLTS : .............. PHASE : .............. FREQ.

MONITOR
PERFORMANCE MONITOR:
TX : ........................................ nm
RX : ........................................ nm
INSTALLATION ENGINEER : ...............................................................
DATE : ...............................................................
LOCATION : ...............................................................
Oct 98 2 Issue 1
KH 2010
Record Pages
DEFAULT SETTINGS

SETTINGS SETTINGS
RANGE 6nm 0.25 - 96nm
RINGS (ON/OFF) ON ON/OFF
EBL1/EBL2 OFF ON/OFF
VRM1/VRM2 OFF ON/OFF
VECTOR TIME 15min 1 - 30min
VECTOR MODE NORM NORM/NORM

REVERSED
DAY/NIGHT DAY DAY/NIGHT
TRAILS ON/OFF ON ON/OFF
TRAILS TIME 3min 0.75 - 99min
AZIMUTH MODE N. UP N. UP/C. UP/

HEAD UP
MEDIUM PULSE 3nm Not Adjustable
LONG PULSE 48nm Not Adjustable
PULSE STATUS Normal Down/Normal/

Up
HISTORY OFF ON/OFF
STABILISATION EXT SEA/MANUAL/EXT
MOTION MODE RELATIVE R, T or CD
SEA CONTROL 0 0 - 9 or A
RAIN CONTROL 0 0-9
Issue 1 3 Oct 98
KH 2010
Record Pages

SETTINGS SETTINGS
GAIN CONTROL 6.5 0-9
CURSOR MODE Range/Bearing Range/Bearing

or TCPA
CURSOR PARKING LOW LOW/HIGH
ENHANCE NORM NORM/ENH
CORRELATION IR OFF, IR or SC/SC
CPA 1nm 0.1 - 6nm
TCPA 15min 1 - 60min
CONTRAST 2/3 of Setting 0 to Maximum
BRILLIANCE 1/3 of Setting 0 to Maximum
LEVELS Maximum 0 to Maximum
SPEED INPUT LOG LOG, Man or Dop
Oct 98 4 Issue 1

KH2020 Sys Manual Nuc 3

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

KH2020 Sys Manual Nuc 3

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SYSTEM HANDBOOK

Nucleus 3 Software Version 1.0x

Registered Office:765 Finchley Road, London NW11 8DS

EQUIPMENT IMO REGULATION(S) IEC STANDARD(S)

Radar IMO A.477(XII) IEC 936.1988

ã Copyright Kelvin Hughes Ltd. 2001

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be

Technical details contained in this publication are subject to

May 01 iii Original1

PINCH THE NOSE

PULSE PRESENT PULSE ABSENT

HEART HAS STOPPED BEATING

ONE FIRST AIDER

One conducts chest

Check heart beat after first five

Keep casualty at rest. Remove on a stretcher.

MEDICAL ASSISTANCE MAY BE OBTAINED ON / AT...............................

ANTENNA RADIATION HAZARD

1.3m (X-Band) Antenna: 3.0 metres

The display is to be switched OFF and ON again to reset the Processor.

Original vii May 01

HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC-SENSITIVE SEMICONDUCTOR

Persons removing sub-units from an equipment containing these devices must be

Outer clothing worn must be unable to generate static charges.

Fit new devices in a special handling area.

For detailed information, refer to IEC Standard IEC 61340-5-1:1998 or other

Original viii May 01

ACQ Acquire RADAR Radio Detection And Ranging

FTC Fast Time Constant

GCGA Graphics Control Gate Array

NMEA National Maritime Equipment

PCB Printed Circuit Board

CHAPTER 2A - RADAR PLOTTING AIDS - EPA (As Required)

CHAPTER 3 - INTERPRETING THE DISPLAY & SART OPERATION

INSTALLATION & COMMISSIONING

CHAPTER 5 - DISPLAY COMMISSIONING & DEFAULT SETTINGS

CHAPTER 8A - SYSTEM OPTIONS (Where Fitted)

1 This section provides an introduction to the Nucleus 3 PLOTTING AIDS

Heading Line Parallel Index Lines

Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (ARPA)

DISPLAY SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

5000 Series 6000 Series 7000 Series

660mm rectangular colour CRT with B22 phosphor. *

18-inch TFT LCD Colour Flat Panel *

Low flicker raster presentation 1024 line, 80Hz interlaced. * *

Zoned operational data/control fields. * * *

Activ e picture size:1280x1024 pixels. *

Display controls minimised by use of a trackerball and three * * *

Day/Night operation optimised by colour selection. * * *

Video Processing Re-timed processed multi-level video. Multi-plane recycled

IEC 1162-2 High Speed Serial Gyro Interface.

5000 Series 6000 Series 7000 Series

Lat/Lon Readout of Ownship’s lat/lon and cursor range/ bearing

Range Variable Range

Bearing Data Bearing Scale: Electronically generated 1°, 5°, and

Parallel Index: Four Navigation Lines.

Mapping Facilities 350Kbytes internal memory * * *

True Map positioning facility, via position fixing input from * * *

Power Supplies 110V nominal, 220V nominal (50-60Hz) - Single Phase.

Display power source for 10kW MkIV transceivers with up

Power corruption protected default parameters. * * *

5000 Series 6000 Series 7000 Series

1 x NMEA Output RS422 * * *

Inputs: NMEA 0183/ IEC 61162-1 E2: * * *